diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 6422-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 229353 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 6422-h/6422-h.htm | 11292 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 6422.txt | 10387 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 6422.zip | bin | 0 -> 221976 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/cpsng10.txt | 10037 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/cpsng10.zip | bin | 0 -> 221193 bytes |
9 files changed, 31732 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/6422-h.zip b/6422-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..df73660 --- /dev/null +++ b/6422-h.zip diff --git a/6422-h/6422-h.htm b/6422-h/6422-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..20488b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/6422-h/6422-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,11292 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="us-ascii"?> + +<!DOCTYPE html + PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd" > + +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" lang="en"> + <head> + <title> + Captain Singleton, by Daniel Defoe + </title> + <style type="text/css" xml:space="preserve"> + + body { margin:5%; background:#faebd0; text-align:justify} + P { text-indent: 1em; margin-top: .25em; margin-bottom: .25em; } + H1,H2,H3,H4,H5,H6 { text-align: center; margin-left: 15%; margin-right: 15%; } + hr { width: 50%; text-align: center;} + .foot { margin-left: 20%; margin-right: 20%; text-align: justify; text-indent: -3em; font-size: 90%; } + blockquote {font-size: 97%; font-style: italic; margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%;} + .mynote {background-color: #DDE; color: #000; padding: .5em; margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 95%;} + .toc { margin-left: 10%; margin-bottom: .75em;} + .toc2 { margin-left: 20%;} + div.fig { display:block; margin:0 auto; text-align:center; } + div.middle { margin-left: 20%; margin-right: 20%; text-align: justify; } + .figleft {float: left; margin-left: 0%; margin-right: 1%;} + .figright {float: right; margin-right: 0%; margin-left: 1%;} + .pagenum {display:inline; font-size: 70%; font-style:normal; + margin: 0; padding: 0; position: absolute; right: 1%; + text-align: right;} + .side { float: right; font-size: 75%; width: 25%; padding-left: 0.8em; + border-left: dashed thin; margin-left: 0.8em; text-align: left; + text-indent: 0; font-weight: bold; font-style: italic; + font-weight: bold; color: black; background: #eeeeee; border: solid 1px;} + pre { font-style: italic; font-size: 90%; margin-left: 10%;} + +</style> + </head> + <body> + + +<pre> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Life, Adventures and Piracies of the +Famous Captain Singleton, by Daniel Defoe + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Life, Adventures and Piracies of the Famous Captain Singleton + +Author: Daniel Defoe + +Commentator: Edward Garnett + + +Release Date: September, 2004 [EBook #6422] +This file was first posted on December 10, 2002 +Last Updated: June 20, 2013 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK CAPTAIN SINGLETON *** + + + + +Text file produced by Tom Allen, Charles Franks and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team + +HTML file produced by David Widger + + + + +</pre> + + <div style="height: 8em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h1> + CAPTAIN SINGLETON + </h1> + <h2> + By Daniel Defoe + </h2> + <p> + <br /> + </p> + <h4> + With An Introduction By Edward Garnett + </h4> + <p> + <br /> <br /> + </p> + <h5> + [Transcriber's Note: In the print copy, the following words and those of<br /> + the title page are written in intricate, illuminated calligraphy.] <br /> + <br /> A TALE WHICH HOLDETH CHILDREN FROM PLAY AND OLD MEN FROM THE CHIMNEY + CORNER. <br /> SIR PHILIP SIDNEY + </h5> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <p> + <b>CONTENTS</b> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2H_PREF"> PREFACE </a> + </p> + <p class="toc"> + <a href="#link2H_4_0002"> THE LIFE, ADVENTURES, AND PIRACIES OF CAPTAIN + SINGLETON </a> + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2H_PREF" id="link2H_PREF"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + PREFACE + </h2> + <p> + That all Defoe's novels, with the exception of "Robinson Crusoe," should + have been covered with the dust of neglect for many generations, is a + plain proof of how much fashions in taste affect the popularity of the + British classics. It is true that three generations or so ago, Defoe's + works were edited by both Sir Walter Scott and Hazlitt, and that this + masterly piece of realism, "Captain Singleton," was reprinted a few years + back in "The Camelot Classics," but it is safe to say that out of every + thousand readers of "Robinson Crusoe" only one or two will have even heard + of the "Memoirs of a Cavalier," "Colonel Jack," "Moll Flanders," or + "Captain Singleton." It is indeed distressing to think that while many + scores of thousands of copies of Lord Lytton's flashy romance, "Paul + Clifford," have been devoured by the public, "Captain Singleton" has + remained unread and almost forgotten. But the explanation is simple. + Defoe's plain and homely realism soon grew to be thought vulgar by people + who themselves aspired to be refined and genteel. The rapid spread of + popular education, in the middle of last century, was responsible for a + great many aberrations of taste, and the works of the two most English of + Englishmen, Defoe and Hogarth, were judged to be hardly fitting for polite + society, as we may see from Lamb's Essay on Hogarth, and from an early + edition of Chambers's "Cyclopaedia of English Literature" (1843), where we + are told: "Nor is it needful to show how elegant and reflective + literature, especially, tends to moralise, to soften, and to adorn the + soul and life of man." "Unfortunately the taste or <i>circumstances of + Defoe led him mostly into low life</i>, and his characters are such <i>as + we cannot sympathise with</i>. The whole arcana of roguery and villany + seems to have been open to him.... It might be thought that the good taste + which led Defoe to write in a style of such pure and unpretending English, + instead of the inflated manner of vulgar writers, <i>would have dictated a + more careful selection of his subjects</i>, and kept him from wandering so + frequently into the low and disgusting purlieus of vice. But this moral + and tasteful discrimination seems to have been wholly wanting," &c. + The 'forties were the days when critics still talked learnedly of the + "noble style," &c., "the vulgar," of "sinking" or "rising" with "the + subject," the days when Books of Beauty were in fashion, and Rembrandt's + choice of beggars, wrinkled faces and grey hairs, for his favourite + subjects seemed a low and reprehensible taste in "high art." Though + critics to-day still ingenuously confound an artist's subject with his + treatment of it, and prefer scenes of life to be idealised rather than + realised by writers, we have advanced a little since the days of the poet + Montgomery, and it would be difficult now to find anybody writing so + confidently—"Unfortunately the taste or circumstances of Defoe led + him mostly into low life," however much the critic might believe it. But + let us glance at a few passages in "Captain Singleton," which may show us + why Defoe excels as a realist, and why his descriptions of "low life" are + artistically as perfect as any descriptions of "higher life" in the works + of the English novelists. Take the following description of kidnapping:— + </p> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + "The woman pretending to take me up in her arms and kiss me, and + play with me, draws the girl a good way from the house, till at + last she makes a fine story to the girl, and bids her go back to + the maid, and tell her where she was with the child; that a + gentlewoman had taken a fancy to the child and was kissing it, but + she should not be frightened, or to that purpose; for they were + but just there; and so while the girl went, she carried me quite + away.—Page 2. +</pre> + <p> + Now here, in a single sentence, Defoe catches for us the whole soul and + character of the situation. It <i>seems</i> very simple, but it sums up + marvellously an exact observation and knowledge of the arts of the gipsy + child-stealer, of her cunning flattery and brassy boldness, and we can see + the simple little girl running back to the house to tell the nurse that a + fine lady was kissing the child, and had told her to tell where they were + and she should not be frightened, &c.; and this picture again calls up + the hue and cry after the kidnappers and the fruitless hopes of the + parents. In a word, Defoe has condensed in the eight simple lines of his + little scene all that is essential to its living truth; and let the young + writer note that it is ever the sign of the master to do in three words, + or with three strokes, what the ordinary artist does in thirty. Defoe's + imagination is so extraordinarily comprehensive in picking out just those + little matter-of-fact details that suggest all the other aspects, and that + emphasise the character of the scene or situation, that he makes us + believe in the actuality of whatever he is describing. So real, so living + in every detail is this apocryphal narrative, in "Captain Singleton," of + the crossing of Africa by a body of marooned sailors from the coast of + Mozambique to the Gold Coast, that one would firmly believe Defoe was + committing to writing the verbal narrative of some adventurer in the + flesh, if it were not for certain passages—such as the description + of the impossible desert on page 90, which proves that Defoe was piecing + together his description of an imaginary journey from the geographical + records and travellers' tales of his contemporaries, aided perhaps by the + confused yarns of some sailor friends. How substantially truthful in + spirit and in detail is Defoe's account of Madagascar is proved by the + narrative of Robert Drury's "Captivity in Madagascar," published in 1729. + The natives themselves, as described intimately by Drury, who lived + amongst them for many years, would produce just such an effect as Defoe + describes on rough sailors in their perilous position. The method by which + Defoe compels us to accept improbabilities, and lulls our critical sense + asleep, is well shown in the following passages:— + </p> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + "Thieving, lying, swearing, forswearing, joined to the most + abominable lewdness, was the stated practice of the ship's crew; + adding to it, that with the most unsufferable boasts of their own + courage, they were, generally speaking, the most complete cowards + that I ever met with."—Page 7. + + "All the seamen in a body came up to the rail of the quarter-deck, + where the captain was walking with some of his officers, and + appointing the boatswain to speak for them, he went up, and falling + on his knees to the captain, begged of him in the humblest manner + possible, to receive the four men on board again, offering to answer + for their fidelity, or to have them kept in chains, till they came + to Lisbon, and there to be delivered up to justice, rather than, as + they said, to have them left, to be murdered by savages, or devoured + by wild beasts. It was a great while ere the captain took any notice + of them, but when he did, he ordered the boatswain to be seized, and + threatened to bring him to the capstan for speaking for them.... + Upon this severity, one of the seamen, bolder than the rest, but + still with all possible respect to the captain, besought his honour, + as he called him, that he would give leave to some more of them to + go on shore, and die with their companions, or, if possible, to + assist them to resist the barbarians."—Page 18. +</pre> + <p> + Now the first passage we have quoted about the cowardice, &c., of the + Portuguese crew is not in keeping with the second passage, which shows the + men as "wishing to die with their companions"; but so actual is the scene + of the seamen "in a body coming up to the rail of the quarter-deck," that + we cannot but believe the thing happened so, just as we believe in all the + thousand little details of the imaginary narrative of "Robinson Crusoe." + This feat of the imagination Defoe strengthens in the most artful manner, + by putting in the mouths of his characters various reflections to + substantiate the narrative. For example, in the description, on page 263, + of the savages who lined the perilous channel in a half-moon, where the + European ship lay, we find the afterthoughts are added so naturally, that + they would carry conviction to any judge or jury:— + </p> +<pre xml:space="preserve"> + "They little thought what service they had done us, and how + unwittingly, and by the greatest ignorance, they had made + themselves pilots to us, while we, having not sounded the place, + might have been lost before we were aware. <i>It is true we might + have sounded our new harbour, before we had ventured out; but I + cannot say for certain, whether we should or not; for I, for my + part, had not the least suspicion of what our real case was; + however, I say, perhaps, before we had weighed, we should have + looked about us a little.</i>" +</pre> + <p> + Turning to the other literary qualities that make Defoe's novels great, if + little read, classics, how delightful are the little satiric touches that + add grave weight to the story. Consider the following: "My good gipsy + mother, for some of her worthy actions, no doubt, happened in process of + time to be hanged, and as this fell out something too soon for me to be + perfected in the strolling trade," &c.(p. 3). Every other word here is + dryly satiric, and the large free callousness and careless brutality of + Defoe's days with regard to the life of criminals is conveyed in half a + sentence. And what an amount of shrewd observation is summed up in this + one saying: "Upon these foundations, William said he was satisfied we + might trust them; for, says William, I would as soon trust a man whose + interest binds him to be just to me, as a man whose principle binds + himself" (p. 227). Extremely subtle is also this remark: "<i>Why, says I, + did you ever know a pirate repent?</i> At this he started a little and + returned, <i>At the gallows</i> I have known <i>one</i> repent, and I <i>hope</i> + thou wilt be the second." The character of William the Quaker pirate is a + masterpiece of shrewd humour. He is the first Quaker brought into English + fiction, and we know of no other Friend in latter-day fiction to equal + him. Defoe in his inimitable manner has defined surely and deftly the + peculiar characteristics of the sect in this portrait. On three separate + occasions we find William saving unfortunate natives or defenceless + prisoners from the cruel and wicked barbarity of the sailors. At page 183, + for example, the reader will find a most penetrating analysis of the dense + stupidity which so often accompanies man's love of bloodshed. The sketch + of the second lieutenant, who was for "murdering the negroes to make them + tell," when he could not make them even understand what he wanted, is + worthy of Tolstoy. We have not space here to dwell upon the scores of + passages of similar deep insight which make "Captain Singleton" a most + true and vivid commentary on the life of Defoe's times, but we may call + special attention to the passage on page 189 which describe the sale of + the negroes to the planters; to the description of the awakening of the + conscience of Captain Singleton through terror at the fire-cloud (page + 222); and to the extraordinarily picturesque conversation between William + and the captive Dutchman (page 264). Finally, if the reader wishes to + taste Defoe's flavour in its perfection let him examine carefully those + passages in the concluding twenty pages of the book, wherein Captain + Singleton is shown as awakening to the wickedness of his past life, and + the admirable dry reasoning of William by which the Quaker prevents him + from committing suicide and persuades him to keep his ill-gotten wealth, + "with a resolution to do what right with it we are able; and who knows + what opportunity Providence may put into our hands.... As it is without + doubt, our present business is to go to some place of safety, where we may + wait His will." How admirable is the passage about William's sister, the + widow with four children who kept a little shop in the Minories, and that + in which the penitent ex-pirates are shown us as hesitating in Venice for + two years before they durst venture to England for fear of the gallows. + </p> + <p> + "Captain Singleton" was published in 1720, a year after "Robinson Crusoe," + when Defoe was fifty-nine. Twenty years before had seen "The True-Born + Englishman" and "The Shortest Way with the Dissenters"; and we are told + that from "June 1687 to almost the very week of his death in 1731 a stream + of controversial books and pamphlets poured from his pen commenting upon + and marking every important passing event." The fecundity of Defoe as a + journalist alone surpasses that of any great journalist we can name, + William Cobbett not excepted, and we may add that the style of "Captain + Singleton," like that of "Robinson Crusoe," is so perfect that there is + not a single ineffective passage, or indeed a weak sentence, to be found + in the book. + </p> + <h3> + EDWARD GARNETT. + </h3> + <p> + The following is a list of Defoe's works: "New Discovery of Old Intrigue" + (verse), 1691. "Character of Dr. Samuel Annesley" (verse), 1697. "The + Pacificator" (verse), 1700. "True-Born Englishman" (verse), 1701. "The + Mock Mourners" (verse), 1702. "Reformation of Manners" (verse), 1702. "New + Test of Church of England's Loyalty," 1702. "Shortest Way with the + Dissenters," 1702. "Ode to the Athenian Society," 1703. "Enquiry into + Acgill's General Translation," 1703. "More Reformation" (verse), 1703. + "Hymn to the Pillory," 1703. "The Storm" (Tale), 1704. "Layman's Sermon on + the Late Storm," 1704. "The Consolidator; or, Memoirs of Sundry + Transactions from the World in the Moon," 1704. "Elegy on Author of + 'True-Born Englishman,'" 1704. "Hymn to Victory," 1704. "Giving Alms no + Charity," 1704. "The Dyet of Poland" (verse), 1705. "Apparition of Mrs. + Veal," 1706. "Sermon on the Filling-up of Dr. Burgess's Meeting-house," + 1706. "Jure Divino" (verse), 1706. "Caledonia" (verse), 1706. "History of + the Union of Great Britain," 1709. "Short Enquiry into a Late Duel," 1713. + "A General History of Trade," 1713. "Wars of Charles III.," 1715. "The + Family Instruction" (two eds.), 1715. "Hymn to the Mob," 1715. "Memoirs of + the Church of Scotland," 1717. "Life and Death of Count Patkul," 1717. + "Memoirs of Duke of Shrewsbury," 1718. "Memoirs of Daniel Williams," 1718. + "The Life and Strange Surprising Adventures of Robinson Crusoe, of York, + Mariner," 1719. "The Farther Adventures of Robinson Crusoe," 1719. "The + Dumb Philosopher: or, Great Britain's Wonder," 1719. "The King of Pirates" + (Capt. Avery), 1719. "Life of Baron de Goertz," 1719. "Life and Adventures + of Duncan Campbell," 1720. "Mr. Campbell's Pacquet," 1720. "Memoirs of a + Cavalier," 1720. "Life of Captain Singleton," 1720. "Serious Reflections + during the Life and Surprising Adventures of Robinson Crusoe," 1720. "The + Supernatural Philosopher; or, The Mysteries of Magick," 1720. Translation + of Du Fresnoy's "Compleat Art of Painting" (verse), 1720. "Moll Flanders," + 1722, "Journal of the Plague Year," 1722. "Due Preparations for the + Plague," 1722. "Life of Cartouche," 1722. "History of Colonel Jacque," + 1722. "Religious Courtship," 1722. "History of Peter the Great," 1723. + "The Highland Rogue" (Rob Roy), 1723. "The Fortunate Mistress" (Roxana), + 1724. "Narrative of Murders at Calais," 1724. "Life of John Sheppard," + 1724. "Robberies, Escapes, &c., of John Sheppard," 1724. "The Great + Law of Subordination; or, The Insolence and Insufferable Behaviour of + Servants in England," 1724. "A Tour through Great Britain," 1724-6. "New + Voyage Round the World," 1725. "Account of Jonathan Wild," 1725. "Account + of John Gow," 1725. "Everybody's Business is Nobody's Business" (on + Servants), 1725. "The Complete English Tradesman," 1725; vol. ii., 1727. + "The Friendly Demon," 1726. "Mere Nature Delineated" (Peter the Wild Boy), + 1726. "Political History of the Devil," 1726. "Essay upon Literature and + the Original of Letters," 1726. "History of Discoveries," 1726-7. "The + Protestant Monastery," 1726. "A System of Magic," 1726. "Parochial + Tyranny," 1727. "Treatise concerning Use and Abuse of Marriage," 1727. + "Secrets of Invisible World Discovered; or, History and Reality of + Apparitions," 1727, 1728. "A New Family Instructor," 1728. "Augusta + Triumphans," 1728. "Plan of English Commerce," 1728. "Second Thoughts are + Best" (on Street Robberies), 1728. "Street Robberies Considered," 1728. + "Humble Proposal to People of England for Increase of Trade, &c.," + 1729. "Preface to R. Dodsley's Poem 'Servitude'" 1729. "Effectual Scheme + for Preventing Street Robberies," 1731. + </p> + <p> + Besides the above-named publications a large number of further tracts by + Defoe are extant, on matters of Politics and Church. + </p> + <p> + <br /><br /> + </p> + <hr /> + <p> + <a name="link2H_4_0002" id="link2H_4_0002"> </a> + </p> + <div style="height: 4em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + <h2> + THE LIFE, ADVENTURES, AND PIRACIES OF CAPTAIN SINGLETON + </h2> + <p> + As it is usual for great persons, whose lives have been remarkable, and + whose actions deserve recording to posterity, to insist much upon their + originals, give full accounts of their families, and the histories of + their ancestors, so, that I may be methodical, I shall do the same, though + I can look but a very little way into my pedigree, as you will see + presently. + </p> + <p> + If I may believe the woman whom I was taught to call mother, I was a + little boy, of about two years old, very well dressed, had a nursery-maid + to attend me, who took me out on a fine summer's evening into the fields + towards Islington, as she pretended, to give the child some air; a little + girl being with her, of twelve or fourteen years old, that lived in the + neighbourhood. The maid, whether by appointment or otherwise, meets with a + fellow, her sweetheart, as I suppose; he carries her into a public-house, + to give her a pot and a cake; and while they were toying in the house the + girl plays about, with me in her hand, in the garden and at the door, + sometimes in sight, sometimes out of sight, thinking no harm. + </p> + <p> + At this juncture comes by one of those sort of people who, it seems, made + it their business to spirit away little children. This was a hellish trade + in those days, and chiefly practised where they found little children very + well dressed, or for bigger children, to sell them to the plantations. + </p> + <p> + The woman, pretending to take me up in her arms and kiss me, and play with + me, draws the girl a good way from the house, till at last she makes a + fine story to the girl, and bids her go back to the maid, and tell her + where she was with the child; that a gentlewoman had taken a fancy to the + child, and was kissing of it, but she should not be frighted, or to that + purpose; for they were but just there; and so, while the girl went, she + carries me quite away. + </p> + <p> + From this time, it seems, I was disposed of to a beggar woman that wanted + a pretty little child to set out her case; and after that, to a gipsy, + under whose government I continued till I was about six years old. And + this woman, though I was continually dragged about with her from one part + of the country to another, yet never let me want for anything; and I + called her mother; though she told me at last she was not my mother, but + that she bought me for twelve shillings of another woman, who told her how + she came by me, and told her that my name was Bob Singleton, not Robert, + but plain Bob; for it seems they never knew by what name I was christened. + </p> + <p> + It is in vain to reflect here, what a terrible fright the careless hussy + was in that lost me; what treatment she received from my justly enraged + father and mother, and the horror these must be in at the thoughts of + their child being thus carried away; for as I never knew anything of the + matter, but just what I have related, nor who my father and mother were, + so it would make but a needless digression to talk of it here. + </p> + <p> + My good gipsy mother, for some of her worthy actions no doubt, happened in + process of time to be hanged; and as this fell out something too soon for + me to be perfected in the strolling trade, the parish where I was left, + which for my life I can't remember, took some care of me, to be sure; for + the first thing I can remember of myself afterwards, was, that I went to a + parish school, and the minister of the parish used to talk to me to be a + good boy; and that, though I was but a poor boy, if I minded my book, and + served God, I might make a good man. + </p> + <p> + I believe I was frequently removed from one town to another, perhaps as + the parishes disputed my supposed mother's last settlement. Whether I was + so shifted by passes, or otherwise, I know not; but the town where I last + was kept, whatever its name was, must be not far off from the seaside; for + a master of a ship who took a fancy to me, was the first that brought me + to a place not far from Southampton, which I afterwards knew to be + Bussleton; and there I attended the carpenters, and such people as were + employed in building a ship for him; and when it was done, though I was + not above twelve years old, he carried me to sea with him on a voyage to + Newfoundland. + </p> + <p> + I lived well enough, and pleased my master so well that he called me his + own boy; and I would have called him father, but he would not allow it, + for he had children of his own. I went three or four voyages with him, and + grew a great sturdy boy, when, coming home again from the banks of + Newfoundland, we were taken by an Algerine rover, or man-of-war; which, if + my account stands right, was about the year 1695, for you may be sure I + kept no journal. + </p> + <p> + I was not much concerned at the disaster, though I saw my master, after + having been wounded by a splinter in the head during the engagement, very + barbarously used by the Turks; I say, I was not much concerned, till, upon + some unlucky thing I said, which, as I remember, was about abusing my + master, they took me and beat me most unmercifully with a flat stick on + the soles of my feet, so that I could neither go or stand for several days + together. + </p> + <p> + But my good fortune was my friend upon this occasion; for, as they were + sailing away with our ship in tow as a prize, steering for the Straits, + and in sight of the bay of Cadiz, the Turkish rover was attacked by two + great Portuguese men-of-war, and taken and carried into Lisbon. + </p> + <p> + As I was not much concerned at my captivity, not indeed understanding the + consequences of it, if it had continued, so I was not suitably sensible of + my deliverance; nor, indeed, was it so much a deliverance to me as it + would otherwise have been, for my master, who was the only friend I had in + the world, died at Lisbon of his wounds; and I being then almost reduced + to my primitive state, viz., of starving, had this addition to it, that it + was in a foreign country too, where I knew nobody and could not speak a + word of their language. However, I fared better here than I had reason to + expect; for when all the rest of our men had their liberty to go where + they would, I, that knew not whither to go, stayed in the ship for several + days, till at length one of the lieutenants seeing me, inquired what that + young English dog did there, and why they did not turn him on shore. + </p> + <p> + I heard him, and partly understood what he meant, though not what he said, + and began then to be in a terrible fright; for I knew not where to get a + bit of bread; when the pilot of the ship, an old seaman, seeing me look + very dull, came to me, and speaking broken English to me, told me I must + be gone. "Whither must I go?" said I. "Where you will," said he, "home to + your own country, if you will." "How must I go thither?" said I. "Why, + have you no friend?" said he. "No," said I, "not in the world, but that + dog," pointing to the ship's dog (who, having stolen a piece of meat just + before, had brought it close by me, and I had taken it from him, and ate + it), "for he has been a good friend, and brought me my dinner." + </p> + <p> + "Well, well," says he, "you must have your dinner. Will you go with me?" + "Yes," says I, "with all my heart." In short, the old pilot took me home + with him, and used me tolerably well, though I fared hard enough; and I + lived with him about two years, during which time he was soliciting his + business, and at length got to be master or pilot under Don Garcia de + Pimentesia de Carravallas, captain of a Portuguese galleon or carrack, + which was bound to Goa, in the East Indies; and immediately having gotten + his commission, put me on board to look after his cabin, in which he had + stored himself with abundance of liquors, succades, sugar, spices, and + other things, for his accommodation in the voyage, and laid in afterwards + a considerable quantity of European goods, fine lace and linen; and also + baize, woollen cloth, stuffs, &c., under the pretence of his clothes. + </p> + <p> + I was too young in the trade to keep any journal of this voyage, though my + master, who was, for a Portuguese, a pretty good artist, prompted me to + it; but my not understanding the language was one hindrance; at least it + served me for an excuse. However, after some time, I began to look into + his charts and books; and, as I could write a tolerable hand, understood + some Latin, and began to have a little smattering of the Portuguese + tongue, so I began to get a superficial knowledge of navigation, but not + such as was likely to be sufficient to carry me through a life of + adventure, as mine was to be. In short, I learned several material things + in this voyage among the Portuguese; I learned particularly to be an + arrant thief and a bad sailor; and I think I may say they are the best + masters for teaching both these of any nation in the world. + </p> + <p> + We made our way for the East Indies, by the coast of Brazil; not that it + is in the course of sailing the way thither, but our captain, either on + his own account, or by the direction of the merchants, went thither first, + where at All Saints' Bay, or, as they call it in Portugal, the Rio de + Todos los Santos, we delivered near a hundred tons of goods, and took in a + considerable quantity of gold, with some chests of sugar, and seventy or + eighty great rolls of tobacco, every roll weighing at least a + hundredweight. + </p> + <p> + Here, being lodged on shore by my master's order, I had the charge of the + captain's business, he having seen me very diligent for my own master; and + in requital for his mistaken confidence, I found means to secure, that is + to say, to steal, about twenty moidores out of the gold that was shipped + on board by the merchants, and this was my first adventure. + </p> + <p> + We had a tolerable voyage from hence to the Cape de Bona Speranza; and I + was reputed as a mighty diligent servant to my master, and very faithful. + I was diligent indeed, but I was very far from honest; however, they + thought me honest, which, by the way, was their very great mistake. Upon + this very mistake the captain took a particular liking to me, and employed + me frequently on his own occasion; and, on the other hand, in recompense + for my officious diligence, I received several particular favours from + him; particularly, I was, by the captain's command, made a kind of a + steward under the ship's steward, for such provisions as the captain + demanded for his own table. He had another steward for his private stores + besides, but my office concerned only what the captain called for of the + ship's stores for his private use. + </p> + <p> + However, by this means I had opportunity particularly to take care of my + master's man, and to furnish myself with sufficient provisions to make me + live much better than the other people in the ship; for the captain seldom + ordered anything out of the ship's stores, as above, but I snipt some of + it for my own share. We arrived at Goa, in the East Indies, in about seven + months from Lisbon, and remained there eight more; during which time I had + indeed nothing to do, my master being generally on shore, but to learn + everything that is wicked among the Portuguese, a nation the most + perfidious and the most debauched, the most insolent and cruel, of any + that pretend to call themselves Christians, in the world. + </p> + <p> + Thieving, lying, swearing, forswearing, joined to the most abominable + lewdness, was the stated practice of the ship's crew; adding to it, that, + with the most insufferable boasts of their own courage, they were, + generally speaking, the most complete cowards that I ever met with; and + the consequence of their cowardice was evident upon many occasions. + However, there was here and there one among them that was not so bad as + the rest; and, as my lot fell among them, it made me have the most + contemptible thoughts of the rest, as indeed they deserved. + </p> + <p> + I was exactly fitted for their society indeed; for I had no sense of + virtue or religion upon me. I had never heard much of either, except what + a good old parson had said to me when I was a child of about eight or nine + years old; nay, I was preparing and growing up apace to be as wicked as + anybody could be, or perhaps ever was. Fate certainly thus directed my + beginning, knowing that I had work which I had to do in the world, which + nothing but one hardened against all sense of honesty or religion could go + through; and yet, even in this state of original wickedness, I entertained + such a settled abhorrence of the abandoned vileness of the Portuguese, + that I could not but hate them most heartily from the beginning, and all + my life afterwards. They were so brutishly wicked, so base and perfidious, + not only to strangers but to one another, so meanly submissive when + subjected, so insolent, or barbarous and tyrannical, when superior, that I + thought there was something in them that shocked my very nature. Add to + this that it is natural to an Englishman to hate a coward, it all joined + together to make the devil and a Portuguese equally my aversion. + </p> + <p> + However, according to the English proverb, he that is shipped with the + devil must sail with the devil; I was among them, and I managed myself as + well as I could. My master had consented that I should assist the captain + in the office, as above; but, as I understood afterwards that the captain + allowed my master half a moidore a month for my service, and that he had + my name upon the ship's books also, I expected that when the ship came to + be paid four months' wages at the Indies, as they, it seems, always do, my + master would let me have something for myself. + </p> + <p> + But I was wrong in my man, for he was none of that kind; he had taken me + up as in distress, and his business was to keep me so, and make his market + of me as well as he could, which I began to think of after a different + manner than I did at first, for at first I thought he had entertained me + in mere charity, upon seeing my distressed circumstances, but did not + doubt but when he put me on board the ship, I should have some wages for + my service. + </p> + <p> + But he thought, it seems, quite otherwise; and when I procured one to + speak to him about it, when the ship was paid at Goa, he flew into the + greatest rage imaginable, and called me English dog, young heretic, and + threatened to put me into the Inquisition. Indeed, of all the names the + four-and-twenty letters could make up, he should not have called me + heretic; for as I knew nothing about religion, neither Protestant from + Papist, or either of them from a Mahometan, I could never be a heretic. + However, it passed but a little, but, as young as I was, I had been + carried into the Inquisition, and there, if they had asked me if I was a + Protestant or a Catholic, I should have said yes to that which came first. + If it had been the Protestant they had asked first, it had certainly made + a martyr of me for I did not know what. + </p> + <p> + But the very priest they carried with them, or chaplain of the ship, as we + called him, saved me; for seeing me a boy entirely ignorant of religion, + and ready to do or say anything they bid me, he asked me some questions + about it, which he found I answered so very simply, that he took it upon + him to tell them he would answer for my being a good Catholic, and he + hoped he should be the means of saving my soul, and he pleased himself + that it was to be a work of merit to him; so he made me as good a Papist + as any of them in about a week's time. + </p> + <p> + I then told him my case about my master; how, it is true, he had taken me + up in a miserable case on board a man-of-war at Lisbon; and I was indebted + to him for bringing me on board this ship; that if I had been left at + Lisbon, I might have starved, and the like; and therefore I was willing to + serve him, but that I hoped he would give me some little consideration for + my service, or let me know how long he expected I should serve him for + nothing. + </p> + <p> + It was all one; neither the priest nor any one else could prevail with + him, but that I was not his servant but his slave, that he took me in the + Algerine, and that I was a Turk, only pretended to be an English boy to + get my liberty, and he would carry me to the Inquisition as a Turk. + </p> + <p> + This frighted me out of my wits, for I had nobody to vouch for me what I + was, or from whence I came; but the good Padre Antonio, for that was his + name, cleared me of that part by a way I did not understand; for he came + to me one morning with two sailors, and told me they must search me, to + bear witness that I was not a Turk. I was amazed at them, and frighted, + and did not understand them, nor could I imagine what they intended to do + to me. However, stripping me, they were soon satisfied, and Father Antony + bade me be easy, for they could all witness that I was no Turk. So I + escaped that part of my master's cruelty. + </p> + <p> + And now I resolved from that time to run away from him if I could, but + there was no doing of it there, for there were not ships of any nation in + the world in that port, except two or three Persian vessels from Ormus, so + that if I had offered to go away from him, he would have had me seized on + shore, and brought on board by force; so that I had no remedy but + patience. And this he brought to an end too as soon as he could, for after + this he began to use me ill, and not only to straiten my provisions, but + to beat and torture me in a barbarous manner for every trifle, so that, in + a word, my life began to be very miserable. + </p> + <p> + The violence of this usage of me, and the impossibility of my escape from + his hands, set my head a-working upon all sorts of mischief, and in + particular I resolved, after studying all other ways to deliver myself, + and finding all ineffectual, I say, I resolved to murder him. With this + hellish resolution in my head, I spent whole nights and days contriving + how to put it in execution, the devil prompting me very warmly to the + fact. I was indeed entirely at a loss for the means, for I had neither gun + or sword, nor any weapon to assault him with; poison I had my thoughts + much upon, but knew not where to get any; or, if I might have got it, I + did not know the country word for it, or by what name to ask for it. + </p> + <p> + In this manner I quitted the fact, intentionally, a hundred and a hundred + times; but Providence, either for his sake or for mine, always frustrated + my designs, and I could never bring it to pass; so I was obliged to + continue in his chains till the ship, having taken in her loading, set + sail for Portugal. + </p> + <p> + I can say nothing here to the manner of our voyage, for, as I said, I kept + no journal; but this I can give an account of, that having been once as + high as the Cape of Good Hope, as we call it, or Cabo de Bona Speranza, as + they call it, we were driven back again by a violent storm from the + W.S.W., which held us six days and nights a great way to the eastward, and + after that, standing afore the wind for several days more, we at last came + to an anchor on the coast of Madagascar. + </p> + <p> + The storm had been so violent that the ship had received a great deal of + damage, and it required some time to repair her; so, standing in nearer + the shore, the pilot, my master, brought the ship into a very good + harbour, where we rid in twenty-six fathoms water, about half a mile from + the shore. + </p> + <p> + While the ship rode here there happened a most desperate mutiny among the + men, upon account of some deficiency in their allowance, which came to + that height that they threatened the captain to set him on shore, and go + back with the ship to Goa. I wished they would with all my heart, for I + was full of mischief in my head, and ready enough to do any. So, though I + was but a boy, as they called me, yet I prompted the mischief all I could, + and embarked in it so openly, that I escaped very little being hanged in + the first and most early part of my life; for the captain had some notice + that there was a design laid by some of the company to murder him; and + having, partly by money and promises, and partly by threatening and + torture, brought two fellows to confess the particulars, and the names of + the persons concerned, they were presently apprehended, till, one accusing + another, no less than sixteen men were seized and put into irons, whereof + I was one. + </p> + <p> + The captain, who was made desperate by his danger, resolving to clear the + ship of his enemies, tried us all, and we were all condemned to die. The + manner of his process I was too young to take notice of; but the purser + and one of the gunners were hanged immediately, and I expected it with the + rest. I do not remember any great concern I was under about it, only that + I cried very much, for I knew little then of this world, and nothing at + all of the next. + </p> + <p> + However, the captain contented himself with executing these two, and some + of the rest, upon their humble submission and promise of future good + behaviour, were pardoned; but five were ordered to be set on shore on the + island and left there, of which I was one. My master used all his interest + with the captain to have me excused, but could not obtain it; for somebody + having told him that I was one of them who was singled out to have killed + him, when my master desired I might not be set on shore, the captain told + him I should stay on board if he desired it, but then I should be hanged, + so he might choose for me which he thought best. The captain, it seems, + was particularly provoked at my being concerned in the treachery, because + of his having been so kind to me, and of his having singled me out to + serve him, as I have said above; and this, perhaps, obliged him to give my + master such a rough choice, either to set me on shore or to have me hanged + on board. And had my master, indeed, known what good-will I had for him, + he would not have been long in choosing for me; for I had certainly + determined to do him a mischief the first opportunity I had for it. This + was, therefore, a good providence for me to keep me from dipping my hands + in blood, and it made me more tender afterwards in matters of blood than I + believe I should otherwise have been. But as to my being one of them that + was to kill the captain, that I was wronged in, for I was not the person, + but it was really one of them that were pardoned, he having the good luck + not to have that part discovered. + </p> + <p> + I was now to enter upon a part of independent life, a thing I was indeed + very ill prepared to manage, for I was perfectly loose and dissolute in my + behaviour, bold and wicked while I was under government, and now perfectly + unfit to be trusted with liberty, for I was as ripe for any villainy as a + young fellow that had no solid thought ever placed in his mind could be + supposed to be. Education, as you have heard, I had none; and all the + little scenes of life I had passed through had been full of dangers and + desperate circumstances; but I was either so young or so stupid, that I + escaped the grief and anxiety of them, for want of having a sense of their + tendency and consequences. + </p> + <p> + This thoughtless, unconcerned temper had one felicity indeed in it, that + it made me daring and ready for doing any mischief, and kept off the + sorrow which otherwise ought to have attended me when I fell into any + mischief; that this stupidity was instead of a happiness to me, for it + left my thoughts free to act upon means of escape and deliverance in my + distress, however great it might be; whereas my companions in the misery + were so sunk by their fear and grief, that they abandoned themselves to + the misery of their condition, and gave over all thought but of their + perishing and starving, being devoured by wild beasts, murdered, and + perhaps eaten by cannibals, and the like. + </p> + <p> + I was but a young fellow, about seventeen or eighteen; but hearing what + was to be my fate, I received it with no appearance of discouragement; but + I asked what my master said to it, and being told that he had used his + utmost interest to save me, but the captain had answered I should either + go on shore or be hanged on board, which he pleased, I then gave over all + hope of being received again. I was not very thankful in my thoughts to my + master for his soliciting the captain for me, because I knew that what he + did was not in kindness to me so much as in kindness to himself; I mean, + to preserve the wages which he got for me, which amounted to above six + dollars a month, including what the captain allowed him for my particular + service to him. + </p> + <p> + When I understood that my master was so apparently kind, I asked if I + might not be admitted to speak with him, and they told me I might, if my + master would come down to me, but I could not be allowed to come up to + him; so then I desired my master might be spoke to to come to me, and he + accordingly came to me. I fell on my knees to him, and begged he would + forgive me what I had done to displease him; and indeed the resolution I + had taken to murder him lay with some horror upon my mind just at that + time, so that I was once just a-going to confess it, and beg him to + forgive me, but I kept it in. He told me he had done all he could to + obtain my pardon of the captain, but could not and he knew no way for me + but to have patience, and submit to my fate; and if they came to speak + with any ship of their nation at the Cape, he would endeavour to have them + stand in, and fetch us off again, if we might be found. + </p> + <p> + Then I begged I might have my clothes on shore with me. He told me he was + afraid I should have little need of clothes, for he did not see how we + could long subsist on the island, and that he had been told that the + inhabitants were cannibals or men-eaters (though he had no reason for that + suggestion), and we should not be able to live among them. I told him I + was not so afraid of that as I was of starving for want of victuals; and + as for the inhabitants being cannibals, I believed we should be more + likely to eat them than they us, if we could but get at them. But I was + mightily concerned, I said, we should have no weapons with us to defend + ourselves, and I begged nothing now, but that he would give me a gun and a + sword, with a little powder and shot. + </p> + <p> + He smiled, and said they would signify nothing to us, for it was + impossible for us to pretend to preserve our lives among such a populous + and desperate nation as the people of this island were. I told him that, + however, it would do us this good, for we should not be devoured or + destroyed immediately; so I begged hard for the gun. At last he told me he + did not know whether the captain would give him leave to give me a gun, + and if not, he durst not do it; but he promised to use his interest to + obtain it for me, which he did, and the next day he sent me a gun, with + some ammunition, but told me the captain would not suffer the ammunition + to be given us till we were set all on shore, and till he was just going + to set sail. He also sent me the few clothes I had in the ship, which + indeed were not many. + </p> + <p> + Two days after this, we were all carried on shore together; the rest of my + fellow-criminals hearing I had a gun, and some powder and shot, solicited + for liberty to carry the like with them, which was also granted them; and + thus we were set on shore to shift for ourselves. + </p> + <p> + At our first coming into the island we were terrified exceedingly with the + sight of the barbarous people, whose figure was made more terrible to us + than it really was by the report we had of them from the seamen; but when + we came to converse with them awhile, we found they were not cannibals, as + was reported, or such as would fall immediately upon us and eat us up; but + they came and sat down by us, and wondered much at our clothes and arms, + and made signs to give us some victuals, such as they had, which was only + roots and plants dug out of the ground for the present, but they brought + us fowls and flesh afterwards in good plenty. + </p> + <p> + This encouraged the other four men that were with me very much, for they + were quite dejected before; but now they began to be very familiar with + them, and made signs, that if they would use us kindly, we would stay and + live with them; which they seemed glad of, though they knew little of the + necessity we were under to do so, or how much we were afraid of them. + </p> + <p> + However, upon second thoughts we resolved that we would only stay in that + part so long as the ship rid in the bay, and then making them believe we + were gone with the ship, we would go and place ourselves, if possible, + where there were no inhabitants to be seen, and so live as we could, or + perhaps watch for a ship that might be driven upon the coast as we were. + </p> + <p> + The ship continued a fortnight in the roads, repairing some damage which + had been done her in the late storm, and taking in wood and water; and + during this time, the boat coming often on shore, the men brought us + several refreshments, and the natives believing we only belonged to the + ship, were civil enough. We lived in a kind of a tent on the shore, or + rather a hut, which we made with the boughs of trees, and sometimes in the + night retired to a wood a little out of their way, to let them think we + were gone on board the ship. However, we found them barbarous, + treacherous, and villainous enough in their nature, only civil from fear, + and therefore concluded we should soon fall into their hands when the ship + was gone. + </p> + <p> + The sense of this wrought upon my fellow-sufferers even to distraction; + and one of them, being a carpenter, in his mad fit, swam off to the ship + in the night, though she lay then a league to sea, and made such pitiful + moan to be taken in, that the captain was prevailed with at last to take + him in, though they let him lie swimming three hours in the water before + he consented to it. + </p> + <p> + Upon this, and his humble submission, the captain received him, and, in a + word, the importunity of this man (who for some time petitioned to be + taken in, though they hanged him as soon as they had him) was such as + could not be resisted; for, after he had swam so long about the ship, he + was not able to reach the shore again; and the captain saw evidently that + the man must be taken on board or suffered to drown, and the whole ship's + company offering to be bound for him for his good behaviour, the captain + at last yielded, and he was taken up, but almost dead with his being so + long in the water. + </p> + <p> + When this man was got in, he never left importuning the captain, and all + the rest of the officers, in behalf of us that were behind, but to the + very last day the captain was inexorable; when, at the time their + preparations were making to sail, and orders given to hoist the boats into + the ship, all the seamen in a body came up to the rail of the + quarter-deck, where the captain was walking with some of his officers, and + appointing the boatswain to speak for them, he went up, and falling on his + knees to the captain, begged of him, in the humblest manner possible, to + receive the four men on board again, offering to answer for their + fidelity, or to have them kept in chains till they came to Lisbon, and + there to be delivered up to justice, rather than, as they said, to have + them left to be murdered by savages, or devoured by wild beasts. It was a + great while ere the captain took any notice of them, but when he did, he + ordered the boatswain to be seized, and threatened to bring him to the + capstan for speaking for them. + </p> + <p> + Upon this severity, one of the seamen, bolder than the rest, but still + with all possible respect to the captain, besought his honour, as he + called him, that he would give leave to some more of them to go on shore, + and die with their companions, or, if possible, to assist them to resist + the barbarians. The captain, rather provoked than cowed with this, came to + the barricade of the quarter-deck, and speaking very prudently to the men + (for had he spoken roughly, two-thirds of them would have left the ship, + if not all of them), he told them, it was for their safety as well as his + own that he had been obliged to that severity; that mutiny on board a ship + was the same thing as treason in a king's palace, and he could not answer + it to his owners and employers to trust the ship and goods committed to + his charge with men who had entertained thoughts of the worst and blackest + nature; that he wished heartily that it had been anywhere else that they + had been set on shore, where they might have been in less hazard from the + savages; that, if he had designed they should be destroyed, he could as + well have executed them on board as the other two; that he wished it had + been in some other part of the world, where he might have delivered them + up to the civil justice, or might have left them among Christians; but it + was better their lives were put in hazard than his life, and the safety of + the ship; and that though he did not know that he had deserved so ill of + any of them as that they should leave the ship rather than do their duty, + yet if any of them were resolved to do so unless he would consent to take + a gang of traitors on board, who, as he had proved before them all, had + conspired to murder him, he would not hinder them, nor for the present + would he resent their importunity; but, if there was nobody left in the + ship but himself, he would never consent to take them on board. + </p> + <p> + This discourse was delivered so well, was in itself so reasonable, was + managed with so much temper, yet so boldly concluded with a negative, that + the greatest part of the men were satisfied for the present. However, as + it put the men into juntos and cabals, they were not composed for some + hours; the wind also slackening towards night, the captain ordered not to + weigh till next morning. + </p> + <p> + The same night twenty-three of the men, among whom was the gunner's mate, + the surgeon's assistant, and two carpenters, applying to the chief mate + told him, that as the captain had given them leave to go on shore to their + comrades, they begged that he would speak to the captain not to take it + ill that they were desirous to go and die with their companions; and that + they thought they could do no less in such an extremity than go to them; + because, if there was any way to save their lives, it was by adding to + their numbers, and making them strong enough to assist one another in + defending themselves against the savages, till perhaps they might one time + or other find means to make their escape, and get to their own country + again. + </p> + <p> + The mate told them, in so many words, that he durst not speak to the + captain upon any such design, and was very sorry they had no more respect + for him than to desire him to go upon such an errand; but, if they were + resolved upon such an enterprise, he would advise them to take the + long-boat in the morning betimes, and go off, seeing the captain had given + them leave, and leave a civil letter behind them to the captain, and to + desire him to send his men on shore for the boat, which should be + delivered very honestly, and he promised to keep their counsel so long. + </p> + <p> + Accordingly, an hour before day, those twenty-three men, with every man a + firelock and a cutlass, with some pistols, three halberds or half-pikes, + and good store of powder and ball, without any provision but about half a + hundred of bread, but with all their chests and clothes, tools, + instruments, books, &c., embarked themselves so silently, that the + captain got no notice of it till they were gotten half the way on shore. + </p> + <p> + As soon as the captain heard of it he called for the gunner's mate, the + chief gunner being at the time sick in his cabin, and ordered to fire at + them; but, to his great mortification, the gunner's mate was one of the + number, and was gone with them; and indeed it was by this means they got + so many arms and so much ammunition. When the captain found how it was, + and that there was no help for it, he began to be a little appeased, and + made light of it, and called up the men, and spoke kindly to them, and + told them he was very well satisfied in the fidelity and ability of those + that were now left, and that he would give to them, for their + encouragement, to be divided among them, the wages which were due to the + men that were gone, and that it was a great satisfaction to him that the + ship was free from such a mutinous rabble, who had not the least reason + for their discontent. + </p> + <p> + The men seemed very well satisfied, and particularly the promise of the + wages of those who were gone went a great way with them. After this, the + letter which was left by the men was given to the captain by his boy, with + whom, it seems, the men had left it. The letter was much to the same + purpose of what they had said to the mate, and which he declined to say + for them, only that at the end of their letter they told the captain that, + as they had no dishonest design, so they had taken nothing away with them + which was not their own, except some arms and ammunition, such as were + absolutely necessary to them, as well for their defence against the + savages as to kill fowls or beasts for their food, that they might not + perish; and as there were considerable sums due to them for wages, they + hoped he would allow the arms and ammunition upon their accounts. They + told him that, as to the ship's longboat, which they had taken to bring + them on shore, they knew it was necessary to him, and they were very + willing to restore it to him, and if he pleased to send for it, it should + be very honestly delivered to his men, and not the least injury offered to + any of those who came for it, nor the least persuasion or invitation made + use of to any of them to stay with them; and, at the bottom of the letter, + they very humbly besought him that, for their defence, and for the safety + of their lives, he would be pleased to send them a barrel of powder and + some ammunition, and give them leave to keep the mast and sail of the + boat, that if it was possible for them to make themselves a boat of any + kind, they might shift off to sea, to save themselves in such part of the + world as their fate should direct them to. + </p> + <p> + Upon this the captain, who had won much upon the rest of his men by what + he had said to them, and was very easy as to the general peace (for it was + very true that the most mutinous of the men were gone), came out to the + quarter-deck, and, calling the men together, let them know the substance + of the letter, and told the men that, however they had not deserved such + civility from him, yet he was not willing to expose them more than they + were willing to expose themselves; he was inclined to send them some + ammunition, and as they had desired but one barrel of powder, he would + send them two barrels, and shot, or lead and moulds to make shot, in + proportion; and, to let them see that he was civiller to them than they + deserved, he ordered a cask of arrack and a great bag of bread to be sent + them for subsistence till they should be able to furnish themselves. + </p> + <p> + The rest of the men applauded the captain's generosity, and every one of + them sent us something or other, and about three in the afternoon the + pinnace came on shore, and brought us all these things, which we were very + glad of, and returned the long-boat accordingly; and as to the men that + came with the pinnace, as the captain had singled out such men as he knew + would not come over to us, so they had positive orders not to bring any + one of us on board again, upon pain of death; and indeed both were so true + to our points, that we neither asked them to stay, nor they us to go. + </p> + <p> + We were now a good troop, being in all twenty-seven men, very well armed, + and provided with everything but victuals; we had two carpenters among us, + a gunner, and, which was worth all the rest, a surgeon or doctor; that is + to say, he was an assistant to a surgeon at Goa, and was entertained as a + supernumerary with us. The carpenters had brought all their tools, the + doctor all his instruments and medicines, and indeed we had a great deal + of baggage, that is to say, on the whole, for some of us had little more + than the clothes on our backs, of whom I was one; but I had one thing + which none of them had, viz., I had the twenty-two moidores of gold which + I had stole at the Brazils, and two pieces of eight. The two pieces of + eight I showed, and one moidore, and none of them ever suspected that I + had any more money in the world, having been known to be only a poor boy + taken up in charity, as you have heard, and used like a slave, and in the + worst manner of a slave, by my cruel master the pilot. + </p> + <p> + It will be easy to imagine we four that were left at first were joyful, + nay, even surprised with joy at the coming of the rest, though at first we + were frighted, and thought they came to fetch us back to hang us; but they + took ways quickly to satisfy us that they were in the same condition with + us, only with this additional circumstance, theirs was voluntary, and ours + by force. + </p> + <p> + The first piece of news they told us after the short history of their + coming away was, that our companion was on board, but how he got thither + we could not imagine, for he had given us the slip, and we never imagined + he could swim so well as to venture off to the ship, which lay at so great + a distance; nay, we did not so much as know that he could swim at all, and + not thinking anything of what really happened, we thought he must have + wandered into the woods and was devoured, or was fallen into the hands of + the natives, and was murdered; and these thoughts filled us with fears + enough, and of several kinds, about its being some time or other our lot + to fall into their hands also. But hearing how he had with much difficulty + been received on board the ship again and pardoned, we were much better + satisfied than before. + </p> + <p> + Being now, as I have said, a considerable number of us, and in condition + to defend ourselves, the first thing we did was to give every one his hand + that we would not separate from one another upon any occasion whatsoever, + but that we would live and die together; that we would kill no food, but + that we would distribute it in public; and that we would be in all things + guided by the majority, and not insist upon our own resolutions in + anything if the majority were against it; that we would appoint a captain + among us to be our governor or leader during pleasure; that while he was + in office we would obey him without reserve, on pain of death; and that + every one should take turn, but the captain was not to act in any + particular thing without advice of the rest, and by the majority. + </p> + <p> + Having established these rules, we resolved to enter into some measures + for our food, and for conversing with the inhabitants or natives of the + island for our supply. As for food, they were at first very useful to us, + but we soon grew weary of them, being an ignorant, ravenous, brutish sort + of people, even worse than the natives of any other country that we had + seen; and we soon found that the principal part of our subsistence was to + be had by our guns, shooting of deer and other creatures, and fowls of all + other sorts, of which there is abundance. + </p> + <p> + We found the natives did not disturb or concern themselves much about us; + nor did they inquire, or perhaps know, whether we stayed among them or + not, much less that our ship was gone quite away, and had cast us off, as + was our case; for the next morning, after we had sent back the long-boat, + the ship stood away to the south-east, and in four hours' time was out of + our sight. + </p> + <p> + The next day two of us went out into the country one way, and two another, + to see what kind of a land we were in; and we soon found the country was + very pleasant and fruitful, and a convenient place enough to live in; but, + as before, inhabited by a parcel of creatures scarce human, or capable of + being made social on any account whatsoever. + </p> + <p> + We found the place full of cattle and provisions; but whether we might + venture to take them where we could find them or not, we did not know; and + though we were under a necessity to get provisions, yet we were loth to + bring down a whole nation of devils upon us at once, and therefore some of + our company agreed to try to speak with some of the country, if we could, + that we might see what course was to be taken with them. Eleven of our men + went on this errand, well armed and furnished for defence. They brought + word that they had seen some of the natives, who appeared very civil to + them, but very shy and afraid, seeing their guns, for it was easy to + perceive that the natives knew what their guns were, and what use they + were of. + </p> + <p> + They made signs to the natives for some food, and they went and fetched + several herbs and roots, and some milk; but it was evident they did not + design to give it away, but to sell it, making signs to know what our men + would give them. + </p> + <p> + Our men were perplexed at this, for they had nothing to barter; however, + one of the men pulled out a knife and showed them, and they were so fond + of it that they were ready to go together by the ears for the knife. The + seaman seeing that, was willing to make a good market of his knife, and + keeping them chaffering about it a good while, some offered him roots, and + others milk; at last one offered him a goat for it, which he took. Then + another of our men showed them another knife, but they had nothing good + enough for that, whereupon one of them made signs that he would go and + fetch something; so our men stayed three hours for their return, when they + came back and brought him a small-sized, thick, short cow, very fat and + good meat, and gave him for his knife. + </p> + <p> + This was a good market, but our misfortune was we had no merchandise; for + our knives were as needful to us as to them, and but that we were in + distress for food, and must of necessity have some, these men would not + have parted with their knives. + </p> + <p> + However, in a little time more we found that the woods were full of living + creatures, which we might kill for our food, and that without giving + offence to them; so that our men went daily out a-hunting, and never + failed in killing something or other; for, as to the natives, we had no + goods to barter; and for money, all the stock among us would not have + subsisted us long. However, we called a general council to see what money + we had, and to bring it all together, that it might go as far as possible; + and when it came to my turn, I pulled out a moidore and the two dollars I + spoke of before. + </p> + <p> + This moidore I ventured to show, that they might not despise me too much + for adding too little to the store, and that they might not pretend to + search me; and they were very civil to me, upon the presumption that I had + been so faithful to them as not to conceal anything from them. + </p> + <p> + But our money did us little service, for the people neither knew the value + or the use of it, nor could they justly rate the gold in proportion with + the silver; so that all our money, which was not much when it was all put + together, would go but a little way with us, that is to say, to buy us + provisions. + </p> + <p> + Our next consideration was to get away from this cursed place, and whither + to go. When my opinion came to be asked, I told them I would leave that + all to them, and I told them I had rather they would let me go into the + woods to get them some provisions, than consult with me, for I would agree + to whatever they did; but they would not agree to that, for they would not + consent that any of us should go into the woods alone; for though we had + yet seen no lions or tigers in the woods, we were assured there were many + in the island, besides other creatures as dangerous, and perhaps worse, as + we afterwards found by our own experience. + </p> + <p> + We had many adventures in the woods, for our provisions, and often met + with wild and terrible beasts, which we could not call by their names; but + as they were, like us, seeking their prey, but were themselves good for + nothing, so we disturbed them as little as possible. + </p> + <p> + Our consultations concerning our escape from this place, which, as I have + said, we were now upon, ended in this only, that as we had two carpenters + among us, and that they had tools almost of all sorts with them, we should + try to build us a boat to go off to sea with, and that then, perhaps, we + might find our way back to Goa, or land on some more proper place to make + our escape. The counsels of this assembly were not of great moment, yet as + they seem to be introductory of many more remarkable adventures which + happened under my conduct hereabouts many years after, I think this + miniature of my future enterprises may not be unpleasant to relate. + </p> + <p> + To the building of a boat I made no objection, and away they went to work + immediately; but as they went on, great difficulties occurred, such as the + want of saws to cut our plank; nails, bolts, and spikes, to fasten the + timbers; hemp, pitch, and tar, to caulk and pay her seams, and the like. + At length, one of the company proposed that, instead of building a bark or + sloop, or shallop, or whatever they would call it, which they found was so + difficult, they would rather make a large periagua, or canoe, which might + be done with great ease. + </p> + <p> + It was presently objected, that we could never make a canoe large enough + to pass the great ocean, which we were to go over to get to the coast of + Malabar; that it not only would not bear the sea, but it would never bear + the burden, for we were not only twenty-seven men of us, but had a great + deal of luggage with us, and must, for our provision, take in a great deal + more. + </p> + <p> + I never proposed to speak in their general consultations before, but + finding they were at some loss about what kind of vessel they should make, + and how to make it, and what would be fit for our use, and what not, I + told them I found they were at a full stop in their counsels of every + kind; that it was true we could never pretend to go over to Goa on the + coast of Malabar in a canoe, which though we could all get into it, and + that it would bear the sea well enough, yet would not hold our provisions, + and especially we could not put fresh water enough into it for the voyage; + and to make such an adventure would be nothing but mere running into + certain destruction, and yet that nevertheless I was for making a canoe. + </p> + <p> + They answered, that they understood all I had said before well enough, but + what I meant by telling them first how dangerous and impossible it was to + make our escape in a canoe, and yet then to advise making a canoe, that + they could not understand. + </p> + <p> + To this I answered, that I conceived our business was not to attempt our + escape in a canoe, but that, as there were other vessels at sea besides + our ship, and that there were few nations that lived on the sea-shore that + were so barbarous, but that they went to sea in some boats or other, our + business was to cruise along the coast of the island, which was very long, + and to seize upon the first we could get that was better than our own, and + so from that to another, till perhaps we might at last get a good ship to + carry us wherever we pleased to go. + </p> + <p> + "Excellent advice," says one of them. "Admirable advice," says another. + "Yes, yes," says the third (which was the gunner), "the English dog has + given excellent advice; but it is just the way to bring us all to the + gallows. The rogue has given us devilish advice, indeed, to go a-thieving, + till from a little vessel we came to a great ship, and so we shall turn + downright pirates, the end of which is to be hanged." + </p> + <p> + "You may call us pirates," says another, "if you will, and if we fall into + bad hands, we may be used like pirates; but I care not for that, I'll be a + pirate, or anything, nay, I'll be hanged for a pirate rather than starve + here, therefore I think the advice is very good." And so they cried all, + "Let us have a canoe." The gunner, over-ruled by the rest, submitted; but + as we broke up the council, he came to me, takes me by the hand, and, + looking into the palm of my hand, and into my face too, very gravely, "My + lad," says he, "thou art born to do a world of mischief; thou hast + commenced pirate very young; but have a care of the gallows, young man; + have a care, I say, for thou wilt be an eminent thief." + </p> + <p> + I laughed at him, and told him I did not know what I might come to + hereafter, but as our case was now, I should make no scruple to take the + first ship I came at to get our liberty; I only wished we could see one, + and come at her. Just while we were talking, one of our men that was at + the door of our hut, told us that the carpenter, who it seems was upon a + hill at a distance, cried out, "A sail! a sail!" + </p> + <p> + We all turned out immediately; but, though it was very clear weather, we + could see nothing; but the carpenter continuing to halloo to us, "A sail! + a sail!" away we run up the hill, and there we saw a ship plainly; but it + was at a very great distance, too far for us to make any signal to her. + However, we made a fire upon the hill, with all the wood we could get + together, and made as much smoke as possible. The wind was down, and it + was almost calm; but as we thought, by a perspective glass which the + gunner had in his pocket, her sails were full, and she stood away large + with the wind at E.N.E., taking no notice of our signal, but making for + the Cape de Bona Speranza; so we had no comfort from her. + </p> + <p> + We went, therefore, immediately to work about our intended canoe; and, + having singled out a very large tree to our minds, we fell to work with + her; and having three good axes among us, we got it down, but it was four + days' time first, though we worked very hard too. I do not remember what + wood it was, or exactly what dimensions, but I remember that it was a very + large one, and we were as much encouraged when we launched it, and found + it swam upright and steady, as we would have been at another time if we + had had a good man-of-war at our command. + </p> + <p> + She was so very large, that she carried us all very, very easily, and + would have carried two or three tons of baggage with us; so that we began + to consult about going to sea directly to Goa; but many other + considerations checked that thought, especially when we came to look + nearer into it; such as want of provisions, and no casks for fresh water; + no compass to steer by; no shelter from the breach of the high sea, which + would certainly founder us; no defence from the heat of the weather, and + the like; so that they all came readily into my project, to cruise about + where we were, and see what might offer. + </p> + <p> + Accordingly, to gratify our fancy, we went one day all out to sea in her + together, and we were in a very fair way to have had enough of it; for + when she had us all on board, and that we were gotten about half a league + to sea, there happening to be a pretty high swell of the sea, though + little or no wind, yet she wallowed so in the sea, that we all of us + thought she would at last wallow herself bottom up; so we set all to work + to get her in nearer the shore, and giving her fresh way in the sea, she + swam more steady, and with some hard work we got her under the land again. + </p> + <p> + We were now at a great loss; the natives were civil enough to us, and came + often to discourse with us; one time they brought one whom they showed + respect to as a king with them, and they set up a long pole between them + and us, with a great tassel of hair hanging, not on the top, but something + above the middle of it, adorned with little chains, shells, bits of brass, + and the like; and this, we understood afterwards, was a token of amity and + friendship; and they brought down to us victuals in abundance, cattle, + fowls, herbs, and roots; but we were in the utmost confusion on our side; + for we had nothing to buy with, or exchange for; and as to giving us + things for nothing they had no notion of that again. As to our money, it + was mere trash to them, they had no value for it; so that we were in a + fair way to be starved. Had we had but some toys and trinkets, brass + chains, baubles, glass beads, or, in a word, the veriest trifles that a + shipload of would not have been worth the freight, we might have bought + cattle and provisions enough for an army, or to victual a fleet of + men-of-war; but for gold or silver we could get nothing. + </p> + <p> + Upon this we were in a strange consternation. I was but a young fellow, + but I was for falling upon them with our firearms, and taking all the + cattle from them, and send them to the devil to stop their hunger, rather + than be starved ourselves; but I did not consider that this might have + brought ten thousand of them down upon us the next day; and though we + might have killed a vast number of them, and perhaps have frighted the + rest, yet their own desperation, and our small number, would have animated + them so that, one time or other, they would have destroyed us all. + </p> + <p> + In the middle of our consultation, one of our men who had been a kind of a + cutler, or worker in iron, started up and asked the carpenter if, among + all his tools, he could not help him to a file. "Yes," says the carpenter, + "I can, but it is a small one." "The smaller the better," says the other. + Upon this he goes to work, and first by heating a piece of an old broken + chisel in the fire, and then with the help of his file, he made himself + several kinds of tools for his work. Then he takes three or four pieces of + eight, and beats them out with a hammer upon a stone, till they were very + broad and thin; then he cuts them out into the shape of birds and beasts; + he made little chains of them for bracelets and necklaces, and turned them + into so many devices of his own head, that it is hardly to be expressed. + </p> + <p> + When he had for about a fortnight exercised his head and hands at this + work, we tried the effect of his ingenuity; and, having another meeting + with the natives, were surprised to see the folly of the poor people. For + a little bit of silver cut in the shape of a bird, we had two cows, and, + which was our loss, if it had been in brass, it had been still of more + value. For one of the bracelets made of chain-work, we had as much + provision of several sorts, as would fairly have been worth, in England, + fifteen or sixteen pounds; and so of all the rest. Thus, that which when + it was in coin was not worth sixpence to us, when thus converted into toys + and trifles, was worth a hundred times its real value, and purchased for + us anything we had occasion for. + </p> + <p> + In this condition we lived upwards of a year, but all of us began to be + very much tired of it, and, whatever came of it, resolved to attempt an + escape. We had furnished ourselves with no less than three very good + canoes; and as the monsoons, or trade-winds, generally affect that + country, blowing in most parts of this island one six months of a year one + way, and the other six months another way, we concluded we might be able + to bear the sea well enough. But always, when we came to look into it, the + want of fresh water was the thing that put us off from such an adventure, + for it is a prodigious length, and what no man on earth could be able to + perform without water to drink. + </p> + <p> + Being thus prevailed upon by our own reason to set the thoughts of that + voyage aside, we had then but two things before us; one was, to put to sea + the other way; viz., west, and go away for the Cape of Good Hope, where, + first or last, we should meet with some of our own country ships, or else + to put for the mainland of Africa, and either travel by land, or sail + along the coast towards the Red Sea, where we should, first or last, find + a ship of some nation or other, that would take us up; or perhaps we might + take them up, which, by-the-bye, was the thing that always ran in my head. + </p> + <p> + It was our ingenious cutler, whom ever after we called silversmith, that + proposed this; but the gunner told him, that he had been in the Red Sea in + a Malabar sloop, and he knew this, that if we went into the Red Sea, we + should either be killed by the wild Arabs, or taken and made slaves of by + the Turks; and therefore he was not for going that way. + </p> + <p> + Upon this I took occasion to put in my vote again. "Why," said I, "do we + talk of being killed by the Arabs, or made slaves of by the Turks? Are we + not able to board almost any vessel we shall meet with in those seas; and, + instead of their taking us, we to take them?" "Well done, pirate," said + the gunner (he that had looked in my hand, and told me I should come to + the gallows), "I'll say that for him," says he, "he always looks the same + way. But I think, of my conscience, it is our only way now." "Don't tell + me," says I, "of being a pirate; we must be pirates, or anything, to get + fairly out of this cursed place." + </p> + <p> + In a word, they concluded all, by my advice, that our business was to + cruise for anything we could see. "Why then," said I to them, "our first + business is to see if the people upon this island have no navigation, and + what boats they use; and, if they have any better or bigger than ours, let + us take one of them." First, indeed, all our aim was to get, if possible, + a boat with a deck and a sail; for then we might have saved our + provisions, which otherwise we could not. + </p> + <p> + We had, to our great good fortune, one sailor among us, who had been + assistant to the cook; he told us, that he would find a way how to + preserve our beef without cask or pickle; and this he did effectually by + curing it in the sun, with the help of saltpetre, of which there was great + plenty in the island; so that, before we found any method for our escape, + we had dried the flesh of six or seven cows and bullocks, and ten or + twelve goats, and it relished so well, that we never gave ourselves the + trouble to boil it when we ate it, but either broiled it or ate it dry. + But our main difficulty about fresh water still remained; for we had no + vessel to put any into, much less to keep any for our going to sea. + </p> + <p> + But our first voyage being only to coast the island, we resolved to + venture, whatever the hazard or consequence of it might be, and in order + to preserve as much fresh water as we could, our carpenter made a well + athwart the middle of one of our canoes, which he separated from the other + parts of the canoe, so as to make it tight to hold the water and covered + so as we might step upon it; and this was so large that it held near a + hogshead of water very well. I cannot better describe this well than by + the same kind which the small fishing-boats in England have to preserve + their fish alive in; only that this, instead of having holes to let the + salt water in, was made sound every way to keep it out; and it was the + first invention, I believe, of its kind for such an use; but necessity is + a spur to ingenuity and the mother of invention. + </p> + <p> + It wanted but a little consultation to resolve now upon our voyage. The + first design was only to coast it round the island, as well to see if we + could seize upon any vessel fit to embark ourselves in, as also to take + hold of any opportunity which might present for our passing over to the + main; and therefore our resolution was to go on the inside or west shore + of the island, where, at least at one point, the land stretching a great + way to the north-west, the distance is not extraordinary great from the + island to the coast of Africa. + </p> + <p> + Such a voyage, and with such a desperate crew, I believe was never made, + for it is certain we took the worst side of the island to look for any + shipping, especially for shipping of other nations, this being quite out + of the way; however, we put to sea, after taking all our provisions and + ammunition, bag and baggage, on board; we had made both mast and sail for + our two large periaguas, and the other we paddled along as well as we + could; but when a gale sprung up, we took her in tow. + </p> + <p> + We sailed merrily forward for several days, meeting with nothing to + interrupt us. We saw several of the natives in small canoes catching fish, + and sometimes we endeavoured to come near enough to speak with them, but + they were always shy and afraid of us, making in for the shore as soon as + we attempted it; till one of our company remembered the signal of + friendship which the natives made us from the south part of the island, + viz., of setting up a long pole, and put us in mind that perhaps it was + the same thing to them as a flag of truce to us. So we resolved to try it; + and accordingly the next time we saw any of their fishing-boats at sea we + put up a pole in our canoe that had no sail, and rowed towards them. As + soon as they saw the pole they stayed for us, and as we came nearer + paddled towards us; when they came to us they showed themselves very much + pleased, and gave us some large fish, of which we did not know the names, + but they were very good. It was our misfortune still that we had nothing + to give them in return; but our artist, of whom I spoke before, gave them + two little thin plates of silver, beaten, as I said before, out of a piece + of eight; they were cut in a diamond square, longer one way than the + other, and a hole punched at one of the longest corners. This they were so + fond of that they made us stay till they had cast their lines and nets + again, and gave us as many fish as we cared to have. + </p> + <p> + All this while we had our eyes upon their boats, viewed them very + narrowly, and examined whether any of them were fit for our turn, but they + were poor, sorry things; their sail was made of a large mat, only one that + was of a piece of cotton stuff fit for little, and their ropes were + twisted flags of no strength; so we concluded we were better as we were, + and let them alone. We went forward to the north, keeping the coast close + on board for twelve days together, and having the wind at east and E.S.E., + we made very fresh way. We saw no towns on the shore, but often saw some + huts by the water-side upon the rocks, and always abundance of people + about them, who we could perceive run together to stare at us. + </p> + <p> + It was as odd a voyage as ever man went; we were a little fleet of three + ships, and an army of between twenty and thirty as dangerous fellows as + ever they had amongst them; and had they known what we were, they would + have compounded to give us everything we desired to be rid of us. + </p> + <p> + On the other hand, we were as miserable as nature could well make us to + be, for we were upon a voyage and no voyage, we were bound somewhere and + nowhere; for though we knew what we intended to do, we did really not know + what we were doing. We went forward and forward by a northerly course, and + as we advanced the heat increased, which began to be intolerable to us, + who were on the water, without any covering from heat or wet; besides, we + were now in the month of October, or thereabouts, in a southern latitude; + and as we went every day nearer the sun, the sun came also every day + nearer to us, till at last we found ourselves in the latitude of 20 + degrees; and having passed the tropic about five or six days before that, + in a few days more the sun would be in the zenith, just over our heads. + </p> + <p> + Upon these considerations we resolved to seek for a good place to go on + shore again, and pitch our tents, till the heat of the weather abated. We + had by this time measured half the length of the island, and were come to + that part where the shore tending away to the north-west, promised fair to + make our passage over to the mainland of Africa much shorter than we + expected. But, notwithstanding that, we had good reason to believe it was + about 120 leagues. + </p> + <p> + So, the heats considered, we resolved to take harbour; besides, our + provisions were exhausted, and we had not many days' store left. + Accordingly, putting in for the shore early in the morning, as we usually + did once in three or four days for fresh water, we sat down and considered + whether we would go on or take up our standing there; but upon several + considerations, too long to repeat here, we did not like the place, so we + resolved to go on a few days longer. + </p> + <p> + After sailing on N.W. by N. with a fresh gale at S.E., about six days, we + found, at a great distance, a large promontory or cape of land, pushing + out a long way into the sea, and as we were exceeding fond of seeing what + was beyond the cape, we resolved to double it before we took into harbour, + so we kept on our way, the gale continuing, and yet it was four days more + before we reached the cape. But it is not possible to express the + discouragement and melancholy that seized us all when we came thither; for + when we made the headland of the cape, we were surprised to see the shore + fall away on the other side as much as it had advanced on this side, and a + great deal more; and that, in short, if we would venture over to the shore + of Africa, it must be from hence, for that if we went further, the breadth + of the sea still increased, and to what breadth it might increase we knew + not. + </p> + <p> + While we mused upon this discovery, we were surprised with very bad + weather, and especially violent rains, with thunder and lightning, most + unusually terrible to us. In this pickle we run for the shore, and getting + under the lee of the cape, run our frigates into a little creek, where we + saw the land overgrown with trees, and made all the haste possible to get + on shore, being exceeding wet, and fatigued with the heat, the thunder, + lightning, and rain. + </p> + <p> + Here we thought our case was very deplorable indeed, and therefore our + artist, of whom I have spoken so often, set up a great cross of wood on + the hill which was within a mile of the headland, with these words, but in + the Portuguese language:— + </p> + <p> + "Point Desperation. Jesus have mercy." + </p> + <p> + We set to work immediately to build us some huts, and to get our clothes + dried; and though I was young and had no skill in such things, yet I shall + never forget the little city we built, for it was no less, and we + fortified it accordingly; and the idea is so fresh in my thought, that I + cannot but give a short description of it. + </p> + <p> + Our camp was on the south side of a little creek on the sea, and under the + shelter of a steep hill, which lay, though on the other side of the creek, + yet within a quarter of a mile of us, N.W. by N., and very happily + intercepted the heat of the sun all the after part of the day. The spot we + pitched on had a little fresh water brook, or a stream running into the + creek by us; and we saw cattle feeding in the plains and low ground east + and to the south of us a great way. + </p> + <p> + Here we set up twelve little huts like soldiers' tents, but made of the + boughs of trees stuck in the ground, and bound together on the top with + withies, and such other things as we could get; the creek was our defence + on the north, a little brook on the west, and the south and east sides + were fortified with a bank, which entirely covered our huts; and being + drawn oblique from the north-west to the south-east, made our city a + triangle. Behind the bank or line our huts stood, having three other huts + behind them at a good distance. In one of these, which was a little one, + and stood further off, we put our gunpowder, and nothing else, for fear of + danger; in the other, which was bigger, we dressed our victuals, and put + all our necessaries; and in the third, which was biggest of all, we ate + our dinners, called our councils, and sat and diverted ourselves with such + conversation as we had one with another, which was but indifferent truly + at that time. + </p> + <p> + Our correspondence with the natives was absolutely necessary, and our + artist the cutler having made abundance of those little diamond-cut + squares of silver, with these we made shift to traffic with the black + people for what we wanted; for indeed they were pleased wonderfully with + them, and thus we got plenty of provisions. At first, and in particular, + we got about fifty head of black cattle and goats, and our cook's mate + took care to cure them and dry them, salt and preserve them for our grand + supply; nor was this hard to do, the salt and saltpetre being very good, + and the sun excessively hot; and here we lived about four months. + </p> + <p> + The southern solstice was over, and the sun gone back towards the + equinoctial, when we considered of our next adventure, which was to go + over the sea of Zanguebar, as the Portuguese call it, and to land, if + possible, upon the continent of Africa. + </p> + <p> + We talked with many of the natives about it, such as we could make + ourselves intelligible to, but all that we could learn from them was, that + there was a great land of lions beyond the sea, but that it was a great + way off. We knew as well as they that it was a long way, but our people + differed mightily about it; some said it was 150 leagues, others not above + 100. One of our men, that had a map of the world, showed us by his scale + that it was not above eighty leagues. Some said there were islands all the + way to touch at, some that there were no islands at all. For my own part, + I knew nothing of this matter one way or another, but heard it all without + concern, whether it was near or far off; however, this we learned from an + old man who was blind and led about by a boy, that if we stayed till the + end of August, we should be sure of the wind to be fair and the sea smooth + all the voyage. + </p> + <p> + This was some encouragement; but staying again was very unwelcome news to + us, because that then the sun would be returning again to the south, which + was what our men were very unwilling to. At last we called a council of + our whole body; their debates were too tedious to take notice of, only to + note, that when it came to Captain Bob (for so they called me ever since I + had taken state upon me before one of their great princes), truly I was on + no side; it was not one farthing matter to me, I told them, whether we + went or stayed; I had no home, and all the world was alike to me; so I + left it entirely to them to determine. + </p> + <p> + In a word, they saw plainly there was nothing to be done where we were + without shipping; that if our business indeed was only to eat and drink, + we could not find a better place in the world; but if our business was to + get away, and get home into our country, we could not find a worse. + </p> + <p> + I confess I liked the country wonderfully, and even then had strange + notions of coming again to live there; and I used to say to them very + often that if I had but a ship of twenty guns, and a sloop, and both well + manned, I would not desire a better place in the world to make myself as + rich as a king. + </p> + <p> + But to return to the consultations they were in about going. Upon the + whole, it was resolved to venture over for the main; and venture we did, + madly enough, indeed, for it was the wrong time of the year to undertake + such a voyage in that country; for, as the winds hang easterly all the + months from September to March, so they generally hang westerly all the + rest of the year, and blew right in our teeth; so that, as soon as we had, + with a kind of a land-breeze, stretched over about fifteen or twenty + leagues, and, as I may say, just enough to lose ourselves, we found the + wind set in a steady fresh gale or breeze from the sea, at west, W.S.W., + or S.W. by W., and never further from the west; so that, in a word, we + could make nothing of it. + </p> + <p> + On the other hand, the vessel, such as we had, would not lie close upon a + wind; if so, we might have stretched away N.N.W., and have met with a + great many islands in our way, as we found afterwards; but we could make + nothing of it, though we tried, and by the trying had almost undone us + all; for, stretching away to the north, as near the wind as we could, we + had forgotten the shape and position of the island of Madagascar itself; + how that we came off at the head of a promontory or point of land, that + lies about the middle of the island, and that stretches out west a great + way into the sea; and that now, being run a matter of forty leagues to the + north, the shore of the island fell off again above 200 miles to the east, + so that we were by this time in the wide ocean, between the island and the + main, and almost 100 leagues from both. + </p> + <p> + Indeed, as the winds blew fresh at west, as before, we had a smooth sea, + and we found it pretty good going before it, and so, taking our smallest + canoe in tow, we stood in for the shore with all the sail we could make. + This was a terrible adventure, for, if the least gust of wind had come, we + had been all lost, our canoes being deep and in no condition to make way + in a high sea. + </p> + <p> + This voyage, however, held us eleven days in all; and at length, having + spent most of our provisions, and every drop of water we had, we spied + land, to our great joy, though at the distance of ten or eleven leagues; + and as, under the land, the wind came off like a land-breeze, and blew + hard against us, we were two days more before we reached the shore, having + all that while excessive hot weather, and not a drop of water or any other + liquor, except some cordial waters, which one of our company had a little + of left in a case of bottles. + </p> + <p> + This gave us a taste of what we should have done if we had ventured + forward with a scant wind and uncertain weather, and gave us a surfeit of + our design for the main, at least until we might have some better vessels + under us; so we went on shore again, and pitched our camp as before, in as + convenient manner as we could, fortifying ourselves against any surprise; + but the natives here were exceeding courteous, and much more civil than on + the south part of the island; and though we could not understand what they + said, or they us, yet we found means to make them understand that we were + seafaring men and strangers, and that we were in distress for want of + provisions. + </p> + <p> + The first proof we had of their kindness was, that as soon as they saw us + come on shore and begin to make our habitation, one of their captains or + kings, for we knew not what to call them, came down with five or six men + and some women, and brought us five goats and two young fat steers, and + gave them to us for nothing; and when we went to offer them anything, the + captain or the king would not let any of them touch it, or take anything + of us. About two hours after came another king, or captain, with forty or + fifty men after him. We began to be afraid of him, and laid hands upon our + weapons; but he perceiving it, caused two men to go before him, carrying + two long poles in their hands, which they held upright, as high as they + could, which we presently perceived was a signal of peace; and these two + poles they set up afterwards, sticking them up in the ground; and when the + king and his men came to these two poles, they struck all their lances up + in the ground, and came on unarmed, leaving their lances, as also their + bows and arrows, behind them. + </p> + <p> + This was to satisfy us that they were come as friends, and we were glad to + see it, for we had no mind to quarrel with them if we could help it. The + captain of this gang seeing some of our men making up their huts, and that + they did it but bunglingly, he beckoned to some of his men to go and help + us. Immediately fifteen or sixteen of them came and mingled among us, and + went to work for us; and indeed, they were better workmen than we were, + for they run up three or four huts for us in a moment, and much handsomer + done than ours. + </p> + <p> + After this they sent us milk, plantains, pumpkins, and abundance of roots + and greens that were very good, and then took their leave, and would not + take anything from us that we had. One of our men offered the king or + captain of these men a dram, which he drank and was mightily pleased with + it, and held out his hand for another, which we gave him; and in a word, + after this, he hardly failed coming to us two or three times a week, + always bringing us something or other; and one time sent us seven head of + black cattle, some of which we cured and dried as before. + </p> + <p> + And here I cannot but remember one thing, which afterwards stood us in + great stead, viz., that the flesh of their goats, and their beef also, but + especially the former, when we had dried and cured it, looked red, and ate + hard and firm, as dried beef in Holland; they were so pleased with it, and + it was such a dainty to them, that at any time after they would trade with + us for it, not knowing, or so much as imagining what it was; so that for + ten or twelve pounds' weight of smoke-dried beef, they would give us a + whole bullock, or cow, or anything else we could desire. + </p> + <p> + Here we observed two things that were very material to us, even + essentially so; first, we found they had a great deal of earthenware here, + which they made use of many ways as we did; particularly they had long, + deep earthen pots, which they used to sink into the ground, to keep the + water which they drunk cool and pleasant; and the other was, that they had + larger canoes than their neighbours had. + </p> + <p> + By this we were prompted to inquire if they had no larger vessels than + those we saw there, or if any other of the inhabitants had not such. They + signified presently that they had no larger boats than that they showed + us; but that on the other side of the island they had larger boats, and + that with decks upon them, and large sails; and this made us resolve to + coast round the whole island to see them; so we prepared and victualled + our canoe for the voyage, and, in a word, went to sea for the third time. + </p> + <p> + It cost us a month or six weeks' time to perform this voyage, in which + time we went on shore several times for water and provisions, and found + the natives always very free and courteous; but we were surprised one + morning early, being at the extremity of the northernmost part of the + island, when one of our men cried out, "A sail! a sail!" We presently saw + a vessel a great way out at sea; but after we had looked at it with our + perspective glasses, and endeavoured all we could to make out what it was, + we could not tell what to think of it; for it was neither ship, ketch, + galley, galliot, or like anything that we had ever seen before; all that + we could make of it was, that it went from us, standing out to sea. In a + word, we soon lost sight of it, for we were in no condition to chase + anything, and we never saw it again; but, by all that we could perceive of + it, from what we saw of such things afterwards, it was some Arabian + vessel, which had been trading to the coast of Mozambique, or Zanzibar, + the same place where we afterwards went, as you shall hear. + </p> + <p> + I kept no journal of this voyage, nor indeed did I all this while + understand anything of navigation, more than the common business of a + foremast-man; so I can say nothing to the latitudes or distances of any + places we were at, how long we were going, or how far we sailed in a day; + but this I remember, that being now come round the island, we sailed up + the eastern shore due south, as we had done down the western shore due + north before. + </p> + <p> + Nor do I remember that the natives differed much from one another, either + in stature or complexion, or in their manners, their habits, their + weapons, or indeed in anything; and yet we could not perceive that they + had any intelligence one with another; but they were extremely kind and + civil to us on this side, as well as on the other. + </p> + <p> + We continued our voyage south for many weeks, though with several + intervals of going on shore to get provisions and water. At length, coming + round a point of land which lay about a league further than ordinary into + the sea, we were agreeably surprised with a sight which, no doubt, had + been as disagreeable to those concerned, as it was pleasant to us. This + was the wreck of an European ship, which had been cast away upon the + rocks, which in that place run a great way into the sea. + </p> + <p> + We could see plainly, at low water, a great deal of the ship lay dry; even + at high water, she was not entirely covered; and that at most she did not + lie above a league from the shore. It will easily be believed that our + curiosity led us, the wind and weather also permitting, to go directly to + her, which we did without any difficulty, and presently found that it was + a Dutch-built ship, and that she could not have been very long in that + condition, a great deal of the upper work of her stern remaining firm, + with the mizzen-mast standing. Her stern seemed to be jammed in between + two ridges of the rock, and so remained fast, all the fore part of the + ship having been beaten to pieces. + </p> + <p> + We could see nothing to be gotten out of the wreck that was worth our + while; but we resolved to go on shore, and stay some time thereabouts, to + see if perhaps we might get any light into the story of her; and we were + not without hopes that we might hear something more particular about her + men, and perhaps find some of them on shore there, in the same condition + that we were in, and so might increase our company. + </p> + <p> + It was a very pleasant sight to us when, coming on shore, we saw all the + marks and tokens of a ship-carpenter's yard; as a launch-block and + cradles, scaffolds and planks, and pieces of planks, the remains of the + building a ship or vessel; and, in a word, a great many things that fairly + invited us to go about the same work; and we soon came to understand that + the men belonging to the ship that was lost had saved themselves on shore, + perhaps in their boat, and had built themselves a barque or sloop, and so + were gone to sea again; and, inquiring of the natives which way they went, + they pointed to the south and south-west, by which we could easily + understand they were gone away to the Cape of Good Hope. + </p> + <p> + Nobody will imagine we could be so dull as not to gather from hence that + we might take the same method for our escape; so we resolved first, in + general, that we would try if possible to build us a boat of one kind or + other, and go to sea as our fate should direct. + </p> + <p> + In order to this our first work was to have the two carpenters search + about to see what materials the Dutchmen had left behind them that might + be of use; and, in particular, they found one that was very useful, and + which I was much employed about, and that was a pitch-kettle, and a little + pitch in it. + </p> + <p> + When we came to set close to this work we found it very laborious and + difficult, having but few tools, no ironwork, no cordage, no sails; so + that, in short, whatever we built, we were obliged to be our own smiths, + rope-makers, sail-makers, and indeed to practise twenty trades that we + knew little or nothing of. However, necessity was the spur to invention, + and we did many things which before we thought impracticable, that is to + say, in our circumstances. + </p> + <p> + After our two carpenters had resolved upon the dimensions of what they + would build, they set us all to work, to go off in our boats and split up + the wreck of the old ship, and to bring away everything we could; and + particularly that, if possible, we should bring away the mizzen-mast, + which was left standing, which with much difficulty we effected, after + above twenty days' labour of fourteen of our men. + </p> + <p> + At the same time we got out a great deal of ironwork, as bolts, spikes, + nails, &c., all of which our artist, of whom I have spoken already, + who was now grown a very dexterous smith, made us nails and hinges for our + rudder, and spikes such as we wanted. + </p> + <p> + But we wanted an anchor, and if we had had an anchor, we could not have + made a cable; so we contented ourselves with making some ropes with the + help of the natives, of such stuff as they made their mats of, and with + these we made such a kind of cable or tow-line as was sufficient to fasten + our vessel to the shore, which we contented ourselves with for that time. + </p> + <p> + To be short, we spent four months here, and worked very hard too; at the + end of which time we launched our frigate, which, in a few words, had many + defects, but yet, all things considered, it was as well as we could expect + it to be. + </p> + <p> + In short, it was a kind of sloop, of the burthen of near eighteen or + twenty tons; and had we had masts and sails, standing and running rigging, + as is usual in such cases, and other conveniences, the vessel might have + carried us wherever we could have had a mind to go; but of all the + materials we wanted, this was the worst, viz., that we had no tar or pitch + to pay the seams and secure the bottom; and though we did what we could, + with tallow and oil, to make a mixture to supply that part, yet we could + not bring it to answer our end fully; and when we launched her into the + water, she was so leaky, and took in the water so fast, that we thought + all our labour had been lost, for we had much ado to make her swim; and as + for pumps, we had none, nor had we any means to make one. + </p> + <p> + But at length one of the natives, a black negro-man, showed us a tree, the + wood of which being put into the fire, sends forth a liquid that is as + glutinous and almost as strong as tar, and of which, by boiling, we made a + sort of stuff which served us for pitch, and this answered our end + effectually; for we perfectly made our vessel sound and tight, so that we + wanted no pitch or tar at all. This secret has stood me in stead upon many + occasions since that time in the same place. + </p> + <p> + Our vessel being thus finished, out of the mizzen-mast of the ship we made + a very good mast to her, and fitted our sails to it as well as we could; + then we made a rudder and tiller, and, in a word, everything that our + present necessity called upon us for; and having victualled her, and put + as much fresh water on board as we thought we wanted, or as we knew how to + stow (for we were yet without casks), we put to sea with a fair wind. + </p> + <p> + We had spent near another year in these rambles, and in this piece of + work; for it was now, as our men said, about the beginning of our + February, and the sun went from us apace, which was much to our + satisfaction, for the heats were exceedingly violent. The wind, as I said, + was fair; for, as I have since learned, the winds generally spring up to + the eastward, as the sun goes from them to the north. + </p> + <p> + Our debate now was, which way we should go, and never were men so + irresolute; some were for going to the east, and stretching away directly + for the coast of Malabar; but others, who considered more seriously the + length of that voyage, shook their heads at the proposal, knowing very + well that neither our provisions, especially of water, or our vessel, were + equal to such a run as that is, of near 2000 miles without any land to + touch at in the way. + </p> + <p> + These men, too, had all along had a great mind to a voyage for the + mainland of Africa, where they said we should have a fair cast for our + lives, and might be sure to make ourselves rich, which way soever we went, + if we were but able to make our way through, whether by sea or by land. + </p> + <p> + Besides, as the case stood with us, we had not much choice for our way; + for, if we had resolved for the east, we were at the wrong season of the + year, and must have stayed till April or May before we had gone to sea. At + length, as we had the wind at S.E. and E.S.E., and fine promising weather, + we came all into the first proposal, and resolved for the coast of Africa; + nor were we long in disputing as to our coasting the island which we were + upon, for we were now upon the wrong side of the island for the voyage we + intended; so we stood away to the north, and, having rounded the cape, we + hauled away southward, under the lee of the island, thinking to reach the + west point of land, which, as I observed before, runs out so far towards + the coast of Africa, as would have shortened our run almost 100 leagues. + But when we had sailed about thirty leagues, we found the winds variable + under the shore, and right against us, so we concluded to stand over + directly, for then we had the wind fair, and our vessel was but very ill + fated to lie near the wind, or any way indeed but just before it. + </p> + <p> + Having resolved upon it, therefore, we put into the shore to furnish + ourselves again with fresh water and other provisions, and about the + latter end of March, with more courage than discretion, more resolution + than judgment, we launched for the main coast of Africa. + </p> + <p> + As for me, I had no anxieties about it, so that we had but a view of + reaching some land or other, I cared not what or where it was to be, + having at this time no views of what was before me, nor much thought of + what might or might not befall me; but with as little consideration as any + one can be supposed to have at my age, I consented to everything that was + proposed, however hazardous the thing itself, however improbable the + success. + </p> + <p> + The voyage, as it was undertaken with a great deal of ignorance and + desperation, so really it was not carried on with much resolution or + judgment; for we knew no more of the course we were to steer than this, + that it was anywhere about the west, within two or three points N. or S., + and as we had no compass with us but a little brass pocket compass, which + one of our men had more by accident than otherwise, so we could not be + very exact in our course. + </p> + <p> + However, as it pleased God that the wind continued fair at S.E. and by E., + we found that N.W. by W., which was right afore it, was as good a course + for us as any we could go, and thus we went on. + </p> + <p> + The voyage was much longer than we expected; our vessel also, which had no + sail that was proportioned to her, made but very little way in the sea, + and sailed heavily. We had, indeed, no great adventures happened in this + voyage, being out of the way of everything that could offer to divert us; + and as for seeing any vessel, we had not the least occasion to hail + anything in all the voyage; for we saw not one vessel, small or great, the + sea we were upon being entirely out of the way of all commerce; for the + people of Madagascar knew no more of the shores of Africa than we did, + only that there was a country of lions, as they call it, that way. + </p> + <p> + We had been eight or nine days under sail, with a fair wind, when, to our + great joy, one of our men cried out "Land!" We had great reason to be glad + of the discovery, for we had not water enough left for above two or three + days more, though at a short allowance. However, though it was early in + the morning when we discovered it, we made it near night before we reached + it, the wind slackening almost to a calm, and our ship being, as I said, a + very dull sailer. + </p> + <p> + We were sadly baulked upon our coming to the land, when we found that, + instead of the mainland of Africa, it was only a little island, with no + inhabitants upon it, at least none that we could find; nor any cattle, + except a few goats, of which we killed three only. However, they served us + for fresh meat, and we found very good water; and it was fifteen days more + before we reached the main, which, however, at last we arrived at, and + which was most essential to us, as we came to it just as all our + provisions were spent. Indeed, we may say they were spent first, for we + had but a pint of water a day to each man for the last two days. But, to + our great joy, we saw the land, though at a great distance, the evening + before, and by a pleasant gale in the night were by morning within two + leagues of the shore. + </p> + <p> + We never scrupled going ashore at the first place we came at, though, had + we had patience, we might have found a very fine river a little farther + north. However, we kept our frigate on float by the help of two great + poles, which we fastened into the ground to moor her, like poles; and the + little weak ropes, which, as I said, we had made of matting, served us + well enough to make the vessel fast. + </p> + <p> + As soon as we had viewed the country a little, got fresh water, and + furnished ourselves with some victuals, which we found very scarce here, + we went on board again with our stores. All we got for provision was some + fowls that we killed, and a kind of wild buffalo or bull, very small, but + good meat; I say, having got these things on board, we resolved to sail + along the coast, which lay N.N.E., till we found some creek or river, that + we might run up into the country, or some town or people; for we had + reason enough to know the place was inhabited, because we several times + saw fires in the night, and smoke in the day, every way at a distance from + us. + </p> + <p> + At length we came to a very large bay, and in it several little creeks or + rivers emptying themselves into the sea, and we ran boldly into the first + creek we came at; where, seeing some huts and wild people about them on + the shore, we ran our vessel into a little cove on the north side of the + creek, and held up a long pole, with a white bit of cloth on it, for a + signal of peace to them. We found they understood us presently, for they + came flocking to us, men, women, and children, most of them, of both + sexes, stark naked. At first they stood wondering and staring at us, as if + we had been monsters, and as if they had been frighted; but we found they + inclined to be familiar with us afterwards. The first thing we did to try + them, was, we held up our hands to our mouths, as if we were to drink, + signifying that we wanted water. This they understood presently, and three + of their women and two boys ran away up the land, and came back in about + half a quarter of an hour, with several pots, made of earth, pretty + enough, and baked, I suppose, in the sun; these they brought us full of + water, and set them down near the sea-shore, and there left them, going + back a little, that we might fetch them, which we did. + </p> + <p> + Some time after this, they brought us roots and herbs, and some fruits + which I cannot remember, and gave us; but as we had nothing to give them, + we found them not so free as the people in Madagascar were. However, our + cutler went to work, and, as he had saved some iron out of the wreck of + the ship, he made abundance of toys, birds, dogs, pins, hooks, and rings; + and we helped to file them, and make them bright for him, and when we gave + them some of these, they brought us all sorts of provisions they had, such + as goats, hogs, and cows, and we got victuals enough. + </p> + <p> + We were now landed upon the continent of Africa, the most desolate, + desert, and inhospitable country in the world, even Greenland and Nova + Zembla itself not excepted, with this difference only, that even the worst + part of it we found inhabited, though, taking the nature and quality of + some of the inhabitants, it might have been much better to us if there had + been none. + </p> + <p> + And, to add to the exclamation I am making on the nature of the place, it + was here that we took one of the rashest, and wildest, and most desperate + resolutions that ever was taken by man, or any number of men, in the + world; this was, to travel overland through the heart of the country, from + the coast of Mozambique, on the east ocean, to the coast of Angola or + Guinea, on the western or Atlantic Ocean, a continent of land of at least + 1800 miles, in which journey we had excessive heats to support, unpassable + deserts to go over, no carriages, camels, or beasts of any kind to carry + our baggage, innumerable numbers of wild and ravenous beasts to encounter + with, such as lions, leopards, tigers, lizards, and elephants; we had the + equinoctial line to pass under, and, consequently, were in the very centre + of the torrid zone; we had nations of savages to encounter with, barbarous + and brutish to the last degree; hunger and thirst to struggle with, and, + in one word, terrors enough to have daunted the stoutest hearts that ever + were placed in cases of flesh and blood. + </p> + <p> + Yet, fearless of all these, we resolved to adventure, and accordingly made + such preparations for our journey as the place we were in would allow us, + and such as our little experience of the country seemed to dictate to us. + </p> + <p> + It had been some time already that we had been used to tread barefooted + upon the rocks, the gravel, the grass, and the sand on the shore; but as + we found the worst thing for our feet was the walking or travelling on the + dry burning sands, within the country, so we provided ourselves with a + sort of shoes, made of the skins of wild beasts, with the hair inward, and + being dried in the sun, the outsides were thick and hard, and would last a + great while. In short, as I called them, so I think the term very proper + still, we made us gloves for our feet, and we found them very convenient + and very comfortable. + </p> + <p> + We conversed with some of the natives of the country, who were friendly + enough. What tongue they spoke I do not yet pretend to know. We talked as + far as we could make them understand us, not only about our provisions, + but also about our undertaking, and asked them what country lay that way, + pointing west with our hands. They told us but little to our purpose, only + we thought, by all their discourse, that there were people to be found, of + one sort or other, everywhere; that there were many great rivers, many + lions and tigers, elephants, and furious wild cats (which in the end we + found to be civet cats), and the like. + </p> + <p> + When we asked them if any one had ever travelled that way, they told us + yes, some had gone to where the sun sleeps, meaning to the west, but they + could not tell us who they were. When we asked for some to guide us, they + shrunk up their shoulders as Frenchmen do when they are afraid to + undertake a thing. When we asked them about the lions and wild creatures, + they laughed, and let us know that they would do us no hurt, and directed + us to a good way indeed to deal with them, and that was to make some fire, + which would always fright them away; and so indeed we found it. + </p> + <p> + Upon these encouragements we resolved upon our journey, and many + considerations put us upon it, which, had the thing itself been + practicable, we were not so much to blame for as it might otherwise be + supposed; I will name some of them, not to make the account too tedious. + </p> + <p> + First, we were perfectly destitute of means to work about our own + deliverance any other way; we were on shore in a place perfectly remote + from all European navigation; so that we could never think of being + relieved, and fetched off by any of our own countrymen in that part of the + world. Secondly, if we had adventured to have sailed on along the coast of + Mozambique, and the desolate shores of Africa to the north, till we came + to the Red Sea, all we could hope for there was to be taken by the Arabs, + and be sold for slaves to the Turks, which to all of us was little better + than death. We could not build anything of a vessel that would carry us + over the great Arabian Sea to India, nor could we reach the Cape de Bona + Speranza, the winds being too variable, and the sea in that latitude too + tempestuous; but we all knew, if we could cross this continent of land, we + might reach some of the great rivers that run into the Atlantic Ocean; and + that, on the banks of any of those rivers, we might there build us canoes + which would carry us down, if it were thousands of miles, so that we could + want nothing but food, of which we were assured we might kill sufficient + with our guns; and to add to the satisfaction of our deliverance, we + concluded we might, every one of us, get a quantity of gold, which, if we + came safe, would infinitely recompense us for our toil. + </p> + <p> + I cannot say that in all our consultations I ever began to enter into the + weight and merit of any enterprise we went upon till now. My view before + was, as I thought, very good, viz., that we should get into the Arabian + Gulf, or the mouth of the Red Sea; and waiting for some vessel passing or + repassing there, of which there is plenty, have seized upon the first we + came at by force, and not only have enriched ourselves with her cargo, but + have carried ourselves to what part of the world we had pleased; but when + they came to talk to me of a march of 2000 or 3000 miles on foot, of + wandering in deserts among lions and tigers, I confess my blood ran chill, + and I used all the arguments I could to persuade them against it. + </p> + <p> + But they were all positive, and I might as well have held my tongue; so I + submitted, and told them I would keep to our first law, to be governed by + the majority, and we resolved upon our journey. The first thing we did was + to take an observation, and see whereabouts in the world we were, which we + did, and found we were in the latitude of 12 degrees 35 minutes south of + the line. The next thing was to look on the charts, and see the coast of + the country we aimed at, which we found to be from 8 to 11 degrees south + latitude, if we went for the coast of Angola, or in 12 to 29 degrees north + latitude, if we made for the river Niger, and the coast of Guinea. + </p> + <p> + Our aim was for the coast of Angola, which, by the charts we had, lying + very near the same latitude we were then in, our course thither was due + west; and as we were assured we should meet with rivers, we doubted not + but that by their help we might ease our journey, especially if we could + find means to cross the great lake, or inland sea, which the natives call + Coalmucoa, out of which it is said the river Nile has its source or + beginning; but we reckoned without our host, as you will see in the sequel + of our story. + </p> + <p> + The next thing we had to consider was, how to carry our baggage, which we + were first of all determined not to travel without; neither indeed was it + possible for us to do so, for even our ammunition, which was absolutely + necessary to us, and on which our subsistence, I mean for food, as well as + our safety, and particularly our defence against wild beasts and wild men, + depended,—I say, even our ammunition was a load too heavy for us to + carry in a country where the heat was such that we should be load enough + for ourselves. + </p> + <p> + We inquired in the country, and found there was no beast of burthen known + among them, that is to say, neither horses or mules, or asses, camels, or + dromedaries; the only creature they had was a kind of buffalo, or tame + bull, such a one as we had killed; and that some of these they had brought + so to their hand, that they taught them to go and come with their voices, + as they called them to them, or sent them from them; that they made them + carry burthens; and particularly that they would swim over rivers and + lakes upon them, the creatures swimming very high and strong in the water. + </p> + <p> + But we understood nothing of the management of guiding such a creature, or + how to bind a burthen upon them; and this last part of our consultation + puzzled us extremely. At last I proposed a method for them, which, after + some consideration, they found very convenient; and this was, to quarrel + with some of the negro natives, take ten or twelve of them prisoners, and + binding them as slaves, cause them to travel with us, and make them carry + our baggage; which I alleged would be convenient and useful many ways as + well to show us the way, as to converse with other natives for us. + </p> + <p> + This counsel was not accepted at first, but the natives soon gave them + reason to approve it, and also gave them an opportunity to put it in + practice; for, as our little traffic with the natives was hitherto upon + the faith of their first kindness, we found some knavery among them at + last; for having bought some cattle of them for our toys, which, as I + said, our cutler had contrived, one of our men differing with his chapman, + truly they huffed him in their manner, and, keeping the things he had + offered them for the cattle, made their fellows drive away the cattle + before his face, and laugh at him. Our man crying out loud of this + violence, and calling to some of us who were not far off, the negro he was + dealing with threw a lance at him, which came so true, that, if he had not + with great agility jumped aside, and held up his hand also to turn the + lance as it came, it had struck through his body; and, as it was, it + wounded him in the arm; at which the man, enraged, took up his fuzee, and + shot the negro through the heart. + </p> + <p> + The others that were near him, and all those that were with us at a + distance, were so terribly frighted, first, at the flash of fire; + secondly, at the noise; and thirdly, at seeing their countryman killed, + that they stood like men stupid and amazed, at first, for some time; but + after they were a little recovered from their fright, one of them, at a + good distance from us, set up a sudden screaming noise, which, it seems, + is the noise they make when they go to fight; and all the rest + understanding what he meant, answered him, and ran together to the place + where he was, and we not knowing what it meant, stood still, looking upon + one another like a parcel of fools. + </p> + <p> + But we were presently undeceived; for, in two or three minutes more, we + heard the screaming roaring noise go on from one place to another, through + all their little towns; nay, even over the creek to the other side; and, + on a sudden, we saw a naked multitude running from all parts to the place + where the first man began it, as to a rendezvous; and, in less than an + hour, I believe there was near 500 of them gotten together, armed some + with bows and arrows, but most with lances, which they throw at a good + distance, so nicely that they will strike a bird flying. + </p> + <p> + We had but a very little time for consultation, for the multitude was + increasing every moment; and I verily believe, if we had stayed long, they + would have been 10,000 together in a little time. We had nothing to do, + therefore, but to fly to our ship or bark, where indeed we could have + defended ourselves very well, or to advance and try what a volley or two + of small shot would do for us. + </p> + <p> + We resolved immediately upon the latter, depending upon it that the fire + and terror of our shot would soon put them to flight; so we drew up all in + a line, and marched boldly up to them. They stood ready to meet us, + depending, I suppose, to destroy us all with their lances; but before we + came near enough for them to throw their lances, we halted, and, standing + at a good distance from one another, to stretch our line as far as we + could, we gave them a salute with our shot, which, besides what we wounded + that we knew not of, knocked sixteen of them down upon the spot, and three + more were so lamed, that they fell about twenty or thirty yards from them. + </p> + <p> + As soon as we had fired, they set up the horridest yell, or howling, + partly raised by those that were wounded, and partly by those that pitied + and condoled the bodies they saw lie dead, that I never heard anything + like it before or since. + </p> + <p> + We stood stock still after we had fired, to load our guns again, and + finding they did not stir from the place we fired among them again; we + killed about nine of them at the second fire; but as they did not stand so + thick as before, all our men did not fire, seven of us being ordered to + reserve our charge, and to advance as soon as the other had fired, while + the rest loaded again; of which I shall speak again presently. + </p> + <p> + As soon as we had fired the second volley, we shouted as loud as we could, + and the seven men advanced upon them, and, coming about twenty yards + nearer, fired again, and those that were behind having loaded again with + all expedition, followed; but when they saw us advance, they ran screaming + away as if they were bewitched. + </p> + <p> + When we came up to the field of battle, we saw a great number of bodies + lying upon the ground, many more than we could suppose were killed or + wounded; nay, more than we had bullets in our pieces when we fired; and we + could not tell what to make of it; but at length we found how it was, + viz., that they were frighted out of all manner of sense; nay, I do + believe several of those that were really dead, were frighted to death, + and had no wound about them. + </p> + <p> + Of those that were thus frighted, as I have said, several of them, as they + recovered themselves, came and worshipped us (taking us for gods or + devils, I know not which, nor did it much matter to us): some kneeling, + some throwing themselves flat on the ground, made a thousand antic + gestures, but all with tokens of the most profound submission. It + presently came into my head, that we might now, by the law of arms, take + as many prisoners as we would, and make them travel with us, and carry our + baggage. As soon as I proposed it, our men were all of my mind; and + accordingly we secured about sixty lusty young fellows, and let them know + they must go with us; which they seemed very willing to do. But the next + question we had among ourselves, was, how we should do to trust them, for + we found the people not like those of Madagascar, but fierce, revengeful, + and treacherous; for which reason we were sure that we should have no + service from them but that of mere slaves; no subjection that would + continue any longer than the fear of us was upon them, nor any labour but + by violence. + </p> + <p> + Before I go any farther, I must hint to the reader, that from this time + forward I began to enter a little more seriously into the circumstance I + was in, and concerned myself more in the conduct of our affairs; for + though my comrades were all older men, yet I began to find them void of + counsel, or, as I now call it, presence of mind, when they came to the + execution of a thing. The first occasion I took to observe this, was in + their late engagement with the natives, when, though they had taken a good + resolution to attack them and fire upon them, yet, when they had fired the + first time, and found that the negroes did not run as they expected, their + hearts began to fail, and I am persuaded, if their bark had been near + hand, they would every man have run away. + </p> + <p> + Upon this occasion I began to take upon me a little to hearten them up, + and to call upon them to load again, and give them another volley, telling + them that I would engage, if they would be ruled by me, I'd make the + negroes run fast enough. I found this heartened them, and therefore, when + they fired a second time, I desired them to reserve some of their shot for + an attempt by itself, as I mentioned above. + </p> + <p> + Having fired a second time, I was indeed forced to command, as I may call + it. "Now, seigniors," said I, "let us give them a cheer." So I opened my + throat, and shouted three times, as our English sailors do on like + occasions. "And now follow me," said I to the seven that had not fired, + "and I'll warrant you we will make work with them," and so it proved + indeed; for, as soon as they saw us coming, away they ran, as above. + </p> + <p> + From this day forward they would call me nothing but Seignior Capitanio; + but I told them I would not be called seignior. "Well, then," said the + gunner, who spoke good English, "you shall be called Captain Bob;" and so + they gave me my title ever after. + </p> + <p> + Nothing is more certain of the Portuguese than this, take them nationally + or personally, if they are animated and heartened up by anybody to go + before, and encourage them by example, they will behave well enough; but + if they have nothing but their own measures to follow, they sink + immediately: these men had certainly fled from a parcel of naked savages, + though even by flying they could not have saved their lives, if I had not + shouted and hallooed, and rather made sport with the thing than a fight, + to keep up their courage. + </p> + <p> + Nor was there less need of it upon several occasions hereafter; and I do + confess I have often wondered how a number of men, who, when they came to + the extremity, were so ill supported by their own spirits, had at first + courage to propose and to undertake the most desperate and impracticable + attempt that ever men went about in the world. + </p> + <p> + There were indeed two or three indefatigable men among them, by whose + courage and industry all the rest were upheld; and indeed those two or + three were the managers of them from the beginning; that was the gunner, + and that cutler whom I call the artist; and the third, who was pretty + well, though not like either of them, was one of the carpenters. These + indeed were the life and soul of all the rest, and it was to their courage + that all the rest owed the resolution they showed upon any occasion. But + when those saw me take a little upon me, as above, they embraced me, and + treated me with particular affection ever after. + </p> + <p> + This gunner was an excellent mathematician, a good scholar, and a complete + sailor; and it was in conversing intimately with him that I learned + afterwards the grounds of what knowledge I have since had in all the + sciences useful for navigation, and particularly in the geographical part + of knowledge. + </p> + <p> + Even in our conversation, finding me eager to understand and learn, he + laid the foundation of a general knowledge of things in my mind, gave me + just ideas of the form of the earth and of the sea, the situation of + countries, the course of rivers, the doctrine of the spheres, the motion + of the stars; and, in a word, taught me a kind of system of astronomy, + which I afterwards improved. + </p> + <p> + In an especial manner, he filled my head with aspiring thoughts, and with + an earnest desire after learning everything that could be taught me; + convincing me, that nothing could qualify me for great undertakings, but a + degree of learning superior to what was usual in the race of seamen; he + told me, that to be ignorant was to be certain of a mean station in the + world, but that knowledge was the first step to preferment. He was always + flattering me with my capacity to learn; and though that fed my pride, + yet, on the other hand, as I had a secret ambition, which just at that + time fed itself in my mind, it prompted in me an insatiable thirst after + learning in general, and I resolved, if ever I came back to Europe, and + had anything left to purchase it, I would make myself master of all the + parts of learning needful to the making of me a complete sailor; but I was + not so just to myself afterwards as to do it when I had an opportunity. + </p> + <p> + But to return to our business; the gunner, when he saw the service I had + done in the fight, and heard my proposal for keeping a number of prisoners + for our march, and for carrying our baggage, turns to me before them all. + "Captain Bob," says he, "I think you must be our leader, for all the + success of this enterprise is owing to you." "No, no," said I, "do not + compliment me; you shall be our Seignior Capitanio, you shall be general; + I am too young for it." So, in short, we all agreed he should be our + leader; but he would not accept of it alone, but would have me joined with + him; and all the rest agreeing, I was obliged to comply. + </p> + <p> + The first piece of service they put me upon in this new command was as + difficult as any they could think of, and that was to manage the + prisoners; which, however, I cheerfully undertook, as you shall hear + presently. But the immediate consultation was yet of more consequence; and + that was, first, which way we should go; and secondly, how to furnish + ourselves for the voyage with provisions. + </p> + <p> + There was among the prisoners one tall, well-shaped, handsome fellow, to + whom the rest seemed to pay great respect, and who, as we understood + afterwards, was the son of one of their kings; his father was, it seems, + killed at our first volley, and he wounded with a shot in his arm, and + with another just on one of his hips or haunches. The shot in his haunch + being in a fleshy part, bled much, and he was half dead with the loss of + blood. As to the shot in his arm, it had broke his wrist, and he was by + both these wounds quite disabled, so that we were once going to turn him + away, and let him die; and, if we had, he would have died indeed in a few + days more: but, as I found the man had some respect showed him, it + presently occurred to my thoughts that we might bring him to be useful to + us, and perhaps make him a kind of commander over them. So I caused our + surgeon to take him in hand, and gave the poor wretch good words, that is + to say, I spoke to him as well as I could by signs, to make him understand + that we would make him well again. + </p> + <p> + This created a new awe in their minds of us, believing that, as we could + kill at a distance by something invisible to them (for so our shot was, to + be sure), so we could make them well again too. Upon this the young prince + (for so we called him afterwards) called six or seven of the savages to + him, and said something to them; what it was we know not, but immediately + all the seven came to me, and kneeled down to me, holding up their hands, + and making signs of entreaty, pointing to the place where one of those lay + whom we had killed. + </p> + <p> + It was a long time before I or any of us could understand them; but one of + them ran and lifted up a dead man, pointing to his wound, which was in his + eyes, for he was shot into the head at one of his eyes. Then another + pointed to the surgeon, and at last we found it out, that the meaning was, + that he should heal the prince's father too, who was dead, being shot + through the head, as above. + </p> + <p> + We presently took the hint, and would not say we could not do it, but let + them know, the men that were killed were those that had first fallen upon + us, and provoked us, and we would by no means make them alive again; and + that, if any others did so, we would kill them too, and never let them + live any more: but that, if he (the prince) would be willing to go with + us, and do as we should direct him, we would not let him die, and would + make his arm well. Upon this he bid his men go and fetch a long stick or + staff, and lay on the ground. When they brought it, we saw it was an + arrow; he took it with his left hand (for his other was lame with the + wound), and, pointing up at the sun, broke the arrow in two, and set the + point against his breast, and then gave it to me. This was, as I + understood afterwards, wishing the sun, whom they worship, might shoot him + into the breast with an arrow, if ever he failed to be my friend; and + giving the point of the arrow to me was to be a testimony that I was the + man he had sworn to: and never was Christian more punctual to an oath than + he was to this, for he was a sworn servant to us for many a weary month + after that. + </p> + <p> + When I brought him to the surgeon, he immediately dressed the wound in his + haunch or buttock, and found the bullet had only grazed upon the flesh, + and passed, as it were, by it, but it was not lodged in the part, so that + it was soon healed and well again; but, as to his arm, he found one of the + bones broken, which are in the fore-part from the wrist to the elbow; and + this he set, and splintered it up, and bound his arm in a sling, hanging + it about his neck, and making signs to him that he should not stir it; + which he was so strict an observer of, that he set him down, and never + moved one way or other but as the surgeon gave him leave. + </p> + <p> + I took a great deal of pains to acquaint this negro what we intended to + do, and what use we intended to make of his men; and particularly to teach + him the meaning of what we said, especially to teach him some words, such + as yes and no, and what they meant, and to inure him to our way of + talking; and he was very willing and apt to learn anything I taught him. + </p> + <p> + It was easy to let him see that we intended to carry our provision with us + from the first day; but he made signs to us to tell us we need not, for we + should find provision enough everywhere for forty days. It was very + difficult for us to understand how he expressed forty; for he knew no + figures, but some words that they used to one another that they understood + it by. At last one of the negroes, by his order, laid forty little stones + one by another, to show us how many days we should travel, and find + provisions sufficient. + </p> + <p> + Then I showed him our baggage, which was very heavy, particularly our + powder, shot, lead, iron, carpenters' tools, seamen's instruments, cases + of bottles, and other lumber. He took some of the things up in his hand to + feel the weight, and shook his head at them; so I told our people they + must resolve to divide their things into small parcels, and make them + portable; and accordingly they did so, by which means we were fain to + leave all our chests behind us, which were eleven in number. + </p> + <p> + Then he made signs to us that he would procure some buffaloes, or young + bulls, as I called them, to carry things for us, and made signs, too, that + if we were weary, we might be carried too; but that we slighted, only were + willing to have the creatures, because, at last, when they could serve us + no farther for carriage, we might eat them all up if we had any occasion + for them. + </p> + <p> + I then carried him to our bark, and showed him what things we had here. He + seemed amazed at the sight of our bark, having never seen anything of that + kind before, for their boats are most wretched things, such as I never saw + before, having no head or stern, and being made only of the skins of + goats, sewed together with dried guts of goats and sheep, and done over + with a kind of slimy stuff like rosin and oil, but of a most nauseous, + odious smell; and they are poor miserable things for boats, the worst that + any part of the world ever saw; a canoe is an excellent contrivance + compared to them. + </p> + <p> + But to return to our boat. We carried our new prince into it, and helped + him over the side, because of his lameness. We made signs to him that his + men must carry our goods for us, and showed him what we had; he answered, + "Si, Seignior," or, "Yes, sir" (for we had taught him that word and the + meaning of it), and taking up a bundle, he made signs to us, that when his + arm was well he would carry some for us. + </p> + <p> + I made signs again to tell him, that if he would make his men carry them, + we would not let him carry anything. We had secured all the prisoners in a + narrow place, where we had bound them with mat cords, and set up stakes + like a palisado round them; so, when we carried the prince on shore, we + went with him to them, and made signs to him to ask them if they were + willing to go with us to the country of lions. Accordingly he made a long + speech to them, and we could understand by it that he told them, if they + were willing, they must say, "Si, Seignior," telling them what it + signified. They immediately answered, "Si, Seignior," and clapped their + hands, looking up to the sun, which, the prince signified to us, was + swearing to be faithful. But as soon as they had said so, one of them made + a long speech to the prince; and in it we perceived, by his gestures, + which were very antic, that they desired something from us, and that they + were in great concern about it. So I asked him, as well as I could, what + it was they desired of us; he told us by signs that they desired we should + clap our hands to the sun (that was, to swear) that we would not kill + them, that we would give them chiaruck, that is to say, bread, would not + starve them, and would not let the lions eat them. I told him we would + promise all that; then he pointed to the sun, and clapped his hands, + signing to me that I should do so too, which I did; at which all the + prisoners fell flat on the ground, and rising up again, made the oddest, + wildest cries that ever I heard. + </p> + <p> + I think it was the first time in my life that ever any religious thought + affected me; but I could not refrain some reflections, and almost tears, + in considering how happy it was that I was not born among such creatures + as these, and was not so stupidly ignorant and barbarous; but this soon + went off again, and I was not troubled again with any qualms of that sort + for a long time after. + </p> + <p> + When this ceremony was over, our concern was to get some provisions, as + well for the present subsistence of our prisoners as ourselves; and making + signs to our prince that we were thinking upon that subject, he made signs + to me that, if I would let one of the prisoners go to his town, he should + bring provisions, and should bring some beasts to carry our baggage. I + seemed loth to trust him, and supposing that he would run away, he made + great signs of fidelity, and with his own hands tied a rope about his + neck, offering me one end of it, intimating that I should hang him if the + man did not come again. So I consented, and he gave him abundance of + instructions, and sent him away, pointing to the light of the sun, which + it seems was to tell him at what time he must be back. + </p> + <p> + The fellow ran as if he was mad, and held it till he was quite out of + sight, by which I supposed he had a great way to go. The next morning, + about two hours before the time appointed, the black prince, for so I + always called him, beckoning with his hand to me, and hallooing after his + manner, desired me to come to him, which I did, when, pointing to a little + hill about two miles off, I saw plainly a little drove of cattle, and + several people with them; those, he told me by signs, were the man he had + sent, and several more with him, and cattle for us. + </p> + <p> + Accordingly, by the time appointed, he came quite to our huts, and brought + with him a great many cows, young runts, about sixteen goats, and four + young bulls, taught to carry burthens. + </p> + <p> + This was a supply of provisions sufficient; as for bread, we were obliged + to shift with some roots which we had made use of before. We then began to + consider of making some large bags like the soldiers' knapsacks, for their + men to carry our baggage in, and to make it easy to them; and the goats + being killed, I ordered the skins to be spread in the sun, and they were + as dry in two days as could be desired; so we found means to make such + little bags as we wanted, and began to divide our baggage into them. When + the black prince found what they were for, and how easy they were of + carriage when we put them on, he smiled a little, and sent away the man + again to fetch skins, and he brought two natives more with him, all loaded + with skins better cured than ours, and of other kinds, such as we could + not tell what names to give them. + </p> + <p> + These two men brought the black prince two lances, of the sort they use in + their fights, but finer than ordinary, being made of black smooth wood, as + fine as ebony, and headed at the point with the end of a long tooth of + some creature—we could not tell of what creature; the head was so + firm put on, and the tooth so strong, though no bigger than my thumb, and + sharp at the end, that I never saw anything like it in any place in the + world. + </p> + <p> + The prince would not take them till I gave him leave, but made signs that + they should give them to me; however, I gave him leave to take them + himself, for I saw evident signs of an honourable just principle in him. + </p> + <p> + We now prepared for our march, when the prince coming to me, and pointing + towards the several quarters of the world, made signs to know which way we + intended to go; and when I showed him, pointing to the west, he presently + let me know there was a great river a little further to the north, which + was able to carry our bark many leagues into the country due west. I + presently took the hint, and inquired for the mouth of the river, which I + understood by him was above a day's march, and, by our estimation, we + found it about seven leagues further. I take this to be the great river + marked by our chart-makers at the northmost part of the coast of + Mozambique, and called there Quilloa. + </p> + <p> + Consulting thus with ourselves, we resolved to take the prince, and as + many of the prisoners as we could stow in our frigate, and go about by the + bay into the river; and that eight of us, with our arms, should march by + land to meet them on the river side; for the prince, carrying us to a + rising ground, had showed us the river very plain, a great way up the + country, and in one place it was not above six miles to it. + </p> + <p> + It was my lot to march by land, and be captain of the whole caravan. I had + eight of our men with me, and seven-and-thirty of our prisoners, without + any baggage, for all our luggage was yet on board. We drove the young + bulls with us; nothing was ever so tame, so willing to work, or carry + anything. The negroes would ride upon them four at a time, and they would + go very willingly. They would eat out of our hand, lick our feet, and were + as tractable as a dog. + </p> + <p> + We drove with us six or seven cows for food; but our negroes knew nothing + of curing the flesh by salting and drying it till we showed them the way, + and then they were mighty willing to do so as long as we had any salt to + do it with, and to carry salt a great way too, after we found we should + have no more. + </p> + <p> + It was an easy march to the river side for us that went by land, and we + came thither in a piece of a day, being, as above, no more than six + English miles; whereas it was no less than five days before they came to + us by water, the wind in the bay having failed them, and the way, by + reason of a great turn or reach in the river, being about fifty miles + about. + </p> + <p> + We spent this time in a thing which the two strangers, which brought the + prince the two lances, put into the head of the prisoners, viz., to make + bottles of the goats' skins to carry fresh water in, which it seems they + knew we should come to want; and the men did it so dexterously, having + dried skins fetched them by those two men, that before our vessel came up, + they had every man a pouch like a bladder, to carry fresh water in, + hanging over their shoulders by a thong made of other skins, about three + inches broad, like the sling of a fuzee. + </p> + <p> + Our prince, to assure us of the fidelity of the men in this march, had + ordered them to be tied two and two by the wrist, as we handcuff prisoners + in England; and made them so sensible of the reasonableness of it, that he + made them do it themselves, appointing four of them to bind the rest; but + we found them so honest, and particularly so obedient to him, that after + we were gotten a little further off of their own country, we set them at + liberty, though, when he came to us, he would have them tied again, and + they continued so a good while. + </p> + <p> + All the country on the bank of the river was a high land, no marshy swampy + ground in it; the verdure good, and abundance of cattle feeding upon it + wherever we went, or which way soever we looked; there was not much wood + indeed, at least not near us; but further up we saw oak, cedar, and + pine-trees, some of which were very large. + </p> + <p> + The river was a fair open channel, about as broad as the Thames below + Gravesend, and a strong tide of flood, which we found held us about sixty + miles; the channel deep, nor did we find any want of water for a great + way. In short, we went merrily up the river with the flood and the wind + blowing still fresh at E. and E.N.E. We stemmed the ebb easily also, + especially while the river continued broad and deep; but when we came past + the swelling of the tide, and had the natural current of the river to go + against, we found it too strong for us, and began to think of quitting our + bark; but the prince would by no means agree to that, for, finding we had + on board pretty good store of roping made of mats and flags, which I + described before, he ordered all the prisoners which were on shore to come + and take hold of those ropes, and tow us along by the shore side; and as + we hoisted our sail too, to ease them, the men ran along with us at a very + great rate. + </p> + <p> + In this manner the river carried us up, by our computation, near 200 + miles, and then it narrowed apace, and was not above as broad as the + Thames is at Windsor, or thereabouts; and, after another day, we came to a + great waterfall or cataract, enough to fright us, for I believe the whole + body of water fell at once perpendicularly down a precipice above sixty + foot high, which made noise enough to deprive men of their hearing, and we + heard it above ten miles before we came to it. + </p> + <p> + Here we were at a full stop, and now our prisoners went first on shore; + they had worked very hard and very cheerfully, relieving one another, + those that were weary being taken into the bark. Had we had canoes or any + boats which might have been carried by men's strength we might have gone + two hundred miles more up this river in small boats, but our great boat + could go no farther. + </p> + <p> + All this way the country looked green and pleasant, and was full of + cattle, and some people we saw, though not many; but this we observed now, + that the people did no more understand our prisoners here than we could + understand them; being, it seems, of different nations and of different + speech. We had yet seen no wild beasts, or, at least, none that came very + near us, except two days before we came to the waterfall, when we saw + three of the most beautiful leopards that ever were seen, standing upon + the bank of the river on the north side, our prisoners being all on the + other side of the water. Our gunner espied them first, and ran to fetch + his gun, putting a ball extraordinary in it; and coming to me, "Now, + Captain Bob," says he, "where is your prince?" So I called him out. "Now," + says he, "tell your men not to be afraid; tell them they shall see that + thing in his hand speak in fire to one of those beasts, and make it kill + itself." + </p> + <p> + The poor negroes looked as if they had been all going to be killed, + notwithstanding what their prince said to them, and stood staring to + expect the issue, when on a sudden the gunner fired; and as he was a very + good marksman, he shot the creature with two slugs, just in the head. As + soon as the leopard felt herself struck, she reared up on her two + hind-legs, bolt upright, and throwing her forepaws about in the air, fell + backward, growling and struggling, and immediately died; the other two, + frighted with the fire and the noise, fled, and were out of sight in an + instant. + </p> + <p> + But the two frighted leopards were not in half the consternation that our + prisoners were; four or five of them fell down as if they had been shot; + several others fell on their knees, and lifted up their hands to us; + whether to worship us, or pray us not to kill them, we did not know; but + we made signs to their prince to encourage them, which he did, but it was + with much ado that he brought them to their senses. Nay, the prince, + notwithstanding all that was said to prepare him for it, yet when the + piece went off, he gave a start as if he would have leaped into the river. + </p> + <p> + When we saw the creature killed, I had a great mind to have the skin of + her, and made signs to the prince that he should send some of his men over + to take the skin off. As soon as he spoke but a word, four of them, that + offered themselves, were untied, and immediately they jumped into the + river, and swam over, and went to work with him. The prince having a knife + that we gave him, made four wooden knives so clever, that I never saw + anything like them in my life; and in less than an hour's time they + brought me the skin of the leopard, which was a monstrous great one, for + it was from the ears to the tale about seven foot, and near five foot + broad on the back, and most admirably spotted all over. The skin of this + leopard I brought to London many years after. + </p> + <p> + We were now all upon a level as to our travelling, being unshipped, for + our bark would swim no farther, and she was too heavy to carry on our + backs; but as we found the course of the river went a great way farther, + we consulted our carpenters whether we could not pull the bark in pieces, + and make us three or four small boats to go on with. They told us we might + do so, but it would be very long a-doing; and that, when we had done, we + had neither pitch or tar to make them sound to keep the water out, or + nails to fasten the plank. But one of them told us that as soon as he + could come at any large tree near the river, he would make us a canoe or + two in a quarter of the time, and which would serve us as well for all the + uses we could have any occasion for as a boat; and such, that if we came + to any waterfalls, we might take them up, and carry them for a mile or two + by land upon our shoulders. + </p> + <p> + Upon this we gave over the thoughts of our frigate, and hauling her into a + little cove or inlet, where a small brook came into the main river, we + laid her up for those that came next, and marched forward. We spent indeed + two days dividing our baggage, and loading our tame buffaloes and our + negroes. Our powder and shot, which was the thing we were most careful of, + we ordered thus:—First, the powder we divided into little leather + bags, that is to say, bags of dried skins, with the hair inward, that the + powder might not grow damp; and then we put those bags into other bags, + made of bullocks' skins, very thick and hard, with the hair outward, that + no wet might come in; and this succeeded so well, that in the greatest + rains we had, whereof some were very violent and very long, we always kept + our powder dry. Besides these bags, which held our chief magazine, we + divided to every one a quarter of a pound of powder, and half a pound of + shot, to carry always about us; which, as it was enough for our present + use, so we were willing to have no weight to carry more than was + absolutely necessary, because of the heat. + </p> + <p> + We kept still on the bank of the river, and for that reason had but very + little communication with the people of the country; for, having also our + bark stored with plenty of provisions, we had no occasion to look abroad + for a supply; but now, when we came to march on foot, we were obliged + often to seek out for food. The first place we came to on the river, that + gave us any stop, was a little negro town, containing about fifty huts, + and there appeared about 400 people, for they all came out to see us, and + wonder at us. When our negroes appeared the inhabitants began to fly to + arms, thinking there had been enemies coming upon them; but our negroes, + though they could not speak their language, made signs to them that they + had no weapons, and were tied two and two together as captives, and that + there were people behind who came from the sun, and that could kill them + all, and make them alive again, if they pleased; but that they would do + them no hurt, and came with peace. As soon as they understood this they + laid down their lances, and bows and arrows, and came and stuck twelve + large stakes in the ground as a token of peace, bowing themselves to us in + token of submission. But as soon as they saw white men with beards, that + is to say, with mustachios, they ran screaming away, as in a fright. + </p> + <p> + We kept at a distance from them, not to be too familiar; and when we did + appear it was but two or three of us at a time. But our prisoners made + them understand that we required some provisions of them; so they brought + us some black cattle, for they have abundance of cows and buffaloes all + over that side of the country, as also great numbers of deer. Our cutler, + who had now a great stock of things of his handiwork, gave them some + little knick-knacks, as plates of silver and of iron, cut diamond fashion, + and cut into hearts and into rings, and they were mightily pleased. They + also brought several fruits and roots, which we did not understand, but + our negroes fed heartily on them, and after we had seen them eat them, we + did so too. + </p> + <p> + Having stocked ourselves here with flesh and root as much as we could well + carry, we divided the burthens among our negroes, appointing about thirty + to forty pounds weight to a man, which we thought indeed was load enough + in a hot country; and the negroes did not at all repine at it, but would + sometimes help one another when they began to be weary, which did happen + now and then, though not often; besides, as most of their luggage was our + provision, it lightened every day, like Aesop's basket of bread, till we + came to get a recruit.—Note, when we loaded them we untied their + hands, and tied them two and two together by one foot. + </p> + <p> + The third day of our march from this place our chief carpenter desired us + to halt, and set up some huts, for he had found out some trees that he + liked, and resolved to make us some canoes; for, as he told me, he knew we + should have marching enough on foot after we left the river, and he was + resolved to go no farther by land than needs must. + </p> + <p> + We had no sooner given orders for our little camp, and given leave to our + negroes to lay down their loads, but they fell to work to build our huts; + and though they were tied as above, yet they did it so nimbly as surprised + us. Here we set some of the negroes quite at liberty, that is to say, + without tying them, having the prince's word passed for their fidelity; + and some of these were ordered to help the carpenters, which they did very + handily, with a little direction, and others were sent to see whether they + could get any provisions near hand; but instead of provisions, three of + them came in with two bows and arrows, and five lances. They could not + easily make us understand how they came by them, only that they had + surprised some negro women, who were in some huts, the men being from + home, and they had found the lances and bows in the huts, or houses, the + women and children flying away at the sight of them, as from robbers. We + seemed very angry at them, and made the prince ask them if they had not + killed any of the women or children, making them believe that, if they had + killed anybody, we would make them kill themselves too; but they protested + their innocence, so we excused them. Then they brought us the bows and + arrows and lances; but, at a motion of their black prince, we gave them + back the bows and arrows, and gave them leave to go out to see what they + could kill for food; and here we gave them the laws of arms, viz., that if + any man appeared to assault them, or shoot at them to offer any violence + to them, they might kill them; but that they should not offer to kill or + hurt any that offered them peace, or laid down their weapons, nor any + women or children, upon any occasion whatsoever. These were our articles + of war. + </p> + <p> + These two fellows had not been gone out above three or four hours, but one + of them came running to us without his bow and arrows, hallooing and + whooping a great while before he came at us, "Okoamo, okoamo!" which, it + seems, was, "Help, help!" The rest of the negroes rose up in a hurry, and + by twos, as they could, ran forward towards their fellows, to know what + the matter was. As for me, I did not understand it, nor any of our people; + the prince looked as if something unlucky had fallen out, and some of our + men took up their arms to be ready on occasion. But the negroes soon + discovered the thing, for we saw four of them presently after coming along + with a great load of meat upon their backs. The case was, that the two who + went out with their bows and arrows, meeting with a great herd of deer in + the plain, had been so nimble as to shoot three of them, and then one of + them came running to us for help to fetch them away. This was the first + venison we had met with in all our march, and we feasted upon it very + plentifully; and this was the first time we began to prevail with our + prince to eat his meat dressed our way; after which his men were prevailed + with by his example, but before that, they ate most of the flesh they had + quite raw. + </p> + <p> + We wished now we had brought some bows and arrows out with us, which we + might have done; and we began to have so much confidence in our negroes, + and to be so familiar with them, that we oftentimes let them go, or the + greatest part of them, untied, being well assured they would not leave us, + and that they did not know what course to take without us; but one thing + we resolved not to trust them with, and that was the charging our guns: + but they always believed our guns had some heavenly power in them, that + would send forth fire and smoke, and speak with a dreadful noise, and kill + at a distance whenever we bid them. + </p> + <p> + In about eight days we finished three canoes, and in them we embarked our + white men and our baggage, with our prince, and some of the prisoners. We + also found it needful to keep some of ourselves always on shore, not only + to manage the negroes, but to defend them from enemies and wild beasts. + Abundance of little incidents happened upon this march, which it is + impossible to crowd into this account; particularly, we saw more wild + beasts now than we did before, some elephants, and two or three lions, + none of which kinds we had seen any of before; and we found our negroes + were more afraid of them a great deal than we were; principally, because + they had no bows and arrows, or lances, which were the particular weapons + they were bred up to the exercise of. + </p> + <p> + But we cured them of their fears by being always ready with our firearms. + However, as we were willing to be sparing of our powder, and the killing + of any of the creatures now was no advantage to us, seeing their skins + were too heavy for us to carry, and their flesh not good to eat, we + resolved therefore to keep some of our pieces uncharged and only primed; + and causing them to flash in the pan, the beasts, even the lions + themselves, would always start and fly back when they saw it, and + immediately march off. + </p> + <p> + We passed abundance of inhabitants upon this upper part of the river, and + with this observation, that almost every ten miles we came to a separate + nation, and every separate nation had a different speech, or else their + speech had differing dialects, so that they did not understand one + another. They all abounded in cattle, especially on the river-side; and + the eighth day of this second navigation we met with a little negro town, + where they had growing a sort of corn like rice, which ate very sweet; + and, as we got some of it of the people, we made very good cakes of bread + of it, and, making a fire, baked them on the ground, after the fire was + swept away, very well; so that hitherto we had no want of provisions of + any kind that we could desire. + </p> + <p> + Our negroes towing our canoes, we travelled at a considerable rate, and by + our own account could not go less than twenty or twenty-five English miles + a day, and the river continuing to be much of the same breadth and very + deep all the way, till on the tenth day we came to another cataract; for a + ridge of high hills crossing the whole channel of the river, the water + came tumbling down the rocks from one stage to another in a strange + manner, so that it was a continued link of cataracts from one to another, + in the manner of a cascade, only that the falls were sometimes a quarter + of a mile from one another, and the noise confused and frightful. + </p> + <p> + We thought our voyaging was at a full stop now; but three of us, with a + couple of our negroes, mounting the hills another way, to view the course + of the river, we found a fair channel again after about half a mile's + march, and that it was like to hold us a good way further. So we set all + hands to work, unloaded our cargo, and hauled our canoes on shore, to see + if we could carry them. + </p> + <p> + Upon examination we found that they were very heavy; but our carpenters, + spending but one day's work upon them, hewed away so much of the timber + from their outsides as reduced them very much, and yet they were as fit to + swim as before. When this was done, ten men with poles took up one of the + canoes and made nothing to carry it. So we ordered twenty men to each + canoe, that one ten might relieve the other; and thus we carried all our + canoes, and launched them into the water again, and then fetched our + luggage and loaded it all again into the canoes, and all in an afternoon; + and the next morning early we moved forward again. When we had towed about + four days more, our gunner, who was our pilot, began to observe that we + did not keep our right course so exactly as we ought, the river winding + away a little towards the north, and gave us notice of it accordingly. + However, we were not willing to lose the advantage of water-carriage, at + least not till we were forced to it; so we jogged on, and the river served + us for about threescore miles further; but then we found it grew very + small and shallow, having passed the mouths of several little brooks or + rivulets which came into it; and at length it became but a brook itself. + </p> + <p> + We towed up as far as ever our boats would swim, and we went two days the + farther—having been about twelve days in this last part of the river—by + lightening the boats and taking our luggage out, which we made the negroes + carry, being willing to ease ourselves as long as we could; but at the end + of these two days, in short, there was not water enough to swim a London + wherry. + </p> + <p> + We now set forward wholly by land, and without any expectation of more + water-carriage. All our concern for more water was to be sure to have a + supply for our drinking; and therefore upon every hill that we came near + we clambered up to the highest part to see the country before us, and to + make the best judgment we could which way to go to keep the lowest + grounds, and as near some stream of water as we could. + </p> + <p> + The country held verdant, well grown with trees, and spread with rivers + and brooks, and tolerably well with inhabitants, for about thirty days' + march after our leaving the canoes, during which time things went pretty + well with us; we did not tie ourselves down when to march and when to + halt, but ordered those things as our convenience and the health and ease + of our people, as well our servants as ourselves, required. + </p> + <p> + About the middle of this march we came into a low and plain country, in + which we perceived a greater number of inhabitants than in any other + country we had gone through; but that which was worse for us, we found + them a fierce, barbarous, treacherous people, and who at first looked upon + us as robbers, and gathered themselves in numbers to attack us. + </p> + <p> + Our men were terrified at them at first, and began to discover an unusual + fear, and even our black prince seemed in a great deal of confusion; but I + smiled at him, and showing him some of our guns, I asked him if he thought + that which killed the spotted cat (for so they called the leopard in their + language) could not make a thousand of those naked creatures die at one + blow? Then he laughed, and said, yes, he believed it would. "Well, then," + said I, "tell your men not to be afraid of these people, for we shall soon + give them a taste of what we can do if they pretend to meddle with us." + However, we considered we were in the middle of a vast country, and we + knew not what numbers of people and nations we might be surrounded with, + and, above all, we knew not how much we might stand in need of the + friendship of these that we were now among, so that we ordered the negroes + to try all the methods they could to make them friends. + </p> + <p> + Accordingly the two men who had gotten bows and arrows, and two more to + whom we gave the prince's two fine lances, went foremost, with five more, + having long poles in their hands; and after them ten of our men advanced + toward the negro town that was next to us, and we all stood ready to + succour them if there should be occasion. + </p> + <p> + When they came pretty near their houses our negroes hallooed in their + screaming way, and called to them as loud as they could. Upon their + calling, some of the men came out and answered, and immediately after the + whole town, men, women, and children, appeared; our negroes, with their + long poles, went forward a little, and stuck them all in the ground, and + left them, which in their country was a signal of peace, but the other did + not understand the meaning of that. Then the two men with bows laid down + their bows and arrows, went forward unarmed, and made signs of peace to + them, which at last the other began to understand; so two of their men + laid down their bows and arrows, and came towards them. Our men made all + the signs of friendship to them that they could think of, putting their + hands up to their mouths as a sign that they wanted provisions to eat; and + the other pretended to be pleased and friendly, and went back to their + fellows and talked with them a while, and they came forward again, and + made signs that they would bring some provisions to them before the sun + set; and so our men came back again very well satisfied for that time. + </p> + <p> + But an hour before sunset our men went to them again, just in the same + posture as before, and they came according to their appointment, and + brought deer's flesh, roots, and the same kind of corn, like rice, which I + mentioned above; and our negroes, being furnished with such toys as our + cutler had contrived, gave them some of them, which they seemed infinitely + pleased with, and promised to bring more provisions the next day. + </p> + <p> + Accordingly the next day they came again, but our men perceived they were + more in number by a great many than before. However, having sent out ten + men with firearms to stand ready, and our whole army being in view also, + we were not much surprised; nor was the treachery of the enemy so + cunningly ordered as in other cases, for they might have surrounded our + negroes, which were but nine, under a show of peace; but when they saw our + men advance almost as far as the place where they were the day before, the + rogues snatched up their bows and arrows and came running upon our men + like so many furies, at which our ten men called to the negroes to come + back to them, which they did with speed enough at the first word, and + stood all behind our men. As they fled, the other advanced, and let fly + near a hundred of their arrows at them, by which two of our negroes were + wounded, and one we thought had been killed. When they came to the five + poles that our men had stuck in the ground, they stood still awhile, and + gathering about the poles, looked at them, and handled them, as wondering + what they meant. We then, who were drawn up behind all, sent one of our + number to our ten men to bid them fire among them while they stood so + thick, and to put some small shot into their guns besides the ordinary + charge, and to tell them that we would be up with them immediately. + </p> + <p> + Accordingly they made ready; but by the time they were ready to fire, the + black army had left their wandering about the poles, and began to stir as + if they would come on, though seeing more men stand at some distance + behind our negroes, they could not tell what to make of us; but if they + did not understand us before, they understood us less afterwards, for as + soon as ever our men found them to begin to move forward they fired among + the thickest of them, being about the distance of 120 yards, as near as we + could guess. + </p> + <p> + It is impossible to express the fright, the screaming and yelling of those + wretches upon this first volley. We killed six of them, and wounded eleven + or twelve, I mean as we knew of; for, as they stood thick, and the small + shot, as we called it, scattered among them, we had reason to believe we + wounded more that stood farther off, for our small shot was made of bits + of lead and bits of iron, heads of nails, and such things as our diligent + artificer, the cutler, helped us to. + </p> + <p> + As to those that were killed and wounded, the other frighted creatures + were under the greatest amazement in the world, to think what should hurt + them, for they could see nothing but holes made in their bodies they knew + not how. Then the fire and noise amazed all their women and children, and + frighted them out of their wits, so that they ran staring and howling + about like mad creatures. + </p> + <p> + However, all this did not make them fly, which was what we wanted, nor did + we find any of them die as it were with fear, as at first; so we resolved + upon a second volley, and then to advance as we did before. Whereupon our + reserved men advancing, we resolved to fire only three men at a time, and + move forward like an army firing in platoon; so, being all in a line, we + fired, first three on the right, then three on the left, and so on; and + every time we killed or wounded some of them, but still they did not fly, + and yet they were so frighted that they used none of their bows and + arrows, or of their lances; and we thought their numbers increased upon + our hands, particularly we thought so by the noise. So I called to our men + to halt, and bid them pour in one whole volley and then shout, as we did + in our first fight, and so run in upon them and knock them down with our + muskets. + </p> + <p> + But they were too wise for that too, for as soon as we had fired a whole + volley and shouted, they all ran away, men, women, and children, so fast + that in a few moments we could not see one creature of them except some + that were wounded and lame, who lay wallowing and screaming here and there + upon the ground as they happened to fall. + </p> + <p> + Upon this we came up to the field of battle, where we found we had killed + thirty-seven of them, among which were three women, and had wounded about + sixty-four, among which were two women; by wounded I mean such as were so + maimed as not to be able to go away, and those our negroes killed + afterwards in a cowardly manner in cold blood, for which we were very + angry, and threatened to make them go to them if they did so again. + </p> + <p> + There was no great spoil to be got, for they were all stark naked as they + came into the world, men and women together, some of them having feathers + stuck in their hair, and others a kind of bracelet about their necks, but + nothing else; but our negroes got a booty here, which we were very glad + of, and this was the bows and arrows of the vanquished, of which they + found more than they knew what to do with, belonging to the killed and + wounded men; these we ordered them to pick up, and they were very useful + to us afterwards. After the fight, and our negroes had gotten bows and + arrows, we sent them out in parties to see what they could get, and they + got some provisions; but, which was better than all the rest, they brought + us four more young bulls, or buffaloes, that had been brought up to labour + and to carry burthens. They knew them, it seems, by the burthens they had + carried having galled their backs, for they have no saddles to cover them + with in that country. + </p> + <p> + Those creatures not only eased our negroes, but gave us an opportunity to + carry more provisions; and our negroes loaded them very hard at this place + with flesh and roots, such as we wanted very much afterwards. + </p> + <p> + In this town we found a very little young leopard, about two spans high; + it was exceeding tame, and purred like a cat when we stroked it with our + hands, being, as I suppose, bred up among the negroes like a house-dog. It + was our black prince, it seems, who, making his tour among the abandoned + houses or huts, found this creature there, and making much of him, and + giving a bit or two of flesh to him, the creature followed him like a dog; + of which more hereafter. + </p> + <p> + Among the negroes that were killed in this battle there was one who had a + little thin bit or plate of gold, about as big as a sixpence, which hung + by a little bit of a twisted gut upon his forehead, by which we supposed + he was a man of some eminence among them; but that was not all, for this + bit of gold put us upon searching very narrowly if there was not more of + it to be had thereabouts, but we found none at all. + </p> + <p> + From this part of the country we went on for about fifteen days, and then + found ourselves obliged to march up a high ridge of mountains, frightful + to behold, and the first of the kind that we met with; and having no guide + but our little pocket-compass, we had no advantage of information as to + which was the best or the worst way, but was obliged to choose by what we + saw, and shift as well as we could. We met with several nations of wild + and naked people in the plain country before we came to those hills, and + we found them much more tractable and friendly than those devils we had + been forced to fight with; and though we could learn little from these + people, yet we understood by the signs they made that there was a vast + desert beyond these hills, and, as our negroes called them, much lion, + much spotted cat (so they called the leopard); and they signed to us also + that we must carry water with us. At the last of these nations we + furnished ourselves with as much provisions as we could possibly carry, + not knowing what we had to suffer, or what length we had to go; and, to + make our way as familiar to us as possible, I proposed that of the last + inhabitants we could find we should make some prisoners and carry them + with us for guides over the desert, and to assist us in carrying + provision, and, perhaps, in getting it too. The advice was too necessary + to be slighted; so finding, by our dumb signs to the inhabitants, that + there were some people that dwelt at the foot of the mountains on the + other side before we came to the desert itself, we resolved to furnish + ourselves with guides by fair means or foul. + </p> + <p> + Here, by a moderate computation, we concluded ourselves 700 miles from the + sea-coast where we began. Our black prince was this day set free from the + sling his arm hung in, our surgeon having perfectly restored it, and he + showed it to his own countrymen quite well, which made them greatly + wonder. Also our two negroes began to recover, and their wounds to heal + apace, for our surgeon was very skilful in managing their cure. + </p> + <p> + Having with infinite labour mounted these hills, and coming to a view of + the country beyond them, it was indeed enough to astonish as stout a heart + as ever was created. It was a vast howling wilderness—not a tree, a + river, or a green thing to be seen; for, as far as the eye could look, + nothing but a scalding sand, which, as the wind blew, drove about in + clouds enough to overwhelm man and beast. Nor could we see any end of it + either before us, which was our way, or to the right hand or left; so that + truly our men began to be discouraged, and talk of going back again. Nor + could we indeed think of venturing over such a horrid place as that before + us, in which we saw nothing but present death. + </p> + <p> + I was as much affected at the sight as any of them; but, for all that, I + could not bear the thoughts of going back again. I told them we had + marched 700 miles of our way, and it would be worse than death to think of + going back again; and that, if they thought the desert was not passable, I + thought we should rather change our course, and travel south till we came + to the Cape of Good Hope, or north to the country that lay along the Nile, + where, perhaps, we might find some way or other over to the west sea; for + sure all Africa was not a desert. + </p> + <p> + Our gunner, who, as I said before, was our guide as to the situation of + places, told us that he could not tell what to say to going for the Cape, + for it was a monstrous length, being from the place where we now were not + less than 1500 miles; and, by his account, we were now come a third part + of the way to the coast of Angola, where we should meet the western ocean, + and find ways enough for our escape home. On the other hand, he assured + us, and showed us a map of it, that, if we went northward, the western + shore of Africa went out into the sea above 1000 miles west, so that we + should have so much and more land to travel afterwards; which land might, + for aught we knew, be as wild, barren, and desert as this. And therefore, + upon the whole, he proposed that we should attempt this desert, and + perhaps we should not find it so long as we feared; and however, he + proposed that we should see how far our provisions would carry us, and, in + particular, our water; and we should venture no further than half so far + as our water would last; and if we found no end of the desert, we might + come safely back again. + </p> + <p> + This advice was so reasonable that we all approved of it; and accordingly + we calculated that we were able to carry provisions for forty-two days, + but that we could not carry water for above twenty days, though we were to + suppose it to stink, too, before that time expired. So that we concluded + that, if we did not come at some water in ten days' time, we would return; + but if we found a supply of water, we could then travel twenty-one days; + and, if we saw no end of the wilderness in that time, we would return + also. + </p> + <p> + With this regulation of our measures, we descended the mountains, and it + was the second day before we quite reached the plain; where, however, to + make us amends, we found a fine little rivulet of very good water, + abundance of deer, a sort of creature like a hare, but not so nimble, but + whose flesh we found very agreeable. But we were deceived in our + intelligence, for we found no people; so we got no more prisoners to + assist us in carrying our baggage. + </p> + <p> + The infinite number of deer and other creatures which we saw here, we + found was occasioned by the neighbourhood of the waste or desert, from + whence they retired hither for food and refreshment. We stored ourselves + here with flesh and roots of divers kinds, which our negroes understood + better than we, and which served us for bread; and with as much water as + (by the allowance of a quart a day to a man for our negroes, and three + pints a day a man for ourselves, and three quarts a day each for our + buffaloes) would serve us twenty days; and thus loaded for a long + miserable march, we set forwards, being all sound in health and very + cheerful, but not alike strong for so great a fatigue; and, which was our + grievance, were without a guide. + </p> + <p> + In the very first entrance of the waste we were exceedingly discouraged, + for we found the sand so deep, and it scalded our feet so much with the + heat, that after we had, as I may call it, waded rather than walked + through it about seven or eight miles, we were all heartily tired and + faint; even the very negroes laid down and panted like creatures that had + been pushed beyond their strength. + </p> + <p> + Here we found the difference of lodging greatly injurious to us; for, as + before, we always made us huts to sleep under, which covered us from the + night air, which is particularly unwholesome in those hot countries. But + we had here no shelter, no lodging, after so hard a march; for here were + no trees, no, not a shrub near us; and, which was still more frightful, + towards night we began to hear the wolves howl, the lions bellow, and a + great many wild asses braying, and other ugly noises which we did not + understand. + </p> + <p> + Upon this we reflected upon our indiscretion, that we had not, at least, + brought poles or stakes in our hands, with which we might have, as it + were, palisadoed ourselves in for the night, and so we might have slept + secure, whatever other inconveniences we suffered. However, we found a way + at last to relieve ourselves a little; for first we set up the lances and + bows we had, and endeavoured to bring the tops of them as near to one + another as we could, and so hung our coats on the top of them, which made + us a kind of sorry tent. The leopard's skin, and a few other skins we had + put together, made us a tolerable covering, and thus we laid down to + sleep, and slept very heartily too, for the first night; setting, however, + a good watch, being two of our own men with their fuzees, whom we relieved + in an hour at first, and two hours afterwards. And it was very well we did + this, for they found the wilderness swarmed with raging creatures of all + kinds, some of which came directly up to the very enclosure of our tent. + But our sentinels were ordered not to alarm us with firing in the night, + but to flash in the pan at them, which they did, and found it effectual, + for the creatures went off always as soon as they saw it, perhaps with + some noise or howling, and pursued such other game as they were upon. + </p> + <p> + If we were tired with the day's travel, we were all as much tired with the + night's lodging. But our black prince told us in the morning he would give + us some counsel, and indeed it was very good counsel. He told us we should + be all killed if we went on this journey, and through this desert, without + some covering for us at night; so he advised us to march back again to a + little river-side where we lay the night before, and stay there till we + could make us houses, as he called them, to carry with us to lodge in + every night. As he began a little to understand our speech, and we very + well to understand his signs, we easily knew what he meant, and that we + should there make mats (for we remembered that we saw a great deal of + matting or bass there, that the natives make mats of)—I say, that we + should make large mats there for covering our huts or tents to lodge in at + night. + </p> + <p> + We all approved this advice, and immediately resolved to go back that one + day's journey, resolving, though we carried less provisions, we would + carry mats with us to cover us in the night. Some of the nimblest of us + got back to the river with more ease than we had travelled it the day + before; but, as we were not in haste, the rest made a halt, encamped + another night, and came to us the next day. + </p> + <p> + In our return of this day's journey, our men that made two days of it met + with a very surprising thing, that gave them some reason to be careful how + they parted company again. The case was this:—The second day in the + morning, before they had gone half a mile, looking behind them they saw a + vast cloud of sand or dust rise in the air, as we see sometimes in the + roads in summer when it is very dusty and a large drove of cattle are + coming, only very much greater; and they could easily perceive that it + came after them; and it came on faster as they went from it. The cloud of + sand was so great that they could not see what it was that raised it, and + concluded that it was some army of enemies that pursued them; but then + considering that they came from the vast uninhabited wilderness, they knew + it was impossible any nation or people that way should have intelligence + of them or the way of their march; and therefore, if it was an army, it + must be of such as they were, travelling that way by accident. On the + other hand, as they knew that there were no horses in the country, and + that they came on so fast, they concluded that it must be some vast + collection of wild beasts, perhaps making to the hill country for food or + water, and that they should be all devoured or trampled under foot by + their multitude. + </p> + <p> + Upon this thought, they very prudently observed which way the cloud seemed + to point, and they turned a little out of their way to the north, + supposing it might pass by them. When they were about a quarter of a mile, + they halted to see what it might be. One of the negroes, a nimbler fellow + than the rest, went back a little, and came in a few minutes running as + fast as the heavy sands would allow, and by signs gave them to know that + it was a great herd, or drove, or whatever it might be called, of vast + monstrous elephants. + </p> + <p> + As it was a sight our men had never seen, they were desirous to see it, + and yet a little uneasy at the danger too; for though an elephant is a + heavy unwieldy creature, yet in the deep sand, which is nothing at all to + them, they marched at a great rate, and would soon have tired our people, + if they had had far to go, and had been pursued by them. + </p> + <p> + Our gunner was with them, and had a great mind to have gone close up to + one of the outermost of them, and to have clapped his piece to his ear, + and to have fired into him, because he had been told no shot would + penetrate them; but they all dissuaded him, lest upon the noise they + should all turn upon and pursue us; so he was reasoned out of it, and let + them pass, which, in our people's circumstances, was certainly the right + way. + </p> + <p> + They were between twenty and thirty in number, but prodigious great ones; + and though they often showed our men that they saw them, yet they did not + turn out of their way, or take any other notice of them than, as we might + say, just to look at them. We that were before saw the cloud of dust they + raised, but we had thought it had been our own caravan, and so took no + notice; but as they bent their course one point of the compass, or + thereabouts, to the southward of the east, and we went due east [? west], + they passed by us at some little distance; so that we did not see them, or + know anything of them, till evening, when our men came to us and gave us + this account of them. However, this was a useful experiment for our future + conduct in passing the desert, as you shall hear in its place. + </p> + <p> + We were now upon our work, and our black prince was head surveyor, for he + was an excellent mat-maker himself, and all his men understood it, so that + they soon made us near a hundred mats; and as every man, I mean of the + negroes, carried one, it was no manner of load, and we did not carry an + ounce of provisions the less. The greatest burthen was to carry six long + poles, besides some shorter stakes; but the negroes made an advantage of + that, for carrying them between two, they made the luggage of provisions + which they had to carry so much the lighter, binding it upon two poles, + and so made three couple of them. As soon as we saw this, we made a little + advantage of it too; for having three or four bags, called bottles (I mean + skins to carry water), more than the men could carry, we got them filled, + and carried them this way, which was a day's water and more, for our + journey. + </p> + <p> + Having now ended our work, made our mats, and fully recruited our stores + of all things necessary, and having made us abundance of small ropes of + matting for ordinary use, as we might have occasion, we set forward again, + having interrupted our journey eight days in all, upon this affair. To our + great comfort, the night before we set out there fell a very violent + shower of rain, the effects of which we found in the sand; though the heat + of one day dried the surface as much as before, yet it was harder at + bottom, not so heavy, and was cooler to our feet, by which means we + marched, as we reckoned, about fourteen miles instead of seven, and with + much more ease. + </p> + <p> + When we came to encamp, we had all things ready, for we had fitted our + tent, and set it up for trial, where we made it; so that, in less than an + hour, we had a large tent raised, with an inner and outer apartment, and + two entrances. In one we lay ourselves, in the other our negroes, having + light pleasant mats over us, and others at the same time under us. Also we + had a little place without all for our buffaloes, for they deserved our + care, being very useful to us, besides carrying forage and water for + themselves. Their forage was a root, which our black prince directed us to + find, not much unlike a parsnip, very moist and nourishing, of which there + was plenty wherever we came, this horrid desert excepted. + </p> + <p> + When we came the next morning to decamp, our negroes took down the tent, + and pulled up the stakes; and all was in motion in as little time as it + was set up. In this posture we marched eight days, and yet could see no + end, no change of our prospect, but all looking as wild and dismal as at + the beginning. If there was any alteration, it was that the sand was + nowhere so deep and heavy as it was the first three days. This we thought + might be because, for six months of the year the winds blowing west (as + for the other six they blow constantly east), the sand was driven + violently to the side of the desert where we set out, where the mountains + lying very high, the easterly monsoons, when they blew, had not the same + power to drive it back again; and this was confirmed by our finding the + like depth of sand on the farthest extent of the desert to the west. + </p> + <p> + It was the ninth day of our travel in this wilderness, when we came to the + view of a great lake of water; and you may be sure this was a particular + satisfaction to us, because we had not water left for above two or three + days more, at our shortest allowance; I mean allowing water for our + return, if we had been driven to the necessity of it. Our water had served + us two days longer than expected, our buffaloes having found, for two or + three days, a kind of herb like a broad flat thistle, though without any + prickle, spreading on the ground, and growing in the sand, which they ate + freely of, and which supplied them for drink as well as forage. + </p> + <p> + The next day, which was the tenth from our setting out, we came to the + edge of this lake, and, very happily for us, we came to it at the south + point of it, for to the north we could see no end of it; so we passed by + it and travelled three days by the side of it, which was a great comfort + to us, because it lightened our burthen, there being no need to carry + water when we had it in view. And yet, though here was so much water, we + found but very little alteration in the desert; no trees, no grass or + herbage, except that thistle, as I called it, and two or three more + plants, which we did not understand, of which the desert began to be + pretty full. + </p> + <p> + But as we were refreshed with the neighbourhood of this lake of water, so + we were now gotten among a prodigious number of ravenous inhabitants, the + like whereof, it is most certain, the eye of man never saw; for as I + firmly believe that never man nor body of men passed this desert since the + flood, so I believe there is not the like collection of fierce, ravenous, + and devouring creatures in the world; I mean not in any particular place. + </p> + <p> + For a day's journey before we came to this lake, and all the three days we + were passing by it, and for six or seven days' march after it, the ground + was scattered with elephants' teeth in such a number as is incredible; and + as some of them have lain there for some hundreds of years, so, seeing the + substance of them scarce ever decays, they may lie there, for aught I + know, to the end of time. The size of some of them is, it seems, to those + to whom I have reported it, as incredible as the number; and I can assure + you there were several so heavy as the strongest man among us could not + lift. As to number, I question not but there are enough to load a thousand + sail of the biggest ships in the world, by which I may be understood to + mean that the quantity is not to be conceived of; seeing that as they + lasted in view for above eighty miles' travelling, so they might continue + as far to the right hand, and to the left as far, and many times as far, + for aught we knew; for it seems the number of elephants hereabouts is + prodigiously great. In one place in particular we saw the head of an + elephant, with several teeth in it, but one of the biggest that ever I + saw; the flesh was consumed, to be sure, many hundred years before, and + all the other bones; but three of our strongest men could not lift this + skull and teeth; the great tooth, I believe, weighed at least three + hundredweight; and this was particularly remarkable to me, that I observed + the whole skull was as good ivory as the teeth, and, I believe, altogether + weighed at least six hundredweight; and though I do not know but, by the + same rule, all the bones of the elephant may be ivory, yet I think there + is this just objection against it from the example before me, that then + all the other bones of this elephant would have been there as well as the + head. + </p> + <p> + I proposed to our gunner, that, seeing we had travelled now fourteen days + without intermission, and that we had water here for our refreshment, and + no want of food yet, nor any fear of it, we should rest our people a + little, and see, at the same time, if perhaps we might kill some creatures + that were proper for food. The gunner, who had more forecast of that kind + than I had, agreed to the proposal, and added, why might we not try to + catch some fish out of the lake? The first thing we had before us was to + try if we could make any hooks, and this indeed put our artificer to his + trumps; however, with some labour and difficulty, he did it, and we + catched fresh fish of several kinds. How they came there, none but He that + made the lake and all the world knows; for, to be sure, no human hands + ever put any in there, or pulled any out before. + </p> + <p> + We not only catched enough for our present refreshment, but we dried + several large fishes, of kinds which I cannot describe, in the sun, by + which we lengthened out our provision considerably; for the heat of the + sun dried them so effectually without salt that they were perfectly cured, + dry, and hard, in one day's time. + </p> + <p> + We rested ourselves here five days; during which time we had abundance of + pleasant adventures with the wild creatures, too many to relate. One of + them was very particular, which was a chase between a she-lion, or + lioness, and a large deer; and though the deer is naturally a very nimble + creature, and she flew by us like the wind, having, perhaps, about 300 + yards the start of the lion, yet we found the lion, by her strength, and + the goodness of her lungs, got ground of her. They passed by us within + about a quarter of a mile, and we had a view of them a great way, when, + having given them over, we were surprised, about an hour after, to see + them come thundering back again on the other side of us, and then the lion + was within thirty or forty yards of her; and both straining to the + extremity of their speed, when the deer, coming to the lake, plunged into + the water, and swam for her life, as she had before run for it. + </p> + <p> + The lioness plunged in after her, and swam a little way, but came back + again; and when she was got upon the land she set up the most hideous roar + that ever I heard in my life, as if done in the rage of having lost her + prey. + </p> + <p> + We walked out morning and evening constantly; the middle of the day we + refreshed ourselves under our tent. But one morning early we saw another + chase, which more nearly concerned us than the other; for our black + prince, walking by the side of the lake, was set upon by a vast, great + crocodile, which came out of the lake upon him; and though he was very + light of foot, yet it was as much as he could do to get away. He fled + amain to us, and the truth is, we did not know what to do, for we were + told no bullet would enter her; and we found it so at first, for though + three of our men fired at her, yet she did not mind them; but my friend + the gunner, a venturous fellow, of a bold heart, and great presence of + mind, went up so near as to thrust the muzzle of his piece into her mouth, + and fired, but let his piece fall, and ran for it the very moment he had + fired it. The creature raged a great while, and spent its fury upon the + gun, making marks upon the very iron with its teeth, but after some time + fainted and died. + </p> + <p> + Our negroes spread the banks of the lake all this while for game, and at + length killed us three deer, one of them very large, the other two very + small. There was water-fowl also in the lake, but we never came near + enough to them to shoot any; and as for the desert, we saw no fowls + anywhere in it but at the lake. + </p> + <p> + We likewise killed two or three civet cats; but their flesh is the worst + of carrion. We saw abundance of elephants at a distance, and observed they + always go in very good company, that is to say, abundance of them + together, and always extended in a fair line of battle; and this, they + say, is the way they defend themselves from their enemies; for if lions or + tigers, wolves or any creatures, attack them, they being drawn in a line, + sometimes reaching five or six miles in length, whatever comes in their + way is sure to be trod under foot, or beaten in pieces with their trunks, + or lifted up in the air with their trunks; so that if a hundred lions or + tigers were coming along, if they meet a line of elephants, they will + always fly back till they see room to pass by the right hand or the left; + and if they did not, it would be impossible for one of them to escape; for + the elephant, though a heavy creature, is yet so dexterous and nimble with + his trunk, that he will not fail to lift up the heaviest lion, or any + other wild creature, and throw him up in the air quite over his back, and + then trample him to death with his feet. We saw several lines of battle + thus; we saw one so long that indeed there was no end of it to be seen, + and I believe there might be 2000 elephants in row or line. They are not + beasts of prey, but live upon the herbage of the field, as an ox does; and + it is said, that though they are so great a creature, yet that a smaller + quantity of forage supplies one of them than will suffice a horse. + </p> + <p> + The numbers of this kind of creature that are in those parts are + inconceivable, as may be gathered from the prodigious quantity of teeth + which, as I said, we saw in this vast desert; and indeed we saw a hundred + of them to one of any other kind. + </p> + <p> + One evening we were very much surprised. We were most of us laid down on + our mats to sleep, when our watch came running in among us, being frighted + with the sudden roaring of some lions just by them, which, it seems, they + had not seen, the night being dark, till they were just upon them. There + was, as it proved, an old lion and his whole family, for there was the + lioness and three young lions, besides the old king, who was a monstrous + great one. One of the young ones—who were good, large, well-grown + ones too—leaped up upon one of our negroes, who stood sentinel, + before he saw him, at which he was heartily frighted, cried out, and ran + into the tent. Our other man, who had a gun, had not presence of mind at + first to shoot him, but struck him with the butt-end of his piece, which + made him whine a little, and then growl at him fearfully; but the fellow + retired, and, we being all alarmed, three of our men snatched up their + guns, ran to the tent door, where they saw the great old lion by the fire + of his eyes, and first fired at him, but, we supposed, missed him, or at + least did not kill him; for they went all off, but raised a most hideous + roar, which, as if they had called for help, brought down a prodigious + number of lions, and other furious creatures, we know not what, about + them, for we could not see them; but there was a noise, and yelling and + howling, and all sorts of such wilderness music on every side of us, as if + all the beasts of the desert were assembled to devour us. + </p> + <p> + We asked our black prince what we should do with them. "Me go," says he, + "and fright them all." So he snatches up two or three of the worst of our + mats, and getting one of our men to strike some fire, he hangs the mat up + at the end of a pole, and set it on fire, and it blazed abroad a good + while; at which the creatures all moved off, for we heard them roar, and + make their bellowing noise at a great distance. "Well," says our gunner, + "if that will do, we need not burn our mats, which are our beds to lay + under us, and our tilting to cover us. Let me alone," says he. So he comes + back into our tent, and falls to making some artificial fireworks and the + like; and he gave our sentinels some to be ready at hand upon occasion, + and particularly he placed a great piece of wild-fire upon the same pole + that the mat had been tied to, and set it on fire, and that burnt there so + long that all the wild creatures left us for that time. + </p> + <p> + However, we began to be weary of such company; and, to be rid of them, we + set forward again two days sooner than we intended. We found now, that + though the desert did not end, nor could we see any appearance of it, yet + that the earth was pretty full of green stuff of one sort or another, so + that our cattle had no want; and secondly, that there were several little + rivers which ran into the lake, and so long as the country continued low, + we found water sufficient, which eased us very much in our carriage, and + we went on still sixteen days more without yet coming to any appearance of + better soil. After this we found the country rise a little, and by that we + perceived that the water would fail us; so, for fear of the worst, we + filled our bladder-bottles with water. We found the country rising + gradually thus for three days continually, when, on the sudden, we + perceived that, though we had mounted up insensibly, yet that we were on + the top of a very high ridge of hills, though not such as at first. + </p> + <p> + When we came to look down on the other side of the hills, we saw, to the + great joy of all our hearts, that the desert was at an end; that the + country was clothed with green, abundance of trees, and a large river; and + we made no doubt but that we should find people and cattle also; and here, + by our gunner's account, who kept our computations, we had marched about + 400 miles over this dismal place of horror, having been four-and-thirty + days a-doing of it, and consequently were come about 1100 miles of our + journey. + </p> + <p> + We would willingly have descended the hills that night, but it was too + late. The next morning we saw everything more plain, and rested ourselves + under the shade of some trees, which were now the most refreshing things + imaginable to us, who had been scorched above a month without a tree to + cover us. We found the country here very pleasant, especially considering + that we came from; and we killed some deer here also, which we found very + frequent under the cover of the woods. Also we killed a creature like a + goat, whose flesh was very good to eat, but it was no goat; we found also + a great number of fowls like partridge, but something smaller, and were + very tame; so that we lived here very well, but found no people, at least + none that would be seen, no, not for several days' journey; and to allay + our joy, we were almost every night disturbed with lions and tigers; + elephants, indeed, we saw none here. + </p> + <p> + In three days' march we came to a river, which we saw from the hills, and + which we called the Golden River; and we found it ran northward, which was + the first stream we had met with that did so. It ran with a very rapid + current, and our gunner, pulling out his map, assured me that this was + either the river Nile, or run into the great lake out of which the river + Nile was said to take its beginning; and he brought out his charts and + maps, which, by his instruction, I began to understand very well, and told + me he would convince me of it, and indeed he seemed to make it so plain to + me that I was of the same opinion. + </p> + <p> + But I did not enter into the gunner's reason for this inquiry, not in the + least, till he went on with it farther, and stated it thus:—"If this + is the river Nile, why should not we build some more canoes, and go down + this stream, rather than expose ourselves to any more deserts and + scorching sands in quest of the sea, which when we are come to, we shall + be as much at a loss how to get home as we were at Madagascar?" + </p> + <p> + The argument was good, had there been no objections in the way of a kind + which none of us were capable of answering; but, upon the whole, it was an + undertaking of such a nature that every one of us thought it + impracticable, and that upon several accounts; and our surgeon, who was + himself a good scholar and a man of reading, though not acquainted with + the business of sailing, opposed it, and some of his reasons, I remember, + were such as these:—First, the length of the way, which both he and + the gunner allowed, by the course of the water, and turnings of the river, + would be at least 4000 miles. Secondly, the innumerable crocodiles in the + river, which we should never be able to escape. Thirdly, the dreadful + deserts in the way; and lastly, the approaching rainy season, in which the + streams of the Nile would be so furious, and rise so high—spreading + far and wide over all the plain country—that we should never be able + to know when we were in the channel of the river and when not, and should + certainly be cast away, overset, or run aground so often that it would be + impossible to proceed by a river so excessively dangerous. + </p> + <p> + This last reason he made so plain to us that we began to be sensible of it + ourselves, so that we agreed to lay that thought aside, and proceed in our + first course, westwards towards the sea; but, as if we had been loth to + depart, we continued, by way of refreshing ourselves, to loiter two days + upon this river, in which time our black prince, who delighted much in + wandering up and down, came one evening and brought us several little bits + of something, he knew not what, but he found it felt heavy and looked + well, and showed it to me as what he thought was some rarity. I took not + much notice of it to him, but stepping out and calling the gunner to me I + showed it to him, and told him what I thought, viz., that it was certainly + gold. He agreed with me in that, and also in what followed, that we would + take the black prince out with us the next day, and make him show us where + he found it; that if there was any quantity to be found we would tell our + company of it, but if there was but little we would keep counsel, and have + it to ourselves. + </p> + <p> + But we forgot to engage the prince in the secret, who innocently told so + much to all the rest, as that they guessed what it was, and came to us to + see. When we found it was public, we were more concerned to prevent their + suspecting that we had any design to conceal it, and openly telling our + thoughts of it, we called our artificer, who agreed presently that it was + gold; so I proposed that we should all go with the prince to the place + where he found it, and if any quantity was to be had, we would lie here + some time and see what we could make of it. + </p> + <p> + Accordingly we went every man of us, for no man was willing to be left + behind in a discovery of such a nature. When we came to the place we found + it was on the west side of the river, not in the main river, but in + another small river or stream which came from the west, and ran into the + other at that place. We fell to raking in the sand, and washing it in our + hands; and we seldom took up a handful of sand but we washed some little + round lumps as big as a pin's head, or sometimes as big as a grape stone, + into our hands; and we found, in two or three hours' time, that every one + had got some, so we agreed to leave off, and go to dinner. + </p> + <p> + While we were eating, it came into my thoughts that while we worked at + this rate in a thing of such nicety and consequence, it was ten to one if + the gold, which was the make-bait of the world, did not, first or last, + set us together by the ears, to break our good articles and our + understanding one among another, and perhaps cause us to part companies, + or worse; I therefore told them that I was indeed the youngest man in the + company, but as they had always allowed me to give my opinion in things, + and had sometimes been pleased to follow my advice, so I had something to + propose now, which I thought would be for all our advantages, and I + believed they would all like it very well. I told them we were in a + country where we all knew there was a great deal of gold, and that all the + world sent ships thither to get it; that we did not indeed know where it + was, and so we might get a great deal, or a little, we did not know + whether; but I offered it to them to consider whether it would not be the + best way for us, and to preserve the good harmony and friendship that had + been always kept among us, and which was so absolutely necessary to our + safety, that what we found should be brought together to one common stock, + and be equally divided at last, rather than to run the hazard of any + difference which might happen among us from any one's having found more or + less than another. I told them, that if we were all upon one bottom we + should all apply ourselves heartily to the work; and, besides that, we + might then set our negroes all to work for us, and receive equally the + fruit of their labour and of our own, and being all exactly alike sharers, + there could be no just cause of quarrel or disgust among us. + </p> + <p> + They all approved the proposal, and every one jointly swore, and gave + their hands to one another, that they would not conceal the least grain of + gold from the rest; and consented that if any one or more should be found + to conceal any, all that he had should be taken from him and divided among + the rest; and one thing more was added to it by our gunner, from + considerations equally good and just, that if any one of us, by any play, + bet, game, or wager, won any money or gold, or the value of any, from + another, during our whole voyage, till our return quite to Portugal, he + should be obliged by us all to restore it again on the penalty of being + disarmed and turned out of the company, and of having no relief from us on + any account whatever. This was to prevent wagering and playing for money, + which our men were apt to do by several means and at several games, though + they had neither cards nor dice. + </p> + <p> + Having made this wholesome agreement, we went cheerfully to work, and + showed our negroes how to work for us; and working up the stream on both + sides, and in the bottom of the river, we spent about three weeks' time + dabbling in the water; by which time, as it lay all in our way, we had + gone about six miles, and not more; and still the higher we went, the more + gold we found; till at last, having passed by the side of a hill, we + perceived on a sudden that the gold stopped, and that there was not a bit + taken up beyond that place. It presently occurred to my mind, that it must + then be from the side of that little hill that all the gold we found was + worked down. + </p> + <p> + Upon this, we went back to the hill, and fell to work with that. We found + the earth loose, and of a yellowish loamy colour, and in some places a + white hard kind of stone, which, in describing since to some of our + artists, they tell me was the spar which is found by ore, and surrounds it + in the mine. However, if it had been all gold, we had no instrument to + force it out; so we passed that. But scratching into the loose earth with + our fingers, we came to a surprising place, where the earth, for the + quantity of two bushels, I believe, or thereabouts, crumbled down with + little more than touching it, and apparently showed us that there was a + great deal of gold in it. We took it all carefully up, and washing it in + the water, the loamy earth washed away, and left the gold dust free in our + hands; and that which was more remarkable was, that, when this loose earth + was all taken away, and we came to the rock or hard stone, there was not + one grain of gold more to be found. + </p> + <p> + At night we all came together to see what we had got; and it appeared we + had found, in that day's heap of earth, about fifty pounds' weight of gold + dust, and about thirty-four pounds' weight more in all the rest of our + works in the river. + </p> + <p> + It was a happy kind of disappointment to us, that we found a full stop put + to our work; for, had the quantity of gold been ever so small, yet, had + any at all come, I do not know when we should have given over; for, having + rummaged this place, and not finding the least grain of gold in any other + place, or in any of the earth there, except in that loose parcel, we went + quite back down the small river again, working it over and over again, as + long as we could find anything, how small soever; and we did get six or + seven pounds more the second time. Then we went into the first river, and + tried it up the stream and down the stream, on the one side and on the + other. Up the stream we found nothing, no, not a grain; down the stream we + found very little, not above the quantity of half an ounce in two miles' + working; so back we came again to the Golden River, as we justly called + it, and worked it up the stream and down the stream twice more apiece, and + every time we found some gold, and perhaps might have done so if we had + stayed there till this time; but the quantity was at last so small, and + the work so much the harder, that we agreed by consent to give it over, + lest we should fatigue ourselves and our negroes so as to be quite unfit + for our journey. + </p> + <p> + When we had brought all our purchase together, we had in the whole three + pounds and a half of gold to a man, share and share alike, according to + such a weight and scale as our ingenious cutler made for us to weigh it + by, which indeed he did by guess, but which, as he said, he was sure was + rather more than less, and so it proved at last; for it was near two + ounces more than weight in a pound. Besides this, there was seven or eight + pounds' weight left, which we agreed to leave in his hands, to work it + into such shapes as we thought fit, to give away to such people as we + might yet meet with, from whom we might have occasion to buy provisions, + or even to buy friendship, or the like; and particularly we gave about a + pound to our black prince, which he hammered and worked by his own + indefatigable hand, and some tools our artificer lent him, into little + round bits, as round almost as beads, though not exact in shape, and + drilling holes through them, put them all upon a string, and wore them + about his black neck, and they looked very well there, I assure you; but + he was many months a-doing it. And thus ended our first golden adventure. + </p> + <p> + We now began to discover what we had not troubled our heads much about + before, and that was, that, let the country be good or bad that we were + in, we could not travel much further for a considerable time. We had been + now five months and upwards in our journey, and the seasons began to + change; and nature told us, that, being in a climate that had a winter as + well as a summer, though of a different kind from what our country + produced, we were to expect a wet season, and such as we should not be + able to travel in, as well by reason of the rain itself, as of the floods + which it would occasion wherever we should come; and though we had been no + strangers to those wet seasons in the island of Madagascar, yet we had not + thought much of them since we began our travels; for, setting out when the + sun was about the solstice, that is, when it was at the greatest northern + distance from us, we had found the benefit of it in our travels. But now + it drew near us apace, and we found it began to rain; upon which we called + another general council, in which we debated our present circumstances, + and, in particular, whether we should go forward, or seek for a proper + place upon the bank of our Golden River, which had been so lucky to us, to + fix our camp for the winter. + </p> + <p> + Upon the whole, it was resolved to abide where we were; and it was not the + least part of our happiness that we did so, as shall appear in its place. + </p> + <p> + Having resolved upon this, our first measures were to set our negroes to + work, to make huts or houses for our habitation, and this they did very + dexterously; only that we changed the ground where we at first intended + it, thinking, as indeed it happened, that the river might reach it upon + any sudden rain. Our camp was like a little town, in which our huts were + in the centre, having one large one in the centre of them also, into which + all our particular lodgings opened; so that none of us went into our + apartments but through a public tent, where we all ate and drank together, + and kept our councils and society; and our carpenters made us tables, + benches, and stools in abundance, as many as we could make use of. + </p> + <p> + We had no need of chimneys, it was hot enough without fire; but yet we + found ourselves at last obliged to keep a fire every night upon a + particular occasion. For though we had in all other respects a very + pleasant and agreeable situation, yet we were rather worse troubled with + the unwelcome visits of wild beasts here than in the wilderness itself; + for as the deer and other gentle creatures came hither for shelter and + food, so the lions and tigers and leopards haunted these places + continually for prey. + </p> + <p> + When first we discovered this we were so uneasy at it that we thought of + removing our situation; but after many debates about it we resolved to + fortify ourselves in such a manner as not to be in any danger from it; and + this our carpenters undertook, who first palisaded our camp quite round + with long stakes, for we had wood enough, which stakes were not stuck in + one by another like pales, but in an irregular manner; a great multitude + of them so placed that they took up near two yards in thickness, some + higher, some lower, all sharpened at the top, and about a foot asunder: so + that had any creature jumped at them, unless he had gone clean over, which + it was very hard to do, he would be hung upon twenty or thirty spikes. + </p> + <p> + The entrance into this had larger stakes than the rest, so placed before + one another as to make three or four short turnings which no four-footed + beast bigger than a dog could possibly come in at; and that we might not + be attacked by any multitude together, and consequently be alarmed in our + sleep, as we had been, or be obliged to waste our ammunition, which we + were very chary of, we kept a great fire every night without the entrance + of our palisade, having a hut for our two sentinels to stand in free from + the rain, just within the entrance, and right against the fire. + </p> + <p> + To maintain this fire we cut a prodigious deal of wood, and piled it up in + a heap to dry, and with the green boughs made a second covering over our + huts, so high and thick that it might cast the rain from the first, and + keep us effectually dry. + </p> + <p> + We had scarcely finished all these works but the rain came on so fierce + and so continued that we had little time to stir abroad for food, except + indeed that our negroes, who wore no clothes, seemed to make nothing of + the rain; though to us Europeans, in those hot climates, nothing is more + dangerous. + </p> + <p> + We continued in this posture for four months, that is to say, from the + middle of June to the middle of October; for though the rains went off, at + least the greatest violence of them, about the equinox, yet, as the sun + was then just over our heads, we resolved to stay awhile till it passed a + little to the southward. + </p> + <p> + During our encampment here we had several adventures with the ravenous + creatures of that country; and had not our fire been always kept burning, + I question much whether all our fence, though we strengthened it + afterwards with twelve or fourteen rows of stakes or more, would have kept + us secure. It was always in the night that we had the disturbance of them, + and sometimes they came in such multitudes that we thought all the lions + and tigers, and leopards and wolves of Africa were come together to attack + us. One night, being clear moonshine, one of our men being upon the watch, + told us that he verily believed he saw ten thousand wild creatures of one + sort or another pass by our little camp, and ever as they saw the fire + they sheered off, but were sure to howl or roar, or whatever it was, when + they were past. + </p> + <p> + The music of their voices was very far from being pleasant to us, and + sometimes would be so very disturbing that we could not sleep for it; and + often our sentinels would call us that were awake to come and look at + them. It was one windy, tempestuous night, after a rainy day, that we were + indeed called up; for such innumerable numbers of devilish creatures came + about us that our watch really thought they would attack us. They would + not come on the side where the fire was; and though we thought ourselves + secure everywhere else, yet we all got up and took to our arms. The moon + was near the full, but the air full of flying clouds, and a strange + hurricane of wind to add to the terror of the night; when, looking on the + back part of our camp, I thought I saw a creature within our + fortification, and so indeed he was, except his haunches, for he had taken + a running leap, I suppose, and with all his might had thrown himself clear + over our palisades, except one strong pile, which stood higher than the + rest, and which had caught hold of him, and by his weight he had hanged + himself upon it, the spike of the pile running into his hinder haunch or + thigh, on the inside; and by that he hung, growling and biting the wood + for rage. I snatched up a lance from one of the negroes that stood just by + me, and running to him, struck it three or four times into him, and + despatched him, being unwilling to shoot, because I had a mind to have a + volley fired among the rest, whom I could see standing without, as thick + as a drove of bullocks going to a fair. I immediately called our people + out, and showed them the object of terror which I had seen, and, without + any further consultation, fired a full volley among them, most of our + pieces being loaded with two or three slugs or bullets apiece. It made a + horrible clutter among them, and in general they all took to their heels, + only that we could observe that some walked off with more gravity and + majesty than others, being not so much frighted at the noise and fire; and + we could perceive that some were left upon the ground struggling as for + life, but we durst not stir out to see what they were. + </p> + <p> + Indeed they stood so thick, and were so near us, that we could not well + miss killing or wounding some of them, and we believed they had certainly + the smell of us, and our victuals we had been killing; for we had killed a + deer, and three or four of those creatures like goats the day before; and + some of the offal had been thrown out behind our camp, and this, we + suppose, drew them so much about us; but we avoided it for the future. + </p> + <p> + Though the creatures fled, yet we heard a frightful roaring all night at + the place where they stood, which we supposed was from some that were + wounded, and as soon as day came we went out to see what execution we had + done. And indeed it was a strange sight; there were three tigers and two + wolves quite killed, besides the creature I had killed within our + palisade, which seemed to be of an ill-gendered kind, between a tiger and + a leopard. Besides this there was a noble old lion alive, but with both + his fore-legs broke, so that he could not stir away, and he had almost + beat himself to death with struggling all night, and we found that this + was the wounded soldier that had roared so loud and given us so much + disturbance. Our surgeon, looking at him, smiled. "Now," says he, "if I + could be sure this lion would be as grateful to me as one of his majesty's + ancestors was to Androcles, the Roman slave, I would certainly set both + his legs again and cure him." I had not heard the story of Androcles, so + he told it me at large; but as to the surgeon, we told him he had no way + to know whether the lion would do so or not, but to cure him first and + trust to his honour; but he had no faith, so to despatch him and put him + out of his torment, he shot him in the head and killed him, for which we + called him the king-killer ever after. + </p> + <p> + Our negroes found no less than five of these ravenous creatures wounded + and dropped at a distance from our quarters; whereof, one was a wolf, one + a fine spotted young leopard, and the other were creatures that we knew + not what to call them. + </p> + <p> + We had several more of these gentlefolks about after that, but no such + general rendezvous of them as that was any more; but this ill effect it + had to us, that it frighted the deer and other creatures from our + neighbourhood, of whose company we were much more desirous, and which were + necessary for our subsistence. However, our negroes went out every day + a-hunting, as they called it, with bow and arrow, and they scarce ever + failed of bringing us home something or other; and particularly we found + in this part of the country, after the rains had fallen some time, + abundance of wild fowl, such as we have in England, duck, teal, widgeon, + etc.; some geese, and some kinds that we had never seen before; and we + frequently killed them. Also we catched a great deal of fresh fish out of + the river, so that we wanted no provision. If we wanted anything, it was + salt to eat with our fresh meat; but we had a little left, and we used it + sparingly; for as to our negroes, they could not taste it, nor did they + care to eat any meat that was seasoned with it. + </p> + <p> + The weather began now to clear up, the rains were down, and the floods + abated, and the sun, which had passed our zenith, was gone to the + southward a good way; so we prepared to go on our way. + </p> + <p> + It was the 12th of October, or thereabouts, that we began to set forward; + and having an easy country to travel in, as well as to supply us with + provisions, though still without inhabitants, we made more despatch, + travelling sometimes, as we calculated it, twenty or twenty-five miles a + day; nor did we halt anywhere in eleven days' march, one day excepted, + which was to make a raft to carry us over a small river, which, having + swelled with the rains, was not yet quite down. + </p> + <p> + When we were past this river, which, by the way, ran to the northward too, + we found a great row of hills in our way. We saw, indeed, the country open + to the right at a great distance; but, as we kept true to our course, due + west, we were not willing to go a great way out of our way, only to shun a + few hills. So we advanced; but we were surprised when, being not quite + come to the top, one of our company, who, with two negroes, was got up + before us, cried out, "The sea! the sea!" and fell a-dancing and jumping, + as signs of joy. + </p> + <p> + The gunner and I were most surprised at it, because we had but that + morning been calculating that we must have yet above 1000 miles on the sea + side, and that we could not expect to reach it till another rainy season + would be upon us; so that when our man cried out, "The sea," the gunner + was angry, and said he was mad. + </p> + <p> + But we were both in the greatest surprise imaginable, when, coming to the + top of the hill, and though it was very high, we saw nothing but water, + either before us or to the right hand or the left, being a vast sea, + without any bounds but the horizon. + </p> + <p> + We went down the hill full of confusion of thought, not being able to + conceive whereabouts we were or what it must be, seeing by all our charts + the sea was yet a vast way off. + </p> + <p> + It was not above three miles from the hills before we came to the shore, + or water-edge of this sea, and there, to our further surprise, we found + the water fresh and pleasant to drink; so that, in short, we knew not what + course to take. The sea, as we thought it to be, put a full stop to our + journey (I mean westward), for it lay just in the way. Our next question + was, which hand to turn to, to the right hand or the left, but this was + soon resolved; for, as we knew not the extent of it, we considered that + our way, if it had been the sea really, must be on the north, and + therefore, if we went to the south now, it must be just so much out of our + way at last. So, having spent a good part of the day in our surprise at + the thing, and consulting what to do, we set forward to the north. + </p> + <p> + We travelled upon the shore of this sea full twenty-three days before we + could come to any resolution about what it was; at the end of which, early + one morning, one of our seamen cried out, "Land!" and it was no false + alarm, for we saw plainly the tops of some hills at a very great distance, + on the further side of the water, due west; but though this satisfied us + that it was not the ocean, but an inland sea or lake, yet we saw no land + to the northward, that is to say, no end of it, but were obliged to travel + eight days more, and near 100 miles farther, before we came to the end of + it, and then we found this lake or sea ended in a very great river which + ran N. or N. by E., as the other river had done which I mentioned before. + </p> + <p> + My friend the gunner, upon examining, said that he believed that he was + mistaken before, and that this was the river Nile, but was still of the + mind that we were of before, that we should not think of a voyage into + Egypt that way; so we resolved upon crossing this river, which, however, + was not so easy as before, the river being very rapid and the channel very + broad. + </p> + <p> + It cost us, therefore, a week here to get materials to waft ourselves and + cattle over this river; for though here were stores of trees, yet there + was none of any considerable growth sufficient to make a canoe. + </p> + <p> + During our march on the edge of this bank we met with great fatigue, and + therefore travelled a fewer miles in a day than before, there being such a + prodigious number of little rivers that came down from the hills on the + east side, emptying themselves into this gulf, all which waters were + pretty high, the rains having been but newly over. + </p> + <p> + In the last three days of our travel we met with some inhabitants, but we + found they lived upon the little hills and not by the water-side; nor were + we a little put to it for food in this march, having killed nothing for + four or five days but some fish we caught out of the lake, and that not in + such plenty as we found before. + </p> + <p> + But, to make us some amends, we had no disturbance upon all the shores of + this lake from any wild beasts; the only inconveniency of that kind was, + that we met an ugly, venomous, deformed kind of a snake or serpent in the + wet grounds near the lake, that several times pursued us as if it would + attack us; and if we struck or threw anything at it, it would raise itself + up and hiss so loud that it might be heard a great way. It had a hellish + ugly deformed look and voice, and our men would not be persuaded but it + was the devil, only that we did not know what business Satan could have + there, where there were no people. + </p> + <p> + It was very remarkable that we had now travelled 1000 miles without + meeting with any people in the heart of the whole continent of Africa, + where, to be sure, never man set his foot since the sons of Noah spread + themselves over the face of the whole earth. Here also our gunner took an + observation with his forestaff, to determine our latitude, and he found + now, that having marched about thirty-three days northward, we were in 6 + degrees 22 minutes south latitude. + </p> + <p> + After having with great difficulty got over this river, we came into a + strange wild country that began a little to affright us; for though the + country was not a desert of dry scalding sand as that was we had passed + before, yet it was mountainous, barren, and infinitely full of most + furious wild beasts, more than any place we had passed yet. There was + indeed a kind of coarse herbage on the surface, and now and then a few + trees, or rather shrubs. But people we could see none, and we began to be + in great suspense about victuals, for we had not killed a deer a great + while, but had lived chiefly upon fish and fowl, always by the water-side, + both which seemed to fail us now; and we were in the more consternation, + because we could not lay in a stock here to proceed upon, as we did + before, but were obliged to set out with scarcity, and without any + certainty of a supply. + </p> + <p> + We had, however, no remedy but patience; and having killed some fowls and + dried some fish, as much as, with short allowance, we reckoned would last + us five days, we resolved to venture, and venture we did; nor was it + without cause that we were apprehensive of the danger, for we travelled + the five days and met neither with fish nor fowl, nor four-footed beast, + whose flesh was fit to eat, and we were in a most dreadful apprehension of + being famished to death. On the sixth day we almost fasted, or, as we may + say, we ate up all the scraps of what we had left, and at night lay down + supperless upon our mats, with heavy hearts, being obliged the eighth day + to kill one of our poor faithful servants, the buffaloes that carried our + baggage. The flesh of this creature was very good, and so sparingly did we + eat of it that it lasted us all three days and a half, and was just spent; + and we were on the point of killing another when we saw before us a + country that promised better, having high trees and a large river in the + middle of it. + </p> + <p> + This encouraged us, and we quickened our march for the river-side, though + with empty stomachs, and very faint and weak; but before we came to this + river we had the good hap to meet with some young deer, a thing we had + long wished for. In a word, having shot three of them, we came to a full + stop to fill our bellies, and never gave the flesh time to cool before we + ate it; nay, it was much we could stay to kill it and had not eaten it + alive, for we were, in short, almost famished. + </p> + <p> + Through all that inhospitable country we saw continually lions, tigers, + leopards, civet cats, and abundance of kinds of creatures that we did not + understand; we saw no elephants, but every now and then we met with an + elephant's tooth lying on the ground, and some of them lying, as it were, + half buried by the length of time that they had lain there. + </p> + <p> + When we came to the shore of this river, we found it ran northerly still, + as all the rest had done, but with this difference, that as the course of + the other rivers were N. by E. or N.N.E., the course of this lay N.W.N. + </p> + <p> + On the farther bank of this river we saw some sign of inhabitants, but met + with none for the first day; but the next day we came into an inhabited + country, the people all negroes, and stark naked, without shame, both men + and women. + </p> + <p> + We made signs of friendship to them, and found them a very frank, civil, + and friendly sort of people. They came to our negroes without any + suspicion, nor did they give us any reason to suspect them of any + villainy, as the others had done; we made signs to them that we were + hungry, and immediately some naked women ran and fetched us great + quantities of roots, and of things like pumpkins, which we made no scruple + to eat; and our artificer showed them some of his trinkets that he had + made, some of iron, some of silver, but none of gold. They had so much + judgment as to choose that of silver before the iron; but when we showed + them some gold, we found they did not value it so much as either of the + other. + </p> + <p> + For some of these things they brought us more provisions, and three living + creatures as big as calves, but not of that kind; neither did we ever see + any of them before; their flesh was very good; and after that they brought + us twelve more, and some smaller creatures like hares; all which were very + welcome to us, who were indeed at a very great loss for provisions. + </p> + <p> + We grew very intimate with these people, and indeed they were the + civillest and most friendly people that we met with at all, and mightily + pleased with us; and, which was very particular, they were much easier to + be made to understand our meaning than any we had met with before. + </p> + <p> + At last we began to inquire our way, pointing to the west. They made us + understand easily that we could not go that way, but they pointed to us + that we might go north-west, so that we presently understood that there + was another lake in our way, which proved to be true; for in two days more + we saw it plain, and it held us till we passed the equinoctial line, lying + all the way on our left hand, though at a great distance. + </p> + <p> + Travelling thus northward, our gunner seemed very anxious about our + proceedings; for he assured us, and made me sensible of it by the maps + which he had been teaching me out of, that when we came into the latitude + of six degrees, or thereabouts, north of the line, the land trended away + to the west to such a length that we should not come at the sea under a + march of above 1500 miles farther westward than the country we desired to + go to. I asked him if there were no navigable rivers that we might meet + with, which, running into the west ocean, might perhaps carry us down + their stream, and then, if it were 1500 miles, or twice 1500 miles, we + might do well enough if we could but get provisions. + </p> + <p> + Here he showed me the maps again, and that there appeared no river whose + stream was of any such a length as to do any kindness, till we came + perhaps within 200 or 300 miles of the shore, except the Rio Grande, as + they call it, which lay farther northward from us, at least 700 miles; and + that then he knew not what kind of country it might carry us through; for + he said it was his opinion that the heats on the north of the line, even + in the same latitude, were violent, and the country more desolate, barren, + and barbarous, than those of the south; and that when we came among the + negroes in the north part of Africa, next the sea, especially those who + had seen and trafficked with the Europeans, such as Dutch, English, + Portuguese, Spaniards, etc., they had most of them been so ill-used at + some time or other that they would certainly put all the spite they could + upon us in mere revenge. + </p> + <p> + Upon these considerations he advised us that, as soon as we had passed + this lake, we should proceed W.S.W., that is to say, a little inclining to + the south, and that in time we should meet with the great river Congo, + from whence the coast is called Congo, being a little north of Angola, + where we intended at first to go. + </p> + <p> + I asked him if ever he had been on the coast of Congo. He said, yes, he + had, but was never on shore there. Then I asked him how we should get from + thence to the coast where the European ships came, seeing, if the land + trended away west for 1500 miles, we must have all that shore to traverse + before we could double the west point of it. + </p> + <p> + He told me it was ten to one but we should hear of some European ships to + take us in, for that they often visited the coast of Congo and Angola, in + trade with the negroes; and that if we could not, yet, if we could but + find provisions, we should make our way as well along the sea-shore as + along the river, till we came to the Gold Coast, which, he said, was not + above 400 or 500 miles north of Congo, besides the turning of the coast + west about 300 more; that shore being in the latitude of six or seven + degrees; and that there the English, or Dutch, or French had settlements + or factories, perhaps all of them. + </p> + <p> + I confess I had more mind, all the while he argued, to have gone + northward, and shipped ourselves in the Rio Grande, or, as the traders + call it, the river Negro or Niger, for I knew that at last it would bring + us down to the Cape de Verd, where we were sure of relief; whereas, at the + coast we were going to now, we had a prodigious way still to go, either by + sea or land, and no certainty which way to get provisions but by force; + but for the present I held my tongue, because it was my tutor's opinion. + </p> + <p> + But when, according to his desire, we came to turn southward, having + passed beyond the second great lake, our men began all to be uneasy, and + said we were now out of our way for certain, for that we were going + farther from home, and that we were indeed far enough off already. + </p> + <p> + But we had not marched above twelve days more, eight whereof were taken up + in rounding the lake, and four more south-west, in order to make for the + river Congo, but we were put to another full stop, by entering a country + so desolate, so frightful, and so wild, that we knew not what to think or + do; for, besides that it appeared as a terrible and boundless desert, + having neither woods, trees, rivers, or inhabitants, so even the place + where we were was desolate of inhabitants, nor had we any way to gather in + a stock of provisions for the passing of this desert, as we did before at + our entering the first, unless we had marched back four days to the place + where we turned the head of the lake. + </p> + <p> + Well, notwithstanding this, we ventured; for, to men that had passed such + wild places as we had done, nothing could seem too desperate to undertake. + We ventured, I say, and the rather because we saw very high mountains in + our way at a great distance, and we imagined, wherever there were + mountains there would be springs and rivers; where rivers there would be + trees and grass; where trees and grass there would be cattle; and where + cattle, some kind of inhabitants. At last, in consequence of this + speculative philosophy, we entered this waste, having a great heap of + roots and plants for our bread, such as the Indians gave us, a very little + flesh or salt, and but a little water. + </p> + <p> + We travelled two days towards those hills, and still they seemed as far + off as they did at first, and it was the fifth day before we got to them; + indeed, we travelled but softly, for it was excessively hot; and we were + much about the very equinoctial line, we hardly knew whether to the south + or the north of it. + </p> + <p> + As we had concluded, that where there were hills there would be springs, + so it happened; but we were not only surprised, but really frighted, to + find the first spring we came to, and which looked admirably clear and + beautiful, to be salt as brine. It was a terrible disappointment to us, + and put us under melancholy apprehensions at first; but the gunner, who + was of a spirit never discouraged, told us we should not be disturbed at + that, but be very thankful, for salt was a bait we stood in as much need + of as anything, and there was no question but we should find fresh water + as well as salt; and here our surgeon stepped in to encourage us, and told + us that if we did not know he would show us a way how to make that salt + water fresh, which indeed made us all more cheerful, though we wondered + what he meant. + </p> + <p> + Meantime our men, without bidding, had been seeking about for other + springs, and found several; but still they were all salt; from whence we + concluded that there was a salt rock or mineral stone in those mountains, + and perhaps they might be all of such a substance; but still I wondered by + what witchcraft it was that our artist the surgeon would make this salt + water turn fresh, and I longed to see the experiment, which was indeed a + very odd one; but he went to work with as much assurance as if he had + tried it on the very spot before. + </p> + <p> + He took two of our large mats and sewed them together, and they made a + kind of a bag four feet broad, three feet and a half high, and about a + foot and a half thick when it was full. + </p> + <p> + He caused us to fill this bag with dry sand and tread it down as close as + we could, not to burst the mats. When thus the bag was full within a foot, + he sought some other earth and filled up the rest with it, and still trod + all in as hard as he could. When he had done, he made a hole in the upper + earth about as broad as the crown of a large hat, or something bigger + about, but not so deep, and bade a negro fill it with water, and still as + it shrunk away to fill it again, and keep it full. The bag he had placed + at first across two pieces of wood, about a foot from the ground; and + under it he ordered some of our skins to be spread that would hold water. + In about an hour, and not sooner, the water began to come dropping through + the bottom of the bag, and, to our great surprise, was perfectly fresh and + sweet, and this continued for several hours; but in the end the water + began to be a little brackish. When we told him that, "Well, then," said + he, "turn the sand out, and fill it again." Whether he did this by way of + experiment from his own fancy, or whether he had seen it done before, I do + not remember. + </p> + <p> + The next day we mounted the tops of the hills, where the prospect was + indeed astonishing, for as far as the eye could look, south, or west, or + northwest, there was nothing to be seen but a vast howling wilderness, + with neither tree nor river, nor any green thing. The surface we found, as + the part we passed the day before, had a kind of thick moss upon it, of a + blackish dead colour, but nothing in it that looked like food, either for + man or beast. + </p> + <p> + Had we been stored with provisions to have entered for ten or twenty days + upon this wilderness, as we were formerly, and with fresh water, we had + hearts good enough to have ventured, though we had been obliged to come + back again, for if we went north we did not know but we might meet with + the same; but we neither had provisions, neither were we in any place + where it was possible to get them. We killed some wild ferine creatures at + the foot of these hills; but, except two things, like to nothing that we + ever saw before, we met with nothing that was fit to eat. These were + creatures that seemed to be between the kind of a buffalo and a deer, but + indeed resembled neither; for they had no horns, and had great legs like a + cow, with a fine head, and the neck like a deer. We killed also, at + several times, a tiger, two young lions, and a wolf; but, God be thanked, + we were not so reduced as to eat carrion. + </p> + <p> + Upon this terrible prospect I renewed my motion of turning northward, and + making towards the river Niger or Rio Grande, then to turn west towards + the English settlements on the Gold Coast; to which every one most readily + consented, only our gunner, who was indeed our best guide, though he + happened to be mistaken at this time. He moved that, as our coast was now + northward, so we might slant away north-west, that so, by crossing the + country, we might perhaps meet with some other river that run into the Rio + Grande northward, or down to the Gold Coast southward, and so both direct + our way and shorten the labour; as also because, if any of the country was + inhabited and fruitful, we should probably find it upon the shore of the + rivers, where alone we could be furnished with provisions. + </p> + <p> + This was good advice, and too rational not to be taken; but our present + business was, what to do to get out of this dreadful place we were in. + Behind us was a waste, which had already cost us five days' march, and we + had not provisions for five days left to go back again the same way. + Before us was nothing but horror, as above; so we resolved, seeing the + ridge of the hills we were upon had some appearance of fruitfulness, and + that they seemed to lead away to the northward a great way, to keep under + the foot of them on the east side, to go on as far as we could, and in the + meantime to look diligently out for food. + </p> + <p> + Accordingly we moved on the next morning; for we had no time to lose, and, + to our great comfort, we came in our first morning's march to very good + springs of fresh water; and lest we should have a scarcity again, we + filled all our bladder bottles and carried it with us. I should also have + observed that our surgeon, who made the salt water fresh, took the + opportunity of those salt springs, and made us the quantity of three or + four pecks of very good salt. + </p> + <p> + In our third march we found an unexpected supply of food, the hills being + full of hares. They were of a kind something different from ours in + England, larger and not as swift of foot, but very good meat. We shot + several of them, and the little tame leopard, which I told you we took at + the negro town that we plundered, hunted them like a dog, and killed us + several every day; but she would eat nothing of them unless we gave it + her, which, indeed, in our circumstance, was very obliging. We salted them + a little and dried them in the sun whole, and carried a strange parcel + along with us. I think it was almost three hundred, for we did not know + when we might find any more, either of these or any other food. We + continued our course under these hills very comfortably for eight or nine + days, when we found, to our great satisfaction, the country beyond us + began to look with something of a better countenance. As for the west side + of the hills, we never examined it till this day, when three of our + company, the rest halting for refreshment, mounted the hills again to + satisfy their curiosity, but found it all the same, nor could they see any + end of it, no, not to the north, the way we were going; so the tenth day, + finding the hills made a turn, and led as it were into the vast desert, we + left them and continued our course north, the country being very tolerably + full of woods, some waste, but not tediously long, till we came, by our + gunner's observation, into the latitude of eight degrees five minutes, + which we were nineteen days more in performing. + </p> + <p> + All this way we found no inhabitants, but abundance of wild ravenous + creatures, with which we became so well acquainted now that really we did + not much mind them. We saw lions and tigers and leopards every night and + morning in abundance; but as they seldom came near us, we let them go + about their business: if they offered to come near us, we made false fire + with any gun that was uncharged, and they would walk off as soon as they + saw the flash. + </p> + <p> + We made pretty good shift for food all this way; for sometimes we killed + hares, sometimes some fowls, but for my life I cannot give names to any of + them, except a kind of partridge, and another that was like our turtle. + Now and then we began to meet with elephants again in great numbers; those + creatures delighted chiefly in the woody part of the country. + </p> + <p> + This long-continued march fatigued us very much, and two of our men fell + sick, indeed, so very sick that we thought they would have died; and one + of our negroes died suddenly. Our surgeon said it was an apoplexy, but he + wondered at it, he said, for he could never complain of his high feeding. + Another of them was very ill; but our surgeon with much ado persuading + him, indeed it was almost forcing him to be let blood, he recovered. + </p> + <p> + We halted here twelve days for the sake of our sick men, and our surgeon + persuaded me and three or four more of us to be let blood during the time + of rest, which, with other things he gave us, contributed very much to our + continued health in so tedious a march and in so hot a climate. + </p> + <p> + In this march we pitched our matted tents every night, and they were very + comfortable to us, though we had trees and woods to shelter us in most + places. We thought it very strange that in all this part of the country we + yet met with no inhabitants; but the principal reason, as we found + afterwards, was, that we, having kept a western course first, and then a + northern course, were gotten too much into the middle of the country and + among the deserts; whereas the inhabitants are principally found among the + rivers, lakes, and lowlands, as well to the south-west as to the north. + </p> + <p> + What little rivulets we found here were so empty of water, that except + some pits, and little more than ordinary pools, there was scarcely any + water to be seen in them; and they rather showed that during the rainy + months they had a channel, than that they had really running water in them + at that time, by which it was easy for us to judge that we had a great way + to go; but this was no discouragement so long as we had but provisions, + and some seasonable shelter from the violent heat, which indeed I thought + was much greater now than when the sun was just over our heads. + </p> + <p> + Our men being recovered, we set forward again, very well stored with + provisions, and water sufficient, and bending our course a little to the + westward of the north, travelled in hopes of some favourable stream which + might bear a canoe; but we found none till after twenty days' travel, + including eight days' rest; for our men being weak, we rested very often, + especially when we came to places which were proper for our purpose, where + we found cattle, fowl, or anything to kill for our food. In those twenty + days' march we advanced four degrees to the northward, besides some + meridian distance westward, and we met with abundance of elephants, and + with a good number of elephants' teeth scattered up and down, here and + there, in the woody grounds especially, some of which were very large. But + they were no booty to us; our business was provisions, and a good passage + out of the country; and it had been much more to our purpose to have found + a good fat deer, and to have killed it for our food, than a hundred ton of + elephants' teeth; and yet, as you shall presently hear, when we came to + begin our passage by water, we once thought to have built a large canoe, + on purpose to have loaded it with ivory; but this was when we knew nothing + of the rivers, nor knew anything how dangerous and how difficult a passage + it was we were likely to have in them, nor had considered the weight of + carriage to lug them to the rivers where we might embark. + </p> + <p> + At the end of twenty days' travel, as above, in the latitude of three + degrees sixteen minutes, we discovered in a valley, at some distance from + us, a pretty tolerable stream, which we thought deserved the name of a + river, and which ran its course N.N.W., which was just what we wanted. As + we had fixed our thoughts upon our passage by water, we took this for the + place to make the experiment, and bent our march directly to the valley. + </p> + <p> + There was a small thicket of trees just in our way, which we went by, + thinking no harm, when on a sudden one of our negroes was dangerously + wounded with an arrow shot into his back, slanting between his shoulders. + This put us to a full stop; and three of our men, with two negroes, + spreading the wood, for it was but a small one, found a negro with a bow, + but no arrow, who would have escaped, but our men that discovered him shot + him in revenge of the mischief he had done; so we lost the opportunity of + taking him prisoner, which, if we had done, and sent him home with good + usage, it might have brought others to us in a friendly manner. + </p> + <p> + Going a little farther, we came to five negro huts or houses, built after + a different manner from any we had seen yet; and at the door of one of + them lay seven elephants' teeth, piled up against the wall or side of the + hut, as if they had been provided against a market. Here were no men, but + seven or eight women, and near twenty children. We offered them no + incivility of any kind, but gave them every one a bit of silver beaten out + thin, as I observed before, and cut diamond fashion, or in the shape of a + bird, at which the women were overjoyed, and brought out to us several + sorts of food, which we did not understand, being cakes of a meal made of + roots, which they bake in the sun, and which ate very well. We went a + little way farther and pitched our camp for that night, not doubting but + our civility to the women would produce some good effect when their + husbands might come home. + </p> + <p> + Accordingly, the next morning the women, with eleven men, five young boys, + and two good big girls, came to our camp. Before they came quite to us, + the women called aloud, and made an odd screaming noise to bring us out; + and accordingly we came out, when two of the women, showing us what we had + given them, and pointing to the company behind, made such signs as we + could easily understand signified friendship. When the men advanced, + having bows and arrows, they laid them down on the ground, scraped and + threw sand over their heads, and turned round three times with their hands + laid up upon the tops of their heads. This, it seems, was a solemn vow of + friendship. Upon this we beckoned them with our hands to come nearer; then + they sent the boys and girls to us first, which, it seems, was to bring us + more cakes of bread and some green herbs to eat, which we received, and + took the boys up and kissed them, and the little girls too; then the men + came up close to us, and sat them down on the ground, making signs that we + should sit down by them, which we did. They said much to one another, but + we could not understand them, nor could we find any way to make them + understand us, much less whither we were going, or what we wanted, only + that we easily made them understand we wanted victuals; whereupon one of + the men, casting his eyes about him towards a rising ground that was about + half a mile off, started up as if he was frighted, flew to the place where + they had laid down their bows and arrows, snatched up a bow and two + arrows, and ran like a racehorse to the place. When he came there, he let + fly both his arrows, and comes back again to us with the same speed. We, + seeing he came with the bow, but without the arrows, were the more + inquisitive; but the fellow, saying nothing to us, beckons to one of our + negroes to come to him, and we bid him go; so he led him back to the + place, where lay a kind of deer, shot with two arrows, but not quite dead, + and between them they brought it down to us. This was for a gift to us, + and was very welcome, I assure you, for our stock was low. These people + were all stark naked. + </p> + <p> + The next day there came about a hundred men to us, and women making the + same awkward signals of friendship, and dancing, and showing themselves + very well pleased, and anything they had they gave us. How the man in the + wood came to be so butcherly and rude as to shoot at our men, without + making any breach first, we could not imagine; for the people were simple, + plain, and inoffensive in all our other conversation with them. + </p> + <p> + From hence we went down the banks of the little river I mentioned, and + where, I found, we should see the whole nation of negroes, but whether + friendly to us or not, that we could make no judgment of yet. + </p> + <p> + The river was no use to us, as to the design of making canoes, a great + while; and we traversed the country on the edge of it about five days + more, when our carpenters, finding the stream increased, proposed to pitch + our tents, and fall to work to make canoes; but after we had begun the + work, and cut down two or three trees, and spent five days in the labour, + some of our men, wandering further down the river, brought us word that + the stream rather decreased than increased, sinking away into the sands, + or drying up by the heat of the sun, so that the river appeared not able + to carry the least canoe that could be any way useful to us; so we were + obliged to give over our enterprise and move on. + </p> + <p> + In our further prospect this way, we marched three days full west, the + country on the north side being extraordinary mountainous, and more + parched and dry than any we had seen yet; whereas, in the part which looks + due west, we found a pleasant valley running a great way between two great + ridges of mountains. The hills looked frightful, being entirely bare of + trees or grass, and even white with the dryness of the sand; but in the + valley we had trees, grass, and some creatures that were fit for food, and + some inhabitants. + </p> + <p> + We passed by some of their huts or houses, and saw people about them, but + they ran up into the hills as soon as they saw us. At the end of this + valley we met with a peopled country, and at first it put us to some doubt + whether we should go among them, or keep up towards the hills northerly; + and as our aim was principally as before, to make our way to the river + Niger, we inclined to the latter, pursuing our course by the compass to + the N.W. We marched thus without interruption seven days more, when we met + with a surprising circumstance much more desolate and disconsolate than + our own, and which, in time to come, will scarce seem credible. + </p> + <p> + We did not much seek the conversing, or acquainting ourselves with the + natives of the country, except where we found the want of them for our + provision, or their direction for our way; so that, whereas we found the + country here begin to be very populous, especially towards our left hand, + that is, to the south, we kept at the more distance northerly, still + stretching towards the west. + </p> + <p> + In this tract we found something or other to kill and eat, which always + supplied our necessity, though not so well as we were provided in our + first setting out; being thus, as it were, pushing to avoid a peopled + country, we at last came to a very pleasant, agreeable stream of water, + not big enough to be called a river, but running to the N.N.W., which was + the very course we desired to go. + </p> + <p> + On the farthest bank of this brook, we perceived some huts of negroes, not + many, and in a little low spot of ground, some maize, or Indian corn, + growing, which intimated presently to us, that there were some inhabitants + on that side less barbarous than what we had met with in other places + where we had been. + </p> + <p> + As we went forward, our whole caravan being in a body, our negroes, who + were in the front, cried out, that they saw a white man! We were not much + surprised at first, it being, as we thought, a mistake of the fellows, and + asked them what they meant; when one of them stepped to me, and pointing + to a hut on the other side of the hill, I was astonished to see a white + man indeed, but stark naked, very busy near the door of his hut, and + stooping down to the ground with something in his hand, as if he had been + at some work; and his back being towards us, he did not see us. + </p> + <p> + I gave notice to our negroes to make no noise, and waited till some more + of our men were come up, to show the sight to them, that they might be + sure I was not mistaken; and we were soon satisfied of the truth, for the + man, having heard some noise, started up, and looked full at us, as much + surprised, to be sure, as we were, but whether with fear or hope, we then + knew not. + </p> + <p> + As he discovered us, so did the rest of the inhabitants belonging to the + huts about him, and all crowded together, looking at us at a distance, a + little bottom, in which the brook ran, lying between us; the white man, + and all the rest, as he told us afterwards, not knowing well whether they + should stay or run away. However, it presently came into my thoughts, that + if there were white men among them, it would be much easier to make them + understand what we meant as to peace or war, than we found it with others; + so tying a piece of white rag to the end of a stick, we sent two negroes + with it to the bank of the water, carrying the pole up as high as they + could; it was presently understood, and two of their men and the white man + came to the shore on the other side. + </p> + <p> + However, as the white man spoke no Portuguese, they could understand + nothing of one another but by signs; but our men made the white man + understand that they had white men with them too, at which they said the + white man laughed. However, to be short, our men came back, and told us + they were all good friends, and in about an hour four of our men, two + negroes, and the black prince, went to the river-side, where the white man + came to them. + </p> + <p> + They had not been half a quarter of an hour, but a negro came running to + me, and told me the white man was Inglese, as he called him; upon which I + ran back, eagerly enough, you may be sure, with him, and found, as he + said, that he was an Englishman; upon which he embraced me very + passionately, the tears running down his face. The first surprise of his + seeing us was over before we came, but any one may conceive it by the + brief account he gave us afterwards of his very unhappy circumstances, and + of so unexpected a deliverance, such as perhaps never happened to any man + in the world, for it was a million to one odds that ever he could have + been relieved; nothing but an adventure that never was heard or read of + before could have suited his case, unless Heaven, by some miracle that + never was to be expected, had acted for him. + </p> + <p> + He appeared to be a gentleman, not an ordinary-bred fellow, seaman, or + labouring man; this showed itself in his behaviour in the first moment of + our conversing with him, and in spite of all the disadvantages of his + miserable circumstances. + </p> + <p> + He was a middle-aged man, not above thirty-seven or thirty-eight, though + his beard was grown exceedingly long, and the hair of his head and face + strangely covered him to the middle of his back and breast; he was white, + and his skin very fine, though discoloured, and in some places blistered, + and covered with a brown blackish substance, scurfy, scaly, and hard, + which was the effect of the scorching heat of the sun; he was stark naked, + and had been so, as he told us, upwards of two years. + </p> + <p> + He was so exceedingly transported at our meeting with him, that he could + scarce enter into any discourse at all with us that day; and when he could + get away from us for a little, we saw him walking alone, and showing all + the most extravagant tokens of an ungovernable joy; and even afterwards he + was never without tears in his eyes for several days, upon the least word + spoken by us of his circumstances, or by him of his deliverance. + </p> + <p> + We found his behaviour the most courteous and endearing I ever saw in any + man whatever, and most evident tokens of a mannerly, well-bred person + appeared in all things he did or said, and our people were exceedingly + taken with him. He was a scholar and a mathematician; he could not speak + Portuguese indeed, but he spoke Latin to our surgeon, French to another of + our men, and Italian to a third. + </p> + <p> + He had no leisure in his thoughts to ask us whence we came, whither we + were going, or who we were; but would have it always as an answer to + himself, that to be sure, wherever we were a-going, we came from Heaven, + and were sent on purpose to save him from the most wretched condition that + ever man was reduced to. + </p> + <p> + Our men pitching their camp on the bank of a little river opposite to him, + he began to inquire what store of provisions we had, and how we proposed + to be supplied. When he found that our store was but small, he said he + would talk with the natives, and we should have provisions enough; for he + said they were the most courteous, good-natured part of the inhabitants in + all that part of the country, as we might suppose by his living so safe + among them. + </p> + <p> + The first things this gentleman did for us were indeed of the greatest + consequence to us; for, first, he perfectly informed us where we were, and + which was the properest course for us to steer; secondly, he put us in the + way how to furnish ourselves effectually with provisions; and thirdly, he + was our complete interpreter and peacemaker with all the natives, who now + began to be very numerous about us, and who were a more fierce and politic + people than those we had met with before; not so easily terrified with our + arms as those, and not so ignorant as to give their provisions and corn + for our little toys, such as, I said before, our artificer made; but as + they had frequently traded and conversed with the Europeans on the coast, + or with other negro nations that had traded and been concerned with them, + they were the less ignorant and the less fearful, and consequently nothing + was to be had from them but by exchange for such things as they liked. + </p> + <p> + This I say of the negro natives, which we soon came among; but as to these + poor people that he lived among, they were not much acquainted with + things, being at the distance of above 300 miles from the coast; only that + they found elephants' teeth upon the hills to the north, which they took + and carried about sixty or seventy miles south, where other trading + negroes usually met them, and gave them beads, glass, shells, and cowries, + for them, such as the English and Dutch and other traders furnish them + with from Europe. + </p> + <p> + We now began to be more familiar with our new acquaintance; and first, + though we made but a sorry figure as to clothes ourselves, having neither + shoe, or stocking, or glove, or hat among us, and but very few shirts, yet + as well as we could we clothed him; and first, our surgeon having scissors + and razors, shaved him, and cut his hair; a hat, as I say, we had not in + all our stores, but he supplied himself by making himself a cap of a piece + of a leopard-skin, most artificially. As for shoes or stockings, he had + gone so long without them that he cared not even for the buskins and + foot-gloves we wore, which I described above. + </p> + <p> + As he had been curious to hear the whole story of our travels, and was + exceedingly delighted with the relation, so we were no less to know, and + pleased with, the account of his circumstances, and the history of his + coming to that strange place alone, and in that condition which we found + him in, as above. This account of his would indeed be in itself the + subject of an agreeable history, and would be as long and diverting as our + own, having in it many strange and extraordinary incidents; but we cannot + have room here to launch out into so long a digression: the sum of his + history was this:— + </p> + <p> + He had been a factor for the English Guinea Company at Sierra Leone, or + some other of their settlements which had been taken by the French, where + he had been plundered of all his own effects, as well as of what was + entrusted to him by the company. Whether it was that the company did not + do him justice in restoring his circumstances, or in further employing + him, he quitted their service, and was employed by those called separate + traders, and being afterwards out of employ there also, traded on his own + account; when, passing unwarily into one of the company's settlements, he + was either betrayed into the hands of some of the natives, or, somehow or + other, was surprised by them. However, as they did not kill him, he found + means to escape from them at that time, and fled to another nation of the + natives, who, being enemies to the other, entertained him friendly, and + with them he lived some time; but not liking his quarters or his company, + he fled again, and several times changed his landlords: sometimes was + carried by force, sometimes hurried by fear, as circumstances altered with + him (the variety of which deserves a history by itself), till at last he + had wandered beyond all possibility of return, and had taken up his abode + where we found him, where he was well received by the petty king of the + tribe he lived with; and he, in return, instructed them how to value the + product of their labour, and on what terms to trade with those negroes who + came up to them for teeth. + </p> + <p> + As he was naked, and had no clothes, so he was naked of arms for his + defence, having neither gun, sword, staff, or any instrument of war about + him, no, not to guard himself against the attacks of a wild beast, of + which the country was very full. We asked him how he came to be so + entirely abandoned of all concern for his safety? He answered, that to + him, that had so often wished for death, life was not worth defending; and + that, as he was entirely at the mercy of the negroes, they had much the + more confidence in him, seeing he had no weapons to hurt them. As for wild + beasts, he was not much concerned about that, for he scarce ever went from + his hut; but if he did, the negro king and his men went all with him, and + they were all armed with bows and arrows, and lances, with which they + would kill any of the ravenous creatures, lions as well as others; but + that they seldom came abroad in the day; and if the negroes wander + anywhere in the night, they always build a hut for themselves, and make a + fire at the door of it, which is guard enough. + </p> + <p> + We inquired of him what we should next do towards getting to the seaside. + He told us we were about one hundred and twenty English leagues from the + coast, where almost all the European settlements and factories were, and + which is called the Gold Coast; but that there were so many different + nations of negroes in the way, that it was ten to one if we were not + either fought with continually, or starved for want of provisions; but + that there were two other ways to go, which, if he had had any company to + go with him, he had often contrived to make his escape by. The one was to + travel full west, which, though it was farther to go, yet was not so full + of people, and the people we should find would be so much the civiller to + us, or be so much the easier to fight with; or that the other way was, if + possible, to get to the Rio Grande, and go down the stream in canoes. We + told him, that was the way we had resolved on before we met with him; but + then he told us there was a prodigious desert to go over, and as + prodigious woods to go through, before we came to it, and that both + together were at least twenty days' march for us, travel as hard as we + could. + </p> + <p> + We asked him if there were no horses in the country, or asses, or even + bullocks or buffaloes, to make use of in such a journey, and we showed him + ours, of which we had but three left. He said no, all the country did not + afford anything of that kind. + </p> + <p> + He told us that in this great wood there were immense numbers of + elephants; and upon the desert, great multitudes of lions, lynxes, tigers, + leopards, &c.; and that it was to that wood and that desert that the + negroes went to get elephants' teeth, where they never failed to find a + great number. + </p> + <p> + We inquired still more, and particularly the way to the Gold Coast, and if + there were no rivers to ease us in our carriage; and told him, as to the + negroes fighting with us, we were not much concerned at that; nor were we + afraid of starving, for if they had any victuals among them, we would have + our share of it; and, therefore, if he would venture to show us the way, + we would venture to go; and as for himself, we told him we would live and + die together—there should not a man of us stir from him. + </p> + <p> + He told us, with all his heart, if we resolved it, and would venture, we + might be assured he would take his fate with us, and he would endeavour to + guide us in such a way as we should meet with some friendly savages who + would use us well, and perhaps stand by us against some others, who were + less tractable; so, in a word, we all resolved to go full south for the + Gold Coast. + </p> + <p> + The next morning he came to us again, and being all met in council, as we + may call it, he began to talk very seriously with us, that since we were + now come, after a long journey, to a view of the end of our troubles, and + had been so obliging to him as to offer to carry him with us, he had been + all night revolving in his mind what he and we all might do to make + ourselves some amends for all our sorrows; and first, he said, he was to + let me know that we were just then in one of the richest parts of the + world, though it was really otherwise but a desolate, disconsolate + wilderness; "for," says he, "there is not a river but runs gold—not + a desert but without ploughing bears a crop of ivory. What mines of gold, + what immense stores of gold, those mountains may contain, from whence + these rivers come, or the shores which these waters run by, we know not, + but may imagine that they must be inconceivably rich, seeing so much is + washed down the stream by the water washing the sides of the land, that + the quantity suffices all the traders which the European world send + thither." We asked him how far they went for it, seeing the ships only + trade upon the coast. He told us that the negroes on the coast search the + rivers up for the length of 150 or 200 miles, and would be out a month, or + two, or three at a time, and always come home sufficiently rewarded; + "but," says he, "they never come thus far, and yet hereabouts is as much + gold as there." Upon this he told us that he believed he might have gotten + a hundred pounds' weight of gold since he came thither, if he had employed + himself to look and work for it; but as he knew not what to do with it, + and had long since despaired of being ever delivered from the misery he + was in, he had entirely omitted it. "For what advantage had it been to + me," said he, "or what richer had I been, if I had a ton of gold dust, and + lay and wallowed in it? The richness of it," said he, "would not give me + one moment's felicity, nor relieve me in the present exigency. Nay," says + he, "as you all see, it would not buy me clothes to cover me, or a drop of + drink to save me from perishing. It is of no value here," says he; "there + are several people among these huts that would weigh gold against a few + glass beads or a cockle-shell, and give you a handful of gold-dust for a + handful of cowries." N.B.—These are little shells which our children + call blackamoors' teeth. + </p> + <p> + When he had said thus he pulled out a piece of an earthen pot baked hard + in the sun. "Here," says he, "is some of the dirt of this country, and if + I would I could have got a great deal more;" and, showing it to us, I + believe there was in it between two and three pounds weight of gold-dust, + of the same kind and colour with that we had gotten already, as before. + After we had looked at it a while, he told us, smiling, we were his + deliverers, and all he had, as well as his life, was ours; and therefore, + as this would be of value to us when we came to our own country, so he + desired we would accept of it among us; and that was the only time that he + had repented that he had picked up no more of it. + </p> + <p> + I spoke for him, as his interpreter, to my comrades, and in their names + thanked him; but, speaking to them in Portuguese, I desired them to defer + the acceptance of his kindness to the next morning; and so I did, telling + him we would further talk of this part in the morning; so we parted for + that time. + </p> + <p> + When he was gone I found they were all wonderfully affected with his + discourse, and with the generosity of his temper, as well as the + magnificence of his present, which in another place had been + extraordinary. Upon the whole, not to detain you with circumstances, we + agreed that, seeing he was now one of our number, and that as we were a + relief to him in carrying him out of the dismal condition he was in, so he + was equally a relief to us, in being our guide through the rest of the + country, our interpreter with the natives, and our director how to manage + with the savages, and how to enrich ourselves with the wealth of the + country; that, therefore, we would put his gold among our common stock, + and every one should give him as much as would make his up just as much as + any single share of our own, and for the future we would take our lot + together, taking his solemn engagement to us, as we had before one to + another, that we would not conceal the least grain of gold we found one + from another. + </p> + <p> + In the next conference we acquainted him with the adventures of the Golden + River, and how we had shared what we got there, so that every man had a + larger stock than he for his share; that, therefore, instead of taking any + from him, we had resolved every one to add a little to him. He appeared + very glad that we had met with such good success, but would not take a + grain from us, till at last, pressing him very hard, he told us, that then + he would take it thus:—that, when we came to get any more, he would + have so much out of the first as should make him even, and then we would + go on as equal adventurers; and thus we agreed. + </p> + <p> + He then told us he thought it would not be an unprofitable adventure if, + before we set forward, and after we had got a stock of provisions, we + should make a journey north to the edge of the desert he had told us of, + from whence our negroes might bring every one a large elephant's tooth, + and that he would get some more to assist; and that, after a certain + length of carriage, they might be conveyed by canoes to the coast, where + they would yield a very great profit. + </p> + <p> + I objected against this on account of our other design we had of getting + gold-dust; and that our negroes, who we knew would be faithful to us, + would get much more by searching the rivers for gold for us than by + lugging a great tooth of a hundred and fifty pounds weight a hundred miles + or more, which would be an insufferable labour to them after so hard a + journey, and would certainly kill them. + </p> + <p> + He acquiesced in the justice of this answer, but fain would have had us + gone to see the woody part of the hill and the edge of the desert, that we + might see how the elephants' teeth lay scattered up and down there; but + when we told him the story of what we had seen before, as is said above, + he said no more. + </p> + <p> + We stayed here twelve days, during which time the natives were very + obliging to us, and brought us fruits, pompions, and a root like carrots, + though of quite another taste, but not unpleasant neither, and some + guinea-fowls, whose names we did not know. In short, they brought us + plenty of what they had, and we lived very well, and we gave them all such + little things as our cutler had made, for he had now a whole bag full of + them. + </p> + <p> + On the thirteenth day we set forward, taking our new gentleman with us. At + parting, the negro king sent two savages with a present to him of some + dried flesh, but I do not remember what it was, and he gave him again + three silver birds which our cutler helped him to, which I assure you was + a present for a king. + </p> + <p> + We travelled now south, a little west, and here we found the first river + for above 2000 miles' march, whose waters run south, all the rest running + north or west. We followed this river, which was no bigger than a good + large brook in England, till it began to increase its water. Every now and + then we found our Englishman went down as it were privately to the water, + which was to try the land; at length, after a day's march upon this river, + he came running up to us with his hands full of sand, and saying, "Look + here." Upon looking we found that a good deal of gold lay spangled among + the sand of the river. "Now," says he, "I think we may begin to work;" so + he divided our negroes into couples and set them to work, to search and + wash the sand and ooze in the bottom of the water where it was not deep. + </p> + <p> + In the first day and a quarter our men all together had gathered a pound + and two ounces of gold or thereabouts, and as we found the quantity + increased the farther we went, we followed it about three days, till + another small rivulet joined the first, and then searching up the stream, + we found gold there too; so we pitched our camp in the angle where the + rivers joined, and we diverted ourselves, as I may call it, in washing the + gold out of the sand of the river, and in getting provisions. + </p> + <p> + Here we stayed thirteen days more, in which time we had many pleasant + adventures with the savages, too long to mention here, and some of them + too homely to tell of, for some of our men had made something free with + their women, which, had not our new guide made peace for us with one of + their men at the price of seven fine bits of silver, which our artificer + had cut out into the shapes of lions, and fishes, and birds, and had + punched holes to hang them up by (an inestimable treasure), we must have + gone to war with them and all their people. + </p> + <p> + All the while we were busy washing gold-dust out of the rivers, and our + negroes the like, our ingenious cutler was hammering and cutting, and he + was grown so dexterous by use that he formed all manner of images. He cut + out elephants, tigers, civet cats, ostriches, eagles, cranes, fowls, + fishes, and indeed whatever he pleased, in thin plates of hammered gold, + for his silver and iron were almost all gone. + </p> + <p> + At one of the towns of these savage nations we were very friendly received + by their king, and as he was very much taken with our workman's toys, he + sold him an elephant cut out of a gold plate as thin as a sixpence at an + extravagant rate. He was so much taken with it that he would not be quiet + till he had given him almost a handful of gold-dust, as they call it; I + suppose it might weigh three-quarters of a pound; the piece of gold that + the elephant was made of might be about the weight of a pistole, rather + less than more. Our artist was so honest, though the labour and art were + all his own, that he brought all the gold and put it into our common + stock; but we had, indeed, no manner of reason in the least to be + covetous, for, as our new guide told us, we that were strong enough to + defend ourselves, and had time enough to stay (for we were none of us in + haste), might in time get together what quantity of gold we pleased, even + to an hundred pounds weight each man if we thought fit; and therefore he + told us, though he had as much reason to be sick of the country as any of + us, yet if we thought to turn our march a little to the south-east, and + pitch upon a place proper for our headquarters, we might find provisions + plenty enough, and extend ourselves over the country among the rivers for + two or three years to the right and left, and we should soon find the + advantage of it. + </p> + <p> + The proposal, however good as to the profitable part of it, suited none of + us, for we were all more desirous to get home than to be rich, being tired + of the excessive fatigue of above a year's continual wandering among + deserts and wild beasts. + </p> + <p> + However, the tongue of our new acquaintance had a kind of charm in it, and + used such arguments, and had so much the power of persuasion, that there + was no resisting him. He told us it was preposterous not to take the fruit + of all our labours now we were come to the harvest; that we might see the + hazard the Europeans run with ships and men, and at great expense, to + fetch a little gold, and that we, that were in the centre of it, to go + away empty-handed was unaccountable; that we were strong enough to fight + our way through whole nations, and might make our journey afterward to + what part of the coast we pleased, and we should never forgive ourselves + when we came to our own country to see we had 500 pistoles in gold, and + might as easily have had 5000 or 10,000, or what we pleased; that he was + no more covetous than we, but seeing it was in all our powers to retrieve + our misfortunes at once, and to make ourselves easy for all our lives, he + could not be faithful to us, or grateful for the good we had done him, if + he did not let us see the advantage we had in our hands; and he assured us + he would make it clear to our own understanding, that we might in two + years' time, by good management and by the help of our negroes, gather + every man a hundred pounds weight of gold, and get together perhaps two + hundred ton of teeth; whereas, if once we pushed on to the coast and + separated, we should never be able to see that place again with our eyes, + or do any more than sinners did with heaven,—wish themselves there, + but know they can never come at it. + </p> + <p> + Our surgeon was the first man that yielded to his reasoning, and after him + the gunner; and they too, indeed, had a great influence over us, but none + of the rest had any mind to stay, nor I neither, I must confess; for I had + no notion of a great deal of money, or what to do with myself, or what to + do with it if I had it. I thought I had enough already, and all the + thoughts I had about disposing of it, if I came to Europe, was only how to + spend it as fast as I could, buy me some clothes, and go to sea again to + be a drudge for more. + </p> + <p> + However, he prevailed with us by his good words at last to stay but for + six months in the country, and then, if we did resolve to go, he would + submit; so at length we yielded to that, and he carried us about fifty + English miles south-east, where we found several rivulets of water, which + seemed to come all from a great ridge of mountains, which lay to the + north-east, and which, by our calculation, must be the beginning that way + of the great waste, which we had been forced northward to avoid. + </p> + <p> + Here we found the country barren enough, but yet we had by his direction + plenty of food; for the savages round us, upon giving them some of our + toys, as I have so often mentioned, brought us in whatever they had; and + here we found some maize, or Indian wheat, which the negro women planted, + as we sow seeds in a garden, and immediately our new provider ordered some + of our negroes to plant it, and it grew up presently, and by watering it + often, we had a crop in less than three months' growth. + </p> + <p> + As soon as we were settled, and our camp fixed, we fell to the old trade + of fishing for gold in the rivers mentioned above, and our English + gentleman so well knew how to direct our search, that we scarce ever lost + our labour. + </p> + <p> + One time, having set us to work, he asked if we would give him leave, with + four or five negroes, to go out for six or seven days to seek his fortune, + and see what he could discover in the country, assuring us whatever he got + should be for the public stock. We all gave him our consent, and lent him + a gun; and two of our men desiring to go with him, they took then six + negroes with them, and two of our buffaloes that came with us the whole + journey; they took about eight days' provision of bread with them, but no + flesh, except about as much dried flesh as would serve them two days. + </p> + <p> + They travelled up to the top of the mountains I mentioned just now, where + they saw (as our men afterwards vouched it to be) the same desert which we + were so justly terrified at when we were on the farther side, and which, + by our calculation, could not be less than 300 miles broad and above 600 + miles in length, without knowing where it ended. + </p> + <p> + The journal of their travels is too long to enter upon here. They stayed + out two-and-fifty days, when they brought us seventeen pound and something + more (for we had no exact weight) of gold-dust, some of it in much larger + pieces than any we had found before, besides about fifteen ton of + elephants' teeth, which he had, partly by good usage and partly by bad, + obliged the savages of the country to fetch, and bring down to him from + the mountains, and which he made others bring with him quite down to our + camp. Indeed, we wondered what was coming to us when we saw him attended + with above 200 negroes; but he soon undeceived us, when he made them all + throw down their burdens on a heap at the entrance of our camp. + </p> + <p> + Besides this, they brought two lions' skins, and five leopards' skins, + very large and very fine. He asked our pardon for his long stay, and that + he had made no greater a booty, but told us he had one excursion more to + make, which he hoped should turn to a better account. + </p> + <p> + So, having rested himself and rewarded the savages that brought the teeth + for him with some bits of silver and iron cut out diamond fashion, and + with two shaped like little dogs, he sent them away mightily pleased. + </p> + <p> + The second journey he went, some more of our men desired to go with him, + and they made a troop of ten white men and ten savages, and the two + buffaloes to carry their provisions and ammunition. They took the same + course, only not exactly the same track, and they stayed thirty-two days + only, in which time they killed no less than fifteen leopards, three + lions, and several other creatures, and brought us home four-and-twenty + pound some ounces of gold-dust, and only six elephants' teeth, but they + were very great ones. + </p> + <p> + Our friend the Englishman showed us that now our time was well bestowed, + for in five months which we had stayed here, we had gathered so much + gold-dust that, when we came to share it, we had five pound and a quarter + to a man, besides what we had before, and besides six or seven pound + weight which we had at several times given our artificer to make baubles + with. And now we talked of going forward to the coast to put an end to our + journey; but our guide laughed at us then. "Nay, you can't go now," says + he, "for the rainy season begins next month, and there will be no stirring + then." This we found, indeed, reasonable, so we resolved to furnish + ourselves with provisions, that we might not be obliged to go abroad too + much in the rain, and we spread ourselves some one way and some another, + as far as we cared to venture, to get provisions; and our negroes killed + us some deer, which we cured as well as we could in the sun, for we had + now no salt. + </p> + <p> + By this time the rainy months were set in, and we could scarce, for above + two months, look out of our huts. But that was not all, for the rivers + were so swelled with the land-floods, that we scarce knew the little + brooks and rivulets from the great navigable rivers. This had been a very + good opportunity to have conveyed by water, upon rafts, our elephants' + teeth, of which we had a very great pile; for, as we always gave the + savages some reward for their labour, the very women would bring us teeth + upon every opportunity, and sometimes a great tooth carried between two; + so that our quantity was increased to about two-and-twenty ton of teeth. + </p> + <p> + As soon as the weather proved fair again, he told us he would not press us + to any further stay, since we did not care whether we got any more gold or + no; that we were indeed the first men he ever met with in his life that + said they had gold enough, and of whom it might be truly said, that, when + it lay under our feet, we would not stoop to take it up. But, since he had + made us a promise, he would not break it, nor press us to make any further + stay; only he thought he ought to tell us that now was the time, after the + land-flood, when the greatest quantity of gold was found; and that, if we + stayed but one month, we should see thousands of savages spread themselves + over the whole country to wash the gold out of the sand, for the European + ships which would come on the coast; that they do it then, because the + rage of the floods always works down a great deal of gold out of the + hills; and, if we took the advantage to be there before them, we did not + know what extraordinary things we might find. + </p> + <p> + This was so forcible, and so well argued, that it appeared in all our + faces we were prevailed upon; so we told him we would all stay: for though + it was true we were all eager to be gone, yet the evident prospect of so + much advantage could not well be resisted; that he was greatly mistaken, + when he suggested that we did not desire to increase our store of gold, + and in that we were resolved to make the utmost use of the advantage that + was in our hands, and would stay as long as any gold was to be had, if it + was another year. + </p> + <p> + He could hardly express the joy he was in on this occasion; and the fair + weather coming on, we began, just as he directed, to search about the + rivers for more gold. At first we had but little encouragement, and began + to be doubtful; but it was very plain that the reason was, the water was + not fully fallen, or the rivers reduced to their usual channel; but in a + few days we were fully requited, and found much more gold than at first, + and in bigger lumps; and one of our men washed out of the sand a piece of + gold as big as a small nut, which weighed, by our estimation—for we + had no small weights—almost an ounce and a half. + </p> + <p> + This success made us extremely diligent; and in little more than a month + we had altogether gotten near sixty pound weight of gold; but after this, + as he told us, we found abundance of the savages, men, women, and + children, hunting every river and brook, and even the dry land of the + hills for gold; so that we could do nothing like then, compared to what we + had done before. + </p> + <p> + But our artificer found a way to make other people find us in gold without + our own labour; for, when these people began to appear, he had a + considerable quantity of his toys, birds, beasts, &c., such as before, + ready for them; and the English gentleman being the interpreter, he + brought the savages to admire them; so our cutler had trade enough, and, + to be sure, sold his goods at a monstrous rate; for he would get an ounce + of gold, sometimes two, for a bit of silver, perhaps of the value of a + groat; nay, if it were iron and if it was of gold, they would not give the + more for it; and it was incredible almost to think what a quantity of gold + he got that way. + </p> + <p> + In a word, to bring this happy journey to a conclusion, we increased our + stock of gold here, in three months' stay more, to such a degree that, + bringing it all to a common stock, in order to share it, we divided almost + four pound weight again to every man; and then we set forward for the Gold + Coast, to see what method we could find out for our passage into Europe. + </p> + <p> + There happened several remarkable incidents in this part of our journey, + as to how we were, or were not, received friendly by the several nations + of savages through which we passed; how we delivered one negro king from + captivity, who had been a benefactor to our new guide; and now our guide, + in gratitude, by our assistance, restored him to his kingdom, which, + perhaps, might contain about 300 subjects; how he entertained us; and how + he made his subjects go with our Englishmen, and fetch all our elephants' + teeth which we had been obliged to leave behind us, and to carry them for + us to the river, the name of which I forgot, where we made rafts, and in + eleven days more came down to one of the Dutch settlements on the Gold + Coast, where we arrived in perfect health, and to our great satisfaction. + As for our cargo of teeth, we sold it to the Dutch factory, and received + clothes and other necessaries for ourselves, and such of our negroes as we + thought fit to keep with us; and it is to be observed, that we had four + pound of gunpowder left when we ended our journey. The negro prince we + made perfectly free, clothed him out of our common stock, and gave him a + pound and a half of gold for himself, which he knew very well how to + manage; and here we all parted after the most friendly manner possible. + Our Englishman remained in the Dutch factory some time, and, as I heard + afterwards, died there of grief; for he having sent a thousand pounds + sterling over to England, by the way of Holland, for his refuge at his + return to his friends, the ship was taken by the French and the effects + all lost. + </p> + <p> + The rest of my comrades went away, in a small bark, to the two Portuguese + factories, near Gambia, in the latitude of fourteen; and I, with two + negroes which I kept with me, went away to Cape Coast Castle, where I got + passage for England, and arrived there in September; and thus ended my + first harvest of wild oats; the rest were not sowed to so much advantage. + </p> + <p> + I had neither friend, relation, nor acquaintance in England, though it was + my native country; I had consequently no person to trust with what I had, + or to counsel me to secure or save it; but, falling into ill company, and + trusting the keeper of a public-house in Rotherhithe with a great part of + my money, and hastily squandering away the rest, all that great sum, which + I got with so much pains and hazard, was gone in little more than two + years' time; and, as I even rage in my own thoughts to reflect upon the + manner how it was wasted, so I need record no more; the rest merits to be + concealed with blushes, for that it was spent in all kinds of folly and + wickedness. So this scene of my life may be said to have begun in theft, + and ended in luxury; a sad setting-out, and a worse coming home. + </p> + <p> + About the year —— I began to see the bottom of my stock, and + that it was time to think of further adventures; for my spoilers, as I + call them, began to let me know, that as my money declined, their respect + would ebb with it, and that I had nothing to expect of them further than + as I might command it by the force of my money, which, in short, would not + go an inch the further for all that had been spent in their favour before. + </p> + <p> + This shocked me very much, and I conceived a just abhorrence of their + ingratitude; but it wore off; nor had I met with any regret at the wasting + so glorious a sum of money as I brought to England with me. + </p> + <p> + I next shipped myself, in an evil hour to be sure, on a voyage to Cadiz, + in a ship called the ——, and in the course of our voyage, + being on the coast of Spain, was obliged to put into the Groyn, by a + strong southwest wind. + </p> + <p> + Here I fell into company with some masters of mischief; and, among them, + one, forwarder than the rest, began an intimate confidence with me, so + that we called one another brothers, and communicated all our + circumstances to one another. His name was Harris. This fellow came to me + one morning, asking me if I would go on shore, and I agreed; so we got the + captain's leave for the boat, and went together. When we were together, he + asked me if I had a mind for an adventure that might make amends for all + past misfortunes. I told him, yes, with all my heart; for I did not care + where I went, having nothing to lose, and no one to leave behind me. + </p> + <p> + He then asked me if I would swear to be secret, and that, if I did not + agree to what he proposed, I would nevertheless never betray him. I + readily bound myself to that, upon the most solemn imprecations and curses + that the devil and both of us could invent. + </p> + <p> + He told me, then, there was a brave fellow in the other ship, pointing to + another English ship which rode in the harbour, who, in concert with some + of the men, had resolved to mutiny the next morning, and run away with the + ship; and that, if we could get strength enough among our ship's company, + we might do the same. I liked the proposal very well, and he got eight of + us to join with him, and he told us, that as soon as his friend had begun + the work, and was master of the ship, we should be ready to do the like. + This was his plot; and I, without the least hesitation, either at the + villainy of the fact or the difficulty of performing it, came immediately + into the wicked conspiracy, and so it went on among us; but we could not + bring our part to perfection. + </p> + <p> + Accordingly, on the day appointed, his correspondent in the other ship, + whose name was Wilmot, began the work, and, having seized the captain's + mate and other officers, secured the ship, and gave the signal to us. We + were but eleven in our ship, who were in the conspiracy, nor could we get + any more that we could trust; so that, leaving the ship, we all took the + boat, and went off to join the other. + </p> + <p> + Having thus left the ship I was in, we were entertained with a great deal + of joy by Captain Wilmot and his new gang; and, being well prepared for + all manner of roguery, bold, desperate (I mean myself), without the least + checks of conscience for what I was entered upon, or for anything I might + do, much less with any apprehension of what might be the consequence of + it; I say, having thus embarked with this crew, which at last brought me + to consort with the most famous pirates of the age, some of whom have + ended their journals at the gallows, I think the giving an account of some + of my other adventures may be an agreeable piece of story; and this I may + venture to say beforehand, upon the word of a pirate, that I shall not be + able to recollect the full, no, not by far, of the great variety which has + formed one of the most reprobate schemes that ever man was capable to + present to the world. + </p> + <p> + I that was, as I have hinted before, an original thief, and a pirate, even + by inclination before, was now in my element, and never undertook anything + in my life with more particular satisfaction. + </p> + <p> + Captain Wilmot (for so we are now to call him) being thus possessed of a + ship, and in the manner as you have heard, it may be easily concluded he + had nothing to do to stay in the port, or to wait either the attempts that + might be made from the shore, or any change that might happen among his + men. On the contrary, we weighed anchor the same tide, and stood out to + sea, steering away for the Canaries. Our ship had twenty-two guns, but was + able to carry thirty; and besides, as she was fitted out for a + merchant-ship only, she was not furnished either with ammunition or + small-arms sufficient for our design, or for the occasion we might have in + case of a fight. So we put into Cadiz, that is to say, we came to an + anchor in the bay; and the captain, and one whom we called young Captain + Kidd, who was the gunner, [landed,] and some of the men who could best be + trusted, among whom was my comrade Harris, who was made second mate, and + myself, who was made a lieutenant. Some bales of English goods were + proposed to be carried on shore with us for sale, but my comrade, who was + a complete fellow at his business, proposed a better way for it; and + having been in the town before, told us, in short, that he would buy what + powder and bullet, small-arms, or anything else we wanted, on his own + word, to be paid for when they came on board, in such English goods as we + had there. This was much the best way, and accordingly he and the captain + went on shore by themselves, and having made such a bargain as they found + for their turn, came away again in two hours' time, and bringing only a + butt of wine and five casks of brandy with them, we all went on board + again. + </p> + <p> + The next morning two <i>barcos longos</i> came off to us, deeply laden, + with five Spaniards on board them, for traffic. Our captain sold them good + pennyworths, and they delivered us sixteen barrels of powder, twelve small + rundlets of fine powder for our small-arms, sixty muskets, and twelve + fuzees for the officers; seventeen ton of cannon-ball, fifteen barrels of + musket-bullets, with some swords and twenty good pair of pistols. Besides + this, they brought thirteen butts of wine (for we, that were now all + become gentlemen, scorned to drink the ship's beer), also sixteen + puncheons of brandy, with twelve barrels of raisins and twenty chests of + lemons; all which we paid for in English goods; and, over and above, the + captain received six hundred pieces of eight in money. They would have + come again, but we would stay no longer. + </p> + <p> + From hence we sailed to the Canaries, and from thence onward to the West + Indies, where we committed some depredation upon the Spaniards for + provisions, and took some prizes, but none of any great value, while I + remained with them, which was not long at that time; for, having taken a + Spanish sloop on the coast of Carthagena, my friend made a motion to me, + that we should desire Captain Wilmot to put us into the sloop, with a + proportion of arms and ammunition, and let us try what we could do; she + being much fitter for our business than the great ship, and a better + sailer. This he consented to, and we appointed our rendezvous at Tobago, + making an agreement, that whatever was taken by either of our ships should + be shared among the ship's company of both; all which we very punctually + observed, and joined our ships again, about fifteen months after, at the + island of Tobago, as above. + </p> + <p> + We cruised near two years in those seas, chiefly upon the Spaniards; not + that we made any difficulty of taking English ships, or Dutch, or French, + if they came in our way; and particularly, Captain Wilmot attacked a New + England ship bound from the Madeiras to Jamaica, and another bound from + New York to Barbados, with provisions; which last was a very happy supply + to us. But the reason why we meddled as little with English vessels as we + could, was, first, because, if they were ships of any force, we were sure + of more resistance from them; and, secondly, because we found the English + ships had less booty when taken, for the Spaniards generally had money on + board, and that was what we best knew what to do with. Captain Wilmot was, + indeed, more particularly cruel when he took any English vessel, that they + might not too soon have advice of him in England; and so the men-of-war + have orders to look out for him. But this part I bury in silence for the + present. + </p> + <p> + We increased our stock in these two years considerably, having taken + 60,000 pieces of eight in one vessel, and 100,000 in another; and being + thus first grown rich, we resolved to be strong too, for we had taken a + brigantine built at Virginia, an excellent sea-boat, and a good sailer, + and able to carry twelve guns; and a large Spanish frigate-built ship, + that sailed incomparably well also, and which afterwards, by the help of + good carpenters, we fitted up to carry twenty-eight guns. And now we + wanted more hands, so we put away for the Bay of Campeachy, not doubting + we should ship as many men there as we pleased; and so we did. + </p> + <p> + Here we sold the sloop that I was in; and Captain Wilmot keeping his own + ship, I took the command of the Spanish frigate as captain, and my comrade + Harris as eldest lieutenant, and a bold enterprising fellow he was, as any + the world afforded. One culverdine was put into the brigantine, so that we + were now three stout ships, well manned, and victualled for twelve months; + for we had taken two or three sloops from New England and New York, laden + with flour, peas, and barrelled beef and pork, going for Jamaica and + Barbados; and for more beef we went on shore on the island of Cuba, where + we killed as many black cattle as we pleased, though we had very little + salt to cure them. + </p> + <p> + Out of all the prizes we took here we took their powder and bullet, their + small-arms and cutlasses; and as for their men, we always took the surgeon + and the carpenter, as persons who were of particular use to us upon many + occasions; nor were they always unwilling to go with us, though for their + own security, in case of accidents, they might easily pretend they were + carried away by force; of which I shall give a pleasant account in the + course of my other expeditions. + </p> + <p> + We had one very merry fellow here, a Quaker, whose name was William + Walters, whom we took out of a sloop bound from Pennsylvania to Barbados. + He was a surgeon, and they called him doctor; but he was not employed in + the sloop as a surgeon, but was going to Barbados to get a berth, as the + sailors call it. However, he had all his surgeon's chests on board, and we + made him go with us, and take all his implements with him. He was a comic + fellow indeed, a man of very good solid sense, and an excellent surgeon; + but, what was worth all, very good-humoured and pleasant in his + conversation, and a bold, stout, brave fellow too, as any we had among us. + </p> + <p> + I found William, as I thought, not very averse to go along with us, and + yet resolved to do it so that it might be apparent he was taken away by + force, and to this purpose he comes to me. "Friend," says he, "thou sayest + I must go with thee, and it is not in my power to resist thee if I would; + but I desire thou wilt oblige the master of the sloop which I am on board + to certify under his hand, that I was taken away by force and against my + will." And this he said with so much satisfaction in his face, that I + could not but understand him. "Ay, ay," says I, "whether it be against + your will or no, I'll make him and all the men give you a certificate of + it, or I'll take them all along with us, and keep them till they do." So I + drew up a certificate myself, wherein I wrote that he was taken away by + main force, as a prisoner, by a pirate ship; that they carried away his + chest and instruments first, and then bound his hands behind him and + forced him into their boat; and this was signed by the master and all his + men. + </p> + <p> + Accordingly I fell a-swearing at him, and called to my men to tie his + hands behind him, and so we put him into our boat and carried him away. + When I had him on board, I called him to me. "Now, friend," says I, "I + have brought you away by force, it is true, but I am not of the opinion I + have brought you away so much against your will as they imagine. Come," + says I, "you will be a useful man to us, and you shall have very good + usage among us." So I unbound his hands, and first ordered all things that + belonged to him to be restored to him, and our captain gave him a dram. + </p> + <p> + "Thou hast dealt friendly by me," says he, "and I will be plain with thee, + whether I came willingly to thee or not. I shall make myself as useful to + thee as I can, but thou knowest it is not my business to meddle when thou + art to fight." "No, no," says the captain, "but you may meddle a little + when we share the money." "Those things are useful to furnish a surgeon's + chest," says William, and smiled, "but I shall be moderate." + </p> + <p> + In short, William was a most agreeable companion; but he had the better of + us in this part, that if we were taken we were sure to be hanged, and he + was sure to escape; and he knew it well enough. But, in short, he was a + sprightly fellow, and fitter to be captain than any of us. I shall have + often an occasion to speak of him in the rest of the story. + </p> + <p> + Our cruising so long in these seas began now to be so well known, that not + in England only, but in France and Spain, accounts had been made public of + our adventures, and many stories told how we murdered the people in cold + blood, tying them back to back, and throwing them into the sea; one half + of which, however, was not true, though more was done than is fit to speak + of here. + </p> + <p> + The consequence of this, however, was, that several English men-of-war + were sent to the West Indies, and were particularly instructed to cruise + in the Bay of Mexico, and the Gulf of Florida, and among the Bahama + islands, if possible, to attack us. We were not so ignorant of things as + not to expect this, after so long a stay in that part of the world; but + the first certain account we had of them was at Honduras, when a vessel + coming in from Jamaica told us that two English men-of-war were coming + directly from Jamaica thither in quest of us. We were indeed as it were + embayed, and could not have made the least shift to have got off, if they + had come directly to us; but, as it happened, somebody had informed them + that we were in the Bay of Campeachy, and they went directly thither, by + which we were not only free of them, but were so much to the windward of + them, that they could not make any attempt upon us, though they had known + we were there. + </p> + <p> + We took this advantage, and stood away for Carthagena, and from thence + with great difficulty beat it up at a distance from under the shore for + St. Martha, till we came to the Dutch island of Curacoa, and from thence + to the island of Tobago, which, as before, was our rendezvous; which, + being a deserted, uninhabited island, we at the same time made use of for + a retreat. Here the captain of the brigantine died, and Captain Harris, at + that time my lieutenant, took the command of the brigantine. + </p> + <p> + Here we came to a resolution to go away to the coast of Brazil, and from + thence to the Cape of Good Hope, and so for the East Indies; but Captain + Harris, as I have said, being now captain of the brigantine, alleged that + his ship was too small for so long a voyage, but that, if Captain Wilmot + would consent, he would take the hazard of another cruise, and he would + follow us in the first ship he could take. So we appointed our rendezvous + to be at Madagascar, which was done by my recommendation of the place, and + the plenty of provisions to be had there. + </p> + <p> + Accordingly, he went away from us in an evil hour; for, instead of taking + a ship to follow us, he was taken, as I heard afterwards, by an English + man-of-war, and being laid in irons, died of mere grief and anger before + he came to England. His lieutenant, I have heard, was afterwards executed + in England for a pirate; and this was the end of the man who first brought + me into this unhappy trade. + </p> + <p> + We parted from Tobago three days after, bending our course for the coast + of Brazil, but had not been at sea above twenty-four hours, when we were + separated by a terrible storm, which held three days, with very little + abatement or intermission. In this juncture Captain Wilmot happened, + unluckily, to be on board my ship, to his great mortification; for we not + only lost sight of his ship, but never saw her more till we came to + Madagascar, where she was cast away. In short, after having in this + tempest lost our fore-topmast, we were forced to put back to the isle of + Tobago for shelter, and to repair our damage, which brought us all very + near our destruction. + </p> + <p> + We were no sooner on shore here, and all very busy looking out for a piece + of timber for a topmast, but we perceived standing in for the shore an + English man-of-war of thirty-six guns. It was a great surprise to us + indeed, because we were disabled so much; but, to our great good fortune, + we lay pretty snug and close among the high rocks, and the man-of-war did + not see us, but stood off again upon his cruise. So we only observed which + way she went, and at night, leaving our work, resolved to stand off to + sea, steering the contrary way from that which we observed she went; and + this, we found, had the desired success, for we saw him no more. We had + gotten an old mizzen-topmast on board, which made us a jury fore-topmast + for the present; and so we stood away for the isle of Trinidad, where, + though there were Spaniards on shore, yet we landed some men with our + boat, and cut a very good piece of fir to make us a new topmast, which we + got fitted up effectually; and also we got some cattle here to eke out our + provisions; and calling a council of war among ourselves, we resolved to + quit those seas for the present, and steer away for the coast of Brazil. + </p> + <p> + The first thing we attempted here was only getting fresh water, but we + learnt that there lay the Portuguese fleet at the bay of All Saints, bound + for Lisbon, ready to sail, and only waited for a fair wind. This made us + lie by, wishing to see them put to sea, and, accordingly as they were with + or without convoy, to attack or avoid them. + </p> + <p> + It sprung up a fresh gale in the evening at S.W. by W., which, being fair + for the Portugal fleet, and the weather pleasant and agreeable, we heard + the signal given to unmoor, and running in under the island of Si—-, + we hauled our mainsail and foresail up in the brails, lowered the topsails + upon the cap, and clewed them up, that we might lie as snug as we could, + expecting their coming out, and the next morning saw the whole fleet come + out accordingly, but not at all to our satisfaction, for they consisted of + twenty-six sail, and most of them ships of force, as well as burthen, both + merchantmen and men-of-war; so, seeing there was no meddling, we lay still + where we were also, till the fleet was out of sight, and then stood off + and on, in hopes of meeting with further purchase. + </p> + <p> + It was not long before we saw a sail, and immediately gave her chase; but + she proved an excellent sailer, and, standing out to sea, we saw plainly + she trusted to her heels—that is to say, to her sails. However, as + we were a clean ship, we gained upon her, though slowly, and had we had a + day before us, we should certainly have come up with her; but it grew dark + apace, and in that case we knew we should lose sight of her. + </p> + <p> + Our merry Quaker, perceiving us to crowd still after her in the dark, + wherein we could not see which way she went, came very dryly to me. + "Friend Singleton," says he, "dost thee know what we are a-doing?" Says I, + "Yes; why, we are chasing yon ship, are we not?" "And how dost thou know + that?" says he, very gravely still. "Nay, that's true," says I again; "we + cannot be sure." "Yes, friend," says he, "I think we may be sure that we + are running away from her, not chasing her. I am afraid," adds he, "thou + art turned Quaker, and hast resolved not to use the hand of power, or art + a coward, and art flying from thy enemy." + </p> + <p> + "What do you mean?" says I (I think I swore at him). "What do you sneer at + now? You have always one dry rub or another to give us." + </p> + <p> + "Nay," says he, "it is plain enough the ship stood off to sea due east, on + purpose to lose us, and thou mayest be sure her business does not lie that + way; for what should she do at the coast of Africa in this latitude, which + should be as far south as Congo or Angola? But as soon as it is dark, that + we would lose sight of her, she will tack and stand away west again for + the Brazil coast and for the bay, where thou knowest she was going before; + and are we not, then, running away from her? I am greatly in hopes, + friend," says the dry, gibing creature, "thou wilt turn Quaker, for I see + thou art not for fighting." + </p> + <p> + "Very well, William," says I; "then I shall make an excellent pirate." + However, William was in the right, and I apprehended what he meant + immediately; and Captain Wilmot, who lay very sick in his cabin, + overhearing us, understood him as well as I, and called out to me that + William was right, and it was our best way to change our course, and stand + away for the bay, where it was ten to one but we should snap her in the + morning. + </p> + <p> + Accordingly we went about-ship, got our larboard tacks on board, set the + top-gallant sails, and crowded for the bay of All Saints, where we came to + an anchor early in the morning, just out of gunshot of the forts; we + furled our sails with rope-yarns, that we might haul home the sheets + without going up to loose them, and, lowering our main and fore-yards, + looked just as if we had lain there a good while. + </p> + <p> + In two hours afterwards we saw our game standing in for the bay with all + the sail she could make, and she came innocently into our very mouths, for + we lay still till we saw her almost within gunshot, when, our foremost + gears being stretched fore and aft, we first ran up our yards, and then + hauled home the topsail sheets, the rope-yarns that furled them giving way + of themselves; the sails were set in a few minutes; at the same time + slipping our cable, we came upon her before she could get under way upon + the other tack. They were so surprised that they made little or no + resistance, but struck after the first broadside. + </p> + <p> + We were considering what to do with her, when William came to me. "Hark + thee, friend," says he, "thou hast made a fine piece of work of it now, + hast thou not, to borrow thy neighbour's ship here just at thy neighbour's + door, and never ask him leave? Now, dost thou not think there are some + men-of-war in the port? Thou hast given them the alarm sufficiently; thou + wilt have them upon thy back before night, depend upon it, to ask thee + wherefore thou didst so." + </p> + <p> + "Truly, William," said I, "for aught I know, that may be true; what, then, + shall we do next?" Says he, "Thou hast but two things to do: either to go + in and take all the rest, or else get thee gone before they come out and + take thee; for I see they are hoisting a topmast to yon great ship, in + order to put to sea immediately, and they won't be long before they come + to talk with thee, and what wilt thou say to them when they ask thee why + thou borrowedst their ship without leave?" + </p> + <p> + As William said, so it was. We could see by our glasses they were all in a + hurry, manning and fitting some sloops they had there, and a large + man-of-war, and it was plain they would soon be with us. But we were not + at a loss what to do; we found the ship we had taken was laden with + nothing considerable for our purpose, except some cocoa, some sugar, and + twenty barrels of flour; the rest of her cargo was hides; so we took out + all we thought fit for our turn, and, among the rest, all her ammunition, + great shot, and small-arms, and turned her off. We also took a cable and + three anchors she had, which were for our purpose, and some of her sails. + She had enough left just to carry her into port, and that was all. + </p> + <p> + Having done this, we stood on upon the Brazil coast, southward, till we + came to the mouth of the river Janeiro. But as we had two days the wind + blowing hard at S.E. and S.S.E., we were obliged to come to an anchor + under a little island, and wait for a wind. In this time the Portuguese + had, it seems, given notice over land to the governor there, that a pirate + was upon the coast; so that, when we came in view of the port, we saw two + men-of-war riding just without the bar, whereof one, we found, was getting + under sail with all possible speed, having slipped her cable on purpose to + speak with us; the other was not so forward, but was preparing to follow. + In less than an hour they stood both fair after us, with all the sail they + could make. + </p> + <p> + Had not the night come on, William's words had been made good; they would + certainly have asked us the question what we did there, for we found the + foremost ship gained upon us, especially upon one tack, for we plied away + from them to windward; but in the dark losing sight of them, we resolved + to change our course and stand away directly for sea, not doubting that we + should lose them in the night. + </p> + <p> + Whether the Portuguese commander guessed we would do so or no, I know not; + but in the morning, when the daylight appeared, instead of having lost + him, we found him in chase of us about a league astern; only, to our great + good fortune, we could see but one of the two. However, this one was a + great ship, carried six-and-forty guns, and an admirable sailer, as + appeared by her outsailing us; for our ship was an excellent sailer too, + as I have said before. + </p> + <p> + When I found this, I easily saw there was no remedy, but we must engage; + and as we knew we could expect no quarter from those scoundrels the + Portuguese, a nation I had an original aversion to, I let Captain Wilmot + know how it was. The captain, sick as he was, jumped up in the cabin, and + would be led out upon the deck (for he was very weak) to see how it was. + "Well," says he, "we'll fight them!" + </p> + <p> + Our men were all in good heart before, but to see the captain so brisk, + who had lain ill of a calenture ten or eleven days, gave them double + courage, and they went all hands to work to make a clear ship and be + ready. William, the Quaker, comes to me with a kind of a smile. "Friend," + says he, "what does yon ship follow us for?" "Why," says I, "to fight us, + you may be sure." "Well," says he, "and will he come up with us, dost thou + think?" "Yes," said I, "you see she will." "Why, then, friend," says the + dry wretch, "why dost thou run from her still, when thou seest she will + overtake thee? Will it be better for us to be overtaken farther off than + here?" "Much as one for that," says I; "why, what would you have us do?" + "Do!" says he; "let us not give the poor man more trouble than needs must; + let us stay for him and hear what he has to say to us." "He will talk to + us in powder and ball," said I. "Very well, then," says he, "if that be + his country language, we must talk to him in the same, must we not? or + else how shall he understand us?" "Very well, William," says I, "we + understand you." And the captain, as ill as he was, called to me, + "William's right again," says he; "as good here as a league farther." So + he gives a word of command, "Haul up the main-sail; we'll shorten sail for + him." + </p> + <p> + Accordingly we shortened sail, and as we expected her upon our lee-side, + we being then upon our starboard tack, brought eighteen of our guns to the + larboard side, resolving to give him a broadside that should warm him. It + was about half-an-hour before he came up with us, all which time we luffed + up, that we might keep the wind of him, by which he was obliged to run up + under our lee, as we designed him; when we got him upon our quarter, we + edged down, and received the fire of five or six of his guns. By this time + you may be sure all our hands were at their quarters, so we clapped our + helm hard a-weather, let go the lee-braces of the maintop sail, and laid + it a-back, and so our ship fell athwart the Portuguese ship's hawse; then + we immediately poured in our broadside, raking them fore and aft, and + killed them a great many men. + </p> + <p> + The Portuguese, we could see, were in the utmost confusion; and not being + aware of our design, their ship having fresh way, ran their bowsprit into + the fore part of our main shrouds, as that they could not easily get clear + of us, and so we lay locked after that manner. The enemy could not bring + above five or six guns, besides their small-arms, to bear upon us, while + we played our whole broadside upon him. + </p> + <p> + In the middle of the heat of this fight, as I was very busy upon the + quarter-deck, the captain calls to me, for he never stirred from us, "What + the devil is friend William a-doing yonder?" says the captain; "has he any + business upon, deck?" I stepped forward, and there was friend William, + with two or three stout fellows, lashing the ship's bowsprit fast to our + mainmast, for fear they should get away from us; and every now and then he + pulled a bottle out of his pocket, and gave the men a dram to encourage + them. The shot flew about his ears as thick as may be supposed in such an + action, where the Portuguese, to give them their due, fought very briskly, + believing at first they were sure of their game, and trusting to their + superiority; but there was William, as composed, and in as perfect + tranquillity as to danger, as if he had been over a bowl of punch, only + very busy securing the matter, that a ship of forty-six guns should not + run away from a ship of eight-and-twenty. + </p> + <p> + This work was too hot to hold long; our men behaved bravely: our gunner, a + gallant man, shouted below, pouring in his shot at such a rate, that the + Portuguese began to slacken their fire; we had dismounted several of their + guns by firing in at their forecastle, and raking them, as I said, fore + and aft. Presently comes William up to me. "Friend," says he, very calmly, + "what dost thou mean? Why dost thou not visit thy neighbour in the ship, + the door being open for thee?" I understood him immediately, for our guns + had so torn their hull, that we had beat two port-holes into one, and the + bulk-head of their steerage was split to pieces, so that they could not + retire to their close quarters; so I gave the word immediately to board + them. Our second lieutenant, with about thirty men, entered in an instant + over the forecastle, followed by some more with the boatswain, and cutting + in pieces about twenty-five men that they found upon the deck, and then + throwing some grenadoes into the steerage, they entered there also; upon + which the Portuguese cried quarter presently, and we mastered the ship, + contrary indeed to our own expectation; for we would have compounded with + them if they would have sheered off: but laying them athwart the hawse at + first, and following our fire furiously, without giving them any time to + get clear of us and work their ship; by this means, though they had + six-and-forty guns, they were not able to fight above five or six, as I + said above, for we beat them immediately from their guns in the + forecastle, and killed them abundance of men between decks, so that when + we entered they had hardly found men enough to fight us hand to hand upon + their deck. + </p> + <p> + The surprise of joy to hear the Portuguese cry quarter, and see their + ancient struck, was so great to our captain, who, as I have said, was + reduced very weak with a high fever, that it gave him new life. Nature + conquered the distemper, and the fever abated that very night; so that in + two or three days he was sensibly better, his strength began to come, and + he was able to give his orders effectually in everything that was + material, and in about ten days was entirely well and about the ship. + </p> + <p> + In the meantime I took possession of the Portuguese man-of-war; and + Captain Wilmot made me, or rather I made myself, captain of her for the + present. About thirty of their seamen took service with us, some of which + were French, some Genoese; and we set the rest on shore the next day on a + little island on the coast of Brazil, except some wounded men, who were + not in a condition to be removed, and whom we were bound to keep on board; + but we had an occasion afterwards to dispose of them at the Cape, where, + at their own request, we set them on shore. + </p> + <p> + Captain Wilmot, as soon as the ship was taken, and the prisoners stowed, + was for standing in for the river Janeiro again, not doubting but we + should meet with the other man-of-war, who, not having been able to find + us, and having lost the company of her comrade, would certainly be + returned, and might be surprised by the ship we had taken, if we carried + Portuguese colours; and our men were all for it. + </p> + <p> + But our friend William gave us better counsel, for he came to me, + "Friend," says he, "I understand the captain is for sailing back to the + Rio Janeiro, in hopes to meet with the other ship that was in chase of + thee yesterday. Is it true, dost thou intend it?" "Why, yes," says I, + "William, pray why not?" "Nay," says he, "thou mayest do so if thou wilt." + "Well, I know that too, William," said I, "but the captain is a man will + be ruled by reason; what have you to say to it?" "Why," says William + gravely, "I only ask what is thy business, and the business of all the + people thou hast with thee? Is it not to get money?" "Yes, William, it is + so, in our honest way." "And wouldest thou," says he, "rather have money + without fighting, or fighting without money? I mean which wouldest thou + have by choice, suppose it to be left to thee?" "O William," says I, "the + first of the two, to be sure." "Why, then," says he, "what great gain hast + thou made of the prize thou hast taken now, though it has cost the lives + of thirteen of thy men, besides some hurt? It is true thou hast got the + ship and some prisoners; but thou wouldest have had twice the booty in a + merchant-ship, with not one quarter of the fighting; and how dost thou + know either what force or what number of men may be in the other ship, and + what loss thou mayest suffer, and what gain it shall be to thee if thou + take her? I think, indeed, thou mayest much better let her alone." + </p> + <p> + "Why, William, it is true," said I, "and I'll go tell the captain what + your opinion is, and bring you word what he says." Accordingly in I went + to the captain and told him William's reasons; and the captain was of his + mind, that our business was indeed fighting when we could not help it, but + that our main affair was money, and that with as few blows as we could. So + that adventure was laid aside, and we stood along shore again south for + the river De la Plata, expecting some purchase thereabouts; especially we + had our eyes upon some of the Spanish ships from Buenos Ayres, which are + generally very rich in silver, and one such prize would have done our + business. We plied about here, in the latitude of —— south, + for near a month, and nothing offered; and here we began to consult what + we should do next, for we had come to no resolution yet. Indeed, my design + was always for the Cape de Bona Speranza, and so to the East Indies. I had + heard some flaming stories of Captain Avery, and the fine things he had + done in the Indies, which were doubled and doubled, even ten thousand + fold; and from taking a great prize in the Bay of Bengal, where he took a + lady, said to be the Great Mogul's daughter, with a great quantity of + jewels about her, we had a story told us, that he took a Mogul ship, so + the foolish sailors called it, laden with diamonds. + </p> + <p> + I would fain have had friend William's advice whither we should go, but he + always put it off with some quaking quibble or other. In short, he did not + care for directing us neither; whether he made a piece of conscience of + it, or whether he did not care to venture having it come against him + afterwards or no, this I know not; but we concluded at last without him. + </p> + <p> + We were, however, pretty long in resolving, and hankered about the Rio de + la Plata a long time. At last we spied a sail to windward, and it was such + a sail as I believe had not been seen in that part of the world a great + while. It wanted not that we should give it chase, for it stood directly + towards us, as well as they that steered could make it; and even that was + more accident of weather than anything else, for if the wind had chopped + about anywhere they must have gone with it. I leave any man that is a + sailor, or understands anything of a ship, to judge what a figure this + ship made when we first saw her, and what we could imagine was the matter + with her. Her maintop-mast was come by the board about six foot above the + cap, and fell forward, the head of the topgallant-mast hanging in the + fore-shrouds by the stay; at the same time the parrel of the + mizzen-topsail-yard by some accident giving way, the mizzen-topsail-braces + (the standing part of which being fast to the main-topsail shrouds) + brought the mizzen-topsail, yard and all, down with it, which spread over + part of the quarter-deck like an awning; the fore-topsail was hoisted up + two-thirds of the mast, but the sheets were flown; the fore-yard was + lowered down upon the forecastle, the sail loose, and part of it hanging + overboard. In this manner she came down upon us with the wind quartering. + In a word, the figure the whole ship made was the most confounding to men + that understood the sea that ever was seen. She had no boat, neither had + she any colours out. + </p> + <p> + When we came near to her, we fired a gun to bring her to. She took no + notice of it, nor of us, but came on just as she did before. We fired + again, but it was all one. At length we came within pistol-shot of one + another, but nobody answered nor appeared; so we began to think that it + was a ship gone ashore somewhere in distress, and the men having forsaken + her, the high tide had floated her off to sea. Coming nearer to her, we + ran up alongside of her so close that we could hear a noise within her, + and see the motion of several people through her ports. + </p> + <p> + Upon this we manned out two boats full of men, and very well armed, and + ordered them to board her at the same minute, as near as they could, and + to enter one at her fore-chains on the one side, and the other amidships + on the other side. As soon as they came to the ship's side, a surprising + multitude of black sailors, such as they were, appeared upon deck, and, in + short, terrified our men so much that the boat which was to enter her men + in the waist stood off again, and durst not board her; and the men that + entered out of the other boat, finding the first boat, as they thought, + beaten off, and seeing the ship full of men, jumped all back again into + their boat, and put off, not knowing what the matter was. Upon this we + prepared to pour in a broadside upon her; but our friend William set us to + rights again here; for it seems he guessed how it was sooner than we did, + and coming up to me (for it was our ship that came up with her), "Friend," + says he, "I am of opinion that thou art wrong in this matter, and thy men + have been wrong also in their conduct. I'll tell thee how thou shalt take + this ship, without making use of those things called guns." "How can that + be, William?" said I. "Why," said he, "thou mayest take her with thy helm; + thou seest they keep no steerage, and thou seest the condition they are + in; board her with thy ship upon her lee quarter, and so enter her from + the ship. I am persuaded thou wilt take her without fighting, for there is + some mischief has befallen the ship, which we know nothing of." + </p> + <p> + In a word, it being a smooth sea, and little wind, I took his advice, and + laid her aboard. Immediately our men entered the ship, where we found a + large ship, with upwards of 600 negroes, men and women, boys and girls, + and not one Christian or white man on board. + </p> + <p> + I was struck with horror at the sight; for immediately I concluded, as was + partly the case, that these black devils had got loose, had murdered all + the white men, and thrown them into the sea; and I had no sooner told my + mind to the men, but the thought so enraged them that I had much ado to + keep my men from cutting them all in pieces. But William, with many + persuasions, prevailed upon them, by telling them that it was nothing but + what, if they were in the negroes' condition, they would do if they could; + and that the negroes had really the highest injustice done them, to be + sold for slaves without their consent; and that the law of nature dictated + it to them; that they ought not to kill them, and that it would be wilful + murder to do it. + </p> + <p> + This prevailed with them, and cooled their first heat; so they only + knocked down twenty or thirty of them, and the rest ran all down between + decks to their first places, believing, as we fancied, that we were their + first masters come again. + </p> + <p> + It was a most unaccountable difficulty we had next; for we could not make + them understand one word we said, nor could we understand one word + ourselves that they said. We endeavoured by signs to ask them whence they + came; but they could make nothing of it. We pointed to the great cabin, to + the round-house, to the cook-room, then to our faces, to ask if they had + no white men on board, and where they were gone; but they could not + understand what we meant. On the other hand, they pointed to our boat and + to their ship, asking questions as well as they could, and said a thousand + things, and expressed themselves with great earnestness; but we could not + understand a word of it all, or know what they meant by any of their + signs. + </p> + <p> + We knew very well they must have been taken on board the ship as slaves, + and that it must be by some European people too. We could easily see that + the ship was a Dutch-built ship, but very much altered, having been built + upon, and, as we supposed, in France; for we found two or three French + books on board, and afterwards we found clothes, linen, lace, some old + shoes, and several other things. We found among the provisions some + barrels of Irish beef, some Newfoundland fish, and several other evidences + that there had been Christians on board, but saw no remains of them. We + found not a sword, gun, pistol, or weapon of any kind, except some + cutlasses; and the negroes had hid them below where they lay. We asked + them what was become of all the small-arms, pointing to our own and to the + places where those belonging to the ship had hung. One of the negroes + understood me presently, and beckoned to me to come upon the deck, where, + taking my fuzee, which I never let go out of my hand for some time after + we had mastered the ship—I say, offering to take hold of it, he made + the proper motion of throwing it into the sea; by which I understood, as I + did afterwards, that they had thrown all the small-arms, powder, shot, + swords, &c., into the sea, believing, as I supposed, those things + would kill them, though the men were gone. + </p> + <p> + After we understood this we made no question but that the ship's crew, + having been surprised by these desperate rogues, had gone the same way, + and had been thrown overboard also. We looked all over the ship to see if + we could find any blood, and we thought we did perceive some in several + places; but the heat of the sun, melting the pitch and tar upon the decks, + made it impossible for us to discern it exactly, except in the + round-house, where we plainly saw that there had been much blood. We found + the scuttle open, by which we supposed that the captain and those that + were with him had made their retreat into the great cabin, or those in the + cabin had made their escape up into the round-house. + </p> + <p> + But that which confirmed us most of all in what had happened was that, + upon further inquiry, we found that there were seven or eight of the + negroes very much wounded, two or three of them with shot, whereof one had + his leg broken and lay in a miserable condition, the flesh being + mortified, and, as our friend William said, in two days more he would have + died. William was a most dexterous surgeon, and he showed it in this cure; + for though all the surgeons we had on board both our ships (and we had no + less than five that called themselves bred surgeons, besides two or three + who were pretenders or assistants)—though all these gave their + opinions that the negro's leg must be cut off, and that his life could not + be saved without it; that the mortification had touched the marrow in the + bone, that the tendons were mortified, and that he could never have the + use of his leg if it should be cured, William said nothing in general, but + that his opinion was otherwise, and that he desired the wound might be + searched, and that he would then tell them further. Accordingly he went to + work with the leg; and, as he desired that he might have some of the + surgeons to assist him, we appointed him two of the ablest of them to + help, and all of them to look on, if they thought fit. + </p> + <p> + William went to work his own way, and some of them pretended to find fault + at first. However, he proceeded and searched every part of the leg where + he suspected the mortification had touched it; in a word, he cut off a + great deal of mortified flesh, in all which the poor fellow felt no pain. + William proceeded till he brought the vessels which he had cut to bleed, + and the man to cry out; then he reduced the splinters of the bone, and, + calling for help, set it, as we call it, and bound it up, and laid the man + to rest, who found himself much easier than before. + </p> + <p> + At the first opening the surgeons began to triumph; the mortification + seemed to spread, and a long red streak of blood appeared from the wound + upwards to the middle of the man's thigh, and the surgeons told me the man + would die in a few hours. I went to look at it, and found William himself + under some surprise; but when I asked him how long he thought the poor + fellow could live, he looked gravely at me, and said, "As long as thou + canst; I am not at all apprehensive of his life," said he, "but I would + cure him, if I could, without making a cripple of him." I found he was not + just then upon the operation as to his leg, but was mixing up something to + give the poor creature, to repel, as I thought, the spreading contagion, + and to abate or prevent any feverish temper that might happen in the + blood; after which he went to work again, and opened the leg in two places + above the wound, cutting out a great deal of mortified flesh, which it + seemed was occasioned by the bandage, which had pressed the parts too + much; and withal, the blood being at the time in a more than common + disposition to mortify, might assist to spread it. + </p> + <p> + Well, our friend William conquered all this, cleared the spreading + mortification, and the red streak went off again, the flesh began to heal, + and matter to run; and in a few days the man's spirits began to recover, + his pulse beat regular, he had no fever, and gathered strength daily; and, + in a word, he was a perfect sound man in about ten weeks, and we kept him + amongst us, and made him an able seaman. But to return to the ship: we + never could come at a certain information about it, till some of the + negroes which we kept on board, and whom we taught to speak English, gave + the account of it afterwards, and this maimed man in particular. + </p> + <p> + We inquired, by all the signs and motions we could imagine, what was + become of the people, and yet we could get nothing from them. Our + lieutenant was for torturing some of them to make them confess, but + William opposed that vehemently; and when he heard it was under + consideration he came to me. "Friend," says he, "I make a request to thee + not to put any of these poor wretches to torment." "Why, William," said I, + "why not? You see they will not give any account of what is become of the + white men." "Nay," says William, "do not say so; I suppose they have given + thee a full account of every particular of it." "How so?" says I; "pray + what are we the wiser for all their jabbering?" "Nay," says William, "that + may be thy fault, for aught I know; thou wilt not punish the poor men + because they cannot speak English; and perhaps they never heard a word of + English before. Now, I may very well suppose that they have given thee a + large account of everything; for thou seest with what earnestness, and how + long, some of them have talked to thee; and if thou canst not understand + their language, nor they thine, how can they help that? At the best, thou + dost but suppose that they have not told thee the whole truth of the + story; and, on the contrary, I suppose they have; and how wilt thou decide + the question, whether thou art right or whether I am right? Besides, what + can they say to thee when thou askest them a question upon the torture, + and at the same time they do not understand the question, and thou dost + not know whether they say ay or no?" + </p> + <p> + It is no compliment to my moderation to say I was convinced by these + reasons; and yet we had all much ado to keep our second lieutenant from + murdering some of them, to make them tell. What if they had told? He did + not understand one word of it; but he would not be persuaded but that the + negroes must needs understand him when he asked them whether the ship had + any boat or no, like ours, and what was become of it. + </p> + <p> + But there was no remedy but to wait till we made these people understand + English, and to adjourn the story till that time. The case was thus: where + they were taken on board the ship, that we could never understand, because + they never knew the English names which we give to those coasts, or what + nation they were who belonged to the ship, because they knew not one + tongue from another; but thus far the negro I examined, who was the same + whose leg William had cured, told us, that they did not speak the same + language as we spoke, nor the same our Portuguese spoke; so that in all + probability they must be French or Dutch. + </p> + <p> + Then he told us that the white men used them barbarously; that they beat + them unmercifully; that one of the negro men had a wife and two negro + children, one a daughter, about sixteen years old; that a white man abused + the negro man's wife, and afterwards his daughter, which, as he said, made + all the negro men mad; and that the woman's husband was in a great rage; + at which the white man was so provoked that he threatened to kill him; + but, in the night, the negro man, being loose, got a great club, by which + he made us understand he meant a handspike, and that when the same + Frenchman (if it was a Frenchman) came among them again, he began again to + abuse the negro man's wife, at which the negro, taking up the handspike, + knocked his brains out at one blow; and then taking the key from him with + which he usually unlocked the handcuffs which the negroes were fettered + with, he set about a hundred of them at liberty, who, getting up upon the + deck by the same scuttle that the white men came down, and taking the + man's cutlass who was killed, and laying hold of what came next them, they + fell upon the men that were upon the deck, and killed them all, and + afterwards those they found upon the forecastle; that the captain and his + other men, who were in the cabin and the round-house, defended themselves + with great courage, and shot out at the loopholes at them, by which he and + several other men were wounded, and some killed; but that they broke into + the round-house after a long dispute, where they killed two of the white + men, but owned that the two white men killed eleven of their men before + they could break in; and then the rest, having got down the scuttle into + the great cabin, wounded three more of them. + </p> + <p> + That, after this, the gunner of the ship having secured himself in the + gun-room, one of his men hauled up the long-boat close under the stern, + and putting into her all the arms and ammunition they could come at, got + all into the boat, and afterwards took in the captain, and those that were + with him, out of the great cabin. When they were all thus embarked, they + resolved to lay the ship aboard again, and try to recover it. That they + boarded the ship in a desperate manner, and killed at first all that stood + in their way; but the negroes being by this time all loose, and having + gotten some arms, though they understood nothing of powder and bullet, or + guns, yet the men could never master them. However, they lay under the + ship's bow, and got out all the men they had left in the cook-room, who + had maintained themselves there, notwithstanding all the negroes could do, + and with their small-arms killed between thirty and forty of the negroes, + but were at last forced to leave them. + </p> + <p> + They could give me no account whereabouts this was, whether near the coast + of Africa, or far off, or how long it was before the ship fell into our + hands; only, in general, it was a great while ago, as they called it; and, + by all we could learn, it was within two or three days after they had set + sail from the coast. They told us that they had killed about thirty of the + white men, having knocked them on the head with crows and handspikes, and + such things as they could get; and one strong negro killed three of them + with an iron crow, after he was shot twice through the body; and that he + was afterwards shot through the head by the captain himself at the door of + the round-house, which he had split open with the crow; and this we + supposed was the occasion of the great quantity of blood which we saw at + the round-house door. + </p> + <p> + The same negro told us that they threw all the powder and shot they could + find into the sea, and they would have thrown the great guns into the sea + if they could have lifted them. Being asked how they came to have their + sails in such a condition, his answer was, "They no understand; they no + know what the sails do;" that was, they did not so much as know that it + was the sails that made the ship go, or understand what they meant, or + what to do with them. When we asked him whither they were going, he said + they did not know, but believed they should go home to their own country + again. I asked him, in particular, what he thought we were when we first + came up with them? He said they were terribly frighted, believing we were + the same white men that had gone away in their boats, and were come again + in a great ship, with the two boats with them, and expected they would + kill them all. + </p> + <p> + This was the account we got out of them, after we had taught them to speak + English, and to understand the names and use of the things belonging to + the ship which they had occasion to speak of; and we observed that the + fellows were too innocent to dissemble in their relation, and that they + all agreed in the particulars, and were always in the same story, which + confirmed very much the truth of what they said. + </p> + <p> + Having taken this ship, our next difficulty was, what to do with the + negroes. The Portuguese in the Brazils would have bought them all of us, + and been glad of the purchase, if we had not showed ourselves enemies + there, and been known for pirates; but, as it was, we durst not go ashore + anywhere thereabouts, or treat with any of the planters, because we should + raise the whole country upon us; and, if there were any such things as + men-of-war in any of their ports, we should be as sure to be attacked by + them, and by all the force they had by land or sea. + </p> + <p> + Nor could we think of any better success if we went northward to our own + plantations. One while we determined to carry them all away to Buenos + Ayres, and sell them there to the Spaniards; but they were really too many + for them to make use of; and to carry them round to the South Seas, which + was the only remedy that was left, was so far that we should be no way + able to subsist them for so long a voyage. + </p> + <p> + At last, our old, never-failing friend, William, helped us out again, as + he had often done at a dead lift. His proposal was this, that he should go + as master of the ship, and about twenty men, such as we could best trust, + and attempt to trade privately, upon the coast of Brazil, with the + planters, not at the principal ports, because that would not be admitted. + </p> + <p> + We all agreed to this, and appointed to go away ourselves towards the Rio + de la Plata, where we had thought of going before, and to wait for him, + not there, but at Port St Pedro, as the Spaniards call it, lying at the + mouth of the river which they call Rio Grande, and where the Spaniards had + a small fort and a few people, but we believe there was nobody in it. + </p> + <p> + Here we took up our station, cruising off and on, to see if we could meet + any ships going to or coming from the Buenos Ayres or the Rio de la Plata; + but we met with nothing worth notice. However, we employed ourselves in + things necessary for our going off to sea; for we filled all our + water-casks, and got some fish for our present use, to spare as much as + possible our ship's stores. + </p> + <p> + William, in the meantime, went away to the north, and made the land about + the Cape de St Thomas; and betwixt that and the isles De Tuberon he found + means to trade with the planters for all his negroes, as well the women as + the men, and at a very good price too; for William, who spoke Portuguese + pretty well, told them a fair story enough, that the ship was in scarcity + of provisions, that they were driven a great way out of their way, and + indeed, as we say, out of their knowledge, and that they must go up to the + northward as far as Jamaica, or sell there upon the coast. This was a very + plausible tale, and was easily believed; and, if you observe the manner of + the negroes' sailing, and what happened in their voyage, was every word of + it true. + </p> + <p> + By this method, and being true to one another, William passed for what he + was—I mean, for a very honest fellow; and by the assistance of one + planter, who sent to some of his neighbour planters, and managed the trade + among themselves, he got a quick market; for in less than five weeks + William sold all his negroes, and at last sold the ship itself, and + shipped himself and his twenty men, with two negro boys whom he had left, + in a sloop, one of those which the planters used to send on board for the + negroes. With this sloop Captain William, as we then called him, came + away, and found us at Port St Pedro, in the latitude of 32 degrees 30 + minutes south. + </p> + <p> + Nothing was more surprising to us than to see a sloop come along the + coast, carrying Portuguese colours, and come in directly to us, after we + were assured he had discovered both our ships. We fired a gun, upon her + nearer approach, to bring her to an anchor, but immediately she fired five + guns by way of salute, and spread her English ancient. Then we began to + guess it was friend William, but wondered what was the meaning of his + being in a sloop, whereas we sent him away in a ship of near 300 tons; but + he soon let us into the whole history of his management, with which we had + a great deal of reason to be very well satisfied. As soon as he had + brought the sloop to an anchor, he came aboard of my ship, and there he + gave us an account how he began to trade by the help of a Portuguese + planter, who lived near the seaside; how he went on shore and went up to + the first house he could see, and asked the man of the house to sell him + some hogs, pretending at first he only stood in upon the coast to take in + fresh water and buy some provisions; and the man not only sold him seven + fat hogs, but invited him in, and gave him, and five men he had with him, + a very good dinner; and he invited the planter on board his ship, and, in + return for his kindness, gave him a negro girl for his wife. + </p> + <p> + This so obliged the planter that the next morning he sent him on board, in + a great luggage-boat, a cow and two sheep, with a chest of sweetmeats and + some sugar, and a great bag of tobacco, and invited Captain William on + shore again; that, after this, they grew from one kindness to another; + that they began to talk about trading for some negroes; and William, + pretending it was to do him service, consented to sell him thirty negroes + for his private use in his plantation, for which he gave William ready + money in gold, at the rate of five-and-thirty moidores per head; but the + planter was obliged to use great caution in the bringing them on shore; + for which purpose he made William weigh and stand out to sea, and put in + again, about fifty miles farther north, where at a little creek he took + the negroes on shore at another plantation, being a friend's of his, whom, + it seems, he could trust. + </p> + <p> + This remove brought William into a further intimacy, not only with the + first planter, but also with his friends, who desired to have some of the + negroes also; so that, from one to another, they bought so many, till one + overgrown planter took 100 negroes, which was all William had left, and + sharing them with another planter, that other planter chaffered with + William for ship and all, giving him in exchange a very clean, large, + well-built sloop of near sixty tons, very well furnished, carrying six + guns; but we made her afterwards carry twelve guns. William had 300 + moidores of gold, besides the sloop, in payment for the ship; and with + this money he stored the sloop as full as she could hold with provisions, + especially bread, some pork, and about sixty hogs alive; among the rest, + William got eighty barrels of good gunpowder, which was very much for our + purpose; and all the provisions which were in the French ship he took out + also. + </p> + <p> + This was a very agreeable account to us, especially when we saw that + William had received in gold coined, or by weight, and some Spanish + silver, 60,000 pieces of eight, besides a new sloop, and a vast quantity + of provisions. + </p> + <p> + We were very glad of the sloop in particular, and began to consult what we + should do, whether we had not best turn off our great Portuguese ship, and + stick to our first ship and the sloop, seeing we had scarce men enough for + all three, and that the biggest ship was thought too big for our business. + However, another dispute, which was now decided, brought the first to a + conclusion. The first dispute was, whither we should go. My comrade, as I + called him now, that is to say, he that was my captain before we took this + Portuguese man-of-war, was for going to the South Seas, and coasting up + the west side of America, where we could not fail of making several good + prizes upon the Spaniards; and that then, if occasion required it, we + might come home by the South Seas to the East Indies, and so go round the + globe, as others had done before us. + </p> + <p> + But my head lay another way. I had been in the East Indies, and had + entertained a notion ever since that, if we went thither, we could not + fail of making good work of it, and that we might have a safe retreat, and + good beef to victual our ship, among my old friends the natives of + Zanzibar, on the coast of Mozambique, or the island of St Lawrence. I say, + my thoughts lay this way; and I read so many lectures to them all of the + advantages they would certainly make of their strength by the prizes they + would take in the Gulf of Mocha, or the Red Sea, and on the coast of + Malabar, or the Bay of Bengal, that I amazed them. + </p> + <p> + With these arguments I prevailed on them, and we all resolved to steer + away S.E. for the Cape of Good Hope; and, in consequence of this + resolution, we concluded to keep the sloop, and sail with all three, not + doubting, as I assured them, but we should find men there to make up the + number wanting, and if not, we might cast any of them off when we pleased. + </p> + <p> + We could do no less than make our friend William captain of the sloop + which, with such good management, he had brought us. He told us, though + with much good manners, he would not command her as a frigate; but, if we + would give her to him for his share of the Guinea ship, which we came very + honestly by, he would keep us company as a victualler, if we commanded + him, as long as he was under the same force that took him away. + </p> + <p> + We understood him, so gave him the sloop, but upon condition that he + should not go from us, and should be entirely under our command. However, + William was not so easy as before; and, indeed, as we afterwards wanted + the sloop to cruise for purchase, and a right thorough-paced pirate in + her, so I was in such pain for William that I could not be without him, + for he was my privy counsellor and companion upon all occasions; so I put + a Scotsman, a bold, enterprising, gallant fellow, into her, named Gordon, + and made her carry twelve guns and four petereroes, though, indeed, we + wanted men, for we were none of us manned in proportion to our force. + </p> + <p> + We sailed away for the Cape of Good Hope the beginning of October 1706, + and passed by, in sight of the Cape, the 12th of November following, + having met with a great deal of bad weather. We saw several merchant-ships + in the roads there, as well English as Dutch, whether outward bound or + homeward we could not tell; be it what it would, we did not think fit to + come to an anchor, not knowing what they might be, or what they might + attempt against us, when they knew what we were. However, as we wanted + fresh water, we sent the two boats belonging to the Portuguese man-of-war, + with all Portuguese seamen or negroes in them, to the watering-place, to + take in water; and in the meantime we hung out a Portuguese ancient at + sea, and lay by all that night. They knew not what we were, but it seems + we passed for anything but really what we was. + </p> + <p> + Our boats returning the third time loaden, about five o'clock next + morning, we thought ourselves sufficiently watered, and stood away to the + eastward; but, before our men returned the last time, the wind blowing an + easy gale at west, we perceived a boat in the grey of the morning under + sail, crowding to come up with us, as if they were afraid we should be + gone. We soon found it was an English long-boat, and that it was pretty + full of men. We could not imagine what the meaning of it should be; but, + as it was but a boat, we thought there could be no great harm in it to let + them come on board; and if it appeared they came only to inquire who we + were, we would give them a full account of our business, by taking them + along with us, seeing we wanted men as much as anything. But they saved us + the labour of being in doubt how to dispose of them; for it seems our + Portuguese seamen, who went for water, had not been so silent at the + watering-places as we thought they would have been. But the case, in + short, was this: Captain —— (I forbear his name at present, + for a particular reason), captain of an East India merchant-ship, bound + afterwards for China, had found some reason to be very severe with his + men, and had handled some of them very roughly at St Helena; insomuch, + that they threatened among themselves to leave the ship the first + opportunity, and had long wished for that opportunity. Some of these men, + it seems, had met with our boat at the watering-place, and inquiring of + one another who we were, and upon what account, whether the Portuguese + seamen, by faltering in their account, made them suspect that we were out + upon the cruise, or whether they told it in plain English or no (for they + all spoke English enough to be understood), but so it was, that as soon as + ever the men carried the news on board, that the ships which lay by to the + eastward were English, and that they were going upon the <i>account</i>, + which, by they way, was a sea term for a pirate; I say, as soon as ever + they heard it, they went to work, and getting all things ready in the + night, their chests and clothes, and whatever else they could, they came + away before it was day, and came up with us about seven o'clock. + </p> + <p> + When they came by the ship's side which I commanded we hailed them in the + usual manner, to know what and who they were, and what their business. + They answered they were Englishmen, and desired to come on board. We told + them they might lay the ship on board, but ordered they should let only + one man enter the ship till the captain knew their business, and that he + should come without any arms. They said, Ay, with all their hearts. + </p> + <p> + We presently found their business, and that they desired to go with us; + and as for their arms, they desired we would send men on board the boat, + and that they would deliver them all to us, which was done. The fellow + that came up to me told me how they had been used by their captain, how he + had starved the men, and used them like dogs, and that, if the rest of the + men knew they should be admitted, he was satisfied two-thirds of them + would leave the ship. We found the fellows were very hearty in their + resolution, and jolly brisk sailors they were; so I told them I would do + nothing without our admiral, that was the captain of the other ship; so I + sent my pinnace on board Captain Wilmot, to desire him to come on board. + But he was indisposed, and being to leeward, excused his coming, but left + it all to me; but before my boat was returned, Captain Wilmot called to me + by his speaking-trumpet, which all the men might hear as well as I; thus, + calling me by my name, "I hear they are honest fellows; pray tell them + they are all welcome, and make them a bowl of punch." + </p> + <p> + As the men heard it as well as I, there was no need to tell them what the + captain said; and, as soon as the trumpet had done, they set up a huzza, + that showed us they were very hearty in their coming to us; but we bound + them to us by a stronger obligation still after this, for when we came to + Madagascar, Captain Wilmot, with consent of all the ship's company, + ordered that these men should have as much money given them out of the + stock as was due to them for their pay in the ship they had left; and + after that we allowed them twenty pieces of eight a man bounty money; and + thus we entered them upon shares, as we were all, and brave stout fellows + they were, being eighteen in number, whereof two were midshipmen, and one + a carpenter. + </p> + <p> + It was the 28th of November, when, having had some bad weather, we came to + an anchor in the road off St Augustine Bay, at the south-west end of my + old acquaintance the isle of Madagascar. We lay here awhile and trafficked + with the natives for some good beef; though the weather was so hot that we + could not promise ourselves to salt any of it up to keep; but I showed + them the way which we practised before, to salt it first with saltpetre, + then cure it by drying it in the sun, which made it eat very agreeably, + though not so wholesome for our men, that not agreeing with our way of + cooking, viz., boiling with pudding, brewis, &c., and particularly + this way, would be too salt, and the fat of the meat be rusty, or dried + away so as not to be eaten. + </p> + <p> + This, however, we could not help, and made ourselves amends by feeding + heartily on the fresh beef while we were there, which was excellent, good + and fat, every way as tender and as well relished as in England, and + thought to be much better to us who had not tasted any in England for so + long a time. + </p> + <p> + Having now for some time remained here, we began to consider that this was + not a place for our business; and I, that had some views a particular way + of my own, told them that this was not a station for those who looked for + purchase; that there were two parts of the island which were particularly + proper for our purposes; first, the bay on the east side of the island, + and from thence to the island Mauritius, which was the usual way which + ships that came from the Malabar coast, or the coast of Coromandel, Fort + St George, &c., used to take, and where, if we waited for them, we + ought to take our station. + </p> + <p> + But, on the other hand, as we did not resolve to fall upon the European + traders, who were generally ships of force and well manned, and where + blows must be looked for; so I had another prospect, which I promised + myself would yield equal profit, or perhaps greater, without any of the + hazard and difficulty of the former; and this was the Gulf of Mocha, or + the Red Sea. + </p> + <p> + I told them that the trade here was great, the ships rich, and the Strait + of Babelmandel narrow; so that there was no doubt but we might cruise so + as to let nothing slip our hands, having the seas open from the Red Sea, + along the coast of Arabia, to the Persian Gulf, and the Malabar side of + the Indies. + </p> + <p> + I told them what I had observed when I sailed round the island in my + former progress; how that, on the northernmost point of the island, there + were several very good harbours and roads for our ships; that the natives + were even more civil and tractable, if possible, than those where we were, + not having been so often ill-treated by European sailors as those had in + the south and east sides; and that we might always be sure of a retreat, + if we were driven to put in by any necessity, either of enemies or + weather. + </p> + <p> + They were easily convinced of the reasonableness of my scheme; and Captain + Wilmot, whom I now called our admiral, though he was at first of the mind + to go and lie at the island Mauritius, and wait for some of the European + merchant-ships from the road of Coromandel, or the Bay of Bengal, was now + of my mind. It is true we were strong enough to have attacked an English + East India ship of the greatest force, though some of them were said to + carry fifty guns; but I represented to him that we were sure to have blows + and blood if we took them; and, after we had done, their loading was not + of equal value to us, because we had no room to dispose of their + merchandise; and, as our circumstances stood, we had rather have taken one + outward-bound East India ship, with her ready cash on board, perhaps to + the value of forty or fifty thousand pounds, than three homeward-bound, + though their loading would at London be worth three times the money, + because we knew not whither to go to dispose of the cargo; whereas the + ships from London had abundance of things we knew how to make use of + besides their money, such as their stores of provisions and liquors, and + great quantities of the like sent to the governors and factories at the + English settlements for their use; so that, if we resolved to look for our + own country ships, it should be those that were outward-bound, not the + London ships homeward. + </p> + <p> + All these things considered, brought the admiral to be of my mind + entirely; so, after taking in water and some fresh provisions where we + lay, which was near Cape St Mary, on the south-west corner of the island, + we weighed and stood away south, and afterwards S.S.E., to round the + island, and in about six days' sail got out of the wake of the island, and + steered away north, till we came off Port Dauphin, and then north by east, + to the latitude of 13 degrees 40 minutes, which was, in short, just at the + farthest part of the island; and the admiral, keeping ahead, made the open + sea fair to the west, clear of the whole island; upon which he brought to, + and we sent a sloop to stand in round the farthest point north, and coast + along the shore, and see for a harbour to put into, which they did, and + soon brought us an account that there was a deep bay, with a very good + road, and several little islands, under which they found good riding, in + ten to seventeen fathom water, and accordingly there we put in. + </p> + <p> + However, we afterwards found occasion to remove our station, as you shall + hear presently. We had now nothing to do but go on shore, and acquaint + ourselves a little with the natives, take in fresh water and some fresh + provisions, and then to sea again. We found the people very easy to deal + with, and some cattle they had; but it being at the extremity of the + island, they had not such quantities of cattle here. However, for the + present we resolved to appoint this for our place of rendezvous, and go + and look out. This was about the latter end of April. + </p> + <p> + Accordingly we put to sea, and cruised away to the northward, for the + Arabian coast. It was a long run, but as the winds generally blow trade + from the S. and S.S.E. from May to September, we had good weather; and in + about twenty days we made the island of Socotra, lying south from the + Arabian coast, and E.S.E. from the mouth of the Gulf of Mocha, or the Red + Sea. + </p> + <p> + Here we took in water, and stood off and on upon the Arabian shore. We had + not cruised here above three days, or thereabouts, but I spied a sail, and + gave her chase; but when we came up with her, never was such a poor prize + chased by pirates that looked for booty, for we found nothing in her but + poor, half-naked Turks, going a pilgrimage to Mecca, to the tomb of their + prophet Mahomet. The junk that carried them had no one thing worth taking + away but a little rice and some coffee, which was all the poor wretches + had for their subsistence; so we let them go, for indeed we knew not what + to do with them. + </p> + <p> + The same evening we chased another junk with two masts, and in something + better plight to look at than the former. When we came on board we found + them upon the same errand, but only that they were people of some better + fashion than the other; and here we got some plunder, some Turkish stores, + a few diamonds in the ear-drops of five or six persons, some fine Persian + carpets, of which they made their saffras to lie upon, and some money; so + we let them go also. + </p> + <p> + We continued here eleven days longer, and saw nothing but now and then a + fishing-boat; but the twelfth day of our cruise we spied a ship: indeed I + thought at first it had been an English ship, but it appeared to be an + European freighted for a voyage from Goa, on the coast of Malabar, to the + Red Sea, and was very rich. We chased her, and took her without any fight, + though they had some guns on board too, but not many. We found her manned + with Portuguese seamen, but under the direction of five merchant Turks, + who had hired her on the coast of Malabar of some Portugal merchants, and + had laden her with pepper, saltpetre, some spices, and the rest of the + loading was chiefly calicoes and wrought silks, some of them very rich. + </p> + <p> + We took her and carried her to Socotra; but we really knew not what to do + with her, for the same reasons as before; for all their goods were of + little or no value to us. After some days we found means to let one of the + Turkish merchants know, that if he would ransom the ship we would take a + sum of money and let them go. He told me that if I would let one of them + go on shore for the money they would do it; so we adjusted the value of + the cargo at 30,000 ducats. Upon this agreement, we allowed the sloop to + carry him on shore, at Dofar, in Arabia, where a rich merchant laid down + the money for them, and came off with our sloop; and on payment of the + money we very fairly and honestly let them go. + </p> + <p> + Some days after this we took an Arabian junk, going from the Gulf of + Persia to Mocha, with a good quantity of pearl on board. We gutted him of + the pearl, which it seems was belonging to some merchants at Mocha, and + let him go, for there was nothing else worth our taking. + </p> + <p> + We continued cruising up and down here till we began to find our + provisions grow low, when Captain Wilmot, our admiral, told us it was time + to think of going back to the rendezvous; and the rest of the men said the + same, being a little weary of beating about for above three months + together, and meeting with little or nothing compared to our great + expectations; but I was very loth to part with the Red Sea at so cheap a + rate, and pressed them to tarry a little longer, which at my instance they + did; but three days afterwards, to our great misfortune, understood that, + by landing the Turkish merchants at Dofar, we had alarmed the coast as far + as the Gulf of Persia, so that no vessel would stir that way, and + consequently nothing was to be expected on that side. + </p> + <p> + I was greatly mortified at this news, and could no longer withstand the + importunities of the men to return to Madagascar. However, as the wind + continued still to blow at S.S.E. by S., we were obliged to stand away + towards the coast of Africa and the Cape Guardafui, the winds being more + variable under the shore than in the open sea. + </p> + <p> + Here we chopped upon a booty which we did not look for, and which made + amends for all our waiting; for the very same hour that we made land we + spied a large vessel sailing along the shore to the southward. The ship + was of Bengal, belonging to the Great Mogul's country, but had on board a + Dutch pilot, whose name, if I remember right, was Vandergest, and several + European seamen, whereof three were English. She was in no condition to + resist us. The rest of her seamen were Indians of the Mogul's subjects, + some Malabars and some others. There were five Indian merchants on board, + and some Armenians. It seems they had been at Mocha with spices, silks, + diamonds, pearls, calico, &c., such goods as the country afforded, and + had little on board now but money in pieces of eight, which, by the way, + was just what we wanted; and the three English seamen came along with us, + and the Dutch pilot would have done so too, but the two Armenian merchants + entreated us not to take him, for that he being their pilot, there was + none of the men knew how to guide the ship; so, at their request, we + refused him; but we made them promise he should not be used ill for being + willing to go with us. + </p> + <p> + We got near 200,000 pieces of eight in this vessel; and, if they said + true, there was a Jew of Goa, who intended to have embarked with them, who + had 200,000 pieces of eight with him, all his own; but his good fortune, + springing out of his ill fortune, hindered him, or he fell sick at Mocha, + and could not be ready to travel, which was the saving of his money. + </p> + <p> + There was none with me at the taking this prize but the sloop, for Captain + Wilmot's ship proving leaky, he went away for the rendezvous before us, + and arrived there the middle of December; but not liking the port, he left + a great cross on shore, with directions written on a plate of lead fixed + to it, for us to come after him to the great bays at Mangahelly, where he + found a very good harbour; but we learned a piece of news here that kept + us from him a great while, which the admiral took offence at; but we + stopped his mouth with his share of 200,000 pieces of eight to him and his + ship's crew. But the story which interrupted our coming to him was this. + Between Mangahelly and another point, called Cape St Sebastian, there came + on shore in the night an European ship, and whether by stress of weather + or want of a pilot I know not, but the ship stranded and could not be got + off. + </p> + <p> + We lay in the cove or harbour, where, as I have said, our rendezvous was + appointed, and had not yet been on shore, so we had not seen the + directions our admiral had left for us. + </p> + <p> + Our friend William, of whom I have said nothing a great while, had a great + mind one day to go on shore, and importuned me to let him have a little + troop to go with him, for safety, that they might see the country. I was + mightily against it for many reasons; but particularly I told him he knew + the natives were but savages, and they were very treacherous, and I + desired him that he would not go; and, had he gone on much farther, I + believe I should have downright refused him, and commanded him not to go. + </p> + <p> + But, in order to persuade me to let him go, he told me he would give me an + account of the reason why he was so importunate. He told me, the last + night he had a dream, which was so forcible, and made such an impression + upon his mind, that he could not be quiet till he had made the proposal to + me to go; and if I refused him, then he thought his dream was significant; + and if not, then his dream was at an end. + </p> + <p> + His dream was, he said, that he went on shore with thirty men, of which + the cockswain, he said, was one, upon the island; and that they found a + mine of gold, and enriched them all. But this was not the main thing, he + said, but that the same morning he had dreamed so, the cockswain came to + him just then, and told him that he dreamed he went on shore on the island + of Madagascar, and that some men came to him and told him they would show + him where he should get a prize which would make them all rich. + </p> + <p> + These two things put together began to weigh with me a little, though I + was never inclined to give any heed to dreams; but William's importunity + turned me effectually, for I always put a great deal of stress upon his + judgment; so that, in short, I gave them leave to go, but I charged them + not to go far off from the sea-coast; that, if they were forced down to + the seaside upon any occasion, we might perhaps see them, and fetch them + off with our boats. + </p> + <p> + They went away early in the morning, one-and-thirty men of them in number, + very well armed, and very stout fellows; they travelled all the day, and + at night made us a signal that all was well, from the top of a hill, which + we had agreed on, by making a great fire. + </p> + <p> + Next day they marched down the hill on the other side, inclining towards + the seaside, as they had promised, and saw a very pleasant valley before + them, with a river in the middle of it, which, a little farther below + them, seemed to be big enough to bear small ships; they marched apace + towards this river, and were surprised with the noise of a piece going + off, which, by the sound, could not be far off. They listened long, but + could hear no more; so they went on to the river-side, which was a very + fine fresh stream, but widened apace, and they kept on by the banks of it, + till, almost at once, it opened or widened into a good large creek or + harbour, about five miles from the sea; and that which was still more + surprising, as they marched forward, they plainly saw in the mouth of the + harbour, or creek, the wreck of a ship. + </p> + <p> + The tide was up, as we call it, so that it did not appear very much above + the water, but, as they made downwards, they found it grow bigger and + bigger; and the tide soon after ebbing out, they found it lay dry upon the + sands, and appeared to be the wreck of a considerable vessel, larger than + could be expected in that country. + </p> + <p> + After some time, William, taking out his glass to look at it more nearly, + was surprised with hearing a musket-shot whistle by him, and immediately + after that he heard the gun, and saw the smoke from the other side; upon + which our men immediately fired three muskets, to discover, if possible, + what or who they were. Upon the noise of these guns, abundance of men came + running down to the shore from among the trees; and our men could easily + perceive that they were Europeans, though they knew not of what nation; + however, our men hallooed to them as loud as they could, and by-and-by + they got a long pole, and set it up, and hung a white shirt upon it for a + flag of truce. They on the other side saw it, by the help of their + glasses, too, and quickly after our men see a boat launch off from the + shore, as they thought, but it was from another creek, it seems; and + immediately they came rowing over the creek to our men, carrying also a + white flag as a token of truce. + </p> + <p> + It is not easy to describe the surprise, or joy and satisfaction, that + appeared on both sides, to see not only white men, but Englishmen, in a + place so remote; but what then must it be when they came to know one + another, and to find that they were not only countrymen but comrades, and + that this was the very ship that Captain Wilmot, our admiral, commanded, + and whose company we had lost in the storm at Tobago, after making an + agreement to rendezvous at Madagascar! + </p> + <p> + They had, it seems, got intelligence of us when they came to the south + part of the island, and had been a-roving as far as the Gulf of Bengal, + when they met Captain Avery, with whom they joined, took several rich + prizes, and, amongst the rest, one ship with the Great Mogul's daughter, + and an immense treasure in money and jewels; and from thence they came + about the coast of Coromandel, and afterwards that of Malabar, into the + Gulf of Persia, where they also took some prize, and then designed for the + south part of Madagascar; but the winds blowing hard at S.E. and S.E. by + E., they came to the northward of the isle, and being after that separated + by a furious tempest from the N.W., they were forced into the mouth of + that creek, where they lost their ship. And they told us, also, that they + heard that Captain Avery himself had lost his ship also not far off. + </p> + <p> + When they had thus acquainted one another with their fortunes, the poor + overjoyed men were in haste to go back to communicate their joy to their + comrades; and, leaving some of their men with ours, the rest went back, + and William was so earnest to see them that he and two more went back with + them, and there he came to their little camp where they lived. There were + about a hundred and sixty men of them in all; they had got their guns on + shore, and some ammunition, but a good deal of their powder was spoiled; + however, they had raised a fair platform, and mounted twelve pieces of + cannon upon it, which was a sufficient defence to them on that side of the + sea; and just at the end of the platform they had made a launch and a + little yard, and were all hard at work, building another little ship, as I + may call it, to go to sea in; but they put a stop to this work upon the + news they had of our being come in. + </p> + <p> + When our men went into their huts, it was surprising, indeed, to see the + vast stock of wealth they had got, in gold and silver and jewels, which, + however, they told us was a trifle to what Captain Avery had, wherever he + was gone. + </p> + <p> + It was five days we had waited for our men, and no news of them; and + indeed I gave them over for lost, but was surprised, after five days' + waiting, to see a ship's boat come rowing towards us along shore. What to + make of it I could not tell, but was at least better satisfied when our + men told me they heard them halloo and saw them wave their caps to us. + </p> + <p> + In a little time they came quite up to us; and I saw friend William stand + up in the boat and make signs to us; so they came on board; but when I saw + there were but fifteen of our one-and-thirty men, I asked him what had + become of their fellows. "Oh," says William, "they are all very well; and + my dream is fully made good, and the cockswain's too." + </p> + <p> + This made me very impatient to know how the case stood; so he told us the + whole story, which indeed surprised us all. The next day we weighed, and + stood away southerly to join Captain Wilmot and ship at Mangahelly, where + we found him, as I said, a little chagrined at our stay; but we pacified + him afterwards with telling him the history of William's dream, and the + consequence of it. + </p> + <p> + In the meantime the camp of our comrades was so near Mangahelly, that our + admiral and I, friend William, and some of the men, resolved to take the + sloop and go and see them, and fetch them all, and their goods, bag and + baggage, on board our ship, which accordingly we did, and found their + camp, their fortifications, the battery of guns they had erected, their + treasure, and all the men, just as William had related it; so, after some + stay, we took all the men into the sloop, and brought them away with us. + </p> + <p> + It was some time before we knew what was become of Captain Avery; but + after about a month, by the direction of the men who had lost their ship, + we sent the sloop to cruise along the shore, to find out, if possible, + where they were; and in about a week's cruise our men found them, and + particularly that they had lost their ship, as well as our men had lost + theirs, and that they were every way in as bad a condition as ours. + </p> + <p> + It was about ten days before the sloop returned, and Captain Avery with + them; and this was the whole force that, as I remember, Captain Avery ever + had with him; for now we joined all our companies together, and it stood + thus:—We had two ships and a sloop, in which we had 320 men, but + much too few to man them as they ought to be, the great Portuguese ship + requiring of herself near 400 men to man her completely. As for our lost, + but now found comrade, her complement of men was 180, or thereabouts; and + Captain Avery had about 300 men with him, whereof he had ten carpenters + with him, most of which were taken aboard the prize they had taken; so + that, in a word, all the force Avery had at Madagascar, in the year 1699, + or thereabouts, amounted to our three ships, for his own was lost, as you + have heard; and never had any more than about 1200 men in all. + </p> + <p> + It was about a month after this that all our crews got together, and as + Avery was unshipped, we all agreed to bring our own company into the + Portuguese man-of-war and the sloop, and give Captain Avery the Spanish + frigate, with all the tackles and furniture, guns and ammunition, for his + crew by themselves; for which they, being full of wealth, agreed to give + us 40,000 pieces of eight. + </p> + <p> + It was next considered what course we should take. Captain Avery, to give + him his due, proposed our building a little city here, establishing + ourselves on shore, with a good fortification and works proper to defend + ourselves; and that, as we had wealth enough, and could increase it to + what degree we pleased, we should content ourselves to retire here, and + bid defiance to the world. But I soon convinced him that this place would + be no security to us, if we pretended to carry on our cruising trade; for + that then all the nations of Europe, and indeed of that part of the world, + would be engaged to root us out; but if we resolved to live there as in + retirement, and plant in the country as private men, and give over our + trade of pirating, then, indeed, we might plant and settle ourselves where + we pleased. But then, I told him, the best way would be to treat with the + natives, and buy a tract of land of them farther up the country, seated + upon some navigable river, where boats might go up and down for pleasure, + but not ships to endanger us; that thus planting the high ground with + cattle, such as cows and goats, of which the country also was full, to be + sure we might live here as well as any men in the world; and I owned to + him I thought it was a good retreat for those that were willing to leave + off and lay down, and yet did not care to venture home and be hanged; that + is to say, to run the risk of it. + </p> + <p> + Captain Avery, however he made no positive discovery of his intentions, + seemed to me to decline my notion of going up into the country to plant; + on the contrary, it was apparent he was of Captain Wilmot's opinion, that + they might maintain themselves on shore, and yet carry on their cruising + trade too; and upon this they resolved. But, as I afterwards understood, + about fifty of their men went up the country, and settled themselves in an + inland place as a colony. Whether they are there still or not, I cannot + tell, or how many of them are left alive; but it is my opinion they are + there still, and that they are considerably increased, for, as I hear, + they have got some women among them, though not many; for it seems five + Dutch women and three or four little girls were taken by them in a Dutch + ship, which they afterwards took going to Mocha; and three of those women, + marrying some of these men, went with them to live in their new + plantation. But of this I speak only by hearsay. + </p> + <p> + As we lay here some time, I found our people mightily divided in their + notions; some were for going this way, and some that, till at last I began + to foresee they would part company, and perhaps we should not have men + enough to keep together to man the great ship; so I took Captain Wilmot + aside, and began to talk to him about it, but soon perceived that he + inclined himself to stay at Madagascar, and having got a vast wealth for + his own share, had secret designs of getting home some way or other. + </p> + <p> + I argued the impossibility of it, and the hazard he would run, either of + falling into the hands of thieves and murderers in the Red Sea, who would + never let such a treasure as his pass their hands, or of his falling into + the hands of the English, Dutch, or French, who would certainly hang him + for a pirate. I gave him an account of the voyage I had made from this + very place to the continent of Africa, and what a journey it was to travel + on foot. + </p> + <p> + In short, nothing could persuade him, but he would go into the Red Sea + with the sloop, and where the children of Israel passed through the sea + dry-shod, and, landing there, would travel to Grand Cairo by land, which + is not above eighty miles, and from thence he said he could ship himself, + by the way of Alexandria, to any part of the world. + </p> + <p> + I represented the hazard, and indeed the impossibility, of his passing by + Mocha and Jiddah without being attacked, if he offered it by force, or + plundered, if he went to get leave; and explained the reasons of it so + much and so effectually, that, though at last he would not hearken to it + himself, none of his men would go with him. They told him they would go + anywhere with him to serve him, but that this was running himself and them + into certain destruction, without any possibility of avoiding it, or + probability of answering his end. The captain took what I said to him + quite wrong, and pretended to resent it, and gave me some buccaneer words + upon it; but I gave him no return to it but this: that I advised him for + his advantage; that if he did not understand it so, it was his fault, not + mine; that I did not forbid him to go, nor had I offered to persuade any + of the men not to go with him, though it was to their apparent + destruction. + </p> + <p> + However, warm heads are not easily cooled. The captain was so eager that + he quitted our company, and, with most part of his crew, went over to + Captain Avery, and sorted with his people, taking all the treasure with + him, which, by the way, was not very fair in him, we having agreed to + share all our gains, whether more or less, whether absent or present. + </p> + <p> + Our men muttered a little at it, but I pacified them as well as I could, + and told them it was easy for us to get as much, if we minded our hits; + and Captain Wilmot had set us a very good example; for, by the same rule, + the agreement of any further sharing of profits with them was at an end. I + took this occasion to put into their heads some part of my further + designs, which were, to range over the eastern sea, and see if we could + not make ourselves as rich as Mr Avery, who, it was true, had gotten a + prodigious deal of money, though not one-half of what was said of it in + Europe. + </p> + <p> + Our men were so pleased with my forward, enterprising temper, that they + assured me that they would go with me, one and all, over the whole globe, + wherever I would carry them; and as for Captain Wilmot, they would have + nothing more to do with him. This came to his ears, and put him into a + great rage, so that he threatened, if I came on shore, he would cut my + throat. + </p> + <p> + I had information of it privately, but took no notice of it at all; only I + took care not to go unprovided for him, and seldom walked about but in + very good company. However, at last Captain Wilmot and I met, and talked + over the matter very seriously, and I offered him the sloop to go where he + pleased, or, if he was not satisfied with that, I offered to take the + sloop and leave him the great ship; but he declined both, and only desired + that I would leave him six carpenters, which I had in our ship more than I + had need of, to help his men to finish the sloop that was begun before we + came thither, by the men that lost their ship. This I consented readily + to, and lent him several other hands that were useful to them; and in a + little time they built a stout brigantine, able to carry fourteen guns and + 200 men. + </p> + <p> + What measures they took, and how Captain Avery managed afterwards, is too + long a story to meddle with here; nor is it any of my business, having my + own story still upon my hands. + </p> + <p> + We lay here, about these several simple disputes, almost five months, + when, about the latter end of March, I set sail with the great ship, + having in her forty-four guns and 400 men, and the sloop, carrying eighty + men. We did not steer to the Malabar coast, and so to the Gulf of Persia, + as was first intended, the east monsoons blowing yet too strong, but we + kept more under the African coast, where we had the wind variable till we + passed the line, and made the Cape Bassa, in the latitude of four degrees + ten minutes; from thence, the monsoons beginning to change to the N.E. and + N.N.E., we led it away, with the wind large, to the Maldives, a famous + ledge of islands, well known by all the sailors who have gone into those + parts of the world; and, leaving these islands a little to the south, we + made Cape Comorin, the southernmost land of the coast of Malabar, and went + round the isle of Ceylon. Here we lay by a while to wait for purchase; and + here we saw three large English East India ships going from Bengal, or + from Fort St George, homeward for England, or rather for Bombay and Surat, + till the trade set in. + </p> + <p> + We brought to, and hoisting an English ancient and pendant, lay by for + them, as if we intended to attack them. They could not tell what to make + of us a good while, though they saw our colours; and I believe at first + they thought us to be French; but as they came nearer to us, we let them + soon see what we were, for we hoisted a black flag, with two cross daggers + in it, on our main-top-mast head, which let them see what they were to + expect. + </p> + <p> + We soon found the effects of this; for at first they spread their + ancients, and made up to us in a line, as if they would fight us, having + the wind off shore, fair enough to have brought them on board us; but when + they saw what force we were of, and found we were cruisers of another + kind, they stood away from us again, with all the sail they could make. If + they had come up, we should have given them an unexpected welcome, but as + it was, we had no mind to follow them; so we let them go, for the same + reasons which I mentioned before. + </p> + <p> + But though we let them pass, we did not design to let others go at so easy + a price. It was but the next morning that we saw a sail standing round + Cape Comorin, and steering, as we thought, the same course with us. We + knew not at first what to do with her, because she had the shore on her + larboard quarter, and if we offered to chase her, she might put into any + port or creek, and escape us; but, to prevent this, we sent the sloop to + get in between her and the land. As soon as she saw that, she hauled in to + keep the land aboard, and when the sloop stood towards her she made right + ashore, with all the canvas she could spread. + </p> + <p> + The sloop, however, came up with her and engaged her, and found she was a + vessel of ten guns, Portuguese built, but in the Dutch traders' hands, and + manned by Dutchmen, who were bound from the Gulf of Persia to Batavia, to + fetch spices and other goods from thence. The sloop's men took her, and + had the rummaging of her before we came up. She had in her some European + goods, and a good round sum of money, and some pearl; so that, though we + did not go to the gulf for the pearl, the pearl came to us out of the + gulf, and we had our share of it. This was a rich ship, and the goods were + of very considerable value, besides the money and the pearl. + </p> + <p> + We had a long consultation here what we should do with the men, for to + give them the ship, and let them pursue their voyage to Java, would be to + alarm the Dutch factory there, who are by far the strongest in the Indies, + and to make our passage that way impracticable; whereas we resolved to + visit that part of the world in our way, but were not willing to pass the + great Bay of Bengal, where we hoped for a great deal of purchase; and + therefore it behoved us not to be waylaid before we came there, because + they knew we must pass by the Straits of Malacca, or those of Sunda; and + either way it was very easy to prevent us. + </p> + <p> + While we were consulting this in the great cabin, the men had had the same + debate before the mast; and it seems the majority there were for pickling + up the poor Dutchmen among the herrings; in a word, they were for throwing + them all into the sea. Poor William, the Quaker, was in great concern + about this, and comes directly to me to talk about it. "Hark thee," says + William, "what wilt thou do with these Dutchmen that thou hast on board? + Thou wilt not let them go, I suppose," says he. "Why," says I, "William, + would you advise me to let them go?" "No," says William, "I cannot say it + is fit for thee to let them go; that is to say, to go on with their voyage + to Batavia, because it is not for thy turn that the Dutch at Batavia + should have any knowledge of thy being in these seas." "Well, then," says + I to him, "I know no remedy but to throw them overboard. You know, + William," says I, "a Dutchman swims like a fish; and all our people here + are of the same opinion as well as I." At the same time I resolved it + should not be done, but wanted to hear what William would say. He gravely + replied, "If all the men in the ship were of that mind, I will never + believe that thou wilt be of that mind thyself, for I have heard thee + protest against cruelty in all other cases." "Well, William," says I, + "that is true; but what then shall we do with them?" "Why," says William, + "is there no way but to murder them? I am persuaded thou canst not be in + earnest." "No, indeed, William," says I, "I am not in earnest; but they + shall not go to Java, no, nor to Ceylon, that is certain." "But," says + William, "the men have done thee no injury at all; thou hast taken a great + treasure from them; what canst thou pretend to hurt them for?" "Nay, + William," says I, "do not talk of that; I have pretence enough, if that be + all; my pretence is, to prevent doing me hurt, and that is as necessary a + piece of the law of self-preservation as any you can name; but the main + thing is, I know not what to do with them, to prevent their prating." + </p> + <p> + While William and I were talking, the poor Dutchmen were openly condemned + to die, as it may be called, by the whole ship's company; and so warm were + the men upon it, that they grew very clamorous; and when they heard that + William was against it, some of them swore they should die, and if William + opposed it, he should drown along with them. + </p> + <p> + But, as I was resolved to put an end to their cruel project, so I found it + was time to take upon me a little, or the bloody humour might grow too + strong; so I called the Dutchmen up, and talked a little with them. First, + I asked them if they were willing to go with us. Two of them offered it + presently; but the rest, which were fourteen, declined it. "Well, then," + said I, "where would you go?" They desired they should go to Ceylon. No, I + told them I could not allow them to go to any Dutch factory, and told them + very plainly the reasons of it, which they could not deny to be just. I + let them know also the cruel, bloody measures of our men, but that I had + resolved to save them, if possible; and therefore I told them I would set + them on shore at some English factory in the Bay of Bengal, or put them on + board any English ship I met, after I was past the Straits of Sunda or of + Malacca, but not before; for, as to my coming back again, I told them I + would run the venture of their Dutch power from Batavia, but I would not + have the news come there before me, because it would make all their + merchant-ships lay up, and keep out of our way. + </p> + <p> + It came next into our consideration what we should do with their ship; but + this was not long resolving; for there were but two ways, either to set + her on fire, or to run her on shore, and we chose the last. So we set her + foresail with the tack at the cat-head, and lashed her helm a little to + starboard, to answer her head-sail, and so set her agoing, with neither + cat or dog in her; and it was not above two hours before we saw her run + right ashore upon the coast, a little beyond the Cape Comorin; and away we + went round about Ceylon, for the coast of Coromandel. + </p> + <p> + We sailed along there, not in sight of the shore only, but so near as to + see the ships in the road at Fort St David, Fort St George, and at the + other factories along that shore, as well as along the coast of Golconda, + carrying our English ancient when we came near the Dutch factories, and + Dutch colours when we passed by the English factories. We met with little + purchase upon this coast, except two small vessels of Golconda, bound + across the bay with bales of calicoes and muslins and wrought silks, and + fifteen bales of romals, from the bottom of the bay, which were going, on + whose account we knew not, to Acheen, and to other ports on the coast of + Malacca. We did not inquire to what place in particular; but we let the + vessels go, having none but Indians on board. + </p> + <p> + In the bottom of the bay we met with a great junk belonging to the Mogul's + court, with a great many people, passengers as we supposed them to be: it + seems they were bound for the river Hooghly or Ganges, and came from + Sumatra. This was a prize worth taking indeed; and we got so much gold in + her, besides other goods which we did not meddle with—pepper in + particular—that it had like to have put an end to our cruise; for + almost all my men said we were rich enough, and desired to go back again + to Madagascar. But I had other things in my head still, and when I came to + talk with them, and set friend William to talk with them, we put such + further golden hopes into their heads that we soon prevailed with them to + let us go on. + </p> + <p> + My next design was to leave all the dangerous straits of Malacca, + Singapore, and Sunda, where we could expect no great booty, but what we + might light on in European ships, which we must fight for; and though we + were able to fight, and wanted no courage, even to desperation, yet we + were rich too, and resolved to be richer, and took this for our maxim, + that while we were sure the wealth we sought was to be had without + fighting, we had no occasion to put ourselves to the necessity of fighting + for that which would come upon easy terms. + </p> + <p> + We left, therefore, the Bay of Bengal, and coming to the coast of Sumatra, + we put in at a small port, where there was a town, inhabited only by + Malays; and here we took in fresh water, and a large quantity of good + pork, pickled up and well salted, notwithstanding the heat of the climate, + being in the very middle of the torrid zone, viz., in three degrees + fifteen minutes north latitude. We also took on board both our vessels + forty hogs alive, which served us for fresh provisions, having abundance + of food for them, such as the country produced, such as guams, potatoes, + and a sort of coarse rice, good for nothing else but to feed the swine. We + killed one of these hogs every day, and found them to be excellent meat. + We took in also a monstrous quantity of ducks, and cocks and hens, the + same kind as we have in England, which we kept for change of provisions; + and if I remember right, we had no less than two thousand of them; so that + at first we were pestered with them very much, but we soon lessened them + by boiling, roasting, stewing, &c., for we never wanted while we had + them. + </p> + <p> + My long-projected design now lay open to me, which was to fall in amongst + the Dutch Spice Islands, and see what mischief I could do there. + Accordingly, we put out to sea the 12th of August, and passing the line on + the 17th, we stood away due south, leaving the Straits of Sunda and the + isle of Java on the east, till we came to the latitude of eleven degrees + twenty minutes, when we steered east and E.N.E., having easy gales from + the W.S.W. till we came among the Moluccas, or Spice Islands. + </p> + <p> + We passed those seas with less difficulty than in other places, the winds + to the south of Java being more variable, and the weather good, though + sometimes we met with squally weather and short storms; but when we came + in among the Spice Islands themselves we had a share of the monsoons, or + trade-winds, and made use of them accordingly. + </p> + <p> + The infinite number of islands which lie in these seas embarrassed us + strangely, and it was with great difficulty that we worked our way through + them; then we steered for the north side of the Philippines, when we had a + double chance for purchase, viz., either to meet with the Spanish ships + from Acapulco, on the coast of New Spain, or we were certain not to fail + of finding some ships or junks of China, who, if they came from China, + would have a great quantity of goods of value on board, as well as money; + or if we took them going back, we should find them laden with nutmegs and + cloves from Banda and Ternate, or from some of the other islands. + </p> + <p> + We were right in our guesses here to a tittle, and we steered directly + through a large outlet, which they call a strait, though it be fifteen + miles broad, and to an island they call Dammer, and from thence N.N.E. to + Banda. Between these islands we met with a Dutch junk, or vessel, going to + Amboyna: we took her without much trouble, and I had much ado to prevent + our men murdering all the men, as soon as they heard them say they + belonged to Amboyna: the reasons I suppose any one will guess. + </p> + <p> + We took out of her about sixteen ton of nutmegs, some provisions, and + their small-arms, for they had no great guns, and let the ship go: from + thence we sailed directly to the Banda Island, or Islands, where we were + sure to get more nutmegs if we thought fit. For my part, I would willingly + have got more nutmegs, though I had paid for them, but our people abhorred + paying for anything; so we got about twelve ton more at several times, + most of them from shore, and only a few in a small boat of the natives, + which was going to Gilolo. We would have traded openly, but the Dutch, who + have made themselves masters of all those islands, forbade the people + dealing with us, or any strangers whatever, and kept them so in awe that + they durst not do it; so we could indeed have made nothing of it if we had + stayed longer, and therefore resolved to be gone for Ternate, and see if + we could make up our loading with cloves. + </p> + <p> + Accordingly we stood away north, but found ourselves so entangled among + innumerable islands, and without any pilot that understood the channel and + races between them, that we were obliged to give it over, and resolved to + go back again to Banda, and see what we could get among the other islands + thereabouts. + </p> + <p> + The first adventure we made here had like to have been fatal to us all, + for the sloop, being ahead, made the signal to us for seeing a sail, and + afterwards another, and a third, by which we understood she saw three + sail; whereupon we made more sail to come up with her, but on a sudden + were gotten among some rocks, falling foul upon them in such a manner as + frighted us all very heartily; for having, it seems, but just water + enough, as it were to an inch, our rudder struck upon the top of a rock, + which gave us a terrible shock, and split a great piece off the rudder, + and indeed disabled it so that our ship would not steer at all, at least + not so as to be depended upon; and we were glad to hand all our sails, + except our fore-sail and main-topsail, and with them we stood away to the + east, to see if we could find any creek or harbour where we might lay the + ship on shore, and repair our rudder; besides, we found the ship herself + had received some damage, for she had some little leak near her + stern-post, but a great way under water. + </p> + <p> + By this mischance we lost the advantages, whatever they were, of the three + sail of ships, which we afterwards came to hear were small Dutch ships + from Batavia, going to Banda and Amboyna, to load spice, and, no doubt, + had a good quantity of money on board. + </p> + <p> + Upon the disaster I have been speaking of you may very well suppose that + we came to an anchor as soon as we could, which was upon a small island + not far from Banda, where, though the Dutch keep no factory, yet they come + at the season to buy nutmegs and mace. We stayed there thirteen days; but + there being no place where we could lay the ship on shore, we sent the + sloop to cruise among the islands, to look out for a place fit for us. In + the meantime we got very good water here, some provisions, roots, and + fruits, and a good quantity of nutmegs and mace, which we found ways to + trade with the natives for, without the knowledge of their masters, the + Dutch. + </p> + <p> + At length our sloop returned; having found another island where there was + a very good harbour, we ran in, and came to an anchor. We immediately + unbent all our sails, sent them ashore upon the island, and set up seven + or eight tents with them; then we unrigged our top-masts, and cut them + down, hoisted all our guns out, our provisions and loading, and put them + ashore in the tents. With the guns we made two small batteries, for fear + of a surprise, and kept a look-out upon the hill. When we were all ready, + we laid the ship aground upon a hard sand, the upper end of the harbour, + and shored her up on each side. At low water she lay almost dry, so we + mended her bottom, and stopped the leak, which was occasioned by straining + some of the rudder irons with the shock which the ship had against the + rock. + </p> + <p> + Having done this, we also took occasion to clean her bottom, which, having + been at sea so long, was very foul. The sloop washed and tallowed also, + but was ready before us, and cruised eight or ten days among the islands, + but met with no purchase; so that we began to be tired of the place, + having little to divert us but the most furious claps of thunder that ever + were heard or read of in the world. + </p> + <p> + We were in hopes to have met with some purchase here among the Chinese, + who, we had been told, came to Ternate to trade for cloves, and to the + Banda Isles for nutmegs; and we would have been very glad to have loaded + our galleon, or great ship, with these two sorts of spice, and have + thought it a glorious voyage; but we found nothing stirring more than what + I have said, except Dutchmen, who, by what means we could not imagine, had + either a jealousy of us or intelligence of us, and kept themselves close + in their ports. + </p> + <p> + I was once resolved to have made a descent at the island of Dumas, the + place most famous for the best nutmegs; but friend William, who was always + for doing our business without fighting, dissuaded me from it, and gave + such reasons for it that we could not resist; particularly the great heats + of the season, and of the place, for we were now in the latitude of just + half a degree south. But while we were disputing this point we were soon + determined by the following accident:—We had a strong gale of wind + at S.W. by W., and the ship had fresh way, but a great sea rolling in upon + us from the N.E., which we afterwards found was the pouring in of the + great ocean east of New Guinea. However, as I said, we stood away large, + and made fresh way, when, on the sudden, from a dark cloud which hovered + over our heads, came a flash, or rather blast, of lightning, which was so + terrible, and quivered so long among us, that not I only, but all our men, + thought the ship was on fire. The heat of the flash, or fire, was so + sensibly felt in our faces, that some of our men had blisters raised by it + on their skins, not immediately, perhaps, by the heat, but by the + poisonous or noxious particles which mixed themselves with the matter + inflamed. But this was not all; the shock of the air, which the fracture + in the clouds made, was such that our ship shook as when a broadside is + fired; and her motion being checked, as it were at once, by a repulse + superior to the force that gave her way before, the sails all flew back in + a moment, and the ship lay, as we might truly say, thunder-struck. As the + blast from the cloud was so very near us, it was but a few moments after + the flash that the terriblest clap of thunder followed that was ever heard + by mortals. I firmly believe a blast of a hundred thousand barrels of + gunpowder could not have been greater to our hearing; nay, indeed, to some + of our men it took away their hearing. + </p> + <p> + It is not possible for me to describe, or any one to conceive, the terror + of that minute. Our men were in such a consternation, that not a man on + board the ship had presence of mind to apply to the proper duty of a + sailor, except friend William; and had he not run very nimbly, and with a + composure that I am sure I was not master of, to let go the fore-sheet, + set in the weather-brace of the fore-yard, and haul down the top-sails, we + had certainly brought all our masts by the board, and perhaps have been + overwhelmed in the sea. + </p> + <p> + As for myself, I must confess my eyes were open to my danger, though not + the least to anything of application for remedy. I was all amazement and + confusion, and this was the first time that I can say I began to feel the + effects of that horror which I know since much more of, upon the just + reflection on my former life. I thought myself doomed by Heaven to sink + that moment into eternal destruction; and with this peculiar mark of + terror, viz., that the vengeance was not executed in the ordinary way of + human justice, but that God had taken me into His immediate disposing, and + had resolved to be the executer of His own vengeance. + </p> + <p> + Let them alone describe the confusion I was in who know what was the case + of [John] Child, of Shadwell, or Francis Spira. It is impossible to + describe it. My soul was all amazement and surprise. I thought myself just + sinking into eternity, owning the divine justice of my punishment, but not + at all feeling any of the moving, softening tokens of a sincere penitent; + afflicted at the punishment, but not at the crime; alarmed at the + vengeance, but not terrified at the guilt; having the same gust to the + crime, though terrified to the last degree at the thought of the + punishment, which I concluded I was just now going to receive. + </p> + <p> + But perhaps many that read this will be sensible of the thunder and + lightning, that may think nothing of the rest, or rather may make a jest + of it all; so I say no more of it at this time, but proceed to the story + of the voyage. When the amazement was over, and the men began to come to + themselves, they fell a-calling for one another, every one for his friend, + or for those he had most respect for; and it was a singular satisfaction + to find that nobody was hurt. The next thing was to inquire if the ship + had received no damage, when the boatswain, stepping forward, found that + part of the head was gone, but not so as to endanger the bowsprit; so we + hoisted our top-sails again, hauled aft the fore-sheet, braced the yards, + and went our course as before. Nor can I deny but that we were all + somewhat like the ship; our first astonishment being a little over, and + that we found the ship swim again, we were soon the same irreligious, + hardened crew that we were before, and I among the rest. + </p> + <p> + As we now steered, our course lay N.N.E., and we passed thus, with a fair + wind, through the strait or channel between the island of Gilolo and the + land of Nova Guinea, when we were soon in the open sea or ocean, on the + south-east of the Philippines, being the great Pacific, or South Sea, + where it may be said to join itself with the vast Indian Ocean. + </p> + <p> + As we passed into these seas, steering due north, so we soon crossed the + line to the north side, and so sailed on towards Mindanao and Manilla, the + chief of the Philippine Islands, without meeting with any purchase till we + came to the northward of Manilla, and then our trade began; for here we + took three Japanese vessels, though at some distance from Manilla. Two of + them had made their market, and were going home with nutmegs, cinnamon, + cloves, &c., besides all sorts of European goods, brought with the + Spanish ships from Acapulco. They had together eight-and-thirty ton of + cloves, and five or six ton of nutmegs, and as much cinnamon. We took the + spice, but meddled with very little of the European goods, they being, as + we thought, not worth our while; but we were very sorry for it soon after, + and therefore grew wiser upon the next occasion. + </p> + <p> + The third Japanese was the best prize to us; for he came with money, and a + great deal of gold uncoined, to buy such goods as we mentioned above. We + eased him of his gold, and did him no other harm, and having no intention + to stay long here, we stood away for China. + </p> + <p> + We were at sea above two months upon this voyage, beating it up against + the wind, which blew steadily from the N.E., and within a point or two one + way or other; and this indeed was the reason why we met with the more + prizes in our voyage. + </p> + <p> + We were just gotten clear of the Philippines, and we purposed to go to the + isle of Formosa, but the wind blew so fresh at N.N.E. that there was no + making anything of it, and we were forced to put back to Laconia, the most + northerly of those islands. We rode here very secure, and shifted our + situation, not in view of any danger, for there was none, but for a better + supply of provisions, which we found the people very willing to supply us + with. + </p> + <p> + There lay, while we remained here, three very great galleons, or Spanish + ships, from the south seas; whether newly come in or ready to sail we + could not understand at first; but as we found the China traders began to + load and set forward to the north, we concluded the Spanish ships had + newly unloaded their cargo, and these had been buying; so we doubted not + but we should meet with purchase in the rest of the voyage, neither, + indeed, could we well miss of it. + </p> + <p> + We stayed here till the beginning of May, when we were told the Chinese + traders would set forward; for the northern monsoons end about the latter + end of March or beginning of April; so that they are sure of fair winds + home. Accordingly we hired some of the country boats, which are very swift + sailers, to go and bring us word how affairs stood at Manilla, and when + the China junks would sail; and by this intelligence we ordered our + matters so well, that three days after we set sail we fell in with no less + than eleven of them; out of which, however, having by misfortune of + discovering ourselves, taken but three, we contented ourselves and pursued + our voyage to Formosa. In these three vessels we took, in short, such a + quantity of cloves, nutmegs, cinnamon, and mace, besides silver, that our + men began to be of my opinion,—that we were rich enough; and, in + short, we had nothing to do now but to consider by what methods to secure + the immense treasure we had got. + </p> + <p> + I was secretly glad to hear that they were of this opinion, for I had long + before resolved, if it were possible, to persuade them to think of + returning, having fully perfected my first projected design of rummaging + among the Spice Islands; and all those prizes, which were exceeding rich + at Manilla, was quite beyond my design. + </p> + <p> + But now I had heard what the men said, and how they thought we were very + well, I let them know by friend William, that I intended only to sail to + the island of Formosa, where I should find opportunity to turn our spices + and Europe goods into ready money, and that then I would tack about for + the south, the northern monsoons being perhaps by that time also ready to + set in. They all approved of my design, and willingly went forward; + because, besides the winds, which would not permit until October to go to + the south, I say, besides this, we were now a very deep ship, having near + two hundred ton of goods on board, and particularly, some very valuable; + the sloop also had a proportion. + </p> + <p> + With this resolution we went on cheerfully, when, within about twelve + days' sail more, we made the island Formosa, at a great distance, but were + ourselves shot beyond the southernmost part of the island, being to + leeward, and almost upon the coast of China. Here we were a little at a + loss, for the English factories were not far off, and we might be obliged + to fight some of their ships, if we met with them; which, though we were + able enough to do, yet we did not desire it on many accounts, and + particularly because we did not think it was our business to have it known + who we were, or that such a kind of people as we had been seen on the + coast. However, we were obliged to keep to the northward, keeping as good + an offing as we could with respect to the coast of China. + </p> + <p> + We had not sailed long but we chased a small Chinese junk, and having + taken her, we found she was bound to the island of Formosa, having no + goods on board but some rice and a small quantity of tea; but she had + three Chinese merchants in her; and they told us that they were going to + meet a large vessel of their country, which came from Tonquin, and lay in + a river in Formosa, whose name I forgot; and they were going to the + Philippine Islands, with silks, muslins, calicoes, and such goods as are + the product of China, and some gold; that their business was to sell their + cargo, and buy spices and European goods. + </p> + <p> + This suited very well with our purpose; so I resolved now that we would + leave off being pirates and turn merchants; so we told them what goods we + had on board, and that if they would bring their supercargoes or merchants + on board, we would trade with them. They were very willing to trade with + us, but terribly afraid to trust us; nor was it an unjust fear, for we had + plundered them already of what they had. On the other hand, we were as + diffident as they, and very uncertain what to do; but William the Quaker + put this matter into a way of barter. He came to me and told me he really + thought the merchants looked like fair men, that meant honestly. "And + besides," says William, "it is their interest to be honest now, for, as + they know upon what terms we got the goods we are to truck with them, so + they know we can afford good pennyworths; and in the next place, it saves + them going the whole voyage, so that the southerly monsoons yet holding, + if they traded with us, they could immediately return with their cargo to + China;" though, by the way, we afterwards found they intended for Japan; + but that was all one, for by this means they saved at least eight months' + voyage. Upon these foundations, William said he was satisfied we might + trust them; "for," says William, "I would as soon trust a man whose + interest binds him to be just to me as a man whose principle binds + himself." Upon the whole, William proposed that two of the merchants + should be left on board our ship as hostages, and that part of our goods + should be loaded in their vessel, and let the third go with it into the + port where their ship lay; and when he had delivered the spices, he should + bring back such things as it was agreed should be exchanged. This was + concluded on, and William the Quaker ventured to go along with them, + which, upon my word, I should not have cared to have done, nor was I + willing that he should, but he went still upon the notion that it was + their interest to treat him friendly. + </p> + <p> + In the meantime, we came to an anchor under a little island in the + latitude of 23 degrees 28 minutes, being just under the northern tropic, + and about twenty leagues from the island. Here we lay thirteen days, and + began to be very uneasy for my friend William, for they had promised to be + back again in four days, which they might very easily have done. However, + at the end of thirteen days, we saw three sail coming directly to us, + which a little surprised us all at first, not knowing what might be the + case; and we began to put ourselves in a posture of defence; but as they + came nearer us, we were soon satisfied, for the first vessel was that + which William went in, who carried a flag of truce; and in a few hours + they all came to an anchor, and William came on board us with a little + boat, with the Chinese merchant in his company, and two other merchants, + who seemed to be a kind of brokers for the rest. + </p> + <p> + Here he gave us an account how civilly he had been used; how they had + treated him with all imaginable frankness and openness; that they had not + only given him the full value of his spices and other goods which he + carried, in gold, by good weight, but had loaded the vessel again with + such goods as he knew we were willing to trade for; and that afterwards + they had resolved to bring the great ship out of the harbour, to lie where + we were, that so we might make what bargain we thought fit; only William + said he had promised, in our name, that we should use no violence with + them, nor detain any of the vessels after we had done trading with them. I + told him we would strive to outdo them in civility, and that we would make + good every part of his agreement; in token whereof, I caused a white flag + likewise to be spread at the poop of our great ship, which was the signal + agreed on. + </p> + <p> + As to the third vessel which came with them, it was a kind of bark of the + country, who, having intelligence of our design to traffic, came off to + deal with us, bringing a great deal of gold and some provisions, which at + that time we were very glad of. + </p> + <p> + In short, we traded upon the high seas with these men, and indeed we made + a very good market, and yet sold thieves' pennyworths too. We sold here + about sixty ton of spice, chiefly cloves and nutmegs, and above two + hundred bales of European goods, such as linen and woollen manufactures. + We considered we should have occasion for some such things ourselves, and + so we kept a good quantity of English stuffs, cloth, baize, &c., for + ourselves. I shall not take up any of the little room I have left here + with the further particulars of our trade; it is enough to mention, that, + except a parcel of tea, and twelve bales of fine China wrought silks, we + took nothing in exchange for our goods but gold; so that the sum we took + here in that glittering commodity amounted to above fifty thousand ounces + good weight. + </p> + <p> + When we had finished our barter, we restored the hostages, and gave the + three merchants about the quantity of twelve hundredweight of nutmegs, and + as many of cloves, with a handsome present of European linen and stuff for + themselves, as a recompense for what we had taken from them; so we sent + them away exceedingly well satisfied. + </p> + <p> + Here it was that William gave me an account, that while he was on board + the Japanese vessel, he met with a kind of religious, or Japan priest, who + spoke some words of English to him; and, being very inquisitive to know + how he came to learn any of those words, he told him that there was in his + country thirteen Englishmen; he called them Englishmen very articulately + and distinctly, for he had conversed with them very frequently and freely. + He said that they were all that were left of two-and-thirty men, who came + on shore on the north side of Japan, being driven upon a great rock in a + stormy night, where they lost their ship, and the rest of their men were + drowned; that he had persuaded the king of his country to send boats off + to the rock or island where the ship was lost, to save the rest of the + men, and to bring them on shore, which was done, and they were used very + kindly, and had houses built for them, and land given them to plant for + provision; and that they lived by themselves. + </p> + <p> + He said he went frequently among them, to persuade them to worship their + god (an idol, I suppose, of their own making), which, he said, they + ungratefully refused; and that therefore the king had once or twice + ordered them all to be put to death; but that, as he said, he had + prevailed upon the king to spare them, and let them live their own way, as + long as they were quiet and peaceable, and did not go about to withdraw + others from the worship of the country. + </p> + <p> + I asked William why he did not inquire from whence they came. "I did," + said William; "for how could I but think it strange," said he, "to hear + him talk of Englishmen on the north side of Japan?" "Well," said I, "what + account did he give of it?" "An account," said William, "that will + surprise thee, and all the world after thee, that shall hear of it, and + which makes me wish thou wouldst go up to Japan and find them out." "What + do you mean?" said I. "Whence could they come?" "Why," says William, "he + pulled out a little book, and in it a piece of paper, where it was + written, in an Englishman's hand, and in plain English words, thus; and," + says William, "I read it myself:—'We came from Greenland, and from + the North Pole.'" This, indeed, was amazing to us all, and more so to + those seamen among us who knew anything of the infinite attempts which had + been made from Europe, as well by the English as the Dutch, to discover a + passage that way into those parts of the world; and as William pressed as + earnestly to go on to the north to rescue those poor men, so the ship's + company began to incline to it; and, in a word, we all came to this, that + we would stand in to the shore of Formosa, to find this priest again, and + have a further account of it all from him. Accordingly, the sloop went + over; but when they came there, the vessels were very unhappily sailed, + and this put an end to our inquiry after them, and perhaps may have + disappointed mankind of one of the most noble discoveries that ever was + made, or will again be made, in the world, for the good of mankind in + general; but so much for that. + </p> + <p> + William was so uneasy at losing this opportunity, that he pressed us + earnestly to go up to Japan to find out these men. He told us that if it + was nothing but to recover thirteen honest poor men from a kind of + captivity, which they would otherwise never be redeemed from, and where, + perhaps, they might, some time or other, be murdered by the barbarous + people, in defence of their idolatry, it were very well worth our while, + and it would be, in some measure, making amends for the mischiefs we had + done in the world; but we, that had no concern upon us for the mischiefs + we had done, had much less about any satisfactions to be made for it, so + he found that kind of discourse would weigh very little with us. Then he + pressed us very earnestly to let him have the sloop to go by himself, and + I told him I would not oppose it; but when he came to the sloop none of + the men would go with him; for the case was plain, they had all a share in + the cargo of the great ship, as well as in that of the sloop, and the + richness of the cargo was such that they would not leave it by any means; + so poor William, much to his mortification, was obliged to give it over. + What became of those thirteen men, or whether they are not there still, I + can give no account of. + </p> + <p> + We are now at the end of our cruise; what we had taken was indeed so + considerable, that it was not only enough to satisfy the most covetous and + the most ambitious minds in the world, but it did indeed satisfy us, and + our men declared they did not desire any more. The next motion, therefore, + was about going back, and the way by which we should perform the voyage, + so as not to be attacked by the Dutch in the Straits of Sunda. + </p> + <p> + We had pretty well stored ourselves here with provisions, and it being now + near the return of the monsoons, we resolved to stand away to the + southward; and not only to keep without the Philippine Islands, that is to + say, to the eastward of them, but to keep on to the southward, and see if + we could not leave not only the Moluccas, or Spice Islands, behind us, but + even Nova Guinea and Nova Hollandia also; and so getting into the variable + winds, to the south of the tropic of Capricorn, steer away to the west, + over the great Indian Ocean. + </p> + <p> + This was indeed at first a monstrous voyage in its appearance, and the + want of provisions threatened us. William told us in so many words, that + it was impossible we could carry provisions enough to subsist us for such + a voyage, and especially fresh water; and that, as there would be no land + for us to touch at where we could get any supply, it was a madness to + undertake it. + </p> + <p> + But I undertook to remedy this evil, and therefore desired them not to be + uneasy at that, for I knew that we might supply ourselves at Mindanao, the + most southerly island of the Philippines. + </p> + <p> + Accordingly, we set sail, having taken all the provisions here that we + could get, the 28th of September, the wind veering a little at first from + the N.N.W. to the N.E. by E., but afterwards settled about the N.E. and + the E.N.E. We were nine weeks in this voyage, having met with several + interruptions by the weather, and put in under the lee of a small island + in the latitude of 16 degrees 12 minutes, of which we never knew the name, + none of our charts having given any account of it: I say, we put in here + by reason of a strange tornado or hurricane, which brought us into a great + deal of danger. Here we rode about sixteen days, the winds being very + tempestuous and the weather uncertain. However, we got some provisions on + shore, such as plants and roots, and a few hogs. We believed there were + inhabitants on the island, but we saw none of them. + </p> + <p> + From hence, the weather settling again, we went on and came to the + southernmost part of Mindanao, where we took in fresh water and some cows, + but the climate was so hot that we did not attempt to salt up any more + than so as to keep a fortnight or three weeks; and away we stood + southward, crossing the line, and, leaving Gillolo on the starboard side, + we coasted the country they call New Guinea, where, in the latitude of + eight degrees south, we put in again for provisions and water, and where + we found inhabitants; but they fled from us, and were altogether + inconversable. From thence, sailing still southward, we left all behind us + that any of our charts and maps took any notice of, and went on till we + came to the latitude of seventeen degrees, the wind continuing still + north-east. + </p> + <p> + Here we made land to the westward, which, when we had kept in sight for + three days, coasting along the shore for the distance of about four + leagues, we began to fear we should find no outlet west, and so should be + obliged to go back again, and put in among the Moluccas at last; but at + length we found the land break off, and go trending away to the west sea, + seeming to be all open to the south and south-west, and a great sea came + rolling out of the south, which gave us to understand that there was no + land for a great way. + </p> + <p> + In a word, we kept on our course to the south, a little westerly, till we + passed the south tropic, where we found the winds variable; and now we + stood away fair west, and held it out for about twenty days, when we + discovered land right ahead, and on our larboard bow; we made directly to + the shore, being willing to take all advantages now for supplying + ourselves with fresh provisions and water, knowing we were now entering on + that vast unknown Indian Ocean, perhaps the greatest sea on the globe, + having, with very little interruption of islands, a continued sea quite + round the globe. + </p> + <p> + We found a good road here, and some people on shore; but when we landed, + they fled up the country, nor would they hold any correspondence with us, + nor come near us, but shot at us several times with arrows as long as + lances. We set up white flags for a truce, but they either did not or + would not understand it; on the contrary, they shot our flag of truce + through several times with their arrows, so that, in a word, we never came + near any of them. + </p> + <p> + We found good water here, though it was something difficult to get at it, + but for living creatures we could see none; for the people, if they had + any cattle, drove them all away, and showed us nothing but themselves, and + that sometimes in a threatening posture, and in number so great, that made + us suppose the island to be greater than we first imagined. It is true, + they would not come near enough for us to engage with them, at least not + openly; but they came near enough for us to see them, and, by the help of + our glasses, to see that they were clothed and armed, but their clothes + were only about their lower and middle parts; that they had long lances, + half pikes, in their hands, besides bows and arrows; that they had great + high things on their heads, made, as we believed, of feathers, and which + looked something like our grenadiers' caps in England. + </p> + <p> + When we saw them so shy that they would not come near us, our men began to + range over the island, if it was such (for we never surrounded it), to + search for cattle, and for any of the Indian plantations, for fruits or + plants; but they soon found, to their cost, that they were to use more + caution than that came to, and that they were to discover perfectly every + bush and every tree before they ventured abroad in the country; for about + fourteen of our men going farther than the rest, into a part of the + country which seemed to be planted, as they thought, for it did but seem + so, only I think it was overgrown with canes, such as we make our cane + chairs with—I say, venturing too far, they were suddenly attacked + with a shower of arrows from almost every side of them, as they thought, + out of the tops of the trees. + </p> + <p> + They had nothing to do but to fly for it, which, however, they could not + resolve on, till five of them were wounded; nor had they escaped so, if + one of them had not been so much wiser or thoughtfuller than the rest, as + to consider, that though they could not see the enemy, so as to shoot at + them, yet perhaps the noise of their shot might terrify them, and that + they should rather fire at a venture. Accordingly, ten of them faced + about, and fired at random anywhere among the canes. + </p> + <p> + The noise and the fire not only terrified the enemy, but, as they + believed, their shot had luckily hit some of them; for they found not only + that the arrows, which came thick among them before, ceased, but they + heard the Indians halloo, after their way, to one another, and make a + strange noise, more uncouth and inimitably strange than any they had ever + heard, more like the howling and barking of wild creatures in the woods + than like the voice of men, only that sometimes they seemed to speak + words. + </p> + <p> + They observed also, that this noise of the Indians went farther and + farther off, so that they were satisfied the Indians fled away, except on + one side, where they heard a doleful groaning and howling, and where it + continued a good while, which they supposed was from some or other of them + being wounded, and howling by reason of their wounds; or killed, and + others howling over them: but our men had enough of making discoveries; so + they did not trouble themselves to look farther, but resolved to take this + opportunity to retreat. But the worst of their adventure was to come; for + as they came back, they passed by a prodigious great trunk of an old tree; + what tree it was, they said, they did not know, but it stood like an old + decayed oak in a park, where the keepers in England take a stand, as they + call it, to shoot a deer; and it stood just under the steep side of a + great rock, or hill, that our people could not see what was beyond it. + </p> + <p> + As they came by this tree, they were of a sudden shot at, from the top of + the tree, with seven arrows and three lances, which, to our great grief, + killed two of our men, and wounded three more. This was the more + surprising, because, being without any defence, and so near the trees, + they expected more lances and arrows every moment; nor would flying do + them any service, the Indians being, as appeared, very good marksmen. In + this extremity, they had happily this presence of mind, viz., to run close + to the tree, and stand, as it were, under it; so that those above could + not come at, or see them, to throw their lances at them. This succeeded, + and gave them time to consider what to do; they knew their enemies and + murderers were above; they heard them talk, and those above knew those + were below; but they below were obliged to keep close for fear of their + lances from above. At length, one of our men, looking a little more + strictly than the rest, thought he saw the head of one of the Indians just + over a dead limb of the tree, which, it seems, the creature sat upon. One + man immediately fired, and levelled his piece so true that the shot went + through the fellow's head; and down he fell out of the tree immediately, + and came upon the ground with such force, with the height of his fall, + that if he had not been killed with the shot, he would certainly have been + killed with dashing his body against the ground. + </p> + <p> + This so frightened them, that, besides the howling noise they made in the + tree, our men heard a strange clutter of them in the body of the tree, + from whence they concluded they had made the tree hollow, and were got to + hide themselves there. Now, had this been the case, they were secure + enough from our men, for it was impossible any of our men could get up the + tree on the outside, there being no branches to climb by; and, to shoot at + the tree, that they tried several times to no purpose, for the tree was so + thick that no shot would enter it. They made no doubt, however, but that + they had their enemies in a trap, and that a small siege would either + bring them down, tree and all, or starve them out; so they resolved to + keep their post, and send to us for help. Accordingly, two of them came + away to us for more hands, and particularly desired that some of our + carpenters might come with tools, to help to cut down the tree, or at + least to cut down other wood and set fire to it; and that, they concluded, + would not fail to bring them out. + </p> + <p> + Accordingly, our men went like a little army, and with mighty preparations + for an enterprise, the like of which has scarce been ever heard, to form + the siege of a great tree. However, when they came there, they found the + task difficult enough, for the old trunk was indeed a very great one, and + very tall, being at least two-and-twenty feet high, with seven old limbs + standing out every way from the top, but decayed, and very few leaves, if + any, left on it. + </p> + <p> + William the Quaker, whose curiosity led him to go among the rest, proposed + that they should make a ladder, and get upon the top, and then throw + wild-fire into the tree, and smoke them out. Others proposed going back, + and getting a great gun out of the ship, which would split the tree in + pieces with the iron bullets; others, that they should cut down a great + deal of wood, and pile it up round the tree, and set it on fire, and burn + the tree, and the Indians in it. + </p> + <p> + These consultations took up our people no less than two or three days, in + all which time they heard nothing of the supposed garrison within this + wooden castle, nor any noise within. William's project was first gone + about, and a large strong ladder was made, to scale this wooden tower; and + in two or three hours' time it would have been ready to mount, when, on a + sudden, they heard the noise of the Indians in the body of the tree again, + and a little after, several of them appeared at the top of the tree, and + threw some lances down at our men; one of which struck one of our seamen + a-top of the shoulder, and gave him such a desperate wound, that the + surgeons not only had a great deal of difficulty to cure him, but the poor + man endured such horrible torture, that we all said they had better have + killed him outright. However, he was cured at last, though he never + recovered the perfect use of his arm, the lance having cut some of the + tendons on the top of the arm, near the shoulder, which, as I supposed, + performed the office of motion to the limb before; so that the poor man + was a cripple all the days of his life. But to return to the desperate + rogues in the tree; our men shot at them, but did not find they had hit + them, or any of them; but as soon as ever they shot at them, they could + hear them huddle down into the trunk of the tree again, and there, to be + sure, they were safe. + </p> + <p> + Well, however, it was this which put by the project of William's ladder; + for when it was done, who would venture up among such a troop of bold + creatures as were there, and who, they supposed, were desperate by their + circumstances? And as but one man at a time could go up, they began to + think it would not do; and, indeed, I was of the opinion (for about this + time I was come to their assistance) that going up the ladder would not + do, unless it was thus, that a man should, as it were, run just up to the + top, and throw some fireworks into the tree, and come down again; and this + we did two or three times, but found no effect of it. At last, one of our + gunners made a stink-pot, as we called it, being a composition which only + smokes, but does not flame or burn; but withal the smoke of it is so + thick, and the smell of it so intolerably nauseous, that it is not to be + suffered. This he threw into the tree himself, and we waited for the + effect of it, but heard or saw nothing all that night or the next day; so + we concluded the men within were all smothered; when, on a sudden, the + next night we heard them upon the top of the tree again shouting and + hallooing like madmen. + </p> + <p> + We concluded, as anybody would, that this was to call for help, and we + resolved to continue our siege; for we were all enraged to see ourselves + so baulked by a few wild people, whom we thought we had safe in our + clutches; and, indeed, never were there so many concurring circumstances + to delude men in any case we had met with. We resolved, however, to try + another stink-pot the next night, and our engineer and gunner had got it + ready, when, hearing a noise of the enemy on the top of the tree, and in + the body of the tree, I was not willing to let the gunner go up the + ladder, which, I said, would be but to be certain of being murdered. + However, he found a medium for it, and that was to go up a few steps, and, + with a long pole in his hand, to throw it in upon the top of the tree, the + ladder being standing all this while against the top of the tree; but when + the gunner, with his machine at the top of his pole, came to the tree, + with three other men to help him, behold the ladder was gone. + </p> + <p> + This perfectly confounded us; and we now concluded the Indians in the tree + had, by this piece of negligence, taken the opportunity, and come all down + the ladder, made their escape, and had carried away the ladder with them. + I laughed most heartily at my friend William, who, as I said, had the + direction of the siege, and had set up a ladder for the garrison, as we + called them, to get down upon, and run away. But when daylight came, we + were all set to rights again; for there stood our ladder, hauled up on the + top of the tree, with about half of it in the hollow of the tree, and the + other half upright in the air. Then we began to laugh at the Indians for + fools, that they could not as well have found their way down by the + ladder, and have made their escape, as to have pulled it up by main + strength into the tree. + </p> + <p> + We then resolved upon fire, and so to put an end to the work at once, and + burn the tree and its inhabitants together; and accordingly we went to + work to cut wood, and in a few hours' time we got enough, as we thought, + together; and, piling it up round the bottom of the tree, we set it on + fire, waiting at a distance to see when, the gentlemen's quarters being + too hot for them, they would come flying out at the top. But we were quite + confounded when, on a sudden, we found the fire all put out by a great + quantity of water thrown upon it. We then thought the devil must be in + them, to be sure. Says William, "This is certainly the cunningest piece of + Indian engineering that ever was heard of; and there can be but one thing + more to guess at, besides witchcraft and dealing with the devil, which I + believe not one word of," says he; "and that must be, that this is an + artificial tree, or a natural tree artificially made hollow down into the + earth, through root and all; and that these creatures have an artificial + cavity underneath it, quite into the hill, or a way to go through, and + under the hill, to some other place; and where that other place is, we + know not; but if it be not our own fault, I'll find the place, and follow + them into it, before I am two days older." He then called the carpenters, + to know of them if they had any large saws that would cut through the + body; and they told him they had no saws that were long enough, nor could + men work into such a monstrous old stump in a great while; but that they + would go to work with it with their axes, and undertake to cut it down in + two days, and stock up the root of it in two more. But William was for + another way, which proved much better than all this; for he was for silent + work, that, if possible, he might catch some of the fellows in it. So he + sets twelve men to it with large augers, to bore great holes into the side + of the tree, to go almost through, but not quite through; which holes were + bored without noise, and when they were done he filled them all with + gunpowder, stopping strong plugs, bolted crossways, into the holes, and + then boring a slanting hole, of a less size, down into the greater hole, + all of which were filled with powder, and at once blown up. When they took + fire, they made such a noise, and tore and split up the tree in so many + places, and in such a manner, that we could see plainly such another blast + would demolish it; and so it did. Thus at the second time we could, at two + or three places, put our hands in them, and discovered a cheat, namely, + that there was a cave or hole dug into the earth, from or through the + bottom of the hollow, and that it had communication with another cave + farther in, where we heard the voices of several of the wild folks, + calling and talking to one another. + </p> + <p> + When we came thus far we had a great mind to get at them; and William + desired that three men might be given him with hand-grenadoes; and he + promised to go down first, and boldly he did so; for William, to give him + his due, had the heart of a lion. + </p> + <p> + They had pistols in their hands, and swords by their sides; but, as they + had taught the Indians before by their stink-pots, the Indians returned + them in their own kind; for they made such a smoke come up out of the + entrance into the cave or hollow, that William and his three men were glad + to come running out of the cave, and out of the tree too, for mere want of + breath; and indeed they were almost stifled. + </p> + <p> + Never was a fortification so well defended, or assailants so many ways + defeated. We were now for giving it over, and particularly I called + William, and told him I could not but laugh to see us spinning out our + time here for nothing; that I could not imagine what we were doing; that + it was certain that the rogues that were in it were cunning to the last + degree, and it would vex anybody to be so baulked by a few naked ignorant + fellows; but still it was not worth our while to push it any further, nor + was there anything that I knew of to be got by the conquest when it was + made, so that I thought it high time to give it over. + </p> + <p> + William acknowledged what I said was just, and that there was nothing but + our curiosity to be gratified in this attempt; and though, as he said, he + was very desirous to have searched into the thing, yet he would not insist + upon it; so we resolved to quit it and come away, which we did. However, + William said before we went he would have this satisfaction of them, viz., + to burn down the tree and stop up the entrance into the cave. And while + doing this the gunner told him he would have one satisfaction of the + rogues; and this was, that he would make a mine of it, and see which way + it had vent. Upon this he fetched two barrels of powder out of the ships, + and placed them in the inside of the hollow of the cave, as far in as he + durst go to carry them, and then filling up the mouth of the cave where + the tree stood, and ramming it sufficiently hard, leaving only a pipe or + touch-hole, he gave fire to it, and stood at a distance to see which way + it would operate, when on a sudden he found the force of the powder burst + its way out among some bushes on the other side the little hill I + mentioned, and that it came roaring out there as out of the mouth of a + cannon. Immediately running thither, we saw the effects of the powder. + </p> + <p> + First, we saw that there was the other mouth of the cave, which the powder + had so torn and opened, that the loose earth was so fallen in again that + nothing of shape could be discerned; but there we saw what was become of + the garrison of the Indians, too, who had given us all this trouble, for + some of them had no arms, some no legs, some no head; some lay half buried + in the rubbish of the mine—that is to say, in the loose earth that + fell in; and, in short, there was a miserable havoc made in them all; for + we had good reason to believe not one of them that were in the inside + could escape, but rather were shot out of the mouth of the cave, like a + bullet out of a gun. + </p> + <p> + We had now our full satisfaction of the Indians; but, in short, this was a + losing voyage, for we had two men killed, one quite crippled, and five + more wounded; we spent two barrels of powder, and eleven days' time, and + all to get the understanding how to make an Indian mine, or how to keep + garrison in a hollow tree; and with this wit, bought at this dear price, + we came away, having taken in some fresh water, but got no fresh + provisions. + </p> + <p> + We then considered what we should do to get back again to Madagascar. We + were much about the latitude of the Cape of Good Hope, but had such a very + long run, and were neither sure of meeting with fair winds nor with any + land in the way, that we knew not what to think of it. William was our + last resort in this case again, and he was very plain with us. "Friend," + says he to Captain Wilmot, "what occasion hast thou to run the venture of + starving, merely for the pleasure of saying thou hast been where nobody + has been before? There are a great many places nearer home, of which thou + mayest say the same thing at less expense. I see no occasion thou hast of + keeping thus far south any longer than till you are sure you are to the + west end of Java and Sumatra; and then thou mayest stand away north + towards Ceylon, and the coast of Coromandel and Madras, where thou mayest + get both fresh water and fresh provisions; and to that part it is likely + we may hold out well enough with the stores we have already." + </p> + <p> + This was wholesome advice, and such as was not to be slighted; so we stood + away to the west, keeping between the latitude of 31 and 35, and had very + good weather and fair winds for about ten days' sail; by which time, by + our reckoning, we were clear of the isles, and might run away to the + north; and if we did not fall in with Ceylon, we should at least go into + the great deep Bay of Bengal. + </p> + <p> + But we were out in our reckoning a great deal; for, when we had stood due + north for about fifteen or sixteen degrees, we met with land again on our + starboard bow, about three leagues' distance; so we came to an anchor + about half a league from it, and manned out our boats to see what sort of + a country it was. We found it a very good one; fresh water easy to come + at, but no cattle that we could see, or inhabitants; and we were very shy + of searching too far after them, lest we should make such another journey + as we did last; so that we let rambling alone, and chose rather to take + what we could find, which was only a few wild mangoes, and some plants of + several kinds, which we knew not the names of. + </p> + <p> + We made no stay here, but put to sea again, N.W. by N., but had little + wind for a fortnight more, when we made land again; and standing in with + the shore, we were surprised to find ourselves on the south shore of Java; + and just as we were coming to an anchor we saw a boat, carrying Dutch + colours, sailing along-shore. We were not solicitous to speak with them, + or any other of their nation, but left it indifferent to our people, when + they went on shore, to see the Dutchmen or not to see them; our business + was to get provisions, which, indeed, by this time were very short with + us. + </p> + <p> + We resolved to go on shore with our boats in the most convenient place we + could find, and to look out a proper harbour to bring the ship into, + leaving it to our fate whether we should meet with friends or enemies; + resolving, however, not to stay any considerable time, at least not long + enough to have expresses sent across the island to Batavia, and for ships + to come round from thence to attack us. + </p> + <p> + We found, according to our desire, a very good harbour, where we rode in + seven fathom water, well defended from the weather, whatever might happen; + and here we got fresh provisions, such as good hogs and some cows; and + that we might lay in a little store, we killed sixteen cows, and pickled + and barrelled up the flesh as well as we could be supposed to do in the + latitude of eight degrees from the line. + </p> + <p> + We did all this in about five days, and filled our casks with water; and + the last boat was coming off with herbs and roots, we being unmoored, and + our fore-topsail loose for sailing, when we spied a large ship to the + northward, bearing down directly upon us. We knew not what she might be, + but concluded the worst, and made all possible haste to get our anchor up, + and get under sail, that we might be in a readiness to see what she had to + say to us, for we were under no great concern for one ship, but our notion + was, that we should be attacked by three or four together. + </p> + <p> + By the time we had got up our anchor and the boat was stowed, the ship was + within a league of us, and, as we thought, bore down to engage us; so we + spread our black flag, or ancient, on the poop, and the bloody flag at the + top-mast-head, and having made a clear ship, we stretched away to the + westward, to get the wind of him. + </p> + <p> + They had, it seems, quite mistaken us before, expecting nothing of an + enemy or a pirate in those seas; and, not doubting but we had been one of + their own ships, they seemed to be in some confusion when they found their + mistake, so they immediately hauled upon a wind on the other tack, and + stood edging in for the shore, towards the easternmost part of the island. + Upon this we tacked, and stood after him with all the sail we could, and + in two hours came almost within gunshot. Though they crowded all the sail + they could lay on, there was no remedy but to engage us, and they soon saw + their inequality of force. We fired a gun for them to bring to; so they + manned out their boat, and sent to us with a flag of truce. We sent back + the boat, but with this answer to the captain, that he had nothing to do + but to strike and bring his ship to an anchor under our stern, and come on + board us himself, when he should know our demands; but that, however, + since he had not yet put us to the trouble of forcing him, which we saw we + were able to do, we assured them that the captain should return again in + safety, and all his men, and that, supplying us with such things as we + should demand, his ship should not be plundered. They went back with this + message, and it was some time after they were on board before they struck, + which made us begin to think they refused it; so we fired a shot, and in a + few minutes more we perceived their boat put off; and as soon as the boat + put off the ship struck and came to an anchor, as was directed. + </p> + <p> + When the captain came on board, we demanded an account of their cargo, + which was chiefly bales of goods from Bengal for Bantam. We told them our + present want was provisions, which they had no need of, being just at the + end of their voyage; and that, if they would send their boat on shore with + ours, and procure us six-and-twenty head of black cattle, threescore hogs, + a quantity of brandy and arrack, and three hundred bushels of rice, we + would let them go free. + </p> + <p> + As to the rice, they gave us six hundred bushels, which they had actually + on board, together with a parcel shipped upon freight. Also, they gave us + thirty middling casks of very good arrack, but beef and pork they had + none. However, they went on shore with our men, and bought eleven bullocks + and fifty hogs, which were pickled up for our occasion; and upon the + supplies of provision from shore, we dismissed them and their ship. + </p> + <p> + We lay here several days before we could furnish ourselves with the + provisions agreed for, and some of the men fancied the Dutchmen were + contriving our destruction; but they were very honest, and did what they + could to furnish the black cattle, but found it impossible to supply so + many. So they came and told us ingenuously, that, unless we could stay a + while longer, they could get no more oxen or cows than those eleven, with + which we were obliged to be satisfied, taking the value of them in other + things, rather than stay longer there. On our side, we were punctual with + them in observing the conditions we had agreed on; nor would we let any of + our men so much as go on board them, or suffer any of their men to come on + board us; for, had any of our men gone on board, nobody could have + answered for their behaviour, any more than if they had been on shore in + an enemy's country. + </p> + <p> + We were now victualled for our voyage; and, as we mattered not purchase, + we went merrily on for the coast of Ceylon, where we intended to touch, to + get fresh water again, and more provisions; and we had nothing material + offered in this part of the voyage, only that we met with contrary winds, + and were above a month in the passage. + </p> + <p> + We put in upon the south coast of the island, desiring to have as little + to do with the Dutch as we could; and as the Dutch were lords of the + country as to commerce, so they are more so of the sea-coast, where they + have several forts, and, in particular, have all the cinnamon, which is + the trade of that island. + </p> + <p> + We took in fresh water here, and some provisions, but did not much trouble + ourselves about laying in any stores, our beef and hogs, which we got at + Java, being not yet all gone by a good deal. We had a little skirmish on + shore here with some of the people of the island, some of our men having + been a little too familiar with the homely ladies of the country; for + homely, indeed, they were, to such a degree, that if our men had not had + good stomachs that way, they would scarce have touched any of them. + </p> + <p> + I could never fully get it out of our men what they did, they were so true + to one another in their wickedness, but I understood in the main, that it + was some barbarous thing they had done, and that they had like to have + paid dear for it, for the men resented it to the last degree, and gathered + in such numbers about them, that, had not sixteen more of our men, in + another boat, come all in the nick of time, just to rescue our first men, + who were but eleven, and so fetch them off by main force, they had been + all cut off, the inhabitants being no less than two or three hundred, + armed with darts and lances, the usual weapons of the country, and which + they are very dexterous at the throwing, even so dexterous that it was + scarce credible; and had our men stood to fight them, as some of them were + bold enough to talk of, they had been all overwhelmed and killed. As it + was, seventeen of our men were wounded, and some of them very dangerously. + But they were more frighted than hurt too, for every one of them gave + themselves over for dead men, believing the lances were poisoned. But + William was our comfort here too; for, when two of our surgeons were of + the same opinion, and told the men foolishly enough that they would die, + William cheerfully went to work with them, and cured them all but one, who + rather died by drinking some arrack punch than of his wound; the excess of + drinking throwing him into a fever. + </p> + <p> + We had enough of Ceylon, though some of our people were for going ashore + again, sixty or seventy men together, to be revenged; but William + persuaded them against it; and his reputation was so great among the men, + as well as with us that were commanders, that he could influence them more + than any of us. + </p> + <p> + They were mighty warm upon their revenge, and they would go on shore, and + destroy five hundred of them. "Well," says William, "and suppose you do, + what are you the better?" "Why, then," says one of them, speaking for the + rest, "we shall have our satisfaction." "Well, and what will you be the + better for that?" says William. They could then say nothing to that. + "Then," says William, "if I mistake not, your business is money; now, I + desire to know, if you conquer and kill two or three thousand of these + poor creatures, they have no money, pray what will you get? They are poor + naked wretches; what shall you gain by them? But then," says William, + "perhaps, in doing this, you may chance to lose half-a-score of your own + company, as it is very probable you may. Pray, what gain is in it? and + what account can you give the captain for his lost men?" In short, William + argued so effectually, that he convinced them that it was mere murder to + do so; and that the men had a right to their own, and that they had no + right to take them away; that it was destroying innocent men, who had + acted no otherwise than as the laws of nature dictated; and that it would + be as much murder to do so, as to meet a man on the highway, and kill him, + for the mere sake of it, in cold blood, not regarding whether he had done + any wrong to us or no. + </p> + <p> + These reasons prevailed with them at last, and they were content to go + away, and leave them as they found them. In the first skirmish they killed + between sixty and seventy men, and wounded a great many more; but they had + nothing, and our people got nothing by it, but the loss of one man's life, + and the wounding sixteen more, as above. + </p> + <p> + But another accident brought us to a necessity of further business with + these people, and indeed we had like to have put an end to our lives and + adventures all at once among them; for, about three days after our putting + out to sea from the place where we had that skirmish, we were attacked by + a violent storm of wind from the south, or rather a hurricane of wind from + all the points southward, for it blew in a most desperate and furious + manner from the S.E. to the S.W., one minute at one point, and then + instantly turning about again to another point, but with the same + violence; nor were we able to work the ship in that condition, so that the + ship I was in split three top-sails, and at last brought the main-top-mast + by the board; and, in a word, we were once or twice driven right ashore; + and one time, had not the wind shifted the very moment it did, we had been + dashed in a thousand pieces upon a great ledge of rocks which lay off + about half-a-league from the shore; but, as I have said, the wind shifting + very often, and at that time coming to the E.S.E., we stretched off, and + got above a league more sea-room in half-an-hour. After that, it blew with + some fury S.W. by S., then S.W. by W., and put us back again a great way + to the eastward of the ledge of rocks, where we found a great opening + between the rocks and the land, and endeavoured to come to an anchor + there, but we found there was no ground fit to anchor in, and that we + should lose our anchors, there being nothing but rocks. We stood through + the opening, which held about four leagues. The storm continued, and now + we found a dreadful foul shore, and knew not what course to take. We + looked out very narrowly for some river or creek or bay, where we might + run in, and come to an anchor, but found none a great while. At length we + saw a great headland lie out far south into the sea, and that to such a + length, that, in short, we saw plainly that, if the wind held where it + was, we could not weather it, so we ran in as much under the lee of the + point as we could, and came to an anchor in about twelve fathom water. + </p> + <p> + But the wind veering again in the night, and blowing exceedingly hard, our + anchors came home, and the ship drove till the rudder struck against the + ground; and had the ship gone half her length farther she had been lost, + and every one of us with her. But our sheet-anchor held its own, and we + heaved in some of the cable, to get clear of the ground we had struck + upon. It was by this only cable that we rode it out all night; and towards + morning we thought the wind abated a little; and it was well for us that + it was so, for, in spite of what our sheet-anchor did for us, we found the + ship fast aground in the morning, to our very great surprise and + amazement. + </p> + <p> + When the tide was out, though the water here ebbed away, the ship lay + almost dry upon a bank of hard sand, which never, I suppose, had any ship + upon it before. The people of the country came down in great numbers to + look at us and gaze, not knowing what we were, but gaping at us as at a + great sight or wonder at which they were surprised, and knew not what to + do. + </p> + <p> + I have reason to believe that upon the sight they immediately sent an + account of a ship being there, and of the condition we were in, for the + next day there appeared a great man; whether it was their king or no I + know not, but he had abundance of men with him, and some with long + javelins in their hands as long as half-pikes; and these came all down to + the water's edge, and drew up in a very good order, just in our view. They + stood near an hour without making any motion; and then there came near + twenty of them, with a man before them carrying a white flag. They came + forward into the water as high as their waists, the sea not going so high + as before, for the wind was abated, and blew off the shore. + </p> + <p> + The man made a long oration to us, as we could see by his gestures; and we + sometimes heard his voice, but knew not one word he said. William, who was + always useful to us, I believe was here again the saving of all our lives. + The case was this: The fellow, or what I might call him, when his speech + was done, gave three great screams (for I know not what else to say they + were), then lowered his white flag three times, and then made three + motions to us with his arm to come to him. + </p> + <p> + I acknowledge that I was for manning out the boat and going to them, but + William would by no means allow me. He told me we ought to trust nobody; + that, if they were barbarians, and under their own government, we might be + sure to be all murdered; and, if they were Christians, we should not fare + much better, if they knew who we were; that it was the custom of the + Malabars to betray all people that they could get into their hands, and + that these were some of the same people; and that, if we had any regard to + our own safety, we should not go to them by any means. I opposed him a + great while, and told him I thought he used to be always right, but that + now I thought he was not; that I was no more for running needless risks + than he or any one else; but I thought all nations in the world, even the + most savage people, when they held out a flag of peace, kept the offer of + peace made by that signal very sacredly; and I gave him several examples + of it in the history of my African travels, which I have here gone through + in the beginning of this work, and that I could not think these people + worse than some of them. And, besides, I told him our case seemed to be + such that we must fall into somebody's hands or other, and that we had + better fall into their hands by a friendly treaty than by a forced + submission, nay, though they had indeed a treacherous design; and + therefore I was for a parley with them. + </p> + <p> + "Well, friend," says William very gravely, "if thou wilt go I cannot help + it; I shall only desire to take my last leave of thee at parting, for, + depend upon it, thou wilt never see us again. Whether we in the ship may + come off any better at last I cannot resolve thee; but this I will answer + for, that we will not give up our lives idly, and in cool blood, as thou + art going to do; we will at least preserve ourselves as long as we can, + and die at last like men, not like fools, trepanned by the wiles of a few + barbarians." + </p> + <p> + William spoke this with so much warmth, and yet with so much assurance of + our fate, that I began to think a little of the risk I was going to run. I + had no more mind to be murdered than he; and yet I could not for my life + be so faint-hearted in the thing as he. Upon which I asked him if he had + any knowledge of the place, or had ever been there. He said, No. Then I + asked him if he had heard or read anything about the people of this + island, and of their way of treating any Christians that had fallen into + their hands; and he told me he had heard of one, and he would tell me the + story afterward. His name, he said, was Knox, commander of an East India + ship, who was driven on shore, just as we were, upon this island of + Ceylon, though he could not say it was at the same place, or whereabouts; + that he was beguiled by the barbarians, and enticed to come on shore, just + as we were invited to do at that time; and that, when they had him, they + surrounded him, and eighteen or twenty of his men, and never suffered them + to return, but kept them prisoners, or murdered them, he could not tell + which; but they were carried away up into the country, separated from one + another, and never heard of afterwards, except the captain's son, who + miraculously made his escape, after twenty years' slavery. + </p> + <p> + I had no time then to ask him to give the full story of this Knox, much + less to hear him tell it me; but, as it is usual in such cases, when one + begins to be a little touched, I turned short with him. "Why then, friend + William," said I, "what would you have us do? You see what condition we + are in, and what is before us; something must be done, and that + immediately." "Why," says William, "I'll tell thee what thou shalt do; + first, cause a white flag to be hanged out, as they do to us, and man out + the longboat and pinnace with as many men as they can well stow, to handle + their arms, and let me go with them, and thou shalt see what we will do. + If I miscarry, thou mayest be safe; and I will also tell thee, that if I + do miscarry, it shall be my own fault, and thou shalt learn wit by my + folly." + </p> + <p> + I knew not what to reply to him at first; but, after some pause, I said, + "William, William, I am as loath you should be lost as you are that I + should; and if there be any danger, I desire you may no more fall into it + than I. Therefore, if you will, let us all keep in the ship, fare alike, + and take our fate together." + </p> + <p> + "No, no," says William, "there's no danger in the method I propose; thou + shalt go with me, if thou thinkest fit. If thou pleasest but to follow the + measures that I shall resolve on, depend upon it, though we will go off + from the ships, we will not a man of us go any nearer them than within + call to talk with them. Thou seest they have no boats to come off to us; + but," says he, "I rather desire thou wouldst take my advice, and manage + the ships as I shall give the signal from the boat, and let us concert + that matter together before we go off." + </p> + <p> + Well, I found William had his measures in his head all laid beforehand, + and was not at a loss what to do at all; so I told him he should be + captain for this voyage, and we would be all of us under his orders, which + I would see observed to a tittle. + </p> + <p> + Upon this conclusion of our debates, he ordered four-and-twenty men into + the long-boat, and twelve men into the pinnace, and the sea being now + pretty smooth, they went off, being all very well armed. Also he ordered + that all the guns of the great ship, on the side which lay next the shore, + should be loaded with musket-balls, old nails, stubs, and such-like pieces + of old iron, lead, and anything that came to hand; and that we should + prepare to fire as soon as ever we saw them lower the white flag and hoist + up a red one in the pinnace. + </p> + <p> + With these measures fixed between us, they went off towards the shore, + William in the pinnace with twelve men, and the long-boat coming after him + with four-and-twenty more, all stout resolute fellows, and very well + armed. They rowed so near the shore as that they might speak to one + another, carrying a white flag, as the other did, and offering a parley. + The brutes, for such they were, showed themselves very courteous; but + finding we could not understand them, they fetched an old Dutchman, who + had been their prisoner many years, and set him to speak to us. The sum + and substance of his speech was, that the king of the country had sent his + general down to know who we were, and what our business was. William stood + up in the stern of the pinnace, and told him, that as to that, he, that + was an European, by his language and voice, might easily know what we + were, and our condition; the ship being aground upon the sand would also + tell him that our business there was that of a ship in distress; so + William desired to know what they came down for with such a multitude, and + with arms and weapons, as if they came to war with us. + </p> + <p> + He answered, they might have good reason to come down to the shore, the + country being alarmed with the appearance of ships of strangers upon the + coast; and as our vessels were full of men, and as we had guns and + weapons, the king had sent part of his military men, that, in case of any + invasion upon the country, they might be ready to defend themselves, + whatsoever might be the occasion. + </p> + <p> + "But," says he, "as you are men in distress, the king has ordered his + general, who is here also, to give you all the assistance he can, and to + invite you on shore, and receive you with all possible courtesy." Says + William, very quick upon him, "Before I give thee an answer to that, I + desire thee to tell me what thou art, for by thy speech thou art an + European." He answered presently, he was a Dutchman. "That I know well," + says William, "by thy speech; but art thou a native Dutchman of Holland, + or a native of this country, that has learned Dutch by conversing among + the Hollanders, who we know are settled upon this island?" + </p> + <p> + "No," says the old man, "I am a native of Delft, in the province of + Holland, in Europe." + </p> + <p> + "Well," says William, immediately, "but art thou a Christian or a heathen, + or what we call a renegado?" + </p> + <p> + "I am," says he, "a Christian." And so they went on, in a short dialogue, + as follows:— + </p> + <p> + <i>William</i>. Thou art a Dutchman, and a Christian, thou sayest; pray, + art thou a freeman or a servant? + </p> + <p> + <i>Dutchman</i>. I am a servant to the king here, and in his army. + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. But art thou a volunteer, or a prisoner? + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. Indeed I was a prisoner at first, but am at liberty now, and so + am a volunteer. + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. That is to say, being first a prisoner, thou hast liberty to + serve them; but art thou so at liberty that thou mayest go away, if thou + pleasest, to thine own countrymen? + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. No, I do not say so; my countrymen live a great way off, on the + north and east parts of the island, and there is no going to them without + the king's express license. + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. Well, and why dost thou not get a license to go away? + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. I have never asked for it. + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. And, I suppose, if thou didst, thou knowest thou couldst not + obtain it. + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. I cannot say much as to that; but why do you ask me all these + questions? + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. Why, my reason is good; if thou art a Christian and a prisoner, + how canst thou consent to be made an instrument to these barbarians, to + betray us into their hands, who are thy countrymen and fellow-Christians? + Is it not a barbarous thing in thee to do so? + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. How do I go about to betray you? Do I not give you an account + how the king invites you to come on shore, and has ordered you to be + treated courteously and assisted? + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. As thou art a Christian, though I doubt it much, dost thou + believe the king or the general, as thou callest it, means one word of + what he says? + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. He promises you by the mouth of his great general. + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. I don't ask thee what he promises, or by whom; but I ask thee + this: Canst thou say that thou believest he intends to perform it? + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. How can I answer that? How can I tell what he intends? + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. Thou canst tell what thou believest. + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. I cannot say but he will perform it; I believe he may. + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. Thou art but a double-tongued Christian, I doubt. Come, I'll ask + thee another question: Wilt thou say that thou believest it, and that thou + wouldst advise me to believe it, and put our lives into their hands upon + these promises? + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. I am not to be your adviser. + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. Thou art perhaps afraid to speak thy mind, because thou art in + their power. Pray, do any of them understand what thou and I say? Can they + speak Dutch? + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. No, not one of them; I have no apprehensions upon that account + at all. + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. Why, then, answer me plainly, if thou art a Christian: Is it + safe for us to venture upon their words, to put ourselves into their + hands, and come on shore? + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. You put it very home to me. Pray let me ask you another + question: Are you in any likelihood of getting your ship off, if you + refuse it? + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. Yes, yes, we shall get off the ship; now the storm is over we + don't fear it. + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. Then I cannot say it is best for you to trust them. + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. Well, it is honestly said. + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. But what shall I say to them? + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. Give them good words, as they give us. + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. What good words? + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. Why, let them tell the king that we are strangers, who were + driven on his coast by a great storm; that we thank him very kindly for + his offer of civility to us, which, if we are further distressed, we will + accept thankfully; but that at present we have no occasion to come on + shore; and besides, that we cannot safely leave the ship in the present + condition she is in; but that we are obliged to take care of her, in order + to get her off; and expect, in a tide or two more, to get her quite clear, + and at an anchor. + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. But he will expect you to come on shore, then, to visit him, and + make him some present for his civility. + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. When we have got our ship clear, and stopped the leaks, we will + pay our respects to him. + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. Nay, you may as well come to him now as then. + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. Nay, hold, friend; I did not say we would come to him then: you + talked of making him a present, that is to pay our respects to him, is it + not? + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. Well, but I will tell him that you will come on shore to him + when your ship is got off. + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. I have nothing to say to that; you may tell him what you think + fit. + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. But he will be in a great rage if I do not. + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. Who will he be in a great rage at? + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. At you. + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. What occasion have we to value that? + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. Why, he will send all his army down against you. + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. And what if they were all here just now? What dost thou suppose + they could do to us? + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. He would expect they should burn your ships and bring you all to + him. + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. Tell him, if he should try, he may catch a Tartar. + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. He has a world of men. + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. Has he any ships? + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. No, he has no ships. + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. Nor boats? + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. No, nor boats. + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. Why, what then do you think we care for his men? What canst thou + do now to us, if thou hadst a hundred thousand with thee? + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. Oh! they might set you on fire. + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. Set us a-firing, thou meanest; that they might indeed; but set + us on fire they shall not; they may try, at their peril, and we shall make + mad work with your hundred thousand men, if they come within reach of our + guns, I assure thee. + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. But what if the king gives you hostages for your safety? + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. Whom can he give but mere slaves and servants like thyself, + whose lives he no more values than we an English hound? + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. Whom do you demand for hostages? + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. Himself and your worship. + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. What would you do with him? + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. Do with him as he would do with us—cut his head off. + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. And what would you do with me? + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. Do with thee? We would carry thee home into thine own country; + and, though thou deservest the gallows, we would make a man and a + Christian of thee again, and not do by thee as thou wouldst have done by + us—betray thee to a parcel of merciless, savage pagans, that know no + God, nor how to show mercy to man. + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. You put a thought in my head that I will speak to you about + to-morrow. + </p> + <p> + Thus they went away, and William came on board, and gave us a full account + of his parley with the old Dutchman, which was very diverting, and to me + instructing; for I had abundance of reason to acknowledge William had made + a better judgment of things than I. + </p> + <p> + It was our good fortune to get our ship off that very night, and to bring + her to an anchor at about a mile and a half farther out, and in deep + water, to our great satisfaction; so that we had no need to fear the + Dutchman's king, with his hundred thousand men; and indeed we had some + sport with them the next day, when they came down, a vast prodigious + multitude of them, very few less in number, in our imagination, than a + hundred thousand, with some elephants; though, if it had been an army of + elephants, they could have done us no harm; for we were fairly at our + anchor now, and out of their reach. And indeed we thought ourselves more + out of their reach than we really were; and it was ten thousand to one + that we had not been fast aground again, for the wind blowing off shore, + though it made the water smooth where we lay, yet it blew the ebb farther + out than usual, and we could easily perceive the sand, which we touched + upon before, lay in the shape of a half-moon, and surrounded us with two + horns of it, so that we lay in the middle or centre of it, as in a round + bay, safe just as we were, and in deep water, but present death, as it + were, on the right hand and on the left, for the two horns or points of + the sand reached out beyond where our ship lay near two miles. + </p> + <p> + On that part of the sand which lay on our east side, this misguided + multitude extended themselves; and being, most of them, not above their + knees, or most of them not above ankle-deep in the water, they as it were + surrounded us on that side, and on the side of the mainland, and a little + way on the other side of the sand, standing in a half-circle, or rather + three-fifths of a circle, for about six miles in length. The other horn, + or point of the sand, which lay on our west side, being not quite so + shallow, they could not extend themselves upon it so far. + </p> + <p> + They little thought what service they had done us, and how unwittingly, + and by the greatest ignorance, they had made themselves pilots to us, + while we, having not sounded the place, might have been lost before we + were aware. It is true we might have sounded our new harbour before we had + ventured out, but I cannot say for certain whether we should or not; for + I, for my part, had not the least suspicion of what our real case was; + however, I say, perhaps, before we had weighed, we should have looked + about us a little. I am sure we ought to have done it; for, besides these + armies of human furies, we had a very leaky ship, and all our pumps could + hardly keep the water from growing upon us, and our carpenters were + overboard, working to find out and stop the wounds we had received, + heeling her first on the one side, and then on the other; and it was very + diverting to see how, when our men heeled the ship over to the side next + the wild army that stood on the east horn of the sand, they were so + amazed, between fright and joy, that it put them into a kind of confusion, + calling to one another, hallooing and skreeking, in a manner that it is + impossible to describe. + </p> + <p> + While we were doing this, for we were in a great hurry you may be sure, + and all hands at work, as well at the stopping our leaks as repairing our + rigging and sails, which had received a great deal of damage, and also in + rigging a new main-top-mast and the like;—I say, while we were doing + all this, we perceived a body of men, of near a thousand, move from that + part of the army of the barbarians that lay at the bottom of the sandy + bay, and came all along the water's edge, round the sand, till they stood + just on our broadside east, and were within about half-a-mile of us. Then + we saw the Dutchman come forward nearer to us, and all alone, with his + white flag and all his motions, just as before, and there he stood. + </p> + <p> + Our men had but just brought the ship to rights again as they came up to + our broadside, and we had very happily found out and stopped the worst and + most dangerous leak that we had, to our very great satisfaction; so I + ordered the boats to be hauled up and manned as they were the day before, + and William to go as plenipotentiary. I would have gone myself if I had + understood Dutch, but as I did not, it was to no purpose, for I should be + able to know nothing of what was said but from him at second-hand, which + might be done as well afterwards. All the instructions I pretended to give + William was, if possible, to get the old Dutchman away, and, if he could, + to make him come on board. + </p> + <p> + Well, William went just as before, and when he came within about sixty or + seventy yards of the shore, he held up his white flag as the Dutchman did, + and turning the boat's broadside to the shore, and his men lying upon + their oars, the parley or dialogue began again thus:— + </p> + <p> + <i>William</i>. Well, friend, what dost thou say to us now? + </p> + <p> + <i>Dutchman</i>. I come of the same mild errand as I did yesterday. + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. What! dost thou pretend to come of a mild errand with all these + people at thy back, and all the foolish weapons of war they bring with + them? Prithee, what dost thou mean? + </p> + <p> + <i>D</i>. The king hastens us to invite the captain and all his men to + come on shore, and has ordered all his men to show them all the civility + they can. + </p> + <p> + <i>W</i>. Well, and are all those men come to invite us ashore? + </p> + <p> + D. They will do you no hurt, if you will come on shore peaceably. + </p> + <p> + W. Well, and what dost thou think they can do to us, if we will not? + </p> + <p> + D. I would not have them do you any hurt then, neither. + </p> + <p> + W. But prithee, friend, do not make thyself fool and knave too. Dost not + thou know that we are out of fear of all thy army, and out of danger of + all that they can do? What makes thee act so simply as well as so + knavishly? + </p> + <p> + D. Why, you may think yourselves safer than you are; you do not know what + they may do to you. I can assure you they are able to do you a great deal + of harm, and perhaps burn your ship. + </p> + <p> + W. Suppose that were true, as I am sure it is false; you see we have more + ships to carry us off (pointing to the sloop). + </p> + <p> + [N.B.—Just at this time we discovered the sloop standing towards us + from the east, along the shore, at about the distance of two leagues, + which was to our particular satisfaction, she having been missing thirteen + days.] + </p> + <p> + D. We do not value that; if you had ten ships, you dare not come on shore, + with all the men you have, in a hostile way; we are too many for you. + </p> + <p> + W. Thou dost not, even in that, speak as thou meanest; and we may give + thee a trial of our hands when our friends come up to us, for thou hearest + they have discovered us. + </p> + <p> + [Just then the sloop fired five guns, which was to get news of us, for + they did not see us.] + </p> + <p> + D. Yes, I hear they fire; but I hope your ship will not fire again; for, + if they do, our general will take it for breaking the truce, and will make + the army let fly a shower of arrows at you in the boat. + </p> + <p> + W. Thou mayest be sure the ship will fire that the other ship may hear + them, but not with ball. If thy general knows no better, he may begin when + he will; but thou mayest be sure we will return it to his cost. + </p> + <p> + D. What must I do, then? + </p> + <p> + W. Do! Why, go to him, and tell him of it beforehand, then; and let him + know that the ship firing is not at him nor his men; and then come again, + and tell us what he says. + </p> + <p> + D. No; I will send to him, which will do as well. + </p> + <p> + W. Do as thou wilt, but I believe thou hadst better go thyself; for if our + men fire first, I suppose he will be in a great wrath, and it may be at + thee; for, as to his wrath at us, we tell thee beforehand we value it not. + </p> + <p> + D. You slight them too much; you know not what they may do. + </p> + <p> + W. Thou makest as if these poor savage wretches could do mighty things: + prithee, let us see what you can all do, we value it not; thou mayest set + down thy flag of truce when thou pleasest, and begin. + </p> + <p> + D. I had rather make a truce, and have you all part friends. + </p> + <p> + W. Thou art a deceitful rogue thyself, for it is plain thou knowest these + people would only persuade us on shore to entrap and surprise us; and yet + thou that art a Christian, as thou callest thyself, would have us come on + shore and put our lives into their hands who know nothing that belongs to + compassion, good usage, or good manners. How canst thou be such a villain? + </p> + <p> + D. How can you call me so? What have I done to you, and what would you + have me do? + </p> + <p> + W. Not act like a traitor, but like one that was once a Christian, and + would have been so still, if you had not been a Dutchman. + </p> + <p> + D. I know not what to do, not I. I wish I were from them; they are a + bloody people. + </p> + <p> + W. Prithee, make no difficulty of what thou shouldst do. Canst thou swim? + </p> + <p> + D. Yes, I can swim; but if I should attempt to swim off to you, I should + have a thousand arrows and javelins sticking in me before I should get to + your boat. + </p> + <p> + W. I'll bring the boat close to thee, and take thee on board in spite of + them all. We will give them but one volley, and I'll engage they will all + run away from thee. + </p> + <p> + D. You are mistaken in them, I assure you; they would immediately come all + running down to the shore, and shoot fire-arrows at you, and set your boat + and ship and all on fire about your ears. + </p> + <p> + W. We will venture that if thou wilt come off. + </p> + <p> + D. Will you use me honourably when I am among you? + </p> + <p> + W. I'll give thee my word for it, if thou provest honest. + </p> + <p> + D. Will you not make me a prisoner? + </p> + <p> + W. I will be thy surety, body for body, that thou shalt be a free man, and + go whither thou wilt, though I own to thee thou dost not deserve it. + </p> + <p> + Just at this time our ship fired three guns to answer the sloop and let + her know we saw her, who immediately, we perceived, understood it, and + stood directly for the place. But it is impossible to express the + confusion and filthy vile noise, the hurry and universal disorder, that + was among that vast multitude of people upon our firing off three guns. + They immediately all repaired to their arms, as I may call it; for to say + they put themselves into order would be saying nothing. + </p> + <p> + Upon the word of command, then, they advanced all in a body to the + seaside, and resolving to give us one volley of their fire-arms (for such + they were), immediately they saluted us with a hundred thousand of their + fire-arrows, every one carrying a little bag of cloth dipped in brimstone, + or some such thing, which, flying through the air, had nothing to hinder + it taking fire as it flew, and it generally did so. + </p> + <p> + I cannot say but this method of attacking us, by a way we had no notion + of, might give us at first some little surprise, for the number was so + great at first, that we were not altogether without apprehensions that + they might unluckily set our ship on fire, so that William resolved + immediately to row on board, and persuade us all to weigh and stand out to + sea; but there was no time for it, for they immediately let fly a volley + at the boat, and at the ship, from all parts of the vast crowd of people + which stood near the shore. Nor did they fire, as I may call it, all at + once, and so leave off; but their arrows being soon notched upon their + bows, they kept continually shooting, so that the air was full of flame. + </p> + <p> + I could not say whether they set their cotton rag on fire before they shot + the arrow, for I did not perceive they had fire with them, which, however, + it seems they had. The arrow, besides the fire it carried with it, had a + head, or a peg, as we call it, of bone; and some of sharp flint stone; and + some few of a metal, too soft in itself for metal, but hard enough to + cause it to enter, if it were a plank, so as to stick where it fell. + </p> + <p> + William and his men had notice sufficient to lie close behind their + waste-boards, which, for this very purpose, they had made so high that + they could easily sink themselves behind them, so as to defend themselves + from anything that came point-blank (as we call it) or upon a line; but + for what might fall perpendicularly out of the air they had no guard, but + took the hazard of that. At first they made as if they would row away, but + before they went they gave a volley of their fire-arms, firing at those + which stood with the Dutchman; but William ordered them to be sure to take + their aim at others, so as to miss him, and they did so. + </p> + <p> + There was no calling to them now, for the noise was so great among them + that they could hear nobody, but our men boldly rowed in nearer to them, + for they were at first driven a little off, and when they came nearer, + they fired a second volley, which put the fellows into great confusion, + and we could see from the ship that several of them were killed or + wounded. + </p> + <p> + We thought this was a very unequal fight, and therefore we made a signal + to our men to row away, that we might have a little of the sport as well + as they; but the arrows flew so thick upon them, being so near the shore, + that they could not sit to their oars, so they spread a little of their + sail, thinking they might sail along the shore, and lie behind their + waste-board; but the sail had not been spread six minutes till it had five + hundred fire-arrows shot into it and through it, and at length set it + fairly on fire; nor were our men quite out of the danger of its setting + the boat on fire, and this made them paddle and shove the boat away as + well as they could, as they lay, to get farther off. + </p> + <p> + By this time they had left us a fair mark at the whole savage army; and as + we had sheered the ship as near to them as we could, we fired among the + thickest of them six or seven times, five guns at a time, with shot, old + iron, musket-bullets, &c. + </p> + <p> + We could easily see that we made havoc among them, and killed and wounded + abundance of them, and that they were in a great surprise at it; but yet + they never offered to stir, and all this while their fire-arrows flew as + thick as before. + </p> + <p> + At last, on a sudden their arrows stopped, and the old Dutchman came + running down to the water-side all alone, with his white flag, as before, + waving it as high as he could, and making signals to our boat to come to + him again. + </p> + <p> + William did not care at first to go near him, but the man continuing to + make signals to him to come, at last William went; and the Dutchman told + him that he had been with the general, who was much mollified by the + slaughter of his men, and that now he could have anything of him. + </p> + <p> + "Anything!" says William; "what have we to do with him? Let him go about + his business, and carry his men out of gunshot, can't he?" + </p> + <p> + "Why," says the Dutchman, "but he dares not stir, nor see the king's face; + unless some of your men come on shore, he will certainly put him to + death." + </p> + <p> + "Why, then," says William, "he is a dead man; for if it were to save his + life, and the lives of all the crowd that is with him, he shall never have + one of us in his power. But I'll tell thee," said William, "how thou shalt + cheat him, and gain thy own liberty too, if thou hast any mind to see thy + own country again, and art not turned savage, and grown fond of living all + thy days among heathens and savages." + </p> + <p> + "I would be glad to do it with all my heart," says he; "but if I should + offer to swim off to you now, though they are so far from me, they shoot + so true that they would kill me before I got half-way." + </p> + <p> + "But," says William, "I'll tell thee how thou shalt come with his consent. + Go to him, and tell him I have offered to carry you on board, to try if + you could persuade the captain to come on shore, and that I would not + hinder him if he was willing to venture." + </p> + <p> + The Dutchman seemed in a rapture at the very first word. "I'll do it," + says he; "I am persuaded he will give me leave to come." + </p> + <p> + Away he runs, as if he had a glad message to carry, and tells the general + that William had promised, if he would go on board the ship with him, he + would persuade the captain to return with him. The general was fool enough + to give him orders to go, and charged him not to come back without the + captain; which he readily promised, and very honestly might. + </p> + <p> + So they took him in, and brought him on board, and he was as good as his + word to them, for he never went back to them any more; and the sloop being + come to the mouth of the inlet where we lay, we weighed and set sail; but, + as we went out, being pretty near the shore, we fired three guns, as it + were among them, but without any shot, for it was of no use to us to hurt + any more of them. After we had fired, we gave them a cheer, as the seamen + call it; that is to say, we hallooed, at them, by way of triumph, and so + carried off their ambassador. How it fared with their general, we know + nothing of that. + </p> + <p> + This passage, when I related it to a friend of mine, after my return from + those rambles, agreed so well with his relation of what happened to one Mr + Knox, an English captain, who some time ago was decoyed on shore by these + people, that it could not but be very much to my satisfaction to think + what mischief we had all escaped; and I think it cannot but be very + profitable to record the other story (which is but short) with my own, to + show whoever reads this what it was I avoided, and prevent their falling + into the like, if they have to do with the perfidious people of Ceylon. + The relation is as follows:— + </p> + <p> + The island of Ceylon being inhabited for the greatest part by barbarians, + which will not allow any trade or commerce with any European nation, and + inaccessible by any travellers, it will be convenient to relate the + occasion how the author of this story happened to go into this island, and + what opportunities he had of being fully acquainted with the people, their + laws and customs, that so we may the better depend upon the account, and + value it as it deserves, for the rarity as well as the truth of it; and + both these the author gives us a brief relation of in this manner. His + words are as follows: + </p> + <p> + In the year 1657, the <i>Anne</i> frigate, of London, Captain Robert Knox, + commander, on the 21st day of January, set sail out of the Downs, in the + service of the honourable East India Company of England, bound for Fort St + George, upon the coast of Coromandel, to trade for one year from port to + port in India; which having performed, as he was lading his goods to + return for England, being in the road of Masulipatam, on the 19th of + November 1659, there happened such a mighty storm, that in it several + ships were cast away, and he was forced to cut his mainmast by the board, + which so disabled the ship, that he could not proceed in his voyage; + whereupon Cottiar, in the island of Ceylon, being a very commodious bay, + fit for her present distress, Thomas Chambers, Esq., since Sir Thomas + Chambers, the agent at Fort St George, ordered that the ship should take + in some cloth and India merchants belonging to Porto Novo, who might trade + there while she lay to set her mast, and repair the other damages + sustained by the storm. At her first coming thither, after the Indian + merchants were set ashore, the captain and his men were very jealous of + the people of that place, by reason the English never had any commerce or + dealing with them; but after they had been there twenty days, going ashore + and returning again at pleasure, without any molestation, they began to + lay aside all suspicious thoughts of the people that dwelt thereabouts, + who had kindly entertained them for their money. + </p> + <p> + By this time the king of the country had notice of their arrival, and, not + being acquainted with their intents, he sent down a dissauva, or general, + with an army, to them, who immediately sent a messenger to the captain on + board, to desire him to come ashore to him, pretending a letter from the + king. The captain saluted the message with firing of guns, and ordered his + son, Robert Knox, and Mr John Loveland, merchant of the ship, to go + ashore, and wait on him. When they were come before him, he demanded who + they were, and how long they should stay. They told him they were + Englishmen, and not to stay above twenty or thirty days, and desired + permission to trade in his Majesty's port. His answer was, that the king + was glad to hear the English were come into his country, and had commanded + him to assist them as they should desire, and had sent a letter to be + delivered to none but the captain himself. They were then twelve miles + from the seaside, and therefore replied, that the captain could not leave + his ship to come so far; but if he pleased to go down to the seaside, the + captain would wait on him to receive the letter; whereupon the dissauva + desired them to stay that day, and on the morrow he would go with them; + which, rather than displease him in so small a matter, they consented to. + In the evening the dissauva sent a present to the captain of cattle and + fruits, &c., which, being carried all night by the messengers, was + delivered to him in the morning, who told him withal that his men were + coming down with the dissauva, and desired his company on shore against + his coming, having a letter from the king to deliver into his own hand. + The captain, mistrusting nothing, came on shore with his boat, and, + sitting under a tamarind tree, waited for the dissauva. In the meantime + the native soldiers privately surrounded him and the seven men he had with + him, and seizing them, carried them to meet the dissauva, bearing the + captain on a hammock on their shoulders. + </p> + <p> + The next day the long-boat's crew, not knowing what had happened, came on + shore to cut down a tree to make cheeks for the mainmast, and were made + prisoners after the same manner, though with more violence, because they + were more rough with them, and made resistance; yet they were not brought + to the captain and his company, but quartered in another house in the same + town. + </p> + <p> + The dissauva having thus gotten two boats and eighteen men, his next care + was to gain the ship; and to that end, telling the captain that he and his + men were only detained because the king intended to send letters and a + present to the English nation by him, desired he would send some men on + board his ship to order her to stay; and because the ship was in danger of + being fired by the Dutch if she stayed long in the bay, to bring her up + the river. The captain did not approve of the advice, but did not dare to + own his dislike; so he sent his son with the order, but with a solemn + conjuration to return again, which he accordingly did, bringing a letter + from the company in the ship, that they would not obey the captain, nor + any other, in this matter, but were resolved to stand on their own + defence. This letter satisfied the dissauva, who thereupon gave the + captain leave to write for what he would have brought from the ship, + pretending that he had not the king's order to release them, though it + would suddenly come. + </p> + <p> + The captain seeing he was held in suspense, and the season of the year + spending for the ship to proceed on her voyage to some place, sent order + to Mr John Burford, the chief mate, to take charge of the ship, and set + sail to Porto Novo, from whence they came, and there to follow the agent's + order. + </p> + <p> + And now began that long and sad captivity they all along feared. The ship + being gone, the dissauva was called up to the king, and they were kept + under guards a while, till a special order came from the king to part + them, and put one in a town, for the conveniency of their maintenance, + which the king ordered to be at the charge of the country. On September + 16, 1660, the captain and his son were placed in a town called Bonder + Coswat, in the country of Hotcurly [? Hewarrisse Korle], distant from the + city of Kandy northward thirty miles, and from the rest of the English a + full day's journey. Here they had their provisions brought them twice a + day, without money, as much as they could eat, and as good as the country + yielded. The situation of the place was very pleasant and commodious; but + that year that part of the land was very sickly by agues and fevers, of + which many died. The captain and his son after some time were visited with + the common distemper, and the captain, being also loaded with grief for + his deplorable condition, languished more than three months, and then + died, February 9, 1661. + </p> + <p> + Robert Knox, his son, was now left desolate, sick, and in captivity, + having none to comfort him but God, who is the Father of the fatherless, + and hears the groans of such as are in captivity; being alone to enter + upon a long scene of misery and calamity; oppressed with weakness of body + and grief of soul for the loss of his father, and the remediless trouble + that he was like to endure; and the first instance of it was in the burial + of his father, for he sent his black boy to the people of the town, to + desire their assistance, because they understood not their language; but + they sent him only a rope, to drag him by the neck into the woods, and + told him that they would offer him no other help, unless he would pay for + it. This barbarous answer increased his trouble for his father's death, + that now he was like to lie unburied, and be made a prey to the wild + beasts in the woods; for the ground was very hard, and they had not tools + to dig with, and so it was impossible for them to bury him; and having a + small matter of money left him, viz., a pagoda and a gold ring, he hired a + man, and so buried him in as decent a manner as their condition would + permit. + </p> + <p> + His dead father being thus removed out of his sight, but his ague + continuing, he was reduced very low, partly by sorrow and partly by his + disease. All the comfort he had was to go into the wood and fields with a + book, either the "Practice of Piety" or Mr Rogers's "Seven Treatises," + which were the only two books he had, and meditate and read, and sometimes + pray; in which his anguish made him often invert Elijah's petition,—that + he might die, because his life was a burden to him. God, though He was + pleased to prolong his life, yet He found a way to lighten his grief, by + removing his ague, and granting him a desire which above all things was + acceptable to him. He had read his two books over so often that he had + both almost by heart; and though they were both pious and good writings, + yet he longed for the truth from the original fountain, and thought it his + greatest unhappiness that he had not a Bible, and did believe that he + should never see one again; but, contrary to his expectation, God brought + him one after this manner. As he was fishing one day with his black boy, + to catch some fish to relieve his hunger, an old man passed by them, and + asked his boy whether his master could read; and when the boy had answered + yes, he told him that he had gotten a book from the Portuguese, when they + left Colombo; and, if his master pleased, he would sell it him. The boy + told his master, who bade him go and see what book it was. The boy having + served the English some time, knew the book, and as soon as he got it into + his hand, came running to him, calling out before he came to him, "It is + the Bible!" The words startled him, and he flung down his angle to meet + him, and, finding it was true, was mightily rejoiced to see it; but he was + afraid he should not have enough to purchase it, though he was resolved to + part with all the money he had, which was but one pagoda, to buy it; but + his black boy persuading him to slight it, and leave it to him to buy it, + he at length obtained it for a knit cap. + </p> + <p> + This accident he could not but look upon as a great miracle, that God + should bestow upon him such an extraordinary blessing, and bring him a + Bible in his own native language, in such a remote part of the world, + where His name was not known, and where it was never heard of that an + Englishman had ever been before. The enjoyment of this mercy was a great + comfort to him in captivity, and though he wanted no bodily convenience + that the country did afford; for the king, immediately after his father's + death, had sent an express order to the people of the towns, that they + should be kind to him, and give him good victuals; and after he had been + some time in the country, and understood the language, he got him good + conveniences, as a house and gardens; and falling to husbandry, God so + prospered him, that he had plenty, not only for himself, but to lend + others; which being, according to the custom of the country, at 50 per + cent. a year, much enriched him: he had also goats, which served him for + mutton, and hogs and hens. Notwithstanding this, I say, for he lived as + fine as any of their noblemen, he could not so far forget his native + country as to be contented to dwell in a strange land, where there was to + him a famine of God's word and sacraments, the want of which made all + other things to be of little value to him; therefore, as he made it his + daily and fervent prayer to God, in His good time, to restore him to both, + so, at length, he, with one Stephen Rutland, who had lived with him two + years before, resolved to make their escape, and, about the year 1673, + meditated all secret ways to compass it. They had before taken up a way of + peddling about the country, and buying tobacco, pepper, garlic, combs, and + all sorts of iron ware, and carried them into those parts of the country + where they wanted them; and now, to promote their design, as they went + with their commodities from place to place, they discoursed with the + country people (for they could now speak their language well) concerning + the ways and inhabitants, where the isle was thinnest and fullest + inhabited, where and how the watches lay from one country to another, and + what commodities were proper for them to carry into all parts; pretending + that they would furnish themselves with such wares as the respective + places wanted. None doubted but what they did was upon the account of + trade, because Mr Knox was so well seated, and could not be supposed to + leave such an estate, by travelling northward, because that part of the + land was least inhabited; and so, furnishing themselves with such wares as + were vendible in those parts, they set forth, and steered their course + towards the north part of the islands, knowing very little of the ways, + which were generally intricate and perplexed, because they have no public + roads, but a multitude of little paths from one town to another, and those + often changing; and for white men to inquire about the ways was very + dangerous, because the people would presently suspect their design. + </p> + <p> + At this time they travelled from Conde Uda as far as the country of + Nuwarakalawiya, which is the furthermost part of the king's dominions, and + about three days' journey from their dwelling. They were very thankful to + Providence that they had passed all difficulties so far, but yet they + durst not go any farther, because they had no wares left to traffic with; + and it being the first time they had been absent so long from home, they + feared the townsmen would come after them to seek for them; and so they + returned home, and went eight or ten times into those parts with their + wares, till they became well acquainted both with the people and the + paths. + </p> + <p> + In these parts Mr Knox met his black boy, whom he had turned away divers + years before. He had now got a wife and children, and was very poor; but + being acquainted with these quarters, he not only took directions of him, + but agreed with him, for a good reward, to conduct him and his companions + to the Dutch. He gladly undertook it, and a time was appointed between + them; but Mr Knox being disabled by a grievous pain, which seized him on + his right side, and held him five days that he could not travel, this + appointment proved in vain; for though he went as soon as he was well, his + guide was gone into another country about his business, and they durst not + at that time venture to run away without him. + </p> + <p> + These attempts took up eight or nine years, various accidents hindering + their designs, but most commonly the dry weather, because they feared in + the woods they should be starved with thirst, all the country being in + such a condition almost four or five years together for lack of rain. + </p> + <p> + On September 22, 1679, they set forth again, furnished with knives and + small axes for their defence, because they could carry them privately and + send all sorts of wares to sell as formerly, and all necessary provisions, + the moon being twenty-seven days old, that they might have light to run + away by, to try what success God Almighty would now give them in seeking + their liberty. Their first stage was to Anuradhapoora, in the way to which + lay a wilderness, called Parraoth Mocolane, full of wild elephants, + tigers, and bears; and because it is the utmost confines of the king's + dominions, there is always a watch kept. + </p> + <p> + In the middle of the way they heard that the governor's officers of these + parts were out to gather up the king's revenues and duties, to send them + up to the city; which put them into no small fear, lest, finding them, + they should send them back again; whereupon they withdrew to the western + parts of Ecpoulpot, and sat down to knitting till they heard the officers + were gone. As soon as they were departed, they went onwards of their + journey, having got a good parcel of cotton-yarn to knit caps with, and + having kept their wares, as they pretended, to exchange for dried flesh, + which was sold only in those lower parts. Their way lay necessarily + through the governor's yard at Kalluvilla, who dwells there on purpose to + examine all that go and come. This greatly distressed them, because he + would easily suspect they were out of their bounds, being captives; + however, they went resolutely to his house, and meeting him, presented him + with a small parcel of tobacco and betel; and, showing him their wares, + told him they came to get dried flesh to carry back with them. The + governor did not suspect them, but told them he was sorry they came in so + dry a time, when no deer were to be catched, but if some rain fell, he + would soon supply them. This answer pleased them, and they seemed + contented to stay; and accordingly, abiding with him two or three days, + and no rain falling, they presented the governor with five or six charges + of gunpowder, which is a rarity among them; and leaving a bundle at his + house, they desired him to shoot them some deer, while they made a step to + Anuradhapoora. Here also they were put in a great fright by the coming of + certain soldiers from the king to the governor, to give him orders to set + a secure guard at the watches, that no suspicious persons might pass, + which, though it was only intended to prevent the flight of the relations + of certain nobles whom the king had clapped up, yet they feared they might + wonder to see white men here, and so send them back again; but God so + ordered it that they were very kind to them and left them to their + business, and so they got safe to Anuradhapoora. Their pretence was dried + flesh, though they knew there was none to be had; but their real business + was to search the way down to the Dutch, which they stayed three days to + do; but finding that in the way to Jaffnapatam, which is one of the Dutch + ports, there was a watch which could hardly be passed, and other + inconveniences not surmountable, they resolved to go back, and take the + river Malwatta Oya, which they had before judged would be a probable guide + to lead them to the sea; and, that they might not be pursued, left + Anuradhapoora just at night, when the people never travel for fear of wild + beasts, on Sunday, October 12, being stored with all things needful for + their journey, viz., ten days' provision, a basin to boil their provision + in, two calabashes to fetch water in, and two great tallipat leaves for + tents, with jaggery, sweetmeats, tobacco, betel, tinder-boxes, and a + deerskin for shoes, to keep their feet from thorns, because to them they + chiefly trusted. Being come to the river, they struck into the woods, and + kept by the side of it; yet not going on the sand (lest their footsteps + should be discerned), unless forced, and then going backwards. + </p> + <p> + Being gotten a good way into the wood, it began to rain; wherefore they + erected their tents, made a fire, and refreshed themselves against the + rising of the moon, which was then eighteen days old; and having tied + deerskins about their feet, and eased themselves of their wares, they + proceeded on their journey. When they had travelled three or four hours + with difficulty, because the moon gave but little light among the thick + trees, they found an elephant in their way before them, and because they + could not scare him away, they were forced to stay till morning; and so + they kindled a fire, and took a pipe of tobacco. By the light they could + not discern that ever anybody had been there, nothing being to be seen but + woods; and so they were in great hopes that they were past all danger, + being beyond all inhabitants; but they were mistaken, for the river + winding northward, brought them into the midst of a parcel of towns, + called Tissea Wava, where, being in danger of being seen, they were under + a mighty terror; for had the people found them, they would have beat them, + and sent them up to the king; and, to avoid it, they crept into a hollow + tree, and sat there in mud and wet till it began to grow dark, and then + betaking themselves to their legs, travelled till the darkness of night + stopped them. They heard voices behind them, and feared it was somebody in + pursuit of them; but at length, discerning it was only an hallooing to + keep the wild beasts out of the corn, they pitched their tents by the + river, and having boiled rice and roasted meat for their suppers, and + satisfied their hunger, they committed themselves to God's keeping, and + laid them down to sleep. + </p> + <p> + The next morning, to prevent the worst, they got up early and hastened on + their journey; and though they were now got out of all danger of the tame + Chiangulays, they were in great danger of the wild ones, of whom those + woods were full; and though they saw their tents, yet they were all gone, + since the rains had fallen, from the river into the woods; and so God kept + them from that danger, for, had they met the wild men, they had been shot. + </p> + <p> + Thus they travelled from morning till night several days, through bushes + and thorns, which made their arms and shoulders, which were naked, all of + a gore blood. They often met with bears, hogs, deer, and wild buffaloes; + but they all ran away as soon as they saw them. The river was exceedingly + full of alligators; in the evening they used to pitch their tents, and + make great fires both before and behind them, to affright the wild beasts; + and though they heard the voices of all sorts, they saw none. + </p> + <p> + On Thursday, at noon, they crossed the river Coronda [? Kannadera Oya], + which parts the country of the Malabars from the king's, and on Friday, + about nine or ten in the morning, came among the inhabitants, of whom they + were as much afraid as of the Chiangulays before; for, though the + Wanniounay, or prince of this people, payeth tribute to the Dutch out of + fear, yet he is better affected to the King of Kandy, and, if he had took + them, would have sent them up to their old master; but not knowing any way + to escape, they kept on their journey by the river-side by day, because + the woods were not to be travelled by night for thorns and wild beasts, + who came down then to the river to drink. In all the Malabar country they + met with only two Brahmins, who treated them very civilly; and for their + money, one of them conducted them till they came into the territories of + the Dutch, and out of all danger of the King of Kandy, which did not a + little rejoice them; but yet they were in no small trouble how to find the + way out of the woods, till a Malabar, for the lucre of a knife, conducted + them to a Dutch town, where they found guides to conduct them from town to + town, till they came to the fort called Aripo, where they arrived + Saturday, October 18, 1679, and there thankfully adored God's wonderful + providence, in thus completing their deliverance from a long captivity of + nineteen years and six months. + </p> + <p> + I come now back to my own history, which grows near a conclusion, as to + the travels I took in this part of the world. We were now at sea, and we + stood away to the north for a while, to try if we could get a market for + our spice, for we were very rich in nutmegs, but we ill knew what to do + with them; we durst not go upon the English coast, or, to speak more + properly, among the English factories to trade; not that we were afraid to + fight any two ships they had, and, besides that, we knew that, as they had + no letters of marque, or of reprisals from the government, so it was none + of their business to act offensively, no, not though we were pirates. + Indeed, if we had made any attempt upon them, they might have justified + themselves in joining together to resist, and assisting one another to + defend themselves; but to go out of their business to attack a pirate ship + of almost fifty guns, as we were, it was plain that it was none of their + business, and consequently it was none of our concern, so we did not + trouble ourselves about it; but, on the other hand, it was none of our + business to be seen among them, and to have the news of us carried from + one factory to another, so that whatever design we might be upon at + another time, we should be sure to be prevented and discovered. Much less + had we any occasion to be seen among any of the Dutch factories upon the + coast of Malabar; for, being fully laden with the spices which we had, in + the sense of their trade, plundered them of, it would have told them what + we were, and all that we had been doing; and they would, no doubt, have + concerned themselves all manner of ways to have fallen upon us. + </p> + <p> + The only way we had for it was to stand away for Goa, and trade, if we + could, for our spices, with the Portuguese factory there. Accordingly, we + sailed almost thither, for we had made land two days before, and being in + the latitude of Goa, were standing in fair for Margaon, on the head of + Salsat, at the going up to Goa, when I called to the men at the helm to + bring the ship to, and bid the pilot go away N.N.W., till we came out of + sight of the shore, when William and I called a council, as we used to do + upon emergencies, what course we should take to trade there and not be + discovered; and we concluded at length that we would not go thither at + all, but that William, with such trusty fellows only as could be depended + upon, should go in the sloop to Surat, which was still farther northward, + and trade there as merchants with such of the English factory as they + could find to be for their turn. + </p> + <p> + To carry this with the more caution, and so as not to be suspected, we + agreed to take out all her guns, and put such men into her, and no other, + as would promise us not to desire or offer to go on shore, or to enter + into any talk or conversation with any that might come on board; and, to + finish the disguise to our mind, William documented two of our men, one a + surgeon, as he himself was, and the other, a ready-witted fellow, an old + sailor, that had been a pilot upon the coast of New England, and was an + excellent mimic; these two William dressed up like two Quakers, and made + them talk like such. The old pilot he made go captain of the sloop, and + the surgeon for doctor, as he was, and himself supercargo. In this figure, + and the sloop all plain, no curled work upon her (indeed she had not much + before), and no guns to be seen, away he went for Surat. + </p> + <p> + I should, indeed, have observed, that we went, some days before we parted, + to a small sandy island close under the shore, where there was a good cove + of deep water, like a road, and out of sight of any of the factories, + which are here very thick upon the coast. Here we shifted the loading of + the sloop, and put into her such things only as we had a mind to dispose + of there, which was indeed little but nutmegs and cloves, but chiefly the + former; and from thence William and his two Quakers, with about eighteen + men in the sloop, went away to Surat, and came to an anchor at a distance + from the factory. + </p> + <p> + William used such caution that he found means to go on shore himself, and + the doctor, as he called him, in a boat which came on board them to sell + fish, rowed with only Indians of the country, which boat he afterwards + hired to carry him on board again. It was not long that they were on + shore, but that they found means to get acquaintance with some Englishmen, + who, though they lived there, and perhaps were the company's servants at + first, yet appeared then to be traders for themselves, in whatever coast + business especially came in their way; and the doctor was made the first + to pick acquaintance; so he recommended his friend, the supercargo, till, + by degrees, the merchants were as fond of the bargain as our men were of + the merchants, only that the cargo was a little too much for them. + </p> + <p> + However, this did not prove a difficulty long with them, for the next day + they brought two more merchants, English also, into their bargain, and, as + William could perceive by their discourse, they resolved, if they bought + them, to carry them to the Gulf of Persia upon their own accounts. William + took the hint, and, as he told me afterwards, concluded we might carry + them there as well as they. But this was not William's present business; + he had here no less than three-and-thirty ton of nuts and eighteen ton of + cloves. There was a good quantity of mace among the nutmegs, but we did + not stand to make much allowance. In short, they bargained, and the + merchants, who would gladly have bought sloop and all, gave William + directions, and two men for pilots, to go to a creek about six leagues + from the factory, where they brought boats, and unloaded the whole cargo, + and paid William very honestly for it; the whole parcel amounting, in + money, to about thirty-five thousand pieces of eight, besides some goods + of value, which William was content to take, and two large diamonds, worth + about three hundred pounds sterling. + </p> + <p> + When they paid the money, William invited them on board the sloop, where + they came; and the merry old Quaker diverted them exceedingly with his + talk, and "thee'd" them and "thou'd" them till he made them so drunk that + they could not go on shore for that night. + </p> + <p> + They would fain have known who our people were, and whence they came; but + not a man in the sloop would answer them to any question they asked, but + in such a manner as let them think themselves bantered and jested with. + However, in discourse, William said they were able men for any cargo we + could have brought them, and that they would have bought twice as much + spice if we had had it. He ordered the merry captain to tell them that + they had another sloop that lay at Margaon, and that had a great quantity + of spice on board also; and that, if it was not sold when he went back + (for that thither he was bound), he would bring her up. + </p> + <p> + Their new chaps were so eager, that they would have bargained with the old + captain beforehand. "Nay, friend," said he, "I will not trade with thee + unsight and unseen; neither do I know whether the master of the sloop may + not have sold his loading already to some merchants of Salsat; but if he + has not when I come to him, I think to bring him up to thee." + </p> + <p> + The doctor had his employment all this while, as well as William and the + old captain, for he went on shore several times a day in the Indian boat, + and brought fresh provisions for the sloop, which the men had need enough + of. He brought, in particular, seventeen large casks of arrack, as big as + butts, besides smaller quantities, a quantity of rice, and abundance of + fruits, mangoes, pompions, and such things, with fowls and fish. He never + came on board but he was deep laden; for, in short, he bought for the ship + as well as for themselves; and, particularly, they half-loaded the ship + with rice and arrack, with some hogs, and six or seven cows, alive; and + thus, being well victualled, and having directions for coming again, they + returned to us. + </p> + <p> + William was always the lucky welcome messenger to us, but never more + welcome to us than now; for where we had thrust in the ship, we could get + nothing, except a few mangoes and roots, being not willing to make any + steps into the country, or make ourselves known till we had news of our + sloop; and indeed our men's patience was almost tired, for it was + seventeen days that William spent upon this enterprise, and well bestowed + too. + </p> + <p> + When he came back we had another conference upon the subject of trade, + namely, whether we should send the best of our spices, and other goods we + had in the ship, to Surat, or whether we should go up to the Gulf of + Persia ourselves, where it was probable we might sell them as well as the + English merchants of Surat. William was for going ourselves, which, by the + way, was from the good, frugal, merchant-like temper of the man, who was + for the best of everything; but here I overruled William, which I very + seldom took upon me to do; but I told him, that, considering our + circumstances, it was much better for us to sell all our cargoes here, + though we made but half-price of them, than to go with them to the Gulf of + Persia, where we should run a greater risk, and where people would be much + more curious and inquisitive into things than they were here, and where it + would not be so easy to manage them, seeing they traded freely and openly + there, not by stealth, as those men seemed to do; and, besides, if they + suspected anything, it would be much more difficult for us to retreat, + except by mere force, than here, where we were upon the high sea as it + were, and could be gone whenever we pleased, without any disguise, or, + indeed, without the least appearance of being pursued, none knowing where + to look for us. + </p> + <p> + My apprehensions prevailed with William, whether my reasons did or no, and + he submitted; and we resolved to try another ship's loading to the same + merchants. The main business was to consider how to get off that + circumstance that had exposed them to the English merchants, namely that + it was our other sloop; but this the old Quaker pilot undertook; for + being, as I said, an excellent mimic himself, it was the easier for him to + dress up the sloop in new clothes; and first, he put on all the carved + work he had taken off before; her stern, which was painted of a dumb white + or dun colour before, all flat, was now all lacquered and blue, and I know + not how many gay figures in it; as to her quarter, the carpenters made her + a neat little gallery on either side; she had twelve guns put into her, + and some petereroes upon her gunnel, none of which were there before; and + to finish her new habit or appearance, and make her change complete, he + ordered her sails to be altered; and as she sailed before with a + half-sprit, like a yacht, she sailed now with square-sail and mizzen-mast, + like a ketch; so that, in a word, she was a perfect cheat, disguised in + everything that a stranger could be supposed to take any notice of that + had never had but one view, for they had been but once on board. + </p> + <p> + In this mean figure the sloop returned; she had a new man put into her for + captain, one we knew how to trust; and the old pilot appearing only as a + passenger, the doctor and William acting as the supercargoes, by a formal + procuration from one Captain Singleton, and all things ordered in form. + </p> + <p> + We had a complete loading for the sloop; for, besides a very great + quantity of nutmegs and cloves, mace, and some cinnamon, she had on board + some goods which we took in as we lay about the Philippine Islands, while + we waited as looking for purchase. + </p> + <p> + William made no difficulty of selling this cargo also, and in about twenty + days returned again, freighted with all necessary provisions for our + voyage, and for a long time; and, as I say, we had a great deal of other + goods: he brought us back about three-and-thirty thousand pieces of eight, + and some diamonds, which, though William did not pretend to much skill in, + yet he made shift to act so as not to be imposed upon, the merchants he + had to deal with, too, being very fair men. + </p> + <p> + They had no difficulty at all with these merchants, for the prospect they + had of gain made them not at all inquisitive, nor did they make the least + discovery of the sloop; and as to the selling them spices which were + fetched so far from thence, it seems it was not so much a novelty there as + we believed, for the Portuguese had frequently vessels which came from + Macao in China, who brought spices, which they bought of the Chinese + traders, who again frequently dealt among the Dutch Spice Islands, and + received spices in exchange for such goods as they carried from China. + </p> + <p> + This might be called, indeed, the only trading voyage we had made; and now + we were really very rich, and it came now naturally before us to consider + whither we should go next. Our proper delivery port, as we ought to have + called it, was at Madagascar, in the Bay of Mangahelly; but William took + me by myself into the cabin of the sloop one day, and told me he wanted to + talk seriously with me a little; so we shut ourselves in, and William + began with me. + </p> + <p> + "Wilt thou give me leave," says William, "to talk plainly with thee upon + thy present circumstances, and thy future prospect of living? and wilt + thou promise, on thy word, to take nothing ill of me?" + </p> + <p> + "With all my heart," said I. "William, I have always found your advice + good, and your designs have not only been well laid, but your counsel has + been very lucky to us; and, therefore, say what you will, I promise you I + will not take it ill." + </p> + <p> + "But that is not all my demand," says William; "if thou dost not like what + I am going to propose to thee, thou shalt promise me not to make it public + among the men." + </p> + <p> + "I will not, William," says I, "upon my word;" and swore to him, too, very + heartily. + </p> + <p> + "Why, then," says William, "I have but one thing more to article with thee + about, and that is, that thou wilt consent that if thou dost not approve + of it for thyself, thou wilt yet consent that I shall put so much of it in + practice as relates to myself and my new comrade doctor, so that it be + nothing to thy detriment and loss." + </p> + <p> + "In anything," says I, "William, but leaving me, I will; but I cannot part + with you upon any terms whatever." + </p> + <p> + "Well," says William, "I am not designing to part from thee, unless it is + thy own doing. But assure me in all these points, and I will tell my mind + freely." + </p> + <p> + So I promised him everything he desired of me in the solemnest manner + possible, and so seriously and frankly withal, that William made no + scruple to open his mind to me. + </p> + <p> + "Why, then, in the first place," says William, "shall I ask thee if thou + dost not think thou and all thy men are rich enough, and have really + gotten as much wealth together (by whatsoever way it has been gotten, that + is not the question) as we all know what to do with?" + </p> + <p> + "Why, truly, William," said I, "thou art pretty right; I think we have had + pretty good luck." + </p> + <p> + "Well, then," says William, "I would ask whether, if thou hast gotten + enough, thou hast any thought of leaving off this trade; for most people + leave off trading when they are satisfied of getting, and are rich enough; + for nobody trades for the sake of trading; much less do men rob for the + sake of thieving." + </p> + <p> + "Well, William," says I, "now I perceive what it is thou art driving at. I + warrant you," says I, "you begin to hanker after home." + </p> + <p> + "Why, truly," says William, "thou hast said it, and so I hope thou dost + too. It is natural for most men that are abroad to desire to come home + again at last, especially when they are grown rich, and when they are (as + thou ownest thyself to be) rich enough, and so rich as they know not what + to do with more if they had it." + </p> + <p> + "Well, William," said I, "but now you think you have laid your preliminary + at first so home that I should have nothing to say; that is, that when I + had got money enough, it would be natural to think of going home. But you + have not explained what you mean by home, and there you and I shall + differ. Why, man, I am at home; here is my habitation; I never had any + other in my lifetime; I was a kind of charity school boy; so that I can + have no desire of going anywhere for being rich or poor, for I have + nowhere to go." + </p> + <p> + "Why," says William, looking a little confused, "art not thou an + Englishman?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes," says I, "I think so: you see I speak English; but I came out of + England a child, and never was in it but once since I was a man; and then + I was cheated and imposed upon, and used so ill that I care not if I never + see it more." + </p> + <p> + "Why, hast thou no relations or friends there?" says he; "no acquaintance—none + that thou hast any kindness or any remains of respect for?" + </p> + <p> + "Not I, William," said I; "no more than I have in the court of the Great + Mogul." + </p> + <p> + "Nor any kindness for the country where thou wast born?" says William. + </p> + <p> + "Not I, any more than for the island of Madagascar, nor so much neither; + for that has been a fortunate island to me more than once, as thou + knowest, William," said I. + </p> + <p> + William was quite stunned at my discourse, and held his peace; and I said + to him, "Go on, William; what hast thou to say farther? for I hear you + have some project in your head," says I; "come, let's have it out." + </p> + <p> + "Nay," says William, "thou hast put me to silence, and all I had to say is + overthrown; all my projects are come to nothing, and gone." + </p> + <p> + "Well, but, William," said I, "let me hear what they were; for though it + is so that what I have to aim at does not look your way, and though I have + no relation, no friend, no acquaintance in England, yet I do not say I + like this roving, cruising life so well as never to give it over. Let me + hear if thou canst propose to me anything beyond it." + </p> + <p> + "Certainly, friend," says William, very gravely, "there is something + beyond it;" and lifting up his hands, he seemed very much affected, and I + thought I saw tears stand in his eyes; but I, that was too hardened a + wretch to be moved with these things, laughed at him. "What!" says I, "you + mean death, I warrant you: don't you? That is beyond this trade. Why, when + it comes, it comes; then we are all provided for." + </p> + <p> + "Ay," says William, "that is true; but it would be better that some things + were thought on before that came." + </p> + <p> + "Thought on!" says I; "what signifies thinking of it? To think of death is + to die, and to be always thinking of it is to be all one's life long + a-dying. It is time enough to think of it when it comes." + </p> + <p> + You will easily believe I was well qualified for a pirate that could talk + thus. But let me leave it upon record, for the remark of other hardened + rogues like myself,—my conscience gave me a pang that I never felt + before when I said, "What signifies thinking of it?" and told me I should + one day think of these words with a sad heart; but the time of my + reflection was not yet come; so I went on. + </p> + <p> + Says William very seriously, "I must tell thee, friend, I am sorry to hear + thee talk so. They that never think of dying, often die without thinking + of it." + </p> + <p> + I carried on the jesting way a while farther, and said, "Prithee, do not + talk of dying; how do we know we shall ever die?" and began to laugh. + </p> + <p> + "I need not answer thee to that," says William; "it is not my place to + reprove thee, who art commander over me here; but I would rather thou + wouldst talk otherwise of death; it is a coarse thing." + </p> + <p> + "Say anything to me, William," said I; "I will take it kindly." I began + now to be very much moved at his discourse. + </p> + <p> + Says William (tears running down his face), "It is because men live as if + they were never to die, that so many die before they know how to live. But + it was not death that I meant when I said that there was something to be + thought of beyond this way of living." + </p> + <p> + "Why, William," said I, "what was that?" + </p> + <p> + "It was repentance," says he. + </p> + <p> + "Why," says I, "did you ever know a pirate repent?" + </p> + <p> + At this he startled a little, and returned, "At the gallows I have [known] + one before, and I hope thou wilt be the second." + </p> + <p> + He spoke this very affectionately, with an appearance of concern for me. + </p> + <p> + "Well, William," says I, "I thank you; and I am not so senseless of these + things, perhaps, as I make myself seem to be. But come, let me hear your + proposal." + </p> + <p> + "My proposal," says William, "is for thy good as well as my own. We may + put an end to this kind of life, and repent; and I think the fairest + occasion offers for both, at this very time, that ever did, or ever will, + or, indeed, can happen again." + </p> + <p> + "Look you, William," says I; "let me have your proposal for putting an end + to our present way of living first, for that is the case before us, and + you and I will talk of the other afterwards. I am not so insensible," said + I, "as you may think me to be. But let us get out of this hellish + condition we are in first." + </p> + <p> + "Nay," says William, "thou art in the right there; we must never talk of + repenting while we continue pirates." + </p> + <p> + "Well," says I, "William, that's what I meant; for if we must not reform, + as well as be sorry for what is done, I have no notion what repentance + means; indeed, at best I know little of the matter; but the nature of the + thing seems to tell me that the first step we have to take is to break off + this wretched course; and I'll begin there with you, with all my heart." + </p> + <p> + I could see by his countenance that William was thoroughly pleased with + the offer; and if he had tears in-his eyes before, he had more now; but it + was from quite a different passion; for he was so swallowed up with joy he + could not speak. + </p> + <p> + "Come, William," says I, "thou showest me plain enough thou hast an honest + meaning; dost thou think it practicable for us to put an end to our + unhappy way of living here, and get off?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes," says he, "I think it very practicable for me; whether it is for + thee or no, that will depend upon thyself." + </p> + <p> + "Well," says I, "I give you my word, that as I have commanded you all + along, from the time I first took you on board, so you shall command me + from this hour, and everything you direct me I'll do." + </p> + <p> + "Wilt thou leave it all to me? Dost thou say this freely?" + </p> + <p> + "Yes, William," said I, "freely; and I'll perform it faithfully." + </p> + <p> + "Why, then," says William, "my scheme is this: We are now at the mouth of + the Gulf of Persia; we have sold so much of our cargo here at Surat, that + we have money enough; send me away for Bassorah with the sloop, laden with + the China goods we have on board, which will make another good cargo, and + I'll warrant thee I'll find means, among the English and Dutch merchants + there, to lodge a quantity of goods and money also as a merchant, so as we + will be able to have recourse to it again upon any occasion, and when I + come home we will contrive the rest; and, in the meantime, do you bring + the ship's crew to take a resolution to go to Madagascar as soon as I + return." + </p> + <p> + I told him I thought he need not go so far as Bassorah, but might run into + Gombroon, or to Ormuz, and pretend the same business. + </p> + <p> + "No," says he, "I cannot act with the same freedom there, because the + Company's factories are there, and I may be laid hold of there on pretence + of interloping." + </p> + <p> + "Well, but," said I, "you may go to Ormuz, then; for I am loth to part + with you so long as to go to the bottom of the Persian Gulf." He returned, + that I should leave it to him to do as he should see cause. + </p> + <p> + We had taken a large sum of money at Surat, so that we had near a hundred + thousand pounds in money at our command, but on board the great ship we + had still a great deal more. + </p> + <p> + I ordered him publicly to keep the money on board which he had, and to buy + up with it a quantity of ammunition, if he could get it, and so to furnish + us for new exploits; and, in the meantime, I resolved to get a quantity of + gold and some jewels, which I had on board the great ship, and place them + so that I might carry them off without notice as soon as he came back; and + so, according to William's directions, I left him to go the voyage, and I + went on board the great ship, in which we had indeed an immense treasure. + </p> + <p> + We waited no less than two months for William's return, and indeed I began + to be very uneasy about William, sometimes thinking he had abandoned me, + and that he might have used the same artifice to have engaged the other + men to comply with him, and so they were gone away together; and it was + but three days before his return that I was just upon the point of + resolving to go away to Madagascar, and give him over; but the old + surgeon, who mimicked the Quaker and passed for the master of the sloop at + Surat, persuaded me against that, for which good advice and apparent + faithfulness in what he had been trusted with, I made him a party to my + design, and he proved very honest. + </p> + <p> + At length William came back, to our inexpressible joy, and brought a great + many necessary things with him; as, particularly, he brought sixty barrels + of powder, some iron shot, and about thirty ton of lead; also he brought a + great deal of provisions; and, in a word, William gave me a public account + of his voyage, in the hearing of whoever happened to be upon the + quarter-deck, that no suspicions might be found about us. + </p> + <p> + After all was done, William moved that he might go up again, and that I + would go with him; named several things which we had on board that he + could not sell there; and, particularly, told us he had been obliged to + leave several things there, the caravans being not come in; and that he + had engaged to come back again with goods. + </p> + <p> + This was what I wanted. The men were eager for his going, and particularly + because he told them they might load the sloop back with rice and + provisions; but I seemed backward to going, when the old surgeon stood up + and persuaded me to go, and with many arguments pressed me to it; as, + particularly, if I did not go, there would be no order, and several of the + men might drop away, and perhaps betray all the rest; and that they should + not think it safe for the sloop to go again if I did not go; and to urge + me to it, he offered himself to go with me. + </p> + <p> + Upon these considerations I seemed to be over-persuaded to go, and all the + company seemed to be better satisfied when I had consented; and, + accordingly, we took all the powder, lead, and iron out of the sloop into + the great ship, and all the other things that were for the ship's use, and + put in some bales of spices and casks or frails of cloves, in all about + seven ton, and some other goods, among the bales of which I had conveyed + all my private treasure, which, I assure you, was of no small value, and + away I went. + </p> + <p> + At going off I called a council of all the officers in the ship to + consider in what place they should wait for me, and how long, and we + appointed the ship to stay eight-and-twenty days at a little island on the + Arabian side of the Gulf, and that, if the sloop did not come in that + time, they should sail to another island to the west of that place, and + wait there fifteen days more, and that then, if the sloop did not come, + they should conclude some accident must have happened, and the rendezvous + should be at Madagascar. + </p> + <p> + Being thus resolved, we left the ship, which both William and I, and the + surgeon, never intended to see any more. We steered directly for the Gulf, + and through to Bassorah, or Balsara. This city of Balsara lies at some + distance from the place where our sloop lay, and the river not being very + safe, and we but ill acquainted with it, having but an ordinary pilot, we + went on shore at a village where some merchants live, and which is very + populous, for the sake of small vessels riding there. + </p> + <p> + Here we stayed and traded three or four days, landing all our bales and + spices, and indeed the whole cargo that was of any considerable value, + which we chose to do rather than go up immediately to Balsara till the + project we had laid was put in execution. + </p> + <p> + After we had bought several goods, and were preparing to buy several + others, the boat being on shore with twelve men, myself, William, the + surgeon, and one fourth man, whom we had singled out, we contrived to send + a Turk just at the dusk of the evening with a letter to the boatswain, and + giving the fellow a charge to run with all possible speed, we stood at a + small distance to observe the event. The contents of the letter were thus + written by the old doctor:— + </p> + <p> + "BOATSWAIN THOMAS,—We are all betrayed. For God's sake make off with + the boat, and get on board, or you are all lost. The captain, William the + Quaker, and George the reformade are seized and carried away: I am escaped + and hid, but cannot stir out; if I do I am a dead man. As soon as you are + on board cut or slip, and make sail for your lives. Adieu.—R.S." + </p> + <p> + We stood undiscovered, as above, it being the dusk of the evening, and saw + the Turk deliver the letter, and in three minutes we saw all the men hurry + into the boat and put off, and no sooner were they on board than they took + the hint, as we supposed, for the next morning they were out of sight, and + we never heard tale or tidings of them since. + </p> + <p> + We were now in a good place, and in very good circumstances, for we passed + for merchants of Persia. + </p> + <p> + It is not material to record here what a mass of ill-gotten wealth we had + got together: it will be more to the purpose to tell you that I began to + be sensible of the crime of getting of it in such a manner as I had done; + that I had very little satisfaction in the possession of it; and, as I + told William, I had no expectation of keeping it, nor much desire; but, as + I said to him one day walking out into the fields near the town of + Bassorah, so I depended upon it that it would be the case, which you will + hear presently. + </p> + <p> + We were perfectly secured at Bassorah, by having frighted away the rogues, + our comrades; and we had nothing to do but to consider how to convert our + treasure into things proper to make us look like merchants, as we were now + to be, and not like freebooters, as we really had been. + </p> + <p> + We happened very opportunely here upon a Dutchman, who had travelled from + Bengal to Agra, the capital city of the Great Mogul, and from thence was + come to the coast of Malabar by land, and got shipping, somehow or other, + up the Gulf; and we found his design was to go up the great river to + Bagdad or Babylon, and so, by the caravan, to Aleppo and Scanderoon. As + William spoke Dutch, and was of an agreeable, insinuating behaviour, he + soon got acquainted with this Dutchman, and discovering our circumstances + to one another, we found he had considerable effects with him; and that he + had traded long in that country, and was making homeward to his own + country; and that he had servants with him; one an Armenian, whom he had + taught to speak Dutch, and who had something of his own, but had a mind to + travel into Europe; and the other a Dutch sailor, whom he had picked up by + his fancy, and reposed a great trust in him, and a very honest fellow he + was. + </p> + <p> + This Dutchman was very glad of an acquaintance, because he soon found that + we directed our thoughts to Europe also; and as he found we were + encumbered with goods only (for we let him know nothing of our money), he + readily offered us his assistance to dispose of as many of them as the + place we were in would put off, and his advice what to do with the rest. + </p> + <p> + While this was doing, William and I consulted what to do with ourselves + and what we had; and first, we resolved we would never talk seriously of + our measures but in the open fields, where we were sure nobody could hear; + so every evening, when the sun began to decline and the air to be moderate + we walked out, sometimes this way, sometimes that, to consult of our + affairs. + </p> + <p> + I should have observed that we had new clothed ourselves here, after the + Persian manner, with long vests of silk, a gown or robe of English crimson + cloth, very fine and handsome, and had let our beards grow so after the + Persian manner that we passed for Persian merchants, in view only, though, + by the way, we could not understand or speak one word of the language of + Persia, or indeed of any other but English and Dutch; and of the latter I + understood very little. + </p> + <p> + However, the Dutchman supplied all this for us; and as we had resolved to + keep ourselves as retired as we could, though there were several English + merchants upon the place, yet we never acquainted ourselves with one of + them, or exchanged a word with them; by which means we prevented their + inquiry of us now, or their giving any intelligence of us, if any news of + our landing here should happen to come, which, it was easy for us to know, + was possible enough, if any of our comrades fell into bad hands, or by + many accidents which we could not foresee. + </p> + <p> + It was during my being here, for here we stayed near two months, that I + grew very thoughtful about my circumstances; not as to the danger, neither + indeed were we in any, but were entirely concealed and unsuspected; but I + really began to have other thoughts of myself, and of the world, than ever + I had before. + </p> + <p> + William had struck so deep into my unthinking temper with hinting to me + that there was something beyond all this; that the present time was the + time of enjoyment, but that the time of account approached; that the work + that remained was gentler than the labour past, viz., repentance, and that + it was high time to think of it;—I say these, and such thoughts as + these, engrossed my hours, and, in a word, I grew very sad. + </p> + <p> + As to the wealth I had, which was immensely great, it was all like dirt + under my feet; I had no value for it, no peace in the possession of it, no + great concern about me for the leaving of it. + </p> + <p> + William had perceived my thoughts to be troubled and my mind heavy and + oppressed for some time; and one evening, in one of our cool walks, I + began with him about the leaving our effects. William was a wise and wary + man, and indeed all the prudentials of my conduct had for a long time been + owing to his advice, and so now all the methods for preserving our + effects, and even ourselves, lay upon him; and he had been telling me of + some of the measures he had been taking for our making homeward, and for + the security of our wealth, when I took him very short. "Why, William," + says I, "dost thou think we shall ever be able to reach Europe with all + this cargo that we have about us?" + </p> + <p> + "Ay," says William, "without doubt, as well as other merchants with + theirs, as long as it is not publicly known what quantity or of what value + our cargo consists." + </p> + <p> + "Why, William," says I, smiling, "do you think that if there is a God + above, as you have so long been telling me there is, and that we must give + an account to Him,—I say, do you think, if He be a righteous Judge, + He will let us escape thus with the plunder, as we may call it, of so many + innocent people, nay, I might say nations, and not call us to an account + for it before we can get to Europe, where we pretend to enjoy it?" + </p> + <p> + William appeared struck and surprised at the question, and made no answer + for a great while; and I repeated the question, adding that it was not to + be expected. + </p> + <p> + After a little pause, says William, "Thou hast started a very weighty + question, and I can make no positive answer to it; but I will state it + thus: first, it is true that, if we consider the justice of God, we have + no reason to expect any protection; but as the ordinary ways of Providence + are out of the common road of human affairs, so we may hope for mercy + still upon our repentance, and we know not how good He may be to us; so we + are to act as if we rather depended upon the last, I mean the merciful + part, than claimed the first, which must produce nothing but judgment and + vengeance." + </p> + <p> + "But hark ye, William," says I, "the nature of repentance, as you have + hinted once to me, included reformation; and we can never reform; how, + then, can we repent?" + </p> + <p> + "Why can we never reform?" says William. + </p> + <p> + "Because," said I, "we cannot restore what we have taken away by rapine + and spoil." + </p> + <p> + "It is true," says William, "we never can do that, for we can never come + to the knowledge of the owners." + </p> + <p> + "But what, then, must be done with our wealth," said I, "the effects of + plunder and rapine? If we keep it, we continue to be robbers and thieves; + and if we quit it we cannot do justice with it, for we cannot restore it + to the right owners." + </p> + <p> + "Nay," says William, "the answer to it is short. To quit what we have, and + do it here, is to throw it away to those who have no claim to it, and to + divest ourselves of it, but to do no right with it; whereas we ought to + keep it carefully together, with a resolution to do what right with it we + are able; and who knows what opportunity Providence may put into our hands + to do justice, at least, to some of those we have injured? So we ought, at + least, to leave it to Him and go on. As it is, without doubt our present + business is to go to some place of safety, where we may wait His will." + </p> + <p> + This resolution of William was very satisfying to me indeed, as, the truth + is, all he said, and at all times, was solid and good; and had not William + thus, as it were, quieted my mind, I think, verily, I was so alarmed at + the just reason I had to expect vengeance from Heaven upon me for my + ill-gotten wealth, that I should have run away from it as the devil's + goods, that I had nothing to do with, that did not belong to me, and that + I had no right to keep, and was in certain danger of being destroyed for. + </p> + <p> + However, William settled my mind to more prudent steps than these, and I + concluded that I ought, however, to proceed to a place of safety, and + leave the event to God Almighty's mercy. But this I must leave upon + record, that I had from this time no joy of the wealth I had got. I looked + upon it all as stolen, and so indeed the greatest part of it was. I looked + upon it as a hoard of other men's goods, which I had robbed the innocent + owners of, and which I ought, in a word, to be hanged for here, and damned + for hereafter. And now, indeed, I began sincerely to hate myself for a + dog; a wretch that had been a thief and a murderer; a wretch that was in a + condition which nobody was ever in; for I had robbed, and though I had the + wealth by me, yet it was impossible I should ever make any restitution; + and upon this account it ran in my head that I could never repent, for + that repentance could not be sincere without restitution, and therefore + must of necessity be damned. There was no room for me to escape. I went + about with my heart full of these thoughts, little better than a + distracted fellow; in short, running headlong into the dreadfullest + despair, and premeditating nothing but how to rid myself out of the world; + and, indeed, the devil, if such things are of the devil's immediate doing, + followed his work very close with me, and nothing lay upon my mind for + several days but to shoot myself into the head with my pistol. + </p> + <p> + I was all this while in a vagrant life, among infidels, Turks, pagans, and + such sort of people. I had no minister, no Christian to converse with but + poor William. He was my ghostly father or confessor, and he was all the + comfort I had. As for my knowledge of religion, you have heard my history. + You may suppose I had not much; and as for the Word of God, I do not + remember that I ever read a chapter in the Bible in my lifetime. I was + little Bob at Bussleton, and went to school to learn my Testament. + </p> + <p> + However, it pleased God to make William the Quaker everything to me. Upon + this occasion, I took him out one evening, as usual, and hurried him away + into the fields with me, in more haste than ordinary; and there, in short, + I told him the perplexity of my mind, and under what terrible temptations + of the devil I had been; that I must shoot myself, for I could not support + the weight and terror that was upon me. + </p> + <p> + "Shoot yourself!" says William; "why, what will that do for you?" + </p> + <p> + "Why," says I, "it will put an end to a miserable life." + </p> + <p> + "Well," says William, "are you satisfied the next will be better?" + </p> + <p> + "No, no," says I; "much worse, to be sure." + </p> + <p> + "Why, then," says he, "shooting yourself is the devil's motion, no doubt; + for it is the devil of a reason, that, because thou art in an ill case, + therefore thou must put thyself into a worse." + </p> + <p> + This shocked my reason indeed. "Well, but," says I, "there is no bearing + the miserable condition I am in." + </p> + <p> + "Very well," says William; "but it seems there is some bearing a worse + condition; and so you will shoot yourself, that you may be past remedy?" + </p> + <p> + "I am past remedy already," says I. + </p> + <p> + "How do you know that?" says he. + </p> + <p> + "I am satisfied of it," said I. + </p> + <p> + "Well," says he, "but you are not sure; so you will shoot yourself to make + it certain; for though on this side death you cannot be sure you will be + damned at all, yet the moment you step on the other side of time you are + sure of it; for when it is done, it is not to be said then that you will + be, but that you are damned." + </p> + <p> + "Well, but," says William, as if he had been between jest and earnest, + "pray, what didst thou dream of last night?" + </p> + <p> + "Why," said I, "I had frightful dreams all night; and, particularly, I + dreamed that the devil came for me, and asked me what my name was; and I + told him. Then he asked me what trade I was. 'Trade?' says I; 'I am a + thief, a rogue, by my calling: I am a pirate and a murderer, and ought to + be hanged.' 'Ay, ay,' says the devil, 'so you do; and you are the man I + looked for, and therefore come along with me.' At which I was most + horribly frighted, and cried out so that it waked me; and I have been in + horrible agony ever since." + </p> + <p> + "Very well," says William; "come, give me the pistol thou talkedst of just + now." + </p> + <p> + "Why," says I, "what will you do with it?" + </p> + <p> + "Do with it!" says William. "Why, thou needest not shoot thyself; I shall + be obliged to do it for thee. Why, thou wilt destroy us all." + </p> + <p> + "What do you mean, William?" said I. + </p> + <p> + "Mean!" said he; "nay, what didst thou mean, to cry out aloud in thy + sleep, 'I am a thief, a pirate, a murderer, and ought to be hanged'? Why, + thou wilt ruin us all. 'Twas well the Dutchman did not understand English. + In short, I must shoot thee, to save my own life. Come, come," says he, + "give me thy pistol." + </p> + <p> + I confess this terrified me again another way, and I began to be sensible + that, if anybody had been near me to understand English, I had been + undone. The thought of shooting myself forsook me from that time; and I + turned to William, "You disorder me extremely, William," said I; "why, I + am never safe, nor is it safe to keep me company. What shall I do? I shall + betray you all." + </p> + <p> + "Come, come, friend Bob," says he, "I'll put an end to it all, if you will + take my advice." + </p> + <p> + "How's that?" said I. + </p> + <p> + "Why, only," says he, "that the next time thou talkest with the devil, + thou wilt talk a little softlier, or we shall be all undone, and you too." + </p> + <p> + This frighted me, I must confess, and allayed a great deal of the trouble + of mind I was in. But William, after he had done jesting with me, entered + upon a very long and serious discourse with me about the nature of my + circumstances, and about repentance; that it ought to be attended, indeed, + with a deep abhorrence of the crime that I had to charge myself with; but + that to despair of God's mercy was no part of repentance, but putting + myself into the condition of the devil; indeed, that I must apply myself + with a sincere, humble confession of my crime, to ask pardon of God, whom + I had offended, and cast myself upon His mercy, resolving to be willing to + make restitution, if ever it should please God to put it in my power, even + to the utmost of what I had in the world. And this, he told me, was the + method which he had resolved upon himself; and in this, he told me, he had + found comfort. + </p> + <p> + I had a great deal of satisfaction in William's discourse, and it quieted + me very much; but William was very anxious ever after about my talking in + my sleep, and took care to lie with me always himself, and to keep me from + lodging in any house where so much as a word of English was understood. + </p> + <p> + However, there was not the like occasion afterward; for I was much more + composed in my mind, and resolved for the future to live a quite different + life from what I had done. As to the wealth I had, I looked upon it as + nothing; I resolved to set it apart to any such opportunity of doing + justice as God should put into my hand; and the miraculous opportunity I + had afterwards of applying some parts of it to preserve a ruined family, + whom I had plundered, may be worth reading, if I have room for it in this + account. + </p> + <p> + With these resolutions I began to be restored to some degree of quiet in + my mind; and having, after almost three months' stay at Bassorah, disposed + of some goods, but having a great quantity left, we hired boats according + to the Dutchman's direction, and went up to Bagdad, or Babylon, on the + river Tigris, or rather Euphrates. We had a very considerable cargo of + goods with us, and therefore made a great figure there, and were received + with respect. We had, in particular, two-and-forty bales of Indian stuffs + of sundry sorts, silks, muslins, and fine chintz; we had fifteen bales of + very fine China silks, and seventy packs or bales of spices, particularly + cloves and nutmegs, with other goods. We were bid money here for our + cloves, but the Dutchman advised us not to part with them, and told us we + should get a better price at Aleppo, or in the Levant; so we prepared for + the caravan. + </p> + <p> + We concealed our having any gold or pearls as much as we could, and + therefore sold three or four bales of China silks and Indian calicoes, to + raise money to buy camels and to pay the customs which are taken at + several places, and for our provisions over the deserts. + </p> + <p> + I travelled this journey, careless to the last degree of my goods or + wealth, believing that, as I came by it all by rapine and violence, God + would direct that it should be taken from me again in the same manner; + and, indeed, I think I might say I was very willing it should be so. But, + as I had a merciful Protector above me, so I had a most faithful steward, + counsellor, partner, or whatever I might call him, who was my guide, my + pilot, my governor, my everything, and took care both of me and of all we + had; and though he had never been in any of these parts of the world, yet + he took the care of all upon him; and in about nine-and-fifty days we + arrived from Bassorah, at the mouth of the river Tigris or Euphrates, + through the desert, and through Aleppo to Alexandria, or, as we call it, + Scanderoon, in the Levant. + </p> + <p> + Here William and I, and the other two, our faithful comrades, debated what + we should do; and here William and I resolved to separate from the other + two, they resolving to go with the Dutchman into Holland, by the means of + some Dutch ship which lay then in the road. William and I told them we + resolved to go and settle in the Morea, which then belonged to the + Venetians. + </p> + <p> + It is true we acted wisely in it not to let them know whither we went, + seeing we had resolved to separate; but we took our old doctor's + directions how to write to him in Holland, and in England, that we might + have intelligence from him on occasion, and promised to give him an + account how to write to us, which we afterwards did, as may in time be + made out. + </p> + <p> + We stayed here some time after they were gone, till at length, not being + thoroughly resolved whither to go till then, a Venetian ship touched at + Cyprus, and put in at Scanderoon to look for freight home. We took the + hint, and bargaining for our passage, and the freight of our goods, we + embarked for Venice, where, in two-and-twenty days, we arrived safe, with + all our treasure, and with such a cargo, take our goods and our money and + our jewels together, as, I believed, was never brought into the city by + two single men, since the state of Venice had a being. + </p> + <p> + We kept ourselves here <i>incognito</i> for a great while, passing for two + Armenian merchants still, as we had done before; and by this time we had + gotten so much of the Persian and Armenian jargon, which they talked at + Bassorah and Bagdad, and everywhere that we came in the country, as was + sufficient to make us able to talk to one another, so as not to be + understood by anybody, though sometimes hardly by ourselves. + </p> + <p> + Here we converted all our effects into money, settled our abode as for a + considerable time, and William and I, maintaining an inviolable friendship + and fidelity to one another, lived like two brothers; we neither had or + sought any separate interest; we conversed seriously and gravely, and upon + the subject of our repentance continually; we never changed, that is to + say, so as to leave off our Armenian garbs; and we were called, at Venice, + the two Grecians. + </p> + <p> + I had been two or three times going to give a detail of our wealth, but it + will appear incredible, and we had the greatest difficulty in the world + how to conceal it, being justly apprehensive lest we might be assassinated + in that country for our treasure. At length William told me he began to + think now that he must never see England any more, and that indeed he did + not much concern himself about it; but seeing we had gained so great + wealth, and he had some poor relations in England, if I was willing, he + would write to know if they were living, and to know what condition they + were in, and if he found such of them were alive as he had some thoughts + about, he would, with my consent, send them something to better their + condition. + </p> + <p> + I consented most willingly; and accordingly William wrote to a sister and + an uncle, and in about five weeks' time received an answer from them both, + directed to himself, under cover of a hard Armenian name that he had given + himself, viz., Signore Constantine Alexion of Ispahan, at Venice. + </p> + <p> + It was a very moving letter he received from his sister, who, after the + most passionate expressions of joy to hear he was alive, seeing she had + long ago had an account that he was murdered by the pirates in the West + Indies, entreats him to let her know what circumstances he was in; tells + him she was not in any capacity to do anything considerable for him, but + that he should be welcome to her with all her heart; that she was left a + widow, with four children, but kept a little shop in the Minories, by + which she made shift to maintain her family; and that she had sent him + five pounds, lest he should want money, in a strange country, to bring him + home. + </p> + <p> + I could see the letter brought tears out of his eyes as he read it; and, + indeed, when he showed it to me, and the little bill for five pounds, upon + an English merchant in Venice, it brought tears out of my eyes too. + </p> + <p> + After we had been both affected sufficiently with the tenderness and + kindness of this letter, he turns to me; says he, "What shall I do for + this poor woman?" I mused a while; at last says I, "I will tell you what + you shall do for her. She has sent you five pounds, and she has four + children, and herself, that is five; such a sum, from a poor woman in her + circumstances, is as much as five thousand pounds is to us; you shall send + her a bill of exchange for five thousand pounds English money, and bid her + conceal her surprise at it till she hears from you again; but bid her + leave off her shop, and go and take a house somewhere in the country, not + far off from London, and stay there, in a moderate figure, till she hears + from you again." + </p> + <p> + "Now," says William, "I perceive by it that you have some thoughts of + venturing into England." + </p> + <p> + "Indeed, William," said I, "you mistake me; but it presently occurred to + me that you should venture, for what have you done that you may not be + seen there? Why should I desire to keep you from your relations, purely to + keep me company?" + </p> + <p> + William looked very affectionately upon me. "Nay," says he, "we have + embarked together so long, and come together so far, I am resolved I will + never part with thee as long as I live, go where thou wilt, or stay where + thou wilt; and as for my sister," said William, "I cannot send her such a + sum of money, for whose is all this money we have? It is most of it + thine." + </p> + <p> + "No, William," said I, "there is not a penny of it mine but what is yours + too, and I won't have anything but an equal share with you, and therefore + you shall send it to her; if not, I will send it." + </p> + <p> + "Why," says William, "it will make the poor woman distracted; she will be + so surprised she will go out of her wits." + </p> + <p> + "Well," said I, "William, you may do it prudently; send her a bill backed + of a hundred pounds, and bid her expect more in a post or two, and that + you will send her enough to live on without keeping shop, and then send + her more." + </p> + <p> + Accordingly William sent her a very kind letter, with a bill upon a + merchant in London for a hundred and sixty pounds, and bid her comfort + herself with the hope that he should be able in a little time to send her + more. About ten days after, he sent her another bill of five hundred and + forty pounds; and a post or two after, another for three hundred pounds, + making in all a thousand pounds; and told her he would send her sufficient + to leave off her shop, and directed her to take a house as above. + </p> + <p> + He waited then till he received an answer to all the three letters, with + an account that she had received the money, and, which I did not expect, + that she had not let any other acquaintance know that she had received a + shilling from anybody, or so much as that he was alive, and would not till + she had heard again. + </p> + <p> + When he showed me this letter, "Well, William," said I, "this woman is fit + to be trusted with life or anything; send her the rest of the five + thousand pounds, and I'll venture to England with you, to this woman's + house, whenever you will." + </p> + <p> + In a word, we sent her five thousand pounds in good bills; and she + received them very punctually, and in a little time sent her brother word + that she had pretended to her uncle that she was sickly and could not + carry on the trade any longer, and that she had taken a large house about + four miles from London, under pretence of letting lodgings for her + livelihood; and, in short, intimated as if she understood that he intended + to come over to be <i>incognito</i>, assuring him he should be as retired + as he pleased. + </p> + <p> + This was opening the very door for us that we thought had been effectually + shut for this life; and, in a word, we resolved to venture, but to keep + ourselves entirely concealed, both as to name and every other + circumstance; and accordingly William sent his sister word how kindly he + took her prudent steps, and that she had guessed right that he desired to + be retired, and that he obliged her not to increase her figure, but live + private, till she might perhaps see him. + </p> + <p> + He was going to send the letter away. "Come, William," said I, "you shan't + send her an empty letter; tell her you have a friend coming with you that + must be as retired as yourself, and I'll send her five thousand pounds + more." + </p> + <p> + So, in short, we made this poor woman's family rich; and yet, when it came + to the point, my heart failed me, and I durst not venture; and for + William, he would not stir without me; and so we stayed about two years + after this, considering what we should do. + </p> + <p> + You may think, perhaps, that I was very prodigal of my ill-gotten goods, + thus to load a stranger with my bounty, and give a gift like a prince to + one that had been able to merit nothing of me, or indeed know me; but my + condition ought to be considered in this case; though I had money to + profusion, yet I was perfectly destitute of a friend in the world, to have + the least obligation or assistance from, or knew not either where to + dispose or trust anything I had while I lived, or whom to give it to if I + died. + </p> + <p> + When I had reflected upon the manner of my getting of it, I was sometimes + for giving it all to charitable uses, as a debt due to mankind, though I + was no Roman Catholic, and not at all of the opinion that it would + purchase me any repose to my soul; but I thought, as it was got by a + general plunder, and which I could make no satisfaction for, it was due to + the community, and I ought to distribute it for the general good. But + still I was at a loss how, and where, and by whom to settle this charity, + not daring to go home to my own country, lest some of my comrades, + strolled home, should see and detect me, and for the very spoil of my + money, or the purchase of his own pardon, betray and expose me to an + untimely end. + </p> + <p> + Being thus destitute, I say, of a friend, I pitched thus upon William's + sister; the kind step of hers to her brother, whom she thought to be in + distress, signifying a generous mind and a charitable disposition; and + having resolved to make her the object of my first bounty, I did not doubt + but I should purchase something of a refuge for myself, and a kind of a + centre, to which I should tend in my future actions; for really a man that + has a subsistence, and no residence, no place that has a magnetic + influence upon his affections, is in one of the most odd, uneasy + conditions in the world, nor is it in the power of all his money to make + it up to him. + </p> + <p> + It was, as I told you, two years and upwards that we remained at Venice + and thereabout, in the greatest hesitation imaginable, irresolute and + unfixed to the last degree. William's sister importuned us daily to come + to England, and wondered we should not dare to trust her, whom we had to + such a degree obliged to be faithful; and in a manner lamented her being + suspected by us. + </p> + <p> + At last I began to incline; and I said to William, "Come, brother + William," said I (for ever since our discourse at Bassorah I called him + brother), "if you will agree to two or three things with me, I'll go home + to England with all my heart." + </p> + <p> + Says William, "Let me know what they are." + </p> + <p> + "Why, first," says I, "you shall not disclose yourself to any of your + relations in England but your sister—no, not one; secondly, we will + not shave off our mustachios or beards" (for we had all along worn our + beards after the Grecian manner), "nor leave off our long vests, that we + may pass for Grecians and foreigners; thirdly, that we shall never speak + English in public before anybody, your sister excepted; fourthly, that we + will always live together and pass for brothers." + </p> + <p> + William said he would agree to them all with all his heart, but that the + not speaking English would be the hardest, but he would do his best for + that too; so, in a word, we agreed to go from Venice to Naples, where we + converted a large sum of money into bales of silk, left a large sum in a + merchant's hands at Venice, and another considerable sum at Naples, and + took bills of exchange for a great deal too; and yet we came with such a + cargo to London as few American merchants had done for some years, for we + loaded in two ships seventy-three bales of thrown silk, besides thirteen + bales of wrought silks, from the duchy of Milan, shipped at Genoa, with + all which I arrived safely; and some time after I married my faithful + protectress, William's sister, with whom I am much more happy than I + deserve. + </p> + <p> + And now, having so plainly told you that I am come to England, after I + have so boldly owned what life I have led abroad, it is time to leave off, + and say no more for the present, lest some should be willing to inquire + too nicely after your old friend CAPTAIN BOB. + </p> + <p> + [Transcriber's Note: The words "thae" (Scottish dialect for "those") and + "Geat Mogul" ("Great" may be meant) do occur as such in the print copy.] + </p> + <div style="height: 6em;"> + <br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /> + </div> + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Life, Adventures and Piracies of +the Famous Captain Singleton, by Daniel Defoe + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK CAPTAIN SINGLETON *** + +***** This file should be named 6422-h.htm or 6422-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/6/4/2/6422/ + + +Text file produced by Tom Allen, Charles Franks and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team + +HTML file produced by David Widger + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at + www.gutenberg.org/license. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809 +North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email +contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the +Foundation's web site and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + + +</pre> + + </body> +</html> diff --git a/6422.txt b/6422.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dbf81d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/6422.txt @@ -0,0 +1,10387 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Life, Adventures and Piracies of the +Famous Captain Singleton, by Daniel Defoe + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Life, Adventures and Piracies of the Famous Captain Singleton + +Author: Daniel Defoe + +Commentator: Edward Garnett + + +Release Date: September, 2004 [EBook #6422] +This file was first posted on December 10, 2002 +Last Updated: June 20, 2013 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK CAPTAIN SINGLETON *** + + + + +Produced by Tom Allen, Charles Franks and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team + + + + + + + + + +CAPTAIN SINGLETON + + +By Daniel Defoe + + + +With An Introduction By Edward Garnett + + + + +[Transcriber's Note: In the print copy, the following words and those of +the title page are written in intricate, illuminated calligraphy.] + +A TALE WHICH HOLDETH CHILDREN FROM PLAY AND OLD MEN FROM THE CHIMNEY +CORNER + +SIR PHILIP SIDNEY + + + + +THE LIFE ADVENTURES AND PIRACIES OF THE FAMOUS CAPTAIN SINGLETON + + + + +PREFACE + +That all Defoe's novels, with the exception of "Robinson Crusoe," should +have been covered with the dust of neglect for many generations, is a +plain proof of how much fashions in taste affect the popularity of the +British classics. It is true that three generations or so ago, Defoe's +works were edited by both Sir Walter Scott and Hazlitt, and that this +masterly piece of realism, "Captain Singleton," was reprinted a few +years back in "The Camelot Classics," but it is safe to say that out of +every thousand readers of "Robinson Crusoe" only one or two will +have even heard of the "Memoirs of a Cavalier," "Colonel Jack," "Moll +Flanders," or "Captain Singleton." It is indeed distressing to think +that while many scores of thousands of copies of Lord Lytton's flashy +romance, "Paul Clifford," have been devoured by the public, "Captain +Singleton" has remained unread and almost forgotten. But the explanation +is simple. Defoe's plain and homely realism soon grew to be thought +vulgar by people who themselves aspired to be refined and genteel. The +rapid spread of popular education, in the middle of last century, was +responsible for a great many aberrations of taste, and the works of the +two most English of Englishmen, Defoe and Hogarth, were judged to be +hardly fitting for polite society, as we may see from Lamb's Essay on +Hogarth, and from an early edition of Chambers's "Cyclopaedia of English +Literature" (1843), where we are told: "Nor is it needful to show how +elegant and reflective literature, especially, tends to moralise, to +soften, and to adorn the soul and life of man." "Unfortunately the +taste or _circumstances of Defoe led him mostly into low life_, and his +characters are such _as we cannot sympathise with_. The whole arcana +of roguery and villany seems to have been open to him.... It might be +thought that the good taste which led Defoe to write in a style of such +pure and unpretending English, instead of the inflated manner of vulgar +writers, _would have dictated a more careful selection of his subjects_, +and kept him from wandering so frequently into the low and disgusting +purlieus of vice. But this moral and tasteful discrimination seems to +have been wholly wanting," &c. The 'forties were the days when critics +still talked learnedly of the "noble style," &c., "the vulgar," of +"sinking" or "rising" with "the subject," the days when Books of Beauty +were in fashion, and Rembrandt's choice of beggars, wrinkled faces and +grey hairs, for his favourite subjects seemed a low and reprehensible +taste in "high art." Though critics to-day still ingenuously confound an +artist's subject with his treatment of it, and prefer scenes of life to +be idealised rather than realised by writers, we have advanced a little +since the days of the poet Montgomery, and it would be difficult now +to find anybody writing so confidently--"Unfortunately the taste or +circumstances of Defoe led him mostly into low life," however much the +critic might believe it. But let us glance at a few passages in "Captain +Singleton," which may show us why Defoe excels as a realist, and why +his descriptions of "low life" are artistically as perfect as any +descriptions of "higher life" in the works of the English novelists. +Take the following description of kidnapping:-- + + "The woman pretending to take me up in her arms and kiss me, and + play with me, draws the girl a good way from the house, till at + last she makes a fine story to the girl, and bids her go back to + the maid, and tell her where she was with the child; that a + gentlewoman had taken a fancy to the child and was kissing it, but + she should not be frightened, or to that purpose; for they were + but just there; and so while the girl went, she carried me quite + away.--Page 2. + +Now here, in a single sentence, Defoe catches for us the whole soul +and character of the situation. It _seems_ very simple, but it sums up +marvellously an exact observation and knowledge of the arts of the gipsy +child-stealer, of her cunning flattery and brassy boldness, and we can +see the simple little girl running back to the house to tell the nurse +that a fine lady was kissing the child, and had told her to tell where +they were and she should not be frightened, &c.; and this picture again +calls up the hue and cry after the kidnappers and the fruitless hopes of +the parents. In a word, Defoe has condensed in the eight simple lines of +his little scene all that is essential to its living truth; and let the +young writer note that it is ever the sign of the master to do in three +words, or with three strokes, what the ordinary artist does in thirty. +Defoe's imagination is so extraordinarily comprehensive in picking out +just those little matter-of-fact details that suggest all the other +aspects, and that emphasise the character of the scene or situation, +that he makes us believe in the actuality of whatever he is describing. +So real, so living in every detail is this apocryphal narrative, in +"Captain Singleton," of the crossing of Africa by a body of marooned +sailors from the coast of Mozambique to the Gold Coast, that one would +firmly believe Defoe was committing to writing the verbal narrative of +some adventurer in the flesh, if it were not for certain passages--such +as the description of the impossible desert on page 90, which proves +that Defoe was piecing together his description of an imaginary +journey from the geographical records and travellers' tales of his +contemporaries, aided perhaps by the confused yarns of some sailor +friends. How substantially truthful in spirit and in detail is Defoe's +account of Madagascar is proved by the narrative of Robert Drury's +"Captivity in Madagascar," published in 1729. The natives themselves, +as described intimately by Drury, who lived amongst them for many years, +would produce just such an effect as Defoe describes on rough sailors in +their perilous position. The method by which Defoe compels us to accept +improbabilities, and lulls our critical sense asleep, is well shown in +the following passages:-- + + "Thieving, lying, swearing, forswearing, joined to the most + abominable lewdness, was the stated practice of the ship's crew; + adding to it, that with the most unsufferable boasts of their own + courage, they were, generally speaking, the most complete cowards + that I ever met with."--Page 7. + + "All the seamen in a body came up to the rail of the quarter-deck, + where the captain was walking with some of his officers, and + appointing the boatswain to speak for them, he went up, and falling + on his knees to the captain, begged of him in the humblest manner + possible, to receive the four men on board again, offering to answer + for their fidelity, or to have them kept in chains, till they came + to Lisbon, and there to be delivered up to justice, rather than, as + they said, to have them left, to be murdered by savages, or devoured + by wild beasts. It was a great while ere the captain took any notice + of them, but when he did, he ordered the boatswain to be seized, and + threatened to bring him to the capstan for speaking for them.... + Upon this severity, one of the seamen, bolder than the rest, but + still with all possible respect to the captain, besought his honour, + as he called him, that he would give leave to some more of them to + go on shore, and die with their companions, or, if possible, to + assist them to resist the barbarians."--Page 18. + +Now the first passage we have quoted about the cowardice, &c., of the +Portuguese crew is not in keeping with the second passage, which shows +the men as "wishing to die with their companions"; but so actual is +the scene of the seamen "in a body coming up to the rail of the +quarter-deck," that we cannot but believe the thing happened so, just as +we believe in all the thousand little details of the imaginary narrative +of "Robinson Crusoe." This feat of the imagination Defoe strengthens +in the most artful manner, by putting in the mouths of his characters +various reflections to substantiate the narrative. For example, in the +description, on page 263, of the savages who lined the perilous channel +in a half-moon, where the European ship lay, we find the afterthoughts +are added so naturally, that they would carry conviction to any judge or +jury:-- + + "They little thought what service they had done us, and how + unwittingly, and by the greatest ignorance, they had made + themselves pilots to us, while we, having not sounded the place, + might have been lost before we were aware. _It is true we might + have sounded our new harbour, before we had ventured out; but I + cannot say for certain, whether we should or not; for I, for my + part, had not the least suspicion of what our real case was; + however, I say, perhaps, before we had weighed, we should have + looked about us a little._" + +Turning to the other literary qualities that make Defoe's novels great, +if little read, classics, how delightful are the little satiric touches +that add grave weight to the story. Consider the following: "My good +gipsy mother, for some of her worthy actions, no doubt, happened in +process of time to be hanged, and as this fell out something too soon +for me to be perfected in the strolling trade," &c.(p. 3). Every other +word here is dryly satiric, and the large free callousness and careless +brutality of Defoe's days with regard to the life of criminals is +conveyed in half a sentence. And what an amount of shrewd observation is +summed up in this one saying: "Upon these foundations, William said he +was satisfied we might trust them; for, says William, I would as soon +trust a man whose interest binds him to be just to me, as a man whose +principle binds himself" (p. 227). Extremely subtle is also this remark: +"_Why, says I, did you ever know a pirate repent?_ At this he started a +little and returned, _At the gallows_ I have known _one_ repent, and +I _hope_ thou wilt be the second." The character of William the Quaker +pirate is a masterpiece of shrewd humour. He is the first Quaker brought +into English fiction, and we know of no other Friend in latter-day +fiction to equal him. Defoe in his inimitable manner has defined surely +and deftly the peculiar characteristics of the sect in this portrait. On +three separate occasions we find William saving unfortunate natives +or defenceless prisoners from the cruel and wicked barbarity of +the sailors. At page 183, for example, the reader will find a most +penetrating analysis of the dense stupidity which so often accompanies +man's love of bloodshed. The sketch of the second lieutenant, who was +for "murdering the negroes to make them tell," when he could not make +them even understand what he wanted, is worthy of Tolstoy. We have not +space here to dwell upon the scores of passages of similar deep insight +which make "Captain Singleton" a most true and vivid commentary on the +life of Defoe's times, but we may call special attention to the passage +on page 189 which describe the sale of the negroes to the planters; to +the description of the awakening of the conscience of Captain Singleton +through terror at the fire-cloud (page 222); and to the extraordinarily +picturesque conversation between William and the captive Dutchman (page +264). Finally, if the reader wishes to taste Defoe's flavour in its +perfection let him examine carefully those passages in the concluding +twenty pages of the book, wherein Captain Singleton is shown as +awakening to the wickedness of his past life, and the admirable dry +reasoning of William by which the Quaker prevents him from committing +suicide and persuades him to keep his ill-gotten wealth, "with a +resolution to do what right with it we are able; and who knows what +opportunity Providence may put into our hands.... As it is without +doubt, our present business is to go to some place of safety, where we +may wait His will." How admirable is the passage about William's sister, +the widow with four children who kept a little shop in the Minories, +and that in which the penitent ex-pirates are shown us as hesitating in +Venice for two years before they durst venture to England for fear of +the gallows. + +"Captain Singleton" was published in 1720, a year after "Robinson +Crusoe," when Defoe was fifty-nine. Twenty years before had seen "The +True-Born Englishman" and "The Shortest Way with the Dissenters"; and +we are told that from "June 1687 to almost the very week of his death in +1731 a stream of controversial books and pamphlets poured from his +pen commenting upon and marking every important passing event." The +fecundity of Defoe as a journalist alone surpasses that of any great +journalist we can name, William Cobbett not excepted, and we may add +that the style of "Captain Singleton," like that of "Robinson Crusoe," +is so perfect that there is not a single ineffective passage, or indeed +a weak sentence, to be found in the book. + +EDWARD GARNETT. + + + + +The following is a list of Defoe's works: "New Discovery of Old +Intrigue" (verse), 1691. "Character of Dr. Samuel Annesley" (verse), +1697. "The Pacificator" (verse), 1700. "True-Born Englishman" (verse), +1701. "The Mock Mourners" (verse), 1702. "Reformation of Manners" +(verse), 1702. "New Test of Church of England's Loyalty," 1702. +"Shortest Way with the Dissenters," 1702. "Ode to the Athenian +Society," 1703. "Enquiry into Acgill's General Translation," 1703. "More +Reformation" (verse), 1703. "Hymn to the Pillory," 1703. "The +Storm" (Tale), 1704. "Layman's Sermon on the Late Storm," 1704. "The +Consolidator; or, Memoirs of Sundry Transactions from the World in the +Moon," 1704. "Elegy on Author of 'True-Born Englishman,'" 1704. "Hymn +to Victory," 1704. "Giving Alms no Charity," 1704. "The Dyet of +Poland" (verse), 1705. "Apparition of Mrs. Veal," 1706. "Sermon on the +Filling-up of Dr. Burgess's Meeting-house," 1706. "Jure Divino" +(verse), 1706. "Caledonia" (verse), 1706. "History of the Union of +Great Britain," 1709. "Short Enquiry into a Late Duel," 1713. "A General +History of Trade," 1713. "Wars of Charles III.," 1715. "The Family +Instruction" (two eds.), 1715. "Hymn to the Mob," 1715. "Memoirs of +the Church of Scotland," 1717. "Life and Death of Count Patkul," 1717. +"Memoirs of Duke of Shrewsbury," 1718. "Memoirs of Daniel Williams," +1718. "The Life and Strange Surprising Adventures of Robinson Crusoe, of +York, Mariner," 1719. "The Farther Adventures of Robinson Crusoe," 1719. +"The Dumb Philosopher: or, Great Britain's Wonder," 1719. "The King of +Pirates" (Capt. Avery), 1719. "Life of Baron de Goertz," 1719. "Life and +Adventures of Duncan Campbell," 1720. "Mr. Campbell's Pacquet," 1720. +"Memoirs of a Cavalier," 1720. "Life of Captain Singleton," 1720. +"Serious Reflections during the Life and Surprising Adventures of +Robinson Crusoe," 1720. "The Supernatural Philosopher; or, The Mysteries +of Magick," 1720. Translation of Du Fresnoy's "Compleat Art of Painting" +(verse), 1720. "Moll Flanders," 1722, "Journal of the Plague Year," +1722. "Due Preparations for the Plague," 1722. "Life of Cartouche," +1722. "History of Colonel Jacque," 1722. "Religious Courtship," 1722. +"History of Peter the Great," 1723. "The Highland Rogue" (Rob Roy), +1723. "The Fortunate Mistress" (Roxana), 1724. "Narrative of Murders at +Calais," 1724. "Life of John Sheppard," 1724. "Robberies, Escapes, +&c., of John Sheppard," 1724. "The Great Law of Subordination; or, The +Insolence and Insufferable Behaviour of Servants in England," 1724. "A +Tour through Great Britain," 1724-6. "New Voyage Round the World," +1725. "Account of Jonathan Wild," 1725. "Account of John Gow," 1725. +"Everybody's Business is Nobody's Business" (on Servants), 1725. "The +Complete English Tradesman," 1725; vol. ii., 1727. "The Friendly Demon," +1726. "Mere Nature Delineated" (Peter the Wild Boy), 1726. "Political +History of the Devil," 1726. "Essay upon Literature and the Original +of Letters," 1726. "History of Discoveries," 1726-7. "The Protestant +Monastery," 1726. "A System of Magic," 1726. "Parochial Tyranny," 1727. +"Treatise concerning Use and Abuse of Marriage," 1727. "Secrets of +Invisible World Discovered; or, History and Reality of Apparitions," +1727, 1728. "A New Family Instructor," 1728. "Augusta Triumphans," 1728. +"Plan of English Commerce," 1728. "Second Thoughts are Best" (on Street +Robberies), 1728. "Street Robberies Considered," 1728. "Humble Proposal +to People of England for Increase of Trade, &c.," 1729. "Preface to +R. Dodsley's Poem 'Servitude'" 1729. "Effectual Scheme for Preventing +Street Robberies," 1731. + +Besides the above-named publications a large number of further tracts by +Defoe are extant, on matters of Politics and Church. + + + + +THE LIFE, ADVENTURES, AND PIRACIES OF CAPTAIN SINGLETON + + +As it is usual for great persons, whose lives have been remarkable, and +whose actions deserve recording to posterity, to insist much upon their +originals, give full accounts of their families, and the histories of +their ancestors, so, that I may be methodical, I shall do the same, +though I can look but a very little way into my pedigree, as you will +see presently. + +If I may believe the woman whom I was taught to call mother, I was +a little boy, of about two years old, very well dressed, had a +nursery-maid to attend me, who took me out on a fine summer's evening +into the fields towards Islington, as she pretended, to give the child +some air; a little girl being with her, of twelve or fourteen years old, +that lived in the neighbourhood. The maid, whether by appointment or +otherwise, meets with a fellow, her sweetheart, as I suppose; he carries +her into a public-house, to give her a pot and a cake; and while they +were toying in the house the girl plays about, with me in her hand, in +the garden and at the door, sometimes in sight, sometimes out of sight, +thinking no harm. + +At this juncture comes by one of those sort of people who, it seems, +made it their business to spirit away little children. This was a +hellish trade in those days, and chiefly practised where they found +little children very well dressed, or for bigger children, to sell them +to the plantations. + +The woman, pretending to take me up in her arms and kiss me, and play +with me, draws the girl a good way from the house, till at last she +makes a fine story to the girl, and bids her go back to the maid, and +tell her where she was with the child; that a gentlewoman had taken +a fancy to the child, and was kissing of it, but she should not be +frighted, or to that purpose; for they were but just there; and so, +while the girl went, she carries me quite away. + +From this time, it seems, I was disposed of to a beggar woman that +wanted a pretty little child to set out her case; and after that, to +a gipsy, under whose government I continued till I was about six years +old. And this woman, though I was continually dragged about with her +from one part of the country to another, yet never let me want for +anything; and I called her mother; though she told me at last she was +not my mother, but that she bought me for twelve shillings of another +woman, who told her how she came by me, and told her that my name was +Bob Singleton, not Robert, but plain Bob; for it seems they never knew +by what name I was christened. + +It is in vain to reflect here, what a terrible fright the careless hussy +was in that lost me; what treatment she received from my justly enraged +father and mother, and the horror these must be in at the thoughts of +their child being thus carried away; for as I never knew anything of the +matter, but just what I have related, nor who my father and mother were, +so it would make but a needless digression to talk of it here. + +My good gipsy mother, for some of her worthy actions no doubt, happened +in process of time to be hanged; and as this fell out something too soon +for me to be perfected in the strolling trade, the parish where I was +left, which for my life I can't remember, took some care of me, to be +sure; for the first thing I can remember of myself afterwards, was, that +I went to a parish school, and the minister of the parish used to talk +to me to be a good boy; and that, though I was but a poor boy, if I +minded my book, and served God, I might make a good man. + +I believe I was frequently removed from one town to another, perhaps as +the parishes disputed my supposed mother's last settlement. Whether I +was so shifted by passes, or otherwise, I know not; but the town where +I last was kept, whatever its name was, must be not far off from the +seaside; for a master of a ship who took a fancy to me, was the first +that brought me to a place not far from Southampton, which I afterwards +knew to be Bussleton; and there I attended the carpenters, and such +people as were employed in building a ship for him; and when it was +done, though I was not above twelve years old, he carried me to sea with +him on a voyage to Newfoundland. + +I lived well enough, and pleased my master so well that he called me his +own boy; and I would have called him father, but he would not allow it, +for he had children of his own. I went three or four voyages with him, +and grew a great sturdy boy, when, coming home again from the banks of +Newfoundland, we were taken by an Algerine rover, or man-of-war; which, +if my account stands right, was about the year 1695, for you may be sure +I kept no journal. + +I was not much concerned at the disaster, though I saw my master, after +having been wounded by a splinter in the head during the engagement, +very barbarously used by the Turks; I say, I was not much concerned, +till, upon some unlucky thing I said, which, as I remember, was about +abusing my master, they took me and beat me most unmercifully with a +flat stick on the soles of my feet, so that I could neither go or stand +for several days together. + +But my good fortune was my friend upon this occasion; for, as they were +sailing away with our ship in tow as a prize, steering for the Straits, +and in sight of the bay of Cadiz, the Turkish rover was attacked by two +great Portuguese men-of-war, and taken and carried into Lisbon. + +As I was not much concerned at my captivity, not indeed understanding +the consequences of it, if it had continued, so I was not suitably +sensible of my deliverance; nor, indeed, was it so much a deliverance +to me as it would otherwise have been, for my master, who was the only +friend I had in the world, died at Lisbon of his wounds; and I being +then almost reduced to my primitive state, viz., of starving, had this +addition to it, that it was in a foreign country too, where I knew +nobody and could not speak a word of their language. However, I fared +better here than I had reason to expect; for when all the rest of our +men had their liberty to go where they would, I, that knew not whither +to go, stayed in the ship for several days, till at length one of the +lieutenants seeing me, inquired what that young English dog did there, +and why they did not turn him on shore. + +I heard him, and partly understood what he meant, though not what he +said, and began then to be in a terrible fright; for I knew not where to +get a bit of bread; when the pilot of the ship, an old seaman, seeing me +look very dull, came to me, and speaking broken English to me, told me +I must be gone. "Whither must I go?" said I. "Where you will," said he, +"home to your own country, if you will." "How must I go thither?" said +I. "Why, have you no friend?" said he. "No," said I, "not in the world, +but that dog," pointing to the ship's dog (who, having stolen a piece +of meat just before, had brought it close by me, and I had taken it +from him, and ate it), "for he has been a good friend, and brought me my +dinner." + +"Well, well," says he, "you must have your dinner. Will you go with me?" +"Yes," says I, "with all my heart." In short, the old pilot took me home +with him, and used me tolerably well, though I fared hard enough; and I +lived with him about two years, during which time he was soliciting his +business, and at length got to be master or pilot under Don Garcia de +Pimentesia de Carravallas, captain of a Portuguese galleon or carrack, +which was bound to Goa, in the East Indies; and immediately having +gotten his commission, put me on board to look after his cabin, in +which he had stored himself with abundance of liquors, succades, sugar, +spices, and other things, for his accommodation in the voyage, and laid +in afterwards a considerable quantity of European goods, fine lace and +linen; and also baize, woollen cloth, stuffs, &c., under the pretence of +his clothes. + +I was too young in the trade to keep any journal of this voyage, though +my master, who was, for a Portuguese, a pretty good artist, prompted me +to it; but my not understanding the language was one hindrance; at least +it served me for an excuse. However, after some time, I began to look +into his charts and books; and, as I could write a tolerable hand, +understood some Latin, and began to have a little smattering of +the Portuguese tongue, so I began to get a superficial knowledge of +navigation, but not such as was likely to be sufficient to carry me +through a life of adventure, as mine was to be. In short, I learned +several material things in this voyage among the Portuguese; I learned +particularly to be an arrant thief and a bad sailor; and I think I may +say they are the best masters for teaching both these of any nation in +the world. + +We made our way for the East Indies, by the coast of Brazil; not that it +is in the course of sailing the way thither, but our captain, either +on his own account, or by the direction of the merchants, went thither +first, where at All Saints' Bay, or, as they call it in Portugal, the +Rio de Todos los Santos, we delivered near a hundred tons of goods, and +took in a considerable quantity of gold, with some chests of sugar, and +seventy or eighty great rolls of tobacco, every roll weighing at least a +hundredweight. + +Here, being lodged on shore by my master's order, I had the charge +of the captain's business, he having seen me very diligent for my own +master; and in requital for his mistaken confidence, I found means to +secure, that is to say, to steal, about twenty moidores out of the +gold that was shipped on board by the merchants, and this was my first +adventure. + +We had a tolerable voyage from hence to the Cape de Bona Speranza; and +I was reputed as a mighty diligent servant to my master, and very +faithful. I was diligent indeed, but I was very far from honest; +however, they thought me honest, which, by the way, was their very great +mistake. Upon this very mistake the captain took a particular liking to +me, and employed me frequently on his own occasion; and, on the other +hand, in recompense for my officious diligence, I received several +particular favours from him; particularly, I was, by the captain's +command, made a kind of a steward under the ship's steward, for such +provisions as the captain demanded for his own table. He had another +steward for his private stores besides, but my office concerned only +what the captain called for of the ship's stores for his private use. + +However, by this means I had opportunity particularly to take care of my +master's man, and to furnish myself with sufficient provisions to make +me live much better than the other people in the ship; for the captain +seldom ordered anything out of the ship's stores, as above, but I snipt +some of it for my own share. We arrived at Goa, in the East Indies, in +about seven months from Lisbon, and remained there eight more; during +which time I had indeed nothing to do, my master being generally on +shore, but to learn everything that is wicked among the Portuguese, a +nation the most perfidious and the most debauched, the most insolent and +cruel, of any that pretend to call themselves Christians, in the world. + +Thieving, lying, swearing, forswearing, joined to the most abominable +lewdness, was the stated practice of the ship's crew; adding to it, +that, with the most insufferable boasts of their own courage, they were, +generally speaking, the most complete cowards that I ever met with; +and the consequence of their cowardice was evident upon many occasions. +However, there was here and there one among them that was not so bad +as the rest; and, as my lot fell among them, it made me have the most +contemptible thoughts of the rest, as indeed they deserved. + +I was exactly fitted for their society indeed; for I had no sense of +virtue or religion upon me. I had never heard much of either, except +what a good old parson had said to me when I was a child of about eight +or nine years old; nay, I was preparing and growing up apace to be as +wicked as anybody could be, or perhaps ever was. Fate certainly thus +directed my beginning, knowing that I had work which I had to do in the +world, which nothing but one hardened against all sense of honesty +or religion could go through; and yet, even in this state of original +wickedness, I entertained such a settled abhorrence of the abandoned +vileness of the Portuguese, that I could not but hate them most heartily +from the beginning, and all my life afterwards. They were so brutishly +wicked, so base and perfidious, not only to strangers but to one +another, so meanly submissive when subjected, so insolent, or barbarous +and tyrannical, when superior, that I thought there was something in +them that shocked my very nature. Add to this that it is natural to an +Englishman to hate a coward, it all joined together to make the devil +and a Portuguese equally my aversion. + +However, according to the English proverb, he that is shipped with the +devil must sail with the devil; I was among them, and I managed myself +as well as I could. My master had consented that I should assist the +captain in the office, as above; but, as I understood afterwards that +the captain allowed my master half a moidore a month for my service, and +that he had my name upon the ship's books also, I expected that when +the ship came to be paid four months' wages at the Indies, as they, it +seems, always do, my master would let me have something for myself. + +But I was wrong in my man, for he was none of that kind; he had taken +me up as in distress, and his business was to keep me so, and make his +market of me as well as he could, which I began to think of after a +different manner than I did at first, for at first I thought he had +entertained me in mere charity, upon seeing my distressed circumstances, +but did not doubt but when he put me on board the ship, I should have +some wages for my service. + +But he thought, it seems, quite otherwise; and when I procured one to +speak to him about it, when the ship was paid at Goa, he flew into the +greatest rage imaginable, and called me English dog, young heretic, and +threatened to put me into the Inquisition. Indeed, of all the names +the four-and-twenty letters could make up, he should not have called me +heretic; for as I knew nothing about religion, neither Protestant from +Papist, or either of them from a Mahometan, I could never be a heretic. +However, it passed but a little, but, as young as I was, I had been +carried into the Inquisition, and there, if they had asked me if I was +a Protestant or a Catholic, I should have said yes to that which came +first. If it had been the Protestant they had asked first, it had +certainly made a martyr of me for I did not know what. + +But the very priest they carried with them, or chaplain of the ship, +as we called him, saved me; for seeing me a boy entirely ignorant of +religion, and ready to do or say anything they bid me, he asked me some +questions about it, which he found I answered so very simply, that +he took it upon him to tell them he would answer for my being a good +Catholic, and he hoped he should be the means of saving my soul, and he +pleased himself that it was to be a work of merit to him; so he made me +as good a Papist as any of them in about a week's time. + +I then told him my case about my master; how, it is true, he had taken +me up in a miserable case on board a man-of-war at Lisbon; and I was +indebted to him for bringing me on board this ship; that if I had been +left at Lisbon, I might have starved, and the like; and therefore I +was willing to serve him, but that I hoped he would give me some little +consideration for my service, or let me know how long he expected I +should serve him for nothing. + +It was all one; neither the priest nor any one else could prevail with +him, but that I was not his servant but his slave, that he took me in +the Algerine, and that I was a Turk, only pretended to be an English boy +to get my liberty, and he would carry me to the Inquisition as a Turk. + +This frighted me out of my wits, for I had nobody to vouch for me what I +was, or from whence I came; but the good Padre Antonio, for that was his +name, cleared me of that part by a way I did not understand; for he came +to me one morning with two sailors, and told me they must search me, to +bear witness that I was not a Turk. I was amazed at them, and frighted, +and did not understand them, nor could I imagine what they intended to +do to me. However, stripping me, they were soon satisfied, and Father +Antony bade me be easy, for they could all witness that I was no Turk. +So I escaped that part of my master's cruelty. + +And now I resolved from that time to run away from him if I could, but +there was no doing of it there, for there were not ships of any nation +in the world in that port, except two or three Persian vessels from +Ormus, so that if I had offered to go away from him, he would have had +me seized on shore, and brought on board by force; so that I had no +remedy but patience. And this he brought to an end too as soon as he +could, for after this he began to use me ill, and not only to straiten +my provisions, but to beat and torture me in a barbarous manner for +every trifle, so that, in a word, my life began to be very miserable. + +The violence of this usage of me, and the impossibility of my escape +from his hands, set my head a-working upon all sorts of mischief, and in +particular I resolved, after studying all other ways to deliver myself, +and finding all ineffectual, I say, I resolved to murder him. With this +hellish resolution in my head, I spent whole nights and days contriving +how to put it in execution, the devil prompting me very warmly to the +fact. I was indeed entirely at a loss for the means, for I had neither +gun or sword, nor any weapon to assault him with; poison I had my +thoughts much upon, but knew not where to get any; or, if I might have +got it, I did not know the country word for it, or by what name to ask +for it. + +In this manner I quitted the fact, intentionally, a hundred and a +hundred times; but Providence, either for his sake or for mine, always +frustrated my designs, and I could never bring it to pass; so I was +obliged to continue in his chains till the ship, having taken in her +loading, set sail for Portugal. + +I can say nothing here to the manner of our voyage, for, as I said, I +kept no journal; but this I can give an account of, that having been +once as high as the Cape of Good Hope, as we call it, or Cabo de Bona +Speranza, as they call it, we were driven back again by a violent storm +from the W.S.W., which held us six days and nights a great way to the +eastward, and after that, standing afore the wind for several days more, +we at last came to an anchor on the coast of Madagascar. + +The storm had been so violent that the ship had received a great deal of +damage, and it required some time to repair her; so, standing in nearer +the shore, the pilot, my master, brought the ship into a very good +harbour, where we rid in twenty-six fathoms water, about half a mile +from the shore. + +While the ship rode here there happened a most desperate mutiny among +the men, upon account of some deficiency in their allowance, which came +to that height that they threatened the captain to set him on shore, and +go back with the ship to Goa. I wished they would with all my heart, +for I was full of mischief in my head, and ready enough to do any. So, +though I was but a boy, as they called me, yet I prompted the mischief +all I could, and embarked in it so openly, that I escaped very little +being hanged in the first and most early part of my life; for the +captain had some notice that there was a design laid by some of the +company to murder him; and having, partly by money and promises, and +partly by threatening and torture, brought two fellows to confess the +particulars, and the names of the persons concerned, they were presently +apprehended, till, one accusing another, no less than sixteen men were +seized and put into irons, whereof I was one. + +The captain, who was made desperate by his danger, resolving to clear +the ship of his enemies, tried us all, and we were all condemned to die. +The manner of his process I was too young to take notice of; but the +purser and one of the gunners were hanged immediately, and I expected it +with the rest. I do not remember any great concern I was under about it, +only that I cried very much, for I knew little then of this world, and +nothing at all of the next. + +However, the captain contented himself with executing these two, and +some of the rest, upon their humble submission and promise of future +good behaviour, were pardoned; but five were ordered to be set on shore +on the island and left there, of which I was one. My master used all his +interest with the captain to have me excused, but could not obtain it; +for somebody having told him that I was one of them who was singled out +to have killed him, when my master desired I might not be set on shore, +the captain told him I should stay on board if he desired it, but then +I should be hanged, so he might choose for me which he thought best. The +captain, it seems, was particularly provoked at my being concerned in +the treachery, because of his having been so kind to me, and of his +having singled me out to serve him, as I have said above; and this, +perhaps, obliged him to give my master such a rough choice, either +to set me on shore or to have me hanged on board. And had my master, +indeed, known what good-will I had for him, he would not have been long +in choosing for me; for I had certainly determined to do him a mischief +the first opportunity I had for it. This was, therefore, a good +providence for me to keep me from dipping my hands in blood, and it made +me more tender afterwards in matters of blood than I believe I should +otherwise have been. But as to my being one of them that was to kill +the captain, that I was wronged in, for I was not the person, but it was +really one of them that were pardoned, he having the good luck not to +have that part discovered. + +I was now to enter upon a part of independent life, a thing I was indeed +very ill prepared to manage, for I was perfectly loose and dissolute +in my behaviour, bold and wicked while I was under government, and now +perfectly unfit to be trusted with liberty, for I was as ripe for any +villainy as a young fellow that had no solid thought ever placed in his +mind could be supposed to be. Education, as you have heard, I had none; +and all the little scenes of life I had passed through had been full +of dangers and desperate circumstances; but I was either so young or so +stupid, that I escaped the grief and anxiety of them, for want of having +a sense of their tendency and consequences. + +This thoughtless, unconcerned temper had one felicity indeed in it, that +it made me daring and ready for doing any mischief, and kept off the +sorrow which otherwise ought to have attended me when I fell into any +mischief; that this stupidity was instead of a happiness to me, for it +left my thoughts free to act upon means of escape and deliverance in my +distress, however great it might be; whereas my companions in the misery +were so sunk by their fear and grief, that they abandoned themselves to +the misery of their condition, and gave over all thought but of their +perishing and starving, being devoured by wild beasts, murdered, and +perhaps eaten by cannibals, and the like. + +I was but a young fellow, about seventeen or eighteen; but hearing what +was to be my fate, I received it with no appearance of discouragement; +but I asked what my master said to it, and being told that he had used +his utmost interest to save me, but the captain had answered I should +either go on shore or be hanged on board, which he pleased, I then gave +over all hope of being received again. I was not very thankful in my +thoughts to my master for his soliciting the captain for me, because I +knew that what he did was not in kindness to me so much as in kindness +to himself; I mean, to preserve the wages which he got for me, which +amounted to above six dollars a month, including what the captain +allowed him for my particular service to him. + +When I understood that my master was so apparently kind, I asked if I +might not be admitted to speak with him, and they told me I might, if my +master would come down to me, but I could not be allowed to come up to +him; so then I desired my master might be spoke to to come to me, and he +accordingly came to me. I fell on my knees to him, and begged he would +forgive me what I had done to displease him; and indeed the resolution +I had taken to murder him lay with some horror upon my mind just at +that time, so that I was once just a-going to confess it, and beg him +to forgive me, but I kept it in. He told me he had done all he could to +obtain my pardon of the captain, but could not and he knew no way for me +but to have patience, and submit to my fate; and if they came to speak +with any ship of their nation at the Cape, he would endeavour to have +them stand in, and fetch us off again, if we might be found. + +Then I begged I might have my clothes on shore with me. He told me he +was afraid I should have little need of clothes, for he did not see how +we could long subsist on the island, and that he had been told that the +inhabitants were cannibals or men-eaters (though he had no reason for +that suggestion), and we should not be able to live among them. I +told him I was not so afraid of that as I was of starving for want of +victuals; and as for the inhabitants being cannibals, I believed we +should be more likely to eat them than they us, if we could but get at +them. But I was mightily concerned, I said, we should have no weapons +with us to defend ourselves, and I begged nothing now, but that he would +give me a gun and a sword, with a little powder and shot. + +He smiled, and said they would signify nothing to us, for it was +impossible for us to pretend to preserve our lives among such a populous +and desperate nation as the people of this island were. I told him that, +however, it would do us this good, for we should not be devoured or +destroyed immediately; so I begged hard for the gun. At last he told me +he did not know whether the captain would give him leave to give me a +gun, and if not, he durst not do it; but he promised to use his interest +to obtain it for me, which he did, and the next day he sent me a gun, +with some ammunition, but told me the captain would not suffer the +ammunition to be given us till we were set all on shore, and till he +was just going to set sail. He also sent me the few clothes I had in the +ship, which indeed were not many. + +Two days after this, we were all carried on shore together; the rest +of my fellow-criminals hearing I had a gun, and some powder and shot, +solicited for liberty to carry the like with them, which was also +granted them; and thus we were set on shore to shift for ourselves. + +At our first coming into the island we were terrified exceedingly with +the sight of the barbarous people, whose figure was made more terrible +to us than it really was by the report we had of them from the seamen; +but when we came to converse with them awhile, we found they were not +cannibals, as was reported, or such as would fall immediately upon us +and eat us up; but they came and sat down by us, and wondered much at +our clothes and arms, and made signs to give us some victuals, such as +they had, which was only roots and plants dug out of the ground for the +present, but they brought us fowls and flesh afterwards in good plenty. + +This encouraged the other four men that were with me very much, for they +were quite dejected before; but now they began to be very familiar with +them, and made signs, that if they would use us kindly, we would stay +and live with them; which they seemed glad of, though they knew little +of the necessity we were under to do so, or how much we were afraid of +them. + +However, upon second thoughts we resolved that we would only stay in +that part so long as the ship rid in the bay, and then making them +believe we were gone with the ship, we would go and place ourselves, if +possible, where there were no inhabitants to be seen, and so live as we +could, or perhaps watch for a ship that might be driven upon the coast +as we were. + +The ship continued a fortnight in the roads, repairing some damage which +had been done her in the late storm, and taking in wood and water; and +during this time, the boat coming often on shore, the men brought us +several refreshments, and the natives believing we only belonged to the +ship, were civil enough. We lived in a kind of a tent on the shore, or +rather a hut, which we made with the boughs of trees, and sometimes in +the night retired to a wood a little out of their way, to let them +think we were gone on board the ship. However, we found them barbarous, +treacherous, and villainous enough in their nature, only civil from +fear, and therefore concluded we should soon fall into their hands when +the ship was gone. + +The sense of this wrought upon my fellow-sufferers even to distraction; +and one of them, being a carpenter, in his mad fit, swam off to the ship +in the night, though she lay then a league to sea, and made such pitiful +moan to be taken in, that the captain was prevailed with at last to take +him in, though they let him lie swimming three hours in the water before +he consented to it. + +Upon this, and his humble submission, the captain received him, and, in +a word, the importunity of this man (who for some time petitioned to be +taken in, though they hanged him as soon as they had him) was such as +could not be resisted; for, after he had swam so long about the ship, +he was not able to reach the shore again; and the captain saw evidently +that the man must be taken on board or suffered to drown, and the whole +ship's company offering to be bound for him for his good behaviour, the +captain at last yielded, and he was taken up, but almost dead with his +being so long in the water. + +When this man was got in, he never left importuning the captain, and all +the rest of the officers, in behalf of us that were behind, but to +the very last day the captain was inexorable; when, at the time their +preparations were making to sail, and orders given to hoist the boats +into the ship, all the seamen in a body came up to the rail of the +quarter-deck, where the captain was walking with some of his officers, +and appointing the boatswain to speak for them, he went up, and falling +on his knees to the captain, begged of him, in the humblest manner +possible, to receive the four men on board again, offering to answer for +their fidelity, or to have them kept in chains till they came to Lisbon, +and there to be delivered up to justice, rather than, as they said, to +have them left to be murdered by savages, or devoured by wild beasts. It +was a great while ere the captain took any notice of them, but when he +did, he ordered the boatswain to be seized, and threatened to bring him +to the capstan for speaking for them. + +Upon this severity, one of the seamen, bolder than the rest, but still +with all possible respect to the captain, besought his honour, as he +called him, that he would give leave to some more of them to go on +shore, and die with their companions, or, if possible, to assist them +to resist the barbarians. The captain, rather provoked than cowed with +this, came to the barricade of the quarter-deck, and speaking very +prudently to the men (for had he spoken roughly, two-thirds of them +would have left the ship, if not all of them), he told them, it was +for their safety as well as his own that he had been obliged to that +severity; that mutiny on board a ship was the same thing as treason in a +king's palace, and he could not answer it to his owners and employers +to trust the ship and goods committed to his charge with men who had +entertained thoughts of the worst and blackest nature; that he wished +heartily that it had been anywhere else that they had been set on shore, +where they might have been in less hazard from the savages; that, if he +had designed they should be destroyed, he could as well have executed +them on board as the other two; that he wished it had been in some other +part of the world, where he might have delivered them up to the civil +justice, or might have left them among Christians; but it was better +their lives were put in hazard than his life, and the safety of the +ship; and that though he did not know that he had deserved so ill of any +of them as that they should leave the ship rather than do their duty, +yet if any of them were resolved to do so unless he would consent to +take a gang of traitors on board, who, as he had proved before them +all, had conspired to murder him, he would not hinder them, nor for the +present would he resent their importunity; but, if there was nobody left +in the ship but himself, he would never consent to take them on board. + +This discourse was delivered so well, was in itself so reasonable, was +managed with so much temper, yet so boldly concluded with a negative, +that the greatest part of the men were satisfied for the present. +However, as it put the men into juntos and cabals, they were not +composed for some hours; the wind also slackening towards night, the +captain ordered not to weigh till next morning. + +The same night twenty-three of the men, among whom was the gunner's +mate, the surgeon's assistant, and two carpenters, applying to the chief +mate told him, that as the captain had given them leave to go on shore +to their comrades, they begged that he would speak to the captain not to +take it ill that they were desirous to go and die with their companions; +and that they thought they could do no less in such an extremity than +go to them; because, if there was any way to save their lives, it was +by adding to their numbers, and making them strong enough to assist one +another in defending themselves against the savages, till perhaps they +might one time or other find means to make their escape, and get to +their own country again. + +The mate told them, in so many words, that he durst not speak to the +captain upon any such design, and was very sorry they had no more +respect for him than to desire him to go upon such an errand; but, if +they were resolved upon such an enterprise, he would advise them to take +the long-boat in the morning betimes, and go off, seeing the captain had +given them leave, and leave a civil letter behind them to the captain, +and to desire him to send his men on shore for the boat, which should be +delivered very honestly, and he promised to keep their counsel so long. + +Accordingly, an hour before day, those twenty-three men, with every +man a firelock and a cutlass, with some pistols, three halberds or +half-pikes, and good store of powder and ball, without any provision but +about half a hundred of bread, but with all their chests and clothes, +tools, instruments, books, &c., embarked themselves so silently, that +the captain got no notice of it till they were gotten half the way on +shore. + +As soon as the captain heard of it he called for the gunner's mate, the +chief gunner being at the time sick in his cabin, and ordered to fire at +them; but, to his great mortification, the gunner's mate was one of the +number, and was gone with them; and indeed it was by this means they got +so many arms and so much ammunition. When the captain found how it was, +and that there was no help for it, he began to be a little appeased, and +made light of it, and called up the men, and spoke kindly to them, and +told them he was very well satisfied in the fidelity and ability of +those that were now left, and that he would give to them, for their +encouragement, to be divided among them, the wages which were due to the +men that were gone, and that it was a great satisfaction to him that the +ship was free from such a mutinous rabble, who had not the least reason +for their discontent. + +The men seemed very well satisfied, and particularly the promise of the +wages of those who were gone went a great way with them. After this, the +letter which was left by the men was given to the captain by his boy, +with whom, it seems, the men had left it. The letter was much to the +same purpose of what they had said to the mate, and which he declined to +say for them, only that at the end of their letter they told the captain +that, as they had no dishonest design, so they had taken nothing away +with them which was not their own, except some arms and ammunition, such +as were absolutely necessary to them, as well for their defence against +the savages as to kill fowls or beasts for their food, that they might +not perish; and as there were considerable sums due to them for wages, +they hoped he would allow the arms and ammunition upon their accounts. +They told him that, as to the ship's longboat, which they had taken to +bring them on shore, they knew it was necessary to him, and they were +very willing to restore it to him, and if he pleased to send for it, it +should be very honestly delivered to his men, and not the least injury +offered to any of those who came for it, nor the least persuasion or +invitation made use of to any of them to stay with them; and, at the +bottom of the letter, they very humbly besought him that, for their +defence, and for the safety of their lives, he would be pleased to send +them a barrel of powder and some ammunition, and give them leave to keep +the mast and sail of the boat, that if it was possible for them to make +themselves a boat of any kind, they might shift off to sea, to save +themselves in such part of the world as their fate should direct them +to. + +Upon this the captain, who had won much upon the rest of his men by what +he had said to them, and was very easy as to the general peace (for it +was very true that the most mutinous of the men were gone), came out +to the quarter-deck, and, calling the men together, let them know the +substance of the letter, and told the men that, however they had not +deserved such civility from him, yet he was not willing to expose them +more than they were willing to expose themselves; he was inclined to +send them some ammunition, and as they had desired but one barrel of +powder, he would send them two barrels, and shot, or lead and moulds to +make shot, in proportion; and, to let them see that he was civiller to +them than they deserved, he ordered a cask of arrack and a great bag +of bread to be sent them for subsistence till they should be able to +furnish themselves. + +The rest of the men applauded the captain's generosity, and every one +of them sent us something or other, and about three in the afternoon the +pinnace came on shore, and brought us all these things, which we were +very glad of, and returned the long-boat accordingly; and as to the men +that came with the pinnace, as the captain had singled out such men as +he knew would not come over to us, so they had positive orders not to +bring any one of us on board again, upon pain of death; and indeed both +were so true to our points, that we neither asked them to stay, nor they +us to go. + +We were now a good troop, being in all twenty-seven men, very well +armed, and provided with everything but victuals; we had two carpenters +among us, a gunner, and, which was worth all the rest, a surgeon or +doctor; that is to say, he was an assistant to a surgeon at Goa, and was +entertained as a supernumerary with us. The carpenters had brought all +their tools, the doctor all his instruments and medicines, and indeed we +had a great deal of baggage, that is to say, on the whole, for some of +us had little more than the clothes on our backs, of whom I was one; +but I had one thing which none of them had, viz., I had the twenty-two +moidores of gold which I had stole at the Brazils, and two pieces of +eight. The two pieces of eight I showed, and one moidore, and none of +them ever suspected that I had any more money in the world, having been +known to be only a poor boy taken up in charity, as you have heard, +and used like a slave, and in the worst manner of a slave, by my cruel +master the pilot. + +It will be easy to imagine we four that were left at first were joyful, +nay, even surprised with joy at the coming of the rest, though at first +we were frighted, and thought they came to fetch us back to hang us; +but they took ways quickly to satisfy us that they were in the same +condition with us, only with this additional circumstance, theirs was +voluntary, and ours by force. + +The first piece of news they told us after the short history of their +coming away was, that our companion was on board, but how he got +thither we could not imagine, for he had given us the slip, and we never +imagined he could swim so well as to venture off to the ship, which lay +at so great a distance; nay, we did not so much as know that he could +swim at all, and not thinking anything of what really happened, we +thought he must have wandered into the woods and was devoured, or +was fallen into the hands of the natives, and was murdered; and these +thoughts filled us with fears enough, and of several kinds, about its +being some time or other our lot to fall into their hands also. But +hearing how he had with much difficulty been received on board the ship +again and pardoned, we were much better satisfied than before. + +Being now, as I have said, a considerable number of us, and in condition +to defend ourselves, the first thing we did was to give every one his +hand that we would not separate from one another upon any occasion +whatsoever, but that we would live and die together; that we would kill +no food, but that we would distribute it in public; and that we would +be in all things guided by the majority, and not insist upon our own +resolutions in anything if the majority were against it; that we would +appoint a captain among us to be our governor or leader during pleasure; +that while he was in office we would obey him without reserve, on pain +of death; and that every one should take turn, but the captain was not +to act in any particular thing without advice of the rest, and by the +majority. + +Having established these rules, we resolved to enter into some measures +for our food, and for conversing with the inhabitants or natives of the +island for our supply. As for food, they were at first very useful to +us, but we soon grew weary of them, being an ignorant, ravenous, brutish +sort of people, even worse than the natives of any other country that we +had seen; and we soon found that the principal part of our subsistence +was to be had by our guns, shooting of deer and other creatures, and +fowls of all other sorts, of which there is abundance. + +We found the natives did not disturb or concern themselves much about +us; nor did they inquire, or perhaps know, whether we stayed among them +or not, much less that our ship was gone quite away, and had cast us +off, as was our case; for the next morning, after we had sent back the +long-boat, the ship stood away to the south-east, and in four hours' +time was out of our sight. + +The next day two of us went out into the country one way, and two +another, to see what kind of a land we were in; and we soon found the +country was very pleasant and fruitful, and a convenient place enough +to live in; but, as before, inhabited by a parcel of creatures scarce +human, or capable of being made social on any account whatsoever. + +We found the place full of cattle and provisions; but whether we might +venture to take them where we could find them or not, we did not know; +and though we were under a necessity to get provisions, yet we were loth +to bring down a whole nation of devils upon us at once, and therefore +some of our company agreed to try to speak with some of the country, +if we could, that we might see what course was to be taken with them. +Eleven of our men went on this errand, well armed and furnished for +defence. They brought word that they had seen some of the natives, who +appeared very civil to them, but very shy and afraid, seeing their guns, +for it was easy to perceive that the natives knew what their guns were, +and what use they were of. + +They made signs to the natives for some food, and they went and fetched +several herbs and roots, and some milk; but it was evident they did not +design to give it away, but to sell it, making signs to know what our +men would give them. + +Our men were perplexed at this, for they had nothing to barter; however, +one of the men pulled out a knife and showed them, and they were so fond +of it that they were ready to go together by the ears for the knife. The +seaman seeing that, was willing to make a good market of his knife, and +keeping them chaffering about it a good while, some offered him roots, +and others milk; at last one offered him a goat for it, which he took. +Then another of our men showed them another knife, but they had nothing +good enough for that, whereupon one of them made signs that he would +go and fetch something; so our men stayed three hours for their return, +when they came back and brought him a small-sized, thick, short cow, +very fat and good meat, and gave him for his knife. + +This was a good market, but our misfortune was we had no merchandise; +for our knives were as needful to us as to them, and but that we were in +distress for food, and must of necessity have some, these men would not +have parted with their knives. + +However, in a little time more we found that the woods were full of +living creatures, which we might kill for our food, and that without +giving offence to them; so that our men went daily out a-hunting, and +never failed in killing something or other; for, as to the natives, we +had no goods to barter; and for money, all the stock among us would not +have subsisted us long. However, we called a general council to see what +money we had, and to bring it all together, that it might go as far as +possible; and when it came to my turn, I pulled out a moidore and the +two dollars I spoke of before. + +This moidore I ventured to show, that they might not despise me too much +for adding too little to the store, and that they might not pretend to +search me; and they were very civil to me, upon the presumption that I +had been so faithful to them as not to conceal anything from them. + +But our money did us little service, for the people neither knew +the value or the use of it, nor could they justly rate the gold in +proportion with the silver; so that all our money, which was not much +when it was all put together, would go but a little way with us, that is +to say, to buy us provisions. + +Our next consideration was to get away from this cursed place, and +whither to go. When my opinion came to be asked, I told them I would +leave that all to them, and I told them I had rather they would let me +go into the woods to get them some provisions, than consult with me, for +I would agree to whatever they did; but they would not agree to that, +for they would not consent that any of us should go into the woods +alone; for though we had yet seen no lions or tigers in the woods, we +were assured there were many in the island, besides other creatures +as dangerous, and perhaps worse, as we afterwards found by our own +experience. + +We had many adventures in the woods, for our provisions, and often met +with wild and terrible beasts, which we could not call by their names; +but as they were, like us, seeking their prey, but were themselves good +for nothing, so we disturbed them as little as possible. + +Our consultations concerning our escape from this place, which, as I +have said, we were now upon, ended in this only, that as we had two +carpenters among us, and that they had tools almost of all sorts with +them, we should try to build us a boat to go off to sea with, and that +then, perhaps, we might find our way back to Goa, or land on some more +proper place to make our escape. The counsels of this assembly were +not of great moment, yet as they seem to be introductory of many more +remarkable adventures which happened under my conduct hereabouts many +years after, I think this miniature of my future enterprises may not be +unpleasant to relate. + +To the building of a boat I made no objection, and away they went to +work immediately; but as they went on, great difficulties occurred, +such as the want of saws to cut our plank; nails, bolts, and spikes, to +fasten the timbers; hemp, pitch, and tar, to caulk and pay her seams, +and the like. At length, one of the company proposed that, instead of +building a bark or sloop, or shallop, or whatever they would call +it, which they found was so difficult, they would rather make a large +periagua, or canoe, which might be done with great ease. + +It was presently objected, that we could never make a canoe large enough +to pass the great ocean, which we were to go over to get to the coast +of Malabar; that it not only would not bear the sea, but it would never +bear the burden, for we were not only twenty-seven men of us, but had +a great deal of luggage with us, and must, for our provision, take in a +great deal more. + +I never proposed to speak in their general consultations before, but +finding they were at some loss about what kind of vessel they should +make, and how to make it, and what would be fit for our use, and what +not, I told them I found they were at a full stop in their counsels of +every kind; that it was true we could never pretend to go over to Goa on +the coast of Malabar in a canoe, which though we could all get into +it, and that it would bear the sea well enough, yet would not hold our +provisions, and especially we could not put fresh water enough into it +for the voyage; and to make such an adventure would be nothing but mere +running into certain destruction, and yet that nevertheless I was for +making a canoe. + +They answered, that they understood all I had said before well enough, +but what I meant by telling them first how dangerous and impossible +it was to make our escape in a canoe, and yet then to advise making a +canoe, that they could not understand. + +To this I answered, that I conceived our business was not to attempt our +escape in a canoe, but that, as there were other vessels at sea besides +our ship, and that there were few nations that lived on the sea-shore +that were so barbarous, but that they went to sea in some boats or +other, our business was to cruise along the coast of the island, which +was very long, and to seize upon the first we could get that was better +than our own, and so from that to another, till perhaps we might at last +get a good ship to carry us wherever we pleased to go. + +"Excellent advice," says one of them. "Admirable advice," says another. +"Yes, yes," says the third (which was the gunner), "the English dog has +given excellent advice; but it is just the way to bring us all to +the gallows. The rogue has given us devilish advice, indeed, to go +a-thieving, till from a little vessel we came to a great ship, and so we +shall turn downright pirates, the end of which is to be hanged." + +"You may call us pirates," says another, "if you will, and if we fall +into bad hands, we may be used like pirates; but I care not for that, +I'll be a pirate, or anything, nay, I'll be hanged for a pirate rather +than starve here, therefore I think the advice is very good." And so +they cried all, "Let us have a canoe." The gunner, over-ruled by the +rest, submitted; but as we broke up the council, he came to me, takes +me by the hand, and, looking into the palm of my hand, and into my face +too, very gravely, "My lad," says he, "thou art born to do a world of +mischief; thou hast commenced pirate very young; but have a care of +the gallows, young man; have a care, I say, for thou wilt be an eminent +thief." + +I laughed at him, and told him I did not know what I might come to +hereafter, but as our case was now, I should make no scruple to take the +first ship I came at to get our liberty; I only wished we could see one, +and come at her. Just while we were talking, one of our men that was at +the door of our hut, told us that the carpenter, who it seems was upon a +hill at a distance, cried out, "A sail! a sail!" + +We all turned out immediately; but, though it was very clear weather, +we could see nothing; but the carpenter continuing to halloo to us, "A +sail! a sail!" away we run up the hill, and there we saw a ship plainly; +but it was at a very great distance, too far for us to make any signal +to her. However, we made a fire upon the hill, with all the wood we +could get together, and made as much smoke as possible. The wind was +down, and it was almost calm; but as we thought, by a perspective glass +which the gunner had in his pocket, her sails were full, and she stood +away large with the wind at E.N.E., taking no notice of our signal, but +making for the Cape de Bona Speranza; so we had no comfort from her. + +We went, therefore, immediately to work about our intended canoe; and, +having singled out a very large tree to our minds, we fell to work with +her; and having three good axes among us, we got it down, but it was +four days' time first, though we worked very hard too. I do not remember +what wood it was, or exactly what dimensions, but I remember that it was +a very large one, and we were as much encouraged when we launched it, +and found it swam upright and steady, as we would have been at another +time if we had had a good man-of-war at our command. + +She was so very large, that she carried us all very, very easily, and +would have carried two or three tons of baggage with us; so that we +began to consult about going to sea directly to Goa; but many other +considerations checked that thought, especially when we came to look +nearer into it; such as want of provisions, and no casks for fresh +water; no compass to steer by; no shelter from the breach of the high +sea, which would certainly founder us; no defence from the heat of the +weather, and the like; so that they all came readily into my project, to +cruise about where we were, and see what might offer. + +Accordingly, to gratify our fancy, we went one day all out to sea in her +together, and we were in a very fair way to have had enough of it; +for when she had us all on board, and that we were gotten about half +a league to sea, there happening to be a pretty high swell of the sea, +though little or no wind, yet she wallowed so in the sea, that we all of +us thought she would at last wallow herself bottom up; so we set all +to work to get her in nearer the shore, and giving her fresh way in the +sea, she swam more steady, and with some hard work we got her under the +land again. + +We were now at a great loss; the natives were civil enough to us, and +came often to discourse with us; one time they brought one whom they +showed respect to as a king with them, and they set up a long pole +between them and us, with a great tassel of hair hanging, not on the +top, but something above the middle of it, adorned with little chains, +shells, bits of brass, and the like; and this, we understood afterwards, +was a token of amity and friendship; and they brought down to us +victuals in abundance, cattle, fowls, herbs, and roots; but we were in +the utmost confusion on our side; for we had nothing to buy with, or +exchange for; and as to giving us things for nothing they had no notion +of that again. As to our money, it was mere trash to them, they had no +value for it; so that we were in a fair way to be starved. Had we had +but some toys and trinkets, brass chains, baubles, glass beads, or, in +a word, the veriest trifles that a shipload of would not have been worth +the freight, we might have bought cattle and provisions enough for an +army, or to victual a fleet of men-of-war; but for gold or silver we +could get nothing. + +Upon this we were in a strange consternation. I was but a young fellow, +but I was for falling upon them with our firearms, and taking all the +cattle from them, and send them to the devil to stop their hunger, +rather than be starved ourselves; but I did not consider that this might +have brought ten thousand of them down upon us the next day; and though +we might have killed a vast number of them, and perhaps have frighted +the rest, yet their own desperation, and our small number, would have +animated them so that, one time or other, they would have destroyed us +all. + +In the middle of our consultation, one of our men who had been a kind +of a cutler, or worker in iron, started up and asked the carpenter if, +among all his tools, he could not help him to a file. "Yes," says the +carpenter, "I can, but it is a small one." "The smaller the better," +says the other. Upon this he goes to work, and first by heating a piece +of an old broken chisel in the fire, and then with the help of his file, +he made himself several kinds of tools for his work. Then he takes three +or four pieces of eight, and beats them out with a hammer upon a stone, +till they were very broad and thin; then he cuts them out into the shape +of birds and beasts; he made little chains of them for bracelets and +necklaces, and turned them into so many devices of his own head, that it +is hardly to be expressed. + +When he had for about a fortnight exercised his head and hands at this +work, we tried the effect of his ingenuity; and, having another meeting +with the natives, were surprised to see the folly of the poor people. +For a little bit of silver cut in the shape of a bird, we had two cows, +and, which was our loss, if it had been in brass, it had been still of +more value. For one of the bracelets made of chain-work, we had as much +provision of several sorts, as would fairly have been worth, in England, +fifteen or sixteen pounds; and so of all the rest. Thus, that which when +it was in coin was not worth sixpence to us, when thus converted +into toys and trifles, was worth a hundred times its real value, and +purchased for us anything we had occasion for. + +In this condition we lived upwards of a year, but all of us began to be +very much tired of it, and, whatever came of it, resolved to attempt +an escape. We had furnished ourselves with no less than three very +good canoes; and as the monsoons, or trade-winds, generally affect that +country, blowing in most parts of this island one six months of a year +one way, and the other six months another way, we concluded we might be +able to bear the sea well enough. But always, when we came to look into +it, the want of fresh water was the thing that put us off from such an +adventure, for it is a prodigious length, and what no man on earth could +be able to perform without water to drink. + +Being thus prevailed upon by our own reason to set the thoughts of that +voyage aside, we had then but two things before us; one was, to put to +sea the other way; viz., west, and go away for the Cape of Good Hope, +where, first or last, we should meet with some of our own country ships, +or else to put for the mainland of Africa, and either travel by land, +or sail along the coast towards the Red Sea, where we should, first or +last, find a ship of some nation or other, that would take us up; or +perhaps we might take them up, which, by-the-bye, was the thing that +always ran in my head. + +It was our ingenious cutler, whom ever after we called silversmith, that +proposed this; but the gunner told him, that he had been in the Red Sea +in a Malabar sloop, and he knew this, that if we went into the Red Sea, +we should either be killed by the wild Arabs, or taken and made slaves +of by the Turks; and therefore he was not for going that way. + +Upon this I took occasion to put in my vote again. "Why," said I, "do we +talk of being killed by the Arabs, or made slaves of by the Turks? Are +we not able to board almost any vessel we shall meet with in those seas; +and, instead of their taking us, we to take them?" "Well done, pirate," +said the gunner (he that had looked in my hand, and told me I should +come to the gallows), "I'll say that for him," says he, "he always looks +the same way. But I think, of my conscience, it is our only way now." +"Don't tell me," says I, "of being a pirate; we must be pirates, or +anything, to get fairly out of this cursed place." + +In a word, they concluded all, by my advice, that our business was to +cruise for anything we could see. "Why then," said I to them, "our first +business is to see if the people upon this island have no navigation, +and what boats they use; and, if they have any better or bigger than +ours, let us take one of them." First, indeed, all our aim was to get, +if possible, a boat with a deck and a sail; for then we might have saved +our provisions, which otherwise we could not. + +We had, to our great good fortune, one sailor among us, who had been +assistant to the cook; he told us, that he would find a way how to +preserve our beef without cask or pickle; and this he did effectually +by curing it in the sun, with the help of saltpetre, of which there was +great plenty in the island; so that, before we found any method for our +escape, we had dried the flesh of six or seven cows and bullocks, +and ten or twelve goats, and it relished so well, that we never gave +ourselves the trouble to boil it when we ate it, but either broiled it +or ate it dry. But our main difficulty about fresh water still remained; +for we had no vessel to put any into, much less to keep any for our +going to sea. + +But our first voyage being only to coast the island, we resolved to +venture, whatever the hazard or consequence of it might be, and in order +to preserve as much fresh water as we could, our carpenter made a well +athwart the middle of one of our canoes, which he separated from the +other parts of the canoe, so as to make it tight to hold the water and +covered so as we might step upon it; and this was so large that it held +near a hogshead of water very well. I cannot better describe this well +than by the same kind which the small fishing-boats in England have to +preserve their fish alive in; only that this, instead of having holes to +let the salt water in, was made sound every way to keep it out; and it +was the first invention, I believe, of its kind for such an use; but +necessity is a spur to ingenuity and the mother of invention. + +It wanted but a little consultation to resolve now upon our voyage. The +first design was only to coast it round the island, as well to see if we +could seize upon any vessel fit to embark ourselves in, as also to take +hold of any opportunity which might present for our passing over to the +main; and therefore our resolution was to go on the inside or west shore +of the island, where, at least at one point, the land stretching a great +way to the north-west, the distance is not extraordinary great from the +island to the coast of Africa. + +Such a voyage, and with such a desperate crew, I believe was never made, +for it is certain we took the worst side of the island to look for any +shipping, especially for shipping of other nations, this being quite out +of the way; however, we put to sea, after taking all our provisions and +ammunition, bag and baggage, on board; we had made both mast and sail +for our two large periaguas, and the other we paddled along as well as +we could; but when a gale sprung up, we took her in tow. + +We sailed merrily forward for several days, meeting with nothing to +interrupt us. We saw several of the natives in small canoes catching +fish, and sometimes we endeavoured to come near enough to speak with +them, but they were always shy and afraid of us, making in for the +shore as soon as we attempted it; till one of our company remembered the +signal of friendship which the natives made us from the south part of +the island, viz., of setting up a long pole, and put us in mind that +perhaps it was the same thing to them as a flag of truce to us. So we +resolved to try it; and accordingly the next time we saw any of their +fishing-boats at sea we put up a pole in our canoe that had no sail, and +rowed towards them. As soon as they saw the pole they stayed for us, and +as we came nearer paddled towards us; when they came to us they showed +themselves very much pleased, and gave us some large fish, of which we +did not know the names, but they were very good. It was our misfortune +still that we had nothing to give them in return; but our artist, of +whom I spoke before, gave them two little thin plates of silver, beaten, +as I said before, out of a piece of eight; they were cut in a diamond +square, longer one way than the other, and a hole punched at one of the +longest corners. This they were so fond of that they made us stay till +they had cast their lines and nets again, and gave us as many fish as we +cared to have. + +All this while we had our eyes upon their boats, viewed them very +narrowly, and examined whether any of them were fit for our turn, but +they were poor, sorry things; their sail was made of a large mat, only +one that was of a piece of cotton stuff fit for little, and their ropes +were twisted flags of no strength; so we concluded we were better as +we were, and let them alone. We went forward to the north, keeping the +coast close on board for twelve days together, and having the wind at +east and E.S.E., we made very fresh way. We saw no towns on the shore, +but often saw some huts by the water-side upon the rocks, and always +abundance of people about them, who we could perceive run together to +stare at us. + +It was as odd a voyage as ever man went; we were a little fleet of three +ships, and an army of between twenty and thirty as dangerous fellows as +ever they had amongst them; and had they known what we were, they would +have compounded to give us everything we desired to be rid of us. + +On the other hand, we were as miserable as nature could well make us to +be, for we were upon a voyage and no voyage, we were bound somewhere and +nowhere; for though we knew what we intended to do, we did really not +know what we were doing. We went forward and forward by a northerly +course, and as we advanced the heat increased, which began to be +intolerable to us, who were on the water, without any covering from heat +or wet; besides, we were now in the month of October, or thereabouts, +in a southern latitude; and as we went every day nearer the sun, the sun +came also every day nearer to us, till at last we found ourselves in the +latitude of 20 degrees; and having passed the tropic about five or six +days before that, in a few days more the sun would be in the zenith, +just over our heads. + +Upon these considerations we resolved to seek for a good place to go on +shore again, and pitch our tents, till the heat of the weather abated. +We had by this time measured half the length of the island, and were +come to that part where the shore tending away to the north-west, +promised fair to make our passage over to the mainland of Africa much +shorter than we expected. But, notwithstanding that, we had good reason +to believe it was about 120 leagues. + +So, the heats considered, we resolved to take harbour; besides, our +provisions were exhausted, and we had not many days' store left. +Accordingly, putting in for the shore early in the morning, as we +usually did once in three or four days for fresh water, we sat down and +considered whether we would go on or take up our standing there; but +upon several considerations, too long to repeat here, we did not like +the place, so we resolved to go on a few days longer. + +After sailing on N.W. by N. with a fresh gale at S.E., about six days, +we found, at a great distance, a large promontory or cape of land, +pushing out a long way into the sea, and as we were exceeding fond of +seeing what was beyond the cape, we resolved to double it before we took +into harbour, so we kept on our way, the gale continuing, and yet it +was four days more before we reached the cape. But it is not possible +to express the discouragement and melancholy that seized us all when +we came thither; for when we made the headland of the cape, we were +surprised to see the shore fall away on the other side as much as it had +advanced on this side, and a great deal more; and that, in short, if we +would venture over to the shore of Africa, it must be from hence, for +that if we went further, the breadth of the sea still increased, and to +what breadth it might increase we knew not. + +While we mused upon this discovery, we were surprised with very bad +weather, and especially violent rains, with thunder and lightning, +most unusually terrible to us. In this pickle we run for the shore, and +getting under the lee of the cape, run our frigates into a little creek, +where we saw the land overgrown with trees, and made all the haste +possible to get on shore, being exceeding wet, and fatigued with the +heat, the thunder, lightning, and rain. + +Here we thought our case was very deplorable indeed, and therefore our +artist, of whom I have spoken so often, set up a great cross of wood on +the hill which was within a mile of the headland, with these words, but +in the Portuguese language:-- + +"Point Desperation. Jesus have mercy." + +We set to work immediately to build us some huts, and to get our clothes +dried; and though I was young and had no skill in such things, yet I +shall never forget the little city we built, for it was no less, and we +fortified it accordingly; and the idea is so fresh in my thought, that I +cannot but give a short description of it. + +Our camp was on the south side of a little creek on the sea, and under +the shelter of a steep hill, which lay, though on the other side of +the creek, yet within a quarter of a mile of us, N.W. by N., and very +happily intercepted the heat of the sun all the after part of the day. +The spot we pitched on had a little fresh water brook, or a stream +running into the creek by us; and we saw cattle feeding in the plains +and low ground east and to the south of us a great way. + +Here we set up twelve little huts like soldiers' tents, but made of the +boughs of trees stuck in the ground, and bound together on the top +with withies, and such other things as we could get; the creek was our +defence on the north, a little brook on the west, and the south and east +sides were fortified with a bank, which entirely covered our huts; and +being drawn oblique from the north-west to the south-east, made our city +a triangle. Behind the bank or line our huts stood, having three other +huts behind them at a good distance. In one of these, which was a little +one, and stood further off, we put our gunpowder, and nothing else, for +fear of danger; in the other, which was bigger, we dressed our victuals, +and put all our necessaries; and in the third, which was biggest of all, +we ate our dinners, called our councils, and sat and diverted ourselves +with such conversation as we had one with another, which was but +indifferent truly at that time. + +Our correspondence with the natives was absolutely necessary, and our +artist the cutler having made abundance of those little diamond-cut +squares of silver, with these we made shift to traffic with the black +people for what we wanted; for indeed they were pleased wonderfully with +them, and thus we got plenty of provisions. At first, and in particular, +we got about fifty head of black cattle and goats, and our cook's mate +took care to cure them and dry them, salt and preserve them for our +grand supply; nor was this hard to do, the salt and saltpetre being very +good, and the sun excessively hot; and here we lived about four months. + +The southern solstice was over, and the sun gone back towards the +equinoctial, when we considered of our next adventure, which was to go +over the sea of Zanguebar, as the Portuguese call it, and to land, if +possible, upon the continent of Africa. + +We talked with many of the natives about it, such as we could make +ourselves intelligible to, but all that we could learn from them was, +that there was a great land of lions beyond the sea, but that it was a +great way off. We knew as well as they that it was a long way, but our +people differed mightily about it; some said it was 150 leagues, others +not above 100. One of our men, that had a map of the world, showed us +by his scale that it was not above eighty leagues. Some said there were +islands all the way to touch at, some that there were no islands at all. +For my own part, I knew nothing of this matter one way or another, but +heard it all without concern, whether it was near or far off; however, +this we learned from an old man who was blind and led about by a boy, +that if we stayed till the end of August, we should be sure of the wind +to be fair and the sea smooth all the voyage. + +This was some encouragement; but staying again was very unwelcome news +to us, because that then the sun would be returning again to the south, +which was what our men were very unwilling to. At last we called a +council of our whole body; their debates were too tedious to take notice +of, only to note, that when it came to Captain Bob (for so they called +me ever since I had taken state upon me before one of their great +princes), truly I was on no side; it was not one farthing matter to me, +I told them, whether we went or stayed; I had no home, and all the world +was alike to me; so I left it entirely to them to determine. + +In a word, they saw plainly there was nothing to be done where we were +without shipping; that if our business indeed was only to eat and drink, +we could not find a better place in the world; but if our business was +to get away, and get home into our country, we could not find a worse. + +I confess I liked the country wonderfully, and even then had strange +notions of coming again to live there; and I used to say to them very +often that if I had but a ship of twenty guns, and a sloop, and both +well manned, I would not desire a better place in the world to make +myself as rich as a king. + +But to return to the consultations they were in about going. Upon the +whole, it was resolved to venture over for the main; and venture we did, +madly enough, indeed, for it was the wrong time of the year to undertake +such a voyage in that country; for, as the winds hang easterly all the +months from September to March, so they generally hang westerly all the +rest of the year, and blew right in our teeth; so that, as soon as +we had, with a kind of a land-breeze, stretched over about fifteen or +twenty leagues, and, as I may say, just enough to lose ourselves, we +found the wind set in a steady fresh gale or breeze from the sea, at +west, W.S.W., or S.W. by W., and never further from the west; so that, +in a word, we could make nothing of it. + +On the other hand, the vessel, such as we had, would not lie close upon +a wind; if so, we might have stretched away N.N.W., and have met with a +great many islands in our way, as we found afterwards; but we could make +nothing of it, though we tried, and by the trying had almost undone us +all; for, stretching away to the north, as near the wind as we could, we +had forgotten the shape and position of the island of Madagascar itself; +how that we came off at the head of a promontory or point of land, that +lies about the middle of the island, and that stretches out west a great +way into the sea; and that now, being run a matter of forty leagues to +the north, the shore of the island fell off again above 200 miles to the +east, so that we were by this time in the wide ocean, between the island +and the main, and almost 100 leagues from both. + +Indeed, as the winds blew fresh at west, as before, we had a smooth sea, +and we found it pretty good going before it, and so, taking our smallest +canoe in tow, we stood in for the shore with all the sail we could make. +This was a terrible adventure, for, if the least gust of wind had come, +we had been all lost, our canoes being deep and in no condition to make +way in a high sea. + +This voyage, however, held us eleven days in all; and at length, having +spent most of our provisions, and every drop of water we had, we spied +land, to our great joy, though at the distance of ten or eleven leagues; +and as, under the land, the wind came off like a land-breeze, and blew +hard against us, we were two days more before we reached the shore, +having all that while excessive hot weather, and not a drop of water or +any other liquor, except some cordial waters, which one of our company +had a little of left in a case of bottles. + +This gave us a taste of what we should have done if we had ventured +forward with a scant wind and uncertain weather, and gave us a surfeit +of our design for the main, at least until we might have some better +vessels under us; so we went on shore again, and pitched our camp +as before, in as convenient manner as we could, fortifying ourselves +against any surprise; but the natives here were exceeding courteous, +and much more civil than on the south part of the island; and though we +could not understand what they said, or they us, yet we found means to +make them understand that we were seafaring men and strangers, and that +we were in distress for want of provisions. + +The first proof we had of their kindness was, that as soon as they saw +us come on shore and begin to make our habitation, one of their captains +or kings, for we knew not what to call them, came down with five or six +men and some women, and brought us five goats and two young fat +steers, and gave them to us for nothing; and when we went to offer them +anything, the captain or the king would not let any of them touch it, +or take anything of us. About two hours after came another king, or +captain, with forty or fifty men after him. We began to be afraid of +him, and laid hands upon our weapons; but he perceiving it, caused two +men to go before him, carrying two long poles in their hands, which they +held upright, as high as they could, which we presently perceived was +a signal of peace; and these two poles they set up afterwards, sticking +them up in the ground; and when the king and his men came to these +two poles, they struck all their lances up in the ground, and came on +unarmed, leaving their lances, as also their bows and arrows, behind +them. + +This was to satisfy us that they were come as friends, and we were glad +to see it, for we had no mind to quarrel with them if we could help it. +The captain of this gang seeing some of our men making up their huts, +and that they did it but bunglingly, he beckoned to some of his men to +go and help us. Immediately fifteen or sixteen of them came and mingled +among us, and went to work for us; and indeed, they were better workmen +than we were, for they run up three or four huts for us in a moment, and +much handsomer done than ours. + +After this they sent us milk, plantains, pumpkins, and abundance of +roots and greens that were very good, and then took their leave, and +would not take anything from us that we had. One of our men offered the +king or captain of these men a dram, which he drank and was mightily +pleased with it, and held out his hand for another, which we gave him; +and in a word, after this, he hardly failed coming to us two or three +times a week, always bringing us something or other; and one time sent +us seven head of black cattle, some of which we cured and dried as +before. + +And here I cannot but remember one thing, which afterwards stood us in +great stead, viz., that the flesh of their goats, and their beef also, +but especially the former, when we had dried and cured it, looked red, +and ate hard and firm, as dried beef in Holland; they were so pleased +with it, and it was such a dainty to them, that at any time after they +would trade with us for it, not knowing, or so much as imagining what it +was; so that for ten or twelve pounds' weight of smoke-dried beef, they +would give us a whole bullock, or cow, or anything else we could desire. + +Here we observed two things that were very material to us, even +essentially so; first, we found they had a great deal of earthenware +here, which they made use of many ways as we did; particularly they had +long, deep earthen pots, which they used to sink into the ground, to +keep the water which they drunk cool and pleasant; and the other was, +that they had larger canoes than their neighbours had. + +By this we were prompted to inquire if they had no larger vessels than +those we saw there, or if any other of the inhabitants had not such. +They signified presently that they had no larger boats than that they +showed us; but that on the other side of the island they had larger +boats, and that with decks upon them, and large sails; and this made us +resolve to coast round the whole island to see them; so we prepared and +victualled our canoe for the voyage, and, in a word, went to sea for the +third time. + +It cost us a month or six weeks' time to perform this voyage, in which +time we went on shore several times for water and provisions, and found +the natives always very free and courteous; but we were surprised one +morning early, being at the extremity of the northernmost part of the +island, when one of our men cried out, "A sail! a sail!" We presently +saw a vessel a great way out at sea; but after we had looked at it with +our perspective glasses, and endeavoured all we could to make out what +it was, we could not tell what to think of it; for it was neither ship, +ketch, galley, galliot, or like anything that we had ever seen before; +all that we could make of it was, that it went from us, standing out to +sea. In a word, we soon lost sight of it, for we were in no condition +to chase anything, and we never saw it again; but, by all that we could +perceive of it, from what we saw of such things afterwards, it was some +Arabian vessel, which had been trading to the coast of Mozambique, or +Zanzibar, the same place where we afterwards went, as you shall hear. + +I kept no journal of this voyage, nor indeed did I all this while +understand anything of navigation, more than the common business of a +foremast-man; so I can say nothing to the latitudes or distances of any +places we were at, how long we were going, or how far we sailed in +a day; but this I remember, that being now come round the island, we +sailed up the eastern shore due south, as we had done down the western +shore due north before. + +Nor do I remember that the natives differed much from one another, +either in stature or complexion, or in their manners, their habits, +their weapons, or indeed in anything; and yet we could not perceive that +they had any intelligence one with another; but they were extremely kind +and civil to us on this side, as well as on the other. + +We continued our voyage south for many weeks, though with several +intervals of going on shore to get provisions and water. At length, +coming round a point of land which lay about a league further than +ordinary into the sea, we were agreeably surprised with a sight which, +no doubt, had been as disagreeable to those concerned, as it was +pleasant to us. This was the wreck of an European ship, which had been +cast away upon the rocks, which in that place run a great way into the +sea. + +We could see plainly, at low water, a great deal of the ship lay dry; +even at high water, she was not entirely covered; and that at most she +did not lie above a league from the shore. It will easily be believed +that our curiosity led us, the wind and weather also permitting, to +go directly to her, which we did without any difficulty, and presently +found that it was a Dutch-built ship, and that she could not have been +very long in that condition, a great deal of the upper work of her stern +remaining firm, with the mizzen-mast standing. Her stern seemed to be +jammed in between two ridges of the rock, and so remained fast, all the +fore part of the ship having been beaten to pieces. + +We could see nothing to be gotten out of the wreck that was worth our +while; but we resolved to go on shore, and stay some time thereabouts, +to see if perhaps we might get any light into the story of her; and +we were not without hopes that we might hear something more particular +about her men, and perhaps find some of them on shore there, in the same +condition that we were in, and so might increase our company. + +It was a very pleasant sight to us when, coming on shore, we saw all +the marks and tokens of a ship-carpenter's yard; as a launch-block and +cradles, scaffolds and planks, and pieces of planks, the remains of +the building a ship or vessel; and, in a word, a great many things +that fairly invited us to go about the same work; and we soon came to +understand that the men belonging to the ship that was lost had saved +themselves on shore, perhaps in their boat, and had built themselves a +barque or sloop, and so were gone to sea again; and, inquiring of the +natives which way they went, they pointed to the south and south-west, +by which we could easily understand they were gone away to the Cape of +Good Hope. + +Nobody will imagine we could be so dull as not to gather from hence that +we might take the same method for our escape; so we resolved first, in +general, that we would try if possible to build us a boat of one kind or +other, and go to sea as our fate should direct. + +In order to this our first work was to have the two carpenters search +about to see what materials the Dutchmen had left behind them that might +be of use; and, in particular, they found one that was very useful, +and which I was much employed about, and that was a pitch-kettle, and a +little pitch in it. + +When we came to set close to this work we found it very laborious and +difficult, having but few tools, no ironwork, no cordage, no sails; so +that, in short, whatever we built, we were obliged to be our own smiths, +rope-makers, sail-makers, and indeed to practise twenty trades that we +knew little or nothing of. However, necessity was the spur to invention, +and we did many things which before we thought impracticable, that is to +say, in our circumstances. + +After our two carpenters had resolved upon the dimensions of what they +would build, they set us all to work, to go off in our boats and split +up the wreck of the old ship, and to bring away everything we could; and +particularly that, if possible, we should bring away the mizzen-mast, +which was left standing, which with much difficulty we effected, after +above twenty days' labour of fourteen of our men. + +At the same time we got out a great deal of ironwork, as bolts, spikes, +nails, &c., all of which our artist, of whom I have spoken already, who +was now grown a very dexterous smith, made us nails and hinges for our +rudder, and spikes such as we wanted. + +But we wanted an anchor, and if we had had an anchor, we could not have +made a cable; so we contented ourselves with making some ropes with the +help of the natives, of such stuff as they made their mats of, and with +these we made such a kind of cable or tow-line as was sufficient to +fasten our vessel to the shore, which we contented ourselves with for +that time. + +To be short, we spent four months here, and worked very hard too; at the +end of which time we launched our frigate, which, in a few words, had +many defects, but yet, all things considered, it was as well as we could +expect it to be. + +In short, it was a kind of sloop, of the burthen of near eighteen +or twenty tons; and had we had masts and sails, standing and running +rigging, as is usual in such cases, and other conveniences, the vessel +might have carried us wherever we could have had a mind to go; but of +all the materials we wanted, this was the worst, viz., that we had no +tar or pitch to pay the seams and secure the bottom; and though we did +what we could, with tallow and oil, to make a mixture to supply that +part, yet we could not bring it to answer our end fully; and when we +launched her into the water, she was so leaky, and took in the water so +fast, that we thought all our labour had been lost, for we had much ado +to make her swim; and as for pumps, we had none, nor had we any means to +make one. + +But at length one of the natives, a black negro-man, showed us a tree, +the wood of which being put into the fire, sends forth a liquid that is +as glutinous and almost as strong as tar, and of which, by boiling, we +made a sort of stuff which served us for pitch, and this answered our +end effectually; for we perfectly made our vessel sound and tight, so +that we wanted no pitch or tar at all. This secret has stood me in stead +upon many occasions since that time in the same place. + +Our vessel being thus finished, out of the mizzen-mast of the ship we +made a very good mast to her, and fitted our sails to it as well as we +could; then we made a rudder and tiller, and, in a word, everything that +our present necessity called upon us for; and having victualled her, and +put as much fresh water on board as we thought we wanted, or as we knew +how to stow (for we were yet without casks), we put to sea with a fair +wind. + +We had spent near another year in these rambles, and in this piece +of work; for it was now, as our men said, about the beginning of +our February, and the sun went from us apace, which was much to our +satisfaction, for the heats were exceedingly violent. The wind, as I +said, was fair; for, as I have since learned, the winds generally spring +up to the eastward, as the sun goes from them to the north. + +Our debate now was, which way we should go, and never were men so +irresolute; some were for going to the east, and stretching away +directly for the coast of Malabar; but others, who considered more +seriously the length of that voyage, shook their heads at the proposal, +knowing very well that neither our provisions, especially of water, +or our vessel, were equal to such a run as that is, of near 2000 miles +without any land to touch at in the way. + +These men, too, had all along had a great mind to a voyage for the +mainland of Africa, where they said we should have a fair cast for our +lives, and might be sure to make ourselves rich, which way soever we +went, if we were but able to make our way through, whether by sea or by +land. + +Besides, as the case stood with us, we had not much choice for our way; +for, if we had resolved for the east, we were at the wrong season of the +year, and must have stayed till April or May before we had gone to sea. +At length, as we had the wind at S.E. and E.S.E., and fine promising +weather, we came all into the first proposal, and resolved for the coast +of Africa; nor were we long in disputing as to our coasting the island +which we were upon, for we were now upon the wrong side of the island +for the voyage we intended; so we stood away to the north, and, having +rounded the cape, we hauled away southward, under the lee of the island, +thinking to reach the west point of land, which, as I observed before, +runs out so far towards the coast of Africa, as would have shortened our +run almost 100 leagues. But when we had sailed about thirty leagues, we +found the winds variable under the shore, and right against us, so we +concluded to stand over directly, for then we had the wind fair, and our +vessel was but very ill fated to lie near the wind, or any way indeed +but just before it. + +Having resolved upon it, therefore, we put into the shore to furnish +ourselves again with fresh water and other provisions, and about the +latter end of March, with more courage than discretion, more resolution +than judgment, we launched for the main coast of Africa. + +As for me, I had no anxieties about it, so that we had but a view of +reaching some land or other, I cared not what or where it was to be, +having at this time no views of what was before me, nor much thought of +what might or might not befall me; but with as little consideration as +any one can be supposed to have at my age, I consented to everything +that was proposed, however hazardous the thing itself, however +improbable the success. + +The voyage, as it was undertaken with a great deal of ignorance and +desperation, so really it was not carried on with much resolution or +judgment; for we knew no more of the course we were to steer than this, +that it was anywhere about the west, within two or three points N. or +S., and as we had no compass with us but a little brass pocket compass, +which one of our men had more by accident than otherwise, so we could +not be very exact in our course. + +However, as it pleased God that the wind continued fair at S.E. and by +E., we found that N.W. by W., which was right afore it, was as good a +course for us as any we could go, and thus we went on. + +The voyage was much longer than we expected; our vessel also, which had +no sail that was proportioned to her, made but very little way in the +sea, and sailed heavily. We had, indeed, no great adventures happened +in this voyage, being out of the way of everything that could offer to +divert us; and as for seeing any vessel, we had not the least occasion +to hail anything in all the voyage; for we saw not one vessel, small +or great, the sea we were upon being entirely out of the way of all +commerce; for the people of Madagascar knew no more of the shores of +Africa than we did, only that there was a country of lions, as they call +it, that way. + +We had been eight or nine days under sail, with a fair wind, when, to +our great joy, one of our men cried out "Land!" We had great reason to +be glad of the discovery, for we had not water enough left for above two +or three days more, though at a short allowance. However, though it was +early in the morning when we discovered it, we made it near night before +we reached it, the wind slackening almost to a calm, and our ship being, +as I said, a very dull sailer. + +We were sadly baulked upon our coming to the land, when we found that, +instead of the mainland of Africa, it was only a little island, with no +inhabitants upon it, at least none that we could find; nor any cattle, +except a few goats, of which we killed three only. However, they served +us for fresh meat, and we found very good water; and it was fifteen days +more before we reached the main, which, however, at last we arrived at, +and which was most essential to us, as we came to it just as all our +provisions were spent. Indeed, we may say they were spent first, for we +had but a pint of water a day to each man for the last two days. But, to +our great joy, we saw the land, though at a great distance, the evening +before, and by a pleasant gale in the night were by morning within two +leagues of the shore. + +We never scrupled going ashore at the first place we came at, though, +had we had patience, we might have found a very fine river a little +farther north. However, we kept our frigate on float by the help of two +great poles, which we fastened into the ground to moor her, like poles; +and the little weak ropes, which, as I said, we had made of matting, +served us well enough to make the vessel fast. + +As soon as we had viewed the country a little, got fresh water, and +furnished ourselves with some victuals, which we found very scarce here, +we went on board again with our stores. All we got for provision was +some fowls that we killed, and a kind of wild buffalo or bull, very +small, but good meat; I say, having got these things on board, we +resolved to sail along the coast, which lay N.N.E., till we found some +creek or river, that we might run up into the country, or some town +or people; for we had reason enough to know the place was inhabited, +because we several times saw fires in the night, and smoke in the day, +every way at a distance from us. + +At length we came to a very large bay, and in it several little creeks +or rivers emptying themselves into the sea, and we ran boldly into the +first creek we came at; where, seeing some huts and wild people about +them on the shore, we ran our vessel into a little cove on the north +side of the creek, and held up a long pole, with a white bit of cloth +on it, for a signal of peace to them. We found they understood us +presently, for they came flocking to us, men, women, and children, most +of them, of both sexes, stark naked. At first they stood wondering +and staring at us, as if we had been monsters, and as if they had been +frighted; but we found they inclined to be familiar with us afterwards. +The first thing we did to try them, was, we held up our hands to our +mouths, as if we were to drink, signifying that we wanted water. This +they understood presently, and three of their women and two boys ran +away up the land, and came back in about half a quarter of an hour, with +several pots, made of earth, pretty enough, and baked, I suppose, in +the sun; these they brought us full of water, and set them down near the +sea-shore, and there left them, going back a little, that we might fetch +them, which we did. + +Some time after this, they brought us roots and herbs, and some fruits +which I cannot remember, and gave us; but as we had nothing to give +them, we found them not so free as the people in Madagascar were. +However, our cutler went to work, and, as he had saved some iron out +of the wreck of the ship, he made abundance of toys, birds, dogs, pins, +hooks, and rings; and we helped to file them, and make them bright for +him, and when we gave them some of these, they brought us all sorts of +provisions they had, such as goats, hogs, and cows, and we got victuals +enough. + +We were now landed upon the continent of Africa, the most desolate, +desert, and inhospitable country in the world, even Greenland and Nova +Zembla itself not excepted, with this difference only, that even the +worst part of it we found inhabited, though, taking the nature and +quality of some of the inhabitants, it might have been much better to us +if there had been none. + +And, to add to the exclamation I am making on the nature of the place, +it was here that we took one of the rashest, and wildest, and most +desperate resolutions that ever was taken by man, or any number of men, +in the world; this was, to travel overland through the heart of the +country, from the coast of Mozambique, on the east ocean, to the coast +of Angola or Guinea, on the western or Atlantic Ocean, a continent of +land of at least 1800 miles, in which journey we had excessive heats to +support, unpassable deserts to go over, no carriages, camels, or beasts +of any kind to carry our baggage, innumerable numbers of wild and +ravenous beasts to encounter with, such as lions, leopards, tigers, +lizards, and elephants; we had the equinoctial line to pass under, and, +consequently, were in the very centre of the torrid zone; we had nations +of savages to encounter with, barbarous and brutish to the last degree; +hunger and thirst to struggle with, and, in one word, terrors enough to +have daunted the stoutest hearts that ever were placed in cases of flesh +and blood. + +Yet, fearless of all these, we resolved to adventure, and accordingly +made such preparations for our journey as the place we were in would +allow us, and such as our little experience of the country seemed to +dictate to us. + +It had been some time already that we had been used to tread barefooted +upon the rocks, the gravel, the grass, and the sand on the shore; but as +we found the worst thing for our feet was the walking or travelling on +the dry burning sands, within the country, so we provided ourselves with +a sort of shoes, made of the skins of wild beasts, with the hair inward, +and being dried in the sun, the outsides were thick and hard, and would +last a great while. In short, as I called them, so I think the term very +proper still, we made us gloves for our feet, and we found them very +convenient and very comfortable. + +We conversed with some of the natives of the country, who were friendly +enough. What tongue they spoke I do not yet pretend to know. We +talked as far as we could make them understand us, not only about our +provisions, but also about our undertaking, and asked them what country +lay that way, pointing west with our hands. They told us but little to +our purpose, only we thought, by all their discourse, that there were +people to be found, of one sort or other, everywhere; that there were +many great rivers, many lions and tigers, elephants, and furious wild +cats (which in the end we found to be civet cats), and the like. + +When we asked them if any one had ever travelled that way, they told +us yes, some had gone to where the sun sleeps, meaning to the west, but +they could not tell us who they were. When we asked for some to guide +us, they shrunk up their shoulders as Frenchmen do when they are afraid +to undertake a thing. When we asked them about the lions and wild +creatures, they laughed, and let us know that they would do us no hurt, +and directed us to a good way indeed to deal with them, and that was to +make some fire, which would always fright them away; and so indeed we +found it. + +Upon these encouragements we resolved upon our journey, and many +considerations put us upon it, which, had the thing itself been +practicable, we were not so much to blame for as it might otherwise be +supposed; I will name some of them, not to make the account too tedious. + +First, we were perfectly destitute of means to work about our own +deliverance any other way; we were on shore in a place perfectly remote +from all European navigation; so that we could never think of being +relieved, and fetched off by any of our own countrymen in that part of +the world. Secondly, if we had adventured to have sailed on along the +coast of Mozambique, and the desolate shores of Africa to the north, +till we came to the Red Sea, all we could hope for there was to be taken +by the Arabs, and be sold for slaves to the Turks, which to all of us +was little better than death. We could not build anything of a vessel +that would carry us over the great Arabian Sea to India, nor could we +reach the Cape de Bona Speranza, the winds being too variable, and the +sea in that latitude too tempestuous; but we all knew, if we could cross +this continent of land, we might reach some of the great rivers that run +into the Atlantic Ocean; and that, on the banks of any of those rivers, +we might there build us canoes which would carry us down, if it were +thousands of miles, so that we could want nothing but food, of which we +were assured we might kill sufficient with our guns; and to add to the +satisfaction of our deliverance, we concluded we might, every one of +us, get a quantity of gold, which, if we came safe, would infinitely +recompense us for our toil. + +I cannot say that in all our consultations I ever began to enter into +the weight and merit of any enterprise we went upon till now. My view +before was, as I thought, very good, viz., that we should get into the +Arabian Gulf, or the mouth of the Red Sea; and waiting for some vessel +passing or repassing there, of which there is plenty, have seized upon +the first we came at by force, and not only have enriched ourselves with +her cargo, but have carried ourselves to what part of the world we had +pleased; but when they came to talk to me of a march of 2000 or 3000 +miles on foot, of wandering in deserts among lions and tigers, I confess +my blood ran chill, and I used all the arguments I could to persuade +them against it. + +But they were all positive, and I might as well have held my tongue; so +I submitted, and told them I would keep to our first law, to be governed +by the majority, and we resolved upon our journey. The first thing we +did was to take an observation, and see whereabouts in the world we +were, which we did, and found we were in the latitude of 12 degrees 35 +minutes south of the line. The next thing was to look on the charts, and +see the coast of the country we aimed at, which we found to be from 8 to +11 degrees south latitude, if we went for the coast of Angola, or in 12 +to 29 degrees north latitude, if we made for the river Niger, and the +coast of Guinea. + +Our aim was for the coast of Angola, which, by the charts we had, lying +very near the same latitude we were then in, our course thither was due +west; and as we were assured we should meet with rivers, we doubted not +but that by their help we might ease our journey, especially if we could +find means to cross the great lake, or inland sea, which the natives +call Coalmucoa, out of which it is said the river Nile has its source +or beginning; but we reckoned without our host, as you will see in the +sequel of our story. + +The next thing we had to consider was, how to carry our baggage, which +we were first of all determined not to travel without; neither indeed +was it possible for us to do so, for even our ammunition, which was +absolutely necessary to us, and on which our subsistence, I mean for +food, as well as our safety, and particularly our defence against wild +beasts and wild men, depended,--I say, even our ammunition was a load +too heavy for us to carry in a country where the heat was such that we +should be load enough for ourselves. + +We inquired in the country, and found there was no beast of burthen +known among them, that is to say, neither horses or mules, or asses, +camels, or dromedaries; the only creature they had was a kind of +buffalo, or tame bull, such a one as we had killed; and that some of +these they had brought so to their hand, that they taught them to go and +come with their voices, as they called them to them, or sent them from +them; that they made them carry burthens; and particularly that they +would swim over rivers and lakes upon them, the creatures swimming very +high and strong in the water. + +But we understood nothing of the management of guiding such a +creature, or how to bind a burthen upon them; and this last part of our +consultation puzzled us extremely. At last I proposed a method for them, +which, after some consideration, they found very convenient; and this +was, to quarrel with some of the negro natives, take ten or twelve of +them prisoners, and binding them as slaves, cause them to travel with +us, and make them carry our baggage; which I alleged would be convenient +and useful many ways as well to show us the way, as to converse with +other natives for us. + +This counsel was not accepted at first, but the natives soon gave them +reason to approve it, and also gave them an opportunity to put it in +practice; for, as our little traffic with the natives was hitherto upon +the faith of their first kindness, we found some knavery among them at +last; for having bought some cattle of them for our toys, which, as +I said, our cutler had contrived, one of our men differing with his +chapman, truly they huffed him in their manner, and, keeping the things +he had offered them for the cattle, made their fellows drive away the +cattle before his face, and laugh at him. Our man crying out loud of +this violence, and calling to some of us who were not far off, the negro +he was dealing with threw a lance at him, which came so true, that, if +he had not with great agility jumped aside, and held up his hand also +to turn the lance as it came, it had struck through his body; and, as it +was, it wounded him in the arm; at which the man, enraged, took up his +fuzee, and shot the negro through the heart. + +The others that were near him, and all those that were with us at +a distance, were so terribly frighted, first, at the flash of fire; +secondly, at the noise; and thirdly, at seeing their countryman killed, +that they stood like men stupid and amazed, at first, for some time; but +after they were a little recovered from their fright, one of them, at a +good distance from us, set up a sudden screaming noise, which, it +seems, is the noise they make when they go to fight; and all the rest +understanding what he meant, answered him, and ran together to the place +where he was, and we not knowing what it meant, stood still, looking +upon one another like a parcel of fools. + +But we were presently undeceived; for, in two or three minutes more, +we heard the screaming roaring noise go on from one place to another, +through all their little towns; nay, even over the creek to the other +side; and, on a sudden, we saw a naked multitude running from all parts +to the place where the first man began it, as to a rendezvous; and, in +less than an hour, I believe there was near 500 of them gotten together, +armed some with bows and arrows, but most with lances, which they throw +at a good distance, so nicely that they will strike a bird flying. + +We had but a very little time for consultation, for the multitude was +increasing every moment; and I verily believe, if we had stayed long, +they would have been 10,000 together in a little time. We had nothing +to do, therefore, but to fly to our ship or bark, where indeed we could +have defended ourselves very well, or to advance and try what a volley +or two of small shot would do for us. + +We resolved immediately upon the latter, depending upon it that the fire +and terror of our shot would soon put them to flight; so we drew up all +in a line, and marched boldly up to them. They stood ready to meet us, +depending, I suppose, to destroy us all with their lances; but before +we came near enough for them to throw their lances, we halted, and, +standing at a good distance from one another, to stretch our line as far +as we could, we gave them a salute with our shot, which, besides what we +wounded that we knew not of, knocked sixteen of them down upon the spot, +and three more were so lamed, that they fell about twenty or thirty +yards from them. + +As soon as we had fired, they set up the horridest yell, or howling, +partly raised by those that were wounded, and partly by those that +pitied and condoled the bodies they saw lie dead, that I never heard +anything like it before or since. + +We stood stock still after we had fired, to load our guns again, and +finding they did not stir from the place we fired among them again; we +killed about nine of them at the second fire; but as they did not stand +so thick as before, all our men did not fire, seven of us being ordered +to reserve our charge, and to advance as soon as the other had fired, +while the rest loaded again; of which I shall speak again presently. + +As soon as we had fired the second volley, we shouted as loud as we +could, and the seven men advanced upon them, and, coming about twenty +yards nearer, fired again, and those that were behind having loaded +again with all expedition, followed; but when they saw us advance, they +ran screaming away as if they were bewitched. + +When we came up to the field of battle, we saw a great number of bodies +lying upon the ground, many more than we could suppose were killed or +wounded; nay, more than we had bullets in our pieces when we fired; and +we could not tell what to make of it; but at length we found how it +was, viz., that they were frighted out of all manner of sense; nay, I do +believe several of those that were really dead, were frighted to death, +and had no wound about them. + +Of those that were thus frighted, as I have said, several of them, as +they recovered themselves, came and worshipped us (taking us for gods or +devils, I know not which, nor did it much matter to us): some kneeling, +some throwing themselves flat on the ground, made a thousand antic +gestures, but all with tokens of the most profound submission. It +presently came into my head, that we might now, by the law of arms, take +as many prisoners as we would, and make them travel with us, and carry +our baggage. As soon as I proposed it, our men were all of my mind; and +accordingly we secured about sixty lusty young fellows, and let them +know they must go with us; which they seemed very willing to do. But +the next question we had among ourselves, was, how we should do to trust +them, for we found the people not like those of Madagascar, but fierce, +revengeful, and treacherous; for which reason we were sure that we +should have no service from them but that of mere slaves; no subjection +that would continue any longer than the fear of us was upon them, nor +any labour but by violence. + +Before I go any farther, I must hint to the reader, that from this time +forward I began to enter a little more seriously into the circumstance +I was in, and concerned myself more in the conduct of our affairs; for +though my comrades were all older men, yet I began to find them void of +counsel, or, as I now call it, presence of mind, when they came to the +execution of a thing. The first occasion I took to observe this, was in +their late engagement with the natives, when, though they had taken a +good resolution to attack them and fire upon them, yet, when they had +fired the first time, and found that the negroes did not run as they +expected, their hearts began to fail, and I am persuaded, if their bark +had been near hand, they would every man have run away. + +Upon this occasion I began to take upon me a little to hearten them +up, and to call upon them to load again, and give them another volley, +telling them that I would engage, if they would be ruled by me, I'd make +the negroes run fast enough. I found this heartened them, and therefore, +when they fired a second time, I desired them to reserve some of their +shot for an attempt by itself, as I mentioned above. + +Having fired a second time, I was indeed forced to command, as I may +call it. "Now, seigniors," said I, "let us give them a cheer." So I +opened my throat, and shouted three times, as our English sailors do on +like occasions. "And now follow me," said I to the seven that had not +fired, "and I'll warrant you we will make work with them," and so it +proved indeed; for, as soon as they saw us coming, away they ran, as +above. + +From this day forward they would call me nothing but Seignior Capitanio; +but I told them I would not be called seignior. "Well, then," said the +gunner, who spoke good English, "you shall be called Captain Bob;" and +so they gave me my title ever after. + +Nothing is more certain of the Portuguese than this, take them +nationally or personally, if they are animated and heartened up by +anybody to go before, and encourage them by example, they will behave +well enough; but if they have nothing but their own measures to follow, +they sink immediately: these men had certainly fled from a parcel of +naked savages, though even by flying they could not have saved their +lives, if I had not shouted and hallooed, and rather made sport with the +thing than a fight, to keep up their courage. + +Nor was there less need of it upon several occasions hereafter; and I do +confess I have often wondered how a number of men, who, when they came +to the extremity, were so ill supported by their own spirits, had +at first courage to propose and to undertake the most desperate and +impracticable attempt that ever men went about in the world. + +There were indeed two or three indefatigable men among them, by whose +courage and industry all the rest were upheld; and indeed those two or +three were the managers of them from the beginning; that was the gunner, +and that cutler whom I call the artist; and the third, who was pretty +well, though not like either of them, was one of the carpenters. These +indeed were the life and soul of all the rest, and it was to their +courage that all the rest owed the resolution they showed upon any +occasion. But when those saw me take a little upon me, as above, they +embraced me, and treated me with particular affection ever after. + +This gunner was an excellent mathematician, a good scholar, and a +complete sailor; and it was in conversing intimately with him that I +learned afterwards the grounds of what knowledge I have since had in all +the sciences useful for navigation, and particularly in the geographical +part of knowledge. + +Even in our conversation, finding me eager to understand and learn, he +laid the foundation of a general knowledge of things in my mind, gave +me just ideas of the form of the earth and of the sea, the situation of +countries, the course of rivers, the doctrine of the spheres, the motion +of the stars; and, in a word, taught me a kind of system of astronomy, +which I afterwards improved. + +In an especial manner, he filled my head with aspiring thoughts, and +with an earnest desire after learning everything that could be taught +me; convincing me, that nothing could qualify me for great undertakings, +but a degree of learning superior to what was usual in the race of +seamen; he told me, that to be ignorant was to be certain of a +mean station in the world, but that knowledge was the first step to +preferment. He was always flattering me with my capacity to learn; and +though that fed my pride, yet, on the other hand, as I had a secret +ambition, which just at that time fed itself in my mind, it prompted in +me an insatiable thirst after learning in general, and I resolved, if +ever I came back to Europe, and had anything left to purchase it, I +would make myself master of all the parts of learning needful to +the making of me a complete sailor; but I was not so just to myself +afterwards as to do it when I had an opportunity. + +But to return to our business; the gunner, when he saw the service I +had done in the fight, and heard my proposal for keeping a number of +prisoners for our march, and for carrying our baggage, turns to me +before them all. "Captain Bob," says he, "I think you must be our +leader, for all the success of this enterprise is owing to you." "No, +no," said I, "do not compliment me; you shall be our Seignior Capitanio, +you shall be general; I am too young for it." So, in short, we all +agreed he should be our leader; but he would not accept of it alone, but +would have me joined with him; and all the rest agreeing, I was obliged +to comply. + +The first piece of service they put me upon in this new command was +as difficult as any they could think of, and that was to manage the +prisoners; which, however, I cheerfully undertook, as you shall hear +presently. But the immediate consultation was yet of more consequence; +and that was, first, which way we should go; and secondly, how to +furnish ourselves for the voyage with provisions. + +There was among the prisoners one tall, well-shaped, handsome fellow, +to whom the rest seemed to pay great respect, and who, as we understood +afterwards, was the son of one of their kings; his father was, it seems, +killed at our first volley, and he wounded with a shot in his arm, and +with another just on one of his hips or haunches. The shot in his haunch +being in a fleshy part, bled much, and he was half dead with the loss of +blood. As to the shot in his arm, it had broke his wrist, and he was by +both these wounds quite disabled, so that we were once going to turn him +away, and let him die; and, if we had, he would have died indeed in a +few days more: but, as I found the man had some respect showed him, it +presently occurred to my thoughts that we might bring him to be useful +to us, and perhaps make him a kind of commander over them. So I caused +our surgeon to take him in hand, and gave the poor wretch good words, +that is to say, I spoke to him as well as I could by signs, to make him +understand that we would make him well again. + +This created a new awe in their minds of us, believing that, as we could +kill at a distance by something invisible to them (for so our shot was, +to be sure), so we could make them well again too. Upon this the young +prince (for so we called him afterwards) called six or seven of the +savages to him, and said something to them; what it was we know not, but +immediately all the seven came to me, and kneeled down to me, holding up +their hands, and making signs of entreaty, pointing to the place where +one of those lay whom we had killed. + +It was a long time before I or any of us could understand them; but one +of them ran and lifted up a dead man, pointing to his wound, which was +in his eyes, for he was shot into the head at one of his eyes. Then +another pointed to the surgeon, and at last we found it out, that the +meaning was, that he should heal the prince's father too, who was dead, +being shot through the head, as above. + +We presently took the hint, and would not say we could not do it, but +let them know, the men that were killed were those that had first fallen +upon us, and provoked us, and we would by no means make them alive +again; and that, if any others did so, we would kill them too, and never +let them live any more: but that, if he (the prince) would be willing +to go with us, and do as we should direct him, we would not let him die, +and would make his arm well. Upon this he bid his men go and fetch a +long stick or staff, and lay on the ground. When they brought it, we saw +it was an arrow; he took it with his left hand (for his other was lame +with the wound), and, pointing up at the sun, broke the arrow in two, +and set the point against his breast, and then gave it to me. This was, +as I understood afterwards, wishing the sun, whom they worship, might +shoot him into the breast with an arrow, if ever he failed to be my +friend; and giving the point of the arrow to me was to be a testimony +that I was the man he had sworn to: and never was Christian more +punctual to an oath than he was to this, for he was a sworn servant to +us for many a weary month after that. + +When I brought him to the surgeon, he immediately dressed the wound in +his haunch or buttock, and found the bullet had only grazed upon the +flesh, and passed, as it were, by it, but it was not lodged in the part, +so that it was soon healed and well again; but, as to his arm, he found +one of the bones broken, which are in the fore-part from the wrist to +the elbow; and this he set, and splintered it up, and bound his arm in a +sling, hanging it about his neck, and making signs to him that he should +not stir it; which he was so strict an observer of, that he set him +down, and never moved one way or other but as the surgeon gave him +leave. + +I took a great deal of pains to acquaint this negro what we intended +to do, and what use we intended to make of his men; and particularly +to teach him the meaning of what we said, especially to teach him some +words, such as yes and no, and what they meant, and to inure him to +our way of talking; and he was very willing and apt to learn anything I +taught him. + +It was easy to let him see that we intended to carry our provision with +us from the first day; but he made signs to us to tell us we need not, +for we should find provision enough everywhere for forty days. It was +very difficult for us to understand how he expressed forty; for he +knew no figures, but some words that they used to one another that they +understood it by. At last one of the negroes, by his order, laid forty +little stones one by another, to show us how many days we should travel, +and find provisions sufficient. + +Then I showed him our baggage, which was very heavy, particularly our +powder, shot, lead, iron, carpenters' tools, seamen's instruments, cases +of bottles, and other lumber. He took some of the things up in his hand +to feel the weight, and shook his head at them; so I told our people +they must resolve to divide their things into small parcels, and make +them portable; and accordingly they did so, by which means we were fain +to leave all our chests behind us, which were eleven in number. + +Then he made signs to us that he would procure some buffaloes, or young +bulls, as I called them, to carry things for us, and made signs, too, +that if we were weary, we might be carried too; but that we slighted, +only were willing to have the creatures, because, at last, when they +could serve us no farther for carriage, we might eat them all up if we +had any occasion for them. + +I then carried him to our bark, and showed him what things we had here. +He seemed amazed at the sight of our bark, having never seen anything +of that kind before, for their boats are most wretched things, such as +I never saw before, having no head or stern, and being made only of the +skins of goats, sewed together with dried guts of goats and sheep, and +done over with a kind of slimy stuff like rosin and oil, but of a most +nauseous, odious smell; and they are poor miserable things for boats, +the worst that any part of the world ever saw; a canoe is an excellent +contrivance compared to them. + +But to return to our boat. We carried our new prince into it, and helped +him over the side, because of his lameness. We made signs to him that +his men must carry our goods for us, and showed him what we had; he +answered, "Si, Seignior," or, "Yes, sir" (for we had taught him that +word and the meaning of it), and taking up a bundle, he made signs to +us, that when his arm was well he would carry some for us. + +I made signs again to tell him, that if he would make his men carry +them, we would not let him carry anything. We had secured all the +prisoners in a narrow place, where we had bound them with mat cords, and +set up stakes like a palisado round them; so, when we carried the prince +on shore, we went with him to them, and made signs to him to ask them if +they were willing to go with us to the country of lions. Accordingly he +made a long speech to them, and we could understand by it that he told +them, if they were willing, they must say, "Si, Seignior," telling +them what it signified. They immediately answered, "Si, Seignior," and +clapped their hands, looking up to the sun, which, the prince signified +to us, was swearing to be faithful. But as soon as they had said so, one +of them made a long speech to the prince; and in it we perceived, by his +gestures, which were very antic, that they desired something from us, +and that they were in great concern about it. So I asked him, as well as +I could, what it was they desired of us; he told us by signs that they +desired we should clap our hands to the sun (that was, to swear) that we +would not kill them, that we would give them chiaruck, that is to say, +bread, would not starve them, and would not let the lions eat them. +I told him we would promise all that; then he pointed to the sun, and +clapped his hands, signing to me that I should do so too, which I did; +at which all the prisoners fell flat on the ground, and rising up again, +made the oddest, wildest cries that ever I heard. + +I think it was the first time in my life that ever any religious thought +affected me; but I could not refrain some reflections, and almost tears, +in considering how happy it was that I was not born among such creatures +as these, and was not so stupidly ignorant and barbarous; but this soon +went off again, and I was not troubled again with any qualms of that +sort for a long time after. + +When this ceremony was over, our concern was to get some provisions, +as well for the present subsistence of our prisoners as ourselves; and +making signs to our prince that we were thinking upon that subject, he +made signs to me that, if I would let one of the prisoners go to his +town, he should bring provisions, and should bring some beasts to carry +our baggage. I seemed loth to trust him, and supposing that he would +run away, he made great signs of fidelity, and with his own hands tied a +rope about his neck, offering me one end of it, intimating that I should +hang him if the man did not come again. So I consented, and he gave him +abundance of instructions, and sent him away, pointing to the light of +the sun, which it seems was to tell him at what time he must be back. + +The fellow ran as if he was mad, and held it till he was quite out of +sight, by which I supposed he had a great way to go. The next morning, +about two hours before the time appointed, the black prince, for so I +always called him, beckoning with his hand to me, and hallooing after +his manner, desired me to come to him, which I did, when, pointing to a +little hill about two miles off, I saw plainly a little drove of cattle, +and several people with them; those, he told me by signs, were the man +he had sent, and several more with him, and cattle for us. + +Accordingly, by the time appointed, he came quite to our huts, and +brought with him a great many cows, young runts, about sixteen goats, +and four young bulls, taught to carry burthens. + +This was a supply of provisions sufficient; as for bread, we were +obliged to shift with some roots which we had made use of before. We +then began to consider of making some large bags like the soldiers' +knapsacks, for their men to carry our baggage in, and to make it easy +to them; and the goats being killed, I ordered the skins to be spread +in the sun, and they were as dry in two days as could be desired; so we +found means to make such little bags as we wanted, and began to divide +our baggage into them. When the black prince found what they were for, +and how easy they were of carriage when we put them on, he smiled a +little, and sent away the man again to fetch skins, and he brought two +natives more with him, all loaded with skins better cured than ours, and +of other kinds, such as we could not tell what names to give them. + +These two men brought the black prince two lances, of the sort they use +in their fights, but finer than ordinary, being made of black smooth +wood, as fine as ebony, and headed at the point with the end of a long +tooth of some creature--we could not tell of what creature; the head was +so firm put on, and the tooth so strong, though no bigger than my thumb, +and sharp at the end, that I never saw anything like it in any place in +the world. + +The prince would not take them till I gave him leave, but made signs +that they should give them to me; however, I gave him leave to take them +himself, for I saw evident signs of an honourable just principle in him. + +We now prepared for our march, when the prince coming to me, and +pointing towards the several quarters of the world, made signs to know +which way we intended to go; and when I showed him, pointing to the +west, he presently let me know there was a great river a little further +to the north, which was able to carry our bark many leagues into the +country due west. I presently took the hint, and inquired for the mouth +of the river, which I understood by him was above a day's march, and, by +our estimation, we found it about seven leagues further. I take this to +be the great river marked by our chart-makers at the northmost part of +the coast of Mozambique, and called there Quilloa. + +Consulting thus with ourselves, we resolved to take the prince, and as +many of the prisoners as we could stow in our frigate, and go about +by the bay into the river; and that eight of us, with our arms, should +march by land to meet them on the river side; for the prince, carrying +us to a rising ground, had showed us the river very plain, a great way +up the country, and in one place it was not above six miles to it. + +It was my lot to march by land, and be captain of the whole caravan. +I had eight of our men with me, and seven-and-thirty of our prisoners, +without any baggage, for all our luggage was yet on board. We drove the +young bulls with us; nothing was ever so tame, so willing to work, or +carry anything. The negroes would ride upon them four at a time, and +they would go very willingly. They would eat out of our hand, lick our +feet, and were as tractable as a dog. + +We drove with us six or seven cows for food; but our negroes knew +nothing of curing the flesh by salting and drying it till we showed them +the way, and then they were mighty willing to do so as long as we had +any salt to do it with, and to carry salt a great way too, after we +found we should have no more. + +It was an easy march to the river side for us that went by land, and +we came thither in a piece of a day, being, as above, no more than six +English miles; whereas it was no less than five days before they came +to us by water, the wind in the bay having failed them, and the way, by +reason of a great turn or reach in the river, being about fifty miles +about. + +We spent this time in a thing which the two strangers, which brought the +prince the two lances, put into the head of the prisoners, viz., to make +bottles of the goats' skins to carry fresh water in, which it seems they +knew we should come to want; and the men did it so dexterously, having +dried skins fetched them by those two men, that before our vessel came +up, they had every man a pouch like a bladder, to carry fresh water in, +hanging over their shoulders by a thong made of other skins, about three +inches broad, like the sling of a fuzee. + +Our prince, to assure us of the fidelity of the men in this march, +had ordered them to be tied two and two by the wrist, as we handcuff +prisoners in England; and made them so sensible of the reasonableness of +it, that he made them do it themselves, appointing four of them to bind +the rest; but we found them so honest, and particularly so obedient +to him, that after we were gotten a little further off of their own +country, we set them at liberty, though, when he came to us, he would +have them tied again, and they continued so a good while. + +All the country on the bank of the river was a high land, no marshy +swampy ground in it; the verdure good, and abundance of cattle feeding +upon it wherever we went, or which way soever we looked; there was +not much wood indeed, at least not near us; but further up we saw oak, +cedar, and pine-trees, some of which were very large. + +The river was a fair open channel, about as broad as the Thames below +Gravesend, and a strong tide of flood, which we found held us about +sixty miles; the channel deep, nor did we find any want of water for a +great way. In short, we went merrily up the river with the flood and +the wind blowing still fresh at E. and E.N.E. We stemmed the ebb easily +also, especially while the river continued broad and deep; but when we +came past the swelling of the tide, and had the natural current of the +river to go against, we found it too strong for us, and began to think +of quitting our bark; but the prince would by no means agree to that, +for, finding we had on board pretty good store of roping made of mats +and flags, which I described before, he ordered all the prisoners which +were on shore to come and take hold of those ropes, and tow us along by +the shore side; and as we hoisted our sail too, to ease them, the men +ran along with us at a very great rate. + +In this manner the river carried us up, by our computation, near 200 +miles, and then it narrowed apace, and was not above as broad as the +Thames is at Windsor, or thereabouts; and, after another day, we came +to a great waterfall or cataract, enough to fright us, for I believe the +whole body of water fell at once perpendicularly down a precipice +above sixty foot high, which made noise enough to deprive men of their +hearing, and we heard it above ten miles before we came to it. + +Here we were at a full stop, and now our prisoners went first on shore; +they had worked very hard and very cheerfully, relieving one another, +those that were weary being taken into the bark. Had we had canoes or +any boats which might have been carried by men's strength we might have +gone two hundred miles more up this river in small boats, but our great +boat could go no farther. + +All this way the country looked green and pleasant, and was full of +cattle, and some people we saw, though not many; but this we observed +now, that the people did no more understand our prisoners here than +we could understand them; being, it seems, of different nations and of +different speech. We had yet seen no wild beasts, or, at least, none +that came very near us, except two days before we came to the waterfall, +when we saw three of the most beautiful leopards that ever were seen, +standing upon the bank of the river on the north side, our prisoners +being all on the other side of the water. Our gunner espied them first, +and ran to fetch his gun, putting a ball extraordinary in it; and coming +to me, "Now, Captain Bob," says he, "where is your prince?" So I called +him out. "Now," says he, "tell your men not to be afraid; tell them they +shall see that thing in his hand speak in fire to one of those beasts, +and make it kill itself." + +The poor negroes looked as if they had been all going to be killed, +notwithstanding what their prince said to them, and stood staring to +expect the issue, when on a sudden the gunner fired; and as he was a +very good marksman, he shot the creature with two slugs, just in the +head. As soon as the leopard felt herself struck, she reared up on her +two hind-legs, bolt upright, and throwing her forepaws about in the air, +fell backward, growling and struggling, and immediately died; the other +two, frighted with the fire and the noise, fled, and were out of sight +in an instant. + +But the two frighted leopards were not in half the consternation that +our prisoners were; four or five of them fell down as if they had been +shot; several others fell on their knees, and lifted up their hands to +us; whether to worship us, or pray us not to kill them, we did not know; +but we made signs to their prince to encourage them, which he did, but +it was with much ado that he brought them to their senses. Nay, the +prince, notwithstanding all that was said to prepare him for it, yet +when the piece went off, he gave a start as if he would have leaped into +the river. + +When we saw the creature killed, I had a great mind to have the skin of +her, and made signs to the prince that he should send some of his men +over to take the skin off. As soon as he spoke but a word, four of them, +that offered themselves, were untied, and immediately they jumped into +the river, and swam over, and went to work with him. The prince having a +knife that we gave him, made four wooden knives so clever, that I never +saw anything like them in my life; and in less than an hour's time they +brought me the skin of the leopard, which was a monstrous great one, for +it was from the ears to the tale about seven foot, and near five foot +broad on the back, and most admirably spotted all over. The skin of this +leopard I brought to London many years after. + +We were now all upon a level as to our travelling, being unshipped, for +our bark would swim no farther, and she was too heavy to carry on our +backs; but as we found the course of the river went a great way farther, +we consulted our carpenters whether we could not pull the bark in +pieces, and make us three or four small boats to go on with. They told +us we might do so, but it would be very long a-doing; and that, when +we had done, we had neither pitch or tar to make them sound to keep the +water out, or nails to fasten the plank. But one of them told us that as +soon as he could come at any large tree near the river, he would make +us a canoe or two in a quarter of the time, and which would serve us +as well for all the uses we could have any occasion for as a boat; and +such, that if we came to any waterfalls, we might take them up, and +carry them for a mile or two by land upon our shoulders. + +Upon this we gave over the thoughts of our frigate, and hauling her into +a little cove or inlet, where a small brook came into the main river, +we laid her up for those that came next, and marched forward. We spent +indeed two days dividing our baggage, and loading our tame buffaloes +and our negroes. Our powder and shot, which was the thing we were most +careful of, we ordered thus:--First, the powder we divided into little +leather bags, that is to say, bags of dried skins, with the hair inward, +that the powder might not grow damp; and then we put those bags into +other bags, made of bullocks' skins, very thick and hard, with the hair +outward, that no wet might come in; and this succeeded so well, that in +the greatest rains we had, whereof some were very violent and very long, +we always kept our powder dry. Besides these bags, which held our chief +magazine, we divided to every one a quarter of a pound of powder, and +half a pound of shot, to carry always about us; which, as it was enough +for our present use, so we were willing to have no weight to carry more +than was absolutely necessary, because of the heat. + +We kept still on the bank of the river, and for that reason had but very +little communication with the people of the country; for, having also +our bark stored with plenty of provisions, we had no occasion to look +abroad for a supply; but now, when we came to march on foot, we were +obliged often to seek out for food. The first place we came to on the +river, that gave us any stop, was a little negro town, containing about +fifty huts, and there appeared about 400 people, for they all came out +to see us, and wonder at us. When our negroes appeared the inhabitants +began to fly to arms, thinking there had been enemies coming upon them; +but our negroes, though they could not speak their language, made signs +to them that they had no weapons, and were tied two and two together as +captives, and that there were people behind who came from the sun, and +that could kill them all, and make them alive again, if they pleased; +but that they would do them no hurt, and came with peace. As soon as +they understood this they laid down their lances, and bows and arrows, +and came and stuck twelve large stakes in the ground as a token of +peace, bowing themselves to us in token of submission. But as soon as +they saw white men with beards, that is to say, with mustachios, they +ran screaming away, as in a fright. + +We kept at a distance from them, not to be too familiar; and when we did +appear it was but two or three of us at a time. But our prisoners +made them understand that we required some provisions of them; so +they brought us some black cattle, for they have abundance of cows and +buffaloes all over that side of the country, as also great numbers of +deer. Our cutler, who had now a great stock of things of his handiwork, +gave them some little knick-knacks, as plates of silver and of iron, +cut diamond fashion, and cut into hearts and into rings, and they were +mightily pleased. They also brought several fruits and roots, which we +did not understand, but our negroes fed heartily on them, and after we +had seen them eat them, we did so too. + +Having stocked ourselves here with flesh and root as much as we could +well carry, we divided the burthens among our negroes, appointing about +thirty to forty pounds weight to a man, which we thought indeed was load +enough in a hot country; and the negroes did not at all repine at it, +but would sometimes help one another when they began to be weary, which +did happen now and then, though not often; besides, as most of their +luggage was our provision, it lightened every day, like Aesop's basket +of bread, till we came to get a recruit.--Note, when we loaded them we +untied their hands, and tied them two and two together by one foot. + +The third day of our march from this place our chief carpenter desired +us to halt, and set up some huts, for he had found out some trees that +he liked, and resolved to make us some canoes; for, as he told me, he +knew we should have marching enough on foot after we left the river, and +he was resolved to go no farther by land than needs must. + +We had no sooner given orders for our little camp, and given leave to +our negroes to lay down their loads, but they fell to work to build our +huts; and though they were tied as above, yet they did it so nimbly as +surprised us. Here we set some of the negroes quite at liberty, that is +to say, without tying them, having the prince's word passed for their +fidelity; and some of these were ordered to help the carpenters, which +they did very handily, with a little direction, and others were sent +to see whether they could get any provisions near hand; but instead of +provisions, three of them came in with two bows and arrows, and five +lances. They could not easily make us understand how they came by them, +only that they had surprised some negro women, who were in some huts, +the men being from home, and they had found the lances and bows in the +huts, or houses, the women and children flying away at the sight of +them, as from robbers. We seemed very angry at them, and made the prince +ask them if they had not killed any of the women or children, making +them believe that, if they had killed anybody, we would make them kill +themselves too; but they protested their innocence, so we excused them. +Then they brought us the bows and arrows and lances; but, at a motion of +their black prince, we gave them back the bows and arrows, and gave them +leave to go out to see what they could kill for food; and here we gave +them the laws of arms, viz., that if any man appeared to assault them, +or shoot at them to offer any violence to them, they might kill them; +but that they should not offer to kill or hurt any that offered them +peace, or laid down their weapons, nor any women or children, upon any +occasion whatsoever. These were our articles of war. + +These two fellows had not been gone out above three or four hours, but +one of them came running to us without his bow and arrows, hallooing and +whooping a great while before he came at us, "Okoamo, okoamo!" which, +it seems, was, "Help, help!" The rest of the negroes rose up in a hurry, +and by twos, as they could, ran forward towards their fellows, to know +what the matter was. As for me, I did not understand it, nor any of our +people; the prince looked as if something unlucky had fallen out, and +some of our men took up their arms to be ready on occasion. But the +negroes soon discovered the thing, for we saw four of them presently +after coming along with a great load of meat upon their backs. The case +was, that the two who went out with their bows and arrows, meeting with +a great herd of deer in the plain, had been so nimble as to shoot three +of them, and then one of them came running to us for help to fetch them +away. This was the first venison we had met with in all our march, and +we feasted upon it very plentifully; and this was the first time we +began to prevail with our prince to eat his meat dressed our way; after +which his men were prevailed with by his example, but before that, they +ate most of the flesh they had quite raw. + +We wished now we had brought some bows and arrows out with us, which we +might have done; and we began to have so much confidence in our negroes, +and to be so familiar with them, that we oftentimes let them go, or the +greatest part of them, untied, being well assured they would not leave +us, and that they did not know what course to take without us; but one +thing we resolved not to trust them with, and that was the charging our +guns: but they always believed our guns had some heavenly power in them, +that would send forth fire and smoke, and speak with a dreadful noise, +and kill at a distance whenever we bid them. + +In about eight days we finished three canoes, and in them we embarked +our white men and our baggage, with our prince, and some of the +prisoners. We also found it needful to keep some of ourselves always on +shore, not only to manage the negroes, but to defend them from enemies +and wild beasts. Abundance of little incidents happened upon this march, +which it is impossible to crowd into this account; particularly, we +saw more wild beasts now than we did before, some elephants, and two or +three lions, none of which kinds we had seen any of before; and we +found our negroes were more afraid of them a great deal than we were; +principally, because they had no bows and arrows, or lances, which were +the particular weapons they were bred up to the exercise of. + +But we cured them of their fears by being always ready with our +firearms. However, as we were willing to be sparing of our powder, and +the killing of any of the creatures now was no advantage to us, seeing +their skins were too heavy for us to carry, and their flesh not good to +eat, we resolved therefore to keep some of our pieces uncharged and only +primed; and causing them to flash in the pan, the beasts, even the +lions themselves, would always start and fly back when they saw it, and +immediately march off. + +We passed abundance of inhabitants upon this upper part of the river, +and with this observation, that almost every ten miles we came to a +separate nation, and every separate nation had a different speech, +or else their speech had differing dialects, so that they did not +understand one another. They all abounded in cattle, especially on the +river-side; and the eighth day of this second navigation we met with +a little negro town, where they had growing a sort of corn like rice, +which ate very sweet; and, as we got some of it of the people, we made +very good cakes of bread of it, and, making a fire, baked them on the +ground, after the fire was swept away, very well; so that hitherto we +had no want of provisions of any kind that we could desire. + +Our negroes towing our canoes, we travelled at a considerable rate, and +by our own account could not go less than twenty or twenty-five English +miles a day, and the river continuing to be much of the same breadth +and very deep all the way, till on the tenth day we came to another +cataract; for a ridge of high hills crossing the whole channel of the +river, the water came tumbling down the rocks from one stage to another +in a strange manner, so that it was a continued link of cataracts from +one to another, in the manner of a cascade, only that the falls were +sometimes a quarter of a mile from one another, and the noise confused +and frightful. + +We thought our voyaging was at a full stop now; but three of us, with +a couple of our negroes, mounting the hills another way, to view the +course of the river, we found a fair channel again after about half a +mile's march, and that it was like to hold us a good way further. So +we set all hands to work, unloaded our cargo, and hauled our canoes on +shore, to see if we could carry them. + +Upon examination we found that they were very heavy; but our carpenters, +spending but one day's work upon them, hewed away so much of the timber +from their outsides as reduced them very much, and yet they were as fit +to swim as before. When this was done, ten men with poles took up one +of the canoes and made nothing to carry it. So we ordered twenty men to +each canoe, that one ten might relieve the other; and thus we carried +all our canoes, and launched them into the water again, and then fetched +our luggage and loaded it all again into the canoes, and all in an +afternoon; and the next morning early we moved forward again. When we +had towed about four days more, our gunner, who was our pilot, began to +observe that we did not keep our right course so exactly as we ought, +the river winding away a little towards the north, and gave us notice +of it accordingly. However, we were not willing to lose the advantage of +water-carriage, at least not till we were forced to it; so we jogged on, +and the river served us for about threescore miles further; but then +we found it grew very small and shallow, having passed the mouths of +several little brooks or rivulets which came into it; and at length it +became but a brook itself. + +We towed up as far as ever our boats would swim, and we went two days +the farther--having been about twelve days in this last part of the +river--by lightening the boats and taking our luggage out, which we made +the negroes carry, being willing to ease ourselves as long as we could; +but at the end of these two days, in short, there was not water enough +to swim a London wherry. + +We now set forward wholly by land, and without any expectation of more +water-carriage. All our concern for more water was to be sure to have a +supply for our drinking; and therefore upon every hill that we came near +we clambered up to the highest part to see the country before us, and +to make the best judgment we could which way to go to keep the lowest +grounds, and as near some stream of water as we could. + +The country held verdant, well grown with trees, and spread with rivers +and brooks, and tolerably well with inhabitants, for about thirty days' +march after our leaving the canoes, during which time things went pretty +well with us; we did not tie ourselves down when to march and when to +halt, but ordered those things as our convenience and the health and +ease of our people, as well our servants as ourselves, required. + +About the middle of this march we came into a low and plain country, +in which we perceived a greater number of inhabitants than in any other +country we had gone through; but that which was worse for us, we found +them a fierce, barbarous, treacherous people, and who at first looked +upon us as robbers, and gathered themselves in numbers to attack us. + +Our men were terrified at them at first, and began to discover an +unusual fear, and even our black prince seemed in a great deal of +confusion; but I smiled at him, and showing him some of our guns, I +asked him if he thought that which killed the spotted cat (for so they +called the leopard in their language) could not make a thousand of those +naked creatures die at one blow? Then he laughed, and said, yes, he +believed it would. "Well, then," said I, "tell your men not to be afraid +of these people, for we shall soon give them a taste of what we can do +if they pretend to meddle with us." However, we considered we were in +the middle of a vast country, and we knew not what numbers of people +and nations we might be surrounded with, and, above all, we knew not how +much we might stand in need of the friendship of these that we were now +among, so that we ordered the negroes to try all the methods they could +to make them friends. + +Accordingly the two men who had gotten bows and arrows, and two more +to whom we gave the prince's two fine lances, went foremost, with five +more, having long poles in their hands; and after them ten of our men +advanced toward the negro town that was next to us, and we all stood +ready to succour them if there should be occasion. + +When they came pretty near their houses our negroes hallooed in their +screaming way, and called to them as loud as they could. Upon their +calling, some of the men came out and answered, and immediately after +the whole town, men, women, and children, appeared; our negroes, with +their long poles, went forward a little, and stuck them all in the +ground, and left them, which in their country was a signal of peace, but +the other did not understand the meaning of that. Then the two men with +bows laid down their bows and arrows, went forward unarmed, and made +signs of peace to them, which at last the other began to understand; so +two of their men laid down their bows and arrows, and came towards them. +Our men made all the signs of friendship to them that they could think +of, putting their hands up to their mouths as a sign that they wanted +provisions to eat; and the other pretended to be pleased and friendly, +and went back to their fellows and talked with them a while, and they +came forward again, and made signs that they would bring some provisions +to them before the sun set; and so our men came back again very well +satisfied for that time. + +But an hour before sunset our men went to them again, just in the same +posture as before, and they came according to their appointment, and +brought deer's flesh, roots, and the same kind of corn, like rice, which +I mentioned above; and our negroes, being furnished with such toys as +our cutler had contrived, gave them some of them, which they seemed +infinitely pleased with, and promised to bring more provisions the next +day. + +Accordingly the next day they came again, but our men perceived they +were more in number by a great many than before. However, having sent +out ten men with firearms to stand ready, and our whole army being in +view also, we were not much surprised; nor was the treachery of the +enemy so cunningly ordered as in other cases, for they might have +surrounded our negroes, which were but nine, under a show of peace; but +when they saw our men advance almost as far as the place where they were +the day before, the rogues snatched up their bows and arrows and came +running upon our men like so many furies, at which our ten men called +to the negroes to come back to them, which they did with speed enough +at the first word, and stood all behind our men. As they fled, the other +advanced, and let fly near a hundred of their arrows at them, by which +two of our negroes were wounded, and one we thought had been killed. +When they came to the five poles that our men had stuck in the ground, +they stood still awhile, and gathering about the poles, looked at them, +and handled them, as wondering what they meant. We then, who were drawn +up behind all, sent one of our number to our ten men to bid them fire +among them while they stood so thick, and to put some small shot into +their guns besides the ordinary charge, and to tell them that we would +be up with them immediately. + +Accordingly they made ready; but by the time they were ready to fire, +the black army had left their wandering about the poles, and began to +stir as if they would come on, though seeing more men stand at some +distance behind our negroes, they could not tell what to make of us; +but if they did not understand us before, they understood us less +afterwards, for as soon as ever our men found them to begin to move +forward they fired among the thickest of them, being about the distance +of 120 yards, as near as we could guess. + +It is impossible to express the fright, the screaming and yelling +of those wretches upon this first volley. We killed six of them, and +wounded eleven or twelve, I mean as we knew of; for, as they stood +thick, and the small shot, as we called it, scattered among them, we had +reason to believe we wounded more that stood farther off, for our small +shot was made of bits of lead and bits of iron, heads of nails, and such +things as our diligent artificer, the cutler, helped us to. + +As to those that were killed and wounded, the other frighted creatures +were under the greatest amazement in the world, to think what should +hurt them, for they could see nothing but holes made in their bodies +they knew not how. Then the fire and noise amazed all their women and +children, and frighted them out of their wits, so that they ran staring +and howling about like mad creatures. + +However, all this did not make them fly, which was what we wanted, nor +did we find any of them die as it were with fear, as at first; so we +resolved upon a second volley, and then to advance as we did before. +Whereupon our reserved men advancing, we resolved to fire only three men +at a time, and move forward like an army firing in platoon; so, being +all in a line, we fired, first three on the right, then three on the +left, and so on; and every time we killed or wounded some of them, but +still they did not fly, and yet they were so frighted that they used +none of their bows and arrows, or of their lances; and we thought their +numbers increased upon our hands, particularly we thought so by the +noise. So I called to our men to halt, and bid them pour in one whole +volley and then shout, as we did in our first fight, and so run in upon +them and knock them down with our muskets. + +But they were too wise for that too, for as soon as we had fired a whole +volley and shouted, they all ran away, men, women, and children, so fast +that in a few moments we could not see one creature of them except some +that were wounded and lame, who lay wallowing and screaming here and +there upon the ground as they happened to fall. + +Upon this we came up to the field of battle, where we found we had +killed thirty-seven of them, among which were three women, and had +wounded about sixty-four, among which were two women; by wounded I +mean such as were so maimed as not to be able to go away, and those our +negroes killed afterwards in a cowardly manner in cold blood, for which +we were very angry, and threatened to make them go to them if they did +so again. + +There was no great spoil to be got, for they were all stark naked as +they came into the world, men and women together, some of them having +feathers stuck in their hair, and others a kind of bracelet about their +necks, but nothing else; but our negroes got a booty here, which we were +very glad of, and this was the bows and arrows of the vanquished, of +which they found more than they knew what to do with, belonging to the +killed and wounded men; these we ordered them to pick up, and they +were very useful to us afterwards. After the fight, and our negroes had +gotten bows and arrows, we sent them out in parties to see what they +could get, and they got some provisions; but, which was better than all +the rest, they brought us four more young bulls, or buffaloes, that +had been brought up to labour and to carry burthens. They knew them, it +seems, by the burthens they had carried having galled their backs, for +they have no saddles to cover them with in that country. + +Those creatures not only eased our negroes, but gave us an opportunity +to carry more provisions; and our negroes loaded them very hard at this +place with flesh and roots, such as we wanted very much afterwards. + +In this town we found a very little young leopard, about two spans high; +it was exceeding tame, and purred like a cat when we stroked it with our +hands, being, as I suppose, bred up among the negroes like a house-dog. +It was our black prince, it seems, who, making his tour among the +abandoned houses or huts, found this creature there, and making much of +him, and giving a bit or two of flesh to him, the creature followed him +like a dog; of which more hereafter. + +Among the negroes that were killed in this battle there was one who had +a little thin bit or plate of gold, about as big as a sixpence, which +hung by a little bit of a twisted gut upon his forehead, by which we +supposed he was a man of some eminence among them; but that was not all, +for this bit of gold put us upon searching very narrowly if there was +not more of it to be had thereabouts, but we found none at all. + +From this part of the country we went on for about fifteen days, and +then found ourselves obliged to march up a high ridge of mountains, +frightful to behold, and the first of the kind that we met with; and +having no guide but our little pocket-compass, we had no advantage of +information as to which was the best or the worst way, but was obliged +to choose by what we saw, and shift as well as we could. We met with +several nations of wild and naked people in the plain country before we +came to those hills, and we found them much more tractable and friendly +than those devils we had been forced to fight with; and though we could +learn little from these people, yet we understood by the signs they made +that there was a vast desert beyond these hills, and, as our negroes +called them, much lion, much spotted cat (so they called the leopard); +and they signed to us also that we must carry water with us. At the last +of these nations we furnished ourselves with as much provisions as we +could possibly carry, not knowing what we had to suffer, or what length +we had to go; and, to make our way as familiar to us as possible, I +proposed that of the last inhabitants we could find we should make some +prisoners and carry them with us for guides over the desert, and to +assist us in carrying provision, and, perhaps, in getting it too. The +advice was too necessary to be slighted; so finding, by our dumb signs +to the inhabitants, that there were some people that dwelt at the foot +of the mountains on the other side before we came to the desert itself, +we resolved to furnish ourselves with guides by fair means or foul. + +Here, by a moderate computation, we concluded ourselves 700 miles from +the sea-coast where we began. Our black prince was this day set free +from the sling his arm hung in, our surgeon having perfectly restored +it, and he showed it to his own countrymen quite well, which made them +greatly wonder. Also our two negroes began to recover, and their wounds +to heal apace, for our surgeon was very skilful in managing their cure. + +Having with infinite labour mounted these hills, and coming to a view +of the country beyond them, it was indeed enough to astonish as stout a +heart as ever was created. It was a vast howling wilderness--not a tree, +a river, or a green thing to be seen; for, as far as the eye could look, +nothing but a scalding sand, which, as the wind blew, drove about in +clouds enough to overwhelm man and beast. Nor could we see any end of +it either before us, which was our way, or to the right hand or left; +so that truly our men began to be discouraged, and talk of going back +again. Nor could we indeed think of venturing over such a horrid place +as that before us, in which we saw nothing but present death. + +I was as much affected at the sight as any of them; but, for all that, +I could not bear the thoughts of going back again. I told them we had +marched 700 miles of our way, and it would be worse than death to +think of going back again; and that, if they thought the desert was not +passable, I thought we should rather change our course, and travel south +till we came to the Cape of Good Hope, or north to the country that lay +along the Nile, where, perhaps, we might find some way or other over to +the west sea; for sure all Africa was not a desert. + +Our gunner, who, as I said before, was our guide as to the situation +of places, told us that he could not tell what to say to going for the +Cape, for it was a monstrous length, being from the place where we now +were not less than 1500 miles; and, by his account, we were now come a +third part of the way to the coast of Angola, where we should meet the +western ocean, and find ways enough for our escape home. On the other +hand, he assured us, and showed us a map of it, that, if we went +northward, the western shore of Africa went out into the sea above +1000 miles west, so that we should have so much and more land to travel +afterwards; which land might, for aught we knew, be as wild, barren, +and desert as this. And therefore, upon the whole, he proposed that we +should attempt this desert, and perhaps we should not find it so long +as we feared; and however, he proposed that we should see how far our +provisions would carry us, and, in particular, our water; and we should +venture no further than half so far as our water would last; and if we +found no end of the desert, we might come safely back again. + +This advice was so reasonable that we all approved of it; and +accordingly we calculated that we were able to carry provisions for +forty-two days, but that we could not carry water for above twenty days, +though we were to suppose it to stink, too, before that time expired. +So that we concluded that, if we did not come at some water in ten days' +time, we would return; but if we found a supply of water, we could then +travel twenty-one days; and, if we saw no end of the wilderness in that +time, we would return also. + +With this regulation of our measures, we descended the mountains, and it +was the second day before we quite reached the plain; where, however, +to make us amends, we found a fine little rivulet of very good water, +abundance of deer, a sort of creature like a hare, but not so nimble, +but whose flesh we found very agreeable. But we were deceived in our +intelligence, for we found no people; so we got no more prisoners to +assist us in carrying our baggage. + +The infinite number of deer and other creatures which we saw here, we +found was occasioned by the neighbourhood of the waste or desert, from +whence they retired hither for food and refreshment. We stored ourselves +here with flesh and roots of divers kinds, which our negroes understood +better than we, and which served us for bread; and with as much water as +(by the allowance of a quart a day to a man for our negroes, and three +pints a day a man for ourselves, and three quarts a day each for our +buffaloes) would serve us twenty days; and thus loaded for a long +miserable march, we set forwards, being all sound in health and very +cheerful, but not alike strong for so great a fatigue; and, which was +our grievance, were without a guide. + +In the very first entrance of the waste we were exceedingly discouraged, +for we found the sand so deep, and it scalded our feet so much with +the heat, that after we had, as I may call it, waded rather than walked +through it about seven or eight miles, we were all heartily tired and +faint; even the very negroes laid down and panted like creatures that +had been pushed beyond their strength. + +Here we found the difference of lodging greatly injurious to us; for, as +before, we always made us huts to sleep under, which covered us from the +night air, which is particularly unwholesome in those hot countries. But +we had here no shelter, no lodging, after so hard a march; for here were +no trees, no, not a shrub near us; and, which was still more frightful, +towards night we began to hear the wolves howl, the lions bellow, and +a great many wild asses braying, and other ugly noises which we did not +understand. + +Upon this we reflected upon our indiscretion, that we had not, at least, +brought poles or stakes in our hands, with which we might have, as it +were, palisadoed ourselves in for the night, and so we might have slept +secure, whatever other inconveniences we suffered. However, we found +a way at last to relieve ourselves a little; for first we set up the +lances and bows we had, and endeavoured to bring the tops of them as +near to one another as we could, and so hung our coats on the top of +them, which made us a kind of sorry tent. The leopard's skin, and a few +other skins we had put together, made us a tolerable covering, and thus +we laid down to sleep, and slept very heartily too, for the first night; +setting, however, a good watch, being two of our own men with their +fuzees, whom we relieved in an hour at first, and two hours afterwards. +And it was very well we did this, for they found the wilderness swarmed +with raging creatures of all kinds, some of which came directly up to +the very enclosure of our tent. But our sentinels were ordered not to +alarm us with firing in the night, but to flash in the pan at them, +which they did, and found it effectual, for the creatures went off +always as soon as they saw it, perhaps with some noise or howling, and +pursued such other game as they were upon. + +If we were tired with the day's travel, we were all as much tired with +the night's lodging. But our black prince told us in the morning he +would give us some counsel, and indeed it was very good counsel. He told +us we should be all killed if we went on this journey, and through this +desert, without some covering for us at night; so he advised us to march +back again to a little river-side where we lay the night before, and +stay there till we could make us houses, as he called them, to carry +with us to lodge in every night. As he began a little to understand our +speech, and we very well to understand his signs, we easily knew what he +meant, and that we should there make mats (for we remembered that we saw +a great deal of matting or bass there, that the natives make mats of)--I +say, that we should make large mats there for covering our huts or tents +to lodge in at night. + +We all approved this advice, and immediately resolved to go back that +one day's journey, resolving, though we carried less provisions, we +would carry mats with us to cover us in the night. Some of the nimblest +of us got back to the river with more ease than we had travelled it the +day before; but, as we were not in haste, the rest made a halt, encamped +another night, and came to us the next day. + +In our return of this day's journey, our men that made two days of +it met with a very surprising thing, that gave them some reason to be +careful how they parted company again. The case was this:--The second +day in the morning, before they had gone half a mile, looking behind +them they saw a vast cloud of sand or dust rise in the air, as we see +sometimes in the roads in summer when it is very dusty and a large drove +of cattle are coming, only very much greater; and they could easily +perceive that it came after them; and it came on faster as they went +from it. The cloud of sand was so great that they could not see what it +was that raised it, and concluded that it was some army of enemies +that pursued them; but then considering that they came from the vast +uninhabited wilderness, they knew it was impossible any nation or people +that way should have intelligence of them or the way of their march; +and therefore, if it was an army, it must be of such as they were, +travelling that way by accident. On the other hand, as they knew that +there were no horses in the country, and that they came on so fast, they +concluded that it must be some vast collection of wild beasts, perhaps +making to the hill country for food or water, and that they should be +all devoured or trampled under foot by their multitude. + +Upon this thought, they very prudently observed which way the cloud +seemed to point, and they turned a little out of their way to the north, +supposing it might pass by them. When they were about a quarter of a +mile, they halted to see what it might be. One of the negroes, a nimbler +fellow than the rest, went back a little, and came in a few minutes +running as fast as the heavy sands would allow, and by signs gave them +to know that it was a great herd, or drove, or whatever it might be +called, of vast monstrous elephants. + +As it was a sight our men had never seen, they were desirous to see it, +and yet a little uneasy at the danger too; for though an elephant is a +heavy unwieldy creature, yet in the deep sand, which is nothing at all +to them, they marched at a great rate, and would soon have tired our +people, if they had had far to go, and had been pursued by them. + +Our gunner was with them, and had a great mind to have gone close up to +one of the outermost of them, and to have clapped his piece to his +ear, and to have fired into him, because he had been told no shot would +penetrate them; but they all dissuaded him, lest upon the noise they +should all turn upon and pursue us; so he was reasoned out of it, and +let them pass, which, in our people's circumstances, was certainly the +right way. + +They were between twenty and thirty in number, but prodigious great +ones; and though they often showed our men that they saw them, yet they +did not turn out of their way, or take any other notice of them than, as +we might say, just to look at them. We that were before saw the cloud of +dust they raised, but we had thought it had been our own caravan, and so +took no notice; but as they bent their course one point of the compass, +or thereabouts, to the southward of the east, and we went due east [? +west], they passed by us at some little distance; so that we did not see +them, or know anything of them, till evening, when our men came to us +and gave us this account of them. However, this was a useful experiment +for our future conduct in passing the desert, as you shall hear in its +place. + +We were now upon our work, and our black prince was head surveyor, for +he was an excellent mat-maker himself, and all his men understood it, so +that they soon made us near a hundred mats; and as every man, I mean of +the negroes, carried one, it was no manner of load, and we did not carry +an ounce of provisions the less. The greatest burthen was to carry +six long poles, besides some shorter stakes; but the negroes made an +advantage of that, for carrying them between two, they made the luggage +of provisions which they had to carry so much the lighter, binding it +upon two poles, and so made three couple of them. As soon as we saw +this, we made a little advantage of it too; for having three or four +bags, called bottles (I mean skins to carry water), more than the men +could carry, we got them filled, and carried them this way, which was a +day's water and more, for our journey. + +Having now ended our work, made our mats, and fully recruited our stores +of all things necessary, and having made us abundance of small ropes +of matting for ordinary use, as we might have occasion, we set forward +again, having interrupted our journey eight days in all, upon this +affair. To our great comfort, the night before we set out there fell a +very violent shower of rain, the effects of which we found in the sand; +though the heat of one day dried the surface as much as before, yet it +was harder at bottom, not so heavy, and was cooler to our feet, by which +means we marched, as we reckoned, about fourteen miles instead of seven, +and with much more ease. + +When we came to encamp, we had all things ready, for we had fitted our +tent, and set it up for trial, where we made it; so that, in less than +an hour, we had a large tent raised, with an inner and outer apartment, +and two entrances. In one we lay ourselves, in the other our negroes, +having light pleasant mats over us, and others at the same time under +us. Also we had a little place without all for our buffaloes, for they +deserved our care, being very useful to us, besides carrying forage and +water for themselves. Their forage was a root, which our black +prince directed us to find, not much unlike a parsnip, very moist and +nourishing, of which there was plenty wherever we came, this horrid +desert excepted. + +When we came the next morning to decamp, our negroes took down the tent, +and pulled up the stakes; and all was in motion in as little time as it +was set up. In this posture we marched eight days, and yet could see no +end, no change of our prospect, but all looking as wild and dismal as +at the beginning. If there was any alteration, it was that the sand +was nowhere so deep and heavy as it was the first three days. This we +thought might be because, for six months of the year the winds blowing +west (as for the other six they blow constantly east), the sand was +driven violently to the side of the desert where we set out, where the +mountains lying very high, the easterly monsoons, when they blew, had +not the same power to drive it back again; and this was confirmed by our +finding the like depth of sand on the farthest extent of the desert to +the west. + +It was the ninth day of our travel in this wilderness, when we came +to the view of a great lake of water; and you may be sure this was a +particular satisfaction to us, because we had not water left for above +two or three days more, at our shortest allowance; I mean allowing water +for our return, if we had been driven to the necessity of it. Our water +had served us two days longer than expected, our buffaloes having found, +for two or three days, a kind of herb like a broad flat thistle, though +without any prickle, spreading on the ground, and growing in the sand, +which they ate freely of, and which supplied them for drink as well as +forage. + +The next day, which was the tenth from our setting out, we came to the +edge of this lake, and, very happily for us, we came to it at the south +point of it, for to the north we could see no end of it; so we passed by +it and travelled three days by the side of it, which was a great comfort +to us, because it lightened our burthen, there being no need to carry +water when we had it in view. And yet, though here was so much water, +we found but very little alteration in the desert; no trees, no grass +or herbage, except that thistle, as I called it, and two or three more +plants, which we did not understand, of which the desert began to be +pretty full. + +But as we were refreshed with the neighbourhood of this lake of water, +so we were now gotten among a prodigious number of ravenous inhabitants, +the like whereof, it is most certain, the eye of man never saw; for as +I firmly believe that never man nor body of men passed this desert since +the flood, so I believe there is not the like collection of fierce, +ravenous, and devouring creatures in the world; I mean not in any +particular place. + +For a day's journey before we came to this lake, and all the three days +we were passing by it, and for six or seven days' march after it, +the ground was scattered with elephants' teeth in such a number as is +incredible; and as some of them have lain there for some hundreds of +years, so, seeing the substance of them scarce ever decays, they may lie +there, for aught I know, to the end of time. The size of some of them +is, it seems, to those to whom I have reported it, as incredible as +the number; and I can assure you there were several so heavy as the +strongest man among us could not lift. As to number, I question not but +there are enough to load a thousand sail of the biggest ships in the +world, by which I may be understood to mean that the quantity is not +to be conceived of; seeing that as they lasted in view for above eighty +miles' travelling, so they might continue as far to the right hand, and +to the left as far, and many times as far, for aught we knew; for it +seems the number of elephants hereabouts is prodigiously great. In one +place in particular we saw the head of an elephant, with several teeth +in it, but one of the biggest that ever I saw; the flesh was consumed, +to be sure, many hundred years before, and all the other bones; but +three of our strongest men could not lift this skull and teeth; the +great tooth, I believe, weighed at least three hundredweight; and this +was particularly remarkable to me, that I observed the whole skull was +as good ivory as the teeth, and, I believe, altogether weighed at least +six hundredweight; and though I do not know but, by the same rule, all +the bones of the elephant may be ivory, yet I think there is this just +objection against it from the example before me, that then all the other +bones of this elephant would have been there as well as the head. + +I proposed to our gunner, that, seeing we had travelled now fourteen +days without intermission, and that we had water here for our +refreshment, and no want of food yet, nor any fear of it, we should rest +our people a little, and see, at the same time, if perhaps we might +kill some creatures that were proper for food. The gunner, who had more +forecast of that kind than I had, agreed to the proposal, and added, why +might we not try to catch some fish out of the lake? The first thing we +had before us was to try if we could make any hooks, and this indeed put +our artificer to his trumps; however, with some labour and difficulty, +he did it, and we catched fresh fish of several kinds. How they came +there, none but He that made the lake and all the world knows; for, to +be sure, no human hands ever put any in there, or pulled any out before. + +We not only catched enough for our present refreshment, but we dried +several large fishes, of kinds which I cannot describe, in the sun, by +which we lengthened out our provision considerably; for the heat of +the sun dried them so effectually without salt that they were perfectly +cured, dry, and hard, in one day's time. + +We rested ourselves here five days; during which time we had abundance +of pleasant adventures with the wild creatures, too many to relate. One +of them was very particular, which was a chase between a she-lion, +or lioness, and a large deer; and though the deer is naturally a very +nimble creature, and she flew by us like the wind, having, perhaps, +about 300 yards the start of the lion, yet we found the lion, by her +strength, and the goodness of her lungs, got ground of her. They passed +by us within about a quarter of a mile, and we had a view of them a +great way, when, having given them over, we were surprised, about an +hour after, to see them come thundering back again on the other side of +us, and then the lion was within thirty or forty yards of her; and both +straining to the extremity of their speed, when the deer, coming to the +lake, plunged into the water, and swam for her life, as she had before +run for it. + +The lioness plunged in after her, and swam a little way, but came back +again; and when she was got upon the land she set up the most hideous +roar that ever I heard in my life, as if done in the rage of having lost +her prey. + +We walked out morning and evening constantly; the middle of the day we +refreshed ourselves under our tent. But one morning early we saw another +chase, which more nearly concerned us than the other; for our black +prince, walking by the side of the lake, was set upon by a vast, great +crocodile, which came out of the lake upon him; and though he was very +light of foot, yet it was as much as he could do to get away. He fled +amain to us, and the truth is, we did not know what to do, for we were +told no bullet would enter her; and we found it so at first, for though +three of our men fired at her, yet she did not mind them; but my friend +the gunner, a venturous fellow, of a bold heart, and great presence +of mind, went up so near as to thrust the muzzle of his piece into her +mouth, and fired, but let his piece fall, and ran for it the very moment +he had fired it. The creature raged a great while, and spent its fury +upon the gun, making marks upon the very iron with its teeth, but after +some time fainted and died. + +Our negroes spread the banks of the lake all this while for game, and at +length killed us three deer, one of them very large, the other two very +small. There was water-fowl also in the lake, but we never came near +enough to them to shoot any; and as for the desert, we saw no fowls +anywhere in it but at the lake. + +We likewise killed two or three civet cats; but their flesh is the worst +of carrion. We saw abundance of elephants at a distance, and observed +they always go in very good company, that is to say, abundance of them +together, and always extended in a fair line of battle; and this, they +say, is the way they defend themselves from their enemies; for if lions +or tigers, wolves or any creatures, attack them, they being drawn in a +line, sometimes reaching five or six miles in length, whatever comes in +their way is sure to be trod under foot, or beaten in pieces with their +trunks, or lifted up in the air with their trunks; so that if a hundred +lions or tigers were coming along, if they meet a line of elephants, +they will always fly back till they see room to pass by the right hand +or the left; and if they did not, it would be impossible for one of +them to escape; for the elephant, though a heavy creature, is yet so +dexterous and nimble with his trunk, that he will not fail to lift up +the heaviest lion, or any other wild creature, and throw him up in the +air quite over his back, and then trample him to death with his feet. We +saw several lines of battle thus; we saw one so long that indeed there +was no end of it to be seen, and I believe there might be 2000 elephants +in row or line. They are not beasts of prey, but live upon the herbage +of the field, as an ox does; and it is said, that though they are so +great a creature, yet that a smaller quantity of forage supplies one of +them than will suffice a horse. + +The numbers of this kind of creature that are in those parts are +inconceivable, as may be gathered from the prodigious quantity of +teeth which, as I said, we saw in this vast desert; and indeed we saw a +hundred of them to one of any other kind. + +One evening we were very much surprised. We were most of us laid down +on our mats to sleep, when our watch came running in among us, being +frighted with the sudden roaring of some lions just by them, which, it +seems, they had not seen, the night being dark, till they were just upon +them. There was, as it proved, an old lion and his whole family, for +there was the lioness and three young lions, besides the old king, who +was a monstrous great one. One of the young ones--who were good, large, +well-grown ones too--leaped up upon one of our negroes, who stood +sentinel, before he saw him, at which he was heartily frighted, cried +out, and ran into the tent. Our other man, who had a gun, had not +presence of mind at first to shoot him, but struck him with the butt-end +of his piece, which made him whine a little, and then growl at him +fearfully; but the fellow retired, and, we being all alarmed, three of +our men snatched up their guns, ran to the tent door, where they saw the +great old lion by the fire of his eyes, and first fired at him, but, we +supposed, missed him, or at least did not kill him; for they went all +off, but raised a most hideous roar, which, as if they had called for +help, brought down a prodigious number of lions, and other furious +creatures, we know not what, about them, for we could not see them; +but there was a noise, and yelling and howling, and all sorts of such +wilderness music on every side of us, as if all the beasts of the desert +were assembled to devour us. + +We asked our black prince what we should do with them. "Me go," says he, +"and fright them all." So he snatches up two or three of the worst of +our mats, and getting one of our men to strike some fire, he hangs the +mat up at the end of a pole, and set it on fire, and it blazed abroad +a good while; at which the creatures all moved off, for we heard them +roar, and make their bellowing noise at a great distance. "Well," says +our gunner, "if that will do, we need not burn our mats, which are our +beds to lay under us, and our tilting to cover us. Let me alone," says +he. So he comes back into our tent, and falls to making some artificial +fireworks and the like; and he gave our sentinels some to be ready +at hand upon occasion, and particularly he placed a great piece of +wild-fire upon the same pole that the mat had been tied to, and set it +on fire, and that burnt there so long that all the wild creatures left +us for that time. + +However, we began to be weary of such company; and, to be rid of them, +we set forward again two days sooner than we intended. We found now, +that though the desert did not end, nor could we see any appearance of +it, yet that the earth was pretty full of green stuff of one sort or +another, so that our cattle had no want; and secondly, that there +were several little rivers which ran into the lake, and so long as the +country continued low, we found water sufficient, which eased us very +much in our carriage, and we went on still sixteen days more without yet +coming to any appearance of better soil. After this we found the country +rise a little, and by that we perceived that the water would fail us; +so, for fear of the worst, we filled our bladder-bottles with water. +We found the country rising gradually thus for three days continually, +when, on the sudden, we perceived that, though we had mounted up +insensibly, yet that we were on the top of a very high ridge of hills, +though not such as at first. + +When we came to look down on the other side of the hills, we saw, to +the great joy of all our hearts, that the desert was at an end; that the +country was clothed with green, abundance of trees, and a large river; +and we made no doubt but that we should find people and cattle also; and +here, by our gunner's account, who kept our computations, we had +marched about 400 miles over this dismal place of horror, having been +four-and-thirty days a-doing of it, and consequently were come about +1100 miles of our journey. + +We would willingly have descended the hills that night, but it was +too late. The next morning we saw everything more plain, and rested +ourselves under the shade of some trees, which were now the most +refreshing things imaginable to us, who had been scorched above a month +without a tree to cover us. We found the country here very pleasant, +especially considering that we came from; and we killed some deer here +also, which we found very frequent under the cover of the woods. Also we +killed a creature like a goat, whose flesh was very good to eat, but it +was no goat; we found also a great number of fowls like partridge, but +something smaller, and were very tame; so that we lived here very well, +but found no people, at least none that would be seen, no, not for +several days' journey; and to allay our joy, we were almost every night +disturbed with lions and tigers; elephants, indeed, we saw none here. + +In three days' march we came to a river, which we saw from the hills, +and which we called the Golden River; and we found it ran northward, +which was the first stream we had met with that did so. It ran with a +very rapid current, and our gunner, pulling out his map, assured me that +this was either the river Nile, or run into the great lake out of which +the river Nile was said to take its beginning; and he brought out his +charts and maps, which, by his instruction, I began to understand very +well, and told me he would convince me of it, and indeed he seemed to +make it so plain to me that I was of the same opinion. + +But I did not enter into the gunner's reason for this inquiry, not in +the least, till he went on with it farther, and stated it thus:--"If +this is the river Nile, why should not we build some more canoes, and go +down this stream, rather than expose ourselves to any more deserts and +scorching sands in quest of the sea, which when we are come to, we shall +be as much at a loss how to get home as we were at Madagascar?" + +The argument was good, had there been no objections in the way of a kind +which none of us were capable of answering; but, upon the whole, it +was an undertaking of such a nature that every one of us thought it +impracticable, and that upon several accounts; and our surgeon, who was +himself a good scholar and a man of reading, though not acquainted +with the business of sailing, opposed it, and some of his reasons, I +remember, were such as these:--First, the length of the way, which both +he and the gunner allowed, by the course of the water, and turnings +of the river, would be at least 4000 miles. Secondly, the innumerable +crocodiles in the river, which we should never be able to escape. +Thirdly, the dreadful deserts in the way; and lastly, the approaching +rainy season, in which the streams of the Nile would be so furious, and +rise so high--spreading far and wide over all the plain country--that +we should never be able to know when we were in the channel of the river +and when not, and should certainly be cast away, overset, or run +aground so often that it would be impossible to proceed by a river so +excessively dangerous. + +This last reason he made so plain to us that we began to be sensible of +it ourselves, so that we agreed to lay that thought aside, and proceed +in our first course, westwards towards the sea; but, as if we had been +loth to depart, we continued, by way of refreshing ourselves, to loiter +two days upon this river, in which time our black prince, who delighted +much in wandering up and down, came one evening and brought us several +little bits of something, he knew not what, but he found it felt heavy +and looked well, and showed it to me as what he thought was some rarity. +I took not much notice of it to him, but stepping out and calling the +gunner to me I showed it to him, and told him what I thought, viz., +that it was certainly gold. He agreed with me in that, and also in what +followed, that we would take the black prince out with us the next day, +and make him show us where he found it; that if there was any quantity +to be found we would tell our company of it, but if there was but little +we would keep counsel, and have it to ourselves. + +But we forgot to engage the prince in the secret, who innocently told so +much to all the rest, as that they guessed what it was, and came to us +to see. When we found it was public, we were more concerned to prevent +their suspecting that we had any design to conceal it, and openly +telling our thoughts of it, we called our artificer, who agreed +presently that it was gold; so I proposed that we should all go with +the prince to the place where he found it, and if any quantity was to be +had, we would lie here some time and see what we could make of it. + +Accordingly we went every man of us, for no man was willing to be left +behind in a discovery of such a nature. When we came to the place we +found it was on the west side of the river, not in the main river, but +in another small river or stream which came from the west, and ran into +the other at that place. We fell to raking in the sand, and washing it +in our hands; and we seldom took up a handful of sand but we washed +some little round lumps as big as a pin's head, or sometimes as big as a +grape stone, into our hands; and we found, in two or three hours' +time, that every one had got some, so we agreed to leave off, and go to +dinner. + +While we were eating, it came into my thoughts that while we worked at +this rate in a thing of such nicety and consequence, it was ten to one +if the gold, which was the make-bait of the world, did not, first or +last, set us together by the ears, to break our good articles and our +understanding one among another, and perhaps cause us to part companies, +or worse; I therefore told them that I was indeed the youngest man in +the company, but as they had always allowed me to give my opinion in +things, and had sometimes been pleased to follow my advice, so I +had something to propose now, which I thought would be for all our +advantages, and I believed they would all like it very well. I told them +we were in a country where we all knew there was a great deal of gold, +and that all the world sent ships thither to get it; that we did not +indeed know where it was, and so we might get a great deal, or a little, +we did not know whether; but I offered it to them to consider whether it +would not be the best way for us, and to preserve the good harmony +and friendship that had been always kept among us, and which was so +absolutely necessary to our safety, that what we found should be brought +together to one common stock, and be equally divided at last, rather +than to run the hazard of any difference which might happen among us +from any one's having found more or less than another. I told them, that +if we were all upon one bottom we should all apply ourselves heartily to +the work; and, besides that, we might then set our negroes all to work +for us, and receive equally the fruit of their labour and of our own, +and being all exactly alike sharers, there could be no just cause of +quarrel or disgust among us. + +They all approved the proposal, and every one jointly swore, and gave +their hands to one another, that they would not conceal the least grain +of gold from the rest; and consented that if any one or more should +be found to conceal any, all that he had should be taken from him +and divided among the rest; and one thing more was added to it by our +gunner, from considerations equally good and just, that if any one of +us, by any play, bet, game, or wager, won any money or gold, or the +value of any, from another, during our whole voyage, till our return +quite to Portugal, he should be obliged by us all to restore it again +on the penalty of being disarmed and turned out of the company, and of +having no relief from us on any account whatever. This was to prevent +wagering and playing for money, which our men were apt to do by several +means and at several games, though they had neither cards nor dice. + +Having made this wholesome agreement, we went cheerfully to work, and +showed our negroes how to work for us; and working up the stream on both +sides, and in the bottom of the river, we spent about three weeks' time +dabbling in the water; by which time, as it lay all in our way, we had +gone about six miles, and not more; and still the higher we went, the +more gold we found; till at last, having passed by the side of a hill, +we perceived on a sudden that the gold stopped, and that there was not +a bit taken up beyond that place. It presently occurred to my mind, that +it must then be from the side of that little hill that all the gold we +found was worked down. + +Upon this, we went back to the hill, and fell to work with that. We +found the earth loose, and of a yellowish loamy colour, and in some +places a white hard kind of stone, which, in describing since to some +of our artists, they tell me was the spar which is found by ore, and +surrounds it in the mine. However, if it had been all gold, we had no +instrument to force it out; so we passed that. But scratching into the +loose earth with our fingers, we came to a surprising place, where +the earth, for the quantity of two bushels, I believe, or thereabouts, +crumbled down with little more than touching it, and apparently showed +us that there was a great deal of gold in it. We took it all carefully +up, and washing it in the water, the loamy earth washed away, and left +the gold dust free in our hands; and that which was more remarkable was, +that, when this loose earth was all taken away, and we came to the rock +or hard stone, there was not one grain of gold more to be found. + +At night we all came together to see what we had got; and it appeared +we had found, in that day's heap of earth, about fifty pounds' weight of +gold dust, and about thirty-four pounds' weight more in all the rest of +our works in the river. + +It was a happy kind of disappointment to us, that we found a full stop +put to our work; for, had the quantity of gold been ever so small, yet, +had any at all come, I do not know when we should have given over; for, +having rummaged this place, and not finding the least grain of gold +in any other place, or in any of the earth there, except in that loose +parcel, we went quite back down the small river again, working it over +and over again, as long as we could find anything, how small soever; and +we did get six or seven pounds more the second time. Then we went into +the first river, and tried it up the stream and down the stream, on the +one side and on the other. Up the stream we found nothing, no, not a +grain; down the stream we found very little, not above the quantity of +half an ounce in two miles' working; so back we came again to the Golden +River, as we justly called it, and worked it up the stream and down the +stream twice more apiece, and every time we found some gold, and perhaps +might have done so if we had stayed there till this time; but the +quantity was at last so small, and the work so much the harder, that we +agreed by consent to give it over, lest we should fatigue ourselves and +our negroes so as to be quite unfit for our journey. + +When we had brought all our purchase together, we had in the whole three +pounds and a half of gold to a man, share and share alike, according to +such a weight and scale as our ingenious cutler made for us to weigh it +by, which indeed he did by guess, but which, as he said, he was sure +was rather more than less, and so it proved at last; for it was near +two ounces more than weight in a pound. Besides this, there was seven +or eight pounds' weight left, which we agreed to leave in his hands, to +work it into such shapes as we thought fit, to give away to such people +as we might yet meet with, from whom we might have occasion to buy +provisions, or even to buy friendship, or the like; and particularly we +gave about a pound to our black prince, which he hammered and worked by +his own indefatigable hand, and some tools our artificer lent him, into +little round bits, as round almost as beads, though not exact in shape, +and drilling holes through them, put them all upon a string, and wore +them about his black neck, and they looked very well there, I assure +you; but he was many months a-doing it. And thus ended our first golden +adventure. + +We now began to discover what we had not troubled our heads much about +before, and that was, that, let the country be good or bad that we were +in, we could not travel much further for a considerable time. We had +been now five months and upwards in our journey, and the seasons began +to change; and nature told us, that, being in a climate that had a +winter as well as a summer, though of a different kind from what our +country produced, we were to expect a wet season, and such as we should +not be able to travel in, as well by reason of the rain itself, as of +the floods which it would occasion wherever we should come; and +though we had been no strangers to those wet seasons in the island +of Madagascar, yet we had not thought much of them since we began our +travels; for, setting out when the sun was about the solstice, that is, +when it was at the greatest northern distance from us, we had found +the benefit of it in our travels. But now it drew near us apace, and we +found it began to rain; upon which we called another general council, in +which we debated our present circumstances, and, in particular, whether +we should go forward, or seek for a proper place upon the bank of our +Golden River, which had been so lucky to us, to fix our camp for the +winter. + +Upon the whole, it was resolved to abide where we were; and it was not +the least part of our happiness that we did so, as shall appear in its +place. + +Having resolved upon this, our first measures were to set our negroes to +work, to make huts or houses for our habitation, and this they did very +dexterously; only that we changed the ground where we at first intended +it, thinking, as indeed it happened, that the river might reach it upon +any sudden rain. Our camp was like a little town, in which our huts were +in the centre, having one large one in the centre of them also, into +which all our particular lodgings opened; so that none of us went into +our apartments but through a public tent, where we all ate and drank +together, and kept our councils and society; and our carpenters made us +tables, benches, and stools in abundance, as many as we could make use +of. + +We had no need of chimneys, it was hot enough without fire; but yet +we found ourselves at last obliged to keep a fire every night upon a +particular occasion. For though we had in all other respects a very +pleasant and agreeable situation, yet we were rather worse troubled with +the unwelcome visits of wild beasts here than in the wilderness itself; +for as the deer and other gentle creatures came hither for shelter +and food, so the lions and tigers and leopards haunted these places +continually for prey. + +When first we discovered this we were so uneasy at it that we thought of +removing our situation; but after many debates about it we resolved to +fortify ourselves in such a manner as not to be in any danger from it; +and this our carpenters undertook, who first palisaded our camp quite +round with long stakes, for we had wood enough, which stakes were not +stuck in one by another like pales, but in an irregular manner; a +great multitude of them so placed that they took up near two yards in +thickness, some higher, some lower, all sharpened at the top, and about +a foot asunder: so that had any creature jumped at them, unless he had +gone clean over, which it was very hard to do, he would be hung upon +twenty or thirty spikes. + +The entrance into this had larger stakes than the rest, so placed before +one another as to make three or four short turnings which no four-footed +beast bigger than a dog could possibly come in at; and that we might not +be attacked by any multitude together, and consequently be alarmed in +our sleep, as we had been, or be obliged to waste our ammunition, which +we were very chary of, we kept a great fire every night without the +entrance of our palisade, having a hut for our two sentinels to stand +in free from the rain, just within the entrance, and right against the +fire. + +To maintain this fire we cut a prodigious deal of wood, and piled it up +in a heap to dry, and with the green boughs made a second covering over +our huts, so high and thick that it might cast the rain from the first, +and keep us effectually dry. + +We had scarcely finished all these works but the rain came on so fierce +and so continued that we had little time to stir abroad for food, except +indeed that our negroes, who wore no clothes, seemed to make nothing of +the rain; though to us Europeans, in those hot climates, nothing is more +dangerous. + +We continued in this posture for four months, that is to say, from the +middle of June to the middle of October; for though the rains went off, +at least the greatest violence of them, about the equinox, yet, as the +sun was then just over our heads, we resolved to stay awhile till it +passed a little to the southward. + +During our encampment here we had several adventures with the ravenous +creatures of that country; and had not our fire been always kept +burning, I question much whether all our fence, though we strengthened +it afterwards with twelve or fourteen rows of stakes or more, would have +kept us secure. It was always in the night that we had the disturbance +of them, and sometimes they came in such multitudes that we thought +all the lions and tigers, and leopards and wolves of Africa were come +together to attack us. One night, being clear moonshine, one of our +men being upon the watch, told us that he verily believed he saw ten +thousand wild creatures of one sort or another pass by our little camp, +and ever as they saw the fire they sheered off, but were sure to howl or +roar, or whatever it was, when they were past. + +The music of their voices was very far from being pleasant to us, and +sometimes would be so very disturbing that we could not sleep for it; +and often our sentinels would call us that were awake to come and look +at them. It was one windy, tempestuous night, after a rainy day, that +we were indeed called up; for such innumerable numbers of devilish +creatures came about us that our watch really thought they would attack +us. They would not come on the side where the fire was; and though we +thought ourselves secure everywhere else, yet we all got up and took to +our arms. The moon was near the full, but the air full of flying clouds, +and a strange hurricane of wind to add to the terror of the night; when, +looking on the back part of our camp, I thought I saw a creature within +our fortification, and so indeed he was, except his haunches, for he +had taken a running leap, I suppose, and with all his might had thrown +himself clear over our palisades, except one strong pile, which stood +higher than the rest, and which had caught hold of him, and by his +weight he had hanged himself upon it, the spike of the pile running into +his hinder haunch or thigh, on the inside; and by that he hung, growling +and biting the wood for rage. I snatched up a lance from one of the +negroes that stood just by me, and running to him, struck it three +or four times into him, and despatched him, being unwilling to shoot, +because I had a mind to have a volley fired among the rest, whom I could +see standing without, as thick as a drove of bullocks going to a fair. I +immediately called our people out, and showed them the object of terror +which I had seen, and, without any further consultation, fired a full +volley among them, most of our pieces being loaded with two or three +slugs or bullets apiece. It made a horrible clutter among them, and in +general they all took to their heels, only that we could observe that +some walked off with more gravity and majesty than others, being not +so much frighted at the noise and fire; and we could perceive that some +were left upon the ground struggling as for life, but we durst not stir +out to see what they were. + +Indeed they stood so thick, and were so near us, that we could not +well miss killing or wounding some of them, and we believed they had +certainly the smell of us, and our victuals we had been killing; for we +had killed a deer, and three or four of those creatures like goats the +day before; and some of the offal had been thrown out behind our camp, +and this, we suppose, drew them so much about us; but we avoided it for +the future. + +Though the creatures fled, yet we heard a frightful roaring all night +at the place where they stood, which we supposed was from some that were +wounded, and as soon as day came we went out to see what execution we +had done. And indeed it was a strange sight; there were three tigers and +two wolves quite killed, besides the creature I had killed within our +palisade, which seemed to be of an ill-gendered kind, between a tiger +and a leopard. Besides this there was a noble old lion alive, but with +both his fore-legs broke, so that he could not stir away, and he had +almost beat himself to death with struggling all night, and we found +that this was the wounded soldier that had roared so loud and given us +so much disturbance. Our surgeon, looking at him, smiled. "Now," says +he, "if I could be sure this lion would be as grateful to me as one +of his majesty's ancestors was to Androcles, the Roman slave, I would +certainly set both his legs again and cure him." I had not heard the +story of Androcles, so he told it me at large; but as to the surgeon, we +told him he had no way to know whether the lion would do so or not, but +to cure him first and trust to his honour; but he had no faith, so to +despatch him and put him out of his torment, he shot him in the head and +killed him, for which we called him the king-killer ever after. + +Our negroes found no less than five of these ravenous creatures wounded +and dropped at a distance from our quarters; whereof, one was a wolf, +one a fine spotted young leopard, and the other were creatures that we +knew not what to call them. + +We had several more of these gentlefolks about after that, but no such +general rendezvous of them as that was any more; but this ill effect +it had to us, that it frighted the deer and other creatures from our +neighbourhood, of whose company we were much more desirous, and which +were necessary for our subsistence. However, our negroes went out every +day a-hunting, as they called it, with bow and arrow, and they scarce +ever failed of bringing us home something or other; and particularly we +found in this part of the country, after the rains had fallen some time, +abundance of wild fowl, such as we have in England, duck, teal, widgeon, +etc.; some geese, and some kinds that we had never seen before; and we +frequently killed them. Also we catched a great deal of fresh fish out +of the river, so that we wanted no provision. If we wanted anything, it +was salt to eat with our fresh meat; but we had a little left, and we +used it sparingly; for as to our negroes, they could not taste it, nor +did they care to eat any meat that was seasoned with it. + +The weather began now to clear up, the rains were down, and the floods +abated, and the sun, which had passed our zenith, was gone to the +southward a good way; so we prepared to go on our way. + +It was the 12th of October, or thereabouts, that we began to set +forward; and having an easy country to travel in, as well as to supply +us with provisions, though still without inhabitants, we made more +despatch, travelling sometimes, as we calculated it, twenty or +twenty-five miles a day; nor did we halt anywhere in eleven days' march, +one day excepted, which was to make a raft to carry us over a small +river, which, having swelled with the rains, was not yet quite down. + +When we were past this river, which, by the way, ran to the northward +too, we found a great row of hills in our way. We saw, indeed, the +country open to the right at a great distance; but, as we kept true to +our course, due west, we were not willing to go a great way out of our +way, only to shun a few hills. So we advanced; but we were surprised +when, being not quite come to the top, one of our company, who, with two +negroes, was got up before us, cried out, "The sea! the sea!" and fell +a-dancing and jumping, as signs of joy. + +The gunner and I were most surprised at it, because we had but that +morning been calculating that we must have yet above 1000 miles on the +sea side, and that we could not expect to reach it till another rainy +season would be upon us; so that when our man cried out, "The sea," the +gunner was angry, and said he was mad. + +But we were both in the greatest surprise imaginable, when, coming to +the top of the hill, and though it was very high, we saw nothing but +water, either before us or to the right hand or the left, being a vast +sea, without any bounds but the horizon. + +We went down the hill full of confusion of thought, not being able +to conceive whereabouts we were or what it must be, seeing by all our +charts the sea was yet a vast way off. + +It was not above three miles from the hills before we came to the shore, +or water-edge of this sea, and there, to our further surprise, we found +the water fresh and pleasant to drink; so that, in short, we knew not +what course to take. The sea, as we thought it to be, put a full stop +to our journey (I mean westward), for it lay just in the way. Our next +question was, which hand to turn to, to the right hand or the left, +but this was soon resolved; for, as we knew not the extent of it, we +considered that our way, if it had been the sea really, must be on the +north, and therefore, if we went to the south now, it must be just so +much out of our way at last. So, having spent a good part of the day in +our surprise at the thing, and consulting what to do, we set forward to +the north. + +We travelled upon the shore of this sea full twenty-three days before +we could come to any resolution about what it was; at the end of which, +early one morning, one of our seamen cried out, "Land!" and it was no +false alarm, for we saw plainly the tops of some hills at a very great +distance, on the further side of the water, due west; but though this +satisfied us that it was not the ocean, but an inland sea or lake, yet +we saw no land to the northward, that is to say, no end of it, but were +obliged to travel eight days more, and near 100 miles farther, before +we came to the end of it, and then we found this lake or sea ended in a +very great river which ran N. or N. by E., as the other river had done +which I mentioned before. + +My friend the gunner, upon examining, said that he believed that he was +mistaken before, and that this was the river Nile, but was still of the +mind that we were of before, that we should not think of a voyage into +Egypt that way; so we resolved upon crossing this river, which, however, +was not so easy as before, the river being very rapid and the channel +very broad. + +It cost us, therefore, a week here to get materials to waft ourselves +and cattle over this river; for though here were stores of trees, yet +there was none of any considerable growth sufficient to make a canoe. + +During our march on the edge of this bank we met with great fatigue, and +therefore travelled a fewer miles in a day than before, there being such +a prodigious number of little rivers that came down from the hills on +the east side, emptying themselves into this gulf, all which waters were +pretty high, the rains having been but newly over. + +In the last three days of our travel we met with some inhabitants, but +we found they lived upon the little hills and not by the water-side; nor +were we a little put to it for food in this march, having killed nothing +for four or five days but some fish we caught out of the lake, and that +not in such plenty as we found before. + +But, to make us some amends, we had no disturbance upon all the shores +of this lake from any wild beasts; the only inconveniency of that kind +was, that we met an ugly, venomous, deformed kind of a snake or serpent +in the wet grounds near the lake, that several times pursued us as if +it would attack us; and if we struck or threw anything at it, it would +raise itself up and hiss so loud that it might be heard a great way. +It had a hellish ugly deformed look and voice, and our men would not be +persuaded but it was the devil, only that we did not know what business +Satan could have there, where there were no people. + +It was very remarkable that we had now travelled 1000 miles without +meeting with any people in the heart of the whole continent of Africa, +where, to be sure, never man set his foot since the sons of Noah spread +themselves over the face of the whole earth. Here also our gunner took +an observation with his forestaff, to determine our latitude, and he +found now, that having marched about thirty-three days northward, we +were in 6 degrees 22 minutes south latitude. + +After having with great difficulty got over this river, we came into a +strange wild country that began a little to affright us; for though the +country was not a desert of dry scalding sand as that was we had passed +before, yet it was mountainous, barren, and infinitely full of most +furious wild beasts, more than any place we had passed yet. There was +indeed a kind of coarse herbage on the surface, and now and then a few +trees, or rather shrubs. But people we could see none, and we began +to be in great suspense about victuals, for we had not killed a deer +a great while, but had lived chiefly upon fish and fowl, always by the +water-side, both which seemed to fail us now; and we were in the more +consternation, because we could not lay in a stock here to proceed upon, +as we did before, but were obliged to set out with scarcity, and without +any certainty of a supply. + +We had, however, no remedy but patience; and having killed some fowls +and dried some fish, as much as, with short allowance, we reckoned would +last us five days, we resolved to venture, and venture we did; nor +was it without cause that we were apprehensive of the danger, for +we travelled the five days and met neither with fish nor fowl, nor +four-footed beast, whose flesh was fit to eat, and we were in a most +dreadful apprehension of being famished to death. On the sixth day we +almost fasted, or, as we may say, we ate up all the scraps of what we +had left, and at night lay down supperless upon our mats, with heavy +hearts, being obliged the eighth day to kill one of our poor faithful +servants, the buffaloes that carried our baggage. The flesh of this +creature was very good, and so sparingly did we eat of it that it lasted +us all three days and a half, and was just spent; and we were on the +point of killing another when we saw before us a country that promised +better, having high trees and a large river in the middle of it. + +This encouraged us, and we quickened our march for the river-side, +though with empty stomachs, and very faint and weak; but before we came +to this river we had the good hap to meet with some young deer, a thing +we had long wished for. In a word, having shot three of them, we came to +a full stop to fill our bellies, and never gave the flesh time to cool +before we ate it; nay, it was much we could stay to kill it and had not +eaten it alive, for we were, in short, almost famished. + +Through all that inhospitable country we saw continually lions, tigers, +leopards, civet cats, and abundance of kinds of creatures that we did +not understand; we saw no elephants, but every now and then we met with +an elephant's tooth lying on the ground, and some of them lying, as it +were, half buried by the length of time that they had lain there. + +When we came to the shore of this river, we found it ran northerly +still, as all the rest had done, but with this difference, that as the +course of the other rivers were N. by E. or N.N.E., the course of this +lay N.W.N. + +On the farther bank of this river we saw some sign of inhabitants, +but met with none for the first day; but the next day we came into an +inhabited country, the people all negroes, and stark naked, without +shame, both men and women. + +We made signs of friendship to them, and found them a very frank, +civil, and friendly sort of people. They came to our negroes without +any suspicion, nor did they give us any reason to suspect them of any +villainy, as the others had done; we made signs to them that we were +hungry, and immediately some naked women ran and fetched us great +quantities of roots, and of things like pumpkins, which we made no +scruple to eat; and our artificer showed them some of his trinkets that +he had made, some of iron, some of silver, but none of gold. They had so +much judgment as to choose that of silver before the iron; but when we +showed them some gold, we found they did not value it so much as either +of the other. + +For some of these things they brought us more provisions, and three +living creatures as big as calves, but not of that kind; neither did we +ever see any of them before; their flesh was very good; and after that +they brought us twelve more, and some smaller creatures like hares; all +which were very welcome to us, who were indeed at a very great loss for +provisions. + +We grew very intimate with these people, and indeed they were the +civillest and most friendly people that we met with at all, and mightily +pleased with us; and, which was very particular, they were much easier +to be made to understand our meaning than any we had met with before. + +At last we began to inquire our way, pointing to the west. They made us +understand easily that we could not go that way, but they pointed to us +that we might go north-west, so that we presently understood that there +was another lake in our way, which proved to be true; for in two days +more we saw it plain, and it held us till we passed the equinoctial +line, lying all the way on our left hand, though at a great distance. + +Travelling thus northward, our gunner seemed very anxious about our +proceedings; for he assured us, and made me sensible of it by the +maps which he had been teaching me out of, that when we came into the +latitude of six degrees, or thereabouts, north of the line, the land +trended away to the west to such a length that we should not come at the +sea under a march of above 1500 miles farther westward than the country +we desired to go to. I asked him if there were no navigable rivers that +we might meet with, which, running into the west ocean, might perhaps +carry us down their stream, and then, if it were 1500 miles, or twice +1500 miles, we might do well enough if we could but get provisions. + +Here he showed me the maps again, and that there appeared no river whose +stream was of any such a length as to do any kindness, till we came +perhaps within 200 or 300 miles of the shore, except the Rio Grande, as +they call it, which lay farther northward from us, at least 700 miles; +and that then he knew not what kind of country it might carry us +through; for he said it was his opinion that the heats on the north of +the line, even in the same latitude, were violent, and the country more +desolate, barren, and barbarous, than those of the south; and that when +we came among the negroes in the north part of Africa, next the sea, +especially those who had seen and trafficked with the Europeans, such as +Dutch, English, Portuguese, Spaniards, etc., they had most of them been +so ill-used at some time or other that they would certainly put all the +spite they could upon us in mere revenge. + +Upon these considerations he advised us that, as soon as we had passed +this lake, we should proceed W.S.W., that is to say, a little inclining +to the south, and that in time we should meet with the great river +Congo, from whence the coast is called Congo, being a little north of +Angola, where we intended at first to go. + +I asked him if ever he had been on the coast of Congo. He said, yes, he +had, but was never on shore there. Then I asked him how we should get +from thence to the coast where the European ships came, seeing, if the +land trended away west for 1500 miles, we must have all that shore to +traverse before we could double the west point of it. + +He told me it was ten to one but we should hear of some European ships +to take us in, for that they often visited the coast of Congo and +Angola, in trade with the negroes; and that if we could not, yet, if +we could but find provisions, we should make our way as well along the +sea-shore as along the river, till we came to the Gold Coast, which, he +said, was not above 400 or 500 miles north of Congo, besides the turning +of the coast west about 300 more; that shore being in the latitude of +six or seven degrees; and that there the English, or Dutch, or French +had settlements or factories, perhaps all of them. + +I confess I had more mind, all the while he argued, to have gone +northward, and shipped ourselves in the Rio Grande, or, as the traders +call it, the river Negro or Niger, for I knew that at last it would +bring us down to the Cape de Verd, where we were sure of relief; +whereas, at the coast we were going to now, we had a prodigious way +still to go, either by sea or land, and no certainty which way to get +provisions but by force; but for the present I held my tongue, because +it was my tutor's opinion. + +But when, according to his desire, we came to turn southward, having +passed beyond the second great lake, our men began all to be uneasy, +and said we were now out of our way for certain, for that we were going +farther from home, and that we were indeed far enough off already. + +But we had not marched above twelve days more, eight whereof were taken +up in rounding the lake, and four more south-west, in order to make for +the river Congo, but we were put to another full stop, by entering a +country so desolate, so frightful, and so wild, that we knew not what to +think or do; for, besides that it appeared as a terrible and boundless +desert, having neither woods, trees, rivers, or inhabitants, so even the +place where we were was desolate of inhabitants, nor had we any way to +gather in a stock of provisions for the passing of this desert, as we +did before at our entering the first, unless we had marched back four +days to the place where we turned the head of the lake. + +Well, notwithstanding this, we ventured; for, to men that had passed +such wild places as we had done, nothing could seem too desperate to +undertake. We ventured, I say, and the rather because we saw very high +mountains in our way at a great distance, and we imagined, wherever +there were mountains there would be springs and rivers; where rivers +there would be trees and grass; where trees and grass there would +be cattle; and where cattle, some kind of inhabitants. At last, in +consequence of this speculative philosophy, we entered this waste, +having a great heap of roots and plants for our bread, such as the +Indians gave us, a very little flesh or salt, and but a little water. + +We travelled two days towards those hills, and still they seemed as +far off as they did at first, and it was the fifth day before we got to +them; indeed, we travelled but softly, for it was excessively hot; and +we were much about the very equinoctial line, we hardly knew whether to +the south or the north of it. + +As we had concluded, that where there were hills there would be springs, +so it happened; but we were not only surprised, but really frighted, to +find the first spring we came to, and which looked admirably clear and +beautiful, to be salt as brine. It was a terrible disappointment to us, +and put us under melancholy apprehensions at first; but the gunner, who +was of a spirit never discouraged, told us we should not be disturbed at +that, but be very thankful, for salt was a bait we stood in as much need +of as anything, and there was no question but we should find fresh water +as well as salt; and here our surgeon stepped in to encourage us, and +told us that if we did not know he would show us a way how to make that +salt water fresh, which indeed made us all more cheerful, though we +wondered what he meant. + +Meantime our men, without bidding, had been seeking about for other +springs, and found several; but still they were all salt; from whence +we concluded that there was a salt rock or mineral stone in those +mountains, and perhaps they might be all of such a substance; but still +I wondered by what witchcraft it was that our artist the surgeon would +make this salt water turn fresh, and I longed to see the experiment, +which was indeed a very odd one; but he went to work with as much +assurance as if he had tried it on the very spot before. + +He took two of our large mats and sewed them together, and they made a +kind of a bag four feet broad, three feet and a half high, and about a +foot and a half thick when it was full. + +He caused us to fill this bag with dry sand and tread it down as close +as we could, not to burst the mats. When thus the bag was full within +a foot, he sought some other earth and filled up the rest with it, and +still trod all in as hard as he could. When he had done, he made a +hole in the upper earth about as broad as the crown of a large hat, or +something bigger about, but not so deep, and bade a negro fill it with +water, and still as it shrunk away to fill it again, and keep it full. +The bag he had placed at first across two pieces of wood, about a foot +from the ground; and under it he ordered some of our skins to be spread +that would hold water. In about an hour, and not sooner, the water +began to come dropping through the bottom of the bag, and, to our great +surprise, was perfectly fresh and sweet, and this continued for several +hours; but in the end the water began to be a little brackish. When we +told him that, "Well, then," said he, "turn the sand out, and fill it +again." Whether he did this by way of experiment from his own fancy, or +whether he had seen it done before, I do not remember. + +The next day we mounted the tops of the hills, where the prospect was +indeed astonishing, for as far as the eye could look, south, or west, or +northwest, there was nothing to be seen but a vast howling wilderness, +with neither tree nor river, nor any green thing. The surface we found, +as the part we passed the day before, had a kind of thick moss upon +it, of a blackish dead colour, but nothing in it that looked like food, +either for man or beast. + +Had we been stored with provisions to have entered for ten or twenty +days upon this wilderness, as we were formerly, and with fresh water, we +had hearts good enough to have ventured, though we had been obliged to +come back again, for if we went north we did not know but we might meet +with the same; but we neither had provisions, neither were we in any +place where it was possible to get them. We killed some wild ferine +creatures at the foot of these hills; but, except two things, like to +nothing that we ever saw before, we met with nothing that was fit +to eat. These were creatures that seemed to be between the kind of a +buffalo and a deer, but indeed resembled neither; for they had no horns, +and had great legs like a cow, with a fine head, and the neck like a +deer. We killed also, at several times, a tiger, two young lions, and a +wolf; but, God be thanked, we were not so reduced as to eat carrion. + +Upon this terrible prospect I renewed my motion of turning northward, +and making towards the river Niger or Rio Grande, then to turn west +towards the English settlements on the Gold Coast; to which every one +most readily consented, only our gunner, who was indeed our best guide, +though he happened to be mistaken at this time. He moved that, as our +coast was now northward, so we might slant away north-west, that so, by +crossing the country, we might perhaps meet with some other river that +run into the Rio Grande northward, or down to the Gold Coast southward, +and so both direct our way and shorten the labour; as also because, if +any of the country was inhabited and fruitful, we should probably find +it upon the shore of the rivers, where alone we could be furnished with +provisions. + +This was good advice, and too rational not to be taken; but our present +business was, what to do to get out of this dreadful place we were in. +Behind us was a waste, which had already cost us five days' march, and +we had not provisions for five days left to go back again the same way. +Before us was nothing but horror, as above; so we resolved, seeing the +ridge of the hills we were upon had some appearance of fruitfulness, +and that they seemed to lead away to the northward a great way, to keep +under the foot of them on the east side, to go on as far as we could, +and in the meantime to look diligently out for food. + +Accordingly we moved on the next morning; for we had no time to lose, +and, to our great comfort, we came in our first morning's march to very +good springs of fresh water; and lest we should have a scarcity again, +we filled all our bladder bottles and carried it with us. I should also +have observed that our surgeon, who made the salt water fresh, took the +opportunity of those salt springs, and made us the quantity of three or +four pecks of very good salt. + +In our third march we found an unexpected supply of food, the hills +being full of hares. They were of a kind something different from ours +in England, larger and not as swift of foot, but very good meat. We shot +several of them, and the little tame leopard, which I told you we took +at the negro town that we plundered, hunted them like a dog, and killed +us several every day; but she would eat nothing of them unless we gave +it her, which, indeed, in our circumstance, was very obliging. We salted +them a little and dried them in the sun whole, and carried a strange +parcel along with us. I think it was almost three hundred, for we did +not know when we might find any more, either of these or any other food. +We continued our course under these hills very comfortably for eight or +nine days, when we found, to our great satisfaction, the country beyond +us began to look with something of a better countenance. As for the west +side of the hills, we never examined it till this day, when three of our +company, the rest halting for refreshment, mounted the hills again to +satisfy their curiosity, but found it all the same, nor could they see +any end of it, no, not to the north, the way we were going; so the tenth +day, finding the hills made a turn, and led as it were into the vast +desert, we left them and continued our course north, the country being +very tolerably full of woods, some waste, but not tediously long, till +we came, by our gunner's observation, into the latitude of eight degrees +five minutes, which we were nineteen days more in performing. + +All this way we found no inhabitants, but abundance of wild ravenous +creatures, with which we became so well acquainted now that really we +did not much mind them. We saw lions and tigers and leopards every night +and morning in abundance; but as they seldom came near us, we let them +go about their business: if they offered to come near us, we made false +fire with any gun that was uncharged, and they would walk off as soon as +they saw the flash. + +We made pretty good shift for food all this way; for sometimes we killed +hares, sometimes some fowls, but for my life I cannot give names to +any of them, except a kind of partridge, and another that was like our +turtle. Now and then we began to meet with elephants again in great +numbers; those creatures delighted chiefly in the woody part of the +country. + +This long-continued march fatigued us very much, and two of our men fell +sick, indeed, so very sick that we thought they would have died; and one +of our negroes died suddenly. Our surgeon said it was an apoplexy, but +he wondered at it, he said, for he could never complain of his high +feeding. Another of them was very ill; but our surgeon with much ado +persuading him, indeed it was almost forcing him to be let blood, he +recovered. + +We halted here twelve days for the sake of our sick men, and our surgeon +persuaded me and three or four more of us to be let blood during the +time of rest, which, with other things he gave us, contributed very much +to our continued health in so tedious a march and in so hot a climate. + +In this march we pitched our matted tents every night, and they were +very comfortable to us, though we had trees and woods to shelter us in +most places. We thought it very strange that in all this part of the +country we yet met with no inhabitants; but the principal reason, as we +found afterwards, was, that we, having kept a western course first, +and then a northern course, were gotten too much into the middle of the +country and among the deserts; whereas the inhabitants are principally +found among the rivers, lakes, and lowlands, as well to the south-west +as to the north. + +What little rivulets we found here were so empty of water, that except +some pits, and little more than ordinary pools, there was scarcely any +water to be seen in them; and they rather showed that during the rainy +months they had a channel, than that they had really running water in +them at that time, by which it was easy for us to judge that we had a +great way to go; but this was no discouragement so long as we had but +provisions, and some seasonable shelter from the violent heat, which +indeed I thought was much greater now than when the sun was just over +our heads. + +Our men being recovered, we set forward again, very well stored with +provisions, and water sufficient, and bending our course a little to +the westward of the north, travelled in hopes of some favourable stream +which might bear a canoe; but we found none till after twenty days' +travel, including eight days' rest; for our men being weak, we rested +very often, especially when we came to places which were proper for our +purpose, where we found cattle, fowl, or anything to kill for our food. +In those twenty days' march we advanced four degrees to the northward, +besides some meridian distance westward, and we met with abundance of +elephants, and with a good number of elephants' teeth scattered up and +down, here and there, in the woody grounds especially, some of which +were very large. But they were no booty to us; our business was +provisions, and a good passage out of the country; and it had been much +more to our purpose to have found a good fat deer, and to have killed +it for our food, than a hundred ton of elephants' teeth; and yet, as +you shall presently hear, when we came to begin our passage by water, we +once thought to have built a large canoe, on purpose to have loaded it +with ivory; but this was when we knew nothing of the rivers, nor knew +anything how dangerous and how difficult a passage it was we were likely +to have in them, nor had considered the weight of carriage to lug them +to the rivers where we might embark. + +At the end of twenty days' travel, as above, in the latitude of three +degrees sixteen minutes, we discovered in a valley, at some distance +from us, a pretty tolerable stream, which we thought deserved the name +of a river, and which ran its course N.N.W., which was just what we +wanted. As we had fixed our thoughts upon our passage by water, we took +this for the place to make the experiment, and bent our march directly +to the valley. + +There was a small thicket of trees just in our way, which we went by, +thinking no harm, when on a sudden one of our negroes was dangerously +wounded with an arrow shot into his back, slanting between his +shoulders. This put us to a full stop; and three of our men, with two +negroes, spreading the wood, for it was but a small one, found a negro +with a bow, but no arrow, who would have escaped, but our men that +discovered him shot him in revenge of the mischief he had done; so we +lost the opportunity of taking him prisoner, which, if we had done, and +sent him home with good usage, it might have brought others to us in a +friendly manner. + +Going a little farther, we came to five negro huts or houses, built +after a different manner from any we had seen yet; and at the door of +one of them lay seven elephants' teeth, piled up against the wall or +side of the hut, as if they had been provided against a market. Here +were no men, but seven or eight women, and near twenty children. We +offered them no incivility of any kind, but gave them every one a bit of +silver beaten out thin, as I observed before, and cut diamond fashion, +or in the shape of a bird, at which the women were overjoyed, and +brought out to us several sorts of food, which we did not understand, +being cakes of a meal made of roots, which they bake in the sun, and +which ate very well. We went a little way farther and pitched our camp +for that night, not doubting but our civility to the women would produce +some good effect when their husbands might come home. + +Accordingly, the next morning the women, with eleven men, five young +boys, and two good big girls, came to our camp. Before they came quite +to us, the women called aloud, and made an odd screaming noise to bring +us out; and accordingly we came out, when two of the women, showing us +what we had given them, and pointing to the company behind, made such +signs as we could easily understand signified friendship. When the men +advanced, having bows and arrows, they laid them down on the ground, +scraped and threw sand over their heads, and turned round three times +with their hands laid up upon the tops of their heads. This, it seems, +was a solemn vow of friendship. Upon this we beckoned them with our +hands to come nearer; then they sent the boys and girls to us first, +which, it seems, was to bring us more cakes of bread and some green +herbs to eat, which we received, and took the boys up and kissed them, +and the little girls too; then the men came up close to us, and sat them +down on the ground, making signs that we should sit down by them, which +we did. They said much to one another, but we could not understand them, +nor could we find any way to make them understand us, much less +whither we were going, or what we wanted, only that we easily made them +understand we wanted victuals; whereupon one of the men, casting his +eyes about him towards a rising ground that was about half a mile off, +started up as if he was frighted, flew to the place where they had laid +down their bows and arrows, snatched up a bow and two arrows, and ran +like a racehorse to the place. When he came there, he let fly both his +arrows, and comes back again to us with the same speed. We, seeing he +came with the bow, but without the arrows, were the more inquisitive; +but the fellow, saying nothing to us, beckons to one of our negroes to +come to him, and we bid him go; so he led him back to the place, where +lay a kind of deer, shot with two arrows, but not quite dead, and +between them they brought it down to us. This was for a gift to us, and +was very welcome, I assure you, for our stock was low. These people were +all stark naked. + +The next day there came about a hundred men to us, and women making the +same awkward signals of friendship, and dancing, and showing themselves +very well pleased, and anything they had they gave us. How the man +in the wood came to be so butcherly and rude as to shoot at our men, +without making any breach first, we could not imagine; for the people +were simple, plain, and inoffensive in all our other conversation with +them. + +From hence we went down the banks of the little river I mentioned, and +where, I found, we should see the whole nation of negroes, but whether +friendly to us or not, that we could make no judgment of yet. + +The river was no use to us, as to the design of making canoes, a great +while; and we traversed the country on the edge of it about five days +more, when our carpenters, finding the stream increased, proposed to +pitch our tents, and fall to work to make canoes; but after we had begun +the work, and cut down two or three trees, and spent five days in the +labour, some of our men, wandering further down the river, brought us +word that the stream rather decreased than increased, sinking away +into the sands, or drying up by the heat of the sun, so that the river +appeared not able to carry the least canoe that could be any way useful +to us; so we were obliged to give over our enterprise and move on. + +In our further prospect this way, we marched three days full west, the +country on the north side being extraordinary mountainous, and more +parched and dry than any we had seen yet; whereas, in the part which +looks due west, we found a pleasant valley running a great way between +two great ridges of mountains. The hills looked frightful, being +entirely bare of trees or grass, and even white with the dryness of the +sand; but in the valley we had trees, grass, and some creatures that +were fit for food, and some inhabitants. + +We passed by some of their huts or houses, and saw people about them, +but they ran up into the hills as soon as they saw us. At the end of +this valley we met with a peopled country, and at first it put us to +some doubt whether we should go among them, or keep up towards the hills +northerly; and as our aim was principally as before, to make our way to +the river Niger, we inclined to the latter, pursuing our course by the +compass to the N.W. We marched thus without interruption seven days +more, when we met with a surprising circumstance much more desolate and +disconsolate than our own, and which, in time to come, will scarce seem +credible. + +We did not much seek the conversing, or acquainting ourselves with the +natives of the country, except where we found the want of them for our +provision, or their direction for our way; so that, whereas we found +the country here begin to be very populous, especially towards our left +hand, that is, to the south, we kept at the more distance northerly, +still stretching towards the west. + +In this tract we found something or other to kill and eat, which always +supplied our necessity, though not so well as we were provided in our +first setting out; being thus, as it were, pushing to avoid a peopled +country, we at last came to a very pleasant, agreeable stream of water, +not big enough to be called a river, but running to the N.N.W., which +was the very course we desired to go. + +On the farthest bank of this brook, we perceived some huts of negroes, +not many, and in a little low spot of ground, some maize, or Indian +corn, growing, which intimated presently to us, that there were some +inhabitants on that side less barbarous than what we had met with in +other places where we had been. + +As we went forward, our whole caravan being in a body, our negroes, who +were in the front, cried out, that they saw a white man! We were not +much surprised at first, it being, as we thought, a mistake of the +fellows, and asked them what they meant; when one of them stepped to me, +and pointing to a hut on the other side of the hill, I was astonished to +see a white man indeed, but stark naked, very busy near the door of his +hut, and stooping down to the ground with something in his hand, as if +he had been at some work; and his back being towards us, he did not see +us. + +I gave notice to our negroes to make no noise, and waited till some more +of our men were come up, to show the sight to them, that they might be +sure I was not mistaken; and we were soon satisfied of the truth, for +the man, having heard some noise, started up, and looked full at us, as +much surprised, to be sure, as we were, but whether with fear or hope, +we then knew not. + +As he discovered us, so did the rest of the inhabitants belonging to the +huts about him, and all crowded together, looking at us at a distance, a +little bottom, in which the brook ran, lying between us; the white man, +and all the rest, as he told us afterwards, not knowing well whether +they should stay or run away. However, it presently came into my +thoughts, that if there were white men among them, it would be much +easier to make them understand what we meant as to peace or war, than +we found it with others; so tying a piece of white rag to the end of a +stick, we sent two negroes with it to the bank of the water, carrying +the pole up as high as they could; it was presently understood, and two +of their men and the white man came to the shore on the other side. + +However, as the white man spoke no Portuguese, they could understand +nothing of one another but by signs; but our men made the white man +understand that they had white men with them too, at which they said the +white man laughed. However, to be short, our men came back, and told us +they were all good friends, and in about an hour four of our men, two +negroes, and the black prince, went to the river-side, where the white +man came to them. + +They had not been half a quarter of an hour, but a negro came running to +me, and told me the white man was Inglese, as he called him; upon which +I ran back, eagerly enough, you may be sure, with him, and found, as +he said, that he was an Englishman; upon which he embraced me very +passionately, the tears running down his face. The first surprise of his +seeing us was over before we came, but any one may conceive it by the +brief account he gave us afterwards of his very unhappy circumstances, +and of so unexpected a deliverance, such as perhaps never happened to +any man in the world, for it was a million to one odds that ever he +could have been relieved; nothing but an adventure that never was heard +or read of before could have suited his case, unless Heaven, by some +miracle that never was to be expected, had acted for him. + +He appeared to be a gentleman, not an ordinary-bred fellow, seaman, or +labouring man; this showed itself in his behaviour in the first moment +of our conversing with him, and in spite of all the disadvantages of his +miserable circumstances. + +He was a middle-aged man, not above thirty-seven or thirty-eight, though +his beard was grown exceedingly long, and the hair of his head and +face strangely covered him to the middle of his back and breast; he was +white, and his skin very fine, though discoloured, and in some places +blistered, and covered with a brown blackish substance, scurfy, scaly, +and hard, which was the effect of the scorching heat of the sun; he was +stark naked, and had been so, as he told us, upwards of two years. + +He was so exceedingly transported at our meeting with him, that he could +scarce enter into any discourse at all with us that day; and when he +could get away from us for a little, we saw him walking alone, and +showing all the most extravagant tokens of an ungovernable joy; and even +afterwards he was never without tears in his eyes for several days, +upon the least word spoken by us of his circumstances, or by him of his +deliverance. + +We found his behaviour the most courteous and endearing I ever saw +in any man whatever, and most evident tokens of a mannerly, well-bred +person appeared in all things he did or said, and our people were +exceedingly taken with him. He was a scholar and a mathematician; he +could not speak Portuguese indeed, but he spoke Latin to our surgeon, +French to another of our men, and Italian to a third. + +He had no leisure in his thoughts to ask us whence we came, whither we +were going, or who we were; but would have it always as an answer to +himself, that to be sure, wherever we were a-going, we came from Heaven, +and were sent on purpose to save him from the most wretched condition +that ever man was reduced to. + +Our men pitching their camp on the bank of a little river opposite to +him, he began to inquire what store of provisions we had, and how we +proposed to be supplied. When he found that our store was but small, +he said he would talk with the natives, and we should have provisions +enough; for he said they were the most courteous, good-natured part of +the inhabitants in all that part of the country, as we might suppose by +his living so safe among them. + +The first things this gentleman did for us were indeed of the greatest +consequence to us; for, first, he perfectly informed us where we were, +and which was the properest course for us to steer; secondly, he put +us in the way how to furnish ourselves effectually with provisions; and +thirdly, he was our complete interpreter and peacemaker with all the +natives, who now began to be very numerous about us, and who were a +more fierce and politic people than those we had met with before; not so +easily terrified with our arms as those, and not so ignorant as to give +their provisions and corn for our little toys, such as, I said before, +our artificer made; but as they had frequently traded and conversed with +the Europeans on the coast, or with other negro nations that had traded +and been concerned with them, they were the less ignorant and the +less fearful, and consequently nothing was to be had from them but by +exchange for such things as they liked. + +This I say of the negro natives, which we soon came among; but as to +these poor people that he lived among, they were not much acquainted +with things, being at the distance of above 300 miles from the coast; +only that they found elephants' teeth upon the hills to the north, which +they took and carried about sixty or seventy miles south, where other +trading negroes usually met them, and gave them beads, glass, shells, +and cowries, for them, such as the English and Dutch and other traders +furnish them with from Europe. + +We now began to be more familiar with our new acquaintance; and first, +though we made but a sorry figure as to clothes ourselves, having +neither shoe, or stocking, or glove, or hat among us, and but very few +shirts, yet as well as we could we clothed him; and first, our surgeon +having scissors and razors, shaved him, and cut his hair; a hat, as I +say, we had not in all our stores, but he supplied himself by making +himself a cap of a piece of a leopard-skin, most artificially. As for +shoes or stockings, he had gone so long without them that he cared not +even for the buskins and foot-gloves we wore, which I described above. + +As he had been curious to hear the whole story of our travels, and was +exceedingly delighted with the relation, so we were no less to know, and +pleased with, the account of his circumstances, and the history of his +coming to that strange place alone, and in that condition which we found +him in, as above. This account of his would indeed be in itself the +subject of an agreeable history, and would be as long and diverting as +our own, having in it many strange and extraordinary incidents; but we +cannot have room here to launch out into so long a digression: the sum +of his history was this:-- + +He had been a factor for the English Guinea Company at Sierra Leone, +or some other of their settlements which had been taken by the French, +where he had been plundered of all his own effects, as well as of what +was entrusted to him by the company. Whether it was that the company +did not do him justice in restoring his circumstances, or in further +employing him, he quitted their service, and was employed by those +called separate traders, and being afterwards out of employ there +also, traded on his own account; when, passing unwarily into one of the +company's settlements, he was either betrayed into the hands of some of +the natives, or, somehow or other, was surprised by them. However, as +they did not kill him, he found means to escape from them at that time, +and fled to another nation of the natives, who, being enemies to the +other, entertained him friendly, and with them he lived some time; but +not liking his quarters or his company, he fled again, and several times +changed his landlords: sometimes was carried by force, sometimes +hurried by fear, as circumstances altered with him (the variety of which +deserves a history by itself), till at last he had wandered beyond all +possibility of return, and had taken up his abode where we found him, +where he was well received by the petty king of the tribe he lived with; +and he, in return, instructed them how to value the product of their +labour, and on what terms to trade with those negroes who came up to +them for teeth. + +As he was naked, and had no clothes, so he was naked of arms for his +defence, having neither gun, sword, staff, or any instrument of war +about him, no, not to guard himself against the attacks of a wild beast, +of which the country was very full. We asked him how he came to be so +entirely abandoned of all concern for his safety? He answered, that to +him, that had so often wished for death, life was not worth defending; +and that, as he was entirely at the mercy of the negroes, they had much +the more confidence in him, seeing he had no weapons to hurt them. As +for wild beasts, he was not much concerned about that, for he scarce +ever went from his hut; but if he did, the negro king and his men went +all with him, and they were all armed with bows and arrows, and lances, +with which they would kill any of the ravenous creatures, lions as +well as others; but that they seldom came abroad in the day; and if +the negroes wander anywhere in the night, they always build a hut for +themselves, and make a fire at the door of it, which is guard enough. + +We inquired of him what we should next do towards getting to the +seaside. He told us we were about one hundred and twenty English leagues +from the coast, where almost all the European settlements and factories +were, and which is called the Gold Coast; but that there were so many +different nations of negroes in the way, that it was ten to one if +we were not either fought with continually, or starved for want of +provisions; but that there were two other ways to go, which, if he +had had any company to go with him, he had often contrived to make his +escape by. The one was to travel full west, which, though it was farther +to go, yet was not so full of people, and the people we should find +would be so much the civiller to us, or be so much the easier to fight +with; or that the other way was, if possible, to get to the Rio Grande, +and go down the stream in canoes. We told him, that was the way we had +resolved on before we met with him; but then he told us there was a +prodigious desert to go over, and as prodigious woods to go through, +before we came to it, and that both together were at least twenty days' +march for us, travel as hard as we could. + +We asked him if there were no horses in the country, or asses, or even +bullocks or buffaloes, to make use of in such a journey, and we showed +him ours, of which we had but three left. He said no, all the country +did not afford anything of that kind. + +He told us that in this great wood there were immense numbers of +elephants; and upon the desert, great multitudes of lions, lynxes, +tigers, leopards, &c.; and that it was to that wood and that desert that +the negroes went to get elephants' teeth, where they never failed to +find a great number. + +We inquired still more, and particularly the way to the Gold Coast, and +if there were no rivers to ease us in our carriage; and told him, as to +the negroes fighting with us, we were not much concerned at that; nor +were we afraid of starving, for if they had any victuals among them, we +would have our share of it; and, therefore, if he would venture to show +us the way, we would venture to go; and as for himself, we told him we +would live and die together--there should not a man of us stir from him. + +He told us, with all his heart, if we resolved it, and would venture, we +might be assured he would take his fate with us, and he would endeavour +to guide us in such a way as we should meet with some friendly savages +who would use us well, and perhaps stand by us against some others, who +were less tractable; so, in a word, we all resolved to go full south for +the Gold Coast. + +The next morning he came to us again, and being all met in council, as +we may call it, he began to talk very seriously with us, that since +we were now come, after a long journey, to a view of the end of our +troubles, and had been so obliging to him as to offer to carry him with +us, he had been all night revolving in his mind what he and we all might +do to make ourselves some amends for all our sorrows; and first, he +said, he was to let me know that we were just then in one of the richest +parts of the world, though it was really otherwise but a desolate, +disconsolate wilderness; "for," says he, "there is not a river but runs +gold--not a desert but without ploughing bears a crop of ivory. What +mines of gold, what immense stores of gold, those mountains may contain, +from whence these rivers come, or the shores which these waters run +by, we know not, but may imagine that they must be inconceivably rich, +seeing so much is washed down the stream by the water washing the +sides of the land, that the quantity suffices all the traders which the +European world send thither." We asked him how far they went for it, +seeing the ships only trade upon the coast. He told us that the negroes +on the coast search the rivers up for the length of 150 or 200 miles, +and would be out a month, or two, or three at a time, and always come +home sufficiently rewarded; "but," says he, "they never come thus far, +and yet hereabouts is as much gold as there." Upon this he told us that +he believed he might have gotten a hundred pounds' weight of gold since +he came thither, if he had employed himself to look and work for it; but +as he knew not what to do with it, and had long since despaired of being +ever delivered from the misery he was in, he had entirely omitted it. +"For what advantage had it been to me," said he, "or what richer had +I been, if I had a ton of gold dust, and lay and wallowed in it? The +richness of it," said he, "would not give me one moment's felicity, nor +relieve me in the present exigency. Nay," says he, "as you all see, it +would not buy me clothes to cover me, or a drop of drink to save me from +perishing. It is of no value here," says he; "there are several people +among these huts that would weigh gold against a few glass beads or +a cockle-shell, and give you a handful of gold-dust for a handful +of cowries." N.B.--These are little shells which our children call +blackamoors' teeth. + +When he had said thus he pulled out a piece of an earthen pot baked hard +in the sun. "Here," says he, "is some of the dirt of this country, and +if I would I could have got a great deal more;" and, showing it to us, +I believe there was in it between two and three pounds weight of +gold-dust, of the same kind and colour with that we had gotten already, +as before. After we had looked at it a while, he told us, smiling, we +were his deliverers, and all he had, as well as his life, was ours; +and therefore, as this would be of value to us when we came to our own +country, so he desired we would accept of it among us; and that was the +only time that he had repented that he had picked up no more of it. + +I spoke for him, as his interpreter, to my comrades, and in their names +thanked him; but, speaking to them in Portuguese, I desired them to +defer the acceptance of his kindness to the next morning; and so I did, +telling him we would further talk of this part in the morning; so we +parted for that time. + +When he was gone I found they were all wonderfully affected with +his discourse, and with the generosity of his temper, as well as +the magnificence of his present, which in another place had been +extraordinary. Upon the whole, not to detain you with circumstances, we +agreed that, seeing he was now one of our number, and that as we were a +relief to him in carrying him out of the dismal condition he was in, so +he was equally a relief to us, in being our guide through the rest of +the country, our interpreter with the natives, and our director how to +manage with the savages, and how to enrich ourselves with the wealth +of the country; that, therefore, we would put his gold among our common +stock, and every one should give him as much as would make his up just +as much as any single share of our own, and for the future we would take +our lot together, taking his solemn engagement to us, as we had before +one to another, that we would not conceal the least grain of gold we +found one from another. + +In the next conference we acquainted him with the adventures of the +Golden River, and how we had shared what we got there, so that every man +had a larger stock than he for his share; that, therefore, instead of +taking any from him, we had resolved every one to add a little to him. +He appeared very glad that we had met with such good success, but would +not take a grain from us, till at last, pressing him very hard, he told +us, that then he would take it thus:--that, when we came to get any +more, he would have so much out of the first as should make him even, +and then we would go on as equal adventurers; and thus we agreed. + +He then told us he thought it would not be an unprofitable adventure if, +before we set forward, and after we had got a stock of provisions, we +should make a journey north to the edge of the desert he had told us of, +from whence our negroes might bring every one a large elephant's tooth, +and that he would get some more to assist; and that, after a certain +length of carriage, they might be conveyed by canoes to the coast, where +they would yield a very great profit. + +I objected against this on account of our other design we had of getting +gold-dust; and that our negroes, who we knew would be faithful to us, +would get much more by searching the rivers for gold for us than by +lugging a great tooth of a hundred and fifty pounds weight a hundred +miles or more, which would be an insufferable labour to them after so +hard a journey, and would certainly kill them. + +He acquiesced in the justice of this answer, but fain would have had us +gone to see the woody part of the hill and the edge of the desert, that +we might see how the elephants' teeth lay scattered up and down there; +but when we told him the story of what we had seen before, as is said +above, he said no more. + +We stayed here twelve days, during which time the natives were very +obliging to us, and brought us fruits, pompions, and a root like +carrots, though of quite another taste, but not unpleasant neither, and +some guinea-fowls, whose names we did not know. In short, they brought +us plenty of what they had, and we lived very well, and we gave them all +such little things as our cutler had made, for he had now a whole bag +full of them. + +On the thirteenth day we set forward, taking our new gentleman with us. +At parting, the negro king sent two savages with a present to him of +some dried flesh, but I do not remember what it was, and he gave him +again three silver birds which our cutler helped him to, which I assure +you was a present for a king. + +We travelled now south, a little west, and here we found the first +river for above 2000 miles' march, whose waters run south, all the rest +running north or west. We followed this river, which was no bigger than +a good large brook in England, till it began to increase its water. +Every now and then we found our Englishman went down as it were +privately to the water, which was to try the land; at length, after a +day's march upon this river, he came running up to us with his hands +full of sand, and saying, "Look here." Upon looking we found that a good +deal of gold lay spangled among the sand of the river. "Now," says he, +"I think we may begin to work;" so he divided our negroes into couples +and set them to work, to search and wash the sand and ooze in the bottom +of the water where it was not deep. + +In the first day and a quarter our men all together had gathered a pound +and two ounces of gold or thereabouts, and as we found the quantity +increased the farther we went, we followed it about three days, till +another small rivulet joined the first, and then searching up the +stream, we found gold there too; so we pitched our camp in the angle +where the rivers joined, and we diverted ourselves, as I may call it, +in washing the gold out of the sand of the river, and in getting +provisions. + +Here we stayed thirteen days more, in which time we had many pleasant +adventures with the savages, too long to mention here, and some of them +too homely to tell of, for some of our men had made something free with +their women, which, had not our new guide made peace for us with one of +their men at the price of seven fine bits of silver, which our artificer +had cut out into the shapes of lions, and fishes, and birds, and had +punched holes to hang them up by (an inestimable treasure), we must have +gone to war with them and all their people. + +All the while we were busy washing gold-dust out of the rivers, and our +negroes the like, our ingenious cutler was hammering and cutting, and +he was grown so dexterous by use that he formed all manner of images. He +cut out elephants, tigers, civet cats, ostriches, eagles, cranes, fowls, +fishes, and indeed whatever he pleased, in thin plates of hammered gold, +for his silver and iron were almost all gone. + +At one of the towns of these savage nations we were very friendly +received by their king, and as he was very much taken with our workman's +toys, he sold him an elephant cut out of a gold plate as thin as a +sixpence at an extravagant rate. He was so much taken with it that he +would not be quiet till he had given him almost a handful of gold-dust, +as they call it; I suppose it might weigh three-quarters of a pound; the +piece of gold that the elephant was made of might be about the weight of +a pistole, rather less than more. Our artist was so honest, though the +labour and art were all his own, that he brought all the gold and put +it into our common stock; but we had, indeed, no manner of reason in the +least to be covetous, for, as our new guide told us, we that were strong +enough to defend ourselves, and had time enough to stay (for we were +none of us in haste), might in time get together what quantity of gold +we pleased, even to an hundred pounds weight each man if we thought fit; +and therefore he told us, though he had as much reason to be sick of the +country as any of us, yet if we thought to turn our march a little to +the south-east, and pitch upon a place proper for our headquarters, +we might find provisions plenty enough, and extend ourselves over the +country among the rivers for two or three years to the right and left, +and we should soon find the advantage of it. + +The proposal, however good as to the profitable part of it, suited none +of us, for we were all more desirous to get home than to be rich, being +tired of the excessive fatigue of above a year's continual wandering +among deserts and wild beasts. + +However, the tongue of our new acquaintance had a kind of charm in it, +and used such arguments, and had so much the power of persuasion, that +there was no resisting him. He told us it was preposterous not to take +the fruit of all our labours now we were come to the harvest; that we +might see the hazard the Europeans run with ships and men, and at great +expense, to fetch a little gold, and that we, that were in the centre +of it, to go away empty-handed was unaccountable; that we were strong +enough to fight our way through whole nations, and might make our +journey afterward to what part of the coast we pleased, and we should +never forgive ourselves when we came to our own country to see we had +500 pistoles in gold, and might as easily have had 5000 or 10,000, or +what we pleased; that he was no more covetous than we, but seeing it +was in all our powers to retrieve our misfortunes at once, and to make +ourselves easy for all our lives, he could not be faithful to us, or +grateful for the good we had done him, if he did not let us see the +advantage we had in our hands; and he assured us he would make it clear +to our own understanding, that we might in two years' time, by good +management and by the help of our negroes, gather every man a hundred +pounds weight of gold, and get together perhaps two hundred ton of +teeth; whereas, if once we pushed on to the coast and separated, we +should never be able to see that place again with our eyes, or do any +more than sinners did with heaven,--wish themselves there, but know they +can never come at it. + +Our surgeon was the first man that yielded to his reasoning, and after +him the gunner; and they too, indeed, had a great influence over us, but +none of the rest had any mind to stay, nor I neither, I must confess; +for I had no notion of a great deal of money, or what to do with myself, +or what to do with it if I had it. I thought I had enough already, and +all the thoughts I had about disposing of it, if I came to Europe, was +only how to spend it as fast as I could, buy me some clothes, and go to +sea again to be a drudge for more. + +However, he prevailed with us by his good words at last to stay but for +six months in the country, and then, if we did resolve to go, he would +submit; so at length we yielded to that, and he carried us about fifty +English miles south-east, where we found several rivulets of water, +which seemed to come all from a great ridge of mountains, which lay to +the north-east, and which, by our calculation, must be the beginning +that way of the great waste, which we had been forced northward to +avoid. + +Here we found the country barren enough, but yet we had by his direction +plenty of food; for the savages round us, upon giving them some of our +toys, as I have so often mentioned, brought us in whatever they had; +and here we found some maize, or Indian wheat, which the negro women +planted, as we sow seeds in a garden, and immediately our new provider +ordered some of our negroes to plant it, and it grew up presently, and +by watering it often, we had a crop in less than three months' growth. + +As soon as we were settled, and our camp fixed, we fell to the old +trade of fishing for gold in the rivers mentioned above, and our English +gentleman so well knew how to direct our search, that we scarce ever +lost our labour. + +One time, having set us to work, he asked if we would give him leave, +with four or five negroes, to go out for six or seven days to seek his +fortune, and see what he could discover in the country, assuring us +whatever he got should be for the public stock. We all gave him our +consent, and lent him a gun; and two of our men desiring to go with him, +they took then six negroes with them, and two of our buffaloes that +came with us the whole journey; they took about eight days' provision of +bread with them, but no flesh, except about as much dried flesh as would +serve them two days. + +They travelled up to the top of the mountains I mentioned just now, +where they saw (as our men afterwards vouched it to be) the same desert +which we were so justly terrified at when we were on the farther side, +and which, by our calculation, could not be less than 300 miles broad +and above 600 miles in length, without knowing where it ended. + +The journal of their travels is too long to enter upon here. They +stayed out two-and-fifty days, when they brought us seventeen pound and +something more (for we had no exact weight) of gold-dust, some of it in +much larger pieces than any we had found before, besides about fifteen +ton of elephants' teeth, which he had, partly by good usage and partly +by bad, obliged the savages of the country to fetch, and bring down to +him from the mountains, and which he made others bring with him quite +down to our camp. Indeed, we wondered what was coming to us when we saw +him attended with above 200 negroes; but he soon undeceived us, when he +made them all throw down their burdens on a heap at the entrance of our +camp. + +Besides this, they brought two lions' skins, and five leopards' skins, +very large and very fine. He asked our pardon for his long stay, and +that he had made no greater a booty, but told us he had one excursion +more to make, which he hoped should turn to a better account. + +So, having rested himself and rewarded the savages that brought the +teeth for him with some bits of silver and iron cut out diamond fashion, +and with two shaped like little dogs, he sent them away mightily +pleased. + +The second journey he went, some more of our men desired to go with +him, and they made a troop of ten white men and ten savages, and the two +buffaloes to carry their provisions and ammunition. They took the same +course, only not exactly the same track, and they stayed thirty-two days +only, in which time they killed no less than fifteen leopards, three +lions, and several other creatures, and brought us home four-and-twenty +pound some ounces of gold-dust, and only six elephants' teeth, but they +were very great ones. + +Our friend the Englishman showed us that now our time was well bestowed, +for in five months which we had stayed here, we had gathered so much +gold-dust that, when we came to share it, we had five pound and a +quarter to a man, besides what we had before, and besides six or seven +pound weight which we had at several times given our artificer to make +baubles with. And now we talked of going forward to the coast to put an +end to our journey; but our guide laughed at us then. "Nay, you can't go +now," says he, "for the rainy season begins next month, and there will +be no stirring then." This we found, indeed, reasonable, so we resolved +to furnish ourselves with provisions, that we might not be obliged to +go abroad too much in the rain, and we spread ourselves some one way and +some another, as far as we cared to venture, to get provisions; and our +negroes killed us some deer, which we cured as well as we could in the +sun, for we had now no salt. + +By this time the rainy months were set in, and we could scarce, for +above two months, look out of our huts. But that was not all, for the +rivers were so swelled with the land-floods, that we scarce knew the +little brooks and rivulets from the great navigable rivers. This had +been a very good opportunity to have conveyed by water, upon rafts, our +elephants' teeth, of which we had a very great pile; for, as we always +gave the savages some reward for their labour, the very women would +bring us teeth upon every opportunity, and sometimes a great tooth +carried between two; so that our quantity was increased to about +two-and-twenty ton of teeth. + +As soon as the weather proved fair again, he told us he would not press +us to any further stay, since we did not care whether we got any more +gold or no; that we were indeed the first men he ever met with in his +life that said they had gold enough, and of whom it might be truly said, +that, when it lay under our feet, we would not stoop to take it up. But, +since he had made us a promise, he would not break it, nor press us to +make any further stay; only he thought he ought to tell us that now was +the time, after the land-flood, when the greatest quantity of gold was +found; and that, if we stayed but one month, we should see thousands of +savages spread themselves over the whole country to wash the gold out +of the sand, for the European ships which would come on the coast; that +they do it then, because the rage of the floods always works down a +great deal of gold out of the hills; and, if we took the advantage to +be there before them, we did not know what extraordinary things we might +find. + +This was so forcible, and so well argued, that it appeared in all our +faces we were prevailed upon; so we told him we would all stay: for +though it was true we were all eager to be gone, yet the evident +prospect of so much advantage could not well be resisted; that he was +greatly mistaken, when he suggested that we did not desire to increase +our store of gold, and in that we were resolved to make the utmost use +of the advantage that was in our hands, and would stay as long as any +gold was to be had, if it was another year. + +He could hardly express the joy he was in on this occasion; and the fair +weather coming on, we began, just as he directed, to search about the +rivers for more gold. At first we had but little encouragement, and +began to be doubtful; but it was very plain that the reason was, +the water was not fully fallen, or the rivers reduced to their usual +channel; but in a few days we were fully requited, and found much more +gold than at first, and in bigger lumps; and one of our men washed out +of the sand a piece of gold as big as a small nut, which weighed, by our +estimation--for we had no small weights--almost an ounce and a half. + +This success made us extremely diligent; and in little more than a month +we had altogether gotten near sixty pound weight of gold; but after +this, as he told us, we found abundance of the savages, men, women, and +children, hunting every river and brook, and even the dry land of the +hills for gold; so that we could do nothing like then, compared to what +we had done before. + +But our artificer found a way to make other people find us in gold +without our own labour; for, when these people began to appear, he had +a considerable quantity of his toys, birds, beasts, &c., such as before, +ready for them; and the English gentleman being the interpreter, he +brought the savages to admire them; so our cutler had trade enough, +and, to be sure, sold his goods at a monstrous rate; for he would get an +ounce of gold, sometimes two, for a bit of silver, perhaps of the value +of a groat; nay, if it were iron and if it was of gold, they would +not give the more for it; and it was incredible almost to think what a +quantity of gold he got that way. + +In a word, to bring this happy journey to a conclusion, we increased our +stock of gold here, in three months' stay more, to such a degree that, +bringing it all to a common stock, in order to share it, we divided +almost four pound weight again to every man; and then we set forward +for the Gold Coast, to see what method we could find out for our passage +into Europe. + +There happened several remarkable incidents in this part of our journey, +as to how we were, or were not, received friendly by the several nations +of savages through which we passed; how we delivered one negro king +from captivity, who had been a benefactor to our new guide; and now our +guide, in gratitude, by our assistance, restored him to his kingdom, +which, perhaps, might contain about 300 subjects; how he entertained us; +and how he made his subjects go with our Englishmen, and fetch all our +elephants' teeth which we had been obliged to leave behind us, and to +carry them for us to the river, the name of which I forgot, where +we made rafts, and in eleven days more came down to one of the Dutch +settlements on the Gold Coast, where we arrived in perfect health, and +to our great satisfaction. As for our cargo of teeth, we sold it to the +Dutch factory, and received clothes and other necessaries for ourselves, +and such of our negroes as we thought fit to keep with us; and it is to +be observed, that we had four pound of gunpowder left when we ended our +journey. The negro prince we made perfectly free, clothed him out of our +common stock, and gave him a pound and a half of gold for himself, which +he knew very well how to manage; and here we all parted after the most +friendly manner possible. Our Englishman remained in the Dutch factory +some time, and, as I heard afterwards, died there of grief; for he +having sent a thousand pounds sterling over to England, by the way of +Holland, for his refuge at his return to his friends, the ship was taken +by the French and the effects all lost. + +The rest of my comrades went away, in a small bark, to the two +Portuguese factories, near Gambia, in the latitude of fourteen; and I, +with two negroes which I kept with me, went away to Cape Coast Castle, +where I got passage for England, and arrived there in September; and +thus ended my first harvest of wild oats; the rest were not sowed to so +much advantage. + +I had neither friend, relation, nor acquaintance in England, though it +was my native country; I had consequently no person to trust with what +I had, or to counsel me to secure or save it; but, falling into ill +company, and trusting the keeper of a public-house in Rotherhithe with a +great part of my money, and hastily squandering away the rest, all that +great sum, which I got with so much pains and hazard, was gone in little +more than two years' time; and, as I even rage in my own thoughts to +reflect upon the manner how it was wasted, so I need record no more; the +rest merits to be concealed with blushes, for that it was spent in all +kinds of folly and wickedness. So this scene of my life may be said to +have begun in theft, and ended in luxury; a sad setting-out, and a worse +coming home. + +About the year ---- I began to see the bottom of my stock, and that +it was time to think of further adventures; for my spoilers, as I call +them, began to let me know, that as my money declined, their respect +would ebb with it, and that I had nothing to expect of them further than +as I might command it by the force of my money, which, in short, would +not go an inch the further for all that had been spent in their favour +before. + +This shocked me very much, and I conceived a just abhorrence of their +ingratitude; but it wore off; nor had I met with any regret at the +wasting so glorious a sum of money as I brought to England with me. + +I next shipped myself, in an evil hour to be sure, on a voyage to Cadiz, +in a ship called the ----, and in the course of our voyage, being on the +coast of Spain, was obliged to put into the Groyn, by a strong southwest +wind. + +Here I fell into company with some masters of mischief; and, among them, +one, forwarder than the rest, began an intimate confidence with me, +so that we called one another brothers, and communicated all our +circumstances to one another. His name was Harris. This fellow came to +me one morning, asking me if I would go on shore, and I agreed; so we +got the captain's leave for the boat, and went together. When we were +together, he asked me if I had a mind for an adventure that might make +amends for all past misfortunes. I told him, yes, with all my heart; for +I did not care where I went, having nothing to lose, and no one to leave +behind me. + +He then asked me if I would swear to be secret, and that, if I did not +agree to what he proposed, I would nevertheless never betray him. I +readily bound myself to that, upon the most solemn imprecations and +curses that the devil and both of us could invent. + +He told me, then, there was a brave fellow in the other ship, pointing +to another English ship which rode in the harbour, who, in concert with +some of the men, had resolved to mutiny the next morning, and run away +with the ship; and that, if we could get strength enough among our +ship's company, we might do the same. I liked the proposal very well, +and he got eight of us to join with him, and he told us, that as soon as +his friend had begun the work, and was master of the ship, we should +be ready to do the like. This was his plot; and I, without the least +hesitation, either at the villainy of the fact or the difficulty of +performing it, came immediately into the wicked conspiracy, and so it +went on among us; but we could not bring our part to perfection. + +Accordingly, on the day appointed, his correspondent in the other ship, +whose name was Wilmot, began the work, and, having seized the captain's +mate and other officers, secured the ship, and gave the signal to us. +We were but eleven in our ship, who were in the conspiracy, nor could we +get any more that we could trust; so that, leaving the ship, we all took +the boat, and went off to join the other. + +Having thus left the ship I was in, we were entertained with a great +deal of joy by Captain Wilmot and his new gang; and, being well prepared +for all manner of roguery, bold, desperate (I mean myself), without the +least checks of conscience for what I was entered upon, or for anything +I might do, much less with any apprehension of what might be the +consequence of it; I say, having thus embarked with this crew, which at +last brought me to consort with the most famous pirates of the age, some +of whom have ended their journals at the gallows, I think the giving +an account of some of my other adventures may be an agreeable piece +of story; and this I may venture to say beforehand, upon the word of a +pirate, that I shall not be able to recollect the full, no, not by far, +of the great variety which has formed one of the most reprobate schemes +that ever man was capable to present to the world. + +I that was, as I have hinted before, an original thief, and a pirate, +even by inclination before, was now in my element, and never undertook +anything in my life with more particular satisfaction. + +Captain Wilmot (for so we are now to call him) being thus possessed of a +ship, and in the manner as you have heard, it may be easily concluded +he had nothing to do to stay in the port, or to wait either the attempts +that might be made from the shore, or any change that might happen among +his men. On the contrary, we weighed anchor the same tide, and stood out +to sea, steering away for the Canaries. Our ship had twenty-two guns, +but was able to carry thirty; and besides, as she was fitted out for +a merchant-ship only, she was not furnished either with ammunition or +small-arms sufficient for our design, or for the occasion we might have +in case of a fight. So we put into Cadiz, that is to say, we came to an +anchor in the bay; and the captain, and one whom we called young Captain +Kidd, who was the gunner, [landed,] and some of the men who could best +be trusted, among whom was my comrade Harris, who was made second mate, +and myself, who was made a lieutenant. Some bales of English goods were +proposed to be carried on shore with us for sale, but my comrade, who +was a complete fellow at his business, proposed a better way for it; +and having been in the town before, told us, in short, that he would buy +what powder and bullet, small-arms, or anything else we wanted, on his +own word, to be paid for when they came on board, in such English goods +as we had there. This was much the best way, and accordingly he and the +captain went on shore by themselves, and having made such a bargain +as they found for their turn, came away again in two hours' time, and +bringing only a butt of wine and five casks of brandy with them, we all +went on board again. + +The next morning two _barcos longos_ came off to us, deeply laden, with +five Spaniards on board them, for traffic. Our captain sold them good +pennyworths, and they delivered us sixteen barrels of powder, twelve +small rundlets of fine powder for our small-arms, sixty muskets, and +twelve fuzees for the officers; seventeen ton of cannon-ball, fifteen +barrels of musket-bullets, with some swords and twenty good pair of +pistols. Besides this, they brought thirteen butts of wine (for we, that +were now all become gentlemen, scorned to drink the ship's beer), also +sixteen puncheons of brandy, with twelve barrels of raisins and twenty +chests of lemons; all which we paid for in English goods; and, over and +above, the captain received six hundred pieces of eight in money. They +would have come again, but we would stay no longer. + +From hence we sailed to the Canaries, and from thence onward to the +West Indies, where we committed some depredation upon the Spaniards for +provisions, and took some prizes, but none of any great value, while I +remained with them, which was not long at that time; for, having taken a +Spanish sloop on the coast of Carthagena, my friend made a motion to me, +that we should desire Captain Wilmot to put us into the sloop, with a +proportion of arms and ammunition, and let us try what we could do; she +being much fitter for our business than the great ship, and a better +sailer. This he consented to, and we appointed our rendezvous at Tobago, +making an agreement, that whatever was taken by either of our ships +should be shared among the ship's company of both; all which we very +punctually observed, and joined our ships again, about fifteen months +after, at the island of Tobago, as above. + +We cruised near two years in those seas, chiefly upon the Spaniards; +not that we made any difficulty of taking English ships, or Dutch, +or French, if they came in our way; and particularly, Captain Wilmot +attacked a New England ship bound from the Madeiras to Jamaica, and +another bound from New York to Barbados, with provisions; which last was +a very happy supply to us. But the reason why we meddled as little with +English vessels as we could, was, first, because, if they were ships +of any force, we were sure of more resistance from them; and, secondly, +because we found the English ships had less booty when taken, for the +Spaniards generally had money on board, and that was what we best knew +what to do with. Captain Wilmot was, indeed, more particularly cruel +when he took any English vessel, that they might not too soon have +advice of him in England; and so the men-of-war have orders to look out +for him. But this part I bury in silence for the present. + +We increased our stock in these two years considerably, having taken +60,000 pieces of eight in one vessel, and 100,000 in another; and being +thus first grown rich, we resolved to be strong too, for we had taken a +brigantine built at Virginia, an excellent sea-boat, and a good sailer, +and able to carry twelve guns; and a large Spanish frigate-built ship, +that sailed incomparably well also, and which afterwards, by the help +of good carpenters, we fitted up to carry twenty-eight guns. And now we +wanted more hands, so we put away for the Bay of Campeachy, not doubting +we should ship as many men there as we pleased; and so we did. + +Here we sold the sloop that I was in; and Captain Wilmot keeping his +own ship, I took the command of the Spanish frigate as captain, and my +comrade Harris as eldest lieutenant, and a bold enterprising fellow +he was, as any the world afforded. One culverdine was put into the +brigantine, so that we were now three stout ships, well manned, and +victualled for twelve months; for we had taken two or three sloops from +New England and New York, laden with flour, peas, and barrelled beef and +pork, going for Jamaica and Barbados; and for more beef we went on +shore on the island of Cuba, where we killed as many black cattle as we +pleased, though we had very little salt to cure them. + +Out of all the prizes we took here we took their powder and bullet, +their small-arms and cutlasses; and as for their men, we always took the +surgeon and the carpenter, as persons who were of particular use to +us upon many occasions; nor were they always unwilling to go with us, +though for their own security, in case of accidents, they might easily +pretend they were carried away by force; of which I shall give a +pleasant account in the course of my other expeditions. + +We had one very merry fellow here, a Quaker, whose name was William +Walters, whom we took out of a sloop bound from Pennsylvania to +Barbados. He was a surgeon, and they called him doctor; but he was not +employed in the sloop as a surgeon, but was going to Barbados to get a +berth, as the sailors call it. However, he had all his surgeon's chests +on board, and we made him go with us, and take all his implements with +him. He was a comic fellow indeed, a man of very good solid sense, and +an excellent surgeon; but, what was worth all, very good-humoured and +pleasant in his conversation, and a bold, stout, brave fellow too, as +any we had among us. + +I found William, as I thought, not very averse to go along with us, and +yet resolved to do it so that it might be apparent he was taken away +by force, and to this purpose he comes to me. "Friend," says he, "thou +sayest I must go with thee, and it is not in my power to resist thee if +I would; but I desire thou wilt oblige the master of the sloop which I +am on board to certify under his hand, that I was taken away by force +and against my will." And this he said with so much satisfaction in his +face, that I could not but understand him. "Ay, ay," says I, "whether +it be against your will or no, I'll make him and all the men give you +a certificate of it, or I'll take them all along with us, and keep them +till they do." So I drew up a certificate myself, wherein I wrote that +he was taken away by main force, as a prisoner, by a pirate ship; that +they carried away his chest and instruments first, and then bound his +hands behind him and forced him into their boat; and this was signed by +the master and all his men. + +Accordingly I fell a-swearing at him, and called to my men to tie his +hands behind him, and so we put him into our boat and carried him away. +When I had him on board, I called him to me. "Now, friend," says I, "I +have brought you away by force, it is true, but I am not of the opinion +I have brought you away so much against your will as they imagine. +Come," says I, "you will be a useful man to us, and you shall have very +good usage among us." So I unbound his hands, and first ordered all +things that belonged to him to be restored to him, and our captain gave +him a dram. + +"Thou hast dealt friendly by me," says he, "and I will be plain with +thee, whether I came willingly to thee or not. I shall make myself +as useful to thee as I can, but thou knowest it is not my business to +meddle when thou art to fight." "No, no," says the captain, "but you may +meddle a little when we share the money." "Those things are useful to +furnish a surgeon's chest," says William, and smiled, "but I shall be +moderate." + +In short, William was a most agreeable companion; but he had the better +of us in this part, that if we were taken we were sure to be hanged, and +he was sure to escape; and he knew it well enough. But, in short, he +was a sprightly fellow, and fitter to be captain than any of us. I shall +have often an occasion to speak of him in the rest of the story. + +Our cruising so long in these seas began now to be so well known, that +not in England only, but in France and Spain, accounts had been made +public of our adventures, and many stories told how we murdered the +people in cold blood, tying them back to back, and throwing them into +the sea; one half of which, however, was not true, though more was done +than is fit to speak of here. + +The consequence of this, however, was, that several English men-of-war +were sent to the West Indies, and were particularly instructed to cruise +in the Bay of Mexico, and the Gulf of Florida, and among the Bahama +islands, if possible, to attack us. We were not so ignorant of things as +not to expect this, after so long a stay in that part of the world; but +the first certain account we had of them was at Honduras, when a vessel +coming in from Jamaica told us that two English men-of-war were coming +directly from Jamaica thither in quest of us. We were indeed as it were +embayed, and could not have made the least shift to have got off, if +they had come directly to us; but, as it happened, somebody had informed +them that we were in the Bay of Campeachy, and they went directly +thither, by which we were not only free of them, but were so much to the +windward of them, that they could not make any attempt upon us, though +they had known we were there. + +We took this advantage, and stood away for Carthagena, and from thence +with great difficulty beat it up at a distance from under the shore for +St. Martha, till we came to the Dutch island of Curacoa, and from thence +to the island of Tobago, which, as before, was our rendezvous; which, +being a deserted, uninhabited island, we at the same time made use of +for a retreat. Here the captain of the brigantine died, and Captain +Harris, at that time my lieutenant, took the command of the brigantine. + +Here we came to a resolution to go away to the coast of Brazil, and from +thence to the Cape of Good Hope, and so for the East Indies; but Captain +Harris, as I have said, being now captain of the brigantine, alleged +that his ship was too small for so long a voyage, but that, if Captain +Wilmot would consent, he would take the hazard of another cruise, and +he would follow us in the first ship he could take. So we appointed our +rendezvous to be at Madagascar, which was done by my recommendation of +the place, and the plenty of provisions to be had there. + +Accordingly, he went away from us in an evil hour; for, instead of +taking a ship to follow us, he was taken, as I heard afterwards, by +an English man-of-war, and being laid in irons, died of mere grief +and anger before he came to England. His lieutenant, I have heard, was +afterwards executed in England for a pirate; and this was the end of the +man who first brought me into this unhappy trade. + +We parted from Tobago three days after, bending our course for the coast +of Brazil, but had not been at sea above twenty-four hours, when we were +separated by a terrible storm, which held three days, with very little +abatement or intermission. In this juncture Captain Wilmot happened, +unluckily, to be on board my ship, to his great mortification; for we +not only lost sight of his ship, but never saw her more till we came +to Madagascar, where she was cast away. In short, after having in this +tempest lost our fore-topmast, we were forced to put back to the isle of +Tobago for shelter, and to repair our damage, which brought us all very +near our destruction. + +We were no sooner on shore here, and all very busy looking out for a +piece of timber for a topmast, but we perceived standing in for the +shore an English man-of-war of thirty-six guns. It was a great surprise +to us indeed, because we were disabled so much; but, to our great good +fortune, we lay pretty snug and close among the high rocks, and the +man-of-war did not see us, but stood off again upon his cruise. So +we only observed which way she went, and at night, leaving our work, +resolved to stand off to sea, steering the contrary way from that which +we observed she went; and this, we found, had the desired success, for +we saw him no more. We had gotten an old mizzen-topmast on board, which +made us a jury fore-topmast for the present; and so we stood away for +the isle of Trinidad, where, though there were Spaniards on shore, yet +we landed some men with our boat, and cut a very good piece of fir to +make us a new topmast, which we got fitted up effectually; and also we +got some cattle here to eke out our provisions; and calling a council of +war among ourselves, we resolved to quit those seas for the present, and +steer away for the coast of Brazil. + +The first thing we attempted here was only getting fresh water, but we +learnt that there lay the Portuguese fleet at the bay of All Saints, +bound for Lisbon, ready to sail, and only waited for a fair wind. This +made us lie by, wishing to see them put to sea, and, accordingly as they +were with or without convoy, to attack or avoid them. + +It sprung up a fresh gale in the evening at S.W. by W., which, being +fair for the Portugal fleet, and the weather pleasant and agreeable, +we heard the signal given to unmoor, and running in under the island of +Si---, we hauled our mainsail and foresail up in the brails, lowered the +topsails upon the cap, and clewed them up, that we might lie as snug as +we could, expecting their coming out, and the next morning saw the whole +fleet come out accordingly, but not at all to our satisfaction, for they +consisted of twenty-six sail, and most of them ships of force, as well +as burthen, both merchantmen and men-of-war; so, seeing there was no +meddling, we lay still where we were also, till the fleet was out of +sight, and then stood off and on, in hopes of meeting with further +purchase. + +It was not long before we saw a sail, and immediately gave her chase; +but she proved an excellent sailer, and, standing out to sea, we saw +plainly she trusted to her heels--that is to say, to her sails. However, +as we were a clean ship, we gained upon her, though slowly, and had we +had a day before us, we should certainly have come up with her; but it +grew dark apace, and in that case we knew we should lose sight of her. + +Our merry Quaker, perceiving us to crowd still after her in the dark, +wherein we could not see which way she went, came very dryly to me. +"Friend Singleton," says he, "dost thee know what we are a-doing?" Says +I, "Yes; why, we are chasing yon ship, are we not?" "And how dost thou +know that?" says he, very gravely still. "Nay, that's true," says I +again; "we cannot be sure." "Yes, friend," says he, "I think we may be +sure that we are running away from her, not chasing her. I am afraid," +adds he, "thou art turned Quaker, and hast resolved not to use the hand +of power, or art a coward, and art flying from thy enemy." + +"What do you mean?" says I (I think I swore at him). "What do you sneer +at now? You have always one dry rub or another to give us." + +"Nay," says he, "it is plain enough the ship stood off to sea due east, +on purpose to lose us, and thou mayest be sure her business does not +lie that way; for what should she do at the coast of Africa in this +latitude, which should be as far south as Congo or Angola? But as soon +as it is dark, that we would lose sight of her, she will tack and stand +away west again for the Brazil coast and for the bay, where thou knowest +she was going before; and are we not, then, running away from her? I +am greatly in hopes, friend," says the dry, gibing creature, "thou wilt +turn Quaker, for I see thou art not for fighting." + +"Very well, William," says I; "then I shall make an excellent pirate." +However, William was in the right, and I apprehended what he meant +immediately; and Captain Wilmot, who lay very sick in his cabin, +overhearing us, understood him as well as I, and called out to me that +William was right, and it was our best way to change our course, and +stand away for the bay, where it was ten to one but we should snap her +in the morning. + +Accordingly we went about-ship, got our larboard tacks on board, set the +top-gallant sails, and crowded for the bay of All Saints, where we came +to an anchor early in the morning, just out of gunshot of the forts; +we furled our sails with rope-yarns, that we might haul home the sheets +without going up to loose them, and, lowering our main and fore-yards, +looked just as if we had lain there a good while. + +In two hours afterwards we saw our game standing in for the bay with all +the sail she could make, and she came innocently into our very mouths, +for we lay still till we saw her almost within gunshot, when, our +foremost gears being stretched fore and aft, we first ran up our yards, +and then hauled home the topsail sheets, the rope-yarns that furled them +giving way of themselves; the sails were set in a few minutes; at the +same time slipping our cable, we came upon her before she could get +under way upon the other tack. They were so surprised that they made +little or no resistance, but struck after the first broadside. + +We were considering what to do with her, when William came to me. "Hark +thee, friend," says he, "thou hast made a fine piece of work of it +now, hast thou not, to borrow thy neighbour's ship here just at thy +neighbour's door, and never ask him leave? Now, dost thou not think +there are some men-of-war in the port? Thou hast given them the alarm +sufficiently; thou wilt have them upon thy back before night, depend +upon it, to ask thee wherefore thou didst so." + +"Truly, William," said I, "for aught I know, that may be true; what, +then, shall we do next?" Says he, "Thou hast but two things to do: +either to go in and take all the rest, or else get thee gone before they +come out and take thee; for I see they are hoisting a topmast to yon +great ship, in order to put to sea immediately, and they won't be long +before they come to talk with thee, and what wilt thou say to them when +they ask thee why thou borrowedst their ship without leave?" + +As William said, so it was. We could see by our glasses they were all +in a hurry, manning and fitting some sloops they had there, and a large +man-of-war, and it was plain they would soon be with us. But we were +not at a loss what to do; we found the ship we had taken was laden with +nothing considerable for our purpose, except some cocoa, some sugar, and +twenty barrels of flour; the rest of her cargo was hides; so we took +out all we thought fit for our turn, and, among the rest, all her +ammunition, great shot, and small-arms, and turned her off. We also took +a cable and three anchors she had, which were for our purpose, and some +of her sails. She had enough left just to carry her into port, and that +was all. + +Having done this, we stood on upon the Brazil coast, southward, till we +came to the mouth of the river Janeiro. But as we had two days the wind +blowing hard at S.E. and S.S.E., we were obliged to come to an anchor +under a little island, and wait for a wind. In this time the Portuguese +had, it seems, given notice over land to the governor there, that a +pirate was upon the coast; so that, when we came in view of the port, we +saw two men-of-war riding just without the bar, whereof one, we found, +was getting under sail with all possible speed, having slipped her +cable on purpose to speak with us; the other was not so forward, but was +preparing to follow. In less than an hour they stood both fair after us, +with all the sail they could make. + +Had not the night come on, William's words had been made good; they +would certainly have asked us the question what we did there, for we +found the foremost ship gained upon us, especially upon one tack, for we +plied away from them to windward; but in the dark losing sight of them, +we resolved to change our course and stand away directly for sea, not +doubting that we should lose them in the night. + +Whether the Portuguese commander guessed we would do so or no, I know +not; but in the morning, when the daylight appeared, instead of having +lost him, we found him in chase of us about a league astern; only, to +our great good fortune, we could see but one of the two. However, this +one was a great ship, carried six-and-forty guns, and an admirable +sailer, as appeared by her outsailing us; for our ship was an excellent +sailer too, as I have said before. + +When I found this, I easily saw there was no remedy, but we must engage; +and as we knew we could expect no quarter from those scoundrels the +Portuguese, a nation I had an original aversion to, I let Captain Wilmot +know how it was. The captain, sick as he was, jumped up in the cabin, +and would be led out upon the deck (for he was very weak) to see how it +was. "Well," says he, "we'll fight them!" + +Our men were all in good heart before, but to see the captain so brisk, +who had lain ill of a calenture ten or eleven days, gave them double +courage, and they went all hands to work to make a clear ship and +be ready. William, the Quaker, comes to me with a kind of a smile. +"Friend," says he, "what does yon ship follow us for?" "Why," says I, +"to fight us, you may be sure." "Well," says he, "and will he come up +with us, dost thou think?" "Yes," said I, "you see she will." "Why, +then, friend," says the dry wretch, "why dost thou run from her still, +when thou seest she will overtake thee? Will it be better for us to be +overtaken farther off than here?" "Much as one for that," says I; "why, +what would you have us do?" "Do!" says he; "let us not give the poor man +more trouble than needs must; let us stay for him and hear what he has +to say to us." "He will talk to us in powder and ball," said I. "Very +well, then," says he, "if that be his country language, we must talk to +him in the same, must we not? or else how shall he understand us?" "Very +well, William," says I, "we understand you." And the captain, as ill as +he was, called to me, "William's right again," says he; "as good here +as a league farther." So he gives a word of command, "Haul up the +main-sail; we'll shorten sail for him." + +Accordingly we shortened sail, and as we expected her upon our lee-side, +we being then upon our starboard tack, brought eighteen of our guns to +the larboard side, resolving to give him a broadside that should warm +him. It was about half-an-hour before he came up with us, all which +time we luffed up, that we might keep the wind of him, by which he was +obliged to run up under our lee, as we designed him; when we got him +upon our quarter, we edged down, and received the fire of five or six +of his guns. By this time you may be sure all our hands were at their +quarters, so we clapped our helm hard a-weather, let go the lee-braces +of the maintop sail, and laid it a-back, and so our ship fell athwart +the Portuguese ship's hawse; then we immediately poured in our +broadside, raking them fore and aft, and killed them a great many men. + +The Portuguese, we could see, were in the utmost confusion; and not +being aware of our design, their ship having fresh way, ran their +bowsprit into the fore part of our main shrouds, as that they could +not easily get clear of us, and so we lay locked after that manner. The +enemy could not bring above five or six guns, besides their small-arms, +to bear upon us, while we played our whole broadside upon him. + +In the middle of the heat of this fight, as I was very busy upon the +quarter-deck, the captain calls to me, for he never stirred from us, +"What the devil is friend William a-doing yonder?" says the captain; +"has he any business upon, deck?" I stepped forward, and there was +friend William, with two or three stout fellows, lashing the ship's +bowsprit fast to our mainmast, for fear they should get away from us; +and every now and then he pulled a bottle out of his pocket, and gave +the men a dram to encourage them. The shot flew about his ears as thick +as may be supposed in such an action, where the Portuguese, to give them +their due, fought very briskly, believing at first they were sure of +their game, and trusting to their superiority; but there was William, as +composed, and in as perfect tranquillity as to danger, as if he had been +over a bowl of punch, only very busy securing the matter, that a ship of +forty-six guns should not run away from a ship of eight-and-twenty. + +This work was too hot to hold long; our men behaved bravely: our gunner, +a gallant man, shouted below, pouring in his shot at such a rate, that +the Portuguese began to slacken their fire; we had dismounted several of +their guns by firing in at their forecastle, and raking them, as I said, +fore and aft. Presently comes William up to me. "Friend," says he, very +calmly, "what dost thou mean? Why dost thou not visit thy neighbour in +the ship, the door being open for thee?" I understood him immediately, +for our guns had so torn their hull, that we had beat two port-holes +into one, and the bulk-head of their steerage was split to pieces, so +that they could not retire to their close quarters; so I gave the word +immediately to board them. Our second lieutenant, with about thirty men, +entered in an instant over the forecastle, followed by some more with +the boatswain, and cutting in pieces about twenty-five men that they +found upon the deck, and then throwing some grenadoes into the steerage, +they entered there also; upon which the Portuguese cried quarter +presently, and we mastered the ship, contrary indeed to our own +expectation; for we would have compounded with them if they would have +sheered off: but laying them athwart the hawse at first, and following +our fire furiously, without giving them any time to get clear of us and +work their ship; by this means, though they had six-and-forty guns, they +were not able to fight above five or six, as I said above, for we beat +them immediately from their guns in the forecastle, and killed them +abundance of men between decks, so that when we entered they had hardly +found men enough to fight us hand to hand upon their deck. + +The surprise of joy to hear the Portuguese cry quarter, and see their +ancient struck, was so great to our captain, who, as I have said, was +reduced very weak with a high fever, that it gave him new life. Nature +conquered the distemper, and the fever abated that very night; so that +in two or three days he was sensibly better, his strength began to come, +and he was able to give his orders effectually in everything that was +material, and in about ten days was entirely well and about the ship. + +In the meantime I took possession of the Portuguese man-of-war; and +Captain Wilmot made me, or rather I made myself, captain of her for +the present. About thirty of their seamen took service with us, some of +which were French, some Genoese; and we set the rest on shore the next +day on a little island on the coast of Brazil, except some wounded men, +who were not in a condition to be removed, and whom we were bound to +keep on board; but we had an occasion afterwards to dispose of them at +the Cape, where, at their own request, we set them on shore. + +Captain Wilmot, as soon as the ship was taken, and the prisoners stowed, +was for standing in for the river Janeiro again, not doubting but we +should meet with the other man-of-war, who, not having been able to +find us, and having lost the company of her comrade, would certainly be +returned, and might be surprised by the ship we had taken, if we carried +Portuguese colours; and our men were all for it. + +But our friend William gave us better counsel, for he came to me, +"Friend," says he, "I understand the captain is for sailing back to the +Rio Janeiro, in hopes to meet with the other ship that was in chase of +thee yesterday. Is it true, dost thou intend it?" "Why, yes," says I, +"William, pray why not?" "Nay," says he, "thou mayest do so if thou +wilt." "Well, I know that too, William," said I, "but the captain is a +man will be ruled by reason; what have you to say to it?" "Why," says +William gravely, "I only ask what is thy business, and the business +of all the people thou hast with thee? Is it not to get money?" "Yes, +William, it is so, in our honest way." "And wouldest thou," says he, +"rather have money without fighting, or fighting without money? I mean +which wouldest thou have by choice, suppose it to be left to thee?" "O +William," says I, "the first of the two, to be sure." "Why, then," says +he, "what great gain hast thou made of the prize thou hast taken now, +though it has cost the lives of thirteen of thy men, besides some hurt? +It is true thou hast got the ship and some prisoners; but thou wouldest +have had twice the booty in a merchant-ship, with not one quarter of the +fighting; and how dost thou know either what force or what number of +men may be in the other ship, and what loss thou mayest suffer, and what +gain it shall be to thee if thou take her? I think, indeed, thou mayest +much better let her alone." + +"Why, William, it is true," said I, "and I'll go tell the captain what +your opinion is, and bring you word what he says." Accordingly in I went +to the captain and told him William's reasons; and the captain was of +his mind, that our business was indeed fighting when we could not help +it, but that our main affair was money, and that with as few blows as we +could. So that adventure was laid aside, and we stood along shore again +south for the river De la Plata, expecting some purchase thereabouts; +especially we had our eyes upon some of the Spanish ships from Buenos +Ayres, which are generally very rich in silver, and one such prize would +have done our business. We plied about here, in the latitude of ---- +south, for near a month, and nothing offered; and here we began to +consult what we should do next, for we had come to no resolution yet. +Indeed, my design was always for the Cape de Bona Speranza, and so to +the East Indies. I had heard some flaming stories of Captain Avery, +and the fine things he had done in the Indies, which were doubled and +doubled, even ten thousand fold; and from taking a great prize in +the Bay of Bengal, where he took a lady, said to be the Great Mogul's +daughter, with a great quantity of jewels about her, we had a story told +us, that he took a Mogul ship, so the foolish sailors called it, laden +with diamonds. + +I would fain have had friend William's advice whither we should go, but +he always put it off with some quaking quibble or other. In short, +he did not care for directing us neither; whether he made a piece of +conscience of it, or whether he did not care to venture having it come +against him afterwards or no, this I know not; but we concluded at last +without him. + +We were, however, pretty long in resolving, and hankered about the Rio +de la Plata a long time. At last we spied a sail to windward, and it was +such a sail as I believe had not been seen in that part of the world a +great while. It wanted not that we should give it chase, for it stood +directly towards us, as well as they that steered could make it; and +even that was more accident of weather than anything else, for if the +wind had chopped about anywhere they must have gone with it. I leave any +man that is a sailor, or understands anything of a ship, to judge what +a figure this ship made when we first saw her, and what we could imagine +was the matter with her. Her maintop-mast was come by the board +about six foot above the cap, and fell forward, the head of the +topgallant-mast hanging in the fore-shrouds by the stay; at the same +time the parrel of the mizzen-topsail-yard by some accident giving way, +the mizzen-topsail-braces (the standing part of which being fast to the +main-topsail shrouds) brought the mizzen-topsail, yard and all, down +with it, which spread over part of the quarter-deck like an awning; the +fore-topsail was hoisted up two-thirds of the mast, but the sheets were +flown; the fore-yard was lowered down upon the forecastle, the sail +loose, and part of it hanging overboard. In this manner she came down +upon us with the wind quartering. In a word, the figure the whole ship +made was the most confounding to men that understood the sea that ever +was seen. She had no boat, neither had she any colours out. + +When we came near to her, we fired a gun to bring her to. She took no +notice of it, nor of us, but came on just as she did before. We fired +again, but it was all one. At length we came within pistol-shot of one +another, but nobody answered nor appeared; so we began to think that +it was a ship gone ashore somewhere in distress, and the men having +forsaken her, the high tide had floated her off to sea. Coming nearer +to her, we ran up alongside of her so close that we could hear a noise +within her, and see the motion of several people through her ports. + +Upon this we manned out two boats full of men, and very well armed, and +ordered them to board her at the same minute, as near as they could, and +to enter one at her fore-chains on the one side, and the other amidships +on the other side. As soon as they came to the ship's side, a surprising +multitude of black sailors, such as they were, appeared upon deck, and, +in short, terrified our men so much that the boat which was to enter her +men in the waist stood off again, and durst not board her; and the men +that entered out of the other boat, finding the first boat, as they +thought, beaten off, and seeing the ship full of men, jumped all back +again into their boat, and put off, not knowing what the matter was. +Upon this we prepared to pour in a broadside upon her; but our friend +William set us to rights again here; for it seems he guessed how it was +sooner than we did, and coming up to me (for it was our ship that came +up with her), "Friend," says he, "I am of opinion that thou art wrong +in this matter, and thy men have been wrong also in their conduct. I'll +tell thee how thou shalt take this ship, without making use of those +things called guns." "How can that be, William?" said I. "Why," said he, +"thou mayest take her with thy helm; thou seest they keep no steerage, +and thou seest the condition they are in; board her with thy ship upon +her lee quarter, and so enter her from the ship. I am persuaded thou +wilt take her without fighting, for there is some mischief has befallen +the ship, which we know nothing of." + +In a word, it being a smooth sea, and little wind, I took his advice, +and laid her aboard. Immediately our men entered the ship, where we +found a large ship, with upwards of 600 negroes, men and women, boys and +girls, and not one Christian or white man on board. + +I was struck with horror at the sight; for immediately I concluded, as +was partly the case, that these black devils had got loose, had murdered +all the white men, and thrown them into the sea; and I had no sooner +told my mind to the men, but the thought so enraged them that I had much +ado to keep my men from cutting them all in pieces. But William, with +many persuasions, prevailed upon them, by telling them that it was +nothing but what, if they were in the negroes' condition, they would +do if they could; and that the negroes had really the highest injustice +done them, to be sold for slaves without their consent; and that the +law of nature dictated it to them; that they ought not to kill them, and +that it would be wilful murder to do it. + +This prevailed with them, and cooled their first heat; so they only +knocked down twenty or thirty of them, and the rest ran all down between +decks to their first places, believing, as we fancied, that we were +their first masters come again. + +It was a most unaccountable difficulty we had next; for we could not +make them understand one word we said, nor could we understand one word +ourselves that they said. We endeavoured by signs to ask them whence +they came; but they could make nothing of it. We pointed to the great +cabin, to the round-house, to the cook-room, then to our faces, to ask +if they had no white men on board, and where they were gone; but they +could not understand what we meant. On the other hand, they pointed to +our boat and to their ship, asking questions as well as they could, and +said a thousand things, and expressed themselves with great earnestness; +but we could not understand a word of it all, or know what they meant by +any of their signs. + +We knew very well they must have been taken on board the ship as slaves, +and that it must be by some European people too. We could easily see +that the ship was a Dutch-built ship, but very much altered, having been +built upon, and, as we supposed, in France; for we found two or three +French books on board, and afterwards we found clothes, linen, lace, +some old shoes, and several other things. We found among the provisions +some barrels of Irish beef, some Newfoundland fish, and several other +evidences that there had been Christians on board, but saw no remains of +them. We found not a sword, gun, pistol, or weapon of any kind, except +some cutlasses; and the negroes had hid them below where they lay. We +asked them what was become of all the small-arms, pointing to our own +and to the places where those belonging to the ship had hung. One of +the negroes understood me presently, and beckoned to me to come upon the +deck, where, taking my fuzee, which I never let go out of my hand for +some time after we had mastered the ship--I say, offering to take hold +of it, he made the proper motion of throwing it into the sea; by which +I understood, as I did afterwards, that they had thrown all the +small-arms, powder, shot, swords, &c., into the sea, believing, as I +supposed, those things would kill them, though the men were gone. + +After we understood this we made no question but that the ship's crew, +having been surprised by these desperate rogues, had gone the same way, +and had been thrown overboard also. We looked all over the ship to +see if we could find any blood, and we thought we did perceive some in +several places; but the heat of the sun, melting the pitch and tar upon +the decks, made it impossible for us to discern it exactly, except in +the round-house, where we plainly saw that there had been much blood. We +found the scuttle open, by which we supposed that the captain and those +that were with him had made their retreat into the great cabin, or those +in the cabin had made their escape up into the round-house. + +But that which confirmed us most of all in what had happened was that, +upon further inquiry, we found that there were seven or eight of the +negroes very much wounded, two or three of them with shot, whereof one +had his leg broken and lay in a miserable condition, the flesh being +mortified, and, as our friend William said, in two days more he would +have died. William was a most dexterous surgeon, and he showed it in +this cure; for though all the surgeons we had on board both our ships +(and we had no less than five that called themselves bred surgeons, +besides two or three who were pretenders or assistants)--though all +these gave their opinions that the negro's leg must be cut off, and +that his life could not be saved without it; that the mortification had +touched the marrow in the bone, that the tendons were mortified, and +that he could never have the use of his leg if it should be cured, +William said nothing in general, but that his opinion was otherwise, and +that he desired the wound might be searched, and that he would then +tell them further. Accordingly he went to work with the leg; and, as +he desired that he might have some of the surgeons to assist him, we +appointed him two of the ablest of them to help, and all of them to look +on, if they thought fit. + +William went to work his own way, and some of them pretended to find +fault at first. However, he proceeded and searched every part of the leg +where he suspected the mortification had touched it; in a word, he cut +off a great deal of mortified flesh, in all which the poor fellow felt +no pain. William proceeded till he brought the vessels which he had cut +to bleed, and the man to cry out; then he reduced the splinters of the +bone, and, calling for help, set it, as we call it, and bound it up, and +laid the man to rest, who found himself much easier than before. + +At the first opening the surgeons began to triumph; the mortification +seemed to spread, and a long red streak of blood appeared from the wound +upwards to the middle of the man's thigh, and the surgeons told me the +man would die in a few hours. I went to look at it, and found William +himself under some surprise; but when I asked him how long he thought +the poor fellow could live, he looked gravely at me, and said, "As long +as thou canst; I am not at all apprehensive of his life," said he, "but +I would cure him, if I could, without making a cripple of him." I found +he was not just then upon the operation as to his leg, but was mixing +up something to give the poor creature, to repel, as I thought, the +spreading contagion, and to abate or prevent any feverish temper that +might happen in the blood; after which he went to work again, and opened +the leg in two places above the wound, cutting out a great deal of +mortified flesh, which it seemed was occasioned by the bandage, which +had pressed the parts too much; and withal, the blood being at the time +in a more than common disposition to mortify, might assist to spread it. + +Well, our friend William conquered all this, cleared the spreading +mortification, and the red streak went off again, the flesh began to +heal, and matter to run; and in a few days the man's spirits began to +recover, his pulse beat regular, he had no fever, and gathered strength +daily; and, in a word, he was a perfect sound man in about ten weeks, +and we kept him amongst us, and made him an able seaman. But to return +to the ship: we never could come at a certain information about it, till +some of the negroes which we kept on board, and whom we taught to speak +English, gave the account of it afterwards, and this maimed man in +particular. + +We inquired, by all the signs and motions we could imagine, what was +become of the people, and yet we could get nothing from them. Our +lieutenant was for torturing some of them to make them confess, +but William opposed that vehemently; and when he heard it was under +consideration he came to me. "Friend," says he, "I make a request to +thee not to put any of these poor wretches to torment." "Why, William," +said I, "why not? You see they will not give any account of what is +become of the white men." "Nay," says William, "do not say so; I suppose +they have given thee a full account of every particular of it." "How +so?" says I; "pray what are we the wiser for all their jabbering?" +"Nay," says William, "that may be thy fault, for aught I know; thou wilt +not punish the poor men because they cannot speak English; and perhaps +they never heard a word of English before. Now, I may very well suppose +that they have given thee a large account of everything; for thou seest +with what earnestness, and how long, some of them have talked to thee; +and if thou canst not understand their language, nor they thine, how can +they help that? At the best, thou dost but suppose that they have not +told thee the whole truth of the story; and, on the contrary, I suppose +they have; and how wilt thou decide the question, whether thou art right +or whether I am right? Besides, what can they say to thee when thou +askest them a question upon the torture, and at the same time they do +not understand the question, and thou dost not know whether they say ay +or no?" + +It is no compliment to my moderation to say I was convinced by these +reasons; and yet we had all much ado to keep our second lieutenant from +murdering some of them, to make them tell. What if they had told? He did +not understand one word of it; but he would not be persuaded but that +the negroes must needs understand him when he asked them whether the +ship had any boat or no, like ours, and what was become of it. + +But there was no remedy but to wait till we made these people understand +English, and to adjourn the story till that time. The case was thus: +where they were taken on board the ship, that we could never understand, +because they never knew the English names which we give to those coasts, +or what nation they were who belonged to the ship, because they knew not +one tongue from another; but thus far the negro I examined, who was the +same whose leg William had cured, told us, that they did not speak the +same language as we spoke, nor the same our Portuguese spoke; so that in +all probability they must be French or Dutch. + +Then he told us that the white men used them barbarously; that they beat +them unmercifully; that one of the negro men had a wife and two negro +children, one a daughter, about sixteen years old; that a white man +abused the negro man's wife, and afterwards his daughter, which, as he +said, made all the negro men mad; and that the woman's husband was in a +great rage; at which the white man was so provoked that he threatened +to kill him; but, in the night, the negro man, being loose, got a great +club, by which he made us understand he meant a handspike, and that when +the same Frenchman (if it was a Frenchman) came among them again, he +began again to abuse the negro man's wife, at which the negro, taking up +the handspike, knocked his brains out at one blow; and then taking the +key from him with which he usually unlocked the handcuffs which the +negroes were fettered with, he set about a hundred of them at liberty, +who, getting up upon the deck by the same scuttle that the white men +came down, and taking the man's cutlass who was killed, and laying hold +of what came next them, they fell upon the men that were upon the +deck, and killed them all, and afterwards those they found upon the +forecastle; that the captain and his other men, who were in the cabin +and the round-house, defended themselves with great courage, and shot +out at the loopholes at them, by which he and several other men were +wounded, and some killed; but that they broke into the round-house after +a long dispute, where they killed two of the white men, but owned that +the two white men killed eleven of their men before they could break +in; and then the rest, having got down the scuttle into the great cabin, +wounded three more of them. + +That, after this, the gunner of the ship having secured himself in the +gun-room, one of his men hauled up the long-boat close under the stern, +and putting into her all the arms and ammunition they could come at, got +all into the boat, and afterwards took in the captain, and those that +were with him, out of the great cabin. When they were all thus embarked, +they resolved to lay the ship aboard again, and try to recover it. That +they boarded the ship in a desperate manner, and killed at first all +that stood in their way; but the negroes being by this time all loose, +and having gotten some arms, though they understood nothing of powder +and bullet, or guns, yet the men could never master them. However, they +lay under the ship's bow, and got out all the men they had left in the +cook-room, who had maintained themselves there, notwithstanding all the +negroes could do, and with their small-arms killed between thirty and +forty of the negroes, but were at last forced to leave them. + +They could give me no account whereabouts this was, whether near the +coast of Africa, or far off, or how long it was before the ship fell +into our hands; only, in general, it was a great while ago, as they +called it; and, by all we could learn, it was within two or three days +after they had set sail from the coast. They told us that they had +killed about thirty of the white men, having knocked them on the head +with crows and handspikes, and such things as they could get; and one +strong negro killed three of them with an iron crow, after he was shot +twice through the body; and that he was afterwards shot through the +head by the captain himself at the door of the round-house, which he had +split open with the crow; and this we supposed was the occasion of the +great quantity of blood which we saw at the round-house door. + +The same negro told us that they threw all the powder and shot they +could find into the sea, and they would have thrown the great guns into +the sea if they could have lifted them. Being asked how they came +to have their sails in such a condition, his answer was, "They no +understand; they no know what the sails do;" that was, they did not so +much as know that it was the sails that made the ship go, or understand +what they meant, or what to do with them. When we asked him whither they +were going, he said they did not know, but believed they should go home +to their own country again. I asked him, in particular, what he thought +we were when we first came up with them? He said they were terribly +frighted, believing we were the same white men that had gone away in +their boats, and were come again in a great ship, with the two boats +with them, and expected they would kill them all. + +This was the account we got out of them, after we had taught them +to speak English, and to understand the names and use of the things +belonging to the ship which they had occasion to speak of; and we +observed that the fellows were too innocent to dissemble in their +relation, and that they all agreed in the particulars, and were always +in the same story, which confirmed very much the truth of what they +said. + +Having taken this ship, our next difficulty was, what to do with the +negroes. The Portuguese in the Brazils would have bought them all of us, +and been glad of the purchase, if we had not showed ourselves enemies +there, and been known for pirates; but, as it was, we durst not go +ashore anywhere thereabouts, or treat with any of the planters, because +we should raise the whole country upon us; and, if there were any such +things as men-of-war in any of their ports, we should be as sure to be +attacked by them, and by all the force they had by land or sea. + +Nor could we think of any better success if we went northward to our own +plantations. One while we determined to carry them all away to Buenos +Ayres, and sell them there to the Spaniards; but they were really too +many for them to make use of; and to carry them round to the South Seas, +which was the only remedy that was left, was so far that we should be no +way able to subsist them for so long a voyage. + +At last, our old, never-failing friend, William, helped us out again, as +he had often done at a dead lift. His proposal was this, that he should +go as master of the ship, and about twenty men, such as we could best +trust, and attempt to trade privately, upon the coast of Brazil, with +the planters, not at the principal ports, because that would not be +admitted. + +We all agreed to this, and appointed to go away ourselves towards the +Rio de la Plata, where we had thought of going before, and to wait for +him, not there, but at Port St Pedro, as the Spaniards call it, lying +at the mouth of the river which they call Rio Grande, and where the +Spaniards had a small fort and a few people, but we believe there was +nobody in it. + +Here we took up our station, cruising off and on, to see if we could +meet any ships going to or coming from the Buenos Ayres or the Rio de +la Plata; but we met with nothing worth notice. However, we employed +ourselves in things necessary for our going off to sea; for we filled +all our water-casks, and got some fish for our present use, to spare as +much as possible our ship's stores. + +William, in the meantime, went away to the north, and made the land +about the Cape de St Thomas; and betwixt that and the isles De Tuberon +he found means to trade with the planters for all his negroes, as well +the women as the men, and at a very good price too; for William, who +spoke Portuguese pretty well, told them a fair story enough, that the +ship was in scarcity of provisions, that they were driven a great way +out of their way, and indeed, as we say, out of their knowledge, and +that they must go up to the northward as far as Jamaica, or sell there +upon the coast. This was a very plausible tale, and was easily believed; +and, if you observe the manner of the negroes' sailing, and what +happened in their voyage, was every word of it true. + +By this method, and being true to one another, William passed for what +he was--I mean, for a very honest fellow; and by the assistance of one +planter, who sent to some of his neighbour planters, and managed the +trade among themselves, he got a quick market; for in less than five +weeks William sold all his negroes, and at last sold the ship itself, +and shipped himself and his twenty men, with two negro boys whom he had +left, in a sloop, one of those which the planters used to send on board +for the negroes. With this sloop Captain William, as we then called him, +came away, and found us at Port St Pedro, in the latitude of 32 degrees +30 minutes south. + +Nothing was more surprising to us than to see a sloop come along the +coast, carrying Portuguese colours, and come in directly to us, after we +were assured he had discovered both our ships. We fired a gun, upon her +nearer approach, to bring her to an anchor, but immediately she fired +five guns by way of salute, and spread her English ancient. Then we +began to guess it was friend William, but wondered what was the meaning +of his being in a sloop, whereas we sent him away in a ship of near 300 +tons; but he soon let us into the whole history of his management, with +which we had a great deal of reason to be very well satisfied. As soon +as he had brought the sloop to an anchor, he came aboard of my ship, +and there he gave us an account how he began to trade by the help of a +Portuguese planter, who lived near the seaside; how he went on shore and +went up to the first house he could see, and asked the man of the house +to sell him some hogs, pretending at first he only stood in upon the +coast to take in fresh water and buy some provisions; and the man not +only sold him seven fat hogs, but invited him in, and gave him, and five +men he had with him, a very good dinner; and he invited the planter on +board his ship, and, in return for his kindness, gave him a negro girl +for his wife. + +This so obliged the planter that the next morning he sent him on board, +in a great luggage-boat, a cow and two sheep, with a chest of sweetmeats +and some sugar, and a great bag of tobacco, and invited Captain William +on shore again; that, after this, they grew from one kindness to +another; that they began to talk about trading for some negroes; and +William, pretending it was to do him service, consented to sell him +thirty negroes for his private use in his plantation, for which he gave +William ready money in gold, at the rate of five-and-thirty moidores per +head; but the planter was obliged to use great caution in the bringing +them on shore; for which purpose he made William weigh and stand out +to sea, and put in again, about fifty miles farther north, where at a +little creek he took the negroes on shore at another plantation, being a +friend's of his, whom, it seems, he could trust. + +This remove brought William into a further intimacy, not only with the +first planter, but also with his friends, who desired to have some of +the negroes also; so that, from one to another, they bought so many, +till one overgrown planter took 100 negroes, which was all William +had left, and sharing them with another planter, that other planter +chaffered with William for ship and all, giving him in exchange a very +clean, large, well-built sloop of near sixty tons, very well furnished, +carrying six guns; but we made her afterwards carry twelve guns. William +had 300 moidores of gold, besides the sloop, in payment for the ship; +and with this money he stored the sloop as full as she could hold with +provisions, especially bread, some pork, and about sixty hogs alive; +among the rest, William got eighty barrels of good gunpowder, which +was very much for our purpose; and all the provisions which were in the +French ship he took out also. + +This was a very agreeable account to us, especially when we saw that +William had received in gold coined, or by weight, and some Spanish +silver, 60,000 pieces of eight, besides a new sloop, and a vast quantity +of provisions. + +We were very glad of the sloop in particular, and began to consult what +we should do, whether we had not best turn off our great Portuguese +ship, and stick to our first ship and the sloop, seeing we had scarce +men enough for all three, and that the biggest ship was thought too +big for our business. However, another dispute, which was now decided, +brought the first to a conclusion. The first dispute was, whither we +should go. My comrade, as I called him now, that is to say, he that was +my captain before we took this Portuguese man-of-war, was for going to +the South Seas, and coasting up the west side of America, where we could +not fail of making several good prizes upon the Spaniards; and that +then, if occasion required it, we might come home by the South Seas to +the East Indies, and so go round the globe, as others had done before +us. + +But my head lay another way. I had been in the East Indies, and had +entertained a notion ever since that, if we went thither, we could not +fail of making good work of it, and that we might have a safe retreat, +and good beef to victual our ship, among my old friends the natives of +Zanzibar, on the coast of Mozambique, or the island of St Lawrence. I +say, my thoughts lay this way; and I read so many lectures to them all +of the advantages they would certainly make of their strength by the +prizes they would take in the Gulf of Mocha, or the Red Sea, and on the +coast of Malabar, or the Bay of Bengal, that I amazed them. + +With these arguments I prevailed on them, and we all resolved to +steer away S.E. for the Cape of Good Hope; and, in consequence of this +resolution, we concluded to keep the sloop, and sail with all three, not +doubting, as I assured them, but we should find men there to make up +the number wanting, and if not, we might cast any of them off when we +pleased. + +We could do no less than make our friend William captain of the sloop +which, with such good management, he had brought us. He told us, though +with much good manners, he would not command her as a frigate; but, if +we would give her to him for his share of the Guinea ship, which we +came very honestly by, he would keep us company as a victualler, if +we commanded him, as long as he was under the same force that took him +away. + +We understood him, so gave him the sloop, but upon condition that +he should not go from us, and should be entirely under our command. +However, William was not so easy as before; and, indeed, as we +afterwards wanted the sloop to cruise for purchase, and a right +thorough-paced pirate in her, so I was in such pain for William that I +could not be without him, for he was my privy counsellor and companion +upon all occasions; so I put a Scotsman, a bold, enterprising, gallant +fellow, into her, named Gordon, and made her carry twelve guns and four +petereroes, though, indeed, we wanted men, for we were none of us manned +in proportion to our force. + +We sailed away for the Cape of Good Hope the beginning of October 1706, +and passed by, in sight of the Cape, the 12th of November following, +having met with a great deal of bad weather. We saw several +merchant-ships in the roads there, as well English as Dutch, whether +outward bound or homeward we could not tell; be it what it would, we did +not think fit to come to an anchor, not knowing what they might be, +or what they might attempt against us, when they knew what we were. +However, as we wanted fresh water, we sent the two boats belonging to +the Portuguese man-of-war, with all Portuguese seamen or negroes in +them, to the watering-place, to take in water; and in the meantime we +hung out a Portuguese ancient at sea, and lay by all that night. They +knew not what we were, but it seems we passed for anything but really +what we was. + +Our boats returning the third time loaden, about five o'clock next +morning, we thought ourselves sufficiently watered, and stood away +to the eastward; but, before our men returned the last time, the wind +blowing an easy gale at west, we perceived a boat in the grey of the +morning under sail, crowding to come up with us, as if they were afraid +we should be gone. We soon found it was an English long-boat, and that +it was pretty full of men. We could not imagine what the meaning of it +should be; but, as it was but a boat, we thought there could be no great +harm in it to let them come on board; and if it appeared they came +only to inquire who we were, we would give them a full account of our +business, by taking them along with us, seeing we wanted men as much as +anything. But they saved us the labour of being in doubt how to dispose +of them; for it seems our Portuguese seamen, who went for water, had +not been so silent at the watering-places as we thought they would have +been. But the case, in short, was this: Captain ---- (I forbear his +name at present, for a particular reason), captain of an East India +merchant-ship, bound afterwards for China, had found some reason to be +very severe with his men, and had handled some of them very roughly at +St Helena; insomuch, that they threatened among themselves to leave the +ship the first opportunity, and had long wished for that opportunity. +Some of these men, it seems, had met with our boat at the +watering-place, and inquiring of one another who we were, and upon what +account, whether the Portuguese seamen, by faltering in their account, +made them suspect that we were out upon the cruise, or whether they +told it in plain English or no (for they all spoke English enough to +be understood), but so it was, that as soon as ever the men carried the +news on board, that the ships which lay by to the eastward were English, +and that they were going upon the _account_, which, by they way, was a +sea term for a pirate; I say, as soon as ever they heard it, they went +to work, and getting all things ready in the night, their chests and +clothes, and whatever else they could, they came away before it was day, +and came up with us about seven o'clock. + +When they came by the ship's side which I commanded we hailed them +in the usual manner, to know what and who they were, and what their +business. They answered they were Englishmen, and desired to come on +board. We told them they might lay the ship on board, but ordered they +should let only one man enter the ship till the captain knew their +business, and that he should come without any arms. They said, Ay, with +all their hearts. + +We presently found their business, and that they desired to go with us; +and as for their arms, they desired we would send men on board the boat, +and that they would deliver them all to us, which was done. The fellow +that came up to me told me how they had been used by their captain, how +he had starved the men, and used them like dogs, and that, if the rest +of the men knew they should be admitted, he was satisfied two-thirds +of them would leave the ship. We found the fellows were very hearty in +their resolution, and jolly brisk sailors they were; so I told them I +would do nothing without our admiral, that was the captain of the other +ship; so I sent my pinnace on board Captain Wilmot, to desire him to +come on board. But he was indisposed, and being to leeward, excused his +coming, but left it all to me; but before my boat was returned, Captain +Wilmot called to me by his speaking-trumpet, which all the men might +hear as well as I; thus, calling me by my name, "I hear they are honest +fellows; pray tell them they are all welcome, and make them a bowl of +punch." + +As the men heard it as well as I, there was no need to tell them what +the captain said; and, as soon as the trumpet had done, they set up a +huzza, that showed us they were very hearty in their coming to us; but +we bound them to us by a stronger obligation still after this, for when +we came to Madagascar, Captain Wilmot, with consent of all the ship's +company, ordered that these men should have as much money given them out +of the stock as was due to them for their pay in the ship they had +left; and after that we allowed them twenty pieces of eight a man bounty +money; and thus we entered them upon shares, as we were all, and brave +stout fellows they were, being eighteen in number, whereof two were +midshipmen, and one a carpenter. + +It was the 28th of November, when, having had some bad weather, we came +to an anchor in the road off St Augustine Bay, at the south-west end +of my old acquaintance the isle of Madagascar. We lay here awhile and +trafficked with the natives for some good beef; though the weather was +so hot that we could not promise ourselves to salt any of it up to keep; +but I showed them the way which we practised before, to salt it first +with saltpetre, then cure it by drying it in the sun, which made it eat +very agreeably, though not so wholesome for our men, that not agreeing +with our way of cooking, viz., boiling with pudding, brewis, &c., and +particularly this way, would be too salt, and the fat of the meat be +rusty, or dried away so as not to be eaten. + +This, however, we could not help, and made ourselves amends by feeding +heartily on the fresh beef while we were there, which was excellent, +good and fat, every way as tender and as well relished as in England, +and thought to be much better to us who had not tasted any in England +for so long a time. + +Having now for some time remained here, we began to consider that +this was not a place for our business; and I, that had some views a +particular way of my own, told them that this was not a station for +those who looked for purchase; that there were two parts of the island +which were particularly proper for our purposes; first, the bay on the +east side of the island, and from thence to the island Mauritius, which +was the usual way which ships that came from the Malabar coast, or the +coast of Coromandel, Fort St George, &c., used to take, and where, if we +waited for them, we ought to take our station. + +But, on the other hand, as we did not resolve to fall upon the European +traders, who were generally ships of force and well manned, and where +blows must be looked for; so I had another prospect, which I promised +myself would yield equal profit, or perhaps greater, without any of the +hazard and difficulty of the former; and this was the Gulf of Mocha, or +the Red Sea. + +I told them that the trade here was great, the ships rich, and the +Strait of Babelmandel narrow; so that there was no doubt but we might +cruise so as to let nothing slip our hands, having the seas open from +the Red Sea, along the coast of Arabia, to the Persian Gulf, and the +Malabar side of the Indies. + +I told them what I had observed when I sailed round the island in my +former progress; how that, on the northernmost point of the island, +there were several very good harbours and roads for our ships; that +the natives were even more civil and tractable, if possible, than those +where we were, not having been so often ill-treated by European sailors +as those had in the south and east sides; and that we might always be +sure of a retreat, if we were driven to put in by any necessity, either +of enemies or weather. + +They were easily convinced of the reasonableness of my scheme; and +Captain Wilmot, whom I now called our admiral, though he was at first of +the mind to go and lie at the island Mauritius, and wait for some of +the European merchant-ships from the road of Coromandel, or the Bay of +Bengal, was now of my mind. It is true we were strong enough to have +attacked an English East India ship of the greatest force, though some +of them were said to carry fifty guns; but I represented to him that +we were sure to have blows and blood if we took them; and, after we had +done, their loading was not of equal value to us, because we had no room +to dispose of their merchandise; and, as our circumstances stood, we had +rather have taken one outward-bound East India ship, with her ready cash +on board, perhaps to the value of forty or fifty thousand pounds, than +three homeward-bound, though their loading would at London be worth +three times the money, because we knew not whither to go to dispose of +the cargo; whereas the ships from London had abundance of things we +knew how to make use of besides their money, such as their stores of +provisions and liquors, and great quantities of the like sent to the +governors and factories at the English settlements for their use; so +that, if we resolved to look for our own country ships, it should be +those that were outward-bound, not the London ships homeward. + +All these things considered, brought the admiral to be of my mind +entirely; so, after taking in water and some fresh provisions where +we lay, which was near Cape St Mary, on the south-west corner of the +island, we weighed and stood away south, and afterwards S.S.E., to +round the island, and in about six days' sail got out of the wake of the +island, and steered away north, till we came off Port Dauphin, and then +north by east, to the latitude of 13 degrees 40 minutes, which was, in +short, just at the farthest part of the island; and the admiral, keeping +ahead, made the open sea fair to the west, clear of the whole island; +upon which he brought to, and we sent a sloop to stand in round the +farthest point north, and coast along the shore, and see for a harbour +to put into, which they did, and soon brought us an account that there +was a deep bay, with a very good road, and several little islands, under +which they found good riding, in ten to seventeen fathom water, and +accordingly there we put in. + +However, we afterwards found occasion to remove our station, as you +shall hear presently. We had now nothing to do but go on shore, and +acquaint ourselves a little with the natives, take in fresh water and +some fresh provisions, and then to sea again. We found the people +very easy to deal with, and some cattle they had; but it being at the +extremity of the island, they had not such quantities of cattle here. +However, for the present we resolved to appoint this for our place of +rendezvous, and go and look out. This was about the latter end of April. + +Accordingly we put to sea, and cruised away to the northward, for the +Arabian coast. It was a long run, but as the winds generally blow trade +from the S. and S.S.E. from May to September, we had good weather; and +in about twenty days we made the island of Socotra, lying south from the +Arabian coast, and E.S.E. from the mouth of the Gulf of Mocha, or the +Red Sea. + +Here we took in water, and stood off and on upon the Arabian shore. We +had not cruised here above three days, or thereabouts, but I spied a +sail, and gave her chase; but when we came up with her, never was such a +poor prize chased by pirates that looked for booty, for we found nothing +in her but poor, half-naked Turks, going a pilgrimage to Mecca, to the +tomb of their prophet Mahomet. The junk that carried them had no one +thing worth taking away but a little rice and some coffee, which was +all the poor wretches had for their subsistence; so we let them go, for +indeed we knew not what to do with them. + +The same evening we chased another junk with two masts, and in something +better plight to look at than the former. When we came on board we found +them upon the same errand, but only that they were people of some better +fashion than the other; and here we got some plunder, some Turkish +stores, a few diamonds in the ear-drops of five or six persons, some +fine Persian carpets, of which they made their saffras to lie upon, and +some money; so we let them go also. + +We continued here eleven days longer, and saw nothing but now and then a +fishing-boat; but the twelfth day of our cruise we spied a ship: indeed +I thought at first it had been an English ship, but it appeared to be +an European freighted for a voyage from Goa, on the coast of Malabar, to +the Red Sea, and was very rich. We chased her, and took her without any +fight, though they had some guns on board too, but not many. We found +her manned with Portuguese seamen, but under the direction of five +merchant Turks, who had hired her on the coast of Malabar of some +Portugal merchants, and had laden her with pepper, saltpetre, some +spices, and the rest of the loading was chiefly calicoes and wrought +silks, some of them very rich. + +We took her and carried her to Socotra; but we really knew not what to +do with her, for the same reasons as before; for all their goods were of +little or no value to us. After some days we found means to let one of +the Turkish merchants know, that if he would ransom the ship we would +take a sum of money and let them go. He told me that if I would let one +of them go on shore for the money they would do it; so we adjusted the +value of the cargo at 30,000 ducats. Upon this agreement, we allowed the +sloop to carry him on shore, at Dofar, in Arabia, where a rich merchant +laid down the money for them, and came off with our sloop; and on +payment of the money we very fairly and honestly let them go. + +Some days after this we took an Arabian junk, going from the Gulf of +Persia to Mocha, with a good quantity of pearl on board. We gutted him +of the pearl, which it seems was belonging to some merchants at Mocha, +and let him go, for there was nothing else worth our taking. + +We continued cruising up and down here till we began to find our +provisions grow low, when Captain Wilmot, our admiral, told us it was +time to think of going back to the rendezvous; and the rest of the men +said the same, being a little weary of beating about for above three +months together, and meeting with little or nothing compared to our +great expectations; but I was very loth to part with the Red Sea at so +cheap a rate, and pressed them to tarry a little longer, which at my +instance they did; but three days afterwards, to our great misfortune, +understood that, by landing the Turkish merchants at Dofar, we had +alarmed the coast as far as the Gulf of Persia, so that no vessel would +stir that way, and consequently nothing was to be expected on that side. + +I was greatly mortified at this news, and could no longer withstand the +importunities of the men to return to Madagascar. However, as the wind +continued still to blow at S.S.E. by S., we were obliged to stand away +towards the coast of Africa and the Cape Guardafui, the winds being more +variable under the shore than in the open sea. + +Here we chopped upon a booty which we did not look for, and which made +amends for all our waiting; for the very same hour that we made land we +spied a large vessel sailing along the shore to the southward. The ship +was of Bengal, belonging to the Great Mogul's country, but had on board +a Dutch pilot, whose name, if I remember right, was Vandergest, and +several European seamen, whereof three were English. She was in no +condition to resist us. The rest of her seamen were Indians of the +Mogul's subjects, some Malabars and some others. There were five Indian +merchants on board, and some Armenians. It seems they had been at Mocha +with spices, silks, diamonds, pearls, calico, &c., such goods as the +country afforded, and had little on board now but money in pieces of +eight, which, by the way, was just what we wanted; and the three English +seamen came along with us, and the Dutch pilot would have done so too, +but the two Armenian merchants entreated us not to take him, for that he +being their pilot, there was none of the men knew how to guide the ship; +so, at their request, we refused him; but we made them promise he should +not be used ill for being willing to go with us. + +We got near 200,000 pieces of eight in this vessel; and, if they said +true, there was a Jew of Goa, who intended to have embarked with them, +who had 200,000 pieces of eight with him, all his own; but his good +fortune, springing out of his ill fortune, hindered him, or he fell sick +at Mocha, and could not be ready to travel, which was the saving of his +money. + +There was none with me at the taking this prize but the sloop, for +Captain Wilmot's ship proving leaky, he went away for the rendezvous +before us, and arrived there the middle of December; but not liking the +port, he left a great cross on shore, with directions written on a +plate of lead fixed to it, for us to come after him to the great bays at +Mangahelly, where he found a very good harbour; but we learned a piece +of news here that kept us from him a great while, which the admiral took +offence at; but we stopped his mouth with his share of 200,000 pieces +of eight to him and his ship's crew. But the story which interrupted +our coming to him was this. Between Mangahelly and another point, called +Cape St Sebastian, there came on shore in the night an European ship, +and whether by stress of weather or want of a pilot I know not, but the +ship stranded and could not be got off. + +We lay in the cove or harbour, where, as I have said, our rendezvous +was appointed, and had not yet been on shore, so we had not seen the +directions our admiral had left for us. + +Our friend William, of whom I have said nothing a great while, had a +great mind one day to go on shore, and importuned me to let him have +a little troop to go with him, for safety, that they might see the +country. I was mightily against it for many reasons; but particularly +I told him he knew the natives were but savages, and they were very +treacherous, and I desired him that he would not go; and, had he gone +on much farther, I believe I should have downright refused him, and +commanded him not to go. + +But, in order to persuade me to let him go, he told me he would give me +an account of the reason why he was so importunate. He told me, the last +night he had a dream, which was so forcible, and made such an impression +upon his mind, that he could not be quiet till he had made the proposal +to me to go; and if I refused him, then he thought his dream was +significant; and if not, then his dream was at an end. + +His dream was, he said, that he went on shore with thirty men, of which +the cockswain, he said, was one, upon the island; and that they found a +mine of gold, and enriched them all. But this was not the main thing, he +said, but that the same morning he had dreamed so, the cockswain came +to him just then, and told him that he dreamed he went on shore on the +island of Madagascar, and that some men came to him and told him they +would show him where he should get a prize which would make them all +rich. + +These two things put together began to weigh with me a little, though I +was never inclined to give any heed to dreams; but William's importunity +turned me effectually, for I always put a great deal of stress upon his +judgment; so that, in short, I gave them leave to go, but I charged them +not to go far off from the sea-coast; that, if they were forced down to +the seaside upon any occasion, we might perhaps see them, and fetch them +off with our boats. + +They went away early in the morning, one-and-thirty men of them in +number, very well armed, and very stout fellows; they travelled all the +day, and at night made us a signal that all was well, from the top of a +hill, which we had agreed on, by making a great fire. + +Next day they marched down the hill on the other side, inclining towards +the seaside, as they had promised, and saw a very pleasant valley before +them, with a river in the middle of it, which, a little farther below +them, seemed to be big enough to bear small ships; they marched apace +towards this river, and were surprised with the noise of a piece going +off, which, by the sound, could not be far off. They listened long, but +could hear no more; so they went on to the river-side, which was a very +fine fresh stream, but widened apace, and they kept on by the banks of +it, till, almost at once, it opened or widened into a good large creek +or harbour, about five miles from the sea; and that which was still more +surprising, as they marched forward, they plainly saw in the mouth of +the harbour, or creek, the wreck of a ship. + +The tide was up, as we call it, so that it did not appear very much +above the water, but, as they made downwards, they found it grow bigger +and bigger; and the tide soon after ebbing out, they found it lay dry +upon the sands, and appeared to be the wreck of a considerable vessel, +larger than could be expected in that country. + +After some time, William, taking out his glass to look at it more +nearly, was surprised with hearing a musket-shot whistle by him, and +immediately after that he heard the gun, and saw the smoke from the +other side; upon which our men immediately fired three muskets, to +discover, if possible, what or who they were. Upon the noise of these +guns, abundance of men came running down to the shore from among the +trees; and our men could easily perceive that they were Europeans, +though they knew not of what nation; however, our men hallooed to them +as loud as they could, and by-and-by they got a long pole, and set it +up, and hung a white shirt upon it for a flag of truce. They on the +other side saw it, by the help of their glasses, too, and quickly after +our men see a boat launch off from the shore, as they thought, but it +was from another creek, it seems; and immediately they came rowing over +the creek to our men, carrying also a white flag as a token of truce. + +It is not easy to describe the surprise, or joy and satisfaction, that +appeared on both sides, to see not only white men, but Englishmen, in +a place so remote; but what then must it be when they came to know one +another, and to find that they were not only countrymen but comrades, +and that this was the very ship that Captain Wilmot, our admiral, +commanded, and whose company we had lost in the storm at Tobago, after +making an agreement to rendezvous at Madagascar! + +They had, it seems, got intelligence of us when they came to the south +part of the island, and had been a-roving as far as the Gulf of Bengal, +when they met Captain Avery, with whom they joined, took several rich +prizes, and, amongst the rest, one ship with the Great Mogul's daughter, +and an immense treasure in money and jewels; and from thence they came +about the coast of Coromandel, and afterwards that of Malabar, into the +Gulf of Persia, where they also took some prize, and then designed for +the south part of Madagascar; but the winds blowing hard at S.E. and +S.E. by E., they came to the northward of the isle, and being after that +separated by a furious tempest from the N.W., they were forced into the +mouth of that creek, where they lost their ship. And they told us, also, +that they heard that Captain Avery himself had lost his ship also not +far off. + +When they had thus acquainted one another with their fortunes, the poor +overjoyed men were in haste to go back to communicate their joy to their +comrades; and, leaving some of their men with ours, the rest went back, +and William was so earnest to see them that he and two more went back +with them, and there he came to their little camp where they lived. +There were about a hundred and sixty men of them in all; they had got +their guns on shore, and some ammunition, but a good deal of their +powder was spoiled; however, they had raised a fair platform, and +mounted twelve pieces of cannon upon it, which was a sufficient defence +to them on that side of the sea; and just at the end of the platform +they had made a launch and a little yard, and were all hard at work, +building another little ship, as I may call it, to go to sea in; but +they put a stop to this work upon the news they had of our being come +in. + +When our men went into their huts, it was surprising, indeed, to see the +vast stock of wealth they had got, in gold and silver and jewels, which, +however, they told us was a trifle to what Captain Avery had, wherever +he was gone. + +It was five days we had waited for our men, and no news of them; and +indeed I gave them over for lost, but was surprised, after five days' +waiting, to see a ship's boat come rowing towards us along shore. What +to make of it I could not tell, but was at least better satisfied when +our men told me they heard them halloo and saw them wave their caps to +us. + +In a little time they came quite up to us; and I saw friend William +stand up in the boat and make signs to us; so they came on board; but +when I saw there were but fifteen of our one-and-thirty men, I asked him +what had become of their fellows. "Oh," says William, "they are all very +well; and my dream is fully made good, and the cockswain's too." + +This made me very impatient to know how the case stood; so he told us +the whole story, which indeed surprised us all. The next day we weighed, +and stood away southerly to join Captain Wilmot and ship at Mangahelly, +where we found him, as I said, a little chagrined at our stay; but we +pacified him afterwards with telling him the history of William's dream, +and the consequence of it. + +In the meantime the camp of our comrades was so near Mangahelly, that +our admiral and I, friend William, and some of the men, resolved to take +the sloop and go and see them, and fetch them all, and their goods, +bag and baggage, on board our ship, which accordingly we did, and found +their camp, their fortifications, the battery of guns they had erected, +their treasure, and all the men, just as William had related it; so, +after some stay, we took all the men into the sloop, and brought them +away with us. + +It was some time before we knew what was become of Captain Avery; but +after about a month, by the direction of the men who had lost their +ship, we sent the sloop to cruise along the shore, to find out, if +possible, where they were; and in about a week's cruise our men found +them, and particularly that they had lost their ship, as well as our men +had lost theirs, and that they were every way in as bad a condition as +ours. + +It was about ten days before the sloop returned, and Captain Avery with +them; and this was the whole force that, as I remember, Captain Avery +ever had with him; for now we joined all our companies together, and it +stood thus:--We had two ships and a sloop, in which we had 320 men, but +much too few to man them as they ought to be, the great Portuguese ship +requiring of herself near 400 men to man her completely. As for +our lost, but now found comrade, her complement of men was 180, or +thereabouts; and Captain Avery had about 300 men with him, whereof he +had ten carpenters with him, most of which were taken aboard the +prize they had taken; so that, in a word, all the force Avery had at +Madagascar, in the year 1699, or thereabouts, amounted to our three +ships, for his own was lost, as you have heard; and never had any more +than about 1200 men in all. + +It was about a month after this that all our crews got together, and +as Avery was unshipped, we all agreed to bring our own company into the +Portuguese man-of-war and the sloop, and give Captain Avery the Spanish +frigate, with all the tackles and furniture, guns and ammunition, for +his crew by themselves; for which they, being full of wealth, agreed to +give us 40,000 pieces of eight. + +It was next considered what course we should take. Captain Avery, to +give him his due, proposed our building a little city here, establishing +ourselves on shore, with a good fortification and works proper to defend +ourselves; and that, as we had wealth enough, and could increase it to +what degree we pleased, we should content ourselves to retire here, +and bid defiance to the world. But I soon convinced him that this place +would be no security to us, if we pretended to carry on our cruising +trade; for that then all the nations of Europe, and indeed of that part +of the world, would be engaged to root us out; but if we resolved to +live there as in retirement, and plant in the country as private men, +and give over our trade of pirating, then, indeed, we might plant and +settle ourselves where we pleased. But then, I told him, the best way +would be to treat with the natives, and buy a tract of land of them +farther up the country, seated upon some navigable river, where boats +might go up and down for pleasure, but not ships to endanger us; that +thus planting the high ground with cattle, such as cows and goats, of +which the country also was full, to be sure we might live here as well +as any men in the world; and I owned to him I thought it was a good +retreat for those that were willing to leave off and lay down, and yet +did not care to venture home and be hanged; that is to say, to run the +risk of it. + +Captain Avery, however he made no positive discovery of his intentions, +seemed to me to decline my notion of going up into the country to plant; +on the contrary, it was apparent he was of Captain Wilmot's opinion, +that they might maintain themselves on shore, and yet carry on their +cruising trade too; and upon this they resolved. But, as I afterwards +understood, about fifty of their men went up the country, and settled +themselves in an inland place as a colony. Whether they are there still +or not, I cannot tell, or how many of them are left alive; but it is my +opinion they are there still, and that they are considerably increased, +for, as I hear, they have got some women among them, though not many; +for it seems five Dutch women and three or four little girls were taken +by them in a Dutch ship, which they afterwards took going to Mocha; and +three of those women, marrying some of these men, went with them to live +in their new plantation. But of this I speak only by hearsay. + +As we lay here some time, I found our people mightily divided in their +notions; some were for going this way, and some that, till at last I +began to foresee they would part company, and perhaps we should not have +men enough to keep together to man the great ship; so I took Captain +Wilmot aside, and began to talk to him about it, but soon perceived that +he inclined himself to stay at Madagascar, and having got a vast wealth +for his own share, had secret designs of getting home some way or other. + +I argued the impossibility of it, and the hazard he would run, either +of falling into the hands of thieves and murderers in the Red Sea, +who would never let such a treasure as his pass their hands, or of +his falling into the hands of the English, Dutch, or French, who would +certainly hang him for a pirate. I gave him an account of the voyage +I had made from this very place to the continent of Africa, and what a +journey it was to travel on foot. + +In short, nothing could persuade him, but he would go into the Red Sea +with the sloop, and where the children of Israel passed through the sea +dry-shod, and, landing there, would travel to Grand Cairo by land, +which is not above eighty miles, and from thence he said he could ship +himself, by the way of Alexandria, to any part of the world. + +I represented the hazard, and indeed the impossibility, of his passing +by Mocha and Jiddah without being attacked, if he offered it by force, +or plundered, if he went to get leave; and explained the reasons of it +so much and so effectually, that, though at last he would not hearken to +it himself, none of his men would go with him. They told him they would +go anywhere with him to serve him, but that this was running himself and +them into certain destruction, without any possibility of avoiding it, +or probability of answering his end. The captain took what I said to +him quite wrong, and pretended to resent it, and gave me some buccaneer +words upon it; but I gave him no return to it but this: that I advised +him for his advantage; that if he did not understand it so, it was his +fault, not mine; that I did not forbid him to go, nor had I offered +to persuade any of the men not to go with him, though it was to their +apparent destruction. + +However, warm heads are not easily cooled. The captain was so eager that +he quitted our company, and, with most part of his crew, went over to +Captain Avery, and sorted with his people, taking all the treasure with +him, which, by the way, was not very fair in him, we having agreed to +share all our gains, whether more or less, whether absent or present. + +Our men muttered a little at it, but I pacified them as well as I could, +and told them it was easy for us to get as much, if we minded our hits; +and Captain Wilmot had set us a very good example; for, by the same +rule, the agreement of any further sharing of profits with them was at +an end. I took this occasion to put into their heads some part of my +further designs, which were, to range over the eastern sea, and see if +we could not make ourselves as rich as Mr Avery, who, it was true, had +gotten a prodigious deal of money, though not one-half of what was said +of it in Europe. + +Our men were so pleased with my forward, enterprising temper, that +they assured me that they would go with me, one and all, over the whole +globe, wherever I would carry them; and as for Captain Wilmot, they +would have nothing more to do with him. This came to his ears, and put +him into a great rage, so that he threatened, if I came on shore, he +would cut my throat. + +I had information of it privately, but took no notice of it at all; only +I took care not to go unprovided for him, and seldom walked about but in +very good company. However, at last Captain Wilmot and I met, and talked +over the matter very seriously, and I offered him the sloop to go where +he pleased, or, if he was not satisfied with that, I offered to take +the sloop and leave him the great ship; but he declined both, and only +desired that I would leave him six carpenters, which I had in our ship +more than I had need of, to help his men to finish the sloop that was +begun before we came thither, by the men that lost their ship. This I +consented readily to, and lent him several other hands that were useful +to them; and in a little time they built a stout brigantine, able to +carry fourteen guns and 200 men. + +What measures they took, and how Captain Avery managed afterwards, is +too long a story to meddle with here; nor is it any of my business, +having my own story still upon my hands. + +We lay here, about these several simple disputes, almost five months, +when, about the latter end of March, I set sail with the great ship, +having in her forty-four guns and 400 men, and the sloop, carrying +eighty men. We did not steer to the Malabar coast, and so to the Gulf of +Persia, as was first intended, the east monsoons blowing yet too strong, +but we kept more under the African coast, where we had the wind variable +till we passed the line, and made the Cape Bassa, in the latitude of +four degrees ten minutes; from thence, the monsoons beginning to change +to the N.E. and N.N.E., we led it away, with the wind large, to the +Maldives, a famous ledge of islands, well known by all the sailors who +have gone into those parts of the world; and, leaving these islands a +little to the south, we made Cape Comorin, the southernmost land of the +coast of Malabar, and went round the isle of Ceylon. Here we lay by a +while to wait for purchase; and here we saw three large English East +India ships going from Bengal, or from Fort St George, homeward for +England, or rather for Bombay and Surat, till the trade set in. + +We brought to, and hoisting an English ancient and pendant, lay by for +them, as if we intended to attack them. They could not tell what to make +of us a good while, though they saw our colours; and I believe at first +they thought us to be French; but as they came nearer to us, we let +them soon see what we were, for we hoisted a black flag, with two cross +daggers in it, on our main-top-mast head, which let them see what they +were to expect. + +We soon found the effects of this; for at first they spread their +ancients, and made up to us in a line, as if they would fight us, having +the wind off shore, fair enough to have brought them on board us; but +when they saw what force we were of, and found we were cruisers of +another kind, they stood away from us again, with all the sail they +could make. If they had come up, we should have given them an unexpected +welcome, but as it was, we had no mind to follow them; so we let them +go, for the same reasons which I mentioned before. + +But though we let them pass, we did not design to let others go at so +easy a price. It was but the next morning that we saw a sail standing +round Cape Comorin, and steering, as we thought, the same course with +us. We knew not at first what to do with her, because she had the shore +on her larboard quarter, and if we offered to chase her, she might put +into any port or creek, and escape us; but, to prevent this, we sent the +sloop to get in between her and the land. As soon as she saw that, she +hauled in to keep the land aboard, and when the sloop stood towards her +she made right ashore, with all the canvas she could spread. + +The sloop, however, came up with her and engaged her, and found she was +a vessel of ten guns, Portuguese built, but in the Dutch traders' +hands, and manned by Dutchmen, who were bound from the Gulf of Persia +to Batavia, to fetch spices and other goods from thence. The sloop's men +took her, and had the rummaging of her before we came up. She had in her +some European goods, and a good round sum of money, and some pearl; so +that, though we did not go to the gulf for the pearl, the pearl came to +us out of the gulf, and we had our share of it. This was a rich ship, +and the goods were of very considerable value, besides the money and the +pearl. + +We had a long consultation here what we should do with the men, for to +give them the ship, and let them pursue their voyage to Java, would be +to alarm the Dutch factory there, who are by far the strongest in the +Indies, and to make our passage that way impracticable; whereas we +resolved to visit that part of the world in our way, but were not +willing to pass the great Bay of Bengal, where we hoped for a great deal +of purchase; and therefore it behoved us not to be waylaid before we +came there, because they knew we must pass by the Straits of Malacca, or +those of Sunda; and either way it was very easy to prevent us. + +While we were consulting this in the great cabin, the men had had the +same debate before the mast; and it seems the majority there were for +pickling up the poor Dutchmen among the herrings; in a word, they were +for throwing them all into the sea. Poor William, the Quaker, was in +great concern about this, and comes directly to me to talk about it. +"Hark thee," says William, "what wilt thou do with these Dutchmen that +thou hast on board? Thou wilt not let them go, I suppose," says he. +"Why," says I, "William, would you advise me to let them go?" "No," says +William, "I cannot say it is fit for thee to let them go; that is to +say, to go on with their voyage to Batavia, because it is not for thy +turn that the Dutch at Batavia should have any knowledge of thy being in +these seas." "Well, then," says I to him, "I know no remedy but to throw +them overboard. You know, William," says I, "a Dutchman swims like a +fish; and all our people here are of the same opinion as well as I." At +the same time I resolved it should not be done, but wanted to hear what +William would say. He gravely replied, "If all the men in the ship +were of that mind, I will never believe that thou wilt be of that mind +thyself, for I have heard thee protest against cruelty in all other +cases." "Well, William," says I, "that is true; but what then shall we +do with them?" "Why," says William, "is there no way but to murder them? +I am persuaded thou canst not be in earnest." "No, indeed, William," +says I, "I am not in earnest; but they shall not go to Java, no, nor to +Ceylon, that is certain." "But," says William, "the men have done thee +no injury at all; thou hast taken a great treasure from them; what canst +thou pretend to hurt them for?" "Nay, William," says I, "do not talk of +that; I have pretence enough, if that be all; my pretence is, to +prevent doing me hurt, and that is as necessary a piece of the law of +self-preservation as any you can name; but the main thing is, I know not +what to do with them, to prevent their prating." + +While William and I were talking, the poor Dutchmen were openly +condemned to die, as it may be called, by the whole ship's company; and +so warm were the men upon it, that they grew very clamorous; and when +they heard that William was against it, some of them swore they should +die, and if William opposed it, he should drown along with them. + +But, as I was resolved to put an end to their cruel project, so I found +it was time to take upon me a little, or the bloody humour might grow +too strong; so I called the Dutchmen up, and talked a little with them. +First, I asked them if they were willing to go with us. Two of them +offered it presently; but the rest, which were fourteen, declined it. +"Well, then," said I, "where would you go?" They desired they should +go to Ceylon. No, I told them I could not allow them to go to any Dutch +factory, and told them very plainly the reasons of it, which they could +not deny to be just. I let them know also the cruel, bloody measures +of our men, but that I had resolved to save them, if possible; and +therefore I told them I would set them on shore at some English factory +in the Bay of Bengal, or put them on board any English ship I met, after +I was past the Straits of Sunda or of Malacca, but not before; for, as +to my coming back again, I told them I would run the venture of their +Dutch power from Batavia, but I would not have the news come there +before me, because it would make all their merchant-ships lay up, and +keep out of our way. + +It came next into our consideration what we should do with their ship; +but this was not long resolving; for there were but two ways, either to +set her on fire, or to run her on shore, and we chose the last. So we +set her foresail with the tack at the cat-head, and lashed her helm a +little to starboard, to answer her head-sail, and so set her agoing, +with neither cat or dog in her; and it was not above two hours before +we saw her run right ashore upon the coast, a little beyond the +Cape Comorin; and away we went round about Ceylon, for the coast of +Coromandel. + +We sailed along there, not in sight of the shore only, but so near as to +see the ships in the road at Fort St David, Fort St George, and at +the other factories along that shore, as well as along the coast of +Golconda, carrying our English ancient when we came near the Dutch +factories, and Dutch colours when we passed by the English factories. +We met with little purchase upon this coast, except two small vessels +of Golconda, bound across the bay with bales of calicoes and muslins and +wrought silks, and fifteen bales of romals, from the bottom of the bay, +which were going, on whose account we knew not, to Acheen, and to other +ports on the coast of Malacca. We did not inquire to what place in +particular; but we let the vessels go, having none but Indians on board. + +In the bottom of the bay we met with a great junk belonging to the +Mogul's court, with a great many people, passengers as we supposed them +to be: it seems they were bound for the river Hooghly or Ganges, and +came from Sumatra. This was a prize worth taking indeed; and we got +so much gold in her, besides other goods which we did not meddle +with--pepper in particular--that it had like to have put an end to our +cruise; for almost all my men said we were rich enough, and desired to +go back again to Madagascar. But I had other things in my head still, +and when I came to talk with them, and set friend William to talk with +them, we put such further golden hopes into their heads that we soon +prevailed with them to let us go on. + +My next design was to leave all the dangerous straits of Malacca, +Singapore, and Sunda, where we could expect no great booty, but what we +might light on in European ships, which we must fight for; and though we +were able to fight, and wanted no courage, even to desperation, yet we +were rich too, and resolved to be richer, and took this for our maxim, +that while we were sure the wealth we sought was to be had without +fighting, we had no occasion to put ourselves to the necessity of +fighting for that which would come upon easy terms. + +We left, therefore, the Bay of Bengal, and coming to the coast of +Sumatra, we put in at a small port, where there was a town, inhabited +only by Malays; and here we took in fresh water, and a large quantity of +good pork, pickled up and well salted, notwithstanding the heat of the +climate, being in the very middle of the torrid zone, viz., in three +degrees fifteen minutes north latitude. We also took on board both our +vessels forty hogs alive, which served us for fresh provisions, having +abundance of food for them, such as the country produced, such as guams, +potatoes, and a sort of coarse rice, good for nothing else but to feed +the swine. We killed one of these hogs every day, and found them to be +excellent meat. We took in also a monstrous quantity of ducks, and cocks +and hens, the same kind as we have in England, which we kept for change +of provisions; and if I remember right, we had no less than two thousand +of them; so that at first we were pestered with them very much, but +we soon lessened them by boiling, roasting, stewing, &c., for we never +wanted while we had them. + +My long-projected design now lay open to me, which was to fall in +amongst the Dutch Spice Islands, and see what mischief I could do there. +Accordingly, we put out to sea the 12th of August, and passing the line +on the 17th, we stood away due south, leaving the Straits of Sunda and +the isle of Java on the east, till we came to the latitude of eleven +degrees twenty minutes, when we steered east and E.N.E., having easy +gales from the W.S.W. till we came among the Moluccas, or Spice Islands. + +We passed those seas with less difficulty than in other places, the +winds to the south of Java being more variable, and the weather good, +though sometimes we met with squally weather and short storms; but when +we came in among the Spice Islands themselves we had a share of the +monsoons, or trade-winds, and made use of them accordingly. + +The infinite number of islands which lie in these seas embarrassed +us strangely, and it was with great difficulty that we worked our way +through them; then we steered for the north side of the Philippines, +when we had a double chance for purchase, viz., either to meet with +the Spanish ships from Acapulco, on the coast of New Spain, or we were +certain not to fail of finding some ships or junks of China, who, if +they came from China, would have a great quantity of goods of value on +board, as well as money; or if we took them going back, we should find +them laden with nutmegs and cloves from Banda and Ternate, or from some +of the other islands. + +We were right in our guesses here to a tittle, and we steered directly +through a large outlet, which they call a strait, though it be fifteen +miles broad, and to an island they call Dammer, and from thence N.N.E. +to Banda. Between these islands we met with a Dutch junk, or vessel, +going to Amboyna: we took her without much trouble, and I had much ado +to prevent our men murdering all the men, as soon as they heard them say +they belonged to Amboyna: the reasons I suppose any one will guess. + +We took out of her about sixteen ton of nutmegs, some provisions, and +their small-arms, for they had no great guns, and let the ship go: from +thence we sailed directly to the Banda Island, or Islands, where we +were sure to get more nutmegs if we thought fit. For my part, I would +willingly have got more nutmegs, though I had paid for them, but our +people abhorred paying for anything; so we got about twelve ton more at +several times, most of them from shore, and only a few in a small boat +of the natives, which was going to Gilolo. We would have traded openly, +but the Dutch, who have made themselves masters of all those islands, +forbade the people dealing with us, or any strangers whatever, and kept +them so in awe that they durst not do it; so we could indeed have made +nothing of it if we had stayed longer, and therefore resolved to be gone +for Ternate, and see if we could make up our loading with cloves. + +Accordingly we stood away north, but found ourselves so entangled among +innumerable islands, and without any pilot that understood the channel +and races between them, that we were obliged to give it over, and +resolved to go back again to Banda, and see what we could get among the +other islands thereabouts. + +The first adventure we made here had like to have been fatal to us all, +for the sloop, being ahead, made the signal to us for seeing a sail, and +afterwards another, and a third, by which we understood she saw three +sail; whereupon we made more sail to come up with her, but on a sudden +were gotten among some rocks, falling foul upon them in such a manner +as frighted us all very heartily; for having, it seems, but just water +enough, as it were to an inch, our rudder struck upon the top of a rock, +which gave us a terrible shock, and split a great piece off the rudder, +and indeed disabled it so that our ship would not steer at all, at least +not so as to be depended upon; and we were glad to hand all our sails, +except our fore-sail and main-topsail, and with them we stood away to +the east, to see if we could find any creek or harbour where we might +lay the ship on shore, and repair our rudder; besides, we found the ship +herself had received some damage, for she had some little leak near her +stern-post, but a great way under water. + +By this mischance we lost the advantages, whatever they were, of the +three sail of ships, which we afterwards came to hear were small Dutch +ships from Batavia, going to Banda and Amboyna, to load spice, and, no +doubt, had a good quantity of money on board. + +Upon the disaster I have been speaking of you may very well suppose that +we came to an anchor as soon as we could, which was upon a small island +not far from Banda, where, though the Dutch keep no factory, yet they +come at the season to buy nutmegs and mace. We stayed there thirteen +days; but there being no place where we could lay the ship on shore, we +sent the sloop to cruise among the islands, to look out for a place fit +for us. In the meantime we got very good water here, some provisions, +roots, and fruits, and a good quantity of nutmegs and mace, which we +found ways to trade with the natives for, without the knowledge of their +masters, the Dutch. + +At length our sloop returned; having found another island where +there was a very good harbour, we ran in, and came to an anchor. We +immediately unbent all our sails, sent them ashore upon the island, and +set up seven or eight tents with them; then we unrigged our top-masts, +and cut them down, hoisted all our guns out, our provisions and loading, +and put them ashore in the tents. With the guns we made two small +batteries, for fear of a surprise, and kept a look-out upon the hill. +When we were all ready, we laid the ship aground upon a hard sand, the +upper end of the harbour, and shored her up on each side. At low water +she lay almost dry, so we mended her bottom, and stopped the leak, which +was occasioned by straining some of the rudder irons with the shock +which the ship had against the rock. + +Having done this, we also took occasion to clean her bottom, which, +having been at sea so long, was very foul. The sloop washed and tallowed +also, but was ready before us, and cruised eight or ten days among the +islands, but met with no purchase; so that we began to be tired of the +place, having little to divert us but the most furious claps of thunder +that ever were heard or read of in the world. + +We were in hopes to have met with some purchase here among the Chinese, +who, we had been told, came to Ternate to trade for cloves, and to the +Banda Isles for nutmegs; and we would have been very glad to have loaded +our galleon, or great ship, with these two sorts of spice, and have +thought it a glorious voyage; but we found nothing stirring more than +what I have said, except Dutchmen, who, by what means we could not +imagine, had either a jealousy of us or intelligence of us, and kept +themselves close in their ports. + +I was once resolved to have made a descent at the island of Dumas, the +place most famous for the best nutmegs; but friend William, who was +always for doing our business without fighting, dissuaded me from it, +and gave such reasons for it that we could not resist; particularly +the great heats of the season, and of the place, for we were now in the +latitude of just half a degree south. But while we were disputing this +point we were soon determined by the following accident:--We had a +strong gale of wind at S.W. by W., and the ship had fresh way, but a +great sea rolling in upon us from the N.E., which we afterwards found +was the pouring in of the great ocean east of New Guinea. However, as I +said, we stood away large, and made fresh way, when, on the sudden, +from a dark cloud which hovered over our heads, came a flash, or rather +blast, of lightning, which was so terrible, and quivered so long among +us, that not I only, but all our men, thought the ship was on fire. The +heat of the flash, or fire, was so sensibly felt in our faces, that some +of our men had blisters raised by it on their skins, not immediately, +perhaps, by the heat, but by the poisonous or noxious particles which +mixed themselves with the matter inflamed. But this was not all; the +shock of the air, which the fracture in the clouds made, was such +that our ship shook as when a broadside is fired; and her motion being +checked, as it were at once, by a repulse superior to the force that +gave her way before, the sails all flew back in a moment, and the ship +lay, as we might truly say, thunder-struck. As the blast from the cloud +was so very near us, it was but a few moments after the flash that the +terriblest clap of thunder followed that was ever heard by mortals. I +firmly believe a blast of a hundred thousand barrels of gunpowder could +not have been greater to our hearing; nay, indeed, to some of our men it +took away their hearing. + +It is not possible for me to describe, or any one to conceive, the +terror of that minute. Our men were in such a consternation, that not a +man on board the ship had presence of mind to apply to the proper duty +of a sailor, except friend William; and had he not run very nimbly, +and with a composure that I am sure I was not master of, to let go the +fore-sheet, set in the weather-brace of the fore-yard, and haul down +the top-sails, we had certainly brought all our masts by the board, and +perhaps have been overwhelmed in the sea. + +As for myself, I must confess my eyes were open to my danger, though not +the least to anything of application for remedy. I was all amazement and +confusion, and this was the first time that I can say I began to feel +the effects of that horror which I know since much more of, upon the +just reflection on my former life. I thought myself doomed by Heaven to +sink that moment into eternal destruction; and with this peculiar mark +of terror, viz., that the vengeance was not executed in the ordinary +way of human justice, but that God had taken me into His immediate +disposing, and had resolved to be the executer of His own vengeance. + +Let them alone describe the confusion I was in who know what was the +case of [John] Child, of Shadwell, or Francis Spira. It is impossible +to describe it. My soul was all amazement and surprise. I thought myself +just sinking into eternity, owning the divine justice of my punishment, +but not at all feeling any of the moving, softening tokens of a sincere +penitent; afflicted at the punishment, but not at the crime; alarmed at +the vengeance, but not terrified at the guilt; having the same gust to +the crime, though terrified to the last degree at the thought of the +punishment, which I concluded I was just now going to receive. + +But perhaps many that read this will be sensible of the thunder and +lightning, that may think nothing of the rest, or rather may make a jest +of it all; so I say no more of it at this time, but proceed to the story +of the voyage. When the amazement was over, and the men began to come +to themselves, they fell a-calling for one another, every one for his +friend, or for those he had most respect for; and it was a singular +satisfaction to find that nobody was hurt. The next thing was to +inquire if the ship had received no damage, when the boatswain, stepping +forward, found that part of the head was gone, but not so as to +endanger the bowsprit; so we hoisted our top-sails again, hauled aft the +fore-sheet, braced the yards, and went our course as before. Nor can I +deny but that we were all somewhat like the ship; our first astonishment +being a little over, and that we found the ship swim again, we were soon +the same irreligious, hardened crew that we were before, and I among the +rest. + +As we now steered, our course lay N.N.E., and we passed thus, with a +fair wind, through the strait or channel between the island of Gilolo +and the land of Nova Guinea, when we were soon in the open sea or ocean, +on the south-east of the Philippines, being the great Pacific, or South +Sea, where it may be said to join itself with the vast Indian Ocean. + +As we passed into these seas, steering due north, so we soon crossed the +line to the north side, and so sailed on towards Mindanao and Manilla, +the chief of the Philippine Islands, without meeting with any purchase +till we came to the northward of Manilla, and then our trade began; +for here we took three Japanese vessels, though at some distance from +Manilla. Two of them had made their market, and were going home with +nutmegs, cinnamon, cloves, &c., besides all sorts of European goods, +brought with the Spanish ships from Acapulco. They had together +eight-and-thirty ton of cloves, and five or six ton of nutmegs, and as +much cinnamon. We took the spice, but meddled with very little of the +European goods, they being, as we thought, not worth our while; but we +were very sorry for it soon after, and therefore grew wiser upon the +next occasion. + +The third Japanese was the best prize to us; for he came with money, and +a great deal of gold uncoined, to buy such goods as we mentioned above. +We eased him of his gold, and did him no other harm, and having no +intention to stay long here, we stood away for China. + +We were at sea above two months upon this voyage, beating it up against +the wind, which blew steadily from the N.E., and within a point or two +one way or other; and this indeed was the reason why we met with the +more prizes in our voyage. + +We were just gotten clear of the Philippines, and we purposed to go to +the isle of Formosa, but the wind blew so fresh at N.N.E. that there was +no making anything of it, and we were forced to put back to Laconia, the +most northerly of those islands. We rode here very secure, and shifted +our situation, not in view of any danger, for there was none, but for a +better supply of provisions, which we found the people very willing to +supply us with. + +There lay, while we remained here, three very great galleons, or Spanish +ships, from the south seas; whether newly come in or ready to sail we +could not understand at first; but as we found the China traders began +to load and set forward to the north, we concluded the Spanish ships had +newly unloaded their cargo, and these had been buying; so we doubted +not but we should meet with purchase in the rest of the voyage, neither, +indeed, could we well miss of it. + +We stayed here till the beginning of May, when we were told the Chinese +traders would set forward; for the northern monsoons end about the +latter end of March or beginning of April; so that they are sure of fair +winds home. Accordingly we hired some of the country boats, which +are very swift sailers, to go and bring us word how affairs stood at +Manilla, and when the China junks would sail; and by this intelligence +we ordered our matters so well, that three days after we set sail we +fell in with no less than eleven of them; out of which, however, having +by misfortune of discovering ourselves, taken but three, we contented +ourselves and pursued our voyage to Formosa. In these three vessels we +took, in short, such a quantity of cloves, nutmegs, cinnamon, and mace, +besides silver, that our men began to be of my opinion,--that we were +rich enough; and, in short, we had nothing to do now but to consider by +what methods to secure the immense treasure we had got. + +I was secretly glad to hear that they were of this opinion, for I had +long before resolved, if it were possible, to persuade them to think of +returning, having fully perfected my first projected design of rummaging +among the Spice Islands; and all those prizes, which were exceeding rich +at Manilla, was quite beyond my design. + +But now I had heard what the men said, and how they thought we were very +well, I let them know by friend William, that I intended only to sail +to the island of Formosa, where I should find opportunity to turn our +spices and Europe goods into ready money, and that then I would tack +about for the south, the northern monsoons being perhaps by that time +also ready to set in. They all approved of my design, and willingly +went forward; because, besides the winds, which would not permit until +October to go to the south, I say, besides this, we were now a very deep +ship, having near two hundred ton of goods on board, and particularly, +some very valuable; the sloop also had a proportion. + +With this resolution we went on cheerfully, when, within about twelve +days' sail more, we made the island Formosa, at a great distance, but +were ourselves shot beyond the southernmost part of the island, being to +leeward, and almost upon the coast of China. Here we were a little at +a loss, for the English factories were not far off, and we might be +obliged to fight some of their ships, if we met with them; which, though +we were able enough to do, yet we did not desire it on many accounts, +and particularly because we did not think it was our business to have it +known who we were, or that such a kind of people as we had been seen on +the coast. However, we were obliged to keep to the northward, keeping as +good an offing as we could with respect to the coast of China. + +We had not sailed long but we chased a small Chinese junk, and having +taken her, we found she was bound to the island of Formosa, having no +goods on board but some rice and a small quantity of tea; but she had +three Chinese merchants in her; and they told us that they were going to +meet a large vessel of their country, which came from Tonquin, and lay +in a river in Formosa, whose name I forgot; and they were going to the +Philippine Islands, with silks, muslins, calicoes, and such goods as +are the product of China, and some gold; that their business was to sell +their cargo, and buy spices and European goods. + +This suited very well with our purpose; so I resolved now that we would +leave off being pirates and turn merchants; so we told them what goods +we had on board, and that if they would bring their supercargoes or +merchants on board, we would trade with them. They were very willing +to trade with us, but terribly afraid to trust us; nor was it an unjust +fear, for we had plundered them already of what they had. On the other +hand, we were as diffident as they, and very uncertain what to do; but +William the Quaker put this matter into a way of barter. He came to me +and told me he really thought the merchants looked like fair men, that +meant honestly. "And besides," says William, "it is their interest to be +honest now, for, as they know upon what terms we got the goods we are to +truck with them, so they know we can afford good pennyworths; and in the +next place, it saves them going the whole voyage, so that the southerly +monsoons yet holding, if they traded with us, they could immediately +return with their cargo to China;" though, by the way, we afterwards +found they intended for Japan; but that was all one, for by this means +they saved at least eight months' voyage. Upon these foundations, +William said he was satisfied we might trust them; "for," says William, +"I would as soon trust a man whose interest binds him to be just to +me as a man whose principle binds himself." Upon the whole, William +proposed that two of the merchants should be left on board our ship as +hostages, and that part of our goods should be loaded in their vessel, +and let the third go with it into the port where their ship lay; and +when he had delivered the spices, he should bring back such things as it +was agreed should be exchanged. This was concluded on, and William the +Quaker ventured to go along with them, which, upon my word, I should not +have cared to have done, nor was I willing that he should, but he went +still upon the notion that it was their interest to treat him friendly. + +In the meantime, we came to an anchor under a little island in the +latitude of 23 degrees 28 minutes, being just under the northern tropic, +and about twenty leagues from the island. Here we lay thirteen days, and +began to be very uneasy for my friend William, for they had promised +to be back again in four days, which they might very easily have done. +However, at the end of thirteen days, we saw three sail coming directly +to us, which a little surprised us all at first, not knowing what might +be the case; and we began to put ourselves in a posture of defence; but +as they came nearer us, we were soon satisfied, for the first vessel was +that which William went in, who carried a flag of truce; and in a few +hours they all came to an anchor, and William came on board us with a +little boat, with the Chinese merchant in his company, and two other +merchants, who seemed to be a kind of brokers for the rest. + +Here he gave us an account how civilly he had been used; how they had +treated him with all imaginable frankness and openness; that they had +not only given him the full value of his spices and other goods which he +carried, in gold, by good weight, but had loaded the vessel again with +such goods as he knew we were willing to trade for; and that afterwards +they had resolved to bring the great ship out of the harbour, to lie +where we were, that so we might make what bargain we thought fit; +only William said he had promised, in our name, that we should use no +violence with them, nor detain any of the vessels after we had done +trading with them. I told him we would strive to outdo them in civility, +and that we would make good every part of his agreement; in token +whereof, I caused a white flag likewise to be spread at the poop of our +great ship, which was the signal agreed on. + +As to the third vessel which came with them, it was a kind of bark of +the country, who, having intelligence of our design to traffic, came +off to deal with us, bringing a great deal of gold and some provisions, +which at that time we were very glad of. + +In short, we traded upon the high seas with these men, and indeed we +made a very good market, and yet sold thieves' pennyworths too. We sold +here about sixty ton of spice, chiefly cloves and nutmegs, and above two +hundred bales of European goods, such as linen and woollen manufactures. +We considered we should have occasion for some such things ourselves, +and so we kept a good quantity of English stuffs, cloth, baize, &c., for +ourselves. I shall not take up any of the little room I have left here +with the further particulars of our trade; it is enough to mention, +that, except a parcel of tea, and twelve bales of fine China wrought +silks, we took nothing in exchange for our goods but gold; so that the +sum we took here in that glittering commodity amounted to above fifty +thousand ounces good weight. + +When we had finished our barter, we restored the hostages, and gave the +three merchants about the quantity of twelve hundredweight of nutmegs, +and as many of cloves, with a handsome present of European linen and +stuff for themselves, as a recompense for what we had taken from them; +so we sent them away exceedingly well satisfied. + +Here it was that William gave me an account, that while he was on board +the Japanese vessel, he met with a kind of religious, or Japan priest, +who spoke some words of English to him; and, being very inquisitive to +know how he came to learn any of those words, he told him that there +was in his country thirteen Englishmen; he called them Englishmen +very articulately and distinctly, for he had conversed with them very +frequently and freely. He said that they were all that were left of +two-and-thirty men, who came on shore on the north side of Japan, being +driven upon a great rock in a stormy night, where they lost their ship, +and the rest of their men were drowned; that he had persuaded the king +of his country to send boats off to the rock or island where the ship +was lost, to save the rest of the men, and to bring them on shore, which +was done, and they were used very kindly, and had houses built for +them, and land given them to plant for provision; and that they lived by +themselves. + +He said he went frequently among them, to persuade them to worship their +god (an idol, I suppose, of their own making), which, he said, they +ungratefully refused; and that therefore the king had once or twice +ordered them all to be put to death; but that, as he said, he had +prevailed upon the king to spare them, and let them live their own +way, as long as they were quiet and peaceable, and did not go about to +withdraw others from the worship of the country. + +I asked William why he did not inquire from whence they came. "I did," +said William; "for how could I but think it strange," said he, "to hear +him talk of Englishmen on the north side of Japan?" "Well," said I, +"what account did he give of it?" "An account," said William, "that will +surprise thee, and all the world after thee, that shall hear of it, +and which makes me wish thou wouldst go up to Japan and find them +out." "What do you mean?" said I. "Whence could they come?" "Why," says +William, "he pulled out a little book, and in it a piece of paper, where +it was written, in an Englishman's hand, and in plain English words, +thus; and," says William, "I read it myself:--'We came from Greenland, +and from the North Pole.'" This, indeed, was amazing to us all, and more +so to those seamen among us who knew anything of the infinite attempts +which had been made from Europe, as well by the English as the Dutch, +to discover a passage that way into those parts of the world; and as +William pressed as earnestly to go on to the north to rescue those poor +men, so the ship's company began to incline to it; and, in a word, we +all came to this, that we would stand in to the shore of Formosa, to +find this priest again, and have a further account of it all from him. +Accordingly, the sloop went over; but when they came there, the vessels +were very unhappily sailed, and this put an end to our inquiry after +them, and perhaps may have disappointed mankind of one of the most noble +discoveries that ever was made, or will again be made, in the world, for +the good of mankind in general; but so much for that. + +William was so uneasy at losing this opportunity, that he pressed us +earnestly to go up to Japan to find out these men. He told us that if +it was nothing but to recover thirteen honest poor men from a kind of +captivity, which they would otherwise never be redeemed from, and where, +perhaps, they might, some time or other, be murdered by the barbarous +people, in defence of their idolatry, it were very well worth our while, +and it would be, in some measure, making amends for the mischiefs we had +done in the world; but we, that had no concern upon us for the mischiefs +we had done, had much less about any satisfactions to be made for it, so +he found that kind of discourse would weigh very little with us. Then +he pressed us very earnestly to let him have the sloop to go by himself, +and I told him I would not oppose it; but when he came to the sloop none +of the men would go with him; for the case was plain, they had all a +share in the cargo of the great ship, as well as in that of the sloop, +and the richness of the cargo was such that they would not leave it by +any means; so poor William, much to his mortification, was obliged to +give it over. What became of those thirteen men, or whether they are not +there still, I can give no account of. + +We are now at the end of our cruise; what we had taken was indeed so +considerable, that it was not only enough to satisfy the most covetous +and the most ambitious minds in the world, but it did indeed satisfy +us, and our men declared they did not desire any more. The next motion, +therefore, was about going back, and the way by which we should perform +the voyage, so as not to be attacked by the Dutch in the Straits of +Sunda. + +We had pretty well stored ourselves here with provisions, and it being +now near the return of the monsoons, we resolved to stand away to the +southward; and not only to keep without the Philippine Islands, that is +to say, to the eastward of them, but to keep on to the southward, and +see if we could not leave not only the Moluccas, or Spice Islands, +behind us, but even Nova Guinea and Nova Hollandia also; and so getting +into the variable winds, to the south of the tropic of Capricorn, steer +away to the west, over the great Indian Ocean. + +This was indeed at first a monstrous voyage in its appearance, and the +want of provisions threatened us. William told us in so many words, that +it was impossible we could carry provisions enough to subsist us for +such a voyage, and especially fresh water; and that, as there would +be no land for us to touch at where we could get any supply, it was a +madness to undertake it. + +But I undertook to remedy this evil, and therefore desired them not +to be uneasy at that, for I knew that we might supply ourselves at +Mindanao, the most southerly island of the Philippines. + +Accordingly, we set sail, having taken all the provisions here that we +could get, the 28th of September, the wind veering a little at first +from the N.N.W. to the N.E. by E., but afterwards settled about the +N.E. and the E.N.E. We were nine weeks in this voyage, having met with +several interruptions by the weather, and put in under the lee of a +small island in the latitude of 16 degrees 12 minutes, of which we never +knew the name, none of our charts having given any account of it: I +say, we put in here by reason of a strange tornado or hurricane, which +brought us into a great deal of danger. Here we rode about sixteen days, +the winds being very tempestuous and the weather uncertain. However, we +got some provisions on shore, such as plants and roots, and a few hogs. +We believed there were inhabitants on the island, but we saw none of +them. + +From hence, the weather settling again, we went on and came to the +southernmost part of Mindanao, where we took in fresh water and some +cows, but the climate was so hot that we did not attempt to salt up any +more than so as to keep a fortnight or three weeks; and away we stood +southward, crossing the line, and, leaving Gillolo on the starboard +side, we coasted the country they call New Guinea, where, in the +latitude of eight degrees south, we put in again for provisions and +water, and where we found inhabitants; but they fled from us, and were +altogether inconversable. From thence, sailing still southward, we left +all behind us that any of our charts and maps took any notice of, and +went on till we came to the latitude of seventeen degrees, the wind +continuing still north-east. + +Here we made land to the westward, which, when we had kept in sight +for three days, coasting along the shore for the distance of about four +leagues, we began to fear we should find no outlet west, and so should +be obliged to go back again, and put in among the Moluccas at last; but +at length we found the land break off, and go trending away to the west +sea, seeming to be all open to the south and south-west, and a great sea +came rolling out of the south, which gave us to understand that there +was no land for a great way. + +In a word, we kept on our course to the south, a little westerly, till +we passed the south tropic, where we found the winds variable; and now +we stood away fair west, and held it out for about twenty days, when we +discovered land right ahead, and on our larboard bow; we made directly +to the shore, being willing to take all advantages now for supplying +ourselves with fresh provisions and water, knowing we were now entering +on that vast unknown Indian Ocean, perhaps the greatest sea on the +globe, having, with very little interruption of islands, a continued sea +quite round the globe. + +We found a good road here, and some people on shore; but when we landed, +they fled up the country, nor would they hold any correspondence with +us, nor come near us, but shot at us several times with arrows as long +as lances. We set up white flags for a truce, but they either did not +or would not understand it; on the contrary, they shot our flag of truce +through several times with their arrows, so that, in a word, we never +came near any of them. + +We found good water here, though it was something difficult to get at +it, but for living creatures we could see none; for the people, if +they had any cattle, drove them all away, and showed us nothing but +themselves, and that sometimes in a threatening posture, and in number +so great, that made us suppose the island to be greater than we first +imagined. It is true, they would not come near enough for us to engage +with them, at least not openly; but they came near enough for us to see +them, and, by the help of our glasses, to see that they were clothed and +armed, but their clothes were only about their lower and middle parts; +that they had long lances, half pikes, in their hands, besides bows +and arrows; that they had great high things on their heads, made, as we +believed, of feathers, and which looked something like our grenadiers' +caps in England. + +When we saw them so shy that they would not come near us, our men began +to range over the island, if it was such (for we never surrounded it), +to search for cattle, and for any of the Indian plantations, for fruits +or plants; but they soon found, to their cost, that they were to use +more caution than that came to, and that they were to discover perfectly +every bush and every tree before they ventured abroad in the country; +for about fourteen of our men going farther than the rest, into a part +of the country which seemed to be planted, as they thought, for it did +but seem so, only I think it was overgrown with canes, such as we make +our cane chairs with--I say, venturing too far, they were suddenly +attacked with a shower of arrows from almost every side of them, as they +thought, out of the tops of the trees. + +They had nothing to do but to fly for it, which, however, they could not +resolve on, till five of them were wounded; nor had they escaped so, if +one of them had not been so much wiser or thoughtfuller than the rest, +as to consider, that though they could not see the enemy, so as to shoot +at them, yet perhaps the noise of their shot might terrify them, and +that they should rather fire at a venture. Accordingly, ten of them +faced about, and fired at random anywhere among the canes. + +The noise and the fire not only terrified the enemy, but, as they +believed, their shot had luckily hit some of them; for they found not +only that the arrows, which came thick among them before, ceased, but +they heard the Indians halloo, after their way, to one another, and make +a strange noise, more uncouth and inimitably strange than any they had +ever heard, more like the howling and barking of wild creatures in the +woods than like the voice of men, only that sometimes they seemed to +speak words. + +They observed also, that this noise of the Indians went farther and +farther off, so that they were satisfied the Indians fled away, except +on one side, where they heard a doleful groaning and howling, and where +it continued a good while, which they supposed was from some or other +of them being wounded, and howling by reason of their wounds; or +killed, and others howling over them: but our men had enough of making +discoveries; so they did not trouble themselves to look farther, but +resolved to take this opportunity to retreat. But the worst of +their adventure was to come; for as they came back, they passed by a +prodigious great trunk of an old tree; what tree it was, they said, they +did not know, but it stood like an old decayed oak in a park, where the +keepers in England take a stand, as they call it, to shoot a deer; and +it stood just under the steep side of a great rock, or hill, that our +people could not see what was beyond it. + +As they came by this tree, they were of a sudden shot at, from the top +of the tree, with seven arrows and three lances, which, to our great +grief, killed two of our men, and wounded three more. This was the more +surprising, because, being without any defence, and so near the trees, +they expected more lances and arrows every moment; nor would flying do +them any service, the Indians being, as appeared, very good marksmen. +In this extremity, they had happily this presence of mind, viz., to run +close to the tree, and stand, as it were, under it; so that those above +could not come at, or see them, to throw their lances at them. This +succeeded, and gave them time to consider what to do; they knew their +enemies and murderers were above; they heard them talk, and those above +knew those were below; but they below were obliged to keep close for +fear of their lances from above. At length, one of our men, looking a +little more strictly than the rest, thought he saw the head of one of +the Indians just over a dead limb of the tree, which, it seems, the +creature sat upon. One man immediately fired, and levelled his piece so +true that the shot went through the fellow's head; and down he fell out +of the tree immediately, and came upon the ground with such force, with +the height of his fall, that if he had not been killed with the shot, +he would certainly have been killed with dashing his body against the +ground. + +This so frightened them, that, besides the howling noise they made in +the tree, our men heard a strange clutter of them in the body of the +tree, from whence they concluded they had made the tree hollow, and were +got to hide themselves there. Now, had this been the case, they were +secure enough from our men, for it was impossible any of our men could +get up the tree on the outside, there being no branches to climb by; +and, to shoot at the tree, that they tried several times to no purpose, +for the tree was so thick that no shot would enter it. They made no +doubt, however, but that they had their enemies in a trap, and that a +small siege would either bring them down, tree and all, or starve them +out; so they resolved to keep their post, and send to us for +help. Accordingly, two of them came away to us for more hands, and +particularly desired that some of our carpenters might come with tools, +to help to cut down the tree, or at least to cut down other wood and set +fire to it; and that, they concluded, would not fail to bring them out. + +Accordingly, our men went like a little army, and with mighty +preparations for an enterprise, the like of which has scarce been ever +heard, to form the siege of a great tree. However, when they came there, +they found the task difficult enough, for the old trunk was indeed a +very great one, and very tall, being at least two-and-twenty feet high, +with seven old limbs standing out every way from the top, but decayed, +and very few leaves, if any, left on it. + +William the Quaker, whose curiosity led him to go among the rest, +proposed that they should make a ladder, and get upon the top, and then +throw wild-fire into the tree, and smoke them out. Others proposed going +back, and getting a great gun out of the ship, which would split the +tree in pieces with the iron bullets; others, that they should cut down +a great deal of wood, and pile it up round the tree, and set it on fire, +and burn the tree, and the Indians in it. + +These consultations took up our people no less than two or three days, +in all which time they heard nothing of the supposed garrison within +this wooden castle, nor any noise within. William's project was first +gone about, and a large strong ladder was made, to scale this wooden +tower; and in two or three hours' time it would have been ready to +mount, when, on a sudden, they heard the noise of the Indians in the +body of the tree again, and a little after, several of them appeared at +the top of the tree, and threw some lances down at our men; one of which +struck one of our seamen a-top of the shoulder, and gave him such +a desperate wound, that the surgeons not only had a great deal of +difficulty to cure him, but the poor man endured such horrible torture, +that we all said they had better have killed him outright. However, he +was cured at last, though he never recovered the perfect use of his arm, +the lance having cut some of the tendons on the top of the arm, near the +shoulder, which, as I supposed, performed the office of motion to the +limb before; so that the poor man was a cripple all the days of his +life. But to return to the desperate rogues in the tree; our men shot at +them, but did not find they had hit them, or any of them; but as soon as +ever they shot at them, they could hear them huddle down into the trunk +of the tree again, and there, to be sure, they were safe. + +Well, however, it was this which put by the project of William's ladder; +for when it was done, who would venture up among such a troop of bold +creatures as were there, and who, they supposed, were desperate by their +circumstances? And as but one man at a time could go up, they began to +think it would not do; and, indeed, I was of the opinion (for about this +time I was come to their assistance) that going up the ladder would not +do, unless it was thus, that a man should, as it were, run just up to +the top, and throw some fireworks into the tree, and come down again; +and this we did two or three times, but found no effect of it. At +last, one of our gunners made a stink-pot, as we called it, being a +composition which only smokes, but does not flame or burn; but withal +the smoke of it is so thick, and the smell of it so intolerably +nauseous, that it is not to be suffered. This he threw into the tree +himself, and we waited for the effect of it, but heard or saw nothing +all that night or the next day; so we concluded the men within were all +smothered; when, on a sudden, the next night we heard them upon the top +of the tree again shouting and hallooing like madmen. + +We concluded, as anybody would, that this was to call for help, and we +resolved to continue our siege; for we were all enraged to see ourselves +so baulked by a few wild people, whom we thought we had safe in our +clutches; and, indeed, never were there so many concurring circumstances +to delude men in any case we had met with. We resolved, however, to try +another stink-pot the next night, and our engineer and gunner had got it +ready, when, hearing a noise of the enemy on the top of the tree, and +in the body of the tree, I was not willing to let the gunner go up the +ladder, which, I said, would be but to be certain of being murdered. +However, he found a medium for it, and that was to go up a few steps, +and, with a long pole in his hand, to throw it in upon the top of the +tree, the ladder being standing all this while against the top of the +tree; but when the gunner, with his machine at the top of his pole, came +to the tree, with three other men to help him, behold the ladder was +gone. + +This perfectly confounded us; and we now concluded the Indians in the +tree had, by this piece of negligence, taken the opportunity, and come +all down the ladder, made their escape, and had carried away the ladder +with them. I laughed most heartily at my friend William, who, as I +said, had the direction of the siege, and had set up a ladder for the +garrison, as we called them, to get down upon, and run away. But when +daylight came, we were all set to rights again; for there stood our +ladder, hauled up on the top of the tree, with about half of it in the +hollow of the tree, and the other half upright in the air. Then we began +to laugh at the Indians for fools, that they could not as well have +found their way down by the ladder, and have made their escape, as to +have pulled it up by main strength into the tree. + +We then resolved upon fire, and so to put an end to the work at once, +and burn the tree and its inhabitants together; and accordingly we +went to work to cut wood, and in a few hours' time we got enough, as we +thought, together; and, piling it up round the bottom of the tree, +we set it on fire, waiting at a distance to see when, the gentlemen's +quarters being too hot for them, they would come flying out at the top. +But we were quite confounded when, on a sudden, we found the fire all +put out by a great quantity of water thrown upon it. We then thought the +devil must be in them, to be sure. Says William, "This is certainly the +cunningest piece of Indian engineering that ever was heard of; and there +can be but one thing more to guess at, besides witchcraft and dealing +with the devil, which I believe not one word of," says he; "and that +must be, that this is an artificial tree, or a natural tree artificially +made hollow down into the earth, through root and all; and that these +creatures have an artificial cavity underneath it, quite into the hill, +or a way to go through, and under the hill, to some other place; and +where that other place is, we know not; but if it be not our own fault, +I'll find the place, and follow them into it, before I am two days +older." He then called the carpenters, to know of them if they had any +large saws that would cut through the body; and they told him they had +no saws that were long enough, nor could men work into such a monstrous +old stump in a great while; but that they would go to work with it with +their axes, and undertake to cut it down in two days, and stock up the +root of it in two more. But William was for another way, which proved +much better than all this; for he was for silent work, that, if +possible, he might catch some of the fellows in it. So he sets twelve +men to it with large augers, to bore great holes into the side of the +tree, to go almost through, but not quite through; which holes were +bored without noise, and when they were done he filled them all with +gunpowder, stopping strong plugs, bolted crossways, into the holes, and +then boring a slanting hole, of a less size, down into the greater hole, +all of which were filled with powder, and at once blown up. When they +took fire, they made such a noise, and tore and split up the tree in +so many places, and in such a manner, that we could see plainly such +another blast would demolish it; and so it did. Thus at the second time +we could, at two or three places, put our hands in them, and discovered +a cheat, namely, that there was a cave or hole dug into the earth, from +or through the bottom of the hollow, and that it had communication with +another cave farther in, where we heard the voices of several of the +wild folks, calling and talking to one another. + +When we came thus far we had a great mind to get at them; and William +desired that three men might be given him with hand-grenadoes; and he +promised to go down first, and boldly he did so; for William, to give +him his due, had the heart of a lion. + +They had pistols in their hands, and swords by their sides; but, as they +had taught the Indians before by their stink-pots, the Indians returned +them in their own kind; for they made such a smoke come up out of the +entrance into the cave or hollow, that William and his three men were +glad to come running out of the cave, and out of the tree too, for mere +want of breath; and indeed they were almost stifled. + +Never was a fortification so well defended, or assailants so many ways +defeated. We were now for giving it over, and particularly I called +William, and told him I could not but laugh to see us spinning out our +time here for nothing; that I could not imagine what we were doing; that +it was certain that the rogues that were in it were cunning to the +last degree, and it would vex anybody to be so baulked by a few naked +ignorant fellows; but still it was not worth our while to push it any +further, nor was there anything that I knew of to be got by the conquest +when it was made, so that I thought it high time to give it over. + +William acknowledged what I said was just, and that there was nothing +but our curiosity to be gratified in this attempt; and though, as he +said, he was very desirous to have searched into the thing, yet he would +not insist upon it; so we resolved to quit it and come away, which +we did. However, William said before we went he would have this +satisfaction of them, viz., to burn down the tree and stop up the +entrance into the cave. And while doing this the gunner told him he +would have one satisfaction of the rogues; and this was, that he would +make a mine of it, and see which way it had vent. Upon this he fetched +two barrels of powder out of the ships, and placed them in the inside of +the hollow of the cave, as far in as he durst go to carry them, and then +filling up the mouth of the cave where the tree stood, and ramming it +sufficiently hard, leaving only a pipe or touch-hole, he gave fire to +it, and stood at a distance to see which way it would operate, when on +a sudden he found the force of the powder burst its way out among some +bushes on the other side the little hill I mentioned, and that it came +roaring out there as out of the mouth of a cannon. Immediately running +thither, we saw the effects of the powder. + +First, we saw that there was the other mouth of the cave, which the +powder had so torn and opened, that the loose earth was so fallen in +again that nothing of shape could be discerned; but there we saw what +was become of the garrison of the Indians, too, who had given us all +this trouble, for some of them had no arms, some no legs, some no head; +some lay half buried in the rubbish of the mine--that is to say, in the +loose earth that fell in; and, in short, there was a miserable havoc +made in them all; for we had good reason to believe not one of them that +were in the inside could escape, but rather were shot out of the mouth +of the cave, like a bullet out of a gun. + +We had now our full satisfaction of the Indians; but, in short, this was +a losing voyage, for we had two men killed, one quite crippled, and five +more wounded; we spent two barrels of powder, and eleven days' time, and +all to get the understanding how to make an Indian mine, or how to keep +garrison in a hollow tree; and with this wit, bought at this dear +price, we came away, having taken in some fresh water, but got no fresh +provisions. + +We then considered what we should do to get back again to Madagascar. +We were much about the latitude of the Cape of Good Hope, but had such a +very long run, and were neither sure of meeting with fair winds nor with +any land in the way, that we knew not what to think of it. William +was our last resort in this case again, and he was very plain with us. +"Friend," says he to Captain Wilmot, "what occasion hast thou to run the +venture of starving, merely for the pleasure of saying thou hast been +where nobody has been before? There are a great many places nearer +home, of which thou mayest say the same thing at less expense. I see no +occasion thou hast of keeping thus far south any longer than till you +are sure you are to the west end of Java and Sumatra; and then thou +mayest stand away north towards Ceylon, and the coast of Coromandel and +Madras, where thou mayest get both fresh water and fresh provisions; and +to that part it is likely we may hold out well enough with the stores we +have already." + +This was wholesome advice, and such as was not to be slighted; so we +stood away to the west, keeping between the latitude of 31 and 35, and +had very good weather and fair winds for about ten days' sail; by which +time, by our reckoning, we were clear of the isles, and might run away +to the north; and if we did not fall in with Ceylon, we should at least +go into the great deep Bay of Bengal. + +But we were out in our reckoning a great deal; for, when we had stood +due north for about fifteen or sixteen degrees, we met with land again +on our starboard bow, about three leagues' distance; so we came to an +anchor about half a league from it, and manned out our boats to see what +sort of a country it was. We found it a very good one; fresh water easy +to come at, but no cattle that we could see, or inhabitants; and we +were very shy of searching too far after them, lest we should make such +another journey as we did last; so that we let rambling alone, and chose +rather to take what we could find, which was only a few wild mangoes, +and some plants of several kinds, which we knew not the names of. + +We made no stay here, but put to sea again, N.W. by N., but had little +wind for a fortnight more, when we made land again; and standing in with +the shore, we were surprised to find ourselves on the south shore of +Java; and just as we were coming to an anchor we saw a boat, carrying +Dutch colours, sailing along-shore. We were not solicitous to speak +with them, or any other of their nation, but left it indifferent to our +people, when they went on shore, to see the Dutchmen or not to see them; +our business was to get provisions, which, indeed, by this time were +very short with us. + +We resolved to go on shore with our boats in the most convenient place +we could find, and to look out a proper harbour to bring the ship into, +leaving it to our fate whether we should meet with friends or enemies; +resolving, however, not to stay any considerable time, at least not +long enough to have expresses sent across the island to Batavia, and for +ships to come round from thence to attack us. + +We found, according to our desire, a very good harbour, where we rode +in seven fathom water, well defended from the weather, whatever might +happen; and here we got fresh provisions, such as good hogs and some +cows; and that we might lay in a little store, we killed sixteen cows, +and pickled and barrelled up the flesh as well as we could be supposed +to do in the latitude of eight degrees from the line. + +We did all this in about five days, and filled our casks with water; and +the last boat was coming off with herbs and roots, we being unmoored, +and our fore-topsail loose for sailing, when we spied a large ship to +the northward, bearing down directly upon us. We knew not what she might +be, but concluded the worst, and made all possible haste to get our +anchor up, and get under sail, that we might be in a readiness to see +what she had to say to us, for we were under no great concern for one +ship, but our notion was, that we should be attacked by three or four +together. + +By the time we had got up our anchor and the boat was stowed, the ship +was within a league of us, and, as we thought, bore down to engage us; +so we spread our black flag, or ancient, on the poop, and the bloody +flag at the top-mast-head, and having made a clear ship, we stretched +away to the westward, to get the wind of him. + +They had, it seems, quite mistaken us before, expecting nothing of an +enemy or a pirate in those seas; and, not doubting but we had been one +of their own ships, they seemed to be in some confusion when they found +their mistake, so they immediately hauled upon a wind on the other tack, +and stood edging in for the shore, towards the easternmost part of the +island. Upon this we tacked, and stood after him with all the sail we +could, and in two hours came almost within gunshot. Though they crowded +all the sail they could lay on, there was no remedy but to engage us, +and they soon saw their inequality of force. We fired a gun for them to +bring to; so they manned out their boat, and sent to us with a flag of +truce. We sent back the boat, but with this answer to the captain, that +he had nothing to do but to strike and bring his ship to an anchor +under our stern, and come on board us himself, when he should know our +demands; but that, however, since he had not yet put us to the trouble +of forcing him, which we saw we were able to do, we assured them that +the captain should return again in safety, and all his men, and that, +supplying us with such things as we should demand, his ship should not +be plundered. They went back with this message, and it was some time +after they were on board before they struck, which made us begin to +think they refused it; so we fired a shot, and in a few minutes more we +perceived their boat put off; and as soon as the boat put off the ship +struck and came to an anchor, as was directed. + +When the captain came on board, we demanded an account of their cargo, +which was chiefly bales of goods from Bengal for Bantam. We told them +our present want was provisions, which they had no need of, being just +at the end of their voyage; and that, if they would send their boat on +shore with ours, and procure us six-and-twenty head of black cattle, +threescore hogs, a quantity of brandy and arrack, and three hundred +bushels of rice, we would let them go free. + +As to the rice, they gave us six hundred bushels, which they had +actually on board, together with a parcel shipped upon freight. Also, +they gave us thirty middling casks of very good arrack, but beef and +pork they had none. However, they went on shore with our men, and bought +eleven bullocks and fifty hogs, which were pickled up for our occasion; +and upon the supplies of provision from shore, we dismissed them and +their ship. + +We lay here several days before we could furnish ourselves with the +provisions agreed for, and some of the men fancied the Dutchmen were +contriving our destruction; but they were very honest, and did what they +could to furnish the black cattle, but found it impossible to supply so +many. So they came and told us ingenuously, that, unless we could stay +a while longer, they could get no more oxen or cows than those eleven, +with which we were obliged to be satisfied, taking the value of them +in other things, rather than stay longer there. On our side, we were +punctual with them in observing the conditions we had agreed on; nor +would we let any of our men so much as go on board them, or suffer any +of their men to come on board us; for, had any of our men gone on board, +nobody could have answered for their behaviour, any more than if they +had been on shore in an enemy's country. + +We were now victualled for our voyage; and, as we mattered not purchase, +we went merrily on for the coast of Ceylon, where we intended to touch, +to get fresh water again, and more provisions; and we had nothing +material offered in this part of the voyage, only that we met with +contrary winds, and were above a month in the passage. + +We put in upon the south coast of the island, desiring to have as little +to do with the Dutch as we could; and as the Dutch were lords of the +country as to commerce, so they are more so of the sea-coast, where they +have several forts, and, in particular, have all the cinnamon, which is +the trade of that island. + +We took in fresh water here, and some provisions, but did not much +trouble ourselves about laying in any stores, our beef and hogs, which +we got at Java, being not yet all gone by a good deal. We had a little +skirmish on shore here with some of the people of the island, some of +our men having been a little too familiar with the homely ladies of the +country; for homely, indeed, they were, to such a degree, that if our +men had not had good stomachs that way, they would scarce have touched +any of them. + +I could never fully get it out of our men what they did, they were so +true to one another in their wickedness, but I understood in the main, +that it was some barbarous thing they had done, and that they had like +to have paid dear for it, for the men resented it to the last degree, +and gathered in such numbers about them, that, had not sixteen more of +our men, in another boat, come all in the nick of time, just to rescue +our first men, who were but eleven, and so fetch them off by main force, +they had been all cut off, the inhabitants being no less than two or +three hundred, armed with darts and lances, the usual weapons of the +country, and which they are very dexterous at the throwing, even so +dexterous that it was scarce credible; and had our men stood to fight +them, as some of them were bold enough to talk of, they had been all +overwhelmed and killed. As it was, seventeen of our men were wounded, +and some of them very dangerously. But they were more frighted than hurt +too, for every one of them gave themselves over for dead men, believing +the lances were poisoned. But William was our comfort here too; for, +when two of our surgeons were of the same opinion, and told the men +foolishly enough that they would die, William cheerfully went to work +with them, and cured them all but one, who rather died by drinking some +arrack punch than of his wound; the excess of drinking throwing him into +a fever. + +We had enough of Ceylon, though some of our people were for going +ashore again, sixty or seventy men together, to be revenged; but William +persuaded them against it; and his reputation was so great among the +men, as well as with us that were commanders, that he could influence +them more than any of us. + +They were mighty warm upon their revenge, and they would go on shore, +and destroy five hundred of them. "Well," says William, "and suppose you +do, what are you the better?" "Why, then," says one of them, speaking +for the rest, "we shall have our satisfaction." "Well, and what will you +be the better for that?" says William. They could then say nothing to +that. "Then," says William, "if I mistake not, your business is money; +now, I desire to know, if you conquer and kill two or three thousand of +these poor creatures, they have no money, pray what will you get? They +are poor naked wretches; what shall you gain by them? But then," says +William, "perhaps, in doing this, you may chance to lose half-a-score of +your own company, as it is very probable you may. Pray, what gain is +in it? and what account can you give the captain for his lost men?" In +short, William argued so effectually, that he convinced them that it +was mere murder to do so; and that the men had a right to their own, +and that they had no right to take them away; that it was destroying +innocent men, who had acted no otherwise than as the laws of nature +dictated; and that it would be as much murder to do so, as to meet a man +on the highway, and kill him, for the mere sake of it, in cold blood, +not regarding whether he had done any wrong to us or no. + +These reasons prevailed with them at last, and they were content to +go away, and leave them as they found them. In the first skirmish they +killed between sixty and seventy men, and wounded a great many more; but +they had nothing, and our people got nothing by it, but the loss of one +man's life, and the wounding sixteen more, as above. + +But another accident brought us to a necessity of further business with +these people, and indeed we had like to have put an end to our lives +and adventures all at once among them; for, about three days after our +putting out to sea from the place where we had that skirmish, we +were attacked by a violent storm of wind from the south, or rather a +hurricane of wind from all the points southward, for it blew in a most +desperate and furious manner from the S.E. to the S.W., one minute at +one point, and then instantly turning about again to another point, +but with the same violence; nor were we able to work the ship in that +condition, so that the ship I was in split three top-sails, and at last +brought the main-top-mast by the board; and, in a word, we were once or +twice driven right ashore; and one time, had not the wind shifted the +very moment it did, we had been dashed in a thousand pieces upon a great +ledge of rocks which lay off about half-a-league from the shore; but, +as I have said, the wind shifting very often, and at that time coming +to the E.S.E., we stretched off, and got above a league more sea-room in +half-an-hour. After that, it blew with some fury S.W. by S., then S.W. +by W., and put us back again a great way to the eastward of the ledge +of rocks, where we found a great opening between the rocks and the land, +and endeavoured to come to an anchor there, but we found there was no +ground fit to anchor in, and that we should lose our anchors, there +being nothing but rocks. We stood through the opening, which held about +four leagues. The storm continued, and now we found a dreadful foul +shore, and knew not what course to take. We looked out very narrowly +for some river or creek or bay, where we might run in, and come to an +anchor, but found none a great while. At length we saw a great headland +lie out far south into the sea, and that to such a length, that, in +short, we saw plainly that, if the wind held where it was, we could not +weather it, so we ran in as much under the lee of the point as we could, +and came to an anchor in about twelve fathom water. + +But the wind veering again in the night, and blowing exceedingly hard, +our anchors came home, and the ship drove till the rudder struck against +the ground; and had the ship gone half her length farther she had been +lost, and every one of us with her. But our sheet-anchor held its own, +and we heaved in some of the cable, to get clear of the ground we had +struck upon. It was by this only cable that we rode it out all night; +and towards morning we thought the wind abated a little; and it was well +for us that it was so, for, in spite of what our sheet-anchor did for +us, we found the ship fast aground in the morning, to our very great +surprise and amazement. + +When the tide was out, though the water here ebbed away, the ship lay +almost dry upon a bank of hard sand, which never, I suppose, had any +ship upon it before. The people of the country came down in great +numbers to look at us and gaze, not knowing what we were, but gaping at +us as at a great sight or wonder at which they were surprised, and knew +not what to do. + +I have reason to believe that upon the sight they immediately sent an +account of a ship being there, and of the condition we were in, for the +next day there appeared a great man; whether it was their king or no +I know not, but he had abundance of men with him, and some with long +javelins in their hands as long as half-pikes; and these came all down +to the water's edge, and drew up in a very good order, just in our view. +They stood near an hour without making any motion; and then there came +near twenty of them, with a man before them carrying a white flag. They +came forward into the water as high as their waists, the sea not going +so high as before, for the wind was abated, and blew off the shore. + +The man made a long oration to us, as we could see by his gestures; and +we sometimes heard his voice, but knew not one word he said. William, +who was always useful to us, I believe was here again the saving of all +our lives. The case was this: The fellow, or what I might call him, when +his speech was done, gave three great screams (for I know not what else +to say they were), then lowered his white flag three times, and then +made three motions to us with his arm to come to him. + +I acknowledge that I was for manning out the boat and going to them, but +William would by no means allow me. He told me we ought to trust nobody; +that, if they were barbarians, and under their own government, we might +be sure to be all murdered; and, if they were Christians, we should not +fare much better, if they knew who we were; that it was the custom of +the Malabars to betray all people that they could get into their hands, +and that these were some of the same people; and that, if we had any +regard to our own safety, we should not go to them by any means. I +opposed him a great while, and told him I thought he used to be always +right, but that now I thought he was not; that I was no more for running +needless risks than he or any one else; but I thought all nations in the +world, even the most savage people, when they held out a flag of peace, +kept the offer of peace made by that signal very sacredly; and I gave +him several examples of it in the history of my African travels, which +I have here gone through in the beginning of this work, and that I could +not think these people worse than some of them. And, besides, I told him +our case seemed to be such that we must fall into somebody's hands or +other, and that we had better fall into their hands by a friendly treaty +than by a forced submission, nay, though they had indeed a treacherous +design; and therefore I was for a parley with them. + +"Well, friend," says William very gravely, "if thou wilt go I cannot +help it; I shall only desire to take my last leave of thee at parting, +for, depend upon it, thou wilt never see us again. Whether we in the +ship may come off any better at last I cannot resolve thee; but this I +will answer for, that we will not give up our lives idly, and in cool +blood, as thou art going to do; we will at least preserve ourselves as +long as we can, and die at last like men, not like fools, trepanned by +the wiles of a few barbarians." + +William spoke this with so much warmth, and yet with so much assurance +of our fate, that I began to think a little of the risk I was going to +run. I had no more mind to be murdered than he; and yet I could not for +my life be so faint-hearted in the thing as he. Upon which I asked him +if he had any knowledge of the place, or had ever been there. He said, +No. Then I asked him if he had heard or read anything about the people +of this island, and of their way of treating any Christians that had +fallen into their hands; and he told me he had heard of one, and +he would tell me the story afterward. His name, he said, was Knox, +commander of an East India ship, who was driven on shore, just as we +were, upon this island of Ceylon, though he could not say it was at the +same place, or whereabouts; that he was beguiled by the barbarians, and +enticed to come on shore, just as we were invited to do at that time; +and that, when they had him, they surrounded him, and eighteen or twenty +of his men, and never suffered them to return, but kept them prisoners, +or murdered them, he could not tell which; but they were carried away +up into the country, separated from one another, and never heard of +afterwards, except the captain's son, who miraculously made his escape, +after twenty years' slavery. + +I had no time then to ask him to give the full story of this Knox, much +less to hear him tell it me; but, as it is usual in such cases, when +one begins to be a little touched, I turned short with him. "Why then, +friend William," said I, "what would you have us do? You see what +condition we are in, and what is before us; something must be done, and +that immediately." "Why," says William, "I'll tell thee what thou shalt +do; first, cause a white flag to be hanged out, as they do to us, and +man out the longboat and pinnace with as many men as they can well stow, +to handle their arms, and let me go with them, and thou shalt see what +we will do. If I miscarry, thou mayest be safe; and I will also tell +thee, that if I do miscarry, it shall be my own fault, and thou shalt +learn wit by my folly." + +I knew not what to reply to him at first; but, after some pause, I said, +"William, William, I am as loath you should be lost as you are that I +should; and if there be any danger, I desire you may no more fall into +it than I. Therefore, if you will, let us all keep in the ship, fare +alike, and take our fate together." + +"No, no," says William, "there's no danger in the method I propose; thou +shalt go with me, if thou thinkest fit. If thou pleasest but to follow +the measures that I shall resolve on, depend upon it, though we will +go off from the ships, we will not a man of us go any nearer them than +within call to talk with them. Thou seest they have no boats to come off +to us; but," says he, "I rather desire thou wouldst take my advice, and +manage the ships as I shall give the signal from the boat, and let us +concert that matter together before we go off." + +Well, I found William had his measures in his head all laid beforehand, +and was not at a loss what to do at all; so I told him he should be +captain for this voyage, and we would be all of us under his orders, +which I would see observed to a tittle. + +Upon this conclusion of our debates, he ordered four-and-twenty men into +the long-boat, and twelve men into the pinnace, and the sea being now +pretty smooth, they went off, being all very well armed. Also he ordered +that all the guns of the great ship, on the side which lay next the +shore, should be loaded with musket-balls, old nails, stubs, and +such-like pieces of old iron, lead, and anything that came to hand; and +that we should prepare to fire as soon as ever we saw them lower the +white flag and hoist up a red one in the pinnace. + +With these measures fixed between us, they went off towards the shore, +William in the pinnace with twelve men, and the long-boat coming after +him with four-and-twenty more, all stout resolute fellows, and very +well armed. They rowed so near the shore as that they might speak to one +another, carrying a white flag, as the other did, and offering a parley. +The brutes, for such they were, showed themselves very courteous; but +finding we could not understand them, they fetched an old Dutchman, who +had been their prisoner many years, and set him to speak to us. The sum +and substance of his speech was, that the king of the country had sent +his general down to know who we were, and what our business was. William +stood up in the stern of the pinnace, and told him, that as to that, he, +that was an European, by his language and voice, might easily know what +we were, and our condition; the ship being aground upon the sand would +also tell him that our business there was that of a ship in distress; so +William desired to know what they came down for with such a multitude, +and with arms and weapons, as if they came to war with us. + +He answered, they might have good reason to come down to the shore, the +country being alarmed with the appearance of ships of strangers upon +the coast; and as our vessels were full of men, and as we had guns and +weapons, the king had sent part of his military men, that, in case of +any invasion upon the country, they might be ready to defend themselves, +whatsoever might be the occasion. + +"But," says he, "as you are men in distress, the king has ordered his +general, who is here also, to give you all the assistance he can, and to +invite you on shore, and receive you with all possible courtesy." Says +William, very quick upon him, "Before I give thee an answer to that, +I desire thee to tell me what thou art, for by thy speech thou art an +European." He answered presently, he was a Dutchman. "That I know well," +says William, "by thy speech; but art thou a native Dutchman of Holland, +or a native of this country, that has learned Dutch by conversing among +the Hollanders, who we know are settled upon this island?" + +"No," says the old man, "I am a native of Delft, in the province of +Holland, in Europe." + +"Well," says William, immediately, "but art thou a Christian or a +heathen, or what we call a renegado?" + +"I am," says he, "a Christian." And so they went on, in a short +dialogue, as follows:-- + +_William_. Thou art a Dutchman, and a Christian, thou sayest; pray, art +thou a freeman or a servant? + +_Dutchman_. I am a servant to the king here, and in his army. + +_W_. But art thou a volunteer, or a prisoner? + +_D_. Indeed I was a prisoner at first, but am at liberty now, and so am +a volunteer. + +_W_. That is to say, being first a prisoner, thou hast liberty to serve +them; but art thou so at liberty that thou mayest go away, if thou +pleasest, to thine own countrymen? + +_D_. No, I do not say so; my countrymen live a great way off, on the +north and east parts of the island, and there is no going to them +without the king's express license. + +_W_. Well, and why dost thou not get a license to go away? + +_D_. I have never asked for it. + +_W_. And, I suppose, if thou didst, thou knowest thou couldst not obtain +it. + +_D_. I cannot say much as to that; but why do you ask me all these +questions? + +_W_. Why, my reason is good; if thou art a Christian and a prisoner, +how canst thou consent to be made an instrument to these barbarians, +to betray us into their hands, who are thy countrymen and +fellow-Christians? Is it not a barbarous thing in thee to do so? + +_D_. How do I go about to betray you? Do I not give you an account how +the king invites you to come on shore, and has ordered you to be treated +courteously and assisted? + +_W_. As thou art a Christian, though I doubt it much, dost thou believe +the king or the general, as thou callest it, means one word of what he +says? + +_D_. He promises you by the mouth of his great general. + +_W_. I don't ask thee what he promises, or by whom; but I ask thee this: +Canst thou say that thou believest he intends to perform it? + +_D_. How can I answer that? How can I tell what he intends? + +_W_. Thou canst tell what thou believest. + +_D_. I cannot say but he will perform it; I believe he may. + +_W_. Thou art but a double-tongued Christian, I doubt. Come, I'll ask +thee another question: Wilt thou say that thou believest it, and that +thou wouldst advise me to believe it, and put our lives into their hands +upon these promises? + +_D_. I am not to be your adviser. + +_W_. Thou art perhaps afraid to speak thy mind, because thou art in +their power. Pray, do any of them understand what thou and I say? Can +they speak Dutch? + +_D_. No, not one of them; I have no apprehensions upon that account at +all. + +_W_. Why, then, answer me plainly, if thou art a Christian: Is it safe +for us to venture upon their words, to put ourselves into their hands, +and come on shore? + +_D_. You put it very home to me. Pray let me ask you another question: +Are you in any likelihood of getting your ship off, if you refuse it? + +_W_. Yes, yes, we shall get off the ship; now the storm is over we don't +fear it. + +_D_. Then I cannot say it is best for you to trust them. + +_W_. Well, it is honestly said. + +_D_. But what shall I say to them? + +_W_. Give them good words, as they give us. + +_D_. What good words? + +_W_. Why, let them tell the king that we are strangers, who were driven +on his coast by a great storm; that we thank him very kindly for his +offer of civility to us, which, if we are further distressed, we will +accept thankfully; but that at present we have no occasion to come on +shore; and besides, that we cannot safely leave the ship in the present +condition she is in; but that we are obliged to take care of her, in +order to get her off; and expect, in a tide or two more, to get her +quite clear, and at an anchor. + +_D_. But he will expect you to come on shore, then, to visit him, and +make him some present for his civility. + +_W_. When we have got our ship clear, and stopped the leaks, we will pay +our respects to him. + +_D_. Nay, you may as well come to him now as then. + +_W_. Nay, hold, friend; I did not say we would come to him then: you +talked of making him a present, that is to pay our respects to him, is +it not? + +_D_. Well, but I will tell him that you will come on shore to him when +your ship is got off. + +_W_. I have nothing to say to that; you may tell him what you think fit. + +_D_. But he will be in a great rage if I do not. + +_W_. Who will he be in a great rage at? + +_D_. At you. + +_W_. What occasion have we to value that? + +_D_. Why, he will send all his army down against you. + +_W_. And what if they were all here just now? What dost thou suppose +they could do to us? + +_D_. He would expect they should burn your ships and bring you all to +him. + +_W_. Tell him, if he should try, he may catch a Tartar. + +_D_. He has a world of men. + +_W_. Has he any ships? + +_D_. No, he has no ships. + +_W_. Nor boats? + +_D_. No, nor boats. + +_W_. Why, what then do you think we care for his men? What canst thou do +now to us, if thou hadst a hundred thousand with thee? + +_D_. Oh! they might set you on fire. + +_W_. Set us a-firing, thou meanest; that they might indeed; but set us +on fire they shall not; they may try, at their peril, and we shall make +mad work with your hundred thousand men, if they come within reach of +our guns, I assure thee. + +_D_. But what if the king gives you hostages for your safety? + +_W_. Whom can he give but mere slaves and servants like thyself, whose +lives he no more values than we an English hound? + +_D_. Whom do you demand for hostages? + +_W_. Himself and your worship. + +_D_. What would you do with him? + +_W_. Do with him as he would do with us--cut his head off. + +_D_. And what would you do with me? + +_W_. Do with thee? We would carry thee home into thine own country; and, +though thou deservest the gallows, we would make a man and a Christian +of thee again, and not do by thee as thou wouldst have done by +us--betray thee to a parcel of merciless, savage pagans, that know no +God, nor how to show mercy to man. + +_D_. You put a thought in my head that I will speak to you about +to-morrow. + +Thus they went away, and William came on board, and gave us a full +account of his parley with the old Dutchman, which was very diverting, +and to me instructing; for I had abundance of reason to acknowledge +William had made a better judgment of things than I. + +It was our good fortune to get our ship off that very night, and to +bring her to an anchor at about a mile and a half farther out, and in +deep water, to our great satisfaction; so that we had no need to fear +the Dutchman's king, with his hundred thousand men; and indeed we +had some sport with them the next day, when they came down, a +vast prodigious multitude of them, very few less in number, in our +imagination, than a hundred thousand, with some elephants; though, if it +had been an army of elephants, they could have done us no harm; for we +were fairly at our anchor now, and out of their reach. And indeed we +thought ourselves more out of their reach than we really were; and it +was ten thousand to one that we had not been fast aground again, for the +wind blowing off shore, though it made the water smooth where we lay, +yet it blew the ebb farther out than usual, and we could easily perceive +the sand, which we touched upon before, lay in the shape of a half-moon, +and surrounded us with two horns of it, so that we lay in the middle +or centre of it, as in a round bay, safe just as we were, and in deep +water, but present death, as it were, on the right hand and on the left, +for the two horns or points of the sand reached out beyond where our +ship lay near two miles. + +On that part of the sand which lay on our east side, this misguided +multitude extended themselves; and being, most of them, not above their +knees, or most of them not above ankle-deep in the water, they as it +were surrounded us on that side, and on the side of the mainland, and a +little way on the other side of the sand, standing in a half-circle, +or rather three-fifths of a circle, for about six miles in length. The +other horn, or point of the sand, which lay on our west side, being not +quite so shallow, they could not extend themselves upon it so far. + +They little thought what service they had done us, and how unwittingly, +and by the greatest ignorance, they had made themselves pilots to us, +while we, having not sounded the place, might have been lost before we +were aware. It is true we might have sounded our new harbour before we +had ventured out, but I cannot say for certain whether we should or not; +for I, for my part, had not the least suspicion of what our real case +was; however, I say, perhaps, before we had weighed, we should have +looked about us a little. I am sure we ought to have done it; for, +besides these armies of human furies, we had a very leaky ship, and +all our pumps could hardly keep the water from growing upon us, and our +carpenters were overboard, working to find out and stop the wounds we +had received, heeling her first on the one side, and then on the other; +and it was very diverting to see how, when our men heeled the ship over +to the side next the wild army that stood on the east horn of the sand, +they were so amazed, between fright and joy, that it put them into a +kind of confusion, calling to one another, hallooing and skreeking, in a +manner that it is impossible to describe. + +While we were doing this, for we were in a great hurry you may be sure, +and all hands at work, as well at the stopping our leaks as repairing +our rigging and sails, which had received a great deal of damage, and +also in rigging a new main-top-mast and the like;--I say, while we were +doing all this, we perceived a body of men, of near a thousand, move +from that part of the army of the barbarians that lay at the bottom of +the sandy bay, and came all along the water's edge, round the sand, till +they stood just on our broadside east, and were within about half-a-mile +of us. Then we saw the Dutchman come forward nearer to us, and all +alone, with his white flag and all his motions, just as before, and +there he stood. + +Our men had but just brought the ship to rights again as they came up to +our broadside, and we had very happily found out and stopped the worst +and most dangerous leak that we had, to our very great satisfaction; +so I ordered the boats to be hauled up and manned as they were the day +before, and William to go as plenipotentiary. I would have gone myself +if I had understood Dutch, but as I did not, it was to no purpose, for +I should be able to know nothing of what was said but from him +at second-hand, which might be done as well afterwards. All the +instructions I pretended to give William was, if possible, to get the +old Dutchman away, and, if he could, to make him come on board. + +Well, William went just as before, and when he came within about sixty +or seventy yards of the shore, he held up his white flag as the Dutchman +did, and turning the boat's broadside to the shore, and his men lying +upon their oars, the parley or dialogue began again thus:-- + +_William_. Well, friend, what dost thou say to us now? + +_Dutchman_. I come of the same mild errand as I did yesterday. + +_W_. What! dost thou pretend to come of a mild errand with all these +people at thy back, and all the foolish weapons of war they bring with +them? Prithee, what dost thou mean? + +_D_. The king hastens us to invite the captain and all his men to come +on shore, and has ordered all his men to show them all the civility they +can. + +_W_. Well, and are all those men come to invite us ashore? + +D. They will do you no hurt, if you will come on shore peaceably. + +W. Well, and what dost thou think they can do to us, if we will not? + +D. I would not have them do you any hurt then, neither. + +W. But prithee, friend, do not make thyself fool and knave too. Dost not +thou know that we are out of fear of all thy army, and out of danger +of all that they can do? What makes thee act so simply as well as so +knavishly? + +D. Why, you may think yourselves safer than you are; you do not know +what they may do to you. I can assure you they are able to do you a +great deal of harm, and perhaps burn your ship. + +W. Suppose that were true, as I am sure it is false; you see we have +more ships to carry us off (pointing to the sloop). + +[N.B.--Just at this time we discovered the sloop standing towards us +from the east, along the shore, at about the distance of two leagues, +which was to our particular satisfaction, she having been missing +thirteen days.] + +D. We do not value that; if you had ten ships, you dare not come on +shore, with all the men you have, in a hostile way; we are too many for +you. + +W. Thou dost not, even in that, speak as thou meanest; and we may give +thee a trial of our hands when our friends come up to us, for thou +hearest they have discovered us. + +[Just then the sloop fired five guns, which was to get news of us, for +they did not see us.] + +D. Yes, I hear they fire; but I hope your ship will not fire again; for, +if they do, our general will take it for breaking the truce, and will +make the army let fly a shower of arrows at you in the boat. + +W. Thou mayest be sure the ship will fire that the other ship may hear +them, but not with ball. If thy general knows no better, he may begin +when he will; but thou mayest be sure we will return it to his cost. + +D. What must I do, then? + +W. Do! Why, go to him, and tell him of it beforehand, then; and let +him know that the ship firing is not at him nor his men; and then come +again, and tell us what he says. + +D. No; I will send to him, which will do as well. + +W. Do as thou wilt, but I believe thou hadst better go thyself; for if +our men fire first, I suppose he will be in a great wrath, and it may be +at thee; for, as to his wrath at us, we tell thee beforehand we value it +not. + +D. You slight them too much; you know not what they may do. + +W. Thou makest as if these poor savage wretches could do mighty things: +prithee, let us see what you can all do, we value it not; thou mayest +set down thy flag of truce when thou pleasest, and begin. + +D. I had rather make a truce, and have you all part friends. + +W. Thou art a deceitful rogue thyself, for it is plain thou knowest +these people would only persuade us on shore to entrap and surprise us; +and yet thou that art a Christian, as thou callest thyself, would have +us come on shore and put our lives into their hands who know nothing +that belongs to compassion, good usage, or good manners. How canst thou +be such a villain? + +D. How can you call me so? What have I done to you, and what would you +have me do? + +W. Not act like a traitor, but like one that was once a Christian, and +would have been so still, if you had not been a Dutchman. + +D. I know not what to do, not I. I wish I were from them; they are a +bloody people. + +W. Prithee, make no difficulty of what thou shouldst do. Canst thou +swim? + +D. Yes, I can swim; but if I should attempt to swim off to you, I should +have a thousand arrows and javelins sticking in me before I should get +to your boat. + +W. I'll bring the boat close to thee, and take thee on board in spite +of them all. We will give them but one volley, and I'll engage they will +all run away from thee. + +D. You are mistaken in them, I assure you; they would immediately come +all running down to the shore, and shoot fire-arrows at you, and set +your boat and ship and all on fire about your ears. + +W. We will venture that if thou wilt come off. + +D. Will you use me honourably when I am among you? + +W. I'll give thee my word for it, if thou provest honest. + +D. Will you not make me a prisoner? + +W. I will be thy surety, body for body, that thou shalt be a free man, +and go whither thou wilt, though I own to thee thou dost not deserve it. + +Just at this time our ship fired three guns to answer the sloop and let +her know we saw her, who immediately, we perceived, understood it, +and stood directly for the place. But it is impossible to express the +confusion and filthy vile noise, the hurry and universal disorder, that +was among that vast multitude of people upon our firing off three guns. +They immediately all repaired to their arms, as I may call it; for to +say they put themselves into order would be saying nothing. + +Upon the word of command, then, they advanced all in a body to the +seaside, and resolving to give us one volley of their fire-arms (for +such they were), immediately they saluted us with a hundred thousand of +their fire-arrows, every one carrying a little bag of cloth dipped +in brimstone, or some such thing, which, flying through the air, had +nothing to hinder it taking fire as it flew, and it generally did so. + +I cannot say but this method of attacking us, by a way we had no notion +of, might give us at first some little surprise, for the number was so +great at first, that we were not altogether without apprehensions that +they might unluckily set our ship on fire, so that William resolved +immediately to row on board, and persuade us all to weigh and stand out +to sea; but there was no time for it, for they immediately let fly a +volley at the boat, and at the ship, from all parts of the vast crowd of +people which stood near the shore. Nor did they fire, as I may call it, +all at once, and so leave off; but their arrows being soon notched upon +their bows, they kept continually shooting, so that the air was full of +flame. + +I could not say whether they set their cotton rag on fire before they +shot the arrow, for I did not perceive they had fire with them, which, +however, it seems they had. The arrow, besides the fire it carried with +it, had a head, or a peg, as we call it, of bone; and some of sharp +flint stone; and some few of a metal, too soft in itself for metal, but +hard enough to cause it to enter, if it were a plank, so as to stick +where it fell. + +William and his men had notice sufficient to lie close behind their +waste-boards, which, for this very purpose, they had made so high +that they could easily sink themselves behind them, so as to defend +themselves from anything that came point-blank (as we call it) or upon a +line; but for what might fall perpendicularly out of the air they had no +guard, but took the hazard of that. At first they made as if they would +row away, but before they went they gave a volley of their fire-arms, +firing at those which stood with the Dutchman; but William ordered them +to be sure to take their aim at others, so as to miss him, and they did +so. + +There was no calling to them now, for the noise was so great among them +that they could hear nobody, but our men boldly rowed in nearer to them, +for they were at first driven a little off, and when they came nearer, +they fired a second volley, which put the fellows into great confusion, +and we could see from the ship that several of them were killed or +wounded. + +We thought this was a very unequal fight, and therefore we made a signal +to our men to row away, that we might have a little of the sport as +well as they; but the arrows flew so thick upon them, being so near the +shore, that they could not sit to their oars, so they spread a little +of their sail, thinking they might sail along the shore, and lie behind +their waste-board; but the sail had not been spread six minutes till it +had five hundred fire-arrows shot into it and through it, and at length +set it fairly on fire; nor were our men quite out of the danger of its +setting the boat on fire, and this made them paddle and shove the boat +away as well as they could, as they lay, to get farther off. + +By this time they had left us a fair mark at the whole savage army; and +as we had sheered the ship as near to them as we could, we fired among +the thickest of them six or seven times, five guns at a time, with shot, +old iron, musket-bullets, &c. + +We could easily see that we made havoc among them, and killed and +wounded abundance of them, and that they were in a great surprise at it; +but yet they never offered to stir, and all this while their fire-arrows +flew as thick as before. + +At last, on a sudden their arrows stopped, and the old Dutchman came +running down to the water-side all alone, with his white flag, as +before, waving it as high as he could, and making signals to our boat to +come to him again. + +William did not care at first to go near him, but the man continuing to +make signals to him to come, at last William went; and the Dutchman told +him that he had been with the general, who was much mollified by the +slaughter of his men, and that now he could have anything of him. + +"Anything!" says William; "what have we to do with him? Let him go about +his business, and carry his men out of gunshot, can't he?" + +"Why," says the Dutchman, "but he dares not stir, nor see the king's +face; unless some of your men come on shore, he will certainly put him +to death." + +"Why, then," says William, "he is a dead man; for if it were to save his +life, and the lives of all the crowd that is with him, he shall never +have one of us in his power. But I'll tell thee," said William, "how +thou shalt cheat him, and gain thy own liberty too, if thou hast any +mind to see thy own country again, and art not turned savage, and grown +fond of living all thy days among heathens and savages." + +"I would be glad to do it with all my heart," says he; "but if I should +offer to swim off to you now, though they are so far from me, they shoot +so true that they would kill me before I got half-way." + +"But," says William, "I'll tell thee how thou shalt come with his +consent. Go to him, and tell him I have offered to carry you on board, +to try if you could persuade the captain to come on shore, and that I +would not hinder him if he was willing to venture." + +The Dutchman seemed in a rapture at the very first word. "I'll do it," +says he; "I am persuaded he will give me leave to come." + +Away he runs, as if he had a glad message to carry, and tells the +general that William had promised, if he would go on board the ship with +him, he would persuade the captain to return with him. The general was +fool enough to give him orders to go, and charged him not to come back +without the captain; which he readily promised, and very honestly might. + +So they took him in, and brought him on board, and he was as good as +his word to them, for he never went back to them any more; and the sloop +being come to the mouth of the inlet where we lay, we weighed and set +sail; but, as we went out, being pretty near the shore, we fired three +guns, as it were among them, but without any shot, for it was of no +use to us to hurt any more of them. After we had fired, we gave them a +cheer, as the seamen call it; that is to say, we hallooed, at them, by +way of triumph, and so carried off their ambassador. How it fared with +their general, we know nothing of that. + +This passage, when I related it to a friend of mine, after my return +from those rambles, agreed so well with his relation of what happened to +one Mr Knox, an English captain, who some time ago was decoyed on shore +by these people, that it could not but be very much to my satisfaction +to think what mischief we had all escaped; and I think it cannot but be +very profitable to record the other story (which is but short) with my +own, to show whoever reads this what it was I avoided, and prevent their +falling into the like, if they have to do with the perfidious people of +Ceylon. The relation is as follows:-- + +The island of Ceylon being inhabited for the greatest part by +barbarians, which will not allow any trade or commerce with any European +nation, and inaccessible by any travellers, it will be convenient to +relate the occasion how the author of this story happened to go into +this island, and what opportunities he had of being fully acquainted +with the people, their laws and customs, that so we may the better +depend upon the account, and value it as it deserves, for the rarity +as well as the truth of it; and both these the author gives us a brief +relation of in this manner. His words are as follows: + +In the year 1657, the _Anne_ frigate, of London, Captain Robert Knox, +commander, on the 21st day of January, set sail out of the Downs, in the +service of the honourable East India Company of England, bound for Fort +St George, upon the coast of Coromandel, to trade for one year from port +to port in India; which having performed, as he was lading his goods +to return for England, being in the road of Masulipatam, on the 19th of +November 1659, there happened such a mighty storm, that in it several +ships were cast away, and he was forced to cut his mainmast by the +board, which so disabled the ship, that he could not proceed in his +voyage; whereupon Cottiar, in the island of Ceylon, being a very +commodious bay, fit for her present distress, Thomas Chambers, Esq., +since Sir Thomas Chambers, the agent at Fort St George, ordered that the +ship should take in some cloth and India merchants belonging to Porto +Novo, who might trade there while she lay to set her mast, and repair +the other damages sustained by the storm. At her first coming thither, +after the Indian merchants were set ashore, the captain and his men were +very jealous of the people of that place, by reason the English never +had any commerce or dealing with them; but after they had been there +twenty days, going ashore and returning again at pleasure, without any +molestation, they began to lay aside all suspicious thoughts of the +people that dwelt thereabouts, who had kindly entertained them for their +money. + +By this time the king of the country had notice of their arrival, and, +not being acquainted with their intents, he sent down a dissauva, or +general, with an army, to them, who immediately sent a messenger to +the captain on board, to desire him to come ashore to him, pretending +a letter from the king. The captain saluted the message with firing of +guns, and ordered his son, Robert Knox, and Mr John Loveland, merchant +of the ship, to go ashore, and wait on him. When they were come before +him, he demanded who they were, and how long they should stay. They told +him they were Englishmen, and not to stay above twenty or thirty days, +and desired permission to trade in his Majesty's port. His answer was, +that the king was glad to hear the English were come into his country, +and had commanded him to assist them as they should desire, and had sent +a letter to be delivered to none but the captain himself. They were then +twelve miles from the seaside, and therefore replied, that the captain +could not leave his ship to come so far; but if he pleased to go down +to the seaside, the captain would wait on him to receive the letter; +whereupon the dissauva desired them to stay that day, and on the morrow +he would go with them; which, rather than displease him in so small a +matter, they consented to. In the evening the dissauva sent a present to +the captain of cattle and fruits, &c., which, being carried all night by +the messengers, was delivered to him in the morning, who told him withal +that his men were coming down with the dissauva, and desired his company +on shore against his coming, having a letter from the king to deliver +into his own hand. The captain, mistrusting nothing, came on shore with +his boat, and, sitting under a tamarind tree, waited for the dissauva. +In the meantime the native soldiers privately surrounded him and the +seven men he had with him, and seizing them, carried them to meet the +dissauva, bearing the captain on a hammock on their shoulders. + +The next day the long-boat's crew, not knowing what had happened, came +on shore to cut down a tree to make cheeks for the mainmast, and were +made prisoners after the same manner, though with more violence, because +they were more rough with them, and made resistance; yet they were not +brought to the captain and his company, but quartered in another house +in the same town. + +The dissauva having thus gotten two boats and eighteen men, his next +care was to gain the ship; and to that end, telling the captain that he +and his men were only detained because the king intended to send letters +and a present to the English nation by him, desired he would send some +men on board his ship to order her to stay; and because the ship was +in danger of being fired by the Dutch if she stayed long in the bay, to +bring her up the river. The captain did not approve of the advice, but +did not dare to own his dislike; so he sent his son with the order, but +with a solemn conjuration to return again, which he accordingly did, +bringing a letter from the company in the ship, that they would not obey +the captain, nor any other, in this matter, but were resolved to stand +on their own defence. This letter satisfied the dissauva, who thereupon +gave the captain leave to write for what he would have brought from +the ship, pretending that he had not the king's order to release them, +though it would suddenly come. + +The captain seeing he was held in suspense, and the season of the year +spending for the ship to proceed on her voyage to some place, sent order +to Mr John Burford, the chief mate, to take charge of the ship, and +set sail to Porto Novo, from whence they came, and there to follow the +agent's order. + +And now began that long and sad captivity they all along feared. The +ship being gone, the dissauva was called up to the king, and they were +kept under guards a while, till a special order came from the king +to part them, and put one in a town, for the conveniency of their +maintenance, which the king ordered to be at the charge of the country. +On September 16, 1660, the captain and his son were placed in a town +called Bonder Coswat, in the country of Hotcurly [? Hewarrisse Korle], +distant from the city of Kandy northward thirty miles, and from the +rest of the English a full day's journey. Here they had their provisions +brought them twice a day, without money, as much as they could eat, +and as good as the country yielded. The situation of the place was very +pleasant and commodious; but that year that part of the land was very +sickly by agues and fevers, of which many died. The captain and his son +after some time were visited with the common distemper, and the captain, +being also loaded with grief for his deplorable condition, languished +more than three months, and then died, February 9, 1661. + +Robert Knox, his son, was now left desolate, sick, and in captivity, +having none to comfort him but God, who is the Father of the fatherless, +and hears the groans of such as are in captivity; being alone to enter +upon a long scene of misery and calamity; oppressed with weakness of +body and grief of soul for the loss of his father, and the remediless +trouble that he was like to endure; and the first instance of it was in +the burial of his father, for he sent his black boy to the people of +the town, to desire their assistance, because they understood not their +language; but they sent him only a rope, to drag him by the neck into +the woods, and told him that they would offer him no other help, unless +he would pay for it. This barbarous answer increased his trouble for his +father's death, that now he was like to lie unburied, and be made a prey +to the wild beasts in the woods; for the ground was very hard, and they +had not tools to dig with, and so it was impossible for them to bury +him; and having a small matter of money left him, viz., a pagoda and a +gold ring, he hired a man, and so buried him in as decent a manner as +their condition would permit. + +His dead father being thus removed out of his sight, but his ague +continuing, he was reduced very low, partly by sorrow and partly by his +disease. All the comfort he had was to go into the wood and fields with +a book, either the "Practice of Piety" or Mr Rogers's "Seven Treatises," +which were the only two books he had, and meditate and read, and +sometimes pray; in which his anguish made him often invert Elijah's +petition,--that he might die, because his life was a burden to him. God, +though He was pleased to prolong his life, yet He found a way to lighten +his grief, by removing his ague, and granting him a desire which above +all things was acceptable to him. He had read his two books over so +often that he had both almost by heart; and though they were both +pious and good writings, yet he longed for the truth from the original +fountain, and thought it his greatest unhappiness that he had not a +Bible, and did believe that he should never see one again; but, contrary +to his expectation, God brought him one after this manner. As he was +fishing one day with his black boy, to catch some fish to relieve his +hunger, an old man passed by them, and asked his boy whether his master +could read; and when the boy had answered yes, he told him that he had +gotten a book from the Portuguese, when they left Colombo; and, if his +master pleased, he would sell it him. The boy told his master, who bade +him go and see what book it was. The boy having served the English +some time, knew the book, and as soon as he got it into his hand, came +running to him, calling out before he came to him, "It is the Bible!" +The words startled him, and he flung down his angle to meet him, and, +finding it was true, was mightily rejoiced to see it; but he was afraid +he should not have enough to purchase it, though he was resolved to part +with all the money he had, which was but one pagoda, to buy it; but his +black boy persuading him to slight it, and leave it to him to buy it, he +at length obtained it for a knit cap. + +This accident he could not but look upon as a great miracle, that God +should bestow upon him such an extraordinary blessing, and bring him a +Bible in his own native language, in such a remote part of the world, +where His name was not known, and where it was never heard of that an +Englishman had ever been before. The enjoyment of this mercy was a great +comfort to him in captivity, and though he wanted no bodily convenience +that the country did afford; for the king, immediately after his +father's death, had sent an express order to the people of the towns, +that they should be kind to him, and give him good victuals; and after +he had been some time in the country, and understood the language, +he got him good conveniences, as a house and gardens; and falling +to husbandry, God so prospered him, that he had plenty, not only for +himself, but to lend others; which being, according to the custom of the +country, at 50 per cent. a year, much enriched him: he had also goats, +which served him for mutton, and hogs and hens. Notwithstanding this, I +say, for he lived as fine as any of their noblemen, he could not so far +forget his native country as to be contented to dwell in a strange land, +where there was to him a famine of God's word and sacraments, the want +of which made all other things to be of little value to him; therefore, +as he made it his daily and fervent prayer to God, in His good time, to +restore him to both, so, at length, he, with one Stephen Rutland, who +had lived with him two years before, resolved to make their escape, and, +about the year 1673, meditated all secret ways to compass it. They had +before taken up a way of peddling about the country, and buying tobacco, +pepper, garlic, combs, and all sorts of iron ware, and carried them into +those parts of the country where they wanted them; and now, to promote +their design, as they went with their commodities from place to place, +they discoursed with the country people (for they could now speak their +language well) concerning the ways and inhabitants, where the isle was +thinnest and fullest inhabited, where and how the watches lay from one +country to another, and what commodities were proper for them to carry +into all parts; pretending that they would furnish themselves with such +wares as the respective places wanted. None doubted but what they did +was upon the account of trade, because Mr Knox was so well seated, and +could not be supposed to leave such an estate, by travelling northward, +because that part of the land was least inhabited; and so, furnishing +themselves with such wares as were vendible in those parts, they set +forth, and steered their course towards the north part of the islands, +knowing very little of the ways, which were generally intricate and +perplexed, because they have no public roads, but a multitude of little +paths from one town to another, and those often changing; and for white +men to inquire about the ways was very dangerous, because the people +would presently suspect their design. + +At this time they travelled from Conde Uda as far as the country of +Nuwarakalawiya, which is the furthermost part of the king's dominions, +and about three days' journey from their dwelling. They were very +thankful to Providence that they had passed all difficulties so far, +but yet they durst not go any farther, because they had no wares left to +traffic with; and it being the first time they had been absent so long +from home, they feared the townsmen would come after them to seek for +them; and so they returned home, and went eight or ten times into those +parts with their wares, till they became well acquainted both with the +people and the paths. + +In these parts Mr Knox met his black boy, whom he had turned away divers +years before. He had now got a wife and children, and was very poor; +but being acquainted with these quarters, he not only took directions +of him, but agreed with him, for a good reward, to conduct him and +his companions to the Dutch. He gladly undertook it, and a time was +appointed between them; but Mr Knox being disabled by a grievous pain, +which seized him on his right side, and held him five days that he could +not travel, this appointment proved in vain; for though he went as +soon as he was well, his guide was gone into another country about his +business, and they durst not at that time venture to run away without +him. + +These attempts took up eight or nine years, various accidents hindering +their designs, but most commonly the dry weather, because they feared in +the woods they should be starved with thirst, all the country being in +such a condition almost four or five years together for lack of rain. + +On September 22, 1679, they set forth again, furnished with knives and +small axes for their defence, because they could carry them privately +and send all sorts of wares to sell as formerly, and all necessary +provisions, the moon being twenty-seven days old, that they might have +light to run away by, to try what success God Almighty would now give +them in seeking their liberty. Their first stage was to Anuradhapoora, +in the way to which lay a wilderness, called Parraoth Mocolane, full of +wild elephants, tigers, and bears; and because it is the utmost confines +of the king's dominions, there is always a watch kept. + +In the middle of the way they heard that the governor's officers of +these parts were out to gather up the king's revenues and duties, to +send them up to the city; which put them into no small fear, lest, +finding them, they should send them back again; whereupon they withdrew +to the western parts of Ecpoulpot, and sat down to knitting till they +heard the officers were gone. As soon as they were departed, they went +onwards of their journey, having got a good parcel of cotton-yarn to +knit caps with, and having kept their wares, as they pretended, to +exchange for dried flesh, which was sold only in those lower parts. +Their way lay necessarily through the governor's yard at Kalluvilla, who +dwells there on purpose to examine all that go and come. This greatly +distressed them, because he would easily suspect they were out of their +bounds, being captives; however, they went resolutely to his house, and +meeting him, presented him with a small parcel of tobacco and betel; +and, showing him their wares, told him they came to get dried flesh to +carry back with them. The governor did not suspect them, but told +them he was sorry they came in so dry a time, when no deer were to be +catched, but if some rain fell, he would soon supply them. This answer +pleased them, and they seemed contented to stay; and accordingly, +abiding with him two or three days, and no rain falling, they presented +the governor with five or six charges of gunpowder, which is a rarity +among them; and leaving a bundle at his house, they desired him to shoot +them some deer, while they made a step to Anuradhapoora. Here also they +were put in a great fright by the coming of certain soldiers from the +king to the governor, to give him orders to set a secure guard at the +watches, that no suspicious persons might pass, which, though it was +only intended to prevent the flight of the relations of certain nobles +whom the king had clapped up, yet they feared they might wonder to see +white men here, and so send them back again; but God so ordered it that +they were very kind to them and left them to their business, and so they +got safe to Anuradhapoora. Their pretence was dried flesh, though they +knew there was none to be had; but their real business was to search the +way down to the Dutch, which they stayed three days to do; but finding +that in the way to Jaffnapatam, which is one of the Dutch ports, there +was a watch which could hardly be passed, and other inconveniences not +surmountable, they resolved to go back, and take the river Malwatta Oya, +which they had before judged would be a probable guide to lead them to +the sea; and, that they might not be pursued, left Anuradhapoora just at +night, when the people never travel for fear of wild beasts, on Sunday, +October 12, being stored with all things needful for their journey, +viz., ten days' provision, a basin to boil their provision in, two +calabashes to fetch water in, and two great tallipat leaves for tents, +with jaggery, sweetmeats, tobacco, betel, tinder-boxes, and a deerskin +for shoes, to keep their feet from thorns, because to them they chiefly +trusted. Being come to the river, they struck into the woods, and kept +by the side of it; yet not going on the sand (lest their footsteps +should be discerned), unless forced, and then going backwards. + +Being gotten a good way into the wood, it began to rain; wherefore they +erected their tents, made a fire, and refreshed themselves against the +rising of the moon, which was then eighteen days old; and having tied +deerskins about their feet, and eased themselves of their wares, they +proceeded on their journey. When they had travelled three or four hours +with difficulty, because the moon gave but little light among the thick +trees, they found an elephant in their way before them, and because they +could not scare him away, they were forced to stay till morning; and so +they kindled a fire, and took a pipe of tobacco. By the light they could +not discern that ever anybody had been there, nothing being to be seen +but woods; and so they were in great hopes that they were past all +danger, being beyond all inhabitants; but they were mistaken, for the +river winding northward, brought them into the midst of a parcel of +towns, called Tissea Wava, where, being in danger of being seen, they +were under a mighty terror; for had the people found them, they would +have beat them, and sent them up to the king; and, to avoid it, they +crept into a hollow tree, and sat there in mud and wet till it began to +grow dark, and then betaking themselves to their legs, travelled till +the darkness of night stopped them. They heard voices behind them, and +feared it was somebody in pursuit of them; but at length, discerning +it was only an hallooing to keep the wild beasts out of the corn, they +pitched their tents by the river, and having boiled rice and roasted +meat for their suppers, and satisfied their hunger, they committed +themselves to God's keeping, and laid them down to sleep. + +The next morning, to prevent the worst, they got up early and hastened +on their journey; and though they were now got out of all danger of the +tame Chiangulays, they were in great danger of the wild ones, of whom +those woods were full; and though they saw their tents, yet they were +all gone, since the rains had fallen, from the river into the woods; and +so God kept them from that danger, for, had they met the wild men, they +had been shot. + +Thus they travelled from morning till night several days, through bushes +and thorns, which made their arms and shoulders, which were naked, +all of a gore blood. They often met with bears, hogs, deer, and wild +buffaloes; but they all ran away as soon as they saw them. The river was +exceedingly full of alligators; in the evening they used to pitch their +tents, and make great fires both before and behind them, to affright +the wild beasts; and though they heard the voices of all sorts, they saw +none. + +On Thursday, at noon, they crossed the river Coronda [? Kannadera Oya], +which parts the country of the Malabars from the king's, and on Friday, +about nine or ten in the morning, came among the inhabitants, of whom +they were as much afraid as of the Chiangulays before; for, though the +Wanniounay, or prince of this people, payeth tribute to the Dutch out +of fear, yet he is better affected to the King of Kandy, and, if he had +took them, would have sent them up to their old master; but not knowing +any way to escape, they kept on their journey by the river-side by day, +because the woods were not to be travelled by night for thorns and wild +beasts, who came down then to the river to drink. In all the Malabar +country they met with only two Brahmins, who treated them very civilly; +and for their money, one of them conducted them till they came into the +territories of the Dutch, and out of all danger of the King of Kandy, +which did not a little rejoice them; but yet they were in no small +trouble how to find the way out of the woods, till a Malabar, for the +lucre of a knife, conducted them to a Dutch town, where they found +guides to conduct them from town to town, till they came to the fort +called Aripo, where they arrived Saturday, October 18, 1679, and there +thankfully adored God's wonderful providence, in thus completing their +deliverance from a long captivity of nineteen years and six months. + +I come now back to my own history, which grows near a conclusion, as to +the travels I took in this part of the world. We were now at sea, and we +stood away to the north for a while, to try if we could get a market for +our spice, for we were very rich in nutmegs, but we ill knew what to +do with them; we durst not go upon the English coast, or, to speak more +properly, among the English factories to trade; not that we were afraid +to fight any two ships they had, and, besides that, we knew that, as +they had no letters of marque, or of reprisals from the government, so +it was none of their business to act offensively, no, not though we were +pirates. Indeed, if we had made any attempt upon them, they might have +justified themselves in joining together to resist, and assisting one +another to defend themselves; but to go out of their business to attack +a pirate ship of almost fifty guns, as we were, it was plain that it was +none of their business, and consequently it was none of our concern, so +we did not trouble ourselves about it; but, on the other hand, it was +none of our business to be seen among them, and to have the news of us +carried from one factory to another, so that whatever design we might be +upon at another time, we should be sure to be prevented and discovered. +Much less had we any occasion to be seen among any of the Dutch +factories upon the coast of Malabar; for, being fully laden with the +spices which we had, in the sense of their trade, plundered them of, it +would have told them what we were, and all that we had been doing; and +they would, no doubt, have concerned themselves all manner of ways to +have fallen upon us. + +The only way we had for it was to stand away for Goa, and trade, if we +could, for our spices, with the Portuguese factory there. Accordingly, +we sailed almost thither, for we had made land two days before, and +being in the latitude of Goa, were standing in fair for Margaon, on the +head of Salsat, at the going up to Goa, when I called to the men at the +helm to bring the ship to, and bid the pilot go away N.N.W., till we +came out of sight of the shore, when William and I called a council, +as we used to do upon emergencies, what course we should take to trade +there and not be discovered; and we concluded at length that we would +not go thither at all, but that William, with such trusty fellows only +as could be depended upon, should go in the sloop to Surat, which was +still farther northward, and trade there as merchants with such of the +English factory as they could find to be for their turn. + +To carry this with the more caution, and so as not to be suspected, +we agreed to take out all her guns, and put such men into her, and no +other, as would promise us not to desire or offer to go on shore, or to +enter into any talk or conversation with any that might come on board; +and, to finish the disguise to our mind, William documented two of our +men, one a surgeon, as he himself was, and the other, a ready-witted +fellow, an old sailor, that had been a pilot upon the coast of New +England, and was an excellent mimic; these two William dressed up like +two Quakers, and made them talk like such. The old pilot he made go +captain of the sloop, and the surgeon for doctor, as he was, and himself +supercargo. In this figure, and the sloop all plain, no curled work upon +her (indeed she had not much before), and no guns to be seen, away he +went for Surat. + +I should, indeed, have observed, that we went, some days before we +parted, to a small sandy island close under the shore, where there was +a good cove of deep water, like a road, and out of sight of any of the +factories, which are here very thick upon the coast. Here we shifted the +loading of the sloop, and put into her such things only as we had a mind +to dispose of there, which was indeed little but nutmegs and cloves, but +chiefly the former; and from thence William and his two Quakers, with +about eighteen men in the sloop, went away to Surat, and came to an +anchor at a distance from the factory. + +William used such caution that he found means to go on shore himself, +and the doctor, as he called him, in a boat which came on board them +to sell fish, rowed with only Indians of the country, which boat he +afterwards hired to carry him on board again. It was not long that they +were on shore, but that they found means to get acquaintance with some +Englishmen, who, though they lived there, and perhaps were the company's +servants at first, yet appeared then to be traders for themselves, in +whatever coast business especially came in their way; and the doctor was +made the first to pick acquaintance; so he recommended his friend, the +supercargo, till, by degrees, the merchants were as fond of the bargain +as our men were of the merchants, only that the cargo was a little too +much for them. + +However, this did not prove a difficulty long with them, for the next +day they brought two more merchants, English also, into their bargain, +and, as William could perceive by their discourse, they resolved, if +they bought them, to carry them to the Gulf of Persia upon their +own accounts. William took the hint, and, as he told me afterwards, +concluded we might carry them there as well as they. But this was not +William's present business; he had here no less than three-and-thirty +ton of nuts and eighteen ton of cloves. There was a good quantity of +mace among the nutmegs, but we did not stand to make much allowance. In +short, they bargained, and the merchants, who would gladly have bought +sloop and all, gave William directions, and two men for pilots, to go +to a creek about six leagues from the factory, where they brought boats, +and unloaded the whole cargo, and paid William very honestly for it; the +whole parcel amounting, in money, to about thirty-five thousand pieces +of eight, besides some goods of value, which William was content to +take, and two large diamonds, worth about three hundred pounds sterling. + +When they paid the money, William invited them on board the sloop, where +they came; and the merry old Quaker diverted them exceedingly with his +talk, and "thee'd" them and "thou'd" them till he made them so drunk +that they could not go on shore for that night. + +They would fain have known who our people were, and whence they came; +but not a man in the sloop would answer them to any question they asked, +but in such a manner as let them think themselves bantered and jested +with. However, in discourse, William said they were able men for any +cargo we could have brought them, and that they would have bought twice +as much spice if we had had it. He ordered the merry captain to tell +them that they had another sloop that lay at Margaon, and that had a +great quantity of spice on board also; and that, if it was not sold when +he went back (for that thither he was bound), he would bring her up. + +Their new chaps were so eager, that they would have bargained with the +old captain beforehand. "Nay, friend," said he, "I will not trade with +thee unsight and unseen; neither do I know whether the master of the +sloop may not have sold his loading already to some merchants of Salsat; +but if he has not when I come to him, I think to bring him up to thee." + +The doctor had his employment all this while, as well as William and +the old captain, for he went on shore several times a day in the Indian +boat, and brought fresh provisions for the sloop, which the men had need +enough of. He brought, in particular, seventeen large casks of arrack, +as big as butts, besides smaller quantities, a quantity of rice, and +abundance of fruits, mangoes, pompions, and such things, with fowls and +fish. He never came on board but he was deep laden; for, in short, he +bought for the ship as well as for themselves; and, particularly, they +half-loaded the ship with rice and arrack, with some hogs, and six +or seven cows, alive; and thus, being well victualled, and having +directions for coming again, they returned to us. + +William was always the lucky welcome messenger to us, but never more +welcome to us than now; for where we had thrust in the ship, we could +get nothing, except a few mangoes and roots, being not willing to make +any steps into the country, or make ourselves known till we had news of +our sloop; and indeed our men's patience was almost tired, for it +was seventeen days that William spent upon this enterprise, and well +bestowed too. + +When he came back we had another conference upon the subject of trade, +namely, whether we should send the best of our spices, and other goods +we had in the ship, to Surat, or whether we should go up to the Gulf of +Persia ourselves, where it was probable we might sell them as well as +the English merchants of Surat. William was for going ourselves, which, +by the way, was from the good, frugal, merchant-like temper of the man, +who was for the best of everything; but here I overruled William, which +I very seldom took upon me to do; but I told him, that, considering our +circumstances, it was much better for us to sell all our cargoes here, +though we made but half-price of them, than to go with them to the Gulf +of Persia, where we should run a greater risk, and where people would be +much more curious and inquisitive into things than they were here, and +where it would not be so easy to manage them, seeing they traded freely +and openly there, not by stealth, as those men seemed to do; and, +besides, if they suspected anything, it would be much more difficult for +us to retreat, except by mere force, than here, where we were upon the +high sea as it were, and could be gone whenever we pleased, without any +disguise, or, indeed, without the least appearance of being pursued, +none knowing where to look for us. + +My apprehensions prevailed with William, whether my reasons did or no, +and he submitted; and we resolved to try another ship's loading to the +same merchants. The main business was to consider how to get off that +circumstance that had exposed them to the English merchants, namely that +it was our other sloop; but this the old Quaker pilot undertook; for +being, as I said, an excellent mimic himself, it was the easier for +him to dress up the sloop in new clothes; and first, he put on all the +carved work he had taken off before; her stern, which was painted of +a dumb white or dun colour before, all flat, was now all lacquered and +blue, and I know not how many gay figures in it; as to her quarter, the +carpenters made her a neat little gallery on either side; she had twelve +guns put into her, and some petereroes upon her gunnel, none of which +were there before; and to finish her new habit or appearance, and make +her change complete, he ordered her sails to be altered; and as she +sailed before with a half-sprit, like a yacht, she sailed now with +square-sail and mizzen-mast, like a ketch; so that, in a word, she was a +perfect cheat, disguised in everything that a stranger could be supposed +to take any notice of that had never had but one view, for they had been +but once on board. + +In this mean figure the sloop returned; she had a new man put into her +for captain, one we knew how to trust; and the old pilot appearing only +as a passenger, the doctor and William acting as the supercargoes, by a +formal procuration from one Captain Singleton, and all things ordered in +form. + +We had a complete loading for the sloop; for, besides a very great +quantity of nutmegs and cloves, mace, and some cinnamon, she had +on board some goods which we took in as we lay about the Philippine +Islands, while we waited as looking for purchase. + +William made no difficulty of selling this cargo also, and in about +twenty days returned again, freighted with all necessary provisions for +our voyage, and for a long time; and, as I say, we had a great deal of +other goods: he brought us back about three-and-thirty thousand pieces +of eight, and some diamonds, which, though William did not pretend to +much skill in, yet he made shift to act so as not to be imposed upon, +the merchants he had to deal with, too, being very fair men. + +They had no difficulty at all with these merchants, for the prospect +they had of gain made them not at all inquisitive, nor did they make the +least discovery of the sloop; and as to the selling them spices which +were fetched so far from thence, it seems it was not so much a novelty +there as we believed, for the Portuguese had frequently vessels which +came from Macao in China, who brought spices, which they bought of +the Chinese traders, who again frequently dealt among the Dutch Spice +Islands, and received spices in exchange for such goods as they carried +from China. + +This might be called, indeed, the only trading voyage we had made; and +now we were really very rich, and it came now naturally before us to +consider whither we should go next. Our proper delivery port, as we +ought to have called it, was at Madagascar, in the Bay of Mangahelly; +but William took me by myself into the cabin of the sloop one day, +and told me he wanted to talk seriously with me a little; so we shut +ourselves in, and William began with me. + +"Wilt thou give me leave," says William, "to talk plainly with thee upon +thy present circumstances, and thy future prospect of living? and wilt +thou promise, on thy word, to take nothing ill of me?" + +"With all my heart," said I. "William, I have always found your advice +good, and your designs have not only been well laid, but your counsel +has been very lucky to us; and, therefore, say what you will, I promise +you I will not take it ill." + +"But that is not all my demand," says William; "if thou dost not like +what I am going to propose to thee, thou shalt promise me not to make it +public among the men." + +"I will not, William," says I, "upon my word;" and swore to him, too, +very heartily. + +"Why, then," says William, "I have but one thing more to article with +thee about, and that is, that thou wilt consent that if thou dost not +approve of it for thyself, thou wilt yet consent that I shall put so +much of it in practice as relates to myself and my new comrade doctor, +so that it be nothing to thy detriment and loss." + +"In anything," says I, "William, but leaving me, I will; but I cannot +part with you upon any terms whatever." + +"Well," says William, "I am not designing to part from thee, unless it +is thy own doing. But assure me in all these points, and I will tell my +mind freely." + +So I promised him everything he desired of me in the solemnest manner +possible, and so seriously and frankly withal, that William made no +scruple to open his mind to me. + +"Why, then, in the first place," says William, "shall I ask thee if thou +dost not think thou and all thy men are rich enough, and have really +gotten as much wealth together (by whatsoever way it has been gotten, +that is not the question) as we all know what to do with?" + +"Why, truly, William," said I, "thou art pretty right; I think we have +had pretty good luck." + +"Well, then," says William, "I would ask whether, if thou hast gotten +enough, thou hast any thought of leaving off this trade; for most people +leave off trading when they are satisfied of getting, and are rich +enough; for nobody trades for the sake of trading; much less do men rob +for the sake of thieving." + +"Well, William," says I, "now I perceive what it is thou art driving at. +I warrant you," says I, "you begin to hanker after home." + +"Why, truly," says William, "thou hast said it, and so I hope thou dost +too. It is natural for most men that are abroad to desire to come home +again at last, especially when they are grown rich, and when they are +(as thou ownest thyself to be) rich enough, and so rich as they know not +what to do with more if they had it." + +"Well, William," said I, "but now you think you have laid your +preliminary at first so home that I should have nothing to say; that is, +that when I had got money enough, it would be natural to think of going +home. But you have not explained what you mean by home, and there you +and I shall differ. Why, man, I am at home; here is my habitation; I +never had any other in my lifetime; I was a kind of charity school boy; +so that I can have no desire of going anywhere for being rich or poor, +for I have nowhere to go." + +"Why," says William, looking a little confused, "art not thou an +Englishman?" + +"Yes," says I, "I think so: you see I speak English; but I came out of +England a child, and never was in it but once since I was a man; and +then I was cheated and imposed upon, and used so ill that I care not if +I never see it more." + +"Why, hast thou no relations or friends there?" says he; "no +acquaintance--none that thou hast any kindness or any remains of respect +for?" + +"Not I, William," said I; "no more than I have in the court of the Great +Mogul." + +"Nor any kindness for the country where thou wast born?" says William. + +"Not I, any more than for the island of Madagascar, nor so much neither; +for that has been a fortunate island to me more than once, as thou +knowest, William," said I. + +William was quite stunned at my discourse, and held his peace; and I +said to him, "Go on, William; what hast thou to say farther? for I hear +you have some project in your head," says I; "come, let's have it out." + +"Nay," says William, "thou hast put me to silence, and all I had to say +is overthrown; all my projects are come to nothing, and gone." + +"Well, but, William," said I, "let me hear what they were; for though +it is so that what I have to aim at does not look your way, and though +I have no relation, no friend, no acquaintance in England, yet I do not +say I like this roving, cruising life so well as never to give it over. +Let me hear if thou canst propose to me anything beyond it." + +"Certainly, friend," says William, very gravely, "there is something +beyond it;" and lifting up his hands, he seemed very much affected, and +I thought I saw tears stand in his eyes; but I, that was too hardened +a wretch to be moved with these things, laughed at him. "What!" says I, +"you mean death, I warrant you: don't you? That is beyond this trade. +Why, when it comes, it comes; then we are all provided for." + +"Ay," says William, "that is true; but it would be better that some +things were thought on before that came." + +"Thought on!" says I; "what signifies thinking of it? To think of death +is to die, and to be always thinking of it is to be all one's life long +a-dying. It is time enough to think of it when it comes." + +You will easily believe I was well qualified for a pirate that could +talk thus. But let me leave it upon record, for the remark of other +hardened rogues like myself,--my conscience gave me a pang that I never +felt before when I said, "What signifies thinking of it?" and told me I +should one day think of these words with a sad heart; but the time of my +reflection was not yet come; so I went on. + +Says William very seriously, "I must tell thee, friend, I am sorry to +hear thee talk so. They that never think of dying, often die without +thinking of it." + +I carried on the jesting way a while farther, and said, "Prithee, do not +talk of dying; how do we know we shall ever die?" and began to laugh. + +"I need not answer thee to that," says William; "it is not my place to +reprove thee, who art commander over me here; but I would rather thou +wouldst talk otherwise of death; it is a coarse thing." + +"Say anything to me, William," said I; "I will take it kindly." I began +now to be very much moved at his discourse. + +Says William (tears running down his face), "It is because men live +as if they were never to die, that so many die before they know how +to live. But it was not death that I meant when I said that there was +something to be thought of beyond this way of living." + +"Why, William," said I, "what was that?" + +"It was repentance," says he. + +"Why," says I, "did you ever know a pirate repent?" + +At this he startled a little, and returned, "At the gallows I have +[known] one before, and I hope thou wilt be the second." + +He spoke this very affectionately, with an appearance of concern for me. + +"Well, William," says I, "I thank you; and I am not so senseless of +these things, perhaps, as I make myself seem to be. But come, let me +hear your proposal." + +"My proposal," says William, "is for thy good as well as my own. We may +put an end to this kind of life, and repent; and I think the fairest +occasion offers for both, at this very time, that ever did, or ever +will, or, indeed, can happen again." + +"Look you, William," says I; "let me have your proposal for putting an +end to our present way of living first, for that is the case before +us, and you and I will talk of the other afterwards. I am not so +insensible," said I, "as you may think me to be. But let us get out of +this hellish condition we are in first." + +"Nay," says William, "thou art in the right there; we must never talk of +repenting while we continue pirates." + +"Well," says I, "William, that's what I meant; for if we must not +reform, as well as be sorry for what is done, I have no notion what +repentance means; indeed, at best I know little of the matter; but the +nature of the thing seems to tell me that the first step we have to take +is to break off this wretched course; and I'll begin there with you, +with all my heart." + +I could see by his countenance that William was thoroughly pleased with +the offer; and if he had tears in-his eyes before, he had more now; but +it was from quite a different passion; for he was so swallowed up with +joy he could not speak. + +"Come, William," says I, "thou showest me plain enough thou hast an +honest meaning; dost thou think it practicable for us to put an end to +our unhappy way of living here, and get off?" + +"Yes," says he, "I think it very practicable for me; whether it is for +thee or no, that will depend upon thyself." + +"Well," says I, "I give you my word, that as I have commanded you all +along, from the time I first took you on board, so you shall command me +from this hour, and everything you direct me I'll do." + +"Wilt thou leave it all to me? Dost thou say this freely?" + +"Yes, William," said I, "freely; and I'll perform it faithfully." + +"Why, then," says William, "my scheme is this: We are now at the mouth +of the Gulf of Persia; we have sold so much of our cargo here at Surat, +that we have money enough; send me away for Bassorah with the sloop, +laden with the China goods we have on board, which will make another +good cargo, and I'll warrant thee I'll find means, among the English and +Dutch merchants there, to lodge a quantity of goods and money also as +a merchant, so as we will be able to have recourse to it again upon any +occasion, and when I come home we will contrive the rest; and, in the +meantime, do you bring the ship's crew to take a resolution to go to +Madagascar as soon as I return." + +I told him I thought he need not go so far as Bassorah, but might run +into Gombroon, or to Ormuz, and pretend the same business. + +"No," says he, "I cannot act with the same freedom there, because +the Company's factories are there, and I may be laid hold of there on +pretence of interloping." + +"Well, but," said I, "you may go to Ormuz, then; for I am loth to +part with you so long as to go to the bottom of the Persian Gulf." He +returned, that I should leave it to him to do as he should see cause. + +We had taken a large sum of money at Surat, so that we had near a +hundred thousand pounds in money at our command, but on board the great +ship we had still a great deal more. + +I ordered him publicly to keep the money on board which he had, and to +buy up with it a quantity of ammunition, if he could get it, and so to +furnish us for new exploits; and, in the meantime, I resolved to get a +quantity of gold and some jewels, which I had on board the great ship, +and place them so that I might carry them off without notice as soon as +he came back; and so, according to William's directions, I left him +to go the voyage, and I went on board the great ship, in which we had +indeed an immense treasure. + +We waited no less than two months for William's return, and indeed +I began to be very uneasy about William, sometimes thinking he had +abandoned me, and that he might have used the same artifice to have +engaged the other men to comply with him, and so they were gone away +together; and it was but three days before his return that I was just +upon the point of resolving to go away to Madagascar, and give him over; +but the old surgeon, who mimicked the Quaker and passed for the master +of the sloop at Surat, persuaded me against that, for which good advice +and apparent faithfulness in what he had been trusted with, I made him a +party to my design, and he proved very honest. + +At length William came back, to our inexpressible joy, and brought a +great many necessary things with him; as, particularly, he brought sixty +barrels of powder, some iron shot, and about thirty ton of lead; also +he brought a great deal of provisions; and, in a word, William gave me +a public account of his voyage, in the hearing of whoever happened to be +upon the quarter-deck, that no suspicions might be found about us. + +After all was done, William moved that he might go up again, and that +I would go with him; named several things which we had on board that he +could not sell there; and, particularly, told us he had been obliged to +leave several things there, the caravans being not come in; and that he +had engaged to come back again with goods. + +This was what I wanted. The men were eager for his going, and +particularly because he told them they might load the sloop back with +rice and provisions; but I seemed backward to going, when the old +surgeon stood up and persuaded me to go, and with many arguments pressed +me to it; as, particularly, if I did not go, there would be no order, +and several of the men might drop away, and perhaps betray all the rest; +and that they should not think it safe for the sloop to go again if I +did not go; and to urge me to it, he offered himself to go with me. + +Upon these considerations I seemed to be over-persuaded to go, and all +the company seemed to be better satisfied when I had consented; and, +accordingly, we took all the powder, lead, and iron out of the sloop +into the great ship, and all the other things that were for the ship's +use, and put in some bales of spices and casks or frails of cloves, in +all about seven ton, and some other goods, among the bales of which I +had conveyed all my private treasure, which, I assure you, was of no +small value, and away I went. + +At going off I called a council of all the officers in the ship to +consider in what place they should wait for me, and how long, and we +appointed the ship to stay eight-and-twenty days at a little island on +the Arabian side of the Gulf, and that, if the sloop did not come in +that time, they should sail to another island to the west of that place, +and wait there fifteen days more, and that then, if the sloop did not +come, they should conclude some accident must have happened, and the +rendezvous should be at Madagascar. + +Being thus resolved, we left the ship, which both William and I, and +the surgeon, never intended to see any more. We steered directly for the +Gulf, and through to Bassorah, or Balsara. This city of Balsara lies +at some distance from the place where our sloop lay, and the river +not being very safe, and we but ill acquainted with it, having but an +ordinary pilot, we went on shore at a village where some merchants live, +and which is very populous, for the sake of small vessels riding there. + +Here we stayed and traded three or four days, landing all our bales and +spices, and indeed the whole cargo that was of any considerable value, +which we chose to do rather than go up immediately to Balsara till the +project we had laid was put in execution. + +After we had bought several goods, and were preparing to buy several +others, the boat being on shore with twelve men, myself, William, the +surgeon, and one fourth man, whom we had singled out, we contrived +to send a Turk just at the dusk of the evening with a letter to the +boatswain, and giving the fellow a charge to run with all possible +speed, we stood at a small distance to observe the event. The contents +of the letter were thus written by the old doctor:-- + +"BOATSWAIN THOMAS,--We are all betrayed. For God's sake make off with +the boat, and get on board, or you are all lost. The captain, William +the Quaker, and George the reformade are seized and carried away: I am +escaped and hid, but cannot stir out; if I do I am a dead man. As +soon as you are on board cut or slip, and make sail for your lives. +Adieu.--R.S." + +We stood undiscovered, as above, it being the dusk of the evening, and +saw the Turk deliver the letter, and in three minutes we saw all the men +hurry into the boat and put off, and no sooner were they on board than +they took the hint, as we supposed, for the next morning they were out +of sight, and we never heard tale or tidings of them since. + +We were now in a good place, and in very good circumstances, for we +passed for merchants of Persia. + +It is not material to record here what a mass of ill-gotten wealth we +had got together: it will be more to the purpose to tell you that I +began to be sensible of the crime of getting of it in such a manner as +I had done; that I had very little satisfaction in the possession of +it; and, as I told William, I had no expectation of keeping it, nor much +desire; but, as I said to him one day walking out into the fields near +the town of Bassorah, so I depended upon it that it would be the case, +which you will hear presently. + +We were perfectly secured at Bassorah, by having frighted away the +rogues, our comrades; and we had nothing to do but to consider how to +convert our treasure into things proper to make us look like merchants, +as we were now to be, and not like freebooters, as we really had been. + +We happened very opportunely here upon a Dutchman, who had travelled +from Bengal to Agra, the capital city of the Great Mogul, and from +thence was come to the coast of Malabar by land, and got shipping, +somehow or other, up the Gulf; and we found his design was to go up the +great river to Bagdad or Babylon, and so, by the caravan, to Aleppo and +Scanderoon. As William spoke Dutch, and was of an agreeable, insinuating +behaviour, he soon got acquainted with this Dutchman, and discovering +our circumstances to one another, we found he had considerable effects +with him; and that he had traded long in that country, and was making +homeward to his own country; and that he had servants with him; one an +Armenian, whom he had taught to speak Dutch, and who had something of +his own, but had a mind to travel into Europe; and the other a Dutch +sailor, whom he had picked up by his fancy, and reposed a great trust in +him, and a very honest fellow he was. + +This Dutchman was very glad of an acquaintance, because he soon found +that we directed our thoughts to Europe also; and as he found we were +encumbered with goods only (for we let him know nothing of our money), +he readily offered us his assistance to dispose of as many of them as +the place we were in would put off, and his advice what to do with the +rest. + +While this was doing, William and I consulted what to do with ourselves +and what we had; and first, we resolved we would never talk seriously +of our measures but in the open fields, where we were sure nobody could +hear; so every evening, when the sun began to decline and the air to be +moderate we walked out, sometimes this way, sometimes that, to consult +of our affairs. + +I should have observed that we had new clothed ourselves here, after +the Persian manner, with long vests of silk, a gown or robe of English +crimson cloth, very fine and handsome, and had let our beards grow so +after the Persian manner that we passed for Persian merchants, in view +only, though, by the way, we could not understand or speak one word of +the language of Persia, or indeed of any other but English and Dutch; +and of the latter I understood very little. + +However, the Dutchman supplied all this for us; and as we had resolved +to keep ourselves as retired as we could, though there were several +English merchants upon the place, yet we never acquainted ourselves with +one of them, or exchanged a word with them; by which means we prevented +their inquiry of us now, or their giving any intelligence of us, if any +news of our landing here should happen to come, which, it was easy for +us to know, was possible enough, if any of our comrades fell into bad +hands, or by many accidents which we could not foresee. + +It was during my being here, for here we stayed near two months, that +I grew very thoughtful about my circumstances; not as to the danger, +neither indeed were we in any, but were entirely concealed and +unsuspected; but I really began to have other thoughts of myself, and of +the world, than ever I had before. + +William had struck so deep into my unthinking temper with hinting to me +that there was something beyond all this; that the present time was the +time of enjoyment, but that the time of account approached; that the +work that remained was gentler than the labour past, viz., repentance, +and that it was high time to think of it;--I say these, and such +thoughts as these, engrossed my hours, and, in a word, I grew very sad. + +As to the wealth I had, which was immensely great, it was all like dirt +under my feet; I had no value for it, no peace in the possession of it, +no great concern about me for the leaving of it. + +William had perceived my thoughts to be troubled and my mind heavy and +oppressed for some time; and one evening, in one of our cool walks, I +began with him about the leaving our effects. William was a wise and +wary man, and indeed all the prudentials of my conduct had for a long +time been owing to his advice, and so now all the methods for preserving +our effects, and even ourselves, lay upon him; and he had been telling +me of some of the measures he had been taking for our making homeward, +and for the security of our wealth, when I took him very short. "Why, +William," says I, "dost thou think we shall ever be able to reach Europe +with all this cargo that we have about us?" + +"Ay," says William, "without doubt, as well as other merchants with +theirs, as long as it is not publicly known what quantity or of what +value our cargo consists." + +"Why, William," says I, smiling, "do you think that if there is a God +above, as you have so long been telling me there is, and that we must +give an account to Him,--I say, do you think, if He be a righteous +Judge, He will let us escape thus with the plunder, as we may call it, +of so many innocent people, nay, I might say nations, and not call us to +an account for it before we can get to Europe, where we pretend to enjoy +it?" + +William appeared struck and surprised at the question, and made no +answer for a great while; and I repeated the question, adding that it +was not to be expected. + +After a little pause, says William, "Thou hast started a very weighty +question, and I can make no positive answer to it; but I will state it +thus: first, it is true that, if we consider the justice of God, we +have no reason to expect any protection; but as the ordinary ways of +Providence are out of the common road of human affairs, so we may hope +for mercy still upon our repentance, and we know not how good He may be +to us; so we are to act as if we rather depended upon the last, I mean +the merciful part, than claimed the first, which must produce nothing +but judgment and vengeance." + +"But hark ye, William," says I, "the nature of repentance, as you have +hinted once to me, included reformation; and we can never reform; how, +then, can we repent?" + +"Why can we never reform?" says William. + +"Because," said I, "we cannot restore what we have taken away by rapine +and spoil." + +"It is true," says William, "we never can do that, for we can never come +to the knowledge of the owners." + +"But what, then, must be done with our wealth," said I, "the effects +of plunder and rapine? If we keep it, we continue to be robbers and +thieves; and if we quit it we cannot do justice with it, for we cannot +restore it to the right owners." + +"Nay," says William, "the answer to it is short. To quit what we have, +and do it here, is to throw it away to those who have no claim to it, +and to divest ourselves of it, but to do no right with it; whereas we +ought to keep it carefully together, with a resolution to do what right +with it we are able; and who knows what opportunity Providence may +put into our hands to do justice, at least, to some of those we have +injured? So we ought, at least, to leave it to Him and go on. As it is, +without doubt our present business is to go to some place of safety, +where we may wait His will." + +This resolution of William was very satisfying to me indeed, as, the +truth is, all he said, and at all times, was solid and good; and had +not William thus, as it were, quieted my mind, I think, verily, I was so +alarmed at the just reason I had to expect vengeance from Heaven upon +me for my ill-gotten wealth, that I should have run away from it as the +devil's goods, that I had nothing to do with, that did not belong to +me, and that I had no right to keep, and was in certain danger of being +destroyed for. + +However, William settled my mind to more prudent steps than these, and +I concluded that I ought, however, to proceed to a place of safety, +and leave the event to God Almighty's mercy. But this I must leave upon +record, that I had from this time no joy of the wealth I had got. I +looked upon it all as stolen, and so indeed the greatest part of it was. +I looked upon it as a hoard of other men's goods, which I had robbed the +innocent owners of, and which I ought, in a word, to be hanged for here, +and damned for hereafter. And now, indeed, I began sincerely to hate +myself for a dog; a wretch that had been a thief and a murderer; a +wretch that was in a condition which nobody was ever in; for I had +robbed, and though I had the wealth by me, yet it was impossible I +should ever make any restitution; and upon this account it ran in my +head that I could never repent, for that repentance could not be sincere +without restitution, and therefore must of necessity be damned. There +was no room for me to escape. I went about with my heart full of these +thoughts, little better than a distracted fellow; in short, running +headlong into the dreadfullest despair, and premeditating nothing but +how to rid myself out of the world; and, indeed, the devil, if such +things are of the devil's immediate doing, followed his work very close +with me, and nothing lay upon my mind for several days but to shoot +myself into the head with my pistol. + +I was all this while in a vagrant life, among infidels, Turks, pagans, +and such sort of people. I had no minister, no Christian to converse +with but poor William. He was my ghostly father or confessor, and he was +all the comfort I had. As for my knowledge of religion, you have heard +my history. You may suppose I had not much; and as for the Word of +God, I do not remember that I ever read a chapter in the Bible in my +lifetime. I was little Bob at Bussleton, and went to school to learn my +Testament. + +However, it pleased God to make William the Quaker everything to me. +Upon this occasion, I took him out one evening, as usual, and hurried +him away into the fields with me, in more haste than ordinary; and +there, in short, I told him the perplexity of my mind, and under what +terrible temptations of the devil I had been; that I must shoot myself, +for I could not support the weight and terror that was upon me. + +"Shoot yourself!" says William; "why, what will that do for you?" + +"Why," says I, "it will put an end to a miserable life." + +"Well," says William, "are you satisfied the next will be better?" + +"No, no," says I; "much worse, to be sure." + +"Why, then," says he, "shooting yourself is the devil's motion, no +doubt; for it is the devil of a reason, that, because thou art in an ill +case, therefore thou must put thyself into a worse." + +This shocked my reason indeed. "Well, but," says I, "there is no bearing +the miserable condition I am in." + +"Very well," says William; "but it seems there is some bearing a worse +condition; and so you will shoot yourself, that you may be past remedy?" + +"I am past remedy already," says I. + +"How do you know that?" says he. + +"I am satisfied of it," said I. + +"Well," says he, "but you are not sure; so you will shoot yourself to +make it certain; for though on this side death you cannot be sure you +will be damned at all, yet the moment you step on the other side of time +you are sure of it; for when it is done, it is not to be said then that +you will be, but that you are damned." + +"Well, but," says William, as if he had been between jest and earnest, +"pray, what didst thou dream of last night?" + +"Why," said I, "I had frightful dreams all night; and, particularly, I +dreamed that the devil came for me, and asked me what my name was; and +I told him. Then he asked me what trade I was. 'Trade?' says I; 'I am a +thief, a rogue, by my calling: I am a pirate and a murderer, and ought +to be hanged.' 'Ay, ay,' says the devil, 'so you do; and you are the +man I looked for, and therefore come along with me.' At which I was most +horribly frighted, and cried out so that it waked me; and I have been in +horrible agony ever since." + +"Very well," says William; "come, give me the pistol thou talkedst of +just now." + +"Why," says I, "what will you do with it?" + +"Do with it!" says William. "Why, thou needest not shoot thyself; I +shall be obliged to do it for thee. Why, thou wilt destroy us all." + +"What do you mean, William?" said I. + +"Mean!" said he; "nay, what didst thou mean, to cry out aloud in thy +sleep, 'I am a thief, a pirate, a murderer, and ought to be hanged'? +Why, thou wilt ruin us all. 'Twas well the Dutchman did not understand +English. In short, I must shoot thee, to save my own life. Come, come," +says he, "give me thy pistol." + +I confess this terrified me again another way, and I began to be +sensible that, if anybody had been near me to understand English, I had +been undone. The thought of shooting myself forsook me from that time; +and I turned to William, "You disorder me extremely, William," said I; +"why, I am never safe, nor is it safe to keep me company. What shall I +do? I shall betray you all." + +"Come, come, friend Bob," says he, "I'll put an end to it all, if you +will take my advice." + +"How's that?" said I. + +"Why, only," says he, "that the next time thou talkest with the devil, +thou wilt talk a little softlier, or we shall be all undone, and you +too." + +This frighted me, I must confess, and allayed a great deal of the +trouble of mind I was in. But William, after he had done jesting with +me, entered upon a very long and serious discourse with me about the +nature of my circumstances, and about repentance; that it ought to be +attended, indeed, with a deep abhorrence of the crime that I had to +charge myself with; but that to despair of God's mercy was no part of +repentance, but putting myself into the condition of the devil; indeed, +that I must apply myself with a sincere, humble confession of my crime, +to ask pardon of God, whom I had offended, and cast myself upon His +mercy, resolving to be willing to make restitution, if ever it should +please God to put it in my power, even to the utmost of what I had in +the world. And this, he told me, was the method which he had resolved +upon himself; and in this, he told me, he had found comfort. + +I had a great deal of satisfaction in William's discourse, and it +quieted me very much; but William was very anxious ever after about my +talking in my sleep, and took care to lie with me always himself, and to +keep me from lodging in any house where so much as a word of English was +understood. + +However, there was not the like occasion afterward; for I was much +more composed in my mind, and resolved for the future to live a quite +different life from what I had done. As to the wealth I had, I looked +upon it as nothing; I resolved to set it apart to any such opportunity +of doing justice as God should put into my hand; and the miraculous +opportunity I had afterwards of applying some parts of it to preserve +a ruined family, whom I had plundered, may be worth reading, if I have +room for it in this account. + +With these resolutions I began to be restored to some degree of quiet +in my mind; and having, after almost three months' stay at Bassorah, +disposed of some goods, but having a great quantity left, we hired +boats according to the Dutchman's direction, and went up to Bagdad, +or Babylon, on the river Tigris, or rather Euphrates. We had a very +considerable cargo of goods with us, and therefore made a great +figure there, and were received with respect. We had, in particular, +two-and-forty bales of Indian stuffs of sundry sorts, silks, muslins, +and fine chintz; we had fifteen bales of very fine China silks, and +seventy packs or bales of spices, particularly cloves and nutmegs, with +other goods. We were bid money here for our cloves, but the Dutchman +advised us not to part with them, and told us we should get a better +price at Aleppo, or in the Levant; so we prepared for the caravan. + +We concealed our having any gold or pearls as much as we could, and +therefore sold three or four bales of China silks and Indian calicoes, +to raise money to buy camels and to pay the customs which are taken at +several places, and for our provisions over the deserts. + +I travelled this journey, careless to the last degree of my goods or +wealth, believing that, as I came by it all by rapine and violence, God +would direct that it should be taken from me again in the same manner; +and, indeed, I think I might say I was very willing it should be so. +But, as I had a merciful Protector above me, so I had a most faithful +steward, counsellor, partner, or whatever I might call him, who was my +guide, my pilot, my governor, my everything, and took care both of me +and of all we had; and though he had never been in any of these parts +of the world, yet he took the care of all upon him; and in about +nine-and-fifty days we arrived from Bassorah, at the mouth of the +river Tigris or Euphrates, through the desert, and through Aleppo to +Alexandria, or, as we call it, Scanderoon, in the Levant. + +Here William and I, and the other two, our faithful comrades, debated +what we should do; and here William and I resolved to separate from the +other two, they resolving to go with the Dutchman into Holland, by the +means of some Dutch ship which lay then in the road. William and I told +them we resolved to go and settle in the Morea, which then belonged to +the Venetians. + +It is true we acted wisely in it not to let them know whither we +went, seeing we had resolved to separate; but we took our old doctor's +directions how to write to him in Holland, and in England, that we might +have intelligence from him on occasion, and promised to give him an +account how to write to us, which we afterwards did, as may in time be +made out. + +We stayed here some time after they were gone, till at length, not being +thoroughly resolved whither to go till then, a Venetian ship touched at +Cyprus, and put in at Scanderoon to look for freight home. We took the +hint, and bargaining for our passage, and the freight of our goods, we +embarked for Venice, where, in two-and-twenty days, we arrived safe, +with all our treasure, and with such a cargo, take our goods and our +money and our jewels together, as, I believed, was never brought into +the city by two single men, since the state of Venice had a being. + +We kept ourselves here _incognito_ for a great while, passing for two +Armenian merchants still, as we had done before; and by this time we had +gotten so much of the Persian and Armenian jargon, which they talked at +Bassorah and Bagdad, and everywhere that we came in the country, as +was sufficient to make us able to talk to one another, so as not to be +understood by anybody, though sometimes hardly by ourselves. + +Here we converted all our effects into money, settled our abode as for +a considerable time, and William and I, maintaining an inviolable +friendship and fidelity to one another, lived like two brothers; we +neither had or sought any separate interest; we conversed seriously and +gravely, and upon the subject of our repentance continually; we never +changed, that is to say, so as to leave off our Armenian garbs; and we +were called, at Venice, the two Grecians. + +I had been two or three times going to give a detail of our wealth, but +it will appear incredible, and we had the greatest difficulty in the +world how to conceal it, being justly apprehensive lest we might be +assassinated in that country for our treasure. At length William told me +he began to think now that he must never see England any more, and +that indeed he did not much concern himself about it; but seeing we had +gained so great wealth, and he had some poor relations in England, if +I was willing, he would write to know if they were living, and to know +what condition they were in, and if he found such of them were alive +as he had some thoughts about, he would, with my consent, send them +something to better their condition. + +I consented most willingly; and accordingly William wrote to a sister +and an uncle, and in about five weeks' time received an answer from them +both, directed to himself, under cover of a hard Armenian name that +he had given himself, viz., Signore Constantine Alexion of Ispahan, at +Venice. + +It was a very moving letter he received from his sister, who, after the +most passionate expressions of joy to hear he was alive, seeing she had +long ago had an account that he was murdered by the pirates in the West +Indies, entreats him to let her know what circumstances he was in; tells +him she was not in any capacity to do anything considerable for him, but +that he should be welcome to her with all her heart; that she was left +a widow, with four children, but kept a little shop in the Minories, by +which she made shift to maintain her family; and that she had sent him +five pounds, lest he should want money, in a strange country, to bring +him home. + +I could see the letter brought tears out of his eyes as he read it; and, +indeed, when he showed it to me, and the little bill for five pounds, +upon an English merchant in Venice, it brought tears out of my eyes too. + +After we had been both affected sufficiently with the tenderness and +kindness of this letter, he turns to me; says he, "What shall I do for +this poor woman?" I mused a while; at last says I, "I will tell you what +you shall do for her. She has sent you five pounds, and she has four +children, and herself, that is five; such a sum, from a poor woman in +her circumstances, is as much as five thousand pounds is to us; you +shall send her a bill of exchange for five thousand pounds English +money, and bid her conceal her surprise at it till she hears from you +again; but bid her leave off her shop, and go and take a house somewhere +in the country, not far off from London, and stay there, in a moderate +figure, till she hears from you again." + +"Now," says William, "I perceive by it that you have some thoughts of +venturing into England." + +"Indeed, William," said I, "you mistake me; but it presently occurred to +me that you should venture, for what have you done that you may not be +seen there? Why should I desire to keep you from your relations, purely +to keep me company?" + +William looked very affectionately upon me. "Nay," says he, "we have +embarked together so long, and come together so far, I am resolved I +will never part with thee as long as I live, go where thou wilt, or stay +where thou wilt; and as for my sister," said William, "I cannot send her +such a sum of money, for whose is all this money we have? It is most of +it thine." + +"No, William," said I, "there is not a penny of it mine but what is +yours too, and I won't have anything but an equal share with you, and +therefore you shall send it to her; if not, I will send it." + +"Why," says William, "it will make the poor woman distracted; she will +be so surprised she will go out of her wits." + +"Well," said I, "William, you may do it prudently; send her a bill +backed of a hundred pounds, and bid her expect more in a post or two, +and that you will send her enough to live on without keeping shop, and +then send her more." + +Accordingly William sent her a very kind letter, with a bill upon a +merchant in London for a hundred and sixty pounds, and bid her comfort +herself with the hope that he should be able in a little time to send +her more. About ten days after, he sent her another bill of five hundred +and forty pounds; and a post or two after, another for three hundred +pounds, making in all a thousand pounds; and told her he would send her +sufficient to leave off her shop, and directed her to take a house as +above. + +He waited then till he received an answer to all the three letters, with +an account that she had received the money, and, which I did not expect, +that she had not let any other acquaintance know that she had received +a shilling from anybody, or so much as that he was alive, and would not +till she had heard again. + +When he showed me this letter, "Well, William," said I, "this woman is +fit to be trusted with life or anything; send her the rest of the five +thousand pounds, and I'll venture to England with you, to this woman's +house, whenever you will." + +In a word, we sent her five thousand pounds in good bills; and she +received them very punctually, and in a little time sent her brother +word that she had pretended to her uncle that she was sickly and could +not carry on the trade any longer, and that she had taken a large house +about four miles from London, under pretence of letting lodgings for +her livelihood; and, in short, intimated as if she understood that he +intended to come over to be _incognito_, assuring him he should be as +retired as he pleased. + +This was opening the very door for us that we thought had been +effectually shut for this life; and, in a word, we resolved to venture, +but to keep ourselves entirely concealed, both as to name and every +other circumstance; and accordingly William sent his sister word how +kindly he took her prudent steps, and that she had guessed right that +he desired to be retired, and that he obliged her not to increase her +figure, but live private, till she might perhaps see him. + +He was going to send the letter away. "Come, William," said I, "you +shan't send her an empty letter; tell her you have a friend coming with +you that must be as retired as yourself, and I'll send her five thousand +pounds more." + +So, in short, we made this poor woman's family rich; and yet, when it +came to the point, my heart failed me, and I durst not venture; and for +William, he would not stir without me; and so we stayed about two years +after this, considering what we should do. + +You may think, perhaps, that I was very prodigal of my ill-gotten goods, +thus to load a stranger with my bounty, and give a gift like a prince to +one that had been able to merit nothing of me, or indeed know me; but +my condition ought to be considered in this case; though I had money to +profusion, yet I was perfectly destitute of a friend in the world, to +have the least obligation or assistance from, or knew not either where +to dispose or trust anything I had while I lived, or whom to give it to +if I died. + +When I had reflected upon the manner of my getting of it, I was +sometimes for giving it all to charitable uses, as a debt due to +mankind, though I was no Roman Catholic, and not at all of the opinion +that it would purchase me any repose to my soul; but I thought, as it +was got by a general plunder, and which I could make no satisfaction +for, it was due to the community, and I ought to distribute it for the +general good. But still I was at a loss how, and where, and by whom to +settle this charity, not daring to go home to my own country, lest some +of my comrades, strolled home, should see and detect me, and for the +very spoil of my money, or the purchase of his own pardon, betray and +expose me to an untimely end. + +Being thus destitute, I say, of a friend, I pitched thus upon William's +sister; the kind step of hers to her brother, whom she thought to be in +distress, signifying a generous mind and a charitable disposition; and +having resolved to make her the object of my first bounty, I did not +doubt but I should purchase something of a refuge for myself, and a kind +of a centre, to which I should tend in my future actions; for really +a man that has a subsistence, and no residence, no place that has a +magnetic influence upon his affections, is in one of the most odd, +uneasy conditions in the world, nor is it in the power of all his money +to make it up to him. + +It was, as I told you, two years and upwards that we remained at Venice +and thereabout, in the greatest hesitation imaginable, irresolute and +unfixed to the last degree. William's sister importuned us daily to come +to England, and wondered we should not dare to trust her, whom we had to +such a degree obliged to be faithful; and in a manner lamented her being +suspected by us. + +At last I began to incline; and I said to William, "Come, brother +William," said I (for ever since our discourse at Bassorah I called him +brother), "if you will agree to two or three things with me, I'll go +home to England with all my heart." + +Says William, "Let me know what they are." + +"Why, first," says I, "you shall not disclose yourself to any of your +relations in England but your sister--no, not one; secondly, we will +not shave off our mustachios or beards" (for we had all along worn our +beards after the Grecian manner), "nor leave off our long vests, that we +may pass for Grecians and foreigners; thirdly, that we shall never speak +English in public before anybody, your sister excepted; fourthly, that +we will always live together and pass for brothers." + +William said he would agree to them all with all his heart, but that the +not speaking English would be the hardest, but he would do his best for +that too; so, in a word, we agreed to go from Venice to Naples, where we +converted a large sum of money into bales of silk, left a large sum in a +merchant's hands at Venice, and another considerable sum at Naples, and +took bills of exchange for a great deal too; and yet we came with such +a cargo to London as few American merchants had done for some years, +for we loaded in two ships seventy-three bales of thrown silk, besides +thirteen bales of wrought silks, from the duchy of Milan, shipped at +Genoa, with all which I arrived safely; and some time after I married my +faithful protectress, William's sister, with whom I am much more happy +than I deserve. + +And now, having so plainly told you that I am come to England, after I +have so boldly owned what life I have led abroad, it is time to leave +off, and say no more for the present, lest some should be willing to +inquire too nicely after your old friend CAPTAIN BOB. + + +[Transcriber's Note: The words "thae" (Scottish dialect for "those") and +"Geat Mogul" ("Great" may be meant) do occur as such in the print copy.] + + + + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Life, Adventures and Piracies of +the Famous Captain Singleton, by Daniel Defoe + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK CAPTAIN SINGLETON *** + +***** This file should be named 6422.txt or 6422.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/6/4/2/6422/ + +Produced by Tom Allen, Charles Franks and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at + www.gutenberg.org/license. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809 +North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email +contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the +Foundation's web site and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + diff --git a/6422.zip b/6422.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2782831 --- /dev/null +++ b/6422.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d40f4f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #6422 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/6422) diff --git a/old/cpsng10.txt b/old/cpsng10.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3a4ef54 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/cpsng10.txt @@ -0,0 +1,10037 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Life, Adventures & Piracies of the +Famous Captain Singleton, by Daniel Defoe +#10 in our series by Daniel Defoe + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the +copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing +this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook. + +This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project +Gutenberg file. Please do not remove it. Do not change or edit the +header without written permission. + +Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the +eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file. Included is +important information about your specific rights and restrictions in +how the file may be used. You can also find out about how to make a +donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!***** + + +Title: The Life, Adventures & Piracies of the Famous Captain Singleton + +Author: Daniel Defoe + +Release Date: September, 2004 [EBook #6422] +[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule] +[This file was first posted on December 10, 2002] + +Edition: 10 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK CAPTAIN SINGLETON *** + + + + +Produced by Tom Allen, Charles Franks +and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team. + + + + + +CAPTAIN SINGLETON + +WITH AN INTRODUCTION +BY EDWARD GARNETT + + + + +[Transcriber's Note: In the print copy, the following words and those of +the title page are written in intricate, illuminated calligraphy.] + +A TALE WHICH HOLDETH CHILDREN FROM PLAY +AND OLD MEN FROM THE CHIMNEY CORNER + +SIR PHILIP SIDNEY + + + + + +THE LIFE ADVENTURES AND PIRACIES +OF THE FAMOUS CAPTAIN SINGLETON + +BY DANIEL DEFOE + + + + +PREFACE + +That all Defoe's novels, with the exception of "Robinson Crusoe," should +have been covered with the dust of neglect for many generations, is a plain +proof of how much fashions in taste affect the popularity of the British +classics. It is true that three generations or so ago, Defoe's works were +edited by both Sir Walter Scott and Hazlitt, and that this masterly piece +of realism, "Captain Singleton," was reprinted a few years back in "The +Camelot Classics," but it is safe to say that out of every thousand readers +of "Robinson Crusoe" only one or two will have even heard of the "Memoirs +of a Cavalier," "Colonel Jack," "Moll Flanders," or "Captain Singleton." It +is indeed distressing to think that while many scores of thousands of +copies of Lord Lytton's flashy romance, "Paul Clifford," have been devoured +by the public, "Captain Singleton" has remained unread and almost +forgotten. But the explanation is simple. Defoe's plain and homely realism +soon grew to be thought vulgar by people who themselves aspired to be +refined and genteel. The rapid spread of popular education, in the middle +of last century, was responsible for a great many aberrations of taste, and +the works of the two most English of Englishmen, Defoe and Hogarth, were +judged to be hardly fitting for polite society, as we may see from Lamb's +Essay on Hogarth, and from an early edition of Chambers's "Cyclopaedia of +English Literature" (1843), where we are told: "Nor is it needful to show +how elegant and reflective literature, especially, tends to moralise, to +soften, and to adorn the soul and life of man." "Unfortunately the taste or +_circumstances of Defoe led him mostly into low life_, and his characters +are such _as we cannot sympathise with_. The whole arcana of roguery +and villany seems to have been open to him.... It might be thought that the +good taste which led Defoe to write in a style of such pure and +unpretending English, instead of the inflated manner of vulgar writers, +_would have dictated a more careful selection of his subjects_, and +kept him from wandering so frequently into the low and disgusting purlieus +of vice. But this moral and tasteful discrimination seems to have been +wholly wanting," &c. The 'forties were the days when critics still talked +learnedly of the "noble style," &c., "the vulgar," of "sinking" or "rising" +with "the subject," the days when Books of Beauty were in fashion, and +Rembrandt's choice of beggars, wrinkled faces and grey hairs, for his +favourite subjects seemed a low and reprehensible taste in "high art." +Though critics to-day still ingenuously confound an artist's subject with +his treatment of it, and prefer scenes of life to be idealised rather than +realised by writers, we have advanced a little since the days of the poet +Montgomery, and it would be difficult now to find anybody writing so +confidently--"Unfortunately the taste or circumstances of Defoe led him +mostly into low life," however much the critic might believe it. But let us +glance at a few passages in "Captain Singleton," which may show us why +Defoe excels as a realist, and why his descriptions of "low life" are +artistically as perfect as any descriptions of "higher life" in the works +of the English novelists. Take the following description of kidnapping:-- + + "The woman pretending to take me up in her arms and kiss me, and + play with me, draws the girl a good way from the house, till at + last she makes a fine story to the girl, and bids her go back to + the maid, and tell her where she was with the child; that a + gentlewoman had taken a fancy to the child and was kissing it, but + she should not be frightened, or to that purpose; for they were + but just there; and so while the girl went, she carried me quite + away.--Page 2. + +Now here, in a single sentence, Defoe catches for us the whole soul and +character of the situation. It _seems_ very simple, but it sums up +marvellously an exact observation and knowledge of the arts of the gipsy +child-stealer, of her cunning flattery and brassy boldness, and we can +see the simple little girl running back to the house to tell the nurse +that a fine lady was kissing the child, and had told her to tell where +they were and she should not be frightened, &c.; and this picture again +calls up the hue and cry after the kidnappers and the fruitless hopes of +the parents. In a word, Defoe has condensed in the eight simple lines of +his little scene all that is essential to its living truth; and let the +young writer note that it is ever the sign of the master to do in three +words, or with three strokes, what the ordinary artist does in thirty. +Defoe's imagination is so extraordinarily comprehensive in picking out +just those little matter-of-fact details that suggest all the other +aspects, and that emphasise the character of the scene or situation, +that he makes us believe in the actuality of whatever he is describing. +So real, so living in every detail is this apocryphal narrative, in +"Captain Singleton," of the crossing of Africa by a body of marooned +sailors from the coast of Mozambique to the Gold Coast, that one would +firmly believe Defoe was committing to writing the verbal narrative of +some adventurer in the flesh, if it were not for certain passages--such +as the description of the impossible desert on page 90, which proves +that Defoe was piecing together his description of an imaginary journey +from the geographical records and travellers' tales of his contemporaries, +aided perhaps by the confused yarns of some sailor friends. How +substantially truthful in spirit and in detail is Defoe's account of +Madagascar is proved by the narrative of Robert Drury's "Captivity in +Madagascar," published in 1729. The natives themselves, as described +intimately by Drury, who lived amongst them for many years, would produce +just such an effect as Defoe describes on rough sailors in their perilous +position. The method by which Defoe compels us to accept improbabilities, +and lulls our critical sense asleep, is well shown in the following +passages:-- + + "Thieving, lying, swearing, forswearing, joined to the most + abominable lewdness, was the stated practice of the ship's crew; + adding to it, that with the most unsufferable boasts of their own + courage, they were, generally speaking, the most complete cowards + that I ever met with."--Page 7. + + "All the seamen in a body came up to the rail of the quarter-deck, + where the captain was walking with some of his officers, and + appointing the boatswain to speak for them, he went up, and falling + on his knees to the captain, begged of him in the humblest manner + possible, to receive the four men on board again, offering to answer + for their fidelity, or to have them kept in chains, till they came + to Lisbon, and there to be delivered up to justice, rather than, as + they said, to have them left, to be murdered by savages, or devoured + by wild beasts. It was a great while ere the captain took any notice + of them, but when he did, he ordered the boatswain to be seized, and + threatened to bring him to the capstan for speaking for them.... + Upon this severity, one of the seamen, bolder than the rest, but + still with all possible respect to the captain, besought his honour, + as he called him, that he would give leave to some more of them to + go on shore, and die with their companions, or, if possible, to + assist them to resist the barbarians."--Page 18. + +Now the first passage we have quoted about the cowardice, &c., of the +Portuguese crew is not in keeping with the second passage, which shows the +men as "wishing to die with their companions"; but so actual is the scene +of the seamen "in a body coming up to the rail of the quarter-deck," that +we cannot but believe the thing happened so, just as we believe in all the +thousand little details of the imaginary narrative of "Robinson Crusoe." +This feat of the imagination Defoe strengthens in the most artful manner, +by putting in the mouths of his characters various reflections to +substantiate the narrative. For example, in the description, on page 263, +of the savages who lined the perilous channel in a half-moon, where the +European ship lay, we find the afterthoughts are added so naturally, that +they would carry conviction to any judge or jury:-- + + "They little thought what service they had done us, and how + unwittingly, and by the greatest ignorance, they had made + themselves pilots to us, while we, having not sounded the place, + might have been lost before we were aware. _It is true we might + have sounded our new harbour, before we had ventured out; but I + cannot say for certain, whether we should or not; for I, for my + part, had not the least suspicion of what our real case was; + however, I say, perhaps, before we had weighed, we should have + looked about us a little._" + +Turning to the other literary qualities that make Defoe's novels great, +if little read, classics, how delightful are the little satiric touches +that add grave weight to the story. Consider the following: "My good +gipsy mother, for some of her worthy actions, no doubt, happened in +process of time to be hanged, and as this fell out something too soon +for me to be perfected in the strolling trade," &c.(p. 3). Every other +word here is dryly satiric, and the large free callousness and careless +brutality of Defoe's days with regard to the life of criminals is +conveyed in half a sentence. And what an amount of shrewd observation is +summed up in this one saying: "Upon these foundations, William said he +was satisfied we might trust them; for, says William, I would as soon +trust a man whose interest binds him to be just to me, as a man whose +principle binds himself" (p. 227). Extremely subtle is also this remark: +"_Why, says I, did you ever know a pirate repent?_ At this he +started a little and returned, _At the gallows_ I have known +_one_ repent, and I _hope_ thou wilt be the second." The +character of William the Quaker pirate is a masterpiece of shrewd +humour. He is the first Quaker brought into English fiction, and we +know of no other Friend in latter-day fiction to equal him. Defoe in +his inimitable manner has defined surely and deftly the peculiar +characteristics of the sect in this portrait. On three separate occasions +we find William saving unfortunate natives or defenceless prisoners from +the cruel and wicked barbarity of the sailors. At page 183, for example, +the reader will find a most penetrating analysis of the dense stupidity +which so often accompanies man's love of bloodshed. The sketch of the +second lieutenant, who was for "murdering the negroes to make them tell," +when he could not make them even understand what he wanted, is worthy of +Tolstoy. We have not space here to dwell upon the scores of passages of +similar deep insight which make "Captain Singleton" a most true and vivid +commentary on the life of Defoe's times, but we may call special attention +to the passage on page 189 which describe the sale of the negroes to the +planters; to the description of the awakening of the conscience of Captain +Singleton through terror at the fire-cloud (page 222); and to the +extraordinarily picturesque conversation between William and the captive +Dutchman (page 264). Finally, if the reader wishes to taste Defoe's flavour +in its perfection let him examine carefully those passages in the +concluding twenty pages of the book, wherein Captain Singleton is shown +as awakening to the wickedness of his past life, and the admirable dry +reasoning of William by which the Quaker prevents him from committing +suicide and persuades him to keep his ill-gotten wealth, "with a resolution +to do what right with it we are able; and who knows what opportunity +Providence may put into our hands.... As it is without doubt, our present +business is to go to some place of safety, where we may wait His will." +How admirable is the passage about William's sister, the widow with four +children who kept a little shop in the Minories, and that in which the +penitent ex-pirates are shown us as hesitating in Venice for two years +before they durst venture to England for fear of the gallows. + +"Captain Singleton" was published in 1720, a year after "Robinson Crusoe," +when Defoe was fifty-nine. Twenty years before had seen "The True-Born +Englishman" and "The Shortest Way with the Dissenters"; and we are told +that from "June 1687 to almost the very week of his death in 1731 a stream +of controversial books and pamphlets poured from his pen commenting upon +and marking every important passing event." The fecundity of Defoe as a +journalist alone surpasses that of any great journalist we can name, +William Cobbett not excepted, and we may add that the style of "Captain +Singleton," like that of "Robinson Crusoe," is so perfect that there is not +a single ineffective passage, or indeed a weak sentence, to be found in the +book. + +EDWARD GARNETT. + + + + +The following is a list of Defoe's works: "New Discovery of Old Intrigue" +(verse), 1691. "Character of Dr. Samuel Annesley" (verse), 1697. "The +Pacificator" (verse), 1700. "True-Born Englishman" (verse), 1701. "The Mock +Mourners" (verse), 1702. "Reformation of Manners" (verse), 1702. "New Test +of Church of England's Loyalty," 1702. "Shortest Way with the Dissenters," +1702. "Ode to the Athenian Society," 1703. "Enquiry into Acgill's General +Translation," 1703. "More Reformation" (verse), 1703. "Hymn to the +Pillory," 1703. "The Storm" (Tale), 1704. "Layman's Sermon on the Late +Storm," 1704. "The Consolidator; or, Memoirs of Sundry Transactions from +the World in the Moon," 1704. "Elegy on Author of 'True-Born Englishman,'" +1704. "Hymn to Victory," 1704. "Giving Alms no Charity," 1704. "The Dyet of +Poland" (verse), 1705. "Apparition of Mrs. Veal," 1706. "Sermon on the +Filling-up of Dr. Burgess's Meeting-house," 1706. "Jure Divino" (verse), +1706. "Caledonia" (verse), 1706. "History of the Union of Great Britain," +1709. "Short Enquiry into a Late Duel," 1713. "A General History of Trade," +1713. "Wars of Charles III.," 1715. "The Family Instruction" (two eds.), +1715. "Hymn to the Mob," 1715. "Memoirs of the Church of Scotland," 1717. +"Life and Death of Count Patkul," 1717. "Memoirs of Duke of Shrewsbury," +1718. "Memoirs of Daniel Williams," 1718. "The Life and Strange Surprising +Adventures of Robinson Crusoe, of York, Mariner," 1719. "The Farther +Adventures of Robinson Crusoe," 1719. "The Dumb Philosopher: or, Great +Britain's Wonder," 1719. "The King of Pirates" (Capt. Avery), 1719. "Life +of Baron de Goertz," 1719. "Life and Adventures of Duncan Campbell," 1720. +"Mr. Campbell's Pacquet," 1720. "Memoirs of a Cavalier," 1720. "Life of +Captain Singleton," 1720. "Serious Reflections during the Life and +Surprising Adventures of Robinson Crusoe," 1720. "The Supernatural +Philosopher; or, The Mysteries of Magick," 1720. Translation of Du +Fresnoy's "Compleat Art of Painting" (verse), 1720. "Moll Flanders," 1722, +"Journal of the Plague Year," 1722. "Due Preparations for the Plague," +1722. "Life of Cartouche," 1722. "History of Colonel Jacque," 1722. +"Religious Courtship," 1722. "History of Peter the Great," 1723. "The +Highland Rogue" (Rob Roy), 1723. "The Fortunate Mistress" (Roxana), 1724. +"Narrative of Murders at Calais," 1724. "Life of John Sheppard," 1724. +"Robberies, Escapes, &c., of John Sheppard," 1724. "The Great Law of +Subordination; or, The Insolence and Insufferable Behaviour of Servants in +England," 1724. "A Tour through Great Britain," 1724-6. "New Voyage Round +the World," 1725. "Account of Jonathan Wild," 1725. "Account of John Gow," +1725. "Everybody's Business is Nobody's Business" (on Servants), 1725. "The +Complete English Tradesman," 1725; vol. ii., 1727. "The Friendly Demon," +1726. "Mere Nature Delineated" (Peter the Wild Boy), 1726. "Political +History of the Devil," 1726. "Essay upon Literature and the Original of +Letters," 1726. "History of Discoveries," 1726-7. "The Protestant +Monastery," 1726. "A System of Magic," 1726. "Parochial Tyranny," 1727. +"Treatise concerning Use and Abuse of Marriage," 1727. "Secrets of +Invisible World Discovered; or, History and Reality of Apparitions," 1727, +1728. "A New Family Instructor," 1728. "Augusta Triumphans," 1728. "Plan of +English Commerce," 1728. "Second Thoughts are Best" (on Street Robberies), +1728. "Street Robberies Considered," 1728. "Humble Proposal to People of +England for Increase of Trade, &c.," 1729. "Preface to R. Dodsley's Poem +'Servitude'" 1729. "Effectual Scheme for Preventing Street Robberies," +1731. + +Besides the above-named publications a large number of further tracts by +Defoe are extant, on matters of Politics and Church. + + + + +THE LIFE, ADVENTURES, AND PIRACIES +OF CAPTAIN SINGLETON + + +As it is usual for great persons, whose lives have been remarkable, and +whose actions deserve recording to posterity, to insist much upon their +originals, give full accounts of their families, and the histories of their +ancestors, so, that I may be methodical, I shall do the same, though I can +look but a very little way into my pedigree, as you will see presently. + +If I may believe the woman whom I was taught to call mother, I was a little +boy, of about two years old, very well dressed, had a nursery-maid to +attend me, who took me out on a fine summer's evening into the fields +towards Islington, as she pretended, to give the child some air; a little +girl being with her, of twelve or fourteen years old, that lived in the +neighbourhood. The maid, whether by appointment or otherwise, meets with a +fellow, her sweetheart, as I suppose; he carries her into a public-house, +to give her a pot and a cake; and while they were toying in the house the +girl plays about, with me in her hand, in the garden and at the door, +sometimes in sight, sometimes out of sight, thinking no harm. + +At this juncture comes by one of those sort of people who, it seems, made +it their business to spirit away little children. This was a hellish trade +in those days, and chiefly practised where they found little children very +well dressed, or for bigger children, to sell them to the plantations. + +The woman, pretending to take me up in her arms and kiss me, and play with +me, draws the girl a good way from the house, till at last she makes a fine +story to the girl, and bids her go back to the maid, and tell her where she +was with the child; that a gentlewoman had taken a fancy to the child, and +was kissing of it, but she should not be frighted, or to that purpose; for +they were but just there; and so, while the girl went, she carries me quite +away. + +From this time, it seems, I was disposed of to a beggar woman that wanted a +pretty little child to set out her case; and after that, to a gipsy, under +whose government I continued till I was about six years old. And this +woman, though I was continually dragged about with her from one part of the +country to another, yet never let me want for anything; and I called her +mother; though she told me at last she was not my mother, but that she +bought me for twelve shillings of another woman, who told her how she came +by me, and told her that my name was Bob Singleton, not Robert, but plain +Bob; for it seems they never knew by what name I was christened. + +It is in vain to reflect here, what a terrible fright the careless hussy +was in that lost me; what treatment she received from my justly enraged +father and mother, and the horror these must be in at the thoughts of their +child being thus carried away; for as I never knew anything of the matter, +but just what I have related, nor who my father and mother were, so it +would make but a needless digression to talk of it here. + +My good gipsy mother, for some of her worthy actions no doubt, happened in +process of time to be hanged; and as this fell out something too soon for +me to be perfected in the strolling trade, the parish where I was left, +which for my life I can't remember, took some care of me, to be sure; for +the first thing I can remember of myself afterwards, was, that I went to a +parish school, and the minister of the parish used to talk to me to be a +good boy; and that, though I was but a poor boy, if I minded my book, and +served God, I might make a good man. + +I believe I was frequently removed from one town to another, perhaps as the +parishes disputed my supposed mother's last settlement. Whether I was so +shifted by passes, or otherwise, I know not; but the town where I last was +kept, whatever its name was, must be not far off from the seaside; for a +master of a ship who took a fancy to me, was the first that brought me to a +place not far from Southampton, which I afterwards knew to be Bussleton; +and there I attended the carpenters, and such people as were employed in +building a ship for him; and when it was done, though I was not above +twelve years old, he carried me to sea with him on a voyage to +Newfoundland. + +I lived well enough, and pleased my master so well that he called me his +own boy; and I would have called him father, but he would not allow it, for +he had children of his own. I went three or four voyages with him, and grew +a great sturdy boy, when, coming home again from the banks of Newfoundland, +we were taken by an Algerine rover, or man-of-war; which, if my account +stands right, was about the year 1695, for you may be sure I kept no +journal. + +I was not much concerned at the disaster, though I saw my master, after +having been wounded by a splinter in the head during the engagement, very +barbarously used by the Turks; I say, I was not much concerned, till, upon +some unlucky thing I said, which, as I remember, was about abusing my +master, they took me and beat me most unmercifully with a flat stick on the +soles of my feet, so that I could neither go or stand for several days +together. + +But my good fortune was my friend upon this occasion; for, as they were +sailing away with our ship in tow as a prize, steering for the Straits, and +in sight of the bay of Cadiz, the Turkish rover was attacked by two great +Portuguese men-of-war, and taken and carried into Lisbon. + +As I was not much concerned at my captivity, not indeed understanding the +consequences of it, if it had continued, so I was not suitably sensible of +my deliverance; nor, indeed, was it so much a deliverance to me as it would +otherwise have been, for my master, who was the only friend I had in the +world, died at Lisbon of his wounds; and I being then almost reduced to my +primitive state, viz., of starving, had this addition to it, that it was in +a foreign country too, where I knew nobody and could not speak a word of +their language. However, I fared better here than I had reason to expect; +for when all the rest of our men had their liberty to go where they would, +I, that knew not whither to go, stayed in the ship for several days, till +at length one of the lieutenants seeing me, inquired what that young +English dog did there, and why they did not turn him on shore. + +I heard him, and partly understood what he meant, though not what he said, +and began then to be in a terrible fright; for I knew not where to get a +bit of bread; when the pilot of the ship, an old seaman, seeing me look +very dull, came to me, and speaking broken English to me, told me I must be +gone. "Whither must I go?" said I. "Where you will," said he, "home to your +own country, if you will." "How must I go thither?" said I. "Why, have you +no friend?" said he. "No," said I, "not in the world, but that dog," +pointing to the ship's dog (who, having stolen a piece of meat just before, +had brought it close by me, and I had taken it from him, and ate it), "for +he has been a good friend, and brought me my dinner." + +"Well, well," says he, "you must have your dinner. Will you go with me?" +"Yes," says I, "with all my heart." In short, the old pilot took me home +with him, and used me tolerably well, though I fared hard enough; and I +lived with him about two years, during which time he was soliciting his +business, and at length got to be master or pilot under Don Garcia de +Pimentesia de Carravallas, captain of a Portuguese galleon or carrack, +which was bound to Goa, in the East Indies; and immediately having gotten +his commission, put me on board to look after his cabin, in which he had +stored himself with abundance of liquors, succades, sugar, spices, and +other things, for his accommodation in the voyage, and laid in afterwards a +considerable quantity of European goods, fine lace and linen; and also +baize, woollen cloth, stuffs, &c., under the pretence of his clothes. + +I was too young in the trade to keep any journal of this voyage, though my +master, who was, for a Portuguese, a pretty good artist, prompted me to it; +but my not understanding the language was one hindrance; at least it served +me for an excuse. However, after some time, I began to look into his charts +and books; and, as I could write a tolerable hand, understood some Latin, +and began to have a little smattering of the Portuguese tongue, so I began +to get a superficial knowledge of navigation, but not such as was likely to +be sufficient to carry me through a life of adventure, as mine was to be. +In short, I learned several material things in this voyage among the +Portuguese; I learned particularly to be an arrant thief and a bad sailor; +and I think I may say they are the best masters for teaching both these of +any nation in the world. + +We made our way for the East Indies, by the coast of Brazil; not that it is +in the course of sailing the way thither, but our captain, either on his +own account, or by the direction of the merchants, went thither first, +where at All Saints' Bay, or, as they call it in Portugal, the Rio de Todos +los Santos, we delivered near a hundred tons of goods, and took in a +considerable quantity of gold, with some chests of sugar, and seventy or +eighty great rolls of tobacco, every roll weighing at least a +hundredweight. + +Here, being lodged on shore by my master's order, I had the charge of the +captain's business, he having seen me very diligent for my own master; and +in requital for his mistaken confidence, I found means to secure, that is +to say, to steal, about twenty moidores out of the gold that was shipped on +board by the merchants, and this was my first adventure. + +We had a tolerable voyage from hence to the Cape de Bona Speranza; and I +was reputed as a mighty diligent servant to my master, and very faithful. I +was diligent indeed, but I was very far from honest; however, they thought +me honest, which, by the way, was their very great mistake. Upon this very +mistake the captain took a particular liking to me, and employed me +frequently on his own occasion; and, on the other hand, in recompense for +my officious diligence, I received several particular favours from him; +particularly, I was, by the captain's command, made a kind of a steward +under the ship's steward, for such provisions as the captain demanded for +his own table. He had another steward for his private stores besides, but +my office concerned only what the captain called for of the ship's stores +for his private use. + +However, by this means I had opportunity particularly to take care of my +master's man, and to furnish myself with sufficient provisions to make me +live much better than the other people in the ship; for the captain seldom +ordered anything out of the ship's stores, as above, but I snipt some of it +for my own share. We arrived at Goa, in the East Indies, in about seven +months from Lisbon, and remained there eight more; during which time I had +indeed nothing to do, my master being generally on shore, but to learn +everything that is wicked among the Portuguese, a nation the most +perfidious and the most debauched, the most insolent and cruel, of any that +pretend to call themselves Christians, in the world. + +Thieving, lying, swearing, forswearing, joined to the most abominable +lewdness, was the stated practice of the ship's crew; adding to it, that, +with the most insufferable boasts of their own courage, they were, +generally speaking, the most complete cowards that I ever met with; and the +consequence of their cowardice was evident upon many occasions. However, +there was here and there one among them that was not so bad as the rest; +and, as my lot fell among them, it made me have the most contemptible +thoughts of the rest, as indeed they deserved. + +I was exactly fitted for their society indeed; for I had no sense of virtue +or religion upon me. I had never heard much of either, except what a good +old parson had said to me when I was a child of about eight or nine years +old; nay, I was preparing and growing up apace to be as wicked as anybody +could be, or perhaps ever was. Fate certainly thus directed my beginning, +knowing that I had work which I had to do in the world, which nothing but +one hardened against all sense of honesty or religion could go through; and +yet, even in this state of original wickedness, I entertained such a +settled abhorrence of the abandoned vileness of the Portuguese, that I +could not but hate them most heartily from the beginning, and all my life +afterwards. They were so brutishly wicked, so base and perfidious, not only +to strangers but to one another, so meanly submissive when subjected, so +insolent, or barbarous and tyrannical, when superior, that I thought there +was something in them that shocked my very nature. Add to this that it is +natural to an Englishman to hate a coward, it all joined together to make +the devil and a Portuguese equally my aversion. + +However, according to the English proverb, he that is shipped with the +devil must sail with the devil; I was among them, and I managed myself as +well as I could. My master had consented that I should assist the captain +in the office, as above; but, as I understood afterwards that the captain +allowed my master half a moidore a month for my service, and that he had my +name upon the ship's books also, I expected that when the ship came to be +paid four months' wages at the Indies, as they, it seems, always do, my +master would let me have something for myself. + +But I was wrong in my man, for he was none of that kind; he had taken me up +as in distress, and his business was to keep me so, and make his market of +me as well as he could, which I began to think of after a different manner +than I did at first, for at first I thought he had entertained me in mere +charity, upon seeing my distressed circumstances, but did not doubt but +when he put me on board the ship, I should have some wages for my service. + +But he thought, it seems, quite otherwise; and when I procured one to +speak to him about it, when the ship was paid at Goa, he flew into the +greatest rage imaginable, and called me English dog, young heretic, and +threatened to put me into the Inquisition. Indeed, of all the names the +four-and-twenty letters could make up, he should not have called me +heretic; for as I knew nothing about religion, neither Protestant from +Papist, or either of them from a Mahometan, I could never be a heretic. +However, it passed but a little, but, as young as I was, I had been +carried into the Inquisition, and there, if they had asked me if I was a +Protestant or a Catholic, I should have said yes to that which came +first. If it had been the Protestant they had asked first, it had +certainly made a martyr of me for I did not know what. + +But the very priest they carried with them, or chaplain of the ship, as we +called him, saved me; for seeing me a boy entirely ignorant of religion, +and ready to do or say anything they bid me, he asked me some questions +about it, which he found I answered so very simply, that he took it upon +him to tell them he would answer for my being a good Catholic, and he hoped +he should be the means of saving my soul, and he pleased himself that it +was to be a work of merit to him; so he made me as good a Papist as any of +them in about a week's time. + +I then told him my case about my master; how, it is true, he had taken me +up in a miserable case on board a man-of-war at Lisbon; and I was indebted +to him for bringing me on board this ship; that if I had been left at +Lisbon, I might have starved, and the like; and therefore I was willing to +serve him, but that I hoped he would give me some little consideration for +my service, or let me know how long he expected I should serve him for +nothing. + +It was all one; neither the priest nor any one else could prevail with him, +but that I was not his servant but his slave, that he took me in the +Algerine, and that I was a Turk, only pretended to be an English boy to get +my liberty, and he would carry me to the Inquisition as a Turk. + +This frighted me out of my wits, for I had nobody to vouch for me what I +was, or from whence I came; but the good Padre Antonio, for that was his +name, cleared me of that part by a way I did not understand; for he came to +me one morning with two sailors, and told me they must search me, to bear +witness that I was not a Turk. I was amazed at them, and frighted, and did +not understand them, nor could I imagine what they intended to do to me. +However, stripping me, they were soon satisfied, and Father Antony bade me +be easy, for they could all witness that I was no Turk. So I escaped that +part of my master's cruelty. + +And now I resolved from that time to run away from him if I could, but +there was no doing of it there, for there were not ships of any nation in +the world in that port, except two or three Persian vessels from Ormus, so +that if I had offered to go away from him, he would have had me seized on +shore, and brought on board by force; so that I had no remedy but patience. +And this he brought to an end too as soon as he could, for after this he +began to use me ill, and not only to straiten my provisions, but to beat +and torture me in a barbarous manner for every trifle, so that, in a word, +my life began to be very miserable. + +The violence of this usage of me, and the impossibility of my escape from +his hands, set my head a-working upon all sorts of mischief, and in +particular I resolved, after studying all other ways to deliver myself, and +finding all ineffectual, I say, I resolved to murder him. With this hellish +resolution in my head, I spent whole nights and days contriving how to put +it in execution, the devil prompting me very warmly to the fact. I was +indeed entirely at a loss for the means, for I had neither gun or sword, +nor any weapon to assault him with; poison I had my thoughts much upon, but +knew not where to get any; or, if I might have got it, I did not know the +country word for it, or by what name to ask for it. + +In this manner I quitted the fact, intentionally, a hundred and a hundred +times; but Providence, either for his sake or for mine, always frustrated +my designs, and I could never bring it to pass; so I was obliged to +continue in his chains till the ship, having taken in her loading, set sail +for Portugal. + +I can say nothing here to the manner of our voyage, for, as I said, I kept +no journal; but this I can give an account of, that having been once as +high as the Cape of Good Hope, as we call it, or Cabo de Bona Speranza, as +they call it, we were driven back again by a violent storm from the W.S.W., +which held us six days and nights a great way to the eastward, and after +that, standing afore the wind for several days more, we at last came to an +anchor on the coast of Madagascar. + +The storm had been so violent that the ship had received a great deal of +damage, and it required some time to repair her; so, standing in nearer the +shore, the pilot, my master, brought the ship into a very good harbour, +where we rid in twenty-six fathoms water, about half a mile from the shore. + +While the ship rode here there happened a most desperate mutiny among the +men, upon account of some deficiency in their allowance, which came to that +height that they threatened the captain to set him on shore, and go back +with the ship to Goa. I wished they would with all my heart, for I was full +of mischief in my head, and ready enough to do any. So, though I was but a +boy, as they called me, yet I prompted the mischief all I could, and +embarked in it so openly, that I escaped very little being hanged in the +first and most early part of my life; for the captain had some notice that +there was a design laid by some of the company to murder him; and having, +partly by money and promises, and partly by threatening and torture, +brought two fellows to confess the particulars, and the names of the +persons concerned, they were presently apprehended, till, one accusing +another, no less than sixteen men were seized and put into irons, whereof I +was one. + +The captain, who was made desperate by his danger, resolving to clear the +ship of his enemies, tried us all, and we were all condemned to die. The +manner of his process I was too young to take notice of; but the purser and +one of the gunners were hanged immediately, and I expected it with the +rest. I do not remember any great concern I was under about it, only that I +cried very much, for I knew little then of this world, and nothing at all +of the next. + +However, the captain contented himself with executing these two, and some +of the rest, upon their humble submission and promise of future good +behaviour, were pardoned; but five were ordered to be set on shore on the +island and left there, of which I was one. My master used all his interest +with the captain to have me excused, but could not obtain it; for somebody +having told him that I was one of them who was singled out to have killed +him, when my master desired I might not be set on shore, the captain told +him I should stay on board if he desired it, but then I should be hanged, +so he might choose for me which he thought best. The captain, it seems, was +particularly provoked at my being concerned in the treachery, because of +his having been so kind to me, and of his having singled me out to serve +him, as I have said above; and this, perhaps, obliged him to give my master +such a rough choice, either to set me on shore or to have me hanged on +board. And had my master, indeed, known what good-will I had for him, he +would not have been long in choosing for me; for I had certainly determined +to do him a mischief the first opportunity I had for it. This was, +therefore, a good providence for me to keep me from dipping my hands in +blood, and it made me more tender afterwards in matters of blood than I +believe I should otherwise have been. But as to my being one of them that +was to kill the captain, that I was wronged in, for I was not the person, +but it was really one of them that were pardoned, he having the good luck +not to have that part discovered. + +I was now to enter upon a part of independent life, a thing I was indeed +very ill prepared to manage, for I was perfectly loose and dissolute in my +behaviour, bold and wicked while I was under government, and now perfectly +unfit to be trusted with liberty, for I was as ripe for any villainy as a +young fellow that had no solid thought ever placed in his mind could be +supposed to be. Education, as you have heard, I had none; and all the +little scenes of life I had passed through had been full of dangers and +desperate circumstances; but I was either so young or so stupid, that I +escaped the grief and anxiety of them, for want of having a sense of their +tendency and consequences. + +This thoughtless, unconcerned temper had one felicity indeed in it, that it +made me daring and ready for doing any mischief, and kept off the sorrow +which otherwise ought to have attended me when I fell into any mischief; +that this stupidity was instead of a happiness to me, for it left my +thoughts free to act upon means of escape and deliverance in my distress, +however great it might be; whereas my companions in the misery were so sunk +by their fear and grief, that they abandoned themselves to the misery of +their condition, and gave over all thought but of their perishing and +starving, being devoured by wild beasts, murdered, and perhaps eaten by +cannibals, and the like. + +I was but a young fellow, about seventeen or eighteen; but hearing what was +to be my fate, I received it with no appearance of discouragement; but I +asked what my master said to it, and being told that he had used his utmost +interest to save me, but the captain had answered I should either go on +shore or be hanged on board, which he pleased, I then gave over all hope of +being received again. I was not very thankful in my thoughts to my master +for his soliciting the captain for me, because I knew that what he did was +not in kindness to me so much as in kindness to himself; I mean, to +preserve the wages which he got for me, which amounted to above six dollars +a month, including what the captain allowed him for my particular service +to him. + +When I understood that my master was so apparently kind, I asked if I might +not be admitted to speak with him, and they told me I might, if my master +would come down to me, but I could not be allowed to come up to him; so +then I desired my master might be spoke to to come to me, and he +accordingly came to me. I fell on my knees to him, and begged he would +forgive me what I had done to displease him; and indeed the resolution I +had taken to murder him lay with some horror upon my mind just at that +time, so that I was once just a-going to confess it, and beg him to forgive +me, but I kept it in. He told me he had done all he could to obtain my +pardon of the captain, but could not and he knew no way for me but to have +patience, and submit to my fate; and if they came to speak with any ship of +their nation at the Cape, he would endeavour to have them stand in, and +fetch us off again, if we might be found. + +Then I begged I might have my clothes on shore with me. He told me he was +afraid I should have little need of clothes, for he did not see how we +could long subsist on the island, and that he had been told that the +inhabitants were cannibals or men-eaters (though he had no reason for that +suggestion), and we should not be able to live among them. I told him I was +not so afraid of that as I was of starving for want of victuals; and as for +the inhabitants being cannibals, I believed we should be more likely to eat +them than they us, if we could but get at them. But I was mightily +concerned, I said, we should have no weapons with us to defend ourselves, +and I begged nothing now, but that he would give me a gun and a sword, with +a little powder and shot. + +He smiled, and said they would signify nothing to us, for it was impossible +for us to pretend to preserve our lives among such a populous and desperate +nation as the people of this island were. I told him that, however, it +would do us this good, for we should not be devoured or destroyed +immediately; so I begged hard for the gun. At last he told me he did not +know whether the captain would give him leave to give me a gun, and if not, +he durst not do it; but he promised to use his interest to obtain it for +me, which he did, and the next day he sent me a gun, with some ammunition, +but told me the captain would not suffer the ammunition to be given us till +we were set all on shore, and till he was just going to set sail. He also +sent me the few clothes I had in the ship, which indeed were not many. + +Two days after this, we were all carried on shore together; the rest of my +fellow-criminals hearing I had a gun, and some powder and shot, solicited +for liberty to carry the like with them, which was also granted them; and +thus we were set on shore to shift for ourselves. + +At our first coming into the island we were terrified exceedingly with the +sight of the barbarous people, whose figure was made more terrible to us +than it really was by the report we had of them from the seamen; but when +we came to converse with them awhile, we found they were not cannibals, as +was reported, or such as would fall immediately upon us and eat us up; but +they came and sat down by us, and wondered much at our clothes and arms, +and made signs to give us some victuals, such as they had, which was only +roots and plants dug out of the ground for the present, but they brought us +fowls and flesh afterwards in good plenty. + +This encouraged the other four men that were with me very much, for they +were quite dejected before; but now they began to be very familiar with +them, and made signs, that if they would use us kindly, we would stay and +live with them; which they seemed glad of, though they knew little of the +necessity we were under to do so, or how much we were afraid of them. + +However, upon second thoughts we resolved that we would only stay in that +part so long as the ship rid in the bay, and then making them believe we +were gone with the ship, we would go and place ourselves, if possible, +where there were no inhabitants to be seen, and so live as we could, or +perhaps watch for a ship that might be driven upon the coast as we were. + +The ship continued a fortnight in the roads, repairing some damage which +had been done her in the late storm, and taking in wood and water; and +during this time, the boat coming often on shore, the men brought us +several refreshments, and the natives believing we only belonged to the +ship, were civil enough. We lived in a kind of a tent on the shore, or +rather a hut, which we made with the boughs of trees, and sometimes in the +night retired to a wood a little out of their way, to let them think we +were gone on board the ship. However, we found them barbarous, treacherous, +and villainous enough in their nature, only civil from fear, and therefore +concluded we should soon fall into their hands when the ship was gone. + +The sense of this wrought upon my fellow-sufferers even to distraction; and +one of them, being a carpenter, in his mad fit, swam off to the ship in the +night, though she lay then a league to sea, and made such pitiful moan to +be taken in, that the captain was prevailed with at last to take him in, +though they let him lie swimming three hours in the water before he +consented to it. + +Upon this, and his humble submission, the captain received him, and, in a +word, the importunity of this man (who for some time petitioned to be taken +in, though they hanged him as soon as they had him) was such as could not +be resisted; for, after he had swam so long about the ship, he was not able +to reach the shore again; and the captain saw evidently that the man must +be taken on board or suffered to drown, and the whole ship's company +offering to be bound for him for his good behaviour, the captain at last +yielded, and he was taken up, but almost dead with his being so long in the +water. + +When this man was got in, he never left importuning the captain, and all +the rest of the officers, in behalf of us that were behind, but to the very +last day the captain was inexorable; when, at the time their preparations +were making to sail, and orders given to hoist the boats into the ship, all +the seamen in a body came up to the rail of the quarter-deck, where the +captain was walking with some of his officers, and appointing the boatswain +to speak for them, he went up, and falling on his knees to the captain, +begged of him, in the humblest manner possible, to receive the four men on +board again, offering to answer for their fidelity, or to have them kept in +chains till they came to Lisbon, and there to be delivered up to justice, +rather than, as they said, to have them left to be murdered by savages, or +devoured by wild beasts. It was a great while ere the captain took any +notice of them, but when he did, he ordered the boatswain to be seized, and +threatened to bring him to the capstan for speaking for them. + +Upon this severity, one of the seamen, bolder than the rest, but still with +all possible respect to the captain, besought his honour, as he called him, +that he would give leave to some more of them to go on shore, and die with +their companions, or, if possible, to assist them to resist the barbarians. +The captain, rather provoked than cowed with this, came to the barricade of +the quarter-deck, and speaking very prudently to the men (for had he spoken +roughly, two-thirds of them would have left the ship, if not all of them), +he told them, it was for their safety as well as his own that he had been +obliged to that severity; that mutiny on board a ship was the same thing as +treason in a king's palace, and he could not answer it to his owners and +employers to trust the ship and goods committed to his charge with men who +had entertained thoughts of the worst and blackest nature; that he wished +heartily that it had been anywhere else that they had been set on shore, +where they might have been in less hazard from the savages; that, if he had +designed they should be destroyed, he could as well have executed them on +board as the other two; that he wished it had been in some other part of +the world, where he might have delivered them up to the civil justice, or +might have left them among Christians; but it was better their lives were +put in hazard than his life, and the safety of the ship; and that though he +did not know that he had deserved so ill of any of them as that they should +leave the ship rather than do their duty, yet if any of them were resolved +to do so unless he would consent to take a gang of traitors on board, who, +as he had proved before them all, had conspired to murder him, he would not +hinder them, nor for the present would he resent their importunity; but, if +there was nobody left in the ship but himself, he would never consent to +take them on board. + +This discourse was delivered so well, was in itself so reasonable, was +managed with so much temper, yet so boldly concluded with a negative, that +the greatest part of the men were satisfied for the present. However, as it +put the men into juntos and cabals, they were not composed for some hours; +the wind also slackening towards night, the captain ordered not to weigh +till next morning. + +The same night twenty-three of the men, among whom was the gunner's mate, +the surgeon's assistant, and two carpenters, applying to the chief mate +told him, that as the captain had given them leave to go on shore to their +comrades, they begged that he would speak to the captain not to take it ill +that they were desirous to go and die with their companions; and that they +thought they could do no less in such an extremity than go to them; +because, if there was any way to save their lives, it was by adding to +their numbers, and making them strong enough to assist one another in +defending themselves against the savages, till perhaps they might one time +or other find means to make their escape, and get to their own country +again. + +The mate told them, in so many words, that he durst not speak to the +captain upon any such design, and was very sorry they had no more respect +for him than to desire him to go upon such an errand; but, if they were +resolved upon such an enterprise, he would advise them to take the +long-boat in the morning betimes, and go off, seeing the captain had given +them leave, and leave a civil letter behind them to the captain, and to +desire him to send his men on shore for the boat, which should be delivered +very honestly, and he promised to keep their counsel so long. + +Accordingly, an hour before day, those twenty-three men, with every man a +firelock and a cutlass, with some pistols, three halberds or half-pikes, +and good store of powder and ball, without any provision but about half a +hundred of bread, but with all their chests and clothes, tools, +instruments, books, &c., embarked themselves so silently, that the captain +got no notice of it till they were gotten half the way on shore. + +As soon as the captain heard of it he called for the gunner's mate, the +chief gunner being at the time sick in his cabin, and ordered to fire at +them; but, to his great mortification, the gunner's mate was one of the +number, and was gone with them; and indeed it was by this means they got so +many arms and so much ammunition. When the captain found how it was, and +that there was no help for it, he began to be a little appeased, and made +light of it, and called up the men, and spoke kindly to them, and told them +he was very well satisfied in the fidelity and ability of those that were +now left, and that he would give to them, for their encouragement, to be +divided among them, the wages which were due to the men that were gone, and +that it was a great satisfaction to him that the ship was free from such a +mutinous rabble, who had not the least reason for their discontent. + +The men seemed very well satisfied, and particularly the promise of the +wages of those who were gone went a great way with them. After this, the +letter which was left by the men was given to the captain by his boy, with +whom, it seems, the men had left it. The letter was much to the same +purpose of what they had said to the mate, and which he declined to say for +them, only that at the end of their letter they told the captain that, as +they had no dishonest design, so they had taken nothing away with them +which was not their own, except some arms and ammunition, such as were +absolutely necessary to them, as well for their defence against the savages +as to kill fowls or beasts for their food, that they might not perish; and +as there were considerable sums due to them for wages, they hoped he would +allow the arms and ammunition upon their accounts. They told him that, as +to the ship's longboat, which they had taken to bring them on shore, they +knew it was necessary to him, and they were very willing to restore it to +him, and if he pleased to send for it, it should be very honestly delivered +to his men, and not the least injury offered to any of those who came for +it, nor the least persuasion or invitation made use of to any of them to +stay with them; and, at the bottom of the letter, they very humbly besought +him that, for their defence, and for the safety of their lives, he would be +pleased to send them a barrel of powder and some ammunition, and give them +leave to keep the mast and sail of the boat, that if it was possible for +them to make themselves a boat of any kind, they might shift off to sea, to +save themselves in such part of the world as their fate should direct them +to. + +Upon this the captain, who had won much upon the rest of his men by what he +had said to them, and was very easy as to the general peace (for it was +very true that the most mutinous of the men were gone), came out to the +quarter-deck, and, calling the men together, let them know the substance of +the letter, and told the men that, however they had not deserved such +civility from him, yet he was not willing to expose them more than they +were willing to expose themselves; he was inclined to send them some +ammunition, and as they had desired but one barrel of powder, he would send +them two barrels, and shot, or lead and moulds to make shot, in proportion; +and, to let them see that he was civiller to them than they deserved, he +ordered a cask of arrack and a great bag of bread to be sent them for +subsistence till they should be able to furnish themselves. + +The rest of the men applauded the captain's generosity, and every one of +them sent us something or other, and about three in the afternoon the +pinnace came on shore, and brought us all these things, which we were very +glad of, and returned the long-boat accordingly; and as to the men that +came with the pinnace, as the captain had singled out such men as he knew +would not come over to us, so they had positive orders not to bring any one +of us on board again, upon pain of death; and indeed both were so true to +our points, that we neither asked them to stay, nor they us to go. + +We were now a good troop, being in all twenty-seven men, very well armed, +and provided with everything but victuals; we had two carpenters among us, +a gunner, and, which was worth all the rest, a surgeon or doctor; that is +to say, he was an assistant to a surgeon at Goa, and was entertained as a +supernumerary with us. The carpenters had brought all their tools, the +doctor all his instruments and medicines, and indeed we had a great deal of +baggage, that is to say, on the whole, for some of us had little more than +the clothes on our backs, of whom I was one; but I had one thing which none +of them had, viz., I had the twenty-two moidores of gold which I had stole +at the Brazils, and two pieces of eight. The two pieces of eight I showed, +and one moidore, and none of them ever suspected that I had any more money +in the world, having been known to be only a poor boy taken up in charity, +as you have heard, and used like a slave, and in the worst manner of a +slave, by my cruel master the pilot. + +It will be easy to imagine we four that were left at first were joyful, +nay, even surprised with joy at the coming of the rest, though at first we +were frighted, and thought they came to fetch us back to hang us; but they +took ways quickly to satisfy us that they were in the same condition with +us, only with this additional circumstance, theirs was voluntary, and ours +by force. + +The first piece of news they told us after the short history of their +coming away was, that our companion was on board, but how he got thither we +could not imagine, for he had given us the slip, and we never imagined he +could swim so well as to venture off to the ship, which lay at so great a +distance; nay, we did not so much as know that he could swim at all, and +not thinking anything of what really happened, we thought he must have +wandered into the woods and was devoured, or was fallen into the hands of +the natives, and was murdered; and these thoughts filled us with fears +enough, and of several kinds, about its being some time or other our lot to +fall into their hands also. But hearing how he had with much difficulty +been received on board the ship again and pardoned, we were much better +satisfied than before. + +Being now, as I have said, a considerable number of us, and in condition to +defend ourselves, the first thing we did was to give every one his hand +that we would not separate from one another upon any occasion whatsoever, +but that we would live and die together; that we would kill no food, but +that we would distribute it in public; and that we would be in all things +guided by the majority, and not insist upon our own resolutions in anything +if the majority were against it; that we would appoint a captain among us +to be our governor or leader during pleasure; that while he was in office +we would obey him without reserve, on pain of death; and that every one +should take turn, but the captain was not to act in any particular thing +without advice of the rest, and by the majority. + +Having established these rules, we resolved to enter into some measures for +our food, and for conversing with the inhabitants or natives of the island +for our supply. As for food, they were at first very useful to us, but we +soon grew weary of them, being an ignorant, ravenous, brutish sort of +people, even worse than the natives of any other country that we had seen; +and we soon found that the principal part of our subsistence was to be had +by our guns, shooting of deer and other creatures, and fowls of all other +sorts, of which there is abundance. + +We found the natives did not disturb or concern themselves much about us; +nor did they inquire, or perhaps know, whether we stayed among them or not, +much less that our ship was gone quite away, and had cast us off, as was +our case; for the next morning, after we had sent back the long-boat, the +ship stood away to the south-east, and in four hours' time was out of our +sight. + +The next day two of us went out into the country one way, and two another, +to see what kind of a land we were in; and we soon found the country was +very pleasant and fruitful, and a convenient place enough to live in; but, +as before, inhabited by a parcel of creatures scarce human, or capable of +being made social on any account whatsoever. + +We found the place full of cattle and provisions; but whether we might +venture to take them where we could find them or not, we did not know; and +though we were under a necessity to get provisions, yet we were loth to +bring down a whole nation of devils upon us at once, and therefore some of +our company agreed to try to speak with some of the country, if we could, +that we might see what course was to be taken with them. Eleven of our men +went on this errand, well armed and furnished for defence. They brought +word that they had seen some of the natives, who appeared very civil to +them, but very shy and afraid, seeing their guns, for it was easy to +perceive that the natives knew what their guns were, and what use they were +of. + +They made signs to the natives for some food, and they went and fetched +several herbs and roots, and some milk; but it was evident they did not +design to give it away, but to sell it, making signs to know what our men +would give them. + +Our men were perplexed at this, for they had nothing to barter; however, +one of the men pulled out a knife and showed them, and they were so fond of +it that they were ready to go together by the ears for the knife. The +seaman seeing that, was willing to make a good market of his knife, and +keeping them chaffering about it a good while, some offered him roots, and +others milk; at last one offered him a goat for it, which he took. Then +another of our men showed them another knife, but they had nothing good +enough for that, whereupon one of them made signs that he would go and +fetch something; so our men stayed three hours for their return, when they +came back and brought him a small-sized, thick, short cow, very fat and +good meat, and gave him for his knife. + +This was a good market, but our misfortune was we had no merchandise; for +our knives were as needful to us as to them, and but that we were in +distress for food, and must of necessity have some, these men would not +have parted with their knives. + +However, in a little time more we found that the woods were full of living +creatures, which we might kill for our food, and that without giving +offence to them; so that our men went daily out a-hunting, and never failed +in killing something or other; for, as to the natives, we had no goods to +barter; and for money, all the stock among us would not have subsisted us +long. However, we called a general council to see what money we had, and to +bring it all together, that it might go as far as possible; and when it +came to my turn, I pulled out a moidore and the two dollars I spoke of +before. + +This moidore I ventured to show, that they might not despise me too much +for adding too little to the store, and that they might not pretend to +search me; and they were very civil to me, upon the presumption that I had +been so faithful to them as not to conceal anything from them. + +But our money did us little service, for the people neither knew the value +or the use of it, nor could they justly rate the gold in proportion with +the silver; so that all our money, which was not much when it was all put +together, would go but a little way with us, that is to say, to buy us +provisions. + +Our next consideration was to get away from this cursed place, and whither +to go. When my opinion came to be asked, I told them I would leave that all +to them, and I told them I had rather they would let me go into the woods +to get them some provisions, than consult with me, for I would agree to +whatever they did; but they would not agree to that, for they would not +consent that any of us should go into the woods alone; for though we had +yet seen no lions or tigers in the woods, we were assured there were many +in the island, besides other creatures as dangerous, and perhaps worse, as +we afterwards found by our own experience. + +We had many adventures in the woods, for our provisions, and often met with +wild and terrible beasts, which we could not call by their names; but as +they were, like us, seeking their prey, but were themselves good for +nothing, so we disturbed them as little as possible. + +Our consultations concerning our escape from this place, which, as I have +said, we were now upon, ended in this only, that as we had two carpenters +among us, and that they had tools almost of all sorts with them, we should +try to build us a boat to go off to sea with, and that then, perhaps, we +might find our way back to Goa, or land on some more proper place to make +our escape. The counsels of this assembly were not of great moment, yet as +they seem to be introductory of many more remarkable adventures which +happened under my conduct hereabouts many years after, I think this +miniature of my future enterprises may not be unpleasant to relate. + +To the building of a boat I made no objection, and away they went to work +immediately; but as they went on, great difficulties occurred, such as the +want of saws to cut our plank; nails, bolts, and spikes, to fasten the +timbers; hemp, pitch, and tar, to caulk and pay her seams, and the like. At +length, one of the company proposed that, instead of building a bark or +sloop, or shallop, or whatever they would call it, which they found was so +difficult, they would rather make a large periagua, or canoe, which might +be done with great ease. + +It was presently objected, that we could never make a canoe large enough to +pass the great ocean, which we were to go over to get to the coast of +Malabar; that it not only would not bear the sea, but it would never bear +the burden, for we were not only twenty-seven men of us, but had a great +deal of luggage with us, and must, for our provision, take in a great deal +more. + +I never proposed to speak in their general consultations before, but +finding they were at some loss about what kind of vessel they should make, +and how to make it, and what would be fit for our use, and what not, I told +them I found they were at a full stop in their counsels of every kind; that +it was true we could never pretend to go over to Goa on the coast of +Malabar in a canoe, which though we could all get into it, and that it +would bear the sea well enough, yet would not hold our provisions, and +especially we could not put fresh water enough into it for the voyage; and +to make such an adventure would be nothing but mere running into certain +destruction, and yet that nevertheless I was for making a canoe. + +They answered, that they understood all I had said before well enough, but +what I meant by telling them first how dangerous and impossible it was to +make our escape in a canoe, and yet then to advise making a canoe, that +they could not understand. + +To this I answered, that I conceived our business was not to attempt our +escape in a canoe, but that, as there were other vessels at sea besides our +ship, and that there were few nations that lived on the sea-shore that were +so barbarous, but that they went to sea in some boats or other, our +business was to cruise along the coast of the island, which was very long, +and to seize upon the first we could get that was better than our own, and +so from that to another, till perhaps we might at last get a good ship to +carry us wherever we pleased to go. + +"Excellent advice," says one of them. "Admirable advice," says another. +"Yes, yes," says the third (which was the gunner), "the English dog has +given excellent advice; but it is just the way to bring us all to the +gallows. The rogue has given us devilish advice, indeed, to go a-thieving, +till from a little vessel we came to a great ship, and so we shall turn +downright pirates, the end of which is to be hanged." + +"You may call us pirates," says another, "if you will, and if we fall into +bad hands, we may be used like pirates; but I care not for that, I'll be a +pirate, or anything, nay, I'll be hanged for a pirate rather than starve +here, therefore I think the advice is very good." And so they cried all, +"Let us have a canoe." The gunner, over-ruled by the rest, submitted; but +as we broke up the council, he came to me, takes me by the hand, and, +looking into the palm of my hand, and into my face too, very gravely, "My +lad," says he, "thou art born to do a world of mischief; thou hast +commenced pirate very young; but have a care of the gallows, young man; +have a care, I say, for thou wilt be an eminent thief." + +I laughed at him, and told him I did not know what I might come to +hereafter, but as our case was now, I should make no scruple to take the +first ship I came at to get our liberty; I only wished we could see one, +and come at her. Just while we were talking, one of our men that was at the +door of our hut, told us that the carpenter, who it seems was upon a hill +at a distance, cried out, "A sail! a sail!" + +We all turned out immediately; but, though it was very clear weather, we +could see nothing; but the carpenter continuing to halloo to us, "A sail! a +sail!" away we run up the hill, and there we saw a ship plainly; but it was +at a very great distance, too far for us to make any signal to her. +However, we made a fire upon the hill, with all the wood we could get +together, and made as much smoke as possible. The wind was down, and it was +almost calm; but as we thought, by a perspective glass which the gunner had +in his pocket, her sails were full, and she stood away large with the wind +at E.N.E., taking no notice of our signal, but making for the Cape de Bona +Speranza; so we had no comfort from her. + +We went, therefore, immediately to work about our intended canoe; and, +having singled out a very large tree to our minds, we fell to work with +her; and having three good axes among us, we got it down, but it was four +days' time first, though we worked very hard too. I do not remember what +wood it was, or exactly what dimensions, but I remember that it was a very +large one, and we were as much encouraged when we launched it, and found it +swam upright and steady, as we would have been at another time if we had +had a good man-of-war at our command. + +She was so very large, that she carried us all very, very easily, and would +have carried two or three tons of baggage with us; so that we began to +consult about going to sea directly to Goa; but many other considerations +checked that thought, especially when we came to look nearer into it; such +as want of provisions, and no casks for fresh water; no compass to steer +by; no shelter from the breach of the high sea, which would certainly +founder us; no defence from the heat of the weather, and the like; so that +they all came readily into my project, to cruise about where we were, and +see what might offer. + +Accordingly, to gratify our fancy, we went one day all out to sea in her +together, and we were in a very fair way to have had enough of it; for when +she had us all on board, and that we were gotten about half a league to +sea, there happening to be a pretty high swell of the sea, though little or +no wind, yet she wallowed so in the sea, that we all of us thought she +would at last wallow herself bottom up; so we set all to work to get her in +nearer the shore, and giving her fresh way in the sea, she swam more +steady, and with some hard work we got her under the land again. + +We were now at a great loss; the natives were civil enough to us, and came +often to discourse with us; one time they brought one whom they showed +respect to as a king with them, and they set up a long pole between them +and us, with a great tassel of hair hanging, not on the top, but something +above the middle of it, adorned with little chains, shells, bits of brass, +and the like; and this, we understood afterwards, was a token of amity and +friendship; and they brought down to us victuals in abundance, cattle, +fowls, herbs, and roots; but we were in the utmost confusion on our side; +for we had nothing to buy with, or exchange for; and as to giving us things +for nothing they had no notion of that again. As to our money, it was mere +trash to them, they had no value for it; so that we were in a fair way to +be starved. Had we had but some toys and trinkets, brass chains, baubles, +glass beads, or, in a word, the veriest trifles that a shipload of would +not have been worth the freight, we might have bought cattle and provisions +enough for an army, or to victual a fleet of men-of-war; but for gold or +silver we could get nothing. + +Upon this we were in a strange consternation. I was but a young fellow, but +I was for falling upon them with our firearms, and taking all the cattle +from them, and send them to the devil to stop their hunger, rather than be +starved ourselves; but I did not consider that this might have brought ten +thousand of them down upon us the next day; and though we might have killed +a vast number of them, and perhaps have frighted the rest, yet their own +desperation, and our small number, would have animated them so that, one +time or other, they would have destroyed us all. + +In the middle of our consultation, one of our men who had been a kind of a +cutler, or worker in iron, started up and asked the carpenter if, among all +his tools, he could not help him to a file. "Yes," says the carpenter, "I +can, but it is a small one." "The smaller the better," says the other. Upon +this he goes to work, and first by heating a piece of an old broken chisel +in the fire, and then with the help of his file, he made himself several +kinds of tools for his work. Then he takes three or four pieces of eight, +and beats them out with a hammer upon a stone, till they were very broad +and thin; then he cuts them out into the shape of birds and beasts; he made +little chains of them for bracelets and necklaces, and turned them into so +many devices of his own head, that it is hardly to be expressed. + +When he had for about a fortnight exercised his head and hands at this +work, we tried the effect of his ingenuity; and, having another meeting +with the natives, were surprised to see the folly of the poor people. For a +little bit of silver cut in the shape of a bird, we had two cows, and, +which was our loss, if it had been in brass, it had been still of more +value. For one of the bracelets made of chain-work, we had as much +provision of several sorts, as would fairly have been worth, in England, +fifteen or sixteen pounds; and so of all the rest. Thus, that which when it +was in coin was not worth sixpence to us, when thus converted into toys and +trifles, was worth a hundred times its real value, and purchased for us +anything we had occasion for. + +In this condition we lived upwards of a year, but all of us began to be +very much tired of it, and, whatever came of it, resolved to attempt an +escape. We had furnished ourselves with no less than three very good +canoes; and as the monsoons, or trade-winds, generally affect that country, +blowing in most parts of this island one six months of a year one way, and +the other six months another way, we concluded we might be able to bear the +sea well enough. But always, when we came to look into it, the want of +fresh water was the thing that put us off from such an adventure, for it is +a prodigious length, and what no man on earth could be able to perform +without water to drink. + +Being thus prevailed upon by our own reason to set the thoughts of that +voyage aside, we had then but two things before us; one was, to put to sea +the other way; viz., west, and go away for the Cape of Good Hope, where, +first or last, we should meet with some of our own country ships, or else +to put for the mainland of Africa, and either travel by land, or sail along +the coast towards the Red Sea, where we should, first or last, find a ship +of some nation or other, that would take us up; or perhaps we might take +them up, which, by-the-bye, was the thing that always ran in my head. + +It was our ingenious cutler, whom ever after we called silversmith, that +proposed this; but the gunner told him, that he had been in the Red Sea in +a Malabar sloop, and he knew this, that if we went into the Red Sea, we +should either be killed by the wild Arabs, or taken and made slaves of by +the Turks; and therefore he was not for going that way. + +Upon this I took occasion to put in my vote again. "Why," said I, "do we +talk of being killed by the Arabs, or made slaves of by the Turks? Are we +not able to board almost any vessel we shall meet with in those seas; and, +instead of their taking us, we to take them?" "Well done, pirate," said the +gunner (he that had looked in my hand, and told me I should come to the +gallows), "I'll say that for him," says he, "he always looks the same way. +But I think, of my conscience, it is our only way now." "Don't tell me," +says I, "of being a pirate; we must be pirates, or anything, to get fairly +out of this cursed place." + +In a word, they concluded all, by my advice, that our business was to +cruise for anything we could see. "Why then," said I to them, "our first +business is to see if the people upon this island have no navigation, and +what boats they use; and, if they have any better or bigger than ours, let +us take one of them." First, indeed, all our aim was to get, if possible, a +boat with a deck and a sail; for then we might have saved our provisions, +which otherwise we could not. + +We had, to our great good fortune, one sailor among us, who had been +assistant to the cook; he told us, that he would find a way how to preserve +our beef without cask or pickle; and this he did effectually by curing it +in the sun, with the help of saltpetre, of which there was great plenty in +the island; so that, before we found any method for our escape, we had +dried the flesh of six or seven cows and bullocks, and ten or twelve goats, +and it relished so well, that we never gave ourselves the trouble to boil +it when we ate it, but either broiled it or ate it dry. But our main +difficulty about fresh water still remained; for we had no vessel to put +any into, much less to keep any for our going to sea. + +But our first voyage being only to coast the island, we resolved to +venture, whatever the hazard or consequence of it might be, and in order to +preserve as much fresh water as we could, our carpenter made a well athwart +the middle of one of our canoes, which he separated from the other parts of +the canoe, so as to make it tight to hold the water and covered so as we +might step upon it; and this was so large that it held near a hogshead of +water very well. I cannot better describe this well than by the same kind +which the small fishing-boats in England have to preserve their fish alive +in; only that this, instead of having holes to let the salt water in, was +made sound every way to keep it out; and it was the first invention, I +believe, of its kind for such an use; but necessity is a spur to ingenuity +and the mother of invention. + +It wanted but a little consultation to resolve now upon our voyage. The +first design was only to coast it round the island, as well to see if we +could seize upon any vessel fit to embark ourselves in, as also to take +hold of any opportunity which might present for our passing over to the +main; and therefore our resolution was to go on the inside or west shore of +the island, where, at least at one point, the land stretching a great way +to the north-west, the distance is not extraordinary great from the island +to the coast of Africa. + +Such a voyage, and with such a desperate crew, I believe was never made, +for it is certain we took the worst side of the island to look for any +shipping, especially for shipping of other nations, this being quite out of +the way; however, we put to sea, after taking all our provisions and +ammunition, bag and baggage, on board; we had made both mast and sail for +our two large periaguas, and the other we paddled along as well as we +could; but when a gale sprung up, we took her in tow. + +We sailed merrily forward for several days, meeting with nothing to +interrupt us. We saw several of the natives in small canoes catching fish, +and sometimes we endeavoured to come near enough to speak with them, but +they were always shy and afraid of us, making in for the shore as soon as +we attempted it; till one of our company remembered the signal of +friendship which the natives made us from the south part of the island, +viz., of setting up a long pole, and put us in mind that perhaps it was the +same thing to them as a flag of truce to us. So we resolved to try it; and +accordingly the next time we saw any of their fishing-boats at sea we put +up a pole in our canoe that had no sail, and rowed towards them. As soon as +they saw the pole they stayed for us, and as we came nearer paddled towards +us; when they came to us they showed themselves very much pleased, and gave +us some large fish, of which we did not know the names, but they were very +good. It was our misfortune still that we had nothing to give them in +return; but our artist, of whom I spoke before, gave them two little thin +plates of silver, beaten, as I said before, out of a piece of eight; they +were cut in a diamond square, longer one way than the other, and a hole +punched at one of the longest corners. This they were so fond of that they +made us stay till they had cast their lines and nets again, and gave us as +many fish as we cared to have. + +All this while we had our eyes upon their boats, viewed them very narrowly, +and examined whether any of them were fit for our turn, but they were poor, +sorry things; their sail was made of a large mat, only one that was of a +piece of cotton stuff fit for little, and their ropes were twisted flags of +no strength; so we concluded we were better as we were, and let them alone. +We went forward to the north, keeping the coast close on board for twelve +days together, and having the wind at east and E.S.E., we made very fresh +way. We saw no towns on the shore, but often saw some huts by the +water-side upon the rocks, and always abundance of people about them, who +we could perceive run together to stare at us. + +It was as odd a voyage as ever man went; we were a little fleet of three +ships, and an army of between twenty and thirty as dangerous fellows as +ever they had amongst them; and had they known what we were, they would +have compounded to give us everything we desired to be rid of us. + +On the other hand, we were as miserable as nature could well make us to be, +for we were upon a voyage and no voyage, we were bound somewhere and +nowhere; for though we knew what we intended to do, we did really not know +what we were doing. We went forward and forward by a northerly course, and +as we advanced the heat increased, which began to be intolerable to us, who +were on the water, without any covering from heat or wet; besides, we were +now in the month of October, or thereabouts, in a southern latitude; and as +we went every day nearer the sun, the sun came also every day nearer to us, +till at last we found ourselves in the latitude of 20 degrees; and having +passed the tropic about five or six days before that, in a few days more +the sun would be in the zenith, just over our heads. + +Upon these considerations we resolved to seek for a good place to go on +shore again, and pitch our tents, till the heat of the weather abated. We +had by this time measured half the length of the island, and were come to +that part where the shore tending away to the north-west, promised fair to +make our passage over to the mainland of Africa much shorter than we +expected. But, notwithstanding that, we had good reason to believe it was +about 120 leagues. + +So, the heats considered, we resolved to take harbour; besides, our +provisions were exhausted, and we had not many days' store left. +Accordingly, putting in for the shore early in the morning, as we usually +did once in three or four days for fresh water, we sat down and considered +whether we would go on or take up our standing there; but upon several +considerations, too long to repeat here, we did not like the place, so we +resolved to go on a few days longer. + +After sailing on N.W. by N. with a fresh gale at S.E., about six days, we +found, at a great distance, a large promontory or cape of land, pushing out +a long way into the sea, and as we were exceeding fond of seeing what was +beyond the cape, we resolved to double it before we took into harbour, so +we kept on our way, the gale continuing, and yet it was four days more +before we reached the cape. But it is not possible to express the +discouragement and melancholy that seized us all when we came thither; for +when we made the headland of the cape, we were surprised to see the shore +fall away on the other side as much as it had advanced on this side, and a +great deal more; and that, in short, if we would venture over to the shore +of Africa, it must be from hence, for that if we went further, the breadth +of the sea still increased, and to what breadth it might increase we knew +not. + +While we mused upon this discovery, we were surprised with very bad +weather, and especially violent rains, with thunder and lightning, most +unusually terrible to us. In this pickle we run for the shore, and getting +under the lee of the cape, run our frigates into a little creek, where we +saw the land overgrown with trees, and made all the haste possible to get +on shore, being exceeding wet, and fatigued with the heat, the thunder, +lightning, and rain. + +Here we thought our case was very deplorable indeed, and therefore our +artist, of whom I have spoken so often, set up a great cross of wood on the +hill which was within a mile of the headland, with these words, but in the +Portuguese language:-- + +"Point Desperation. Jesus have mercy." + +We set to work immediately to build us some huts, and to get our clothes +dried; and though I was young and had no skill in such things, yet I shall +never forget the little city we built, for it was no less, and we fortified +it accordingly; and the idea is so fresh in my thought, that I cannot but +give a short description of it. + +Our camp was on the south side of a little creek on the sea, and under the +shelter of a steep hill, which lay, though on the other side of the creek, +yet within a quarter of a mile of us, N.W. by N., and very happily +intercepted the heat of the sun all the after part of the day. The spot we +pitched on had a little fresh water brook, or a stream running into the +creek by us; and we saw cattle feeding in the plains and low ground east +and to the south of us a great way. + +Here we set up twelve little huts like soldiers' tents, but made of the +boughs of trees stuck in the ground, and bound together on the top with +withies, and such other things as we could get; the creek was our defence +on the north, a little brook on the west, and the south and east sides were +fortified with a bank, which entirely covered our huts; and being drawn +oblique from the north-west to the south-east, made our city a triangle. +Behind the bank or line our huts stood, having three other huts behind them +at a good distance. In one of these, which was a little one, and stood +further off, we put our gunpowder, and nothing else, for fear of danger; in +the other, which was bigger, we dressed our victuals, and put all our +necessaries; and in the third, which was biggest of all, we ate our +dinners, called our councils, and sat and diverted ourselves with such +conversation as we had one with another, which was but indifferent truly at +that time. + +Our correspondence with the natives was absolutely necessary, and our +artist the cutler having made abundance of those little diamond-cut squares +of silver, with these we made shift to traffic with the black people for +what we wanted; for indeed they were pleased wonderfully with them, and +thus we got plenty of provisions. At first, and in particular, we got about +fifty head of black cattle and goats, and our cook's mate took care to cure +them and dry them, salt and preserve them for our grand supply; nor was +this hard to do, the salt and saltpetre being very good, and the sun +excessively hot; and here we lived about four months. + +The southern solstice was over, and the sun gone back towards the +equinoctial, when we considered of our next adventure, which was to go over +the sea of Zanguebar, as the Portuguese call it, and to land, if possible, +upon the continent of Africa. + +We talked with many of the natives about it, such as we could make +ourselves intelligible to, but all that we could learn from them was, that +there was a great land of lions beyond the sea, but that it was a great way +off. We knew as well as they that it was a long way, but our people +differed mightily about it; some said it was 150 leagues, others not above +100. One of our men, that had a map of the world, showed us by his scale +that it was not above eighty leagues. Some said there were islands all the +way to touch at, some that there were no islands at all. For my own part, I +knew nothing of this matter one way or another, but heard it all without +concern, whether it was near or far off; however, this we learned from an +old man who was blind and led about by a boy, that if we stayed till the +end of August, we should be sure of the wind to be fair and the sea smooth +all the voyage. + +This was some encouragement; but staying again was very unwelcome news to +us, because that then the sun would be returning again to the south, which +was what our men were very unwilling to. At last we called a council of our +whole body; their debates were too tedious to take notice of, only to note, +that when it came to Captain Bob (for so they called me ever since I had +taken state upon me before one of their great princes), truly I was on no +side; it was not one farthing matter to me, I told them, whether we went or +stayed; I had no home, and all the world was alike to me; so I left it +entirely to them to determine. + +In a word, they saw plainly there was nothing to be done where we were +without shipping; that if our business indeed was only to eat and drink, we +could not find a better place in the world; but if our business was to get +away, and get home into our country, we could not find a worse. + +I confess I liked the country wonderfully, and even then had strange +notions of coming again to live there; and I used to say to them very often +that if I had but a ship of twenty guns, and a sloop, and both well manned, +I would not desire a better place in the world to make myself as rich as a +king. + +But to return to the consultations they were in about going. Upon the +whole, it was resolved to venture over for the main; and venture we did, +madly enough, indeed, for it was the wrong time of the year to undertake +such a voyage in that country; for, as the winds hang easterly all the +months from September to March, so they generally hang westerly all the +rest of the year, and blew right in our teeth; so that, as soon as we had, +with a kind of a land-breeze, stretched over about fifteen or twenty +leagues, and, as I may say, just enough to lose ourselves, we found the +wind set in a steady fresh gale or breeze from the sea, at west, W.S.W., or +S.W. by W., and never further from the west; so that, in a word, we could +make nothing of it. + +On the other hand, the vessel, such as we had, would not lie close upon a +wind; if so, we might have stretched away N.N.W., and have met with a great +many islands in our way, as we found afterwards; but we could make nothing +of it, though we tried, and by the trying had almost undone us all; for, +stretching away to the north, as near the wind as we could, we had +forgotten the shape and position of the island of Madagascar itself; how +that we came off at the head of a promontory or point of land, that lies +about the middle of the island, and that stretches out west a great way +into the sea; and that now, being run a matter of forty leagues to the +north, the shore of the island fell off again above 200 miles to the east, +so that we were by this time in the wide ocean, between the island and the +main, and almost 100 leagues from both. + +Indeed, as the winds blew fresh at west, as before, we had a smooth sea, +and we found it pretty good going before it, and so, taking our smallest +canoe in tow, we stood in for the shore with all the sail we could make. +This was a terrible adventure, for, if the least gust of wind had come, we +had been all lost, our canoes being deep and in no condition to make way in +a high sea. + +This voyage, however, held us eleven days in all; and at length, having +spent most of our provisions, and every drop of water we had, we spied +land, to our great joy, though at the distance of ten or eleven leagues; +and as, under the land, the wind came off like a land-breeze, and blew hard +against us, we were two days more before we reached the shore, having all +that while excessive hot weather, and not a drop of water or any other +liquor, except some cordial waters, which one of our company had a little +of left in a case of bottles. + +This gave us a taste of what we should have done if we had ventured forward +with a scant wind and uncertain weather, and gave us a surfeit of our +design for the main, at least until we might have some better vessels under +us; so we went on shore again, and pitched our camp as before, in as +convenient manner as we could, fortifying ourselves against any surprise; +but the natives here were exceeding courteous, and much more civil than on +the south part of the island; and though we could not understand what they +said, or they us, yet we found means to make them understand that we were +seafaring men and strangers, and that we were in distress for want of +provisions. + +The first proof we had of their kindness was, that as soon as they saw us +come on shore and begin to make our habitation, one of their captains or +kings, for we knew not what to call them, came down with five or six men +and some women, and brought us five goats and two young fat steers, and +gave them to us for nothing; and when we went to offer them anything, the +captain or the king would not let any of them touch it, or take anything of +us. About two hours after came another king, or captain, with forty or +fifty men after him. We began to be afraid of him, and laid hands upon our +weapons; but he perceiving it, caused two men to go before him, carrying +two long poles in their hands, which they held upright, as high as they +could, which we presently perceived was a signal of peace; and these two +poles they set up afterwards, sticking them up in the ground; and when the +king and his men came to these two poles, they struck all their lances up +in the ground, and came on unarmed, leaving their lances, as also their +bows and arrows, behind them. + +This was to satisfy us that they were come as friends, and we were glad to +see it, for we had no mind to quarrel with them if we could help it. The +captain of this gang seeing some of our men making up their huts, and that +they did it but bunglingly, he beckoned to some of his men to go and help +us. Immediately fifteen or sixteen of them came and mingled among us, and +went to work for us; and indeed, they were better workmen than we were, for +they run up three or four huts for us in a moment, and much handsomer done +than ours. + +After this they sent us milk, plantains, pumpkins, and abundance of roots +and greens that were very good, and then took their leave, and would not +take anything from us that we had. One of our men offered the king or +captain of these men a dram, which he drank and was mightily pleased with +it, and held out his hand for another, which we gave him; and in a word, +after this, he hardly failed coming to us two or three times a week, always +bringing us something or other; and one time sent us seven head of black +cattle, some of which we cured and dried as before. + +And here I cannot but remember one thing, which afterwards stood us in +great stead, viz., that the flesh of their goats, and their beef also, but +especially the former, when we had dried and cured it, looked red, and ate +hard and firm, as dried beef in Holland; they were so pleased with it, and +it was such a dainty to them, that at any time after they would trade with +us for it, not knowing, or so much as imagining what it was; so that for +ten or twelve pounds' weight of smoke-dried beef, they would give us a +whole bullock, or cow, or anything else we could desire. + +Here we observed two things that were very material to us, even essentially +so; first, we found they had a great deal of earthenware here, which they +made use of many ways as we did; particularly they had long, deep earthen +pots, which they used to sink into the ground, to keep the water which they +drunk cool and pleasant; and the other was, that they had larger canoes +than their neighbours had. + +By this we were prompted to inquire if they had no larger vessels than +those we saw there, or if any other of the inhabitants had not such. They +signified presently that they had no larger boats than that they showed us; +but that on the other side of the island they had larger boats, and that +with decks upon them, and large sails; and this made us resolve to coast +round the whole island to see them; so we prepared and victualled our canoe +for the voyage, and, in a word, went to sea for the third time. + +It cost us a month or six weeks' time to perform this voyage, in which time +we went on shore several times for water and provisions, and found the +natives always very free and courteous; but we were surprised one morning +early, being at the extremity of the northernmost part of the island, when +one of our men cried out, "A sail! a sail!" We presently saw a vessel a +great way out at sea; but after we had looked at it with our perspective +glasses, and endeavoured all we could to make out what it was, we could not +tell what to think of it; for it was neither ship, ketch, galley, galliot, +or like anything that we had ever seen before; all that we could make of it +was, that it went from us, standing out to sea. In a word, we soon lost +sight of it, for we were in no condition to chase anything, and we never +saw it again; but, by all that we could perceive of it, from what we saw of +such things afterwards, it was some Arabian vessel, which had been trading +to the coast of Mozambique, or Zanzibar, the same place where we afterwards +went, as you shall hear. + +I kept no journal of this voyage, nor indeed did I all this while +understand anything of navigation, more than the common business of a +foremast-man; so I can say nothing to the latitudes or distances of any +places we were at, how long we were going, or how far we sailed in a day; +but this I remember, that being now come round the island, we sailed up the +eastern shore due south, as we had done down the western shore due north +before. + +Nor do I remember that the natives differed much from one another, either +in stature or complexion, or in their manners, their habits, their weapons, +or indeed in anything; and yet we could not perceive that they had any +intelligence one with another; but they were extremely kind and civil to us +on this side, as well as on the other. + +We continued our voyage south for many weeks, though with several intervals +of going on shore to get provisions and water. At length, coming round a +point of land which lay about a league further than ordinary into the sea, +we were agreeably surprised with a sight which, no doubt, had been as +disagreeable to those concerned, as it was pleasant to us. This was the +wreck of an European ship, which had been cast away upon the rocks, which +in that place run a great way into the sea. + +We could see plainly, at low water, a great deal of the ship lay dry; even +at high water, she was not entirely covered; and that at most she did not +lie above a league from the shore. It will easily be believed that our +curiosity led us, the wind and weather also permitting, to go directly to +her, which we did without any difficulty, and presently found that it was a +Dutch-built ship, and that she could not have been very long in that +condition, a great deal of the upper work of her stern remaining firm, with +the mizzen-mast standing. Her stern seemed to be jammed in between two +ridges of the rock, and so remained fast, all the fore part of the ship +having been beaten to pieces. + +We could see nothing to be gotten out of the wreck that was worth our +while; but we resolved to go on shore, and stay some time thereabouts, to +see if perhaps we might get any light into the story of her; and we were +not without hopes that we might hear something more particular about her +men, and perhaps find some of them on shore there, in the same condition +that we were in, and so might increase our company. + +It was a very pleasant sight to us when, coming on shore, we saw all the +marks and tokens of a ship-carpenter's yard; as a launch-block and cradles, +scaffolds and planks, and pieces of planks, the remains of the building a +ship or vessel; and, in a word, a great many things that fairly invited us +to go about the same work; and we soon came to understand that the men +belonging to the ship that was lost had saved themselves on shore, perhaps +in their boat, and had built themselves a barque or sloop, and so were gone +to sea again; and, inquiring of the natives which way they went, they +pointed to the south and south-west, by which we could easily understand +they were gone away to the Cape of Good Hope. + +Nobody will imagine we could be so dull as not to gather from hence that we +might take the same method for our escape; so we resolved first, in +general, that we would try if possible to build us a boat of one kind or +other, and go to sea as our fate should direct. + +In order to this our first work was to have the two carpenters search about +to see what materials the Dutchmen had left behind them that might be of +use; and, in particular, they found one that was very useful, and which I +was much employed about, and that was a pitch-kettle, and a little pitch in +it. + +When we came to set close to this work we found it very laborious and +difficult, having but few tools, no ironwork, no cordage, no sails; so +that, in short, whatever we built, we were obliged to be our own smiths, +rope-makers, sail-makers, and indeed to practise twenty trades that we knew +little or nothing of. However, necessity was the spur to invention, and we +did many things which before we thought impracticable, that is to say, in +our circumstances. + +After our two carpenters had resolved upon the dimensions of what they +would build, they set us all to work, to go off in our boats and split up +the wreck of the old ship, and to bring away everything we could; and +particularly that, if possible, we should bring away the mizzen-mast, which +was left standing, which with much difficulty we effected, after above +twenty days' labour of fourteen of our men. + +At the same time we got out a great deal of ironwork, as bolts, spikes, +nails, &c., all of which our artist, of whom I have spoken already, who was +now grown a very dexterous smith, made us nails and hinges for our rudder, +and spikes such as we wanted. + +But we wanted an anchor, and if we had had an anchor, we could not have +made a cable; so we contented ourselves with making some ropes with the +help of the natives, of such stuff as they made their mats of, and with +these we made such a kind of cable or tow-line as was sufficient to fasten +our vessel to the shore, which we contented ourselves with for that time. + +To be short, we spent four months here, and worked very hard too; at the +end of which time we launched our frigate, which, in a few words, had many +defects, but yet, all things considered, it was as well as we could expect +it to be. + +In short, it was a kind of sloop, of the burthen of near eighteen or twenty +tons; and had we had masts and sails, standing and running rigging, as is +usual in such cases, and other conveniences, the vessel might have carried +us wherever we could have had a mind to go; but of all the materials we +wanted, this was the worst, viz., that we had no tar or pitch to pay the +seams and secure the bottom; and though we did what we could, with tallow +and oil, to make a mixture to supply that part, yet we could not bring it +to answer our end fully; and when we launched her into the water, she was +so leaky, and took in the water so fast, that we thought all our labour had +been lost, for we had much ado to make her swim; and as for pumps, we had +none, nor had we any means to make one. + +But at length one of the natives, a black negro-man, showed us a tree, the +wood of which being put into the fire, sends forth a liquid that is as +glutinous and almost as strong as tar, and of which, by boiling, we made a +sort of stuff which served us for pitch, and this answered our end +effectually; for we perfectly made our vessel sound and tight, so that we +wanted no pitch or tar at all. This secret has stood me in stead upon many +occasions since that time in the same place. + +Our vessel being thus finished, out of the mizzen-mast of the ship we made +a very good mast to her, and fitted our sails to it as well as we could; +then we made a rudder and tiller, and, in a word, everything that our +present necessity called upon us for; and having victualled her, and put as +much fresh water on board as we thought we wanted, or as we knew how to +stow (for we were yet without casks), we put to sea with a fair wind. + +We had spent near another year in these rambles, and in this piece of work; +for it was now, as our men said, about the beginning of our February, and +the sun went from us apace, which was much to our satisfaction, for the +heats were exceedingly violent. The wind, as I said, was fair; for, as I +have since learned, the winds generally spring up to the eastward, as the +sun goes from them to the north. + +Our debate now was, which way we should go, and never were men so +irresolute; some were for going to the east, and stretching away directly +for the coast of Malabar; but others, who considered more seriously the +length of that voyage, shook their heads at the proposal, knowing very well +that neither our provisions, especially of water, or our vessel, were equal +to such a run as that is, of near 2000 miles without any land to touch at +in the way. + +These men, too, had all along had a great mind to a voyage for the mainland +of Africa, where they said we should have a fair cast for our lives, and +might be sure to make ourselves rich, which way soever we went, if we were +but able to make our way through, whether by sea or by land. + +Besides, as the case stood with us, we had not much choice for our way; +for, if we had resolved for the east, we were at the wrong season of the +year, and must have stayed till April or May before we had gone to sea. At +length, as we had the wind at S.E. and E.S.E., and fine promising weather, +we came all into the first proposal, and resolved for the coast of Africa; +nor were we long in disputing as to our coasting the island which we were +upon, for we were now upon the wrong side of the island for the voyage we +intended; so we stood away to the north, and, having rounded the cape, we +hauled away southward, under the lee of the island, thinking to reach the +west point of land, which, as I observed before, runs out so far towards +the coast of Africa, as would have shortened our run almost 100 leagues. +But when we had sailed about thirty leagues, we found the winds variable +under the shore, and right against us, so we concluded to stand over +directly, for then we had the wind fair, and our vessel was but very ill +fated to lie near the wind, or any way indeed but just before it. + +Having resolved upon it, therefore, we put into the shore to furnish +ourselves again with fresh water and other provisions, and about the latter +end of March, with more courage than discretion, more resolution than +judgment, we launched for the main coast of Africa. + +As for me, I had no anxieties about it, so that we had but a view of +reaching some land or other, I cared not what or where it was to be, having +at this time no views of what was before me, nor much thought of what might +or might not befall me; but with as little consideration as any one can be +supposed to have at my age, I consented to everything that was proposed, +however hazardous the thing itself, however improbable the success. + +The voyage, as it was undertaken with a great deal of ignorance and +desperation, so really it was not carried on with much resolution or +judgment; for we knew no more of the course we were to steer than this, +that it was anywhere about the west, within two or three points N. or S., +and as we had no compass with us but a little brass pocket compass, which +one of our men had more by accident than otherwise, so we could not be very +exact in our course. + +However, as it pleased God that the wind continued fair at S.E. and by E., +we found that N.W. by W., which was right afore it, was as good a course +for us as any we could go, and thus we went on. + +The voyage was much longer than we expected; our vessel also, which had no +sail that was proportioned to her, made but very little way in the sea, and +sailed heavily. We had, indeed, no great adventures happened in this +voyage, being out of the way of everything that could offer to divert us; +and as for seeing any vessel, we had not the least occasion to hail +anything in all the voyage; for we saw not one vessel, small or great, the +sea we were upon being entirely out of the way of all commerce; for the +people of Madagascar knew no more of the shores of Africa than we did, only +that there was a country of lions, as they call it, that way. + +We had been eight or nine days under sail, with a fair wind, when, to our +great joy, one of our men cried out "Land!" We had great reason to be glad +of the discovery, for we had not water enough left for above two or three +days more, though at a short allowance. However, though it was early in the +morning when we discovered it, we made it near night before we reached it, +the wind slackening almost to a calm, and our ship being, as I said, a very +dull sailer. + +We were sadly baulked upon our coming to the land, when we found that, +instead of the mainland of Africa, it was only a little island, with no +inhabitants upon it, at least none that we could find; nor any cattle, +except a few goats, of which we killed three only. However, they served us +for fresh meat, and we found very good water; and it was fifteen days more +before we reached the main, which, however, at last we arrived at, and +which was most essential to us, as we came to it just as all our provisions +were spent. Indeed, we may say they were spent first, for we had but a pint +of water a day to each man for the last two days. But, to our great joy, we +saw the land, though at a great distance, the evening before, and by a +pleasant gale in the night were by morning within two leagues of the shore. + +We never scrupled going ashore at the first place we came at, though, had +we had patience, we might have found a very fine river a little farther +north. However, we kept our frigate on float by the help of two great +poles, which we fastened into the ground to moor her, like poles; and the +little weak ropes, which, as I said, we had made of matting, served us well +enough to make the vessel fast. + +As soon as we had viewed the country a little, got fresh water, and +furnished ourselves with some victuals, which we found very scarce here, we +went on board again with our stores. All we got for provision was some +fowls that we killed, and a kind of wild buffalo or bull, very small, but +good meat; I say, having got these things on board, we resolved to sail +along the coast, which lay N.N.E., till we found some creek or river, that +we might run up into the country, or some town or people; for we had reason +enough to know the place was inhabited, because we several times saw fires +in the night, and smoke in the day, every way at a distance from us. + +At length we came to a very large bay, and in it several little creeks or +rivers emptying themselves into the sea, and we ran boldly into the first +creek we came at; where, seeing some huts and wild people about them on the +shore, we ran our vessel into a little cove on the north side of the creek, +and held up a long pole, with a white bit of cloth on it, for a signal of +peace to them. We found they understood us presently, for they came +flocking to us, men, women, and children, most of them, of both sexes, +stark naked. At first they stood wondering and staring at us, as if we had +been monsters, and as if they had been frighted; but we found they inclined +to be familiar with us afterwards. The first thing we did to try them, was, +we held up our hands to our mouths, as if we were to drink, signifying that +we wanted water. This they understood presently, and three of their women +and two boys ran away up the land, and came back in about half a quarter of +an hour, with several pots, made of earth, pretty enough, and baked, I +suppose, in the sun; these they brought us full of water, and set them down +near the sea-shore, and there left them, going back a little, that we might +fetch them, which we did. + +Some time after this, they brought us roots and herbs, and some fruits +which I cannot remember, and gave us; but as we had nothing to give them, +we found them not so free as the people in Madagascar were. However, our +cutler went to work, and, as he had saved some iron out of the wreck of the +ship, he made abundance of toys, birds, dogs, pins, hooks, and rings; and +we helped to file them, and make them bright for him, and when we gave them +some of these, they brought us all sorts of provisions they had, such as +goats, hogs, and cows, and we got victuals enough. + +We were now landed upon the continent of Africa, the most desolate, desert, +and inhospitable country in the world, even Greenland and Nova Zembla +itself not excepted, with this difference only, that even the worst part of +it we found inhabited, though, taking the nature and quality of some of the +inhabitants, it might have been much better to us if there had been none. + +And, to add to the exclamation I am making on the nature of the place, it +was here that we took one of the rashest, and wildest, and most desperate +resolutions that ever was taken by man, or any number of men, in the world; +this was, to travel overland through the heart of the country, from the +coast of Mozambique, on the east ocean, to the coast of Angola or Guinea, +on the western or Atlantic Ocean, a continent of land of at least 1800 +miles, in which journey we had excessive heats to support, unpassable +deserts to go over, no carriages, camels, or beasts of any kind to carry +our baggage, innumerable numbers of wild and ravenous beasts to encounter +with, such as lions, leopards, tigers, lizards, and elephants; we had the +equinoctial line to pass under, and, consequently, were in the very centre +of the torrid zone; we had nations of savages to encounter with, barbarous +and brutish to the last degree; hunger and thirst to struggle with, and, in +one word, terrors enough to have daunted the stoutest hearts that ever were +placed in cases of flesh and blood. + +Yet, fearless of all these, we resolved to adventure, and accordingly made +such preparations for our journey as the place we were in would allow us, +and such as our little experience of the country seemed to dictate to us. + +It had been some time already that we had been used to tread barefooted +upon the rocks, the gravel, the grass, and the sand on the shore; but as we +found the worst thing for our feet was the walking or travelling on the dry +burning sands, within the country, so we provided ourselves with a sort of +shoes, made of the skins of wild beasts, with the hair inward, and being +dried in the sun, the outsides were thick and hard, and would last a great +while. In short, as I called them, so I think the term very proper still, +we made us gloves for our feet, and we found them very convenient and very +comfortable. + +We conversed with some of the natives of the country, who were friendly +enough. What tongue they spoke I do not yet pretend to know. We talked as +far as we could make them understand us, not only about our provisions, but +also about our undertaking, and asked them what country lay that way, +pointing west with our hands. They told us but little to our purpose, only +we thought, by all their discourse, that there were people to be found, of +one sort or other, everywhere; that there were many great rivers, many +lions and tigers, elephants, and furious wild cats (which in the end we +found to be civet cats), and the like. + +When we asked them if any one had ever travelled that way, they told us +yes, some had gone to where the sun sleeps, meaning to the west, but they +could not tell us who they were. When we asked for some to guide us, they +shrunk up their shoulders as Frenchmen do when they are afraid to undertake +a thing. When we asked them about the lions and wild creatures, they +laughed, and let us know that they would do us no hurt, and directed us to +a good way indeed to deal with them, and that was to make some fire, which +would always fright them away; and so indeed we found it. + +Upon these encouragements we resolved upon our journey, and many +considerations put us upon it, which, had the thing itself been +practicable, we were not so much to blame for as it might otherwise be +supposed; I will name some of them, not to make the account too tedious. + +First, we were perfectly destitute of means to work about our own +deliverance any other way; we were on shore in a place perfectly remote +from all European navigation; so that we could never think of being +relieved, and fetched off by any of our own countrymen in that part of the +world. Secondly, if we had adventured to have sailed on along the coast of +Mozambique, and the desolate shores of Africa to the north, till we came to +the Red Sea, all we could hope for there was to be taken by the Arabs, and +be sold for slaves to the Turks, which to all of us was little better than +death. We could not build anything of a vessel that would carry us over the +great Arabian Sea to India, nor could we reach the Cape de Bona Speranza, +the winds being too variable, and the sea in that latitude too tempestuous; +but we all knew, if we could cross this continent of land, we might reach +some of the great rivers that run into the Atlantic Ocean; and that, on the +banks of any of those rivers, we might there build us canoes which would +carry us down, if it were thousands of miles, so that we could want nothing +but food, of which we were assured we might kill sufficient with our guns; +and to add to the satisfaction of our deliverance, we concluded we might, +every one of us, get a quantity of gold, which, if we came safe, would +infinitely recompense us for our toil. + +I cannot say that in all our consultations I ever began to enter into the +weight and merit of any enterprise we went upon till now. My view before +was, as I thought, very good, viz., that we should get into the Arabian +Gulf, or the mouth of the Red Sea; and waiting for some vessel passing or +repassing there, of which there is plenty, have seized upon the first we +came at by force, and not only have enriched ourselves with her cargo, but +have carried ourselves to what part of the world we had pleased; but when +they came to talk to me of a march of 2000 or 3000 miles on foot, of +wandering in deserts among lions and tigers, I confess my blood ran chill, +and I used all the arguments I could to persuade them against it. + +But they were all positive, and I might as well have held my tongue; so I +submitted, and told them I would keep to our first law, to be governed by +the majority, and we resolved upon our journey. The first thing we did was +to take an observation, and see whereabouts in the world we were, which we +did, and found we were in the latitude of 12 degrees 35 minutes south of +the line. The next thing was to look on the charts, and see the coast of +the country we aimed at, which we found to be from 8 to 11 degrees south +latitude, if we went for the coast of Angola, or in 12 to 29 degrees north +latitude, if we made for the river Niger, and the coast of Guinea. + +Our aim was for the coast of Angola, which, by the charts we had, lying +very near the same latitude we were then in, our course thither was due +west; and as we were assured we should meet with rivers, we doubted not but +that by their help we might ease our journey, especially if we could find +means to cross the great lake, or inland sea, which the natives call +Coalmucoa, out of which it is said the river Nile has its source or +beginning; but we reckoned without our host, as you will see in the sequel +of our story. + +The next thing we had to consider was, how to carry our baggage, which we +were first of all determined not to travel without; neither indeed was it +possible for us to do so, for even our ammunition, which was absolutely +necessary to us, and on which our subsistence, I mean for food, as well as +our safety, and particularly our defence against wild beasts and wild men, +depended,--I say, even our ammunition was a load too heavy for us to carry +in a country where the heat was such that we should be load enough for +ourselves. + +We inquired in the country, and found there was no beast of burthen known +among them, that is to say, neither horses or mules, or asses, camels, or +dromedaries; the only creature they had was a kind of buffalo, or tame +bull, such a one as we had killed; and that some of these they had brought +so to their hand, that they taught them to go and come with their voices, +as they called them to them, or sent them from them; that they made them +carry burthens; and particularly that they would swim over rivers and lakes +upon them, the creatures swimming very high and strong in the water. + +But we understood nothing of the management of guiding such a creature, or +how to bind a burthen upon them; and this last part of our consultation +puzzled us extremely. At last I proposed a method for them, which, after +some consideration, they found very convenient; and this was, to quarrel +with some of the negro natives, take ten or twelve of them prisoners, and +binding them as slaves, cause them to travel with us, and make them carry +our baggage; which I alleged would be convenient and useful many ways as +well to show us the way, as to converse with other natives for us. + +This counsel was not accepted at first, but the natives soon gave them +reason to approve it, and also gave them an opportunity to put it in +practice; for, as our little traffic with the natives was hitherto upon the +faith of their first kindness, we found some knavery among them at last; +for having bought some cattle of them for our toys, which, as I said, our +cutler had contrived, one of our men differing with his chapman, truly they +huffed him in their manner, and, keeping the things he had offered them for +the cattle, made their fellows drive away the cattle before his face, and +laugh at him. Our man crying out loud of this violence, and calling to some +of us who were not far off, the negro he was dealing with threw a lance at +him, which came so true, that, if he had not with great agility jumped +aside, and held up his hand also to turn the lance as it came, it had +struck through his body; and, as it was, it wounded him in the arm; at +which the man, enraged, took up his fuzee, and shot the negro through the +heart. + +The others that were near him, and all those that were with us at a +distance, were so terribly frighted, first, at the flash of fire; secondly, +at the noise; and thirdly, at seeing their countryman killed, that they +stood like men stupid and amazed, at first, for some time; but after they +were a little recovered from their fright, one of them, at a good distance +from us, set up a sudden screaming noise, which, it seems, is the noise +they make when they go to fight; and all the rest understanding what he +meant, answered him, and ran together to the place where he was, and we not +knowing what it meant, stood still, looking upon one another like a parcel +of fools. + +But we were presently undeceived; for, in two or three minutes more, we +heard the screaming roaring noise go on from one place to another, through +all their little towns; nay, even over the creek to the other side; and, on +a sudden, we saw a naked multitude running from all parts to the place +where the first man began it, as to a rendezvous; and, in less than an +hour, I believe there was near 500 of them gotten together, armed some with +bows and arrows, but most with lances, which they throw at a good distance, +so nicely that they will strike a bird flying. + +We had but a very little time for consultation, for the multitude was +increasing every moment; and I verily believe, if we had stayed long, they +would have been 10,000 together in a little time. We had nothing to do, +therefore, but to fly to our ship or bark, where indeed we could have +defended ourselves very well, or to advance and try what a volley or two of +small shot would do for us. + +We resolved immediately upon the latter, depending upon it that the fire +and terror of our shot would soon put them to flight; so we drew up all in +a line, and marched boldly up to them. They stood ready to meet us, +depending, I suppose, to destroy us all with their lances; but before we +came near enough for them to throw their lances, we halted, and, standing +at a good distance from one another, to stretch our line as far as we +could, we gave them a salute with our shot, which, besides what we wounded +that we knew not of, knocked sixteen of them down upon the spot, and three +more were so lamed, that they fell about twenty or thirty yards from them. + +As soon as we had fired, they set up the horridest yell, or howling, partly +raised by those that were wounded, and partly by those that pitied and +condoled the bodies they saw lie dead, that I never heard anything like it +before or since. + +We stood stock still after we had fired, to load our guns again, and +finding they did not stir from the place we fired among them again; we +killed about nine of them at the second fire; but as they did not stand so +thick as before, all our men did not fire, seven of us being ordered to +reserve our charge, and to advance as soon as the other had fired, while +the rest loaded again; of which I shall speak again presently. + +As soon as we had fired the second volley, we shouted as loud as we could, +and the seven men advanced upon them, and, coming about twenty yards +nearer, fired again, and those that were behind having loaded again with +all expedition, followed; but when they saw us advance, they ran screaming +away as if they were bewitched. + +When we came up to the field of battle, we saw a great number of bodies +lying upon the ground, many more than we could suppose were killed or +wounded; nay, more than we had bullets in our pieces when we fired; and we +could not tell what to make of it; but at length we found how it was, viz., +that they were frighted out of all manner of sense; nay, I do believe +several of those that were really dead, were frighted to death, and had no +wound about them. + +Of those that were thus frighted, as I have said, several of them, as they +recovered themselves, came and worshipped us (taking us for gods or devils, +I know not which, nor did it much matter to us): some kneeling, some +throwing themselves flat on the ground, made a thousand antic gestures, but +all with tokens of the most profound submission. It presently came into my +head, that we might now, by the law of arms, take as many prisoners as we +would, and make them travel with us, and carry our baggage. As soon as I +proposed it, our men were all of my mind; and accordingly we secured about +sixty lusty young fellows, and let them know they must go with us; which +they seemed very willing to do. But the next question we had among +ourselves, was, how we should do to trust them, for we found the people not +like those of Madagascar, but fierce, revengeful, and treacherous; for +which reason we were sure that we should have no service from them but that +of mere slaves; no subjection that would continue any longer than the fear +of us was upon them, nor any labour but by violence. + +Before I go any farther, I must hint to the reader, that from this time +forward I began to enter a little more seriously into the circumstance I +was in, and concerned myself more in the conduct of our affairs; for though +my comrades were all older men, yet I began to find them void of counsel, +or, as I now call it, presence of mind, when they came to the execution of +a thing. The first occasion I took to observe this, was in their late +engagement with the natives, when, though they had taken a good resolution +to attack them and fire upon them, yet, when they had fired the first time, +and found that the negroes did not run as they expected, their hearts began +to fail, and I am persuaded, if their bark had been near hand, they would +every man have run away. + +Upon this occasion I began to take upon me a little to hearten them up, and +to call upon them to load again, and give them another volley, telling them +that I would engage, if they would be ruled by me, I'd make the negroes run +fast enough. I found this heartened them, and therefore, when they fired a +second time, I desired them to reserve some of their shot for an attempt by +itself, as I mentioned above. + +Having fired a second time, I was indeed forced to command, as I may call +it. "Now, seigniors," said I, "let us give them a cheer." So I opened my +throat, and shouted three times, as our English sailors do on like +occasions. "And now follow me," said I to the seven that had not fired, +"and I'll warrant you we will make work with them," and so it proved +indeed; for, as soon as they saw us coming, away they ran, as above. + +From this day forward they would call me nothing but Seignior Capitanio; +but I told them I would not be called seignior. "Well, then," said the +gunner, who spoke good English, "you shall be called Captain Bob;" and so +they gave me my title ever after. + +Nothing is more certain of the Portuguese than this, take them nationally +or personally, if they are animated and heartened up by anybody to go +before, and encourage them by example, they will behave well enough; but if +they have nothing but their own measures to follow, they sink immediately: +these men had certainly fled from a parcel of naked savages, though even by +flying they could not have saved their lives, if I had not shouted and +hallooed, and rather made sport with the thing than a fight, to keep up +their courage. + +Nor was there less need of it upon several occasions hereafter; and I do +confess I have often wondered how a number of men, who, when they came to +the extremity, were so ill supported by their own spirits, had at first +courage to propose and to undertake the most desperate and impracticable +attempt that ever men went about in the world. + +There were indeed two or three indefatigable men among them, by whose +courage and industry all the rest were upheld; and indeed those two or +three were the managers of them from the beginning; that was the gunner, +and that cutler whom I call the artist; and the third, who was pretty well, +though not like either of them, was one of the carpenters. These indeed +were the life and soul of all the rest, and it was to their courage that +all the rest owed the resolution they showed upon any occasion. But when +those saw me take a little upon me, as above, they embraced me, and treated +me with particular affection ever after. + +This gunner was an excellent mathematician, a good scholar, and a complete +sailor; and it was in conversing intimately with him that I learned +afterwards the grounds of what knowledge I have since had in all the +sciences useful for navigation, and particularly in the geographical part +of knowledge. + +Even in our conversation, finding me eager to understand and learn, he laid +the foundation of a general knowledge of things in my mind, gave me just +ideas of the form of the earth and of the sea, the situation of countries, +the course of rivers, the doctrine of the spheres, the motion of the stars; +and, in a word, taught me a kind of system of astronomy, which I afterwards +improved. + +In an especial manner, he filled my head with aspiring thoughts, and with +an earnest desire after learning everything that could be taught me; +convincing me, that nothing could qualify me for great undertakings, but a +degree of learning superior to what was usual in the race of seamen; he +told me, that to be ignorant was to be certain of a mean station in the +world, but that knowledge was the first step to preferment. He was always +flattering me with my capacity to learn; and though that fed my pride, yet, +on the other hand, as I had a secret ambition, which just at that time fed +itself in my mind, it prompted in me an insatiable thirst after learning in +general, and I resolved, if ever I came back to Europe, and had anything +left to purchase it, I would make myself master of all the parts of +learning needful to the making of me a complete sailor; but I was not so +just to myself afterwards as to do it when I had an opportunity. + +But to return to our business; the gunner, when he saw the service I had +done in the fight, and heard my proposal for keeping a number of prisoners +for our march, and for carrying our baggage, turns to me before them all. +"Captain Bob," says he, "I think you must be our leader, for all the +success of this enterprise is owing to you." "No, no," said I, "do not +compliment me; you shall be our Seignior Capitanio, you shall be general; I +am too young for it." So, in short, we all agreed he should be our leader; +but he would not accept of it alone, but would have me joined with him; and +all the rest agreeing, I was obliged to comply. + +The first piece of service they put me upon in this new command was as +difficult as any they could think of, and that was to manage the prisoners; +which, however, I cheerfully undertook, as you shall hear presently. But +the immediate consultation was yet of more consequence; and that was, +first, which way we should go; and secondly, how to furnish ourselves for +the voyage with provisions. + +There was among the prisoners one tall, well-shaped, handsome fellow, to +whom the rest seemed to pay great respect, and who, as we understood +afterwards, was the son of one of their kings; his father was, it seems, +killed at our first volley, and he wounded with a shot in his arm, and with +another just on one of his hips or haunches. The shot in his haunch being +in a fleshy part, bled much, and he was half dead with the loss of blood. +As to the shot in his arm, it had broke his wrist, and he was by both these +wounds quite disabled, so that we were once going to turn him away, and let +him die; and, if we had, he would have died indeed in a few days more: but, +as I found the man had some respect showed him, it presently occurred to my +thoughts that we might bring him to be useful to us, and perhaps make him a +kind of commander over them. So I caused our surgeon to take him in hand, +and gave the poor wretch good words, that is to say, I spoke to him as well +as I could by signs, to make him understand that we would make him well +again. + +This created a new awe in their minds of us, believing that, as we could +kill at a distance by something invisible to them (for so our shot was, to +be sure), so we could make them well again too. Upon this the young prince +(for so we called him afterwards) called six or seven of the savages to +him, and said something to them; what it was we know not, but immediately +all the seven came to me, and kneeled down to me, holding up their hands, +and making signs of entreaty, pointing to the place where one of those lay +whom we had killed. + +It was a long time before I or any of us could understand them; but one of +them ran and lifted up a dead man, pointing to his wound, which was in his +eyes, for he was shot into the head at one of his eyes. Then another +pointed to the surgeon, and at last we found it out, that the meaning was, +that he should heal the prince's father too, who was dead, being shot +through the head, as above. + +We presently took the hint, and would not say we could not do it, but let +them know, the men that were killed were those that had first fallen upon +us, and provoked us, and we would by no means make them alive again; and +that, if any others did so, we would kill them too, and never let them live +any more: but that, if he (the prince) would be willing to go with us, and +do as we should direct him, we would not let him die, and would make his +arm well. Upon this he bid his men go and fetch a long stick or staff, and +lay on the ground. When they brought it, we saw it was an arrow; he took it +with his left hand (for his other was lame with the wound), and, pointing +up at the sun, broke the arrow in two, and set the point against his +breast, and then gave it to me. This was, as I understood afterwards, +wishing the sun, whom they worship, might shoot him into the breast with an +arrow, if ever he failed to be my friend; and giving the point of the arrow +to me was to be a testimony that I was the man he had sworn to: and never +was Christian more punctual to an oath than he was to this, for he was a +sworn servant to us for many a weary month after that. + +When I brought him to the surgeon, he immediately dressed the wound in his +haunch or buttock, and found the bullet had only grazed upon the flesh, and +passed, as it were, by it, but it was not lodged in the part, so that it +was soon healed and well again; but, as to his arm, he found one of the +bones broken, which are in the fore-part from the wrist to the elbow; and +this he set, and splintered it up, and bound his arm in a sling, hanging it +about his neck, and making signs to him that he should not stir it; which +he was so strict an observer of, that he set him down, and never moved one +way or other but as the surgeon gave him leave. + +I took a great deal of pains to acquaint this negro what we intended to do, +and what use we intended to make of his men; and particularly to teach him +the meaning of what we said, especially to teach him some words, such as +yes and no, and what they meant, and to inure him to our way of talking; +and he was very willing and apt to learn anything I taught him. + +It was easy to let him see that we intended to carry our provision with us +from the first day; but he made signs to us to tell us we need not, for we +should find provision enough everywhere for forty days. It was very +difficult for us to understand how he expressed forty; for he knew no +figures, but some words that they used to one another that they understood +it by. At last one of the negroes, by his order, laid forty little stones +one by another, to show us how many days we should travel, and find +provisions sufficient. + +Then I showed him our baggage, which was very heavy, particularly our +powder, shot, lead, iron, carpenters' tools, seamen's instruments, cases of +bottles, and other lumber. He took some of the things up in his hand to +feel the weight, and shook his head at them; so I told our people they must +resolve to divide their things into small parcels, and make them portable; +and accordingly they did so, by which means we were fain to leave all our +chests behind us, which were eleven in number. + +Then he made signs to us that he would procure some buffaloes, or young +bulls, as I called them, to carry things for us, and made signs, too, that +if we were weary, we might be carried too; but that we slighted, only were +willing to have the creatures, because, at last, when they could serve us +no farther for carriage, we might eat them all up if we had any occasion +for them. + +I then carried him to our bark, and showed him what things we had here. He +seemed amazed at the sight of our bark, having never seen anything of that +kind before, for their boats are most wretched things, such as I never saw +before, having no head or stern, and being made only of the skins of goats, +sewed together with dried guts of goats and sheep, and done over with a +kind of slimy stuff like rosin and oil, but of a most nauseous, odious +smell; and they are poor miserable things for boats, the worst that any +part of the world ever saw; a canoe is an excellent contrivance compared to +them. + +But to return to our boat. We carried our new prince into it, and helped +him over the side, because of his lameness. We made signs to him that his +men must carry our goods for us, and showed him what we had; he answered, +"Si, Seignior," or, "Yes, sir" (for we had taught him that word and the +meaning of it), and taking up a bundle, he made signs to us, that when his +arm was well he would carry some for us. + +I made signs again to tell him, that if he would make his men carry them, +we would not let him carry anything. We had secured all the prisoners in a +narrow place, where we had bound them with mat cords, and set up stakes +like a palisado round them; so, when we carried the prince on shore, we +went with him to them, and made signs to him to ask them if they were +willing to go with us to the country of lions. Accordingly he made a long +speech to them, and we could understand by it that he told them, if they +were willing, they must say, "Si, Seignior," telling them what it +signified. They immediately answered, "Si, Seignior," and clapped their +hands, looking up to the sun, which, the prince signified to us, was +swearing to be faithful. But as soon as they had said so, one of them made +a long speech to the prince; and in it we perceived, by his gestures, which +were very antic, that they desired something from us, and that they were in +great concern about it. So I asked him, as well as I could, what it was +they desired of us; he told us by signs that they desired we should clap +our hands to the sun (that was, to swear) that we would not kill them, that +we would give them chiaruck, that is to say, bread, would not starve them, +and would not let the lions eat them. I told him we would promise all that; +then he pointed to the sun, and clapped his hands, signing to me that I +should do so too, which I did; at which all the prisoners fell flat on the +ground, and rising up again, made the oddest, wildest cries that ever I +heard. + +I think it was the first time in my life that ever any religious thought +affected me; but I could not refrain some reflections, and almost tears, in +considering how happy it was that I was not born among such creatures as +these, and was not so stupidly ignorant and barbarous; but this soon went +off again, and I was not troubled again with any qualms of that sort for a +long time after. + +When this ceremony was over, our concern was to get some provisions, as +well for the present subsistence of our prisoners as ourselves; and making +signs to our prince that we were thinking upon that subject, he made signs +to me that, if I would let one of the prisoners go to his town, he should +bring provisions, and should bring some beasts to carry our baggage. I +seemed loth to trust him, and supposing that he would run away, he made +great signs of fidelity, and with his own hands tied a rope about his neck, +offering me one end of it, intimating that I should hang him if the man did +not come again. So I consented, and he gave him abundance of instructions, +and sent him away, pointing to the light of the sun, which it seems was to +tell him at what time he must be back. + +The fellow ran as if he was mad, and held it till he was quite out of +sight, by which I supposed he had a great way to go. The next morning, +about two hours before the time appointed, the black prince, for so I +always called him, beckoning with his hand to me, and hallooing after his +manner, desired me to come to him, which I did, when, pointing to a little +hill about two miles off, I saw plainly a little drove of cattle, and +several people with them; those, he told me by signs, were the man he had +sent, and several more with him, and cattle for us. + +Accordingly, by the time appointed, he came quite to our huts, and brought +with him a great many cows, young runts, about sixteen goats, and four +young bulls, taught to carry burthens. + +This was a supply of provisions sufficient; as for bread, we were obliged +to shift with some roots which we had made use of before. We then began to +consider of making some large bags like the soldiers' knapsacks, for their +men to carry our baggage in, and to make it easy to them; and the goats +being killed, I ordered the skins to be spread in the sun, and they were as +dry in two days as could be desired; so we found means to make such little +bags as we wanted, and began to divide our baggage into them. When the +black prince found what they were for, and how easy they were of carriage +when we put them on, he smiled a little, and sent away the man again to +fetch skins, and he brought two natives more with him, all loaded with +skins better cured than ours, and of other kinds, such as we could not tell +what names to give them. + +These two men brought the black prince two lances, of the sort they use in +their fights, but finer than ordinary, being made of black smooth wood, as +fine as ebony, and headed at the point with the end of a long tooth of some +creature--we could not tell of what creature; the head was so firm put on, +and the tooth so strong, though no bigger than my thumb, and sharp at the +end, that I never saw anything like it in any place in the world. + +The prince would not take them till I gave him leave, but made signs that +they should give them to me; however, I gave him leave to take them +himself, for I saw evident signs of an honourable just principle in him. + +We now prepared for our march, when the prince coming to me, and pointing +towards the several quarters of the world, made signs to know which way we +intended to go; and when I showed him, pointing to the west, he presently +let me know there was a great river a little further to the north, which +was able to carry our bark many leagues into the country due west. I +presently took the hint, and inquired for the mouth of the river, which I +understood by him was above a day's march, and, by our estimation, we found +it about seven leagues further. I take this to be the great river marked by +our chart-makers at the northmost part of the coast of Mozambique, and +called there Quilloa. + +Consulting thus with ourselves, we resolved to take the prince, and as many +of the prisoners as we could stow in our frigate, and go about by the bay +into the river; and that eight of us, with our arms, should march by land +to meet them on the river side; for the prince, carrying us to a rising +ground, had showed us the river very plain, a great way up the country, and +in one place it was not above six miles to it. + +It was my lot to march by land, and be captain of the whole caravan. I had +eight of our men with me, and seven-and-thirty of our prisoners, without +any baggage, for all our luggage was yet on board. We drove the young bulls +with us; nothing was ever so tame, so willing to work, or carry anything. +The negroes would ride upon them four at a time, and they would go very +willingly. They would eat out of our hand, lick our feet, and were as +tractable as a dog. + +We drove with us six or seven cows for food; but our negroes knew nothing +of curing the flesh by salting and drying it till we showed them the way, +and then they were mighty willing to do so as long as we had any salt to do +it with, and to carry salt a great way too, after we found we should have +no more. + +It was an easy march to the river side for us that went by land, and we +came thither in a piece of a day, being, as above, no more than six English +miles; whereas it was no less than five days before they came to us by +water, the wind in the bay having failed them, and the way, by reason of a +great turn or reach in the river, being about fifty miles about. + +We spent this time in a thing which the two strangers, which brought the +prince the two lances, put into the head of the prisoners, viz., to make +bottles of the goats' skins to carry fresh water in, which it seems they +knew we should come to want; and the men did it so dexterously, having +dried skins fetched them by those two men, that before our vessel came up, +they had every man a pouch like a bladder, to carry fresh water in, hanging +over their shoulders by a thong made of other skins, about three inches +broad, like the sling of a fuzee. + +Our prince, to assure us of the fidelity of the men in this march, had +ordered them to be tied two and two by the wrist, as we handcuff prisoners +in England; and made them so sensible of the reasonableness of it, that he +made them do it themselves, appointing four of them to bind the rest; but +we found them so honest, and particularly so obedient to him, that after we +were gotten a little further off of their own country, we set them at +liberty, though, when he came to us, he would have them tied again, and +they continued so a good while. + +All the country on the bank of the river was a high land, no marshy swampy +ground in it; the verdure good, and abundance of cattle feeding upon it +wherever we went, or which way soever we looked; there was not much wood +indeed, at least not near us; but further up we saw oak, cedar, and +pine-trees, some of which were very large. + +The river was a fair open channel, about as broad as the Thames below +Gravesend, and a strong tide of flood, which we found held us about sixty +miles; the channel deep, nor did we find any want of water for a great way. +In short, we went merrily up the river with the flood and the wind blowing +still fresh at E. and E.N.E. We stemmed the ebb easily also, especially +while the river continued broad and deep; but when we came past the +swelling of the tide, and had the natural current of the river to go +against, we found it too strong for us, and began to think of quitting our +bark; but the prince would by no means agree to that, for, finding we had +on board pretty good store of roping made of mats and flags, which I +described before, he ordered all the prisoners which were on shore to come +and take hold of those ropes, and tow us along by the shore side; and as we +hoisted our sail too, to ease them, the men ran along with us at a very +great rate. + +In this manner the river carried us up, by our computation, near 200 miles, +and then it narrowed apace, and was not above as broad as the Thames is at +Windsor, or thereabouts; and, after another day, we came to a great +waterfall or cataract, enough to fright us, for I believe the whole body of +water fell at once perpendicularly down a precipice above sixty foot high, +which made noise enough to deprive men of their hearing, and we heard it +above ten miles before we came to it. + +Here we were at a full stop, and now our prisoners went first on shore; +they had worked very hard and very cheerfully, relieving one another, those +that were weary being taken into the bark. Had we had canoes or any boats +which might have been carried by men's strength we might have gone two +hundred miles more up this river in small boats, but our great boat could +go no farther. + +All this way the country looked green and pleasant, and was full of cattle, +and some people we saw, though not many; but this we observed now, that the +people did no more understand our prisoners here than we could understand +them; being, it seems, of different nations and of different speech. We had +yet seen no wild beasts, or, at least, none that came very near us, except +two days before we came to the waterfall, when we saw three of the most +beautiful leopards that ever were seen, standing upon the bank of the river +on the north side, our prisoners being all on the other side of the water. +Our gunner espied them first, and ran to fetch his gun, putting a ball +extraordinary in it; and coming to me, "Now, Captain Bob," says he, "where +is your prince?" So I called him out. "Now," says he, "tell your men not to +be afraid; tell them they shall see that thing in his hand speak in fire to +one of those beasts, and make it kill itself." + +The poor negroes looked as if they had been all going to be killed, +notwithstanding what their prince said to them, and stood staring to expect +the issue, when on a sudden the gunner fired; and as he was a very good +marksman, he shot the creature with two slugs, just in the head. As soon as +the leopard felt herself struck, she reared up on her two hind-legs, bolt +upright, and throwing her forepaws about in the air, fell backward, +growling and struggling, and immediately died; the other two, frighted with +the fire and the noise, fled, and were out of sight in an instant. + +But the two frighted leopards were not in half the consternation that our +prisoners were; four or five of them fell down as if they had been shot; +several others fell on their knees, and lifted up their hands to us; +whether to worship us, or pray us not to kill them, we did not know; but we +made signs to their prince to encourage them, which he did, but it was with +much ado that he brought them to their senses. Nay, the prince, +notwithstanding all that was said to prepare him for it, yet when the piece +went off, he gave a start as if he would have leaped into the river. + +When we saw the creature killed, I had a great mind to have the skin of +her, and made signs to the prince that he should send some of his men over +to take the skin off. As soon as he spoke but a word, four of them, that +offered themselves, were untied, and immediately they jumped into the +river, and swam over, and went to work with him. The prince having a knife +that we gave him, made four wooden knives so clever, that I never saw +anything like them in my life; and in less than an hour's time they brought +me the skin of the leopard, which was a monstrous great one, for it was +from the ears to the tale about seven foot, and near five foot broad on the +back, and most admirably spotted all over. The skin of this leopard I +brought to London many years after. + +We were now all upon a level as to our travelling, being unshipped, for our +bark would swim no farther, and she was too heavy to carry on our backs; +but as we found the course of the river went a great way farther, we +consulted our carpenters whether we could not pull the bark in pieces, and +make us three or four small boats to go on with. They told us we might do +so, but it would be very long a-doing; and that, when we had done, we had +neither pitch or tar to make them sound to keep the water out, or nails to +fasten the plank. But one of them told us that as soon as he could come at +any large tree near the river, he would make us a canoe or two in a quarter +of the time, and which would serve us as well for all the uses we could +have any occasion for as a boat; and such, that if we came to any +waterfalls, we might take them up, and carry them for a mile or two by land +upon our shoulders. + +Upon this we gave over the thoughts of our frigate, and hauling her into a +little cove or inlet, where a small brook came into the main river, we laid +her up for those that came next, and marched forward. We spent indeed two +days dividing our baggage, and loading our tame buffaloes and our negroes. +Our powder and shot, which was the thing we were most careful of, we +ordered thus:--First, the powder we divided into little leather bags, that +is to say, bags of dried skins, with the hair inward, that the powder might +not grow damp; and then we put those bags into other bags, made of +bullocks' skins, very thick and hard, with the hair outward, that no wet +might come in; and this succeeded so well, that in the greatest rains we +had, whereof some were very violent and very long, we always kept our +powder dry. Besides these bags, which held our chief magazine, we divided +to every one a quarter of a pound of powder, and half a pound of shot, to +carry always about us; which, as it was enough for our present use, so we +were willing to have no weight to carry more than was absolutely necessary, +because of the heat. + +We kept still on the bank of the river, and for that reason had but very +little communication with the people of the country; for, having also our +bark stored with plenty of provisions, we had no occasion to look abroad +for a supply; but now, when we came to march on foot, we were obliged often +to seek out for food. The first place we came to on the river, that gave us +any stop, was a little negro town, containing about fifty huts, and there +appeared about 400 people, for they all came out to see us, and wonder at +us. When our negroes appeared the inhabitants began to fly to arms, +thinking there had been enemies coming upon them; but our negroes, though +they could not speak their language, made signs to them that they had no +weapons, and were tied two and two together as captives, and that there +were people behind who came from the sun, and that could kill them all, and +make them alive again, if they pleased; but that they would do them no +hurt, and came with peace. As soon as they understood this they laid down +their lances, and bows and arrows, and came and stuck twelve large stakes +in the ground as a token of peace, bowing themselves to us in token of +submission. But as soon as they saw white men with beards, that is to say, +with mustachios, they ran screaming away, as in a fright. + +We kept at a distance from them, not to be too familiar; and when we did +appear it was but two or three of us at a time. But our prisoners made them +understand that we required some provisions of them; so they brought us +some black cattle, for they have abundance of cows and buffaloes all over +that side of the country, as also great numbers of deer. Our cutler, who +had now a great stock of things of his handiwork, gave them some little +knick-knacks, as plates of silver and of iron, cut diamond fashion, and cut +into hearts and into rings, and they were mightily pleased. They also +brought several fruits and roots, which we did not understand, but our +negroes fed heartily on them, and after we had seen them eat them, we did +so too. + +Having stocked ourselves here with flesh and root as much as we could well +carry, we divided the burthens among our negroes, appointing about thirty +to forty pounds weight to a man, which we thought indeed was load enough in +a hot country; and the negroes did not at all repine at it, but would +sometimes help one another when they began to be weary, which did happen +now and then, though not often; besides, as most of their luggage was our +provision, it lightened every day, like Aesop's basket of bread, till we +came to get a recruit.--Note, when we loaded them we untied their hands, +and tied them two and two together by one foot. + +The third day of our march from this place our chief carpenter desired us +to halt, and set up some huts, for he had found out some trees that he +liked, and resolved to make us some canoes; for, as he told me, he knew we +should have marching enough on foot after we left the river, and he was +resolved to go no farther by land than needs must. + +We had no sooner given orders for our little camp, and given leave to our +negroes to lay down their loads, but they fell to work to build our huts; +and though they were tied as above, yet they did it so nimbly as surprised +us. Here we set some of the negroes quite at liberty, that is to say, +without tying them, having the prince's word passed for their fidelity; and +some of these were ordered to help the carpenters, which they did very +handily, with a little direction, and others were sent to see whether they +could get any provisions near hand; but instead of provisions, three of +them came in with two bows and arrows, and five lances. They could not +easily make us understand how they came by them, only that they had +surprised some negro women, who were in some huts, the men being from home, +and they had found the lances and bows in the huts, or houses, the women +and children flying away at the sight of them, as from robbers. We seemed +very angry at them, and made the prince ask them if they had not killed any +of the women or children, making them believe that, if they had killed +anybody, we would make them kill themselves too; but they protested their +innocence, so we excused them. Then they brought us the bows and arrows and +lances; but, at a motion of their black prince, we gave them back the bows +and arrows, and gave them leave to go out to see what they could kill for +food; and here we gave them the laws of arms, viz., that if any man +appeared to assault them, or shoot at them to offer any violence to them, +they might kill them; but that they should not offer to kill or hurt any +that offered them peace, or laid down their weapons, nor any women or +children, upon any occasion whatsoever. These were our articles of war. + +These two fellows had not been gone out above three or four hours, but one +of them came running to us without his bow and arrows, hallooing and +whooping a great while before he came at us, "Okoamo, okoamo!" which, it +seems, was, "Help, help!" The rest of the negroes rose up in a hurry, and +by twos, as they could, ran forward towards their fellows, to know what the +matter was. As for me, I did not understand it, nor any of our people; the +prince looked as if something unlucky had fallen out, and some of our men +took up their arms to be ready on occasion. But the negroes soon discovered +the thing, for we saw four of them presently after coming along with a +great load of meat upon their backs. The case was, that the two who went +out with their bows and arrows, meeting with a great herd of deer in the +plain, had been so nimble as to shoot three of them, and then one of them +came running to us for help to fetch them away. This was the first venison +we had met with in all our march, and we feasted upon it very plentifully; +and this was the first time we began to prevail with our prince to eat his +meat dressed our way; after which his men were prevailed with by his +example, but before that, they ate most of the flesh they had quite raw. + +We wished now we had brought some bows and arrows out with us, which we +might have done; and we began to have so much confidence in our negroes, +and to be so familiar with them, that we oftentimes let them go, or the +greatest part of them, untied, being well assured they would not leave us, +and that they did not know what course to take without us; but one thing we +resolved not to trust them with, and that was the charging our guns: but +they always believed our guns had some heavenly power in them, that would +send forth fire and smoke, and speak with a dreadful noise, and kill at a +distance whenever we bid them. + +In about eight days we finished three canoes, and in them we embarked our +white men and our baggage, with our prince, and some of the prisoners. We +also found it needful to keep some of ourselves always on shore, not only +to manage the negroes, but to defend them from enemies and wild beasts. +Abundance of little incidents happened upon this march, which it is +impossible to crowd into this account; particularly, we saw more wild +beasts now than we did before, some elephants, and two or three lions, none +of which kinds we had seen any of before; and we found our negroes were +more afraid of them a great deal than we were; principally, because they +had no bows and arrows, or lances, which were the particular weapons they +were bred up to the exercise of. + +But we cured them of their fears by being always ready with our firearms. +However, as we were willing to be sparing of our powder, and the killing of +any of the creatures now was no advantage to us, seeing their skins were +too heavy for us to carry, and their flesh not good to eat, we resolved +therefore to keep some of our pieces uncharged and only primed; and causing +them to flash in the pan, the beasts, even the lions themselves, would +always start and fly back when they saw it, and immediately march off. + +We passed abundance of inhabitants upon this upper part of the river, and +with this observation, that almost every ten miles we came to a separate +nation, and every separate nation had a different speech, or else their +speech had differing dialects, so that they did not understand one another. +They all abounded in cattle, especially on the river-side; and the eighth +day of this second navigation we met with a little negro town, where they +had growing a sort of corn like rice, which ate very sweet; and, as we got +some of it of the people, we made very good cakes of bread of it, and, +making a fire, baked them on the ground, after the fire was swept away, +very well; so that hitherto we had no want of provisions of any kind that +we could desire. + +Our negroes towing our canoes, we travelled at a considerable rate, and by +our own account could not go less than twenty or twenty-five English miles +a day, and the river continuing to be much of the same breadth and very +deep all the way, till on the tenth day we came to another cataract; for a +ridge of high hills crossing the whole channel of the river, the water came +tumbling down the rocks from one stage to another in a strange manner, so +that it was a continued link of cataracts from one to another, in the +manner of a cascade, only that the falls were sometimes a quarter of a mile +from one another, and the noise confused and frightful. + +We thought our voyaging was at a full stop now; but three of us, with a +couple of our negroes, mounting the hills another way, to view the course +of the river, we found a fair channel again after about half a mile's +march, and that it was like to hold us a good way further. So we set all +hands to work, unloaded our cargo, and hauled our canoes on shore, to see +if we could carry them. + +Upon examination we found that they were very heavy; but our carpenters, +spending but one day's work upon them, hewed away so much of the timber +from their outsides as reduced them very much, and yet they were as fit to +swim as before. When this was done, ten men with poles took up one of the +canoes and made nothing to carry it. So we ordered twenty men to each +canoe, that one ten might relieve the other; and thus we carried all our +canoes, and launched them into the water again, and then fetched our +luggage and loaded it all again into the canoes, and all in an afternoon; +and the next morning early we moved forward again. When we had towed about +four days more, our gunner, who was our pilot, began to observe that we did +not keep our right course so exactly as we ought, the river winding away a +little towards the north, and gave us notice of it accordingly. However, we +were not willing to lose the advantage of water-carriage, at least not till +we were forced to it; so we jogged on, and the river served us for about +threescore miles further; but then we found it grew very small and shallow, +having passed the mouths of several little brooks or rivulets which came +into it; and at length it became but a brook itself. + +We towed up as far as ever our boats would swim, and we went two days the +farther--having been about twelve days in this last part of the river--by +lightening the boats and taking our luggage out, which we made the negroes +carry, being willing to ease ourselves as long as we could; but at the end +of these two days, in short, there was not water enough to swim a London +wherry. + +We now set forward wholly by land, and without any expectation of more +water-carriage. All our concern for more water was to be sure to have a +supply for our drinking; and therefore upon every hill that we came near we +clambered up to the highest part to see the country before us, and to make +the best judgment we could which way to go to keep the lowest grounds, and +as near some stream of water as we could. + +The country held verdant, well grown with trees, and spread with rivers and +brooks, and tolerably well with inhabitants, for about thirty days' march +after our leaving the canoes, during which time things went pretty well +with us; we did not tie ourselves down when to march and when to halt, but +ordered those things as our convenience and the health and ease of our +people, as well our servants as ourselves, required. + +About the middle of this march we came into a low and plain country, in +which we perceived a greater number of inhabitants than in any other +country we had gone through; but that which was worse for us, we found them +a fierce, barbarous, treacherous people, and who at first looked upon us as +robbers, and gathered themselves in numbers to attack us. + +Our men were terrified at them at first, and began to discover an unusual +fear, and even our black prince seemed in a great deal of confusion; but I +smiled at him, and showing him some of our guns, I asked him if he thought +that which killed the spotted cat (for so they called the leopard in their +language) could not make a thousand of those naked creatures die at one +blow? Then he laughed, and said, yes, he believed it would. "Well, then," +said I, "tell your men not to be afraid of these people, for we shall soon +give them a taste of what we can do if they pretend to meddle with us." +However, we considered we were in the middle of a vast country, and we knew +not what numbers of people and nations we might be surrounded with, and, +above all, we knew not how much we might stand in need of the friendship of +these that we were now among, so that we ordered the negroes to try all the +methods they could to make them friends. + +Accordingly the two men who had gotten bows and arrows, and two more to +whom we gave the prince's two fine lances, went foremost, with five more, +having long poles in their hands; and after them ten of our men advanced +toward the negro town that was next to us, and we all stood ready to +succour them if there should be occasion. + +When they came pretty near their houses our negroes hallooed in their +screaming way, and called to them as loud as they could. Upon their +calling, some of the men came out and answered, and immediately after the +whole town, men, women, and children, appeared; our negroes, with their +long poles, went forward a little, and stuck them all in the ground, and +left them, which in their country was a signal of peace, but the other did +not understand the meaning of that. Then the two men with bows laid down +their bows and arrows, went forward unarmed, and made signs of peace to +them, which at last the other began to understand; so two of their men laid +down their bows and arrows, and came towards them. Our men made all the +signs of friendship to them that they could think of, putting their hands +up to their mouths as a sign that they wanted provisions to eat; and the +other pretended to be pleased and friendly, and went back to their fellows +and talked with them a while, and they came forward again, and made signs +that they would bring some provisions to them before the sun set; and so +our men came back again very well satisfied for that time. + +But an hour before sunset our men went to them again, just in the same +posture as before, and they came according to their appointment, and +brought deer's flesh, roots, and the same kind of corn, like rice, which I +mentioned above; and our negroes, being furnished with such toys as our +cutler had contrived, gave them some of them, which they seemed infinitely +pleased with, and promised to bring more provisions the next day. + +Accordingly the next day they came again, but our men perceived they were +more in number by a great many than before. However, having sent out ten +men with firearms to stand ready, and our whole army being in view also, we +were not much surprised; nor was the treachery of the enemy so cunningly +ordered as in other cases, for they might have surrounded our negroes, +which were but nine, under a show of peace; but when they saw our men +advance almost as far as the place where they were the day before, the +rogues snatched up their bows and arrows and came running upon our men like +so many furies, at which our ten men called to the negroes to come back to +them, which they did with speed enough at the first word, and stood all +behind our men. As they fled, the other advanced, and let fly near a +hundred of their arrows at them, by which two of our negroes were wounded, +and one we thought had been killed. When they came to the five poles that +our men had stuck in the ground, they stood still awhile, and gathering +about the poles, looked at them, and handled them, as wondering what they +meant. We then, who were drawn up behind all, sent one of our number to our +ten men to bid them fire among them while they stood so thick, and to put +some small shot into their guns besides the ordinary charge, and to tell +them that we would be up with them immediately. + +Accordingly they made ready; but by the time they were ready to fire, the +black army had left their wandering about the poles, and began to stir as +if they would come on, though seeing more men stand at some distance behind +our negroes, they could not tell what to make of us; but if they did not +understand us before, they understood us less afterwards, for as soon as +ever our men found them to begin to move forward they fired among the +thickest of them, being about the distance of 120 yards, as near as we +could guess. + +It is impossible to express the fright, the screaming and yelling of those +wretches upon this first volley. We killed six of them, and wounded eleven +or twelve, I mean as we knew of; for, as they stood thick, and the small +shot, as we called it, scattered among them, we had reason to believe we +wounded more that stood farther off, for our small shot was made of bits of +lead and bits of iron, heads of nails, and such things as our diligent +artificer, the cutler, helped us to. + +As to those that were killed and wounded, the other frighted creatures were +under the greatest amazement in the world, to think what should hurt them, +for they could see nothing but holes made in their bodies they knew not +how. Then the fire and noise amazed all their women and children, and +frighted them out of their wits, so that they ran staring and howling about +like mad creatures. + +However, all this did not make them fly, which was what we wanted, nor did +we find any of them die as it were with fear, as at first; so we resolved +upon a second volley, and then to advance as we did before. Whereupon our +reserved men advancing, we resolved to fire only three men at a time, and +move forward like an army firing in platoon; so, being all in a line, we +fired, first three on the right, then three on the left, and so on; and +every time we killed or wounded some of them, but still they did not fly, +and yet they were so frighted that they used none of their bows and arrows, +or of their lances; and we thought their numbers increased upon our hands, +particularly we thought so by the noise. So I called to our men to halt, +and bid them pour in one whole volley and then shout, as we did in our +first fight, and so run in upon them and knock them down with our muskets. + +But they were too wise for that too, for as soon as we had fired a whole +volley and shouted, they all ran away, men, women, and children, so fast +that in a few moments we could not see one creature of them except some +that were wounded and lame, who lay wallowing and screaming here and there +upon the ground as they happened to fall. + +Upon this we came up to the field of battle, where we found we had killed +thirty-seven of them, among which were three women, and had wounded about +sixty-four, among which were two women; by wounded I mean such as were so +maimed as not to be able to go away, and those our negroes killed +afterwards in a cowardly manner in cold blood, for which we were very +angry, and threatened to make them go to them if they did so again. + +There was no great spoil to be got, for they were all stark naked as they +came into the world, men and women together, some of them having feathers +stuck in their hair, and others a kind of bracelet about their necks, but +nothing else; but our negroes got a booty here, which we were very glad of, +and this was the bows and arrows of the vanquished, of which they found +more than they knew what to do with, belonging to the killed and wounded +men; these we ordered them to pick up, and they were very useful to us +afterwards. After the fight, and our negroes had gotten bows and arrows, we +sent them out in parties to see what they could get, and they got some +provisions; but, which was better than all the rest, they brought us four +more young bulls, or buffaloes, that had been brought up to labour and to +carry burthens. They knew them, it seems, by the burthens they had carried +having galled their backs, for they have no saddles to cover them with in +that country. + +Those creatures not only eased our negroes, but gave us an opportunity to +carry more provisions; and our negroes loaded them very hard at this place +with flesh and roots, such as we wanted very much afterwards. + +In this town we found a very little young leopard, about two spans high; it +was exceeding tame, and purred like a cat when we stroked it with our +hands, being, as I suppose, bred up among the negroes like a house-dog. It +was our black prince, it seems, who, making his tour among the abandoned +houses or huts, found this creature there, and making much of him, and +giving a bit or two of flesh to him, the creature followed him like a dog; +of which more hereafter. + +Among the negroes that were killed in this battle there was one who had a +little thin bit or plate of gold, about as big as a sixpence, which hung by +a little bit of a twisted gut upon his forehead, by which we supposed he +was a man of some eminence among them; but that was not all, for this bit +of gold put us upon searching very narrowly if there was not more of it to +be had thereabouts, but we found none at all. + +From this part of the country we went on for about fifteen days, and then +found ourselves obliged to march up a high ridge of mountains, frightful to +behold, and the first of the kind that we met with; and having no guide but +our little pocket-compass, we had no advantage of information as to which +was the best or the worst way, but was obliged to choose by what we saw, +and shift as well as we could. We met with several nations of wild and +naked people in the plain country before we came to those hills, and we +found them much more tractable and friendly than those devils we had been +forced to fight with; and though we could learn little from these people, +yet we understood by the signs they made that there was a vast desert +beyond these hills, and, as our negroes called them, much lion, much +spotted cat (so they called the leopard); and they signed to us also that +we must carry water with us. At the last of these nations we furnished +ourselves with as much provisions as we could possibly carry, not knowing +what we had to suffer, or what length we had to go; and, to make our way as +familiar to us as possible, I proposed that of the last inhabitants we +could find we should make some prisoners and carry them with us for guides +over the desert, and to assist us in carrying provision, and, perhaps, in +getting it too. The advice was too necessary to be slighted; so finding, by +our dumb signs to the inhabitants, that there were some people that dwelt +at the foot of the mountains on the other side before we came to the desert +itself, we resolved to furnish ourselves with guides by fair means or foul. + +Here, by a moderate computation, we concluded ourselves 700 miles from the +sea-coast where we began. Our black prince was this day set free from the +sling his arm hung in, our surgeon having perfectly restored it, and he +showed it to his own countrymen quite well, which made them greatly wonder. +Also our two negroes began to recover, and their wounds to heal apace, for +our surgeon was very skilful in managing their cure. + +Having with infinite labour mounted these hills, and coming to a view of +the country beyond them, it was indeed enough to astonish as stout a heart +as ever was created. It was a vast howling wilderness--not a tree, a river, +or a green thing to be seen; for, as far as the eye could look, nothing but +a scalding sand, which, as the wind blew, drove about in clouds enough to +overwhelm man and beast. Nor could we see any end of it either before us, +which was our way, or to the right hand or left; so that truly our men +began to be discouraged, and talk of going back again. Nor could we indeed +think of venturing over such a horrid place as that before us, in which we +saw nothing but present death. + +I was as much affected at the sight as any of them; but, for all that, I +could not bear the thoughts of going back again. I told them we had marched +700 miles of our way, and it would be worse than death to think of going +back again; and that, if they thought the desert was not passable, I +thought we should rather change our course, and travel south till we came +to the Cape of Good Hope, or north to the country that lay along the Nile, +where, perhaps, we might find some way or other over to the west sea; for +sure all Africa was not a desert. + +Our gunner, who, as I said before, was our guide as to the situation of +places, told us that he could not tell what to say to going for the Cape, +for it was a monstrous length, being from the place where we now were not +less than 1500 miles; and, by his account, we were now come a third part of +the way to the coast of Angola, where we should meet the western ocean, and +find ways enough for our escape home. On the other hand, he assured us, and +showed us a map of it, that, if we went northward, the western shore of +Africa went out into the sea above 1000 miles west, so that we should have +so much and more land to travel afterwards; which land might, for aught we +knew, be as wild, barren, and desert as this. And therefore, upon the +whole, he proposed that we should attempt this desert, and perhaps we +should not find it so long as we feared; and however, he proposed that we +should see how far our provisions would carry us, and, in particular, our +water; and we should venture no further than half so far as our water would +last; and if we found no end of the desert, we might come safely back +again. + +This advice was so reasonable that we all approved of it; and accordingly +we calculated that we were able to carry provisions for forty-two days, but +that we could not carry water for above twenty days, though we were to +suppose it to stink, too, before that time expired. So that we concluded +that, if we did not come at some water in ten days' time, we would return; +but if we found a supply of water, we could then travel twenty-one days; +and, if we saw no end of the wilderness in that time, we would return also. + +With this regulation of our measures, we descended the mountains, and it +was the second day before we quite reached the plain; where, however, to +make us amends, we found a fine little rivulet of very good water, +abundance of deer, a sort of creature like a hare, but not so nimble, but +whose flesh we found very agreeable. But we were deceived in our +intelligence, for we found no people; so we got no more prisoners to assist +us in carrying our baggage. + +The infinite number of deer and other creatures which we saw here, we found +was occasioned by the neighbourhood of the waste or desert, from whence +they retired hither for food and refreshment. We stored ourselves here with +flesh and roots of divers kinds, which our negroes understood better than +we, and which served us for bread; and with as much water as (by the +allowance of a quart a day to a man for our negroes, and three pints a day +a man for ourselves, and three quarts a day each for our buffaloes) would +serve us twenty days; and thus loaded for a long miserable march, we set +forwards, being all sound in health and very cheerful, but not alike strong +for so great a fatigue; and, which was our grievance, were without a guide. + +In the very first entrance of the waste we were exceedingly discouraged, +for we found the sand so deep, and it scalded our feet so much with the +heat, that after we had, as I may call it, waded rather than walked through +it about seven or eight miles, we were all heartily tired and faint; even +the very negroes laid down and panted like creatures that had been pushed +beyond their strength. + +Here we found the difference of lodging greatly injurious to us; for, as +before, we always made us huts to sleep under, which covered us from the +night air, which is particularly unwholesome in those hot countries. But we +had here no shelter, no lodging, after so hard a march; for here were no +trees, no, not a shrub near us; and, which was still more frightful, +towards night we began to hear the wolves howl, the lions bellow, and a +great many wild asses braying, and other ugly noises which we did not +understand. + +Upon this we reflected upon our indiscretion, that we had not, at least, +brought poles or stakes in our hands, with which we might have, as it were, +palisadoed ourselves in for the night, and so we might have slept secure, +whatever other inconveniences we suffered. However, we found a way at last +to relieve ourselves a little; for first we set up the lances and bows we +had, and endeavoured to bring the tops of them as near to one another as we +could, and so hung our coats on the top of them, which made us a kind of +sorry tent. The leopard's skin, and a few other skins we had put together, +made us a tolerable covering, and thus we laid down to sleep, and slept +very heartily too, for the first night; setting, however, a good watch, +being two of our own men with their fuzes, whom we relieved in an hour at +first, and two hours afterwards. And it was very well we did this, for they +found the wilderness swarmed with raging creatures of all kinds, some of +which came directly up to the very enclosure of our tent. But our sentinels +were ordered not to alarm us with firing in the night, but to flash in the +pan at them, which they did, and found it effectual, for the creatures went +off always as soon as they saw it, perhaps with some noise or howling, and +pursued such other game as they were upon. + +If we were tired with the day's travel, we were all as much tired with the +night's lodging. But our black prince told us in the morning he would give +us some counsel, and indeed it was very good counsel. He told us we should +be all killed if we went on this journey, and through this desert, without +some covering for us at night; so he advised us to march back again to a +little river-side where we lay the night before, and stay there till we +could make us houses, as he called them, to carry with us to lodge in every +night. As he began a little to understand our speech, and we very well to +understand his signs, we easily knew what he meant, and that we should +there make mats (for we remembered that we saw a great deal of matting or +bass there, that the natives make mats of)--I say, that we should make +large mats there for covering our huts or tents to lodge in at night. + +We all approved this advice, and immediately resolved to go back that one +day's journey, resolving, though we carried less provisions, we would carry +mats with us to cover us in the night. Some of the nimblest of us got back +to the river with more ease than we had travelled it the day before; but, +as we were not in haste, the rest made a halt, encamped another night, and +came to us the next day. + +In our return of this day's journey, our men that made two days of it met +with a very surprising thing, that gave them some reason to be careful how +they parted company again. The case was this:--The second day in the +morning, before they had gone half a mile, looking behind them they saw a +vast cloud of sand or dust rise in the air, as we see sometimes in the +roads in summer when it is very dusty and a large drove of cattle are +coming, only very much greater; and they could easily perceive that it came +after them; and it came on faster as they went from it. The cloud of sand +was so great that they could not see what it was that raised it, and +concluded that it was some army of enemies that pursued them; but then +considering that they came from the vast uninhabited wilderness, they knew +it was impossible any nation or people that way should have intelligence of +them or the way of their march; and therefore, if it was an army, it must +be of such as they were, travelling that way by accident. On the other +hand, as they knew that there were no horses in the country, and that they +came on so fast, they concluded that it must be some vast collection of +wild beasts, perhaps making to the hill country for food or water, and that +they should be all devoured or trampled under foot by their multitude. + +Upon this thought, they very prudently observed which way the cloud seemed +to point, and they turned a little out of their way to the north, supposing +it might pass by them. When they were about a quarter of a mile, they +halted to see what it might be. One of the negroes, a nimbler fellow than +the rest, went back a little, and came in a few minutes running as fast as +the heavy sands would allow, and by signs gave them to know that it was a +great herd, or drove, or whatever it might be called, of vast monstrous +elephants. + +As it was a sight our men had never seen, they were desirous to see it, and +yet a little uneasy at the danger too; for though an elephant is a heavy +unwieldy creature, yet in the deep sand, which is nothing at all to them, +they marched at a great rate, and would soon have tired our people, if they +had had far to go, and had been pursued by them. + +Our gunner was with them, and had a great mind to have gone close up to one +of the outermost of them, and to have clapped his piece to his ear, and to +have fired into him, because he had been told no shot would penetrate them; +but they all dissuaded him, lest upon the noise they should all turn upon +and pursue us; so he was reasoned out of it, and let them pass, which, in +our people's circumstances, was certainly the right way. + +They were between twenty and thirty in number, but prodigious great ones; +and though they often showed our men that they saw them, yet they did not +turn out of their way, or take any other notice of them than, as we might +say, just to look at them. We that were before saw the cloud of dust they +raised, but we had thought it had been our own caravan, and so took no +notice; but as they bent their course one point of the compass, or +thereabouts, to the southward of the east, and we went due east [? west], +they passed by us at some little distance; so that we did not see them, or +know anything of them, till evening, when our men came to us and gave us +this account of them. However, this was a useful experiment for our future +conduct in passing the desert, as you shall hear in its place. + +We were now upon our work, and our black prince was head surveyor, for he +was an excellent mat-maker himself, and all his men understood it, so that +they soon made us near a hundred mats; and as every man, I mean of the +negroes, carried one, it was no manner of load, and we did not carry an +ounce of provisions the less. The greatest burthen was to carry six long +poles, besides some shorter stakes; but the negroes made an advantage of +that, for carrying them between two, they made the luggage of provisions +which they had to carry so much the lighter, binding it upon two poles, and +so made three couple of them. As soon as we saw this, we made a little +advantage of it too; for having three or four bags, called bottles (I mean +skins to carry water), more than the men could carry, we got them filled, +and carried them this way, which was a day's water and more, for our +journey. + +Having now ended our work, made our mats, and fully recruited our stores of +all things necessary, and having made us abundance of small ropes of +matting for ordinary use, as we might have occasion, we set forward again, +having interrupted our journey eight days in all, upon this affair. To our +great comfort, the night before we set out there fell a very violent shower +of rain, the effects of which we found in the sand; though the heat of one +day dried the surface as much as before, yet it was harder at bottom, not +so heavy, and was cooler to our feet, by which means we marched, as we +reckoned, about fourteen miles instead of seven, and with much more ease. + +When we came to encamp, we had all things ready, for we had fitted our +tent, and set it up for trial, where we made it; so that, in less than an +hour, we had a large tent raised, with an inner and outer apartment, and +two entrances. In one we lay ourselves, in the other our negroes, having +light pleasant mats over us, and others at the same time under us. Also we +had a little place without all for our buffaloes, for they deserved our +care, being very useful to us, besides carrying forage and water for +themselves. Their forage was a root, which our black prince directed us to +find, not much unlike a parsnip, very moist and nourishing, of which there +was plenty wherever we came, this horrid desert excepted. + +When we came the next morning to decamp, our negroes took down the tent, +and pulled up the stakes; and all was in motion in as little time as it was +set up. In this posture we marched eight days, and yet could see no end, no +change of our prospect, but all looking as wild and dismal as at the +beginning. If there was any alteration, it was that the sand was nowhere so +deep and heavy as it was the first three days. This we thought might be +because, for six months of the year the winds blowing west (as for the +other six they blow constantly east), the sand was driven violently to the +side of the desert where we set out, where the mountains lying very high, +the easterly monsoons, when they blew, had not the same power to drive it +back again; and this was confirmed by our finding the like depth of sand on +the farthest extent of the desert to the west. + +It was the ninth day of our travel in this wilderness, when we came to the +view of a great lake of water; and you may be sure this was a particular +satisfaction to us, because we had not water left for above two or three +days more, at our shortest allowance; I mean allowing water for our return, +if we had been driven to the necessity of it. Our water had served us two +days longer than expected, our buffaloes having found, for two or three +days, a kind of herb like a broad flat thistle, though without any prickle, +spreading on the ground, and growing in the sand, which they ate freely of, +and which supplied them for drink as well as forage. + +The next day, which was the tenth from our setting out, we came to the edge +of this lake, and, very happily for us, we came to it at the south point of +it, for to the north we could see no end of it; so we passed by it and +travelled three days by the side of it, which was a great comfort to us, +because it lightened our burthen, there being no need to carry water when +we had it in view. And yet, though here was so much water, we found but +very little alteration in the desert; no trees, no grass or herbage, except +that thistle, as I called it, and two or three more plants, which we did +not understand, of which the desert began to be pretty full. + +But as we were refreshed with the neighbourhood of this lake of water, so +we were now gotten among a prodigious number of ravenous inhabitants, the +like whereof, it is most certain, the eye of man never saw; for as I firmly +believe that never man nor body of men passed this desert since the flood, +so I believe there is not the like collection of fierce, ravenous, and +devouring creatures in the world; I mean not in any particular place. + +For a day's journey before we came to this lake, and all the three days we +were passing by it, and. for six or seven days' march after it, the ground +was scattered with elephants' teeth in such a number as is incredible; and +as some of them have lain there for some hundreds of years, so, seeing the +substance of them scarce ever decays, they may lie there, for aught I know, +to the end of time. The size of some of them is, it seems, to those to whom +I have reported it, as incredible as the number; and I can assure you there +were several so heavy as the strongest man among us could not lift. As to +number, I question not but there are enough to load a thousand sail of the +biggest ships in the world, by which I may be understood to mean that the +quantity is not to be conceived of; seeing that as they lasted in view for +above eighty miles' travelling, so they might continue as far to the right +hand, and to the left as far, and many times as far, for aught we knew; for +it seems the number of elephants hereabouts is prodigiously great. In one +place in particular we saw the head of an elephant, with several teeth in +it, but one of the biggest that ever I saw; the flesh was consumed, to be +sure, many hundred years before, and all the other bones; but three of our +strongest men could not lift this skull and teeth; the great tooth, I +believe, weighed at least three hundredweight; and this was particularly +remarkable to me, that I observed the whole skull was as good ivory as the +teeth, and, I believe, altogether weighed at least six hundredweight; and +though I do not know but, by the same rule, all the bones of the elephant +may be ivory, yet I think there is this just objection against it from the +example before me, that then all the other bones of this elephant would +have been there as well as the head. + +I proposed to our gunner, that, seeing we had travelled now fourteen days +without intermission, and that we had water here for our refreshment, and +no want of food yet, nor any fear of it, we should rest our people a +little, and see, at the same time, if perhaps we might kill some creatures +that were proper for food. The gunner, who had more forecast of that kind +than I had, agreed to the proposal, and added, why might we not try to +catch some fish out of the lake? The first thing we had before us was to +try if we could make any hooks, and this indeed put our artificer to his +trumps; however, with some labour and difficulty, he did it, and we catched +fresh fish of several kinds. How they came there, none but He that made the +lake and all the world knows; for, to be sure, no human hands ever put any +in there, or pulled any out before. + +We not only catched enough for our present refreshment, but we dried +several large fishes, of kinds which I cannot describe, in the sun, by +which we lengthened out our provision considerably; for the heat of the sun +dried them so effectually without salt that they were perfectly cured, dry, +and hard, in one day's time. + +We rested ourselves here five days; during which time we had abundance of +pleasant adventures with the wild creatures, too many to relate. One of +them was very particular, which was a chase between a she-lion, or lioness, +and a large deer; and though the deer is naturally a very nimble creature, +and she flew by us like the wind, having, perhaps, about 300 yards the +start of the lion, yet we found the lion, by her strength, and the goodness +of her lungs, got ground of her. They passed by us within about a quarter +of a mile, and we had a view of them a great way, when, having given them +over, we were surprised, about an hour after, to see them come thundering +back again on the other side of us, and then the lion was within thirty or +forty yards of her; and both straining to the extremity of their speed, +when the deer, coming to the lake, plunged into the water, and swam for her +life, as she had before run for it. + +The lioness plunged in after her, and swam a little way, but came back +again; and when she was got upon the land she set up the most hideous roar +that ever I heard in my life, as if done in the rage of having lost her +prey. + +We walked out morning and evening constantly; the middle of the day we +refreshed ourselves under our tent. But one morning early we saw another +chase, which more nearly concerned us than the other; for our black prince, +walking by the side of the lake, was set upon by a vast, great crocodile, +which came out of the lake upon him; and though he was very light of foot, +yet it was as much as he could do to get away. He fled amain to us, and the +truth is, we did not know what to do, for we were told no bullet would +enter her; and we found it so at first, for though three of our men fired +at her, yet she did not mind them; but my friend the gunner, a venturous +fellow, of a bold heart, and great presence of mind, went up so near as to +thrust the muzzle of his piece into her mouth, and fired, but let his piece +fall, and ran for it the very moment he had fired it. The creature raged a +great while, and spent its fury upon the gun, making marks upon the very +iron with its teeth, but after some time fainted and died. + +Our negroes spread the banks of the lake all this while for game, and at +length killed us three deer, one of them very large, the other two very +small. There was water-fowl also in the lake, but we never came near enough +to them to shoot any; and as for the desert, we saw no fowls anywhere in it +but at the lake. + +We likewise killed two or three civet cats; but their flesh is the worst of +carrion. We saw abundance of elephants at a distance, and observed they +always go in very good company, that is to say, abundance of them together, +and always extended in a fair line of battle; and this, they say, is the +way they defend themselves from their enemies; for if lions or tigers, +wolves or any creatures, attack them, they being drawn in a line, sometimes +reaching five or six miles in length, whatever comes in their way is sure +to be trod under foot, or beaten in pieces with their trunks, or lifted up +in the air with their trunks; so that if a hundred lions or tigers were +coming along, if they meet a line of elephants, they will always fly back +till they see room to pass by the right hand or the left; and if they did +not, it would be impossible for one of them to escape; for the elephant, +though a heavy creature, is yet so dexterous and nimble with his trunk, +that he will not fail to lift up the heaviest lion, or any other wild +creature, and throw him up in the air quite over his back, and then trample +him to death with his feet. We saw several lines of battle thus; we saw one +so long that indeed there was no end of it to be seen, and I believe there +might be 2000 elephants in row or line. They are not beasts of prey, but +live upon the herbage of the field, as an ox does; and it is said, that +though they are so great a creature, yet that a smaller quantity of forage +supplies one of them than will suffice a horse. + +The numbers of this kind of creature that are in those parts are +inconceivable, as may be gathered from the prodigious quantity of teeth +which, as I said, we saw in this vast desert; and indeed we saw a hundred +of them to one of any other kind. + +One evening we were very much surprised. We were most of us laid down on +our mats to sleep, when our watch came running in among us, being frighted +with the sudden roaring of some lions just by them, which, it seems, they +had not seen, the night being dark, till they were just upon them. There +was, as it proved, an old lion and his whole family, for there was the +lioness and three young lions, besides the old king, who was a monstrous +great one. One of the young ones--who were good, large, well-grown ones +too--leaped up upon one of our negroes, who stood sentinel, before he saw +him, at which he was heartily frighted, cried out, and ran into the tent. +Our other man, who had a gun, had not presence of mind at first to shoot +him, but struck him with the butt-end of his piece, which made him whine a +little, and then growl at him fearfully; but the fellow retired, and, we +being all alarmed, three of our men snatched up their guns, ran to the tent +door, where they saw the great old lion by the fire of his eyes, and first +fired at him, but, we supposed, missed him, or at least did not kill him; +for they went all off, but raised a most hideous roar, which, as if they +had called for help, brought down a prodigious number of lions, and other +furious creatures, we know not what, about them, for we could not see them; +but there was a noise, and yelling and howling, and all sorts of such +wilderness music on every side of us, as if all the beasts of the desert +were assembled to devour us. + +We asked our black prince what we should do with them. "Me go," says he, +"and fright them all." So he snatches up two or three of the worst of our +mats, and getting one of our men to strike some fire, he hangs the mat up +at the end of a pole, and set it on fire, and it blazed abroad a good +while; at which the creatures all moved off, for we heard them roar, and +make their bellowing noise at a great distance. "Well," says our gunner, +"if that will do, we need not burn our mats, which are our beds to lay +under us, and our tilting to cover us. Let me alone," says he. So he comes +back into our tent, and falls to making some artificial fireworks and the +like; and he gave our sentinels some to be ready at hand upon occasion, and +particularly he placed a great piece of wild-fire upon the same pole that +the mat had been tied to, and set it on fire, and that burnt there so long +that all the wild creatures left us for that time. + +However, we began to be weary of such company; and, to be rid of them, we +set forward again two days sooner than we intended. We found now, that +though the desert did not end, nor could we see any appearance of it, yet +that the earth was pretty full of green stuff of one sort or another, so +that our cattle had no want; and secondly, that there were several little +rivers which ran into the lake, and so long as the country continued low, +we found water sufficient, which eased us very much in our carriage, and we +went on still sixteen days more without yet coming to any appearance of +better soil. After this we found the country rise a little, and by that we +perceived that the water would fail us; so, for fear of the worst, we +filled our bladder-bottles with water. We found the country rising +gradually thus for three days continually, when, on the sudden, we +perceived that, though we had mounted up insensibly, yet that we were on +the top of a very high ridge of hills, though not such as at first. + +When we came to look down on the other side of the hills, we saw, to the +great joy of all our hearts, that the desert was at an end; that the +country was clothed with green, abundance of trees, and a large river; and +we made no doubt but that we should find people and cattle also; and here, +by our gunner's account, who kept our computations, we had marched about +400 miles over this dismal place of horror, having been four-and-thirty +days a-doing of it, and consequently were come about 1100 miles of our +journey. + +We would willingly have descended the hills that night, but it was too +late. The next morning we saw everything more plain, and rested ourselves +under the shade of some trees, which were now the most refreshing things +imaginable to us, who had been scorched above a month without a tree to +cover us. We found the country here very pleasant, especially considering +that we came from; and we killed some deer here also, which we found very +frequent under the cover of the woods. Also we killed a creature like a +goat, whose flesh was very good to eat, but it was no goat; we found also a +great number of fowls like partridge, but something smaller, and were very +tame; so that we lived here very well, but found no people, at least none +that would be seen, no, not for several days' journey; and to allay our +joy, we were almost every night disturbed with lions and tigers; elephants, +indeed, we saw none here. + +In three days' march we came to a river, which we saw from the hills, and +which we called the Golden River; and we found it ran northward, which was +the first stream we had met with that did so. It ran with a very rapid +current, and our gunner, pulling out his map, assured me that this was +either the river Nile, or run into the great lake out of which the river +Nile was said to take its beginning; and he brought out his charts and +maps, which, by his instruction, I began to understand very well, and told +me he would convince me of it, and indeed he seemed to make it so plain to +me that I was of the same opinion. + +But I did not enter into the gunner's reason for this inquiry, not in the +least, till he went on with it farther, and stated it thus:--"If this is +the river Nile, why should not we build some more canoes, and go down this +stream, rather than expose ourselves to any more deserts and scorching +sands in quest of the sea, which when we are come to, we shall be as much +at a loss how to get home as we were at Madagascar?" + +The argument was good, had there been no objections in the way of a kind +which none of us were capable of answering; but, upon the whole, it was an +undertaking of such a nature that every one of us thought it impracticable, +and that upon several accounts; and our surgeon, who was himself a good +scholar and a man of reading, though not acquainted with the business of +sailing, opposed it, and some of his reasons, I remember, were such as +these:--First, the length of the way, which both he and the gunner allowed, +by the course of the water, and turnings of the river, would be at least +4000 miles. Secondly, the innumerable crocodiles in the river, which we +should never be able to escape. Thirdly, the dreadful deserts in the way; +and lastly, the approaching rainy season, in which the streams of the Nile +would be so furious, and rise so high--spreading far and wide over all the +plain country--that we should never be able to know when we were in the +channel of the river and when not, and should certainly be cast away, +overset, or run aground so often that it would be impossible to proceed by +a river so excessively dangerous. + +This last reason he made so plain to us that we began to be sensible of it +ourselves, so that we agreed to lay that thought aside, and proceed in our +first course, westwards towards the sea; but, as if we had been loth to +depart, we continued, by way of refreshing ourselves, to loiter two days +upon this river, in which time our black prince, who delighted much in +wandering up and down, came one evening and brought us several little bits +of something, he knew not what, but he found it felt heavy and looked well, +and showed it to me as what he thought was some rarity. I took not much +notice of it to him, but stepping out and calling the gunner to me I showed +it to him, and told him what I thought, viz., that it was certainly gold. +He agreed with me in that, and also in what followed, that we would take +the black prince out with us the next day, and make him show us where he +found it; that if there was any quantity to be found we would tell our +company of it, but if there was but little we would keep counsel, and have +it to ourselves. + +But we forgot to engage the prince in the secret, who innocently told so +much to all the rest, as that they guessed what it was, and came to us to +see. When we found it was public, we were more concerned to prevent their +suspecting that we had any design to conceal it, and openly telling our +thoughts of it, we called our artificer, who agreed presently that it was +gold; so I proposed that we should all go with the prince to the place +where he found it, and if any quantity was to be had, we would lie here +some time and see what we could make of it. + +Accordingly we went every man of us, for no man was willing to be left +behind in a discovery of such a nature. When we came to the place we found +it was on the west side of the river, not in the main river, but in another +small river or stream which came from the west, and ran into the other at +that place. We fell to raking in the sand, and washing it in our hands; and +we seldom took up a handful of sand but we washed some little round lumps +as big as a pin's head, or sometimes as big as a grape stone, into our +hands; and we found, in two or three hours' time, that every one had got +some, so we agreed to leave off, and go to dinner. + +While we were eating, it came into my thoughts that while we worked at this +rate in a thing of such nicety and consequence, it was ten to one if the +gold, which was the make-bait of the world, did not, first or last, set us +together by the ears, to break our good articles and our understanding one +among another, and perhaps cause us to part companies, or worse; I +therefore told them that I was indeed the youngest man in the company, but +as they had always allowed me to give my opinion in things, and had +sometimes been pleased to follow my advice, so I had something to propose +now, which I thought would be for all our advantages, and I believed they +would all like it very well. I told them we were in a country where we all +knew there was a great deal of gold, and that all the world sent ships +thither to get it; that we did not indeed know where it was, and so we +might get a great deal, or a little, we did not know whether; but I offered +it to them to consider whether it would not be the best way for us, and to +preserve the good harmony and friendship that had been always kept among +us, and which was so absolutely necessary to our safety, that what we found +should be brought together to one common stock, and be equally divided at +last, rather than to run the hazard of any difference which might happen +among us from any one's having found more or less than another. I told +them, that if we were all upon one bottom we should all apply ourselves +heartily to the work; and, besides that, we might then set our negroes all +to work for us, and receive equally the fruit of their labour and of our +own, and being all exactly alike sharers, there could be no just cause of +quarrel or disgust among us. + +They all approved the proposal, and every one jointly swore, and gave their +hands to one another, that they would not conceal the least grain of gold +from the rest; and consented that if any one or more should be found to +conceal any, all that he had should be taken from him and divided among the +rest; and one thing more was added to it by our gunner, from considerations +equally good and just, that if any one of us, by any play, bet, game, or +wager, won any money or gold, or the value of any, from another, during our +whole voyage, till our return quite to Portugal, he should be obliged by us +all to restore it again on the penalty of being disarmed and turned out of +the company, and of having no relief from us on any account whatever. This +was to prevent wagering and playing for money, which our men were apt to do +by several means and at several games, though they had neither cards nor +dice. + +Having made this wholesome agreement, we went cheerfully to work, and +showed our negroes how to work for us; and working up the stream on both +sides, and in the bottom of the river, we spent about three weeks' time +dabbling in the water; by which time, as it lay all in our way, we had gone +about six miles, and not more; and still the higher we went, the more gold +we found; till at last, having passed by the side of a hill, we perceived +on a sudden that the gold stopped, and that there was not a bit taken up +beyond that place. It presently occurred to my mind, that it must then be +from the side of that little hill that all the gold we found was worked +down. + +Upon this, we went back to the hill, and fell to work with that. We found +the earth loose, and of a yellowish loamy colour, and in some places a +white hard kind of stone, which, in describing since to some of our +artists, they tell me was the spar which is found by ore, and surrounds it +in the mine. However, if it had been all gold, we had no instrument to +force it out; so we passed that. But scratching into the loose earth with +our fingers, we came to a surprising place, where the earth, for the +quantity of two bushels, I believe, or thereabouts, crumbled down with +little more than touching it, and apparently showed us that there was a +great deal of gold in it. We took it all carefully up, and washing it in +the water, the loamy earth washed away, and left the gold dust free in our +hands; and that which was more remarkable was, that, when this loose earth +was all taken away, and we came to the rock or hard stone, there was not +one grain of gold more to be found. + +At night we all came together to see what we had got; and it appeared we +had found, in that day's heap of earth, about fifty pounds' weight of gold +dust, and about thirty-four pounds' weight more in all the rest of our +works in the river. + +It was a happy kind of disappointment to us, that we found a full stop put +to our work; for, had the quantity of gold been ever so small, yet, had any +at all come, I do not know when we should have given over; for, having +rummaged this place, and not finding the least grain of gold in any other +place, or in any of the earth there, except in that loose parcel, we went +quite back down the small river again, working it over and over again, as +long as we could find anything, how small soever; and we did get six or +seven pounds more the second time. Then we went into the first river, and +tried it up the stream and down the stream, on the one side and on the +other. Up the stream we found nothing, no, not a grain; down the stream we +found very little, not above the quantity of half an ounce in two miles' +working; so back we came again to the Golden River, as we justly called it, +and worked it up the stream and down the stream twice more apiece, and +every time we found some gold, and perhaps might have done so if we had +stayed there till this time; but the quantity was at last so small, and the +work so much the harder, that we agreed by consent to give it over, lest we +should fatigue ourselves and our negroes so as to be quite unfit for our +journey. + +When we had brought all our purchase together, we had in the whole three +pounds and a half of gold to a man, share and share alike, according to +such a weight and scale as our ingenious cutler made for us to weigh it by, +which indeed he did by guess, but which, as he said, he was sure was rather +more than less, and so it proved at last; for it was near two ounces more +than weight in a pound. Besides this, there was seven or eight pounds' +weight left, which we agreed to leave in his hands, to work it into such +shapes as we thought fit, to give away to such people as we might yet meet +with, from whom we might have occasion to buy provisions, or even to buy +friendship, or the like; and particularly we gave about a pound to our +black prince, which he hammered and worked by his own indefatigable hand, +and some tools our artificer lent him, into little round bits, as round +almost as beads, though not exact in shape, and drilling holes through +them, put them all upon a string, and wore them about his black neck, and +they looked very well there, I assure you; but he was many months a-doing +it. And thus ended our first golden adventure. + +We now began to discover what we had not troubled our heads much about +before, and that was, that, let the country be good or bad that we were in, +we could not travel much further for a considerable time. We had been now +five months and upwards in our journey, and the seasons began to change; +and nature told us, that, being in a climate that had a winter as well as a +summer, though of a different kind from what our country produced, we were +to expect a wet season, and such as we should not be able to travel in, as +well by reason of the rain itself, as of the floods which it would occasion +wherever we should come; and though we had been no strangers to those wet +seasons in the island of Madagascar, yet we had not thought much of them +since we began our travels; for, setting out when the sun was about the +solstice, that is, when it was at the greatest northern distance from us, +we had found the benefit of it in our travels. But now it drew near us +apace, and we found it began to rain; upon which we called another general +council, in which we debated our present circumstances, and, in particular, +whether we should go forward, or seek for a proper place upon the bank of +our Golden River, which had been so lucky to us, to fix our camp for the +winter. + +Upon the whole, it was resolved to abide where we were; and it was not the +least part of our happiness that we did so, as shall appear in its place. + +Having resolved upon this, our first measures were to set our negroes to +work, to make huts or houses for our habitation, and this they did very +dexterously; only that we changed the ground where we at first intended it, +thinking, as indeed it happened, that the river might reach it upon any +sudden rain. Our camp was like a little town, in which our huts were in the +centre, having one large one in the centre of them also, into which all our +particular lodgings opened; so that none of us went into our apartments but +through a public tent, where we all ate and drank together, and kept our +councils and society; and our carpenters made us tables, benches, and +stools in abundance, as many as we could make use of. + +We had no need of chimneys, it was hot enough without fire; but yet we +found ourselves at last obliged to keep a fire every night upon a +particular occasion. For though we had in all other respects a very +pleasant and agreeable situation, yet we were rather worse troubled with +the unwelcome visits of wild beasts here than in the wilderness itself; for +as the deer and other gentle creatures came hither for shelter and food, so +the lions and tigers and leopards haunted these places continually for +prey. + +When first we discovered this we were so uneasy at it that we thought of +removing our situation; but after many debates about it we resolved to +fortify ourselves in such a manner as not to be in any danger from it; and +this our carpenters undertook, who first palisaded our camp quite round +with long stakes, for we had wood enough, which stakes were not stuck in +one by another like pales, but in an irregular manner; a great multitude of +them so placed that they took up near two yards in thickness, some higher, +some lower, all sharpened at the top, and about a foot asunder: so that had +any creature jumped at them, unless he had gone clean over, which it was +very hard to do, he would be hung upon twenty or thirty spikes. + +The entrance into this had larger stakes than the rest, so placed before +one another as to make three or four short turnings which no four-footed +beast bigger than a dog could possibly come in at; and that we might not be +attacked by any multitude together, and consequently be alarmed in our +sleep, as we had been, or be obliged to waste our ammunition, which we were +very chary of, we kept a great fire every night without the entrance of our +palisade, having a hut for our two sentinels to stand in free from the +rain, just within the entrance, and right against the fire. + +To maintain this fire we cut a prodigious deal of wood, and piled it up in +a heap to dry, and with the green boughs made a second covering over our +huts, so high and thick that it might cast the rain from the first, and +keep us effectually dry. + +We had scarcely finished all these works but the rain came on so fierce and +so continued that we had little time to stir abroad for food, except indeed +that our negroes, who wore no clothes, seemed to make nothing of the rain; +though to us Europeans, in those hot climates, nothing is more dangerous. + +We continued in this posture for four months, that is to say, from the +middle of June to the middle of October; for though the rains went off, at +least the greatest violence of them, about the equinox, yet, as the sun was +then just over our heads, we resolved to stay awhile till it passed a +little to the southward. + +During our encampment here we had several adventures with the ravenous +creatures of that country; and had not our fire been always kept burning, I +question much whether all our fence, though we strengthened it afterwards +with twelve or fourteen rows of stakes or more, would have kept us secure. +It was always in the night that we had the disturbance of them, and +sometimes they came in such multitudes that we thought all the lions and +tigers, and leopards and wolves of Africa were come together to attack us. +One night, being clear moonshine, one of our men being upon the watch, told +us that he verily believed he saw ten thousand wild creatures of one sort +or another pass by our little camp, and ever as they saw the fire they +sheered off, but were sure to howl or roar, or whatever it was, when they +were past. + +The music of their voices was very far from being pleasant to us, and +sometimes would be so very disturbing that we could not sleep for it; and +often our sentinels would call us that were awake to come and look at them. +It was one windy, tempestuous night, after a rainy day, that we were indeed +called up; for such innumerable numbers of devilish creatures came about us +that our watch really thought they would attack us. They would not come on +the side where the fire was; and though we thought ourselves secure +everywhere else, yet we all got up and took to our arms. The moon was near +the full, but the air full of flying clouds, and a strange hurricane of +wind to add to the terror of the night; when, looking on the back part of +our camp, I thought I saw a creature within our fortification, and so +indeed he was, except his haunches, for he had taken a running leap, I +suppose, and with all his might had thrown himself clear over our +palisades, except one strong pile, which stood higher than the rest, and +which had caught hold of him, and by his weight he had hanged himself upon +it, the spike of the pile running into his hinder haunch or thigh, on the +inside; and by that he hung, growling and biting the wood for rage. I +snatched up a lance from one of the negroes that stood just by me, and +running to him, struck it three or four times into him, and despatched him, +being unwilling to shoot, because I had a mind to have a volley fired among +the rest, whom I could see standing without, as thick as a drove of +bullocks going to a fair. I immediately called our people out, and showed +them the object of terror which I had seen, and, without any further +consultation, fired a full volley among them, most of our pieces being +loaded with two or three slugs or bullets apiece. It made a horrible +clutter among them, and in general they all took to their heels, only that +we could observe that some walked off with more gravity and majesty than +others, being not so much frighted at the noise and fire; and we could +perceive that some were left upon the ground struggling as for life, but we +durst not stir out to see what they were. + +Indeed they stood so thick, and were so near us, that we could not well +miss killing or wounding some of them, and we believed they had certainly +the smell of us, and our victuals we had been killing; for we had killed a +deer, and three or four of those creatures like goats the day before; and +some of the offal had been thrown out behind our camp, and this, we +suppose, drew them so much about us; but we avoided it for the future. + +Though the creatures fled, yet we heard a frightful roaring all night at +the place where they stood, which we supposed was from some that were +wounded, and as soon as day came we went out to see what execution we had +done. And indeed it was a strange sight; there were three tigers and two +wolves quite killed, besides the creature I had killed within our palisade, +which seemed to be of an ill-gendered kind, between a tiger and a leopard. +Besides this there was a noble old lion alive, but with both his fore-legs +broke, so that he could not stir away, and he had almost beat himself to +death with struggling all night, and we found that this was the wounded +soldier that had roared so loud and given us so much disturbance. Our +surgeon, looking at him, smiled. "Now," says he, "if I could be sure this +lion would be as grateful to me as one of his majesty's ancestors was to +Androcles, the Roman slave, I would certainly set both his legs again and +cure him." I had not heard the story of Androcles, so he told it me at +large; but as to the surgeon, we told him he had no way to know whether the +lion would do so or not, but to cure him first and trust to his honour; but +he had no faith, so to despatch him and put him out of his torment, he shot +him in the head and killed him, for which we called him the king-killer +ever after. + +Our negroes found no less than five of these ravenous creatures wounded and +dropped at a distance from our quarters; whereof, one was a wolf, one a +fine spotted young leopard, and the other were creatures that we knew not +what to call them. + +We had several more of these gentlefolks about after that, but no such +general rendezvous of them as that was any more; but this ill effect it had +to us, that it frighted the deer and other creatures from our +neighbourhood, of whose company we were much more desirous, and which were +necessary for our subsistence. However, our negroes went out every day +a-hunting, as they called it, with bow and arrow, and they scarce ever +failed of bringing us home something or other; and particularly we found in +this part of the country, after the rains had fallen some time, abundance +of wild fowl, such as we have in England, duck, teal, widgeon, etc.; some +geese, and some kinds that we had never seen before; and we frequently +killed them. Also we catched a great deal of fresh fish out of the river, +so that we wanted no provision. If we wanted anything, it was salt to eat +with our fresh meat; but we had a little left, and we used it sparingly; +for as to our negroes, they could not taste it, nor did they care to eat +any meat that was seasoned with it. + +The weather began now to clear up, the rains were down, and the floods +abated, and the sun, which had passed our zenith, was gone to the southward +a good way; so we prepared to go on our way. + +It was the 12th of October, or thereabouts, that we began to set forward; +and having an easy country to travel in, as well as to supply us with +provisions, though still without inhabitants, we made more despatch, +travelling sometimes, as we calculated it, twenty or twenty-five miles a +day; nor did we halt anywhere in eleven days' march, one day excepted, +which was to make a raft to carry us over a small river, which, having +swelled with the rains, was not yet quite down. + +When we were past this river, which, by the way, ran to the northward too, +we found a great row of hills in our way. We saw, indeed, the country open +to the right at a great distance; but, as we kept true to our course, due +west, we were not willing to go a great way out of our way, only to shun a, +few hills. So we advanced; but we were surprised when, being not quite come +to the top, one of our company, who, with two negroes, was got up before +us, cried out, "The sea! the sea!" and fell a-dancing and jumping, as signs +of joy. + +The gunner and I were most surprised at it, because we had but that morning +been calculating that we must have yet above 1000 miles on the sea side, +and that we could not expect to reach it till another rainy season would be +upon us; so that when our man cried out, "The sea," the gunner was angry, +and said he was mad. + +But we were both in the greatest surprise imaginable, when, coming to the +top of the hill, and though it was very high, we saw nothing but water, +either before us or to the right hand or the left, being a vast sea, +without any bounds but the horizon. + +We went down the hill full of confusion of thought, not being able to +conceive whereabouts we were or what it must be, seeing by all our charts +the sea was yet a vast way off. + +It was not above three miles from the hills before we came to the shore, or +water-edge of this sea, and there, to our further surprise, we found the +water fresh and pleasant to drink; so that, in short, we knew not what +course to take. The sea, as we thought it to be, put a full stop to our +journey (I mean westward), for it lay just in the way. Our next question +was, which hand to turn to, to the right hand or the left, but this was +soon resolved; for, as we knew not the extent of it, we considered that our +way, if it had been the sea really, must be on the north, and therefore, if +we went to the south now, it must be just so much out of our way at last. +So, having spent a good part of the day in our surprise at the thing, and +consulting what to do, we set forward to the north. + +We travelled upon the shore of this sea full twenty-three days before we +could come to any resolution about what it was; at the end of which, early +one morning, one of our seamen cried out, "Land!" and it was no false +alarm, for we saw plainly the tops of some hills at a very great distance, +on the further side of the water, due west; but though this satisfied us +that it was not the ocean, but an inland sea or lake, yet we saw no land to +the northward, that is to say, no end of it, but were obliged to travel +eight days more, and near 100 miles farther, before we came to the end of +it, and then we found this lake or sea ended in a very great river which +ran N. or N. by E., as the other river had done which I mentioned before. + +My friend the gunner, upon examining, said that he believed that he was +mistaken before, and that this was the river Nile, but was still of the +mind that we were of before, that we should not think of a voyage into +Egypt that way; so we resolved upon crossing this river, which, however, +was not so easy as before, the river being very rapid and the channel very +broad. + +It cost us, therefore, a week here to get materials to waft ourselves and +cattle over this river; for though here were stores of trees, yet there was +none of any considerable growth sufficient to make a canoe. + +During our march on the edge of this bank we met with great fatigue, and +therefore travelled a fewer miles in a day than before, there being such a +prodigious number of little rivers that came down from the hills on the +east side, emptying themselves into this gulf, all which waters were pretty +high, the rains having been but newly over. + +In the last three days of our travel we met with some inhabitants, but we +found they lived upon the little hills and not by the water-side; nor were +we a little put to it for food in this march, having killed nothing for +four or five days but some fish we caught out of the lake, and that not in +such plenty as we found before. + +But, to make us some amends, we had no disturbance upon all the shores of +this lake from any wild beasts; the only inconveniency of that kind was, +that we met an ugly, venomous, deformed kind of a snake or serpent in the +wet grounds near the lake, that several times pursued us as if it would +attack us; and if we struck or threw anything at it, it would raise itself +up and hiss so loud that it might be heard a great way. It had a hellish +ugly deformed look and voice, and our men would not be persuaded but it was +the devil, only that we did not know what business Satan could have there, +where there were no people. + +It was very remarkable that we had now travelled 1000 miles without meeting +with any people in the heart of the whole continent of Africa, where, to be +sure, never man set his foot since the sons of Noah spread themselves over +the face of the whole earth. Here also our gunner took an observation with +his forestaff, to determine our latitude, and he found now, that having +marched about thirty-three days northward, we were in 6 degrees 22 minutes +south latitude. + +After having with great difficulty got over this river, we came into a +strange wild country that began a little to affright us; for though the +country was not a desert of dry scalding sand as that was we had passed +before, yet it was mountainous, barren, and infinitely full of most furious +wild beasts, more than any place we had passed yet. There was indeed a kind +of coarse herbage on the surface, and now and then a few trees, or rather +shrubs. But people we could see none, and we began to be in great suspense +about victuals, for we had not killed a deer a great while, but had lived +chiefly upon fish and fowl, always by the water-side, both which seemed to +fail us now; and we were in the more consternation, because we could not +lay in a stock here to proceed upon, as we did before, but were obliged to +set out with scarcity, and without any certainty of a supply. + +We had, however, no remedy but patience; and having killed some fowls and +dried some fish, as much as, with short allowance, we reckoned would last +us five days, we resolved to venture, and venture we did; nor was it +without cause that we were apprehensive of the danger, for we travelled the +five days and met neither with fish nor fowl, nor four-footed beast, whose +flesh was fit to eat, and we were in a most dreadful apprehension of being +famished to death. On the sixth day we almost fasted, or, as we may say, we +ate up all the scraps of what we had left, and at night lay down supperless +upon our mats, with heavy hearts, being obliged the eighth day to kill one +of our poor faithful servants, the buffaloes that carried our baggage. The +flesh of this creature was very good, and so sparingly did we eat of it +that it lasted us all three days and a half, and was just spent; and we +were on the point of killing another when we saw before us a country that +promised better, having high trees and a large river in the middle of it. + +This encouraged us, and we quickened our march for the river-side, though +with empty stomachs, and very faint and weak; but before we came to this +river we had the good hap to meet with some young deer, a thing we had long +wished for. In a word, having shot three of them, we came to a full stop to +fill our bellies, and never gave the flesh time to cool before we ate it; +nay, it was much we could stay to kill it and had not eaten it alive, for +we were, in short, almost famished. + +Through all that inhospitable country we saw continually lions, tigers, +leopards, civet cats, and abundance of kinds of creatures that we did not +understand; we saw no elephants, but every now and then we met with an +elephant's tooth lying on the ground, and some of them lying, as it were, +half buried by the length of time that they had lain there. + +When we came to the shore of this river, we found it ran northerly still, +as all the rest had done, but with this difference, that as the course of +the other rivers were N. by E. or N.N.E., the course of this lay N.W.N. + +On the farther bank of this river we saw some sign of inhabitants, but met +with none for the first day; but the next day we came into an inhabited +country, the people all negroes, and stark naked, without shame, both men +and women. + +We made signs of friendship to them, and found them a very frank, civil, +and friendly sort of people. They came to our negroes without any +suspicion, nor did they give us any reason to suspect them of any villainy, +as the others had done; we made signs to them that we were hungry, and +immediately some naked women ran and fetched us great quantities of roots, +and of things like pumpkins, which we made no scruple to eat; and our +artificer showed them some of his trinkets that he had made, some of iron, +some of silver, but none of gold. They had so much judgment as to choose +that of silver before the iron; but when we showed them some gold, we found +they did not value it so much as either of the other. + +For some of these things they brought us more provisions, and three living +creatures as big as calves, but not of that kind; neither did we ever see +any of them before; their flesh was very good; and after that they brought +us twelve more, and some smaller creatures like hares; all which were very +welcome to us, who were indeed at a very great loss for provisions. + +We grew very intimate with these people, and indeed they were the civillest +and most friendly people that we met with at all, and mightily pleased with +us; and, which was very particular, they were much easier to be made to +understand our meaning than any we had met with before. + +At last we began to inquire our way, pointing to the west. They made us +understand easily that we could not go that way, but they pointed to us +that we might go north-west, so that we presently understood that there was +another lake in our way, which proved to be true; for in two days more we +saw it plain, and it held us till we passed the equinoctial line, lying all +the way on our left hand, though at a great distance. + +Travelling thus northward, our gunner seemed very anxious about our +proceedings; for he assured us, and made me sensible of it by the maps +which he had been teaching me out of, that when we came into the latitude +of six degrees, or thereabouts, north of the line, the land trended away to +the west to such a length that we should not come at the sea under a march +of above 1500 miles farther westward than the country we desired to go to. +I asked him if there were no navigable rivers that we might meet with, +which, running into the west ocean, might perhaps carry us down their +stream, and then, if it were 1500 miles, or twice 1500 miles, we might do +well enough if we could but get provisions. + +Here he showed me the maps again, and that there appeared no river whose +stream was of any such a length as to do any kindness, till we came perhaps +within 200 or 300 miles of the shore, except the Rio Grande, as they call +it, which lay farther northward from us, at least 700 miles; and that then +he knew not what kind of country it might carry us through; for he said it +was his opinion that the heats on the north of the line, even in the same +latitude, were violent, and the country more desolate, barren, and +barbarous, than those of the south; and that when we came among the negroes +in the north part of Africa, next the sea, especially those who had seen +and trafficked with the Europeans, such as Dutch, English, Portuguese, +Spaniards, etc., they had most of them been so ill-used at some time or +other that they would certainly put all the spite they could upon us in +mere revenge. + +Upon these considerations he advised us that, as soon as we had passed this +lake, we should proceed W.S.W., that is to say, a little inclining to the +south, and that in time we should meet with the great river Congo, from +whence the coast is called Congo, being a little north of Angola, where we +intended at first to go. + +I asked him if ever he had been on the coast of Congo. He said, yes, he +had, but was never on shore there. Then I asked him how we should get from +thence to the coast where the European ships came, seeing, if the land +trended away west for 1500 miles, we must have all that shore to traverse +before we could double the west point of it. + +He told me it was ten to one but we should hear of some European ships to +take us in, for that they often visited the coast of Congo and Angola, in +trade with the negroes; and that if we could not, yet, if we could but find +provisions, we should make our way as well along the sea-shore as along the +river, till we came to the Gold Coast, which, he said, was not above 400 or +500 miles north of Congo, besides the turning of the coast west about 300 +more; that shore being in the latitude of six or seven degrees; and that +there the English, or Dutch, or French had settlements or factories, +perhaps all of them. + +I confess I had more mind, all the while he argued, to have gone northward, +and shipped ourselves in the Rio Grande, or, as the traders call it, the +river Negro or Niger, for I knew that at last it would bring us down to the +Cape de Verd, where we were sure of relief; whereas, at the coast we were +going to now, we had a prodigious way still to go, either by sea or land, +and no certainty which way to get provisions but by force; but for the +present I held my tongue, because it was my tutor's opinion. + +But when, according to his desire, we came to turn southward, having passed +beyond the second great lake, our men began all to be uneasy, and said we +were now out of our way for certain, for that we were going farther from +home, and that we were indeed far enough off already. + +But we had not marched above twelve days more, eight whereof were taken up +in rounding the lake, and four more south-west, in order to make for the +river Congo, but we were put to another full stop, by entering a country so +desolate, so frightful, and so wild, that we knew not what to think or do; +for, besides that it appeared as a terrible and boundless desert, having +neither woods, trees, rivers, or inhabitants, so even the place where we +were was desolate of inhabitants, nor had we any way to gather in a stock +of provisions for the passing of this desert, as we did before at our +entering the first, unless we had marched back four days to the place where +we turned the head of the lake. + +Well, notwithstanding this, we ventured; for, to men that had passed such +wild places as we had done, nothing could seem too desperate to undertake. +We ventured, I say, and the rather because we saw very high mountains in +our way at a great distance, and we imagined, wherever there were mountains +there would be springs and rivers; where rivers there would be trees and +grass; where trees and grass there would be cattle; and where cattle, some +kind of inhabitants. At last, in consequence of this speculative +philosophy, we entered this waste, having a great heap of roots and plants +for our bread, such as the Indians gave us, a very little flesh or salt, +and but a little water. + +We travelled two days towards those hills, and still they seemed as far off +as they did at first, and it was the fifth day before we got to them; +indeed, we travelled but softly, for it was excessively hot; and we were +much about the very equinoctial line, we hardly knew whether to the south +or the north of it. + +As we had concluded, that where there were hills there would be springs, so +it happened; but we were not only surprised, but really frighted, to find +the first spring we came to, and which looked admirably clear and +beautiful, to be salt as brine. It was a terrible disappointment to us, and +put us under melancholy apprehensions at first; but the gunner, who was of +a spirit never discouraged, told us we should not be disturbed at that, but +be very thankful, for salt was a bait we stood in as much need of as +anything, and there was no question but we should find fresh water as well +as salt; and here our surgeon stepped in to encourage us, and told us that +if we did not know he would show us a way how to make that salt water +fresh, which indeed made us all more cheerful, though we wondered what he +meant. + +Meantime our men, without bidding, had been seeking about for other +springs, and found several; but still they were all salt; from whence we +concluded that there was a salt rock or mineral stone in those mountains, +and perhaps they might be all of such a substance; but still I wondered by +what witchcraft it was that our artist the surgeon would make this salt +water turn fresh, and I longed to see the experiment, which was indeed a +very odd one; but he went to work with as much assurance as if he had tried +it on the very spot before. + +He took two of our large mats and sewed them together, and they made a kind +of a bag four feet broad, three feet and a half high, and about a foot and +a half thick when it was full. + +He caused us to fill this bag with dry sand and tread it down as close as +we could, not to burst the mats. When thus the bag was full within a foot, +he sought some other earth and filled up the rest with it, and still trod +all in as hard as he could. When he had done, he made a hole in the upper +earth about as broad as the crown of a large hat, or something bigger +about, but not so deep, and bade a negro fill it with water, and still as +it shrunk away to fill it again, and keep it full. The bag he had placed at +first across two pieces of wood, about a foot from the ground; and under it +he ordered some of our skins to be spread that would hold water. In about +an hour, and not sooner, the water began to come dropping through the +bottom of the bag, and, to our great surprise, was perfectly fresh and +sweet, and this continued for several hours; but in the end the water began +to be a little brackish. When we told him that, "Well, then," said he, +"turn the sand out, and fill it again." Whether he did this by way of +experiment from his own fancy, or whether he had seen it done before, I do +not remember. + +The next day we mounted the tops of the hills, where the prospect was +indeed astonishing, for as far as the eye could look, south, or west, or +northwest, there was nothing to be seen but a vast howling wilderness, with +neither tree nor river, nor any green thing. The surface we found, as the +part we passed the day before, had a kind of thick moss upon it, of a +blackish dead colour, but nothing in it that looked like food, either for +man or beast. + +Had we been stored with provisions to have entered for ten or twenty days +upon this wilderness, as we were formerly, and with fresh water, we had +hearts good enough to have ventured, though we had been obliged to come +back again, for if we went north we did not know but we might meet with the +same; but we neither had provisions, neither were we in any place where it +was possible to get them. We killed some wild ferine creatures at the foot +of these hills; but, except two things, like to nothing that we ever saw +before, we met with nothing that was fit to eat. These were creatures that +seemed to be between the kind of a buffalo and a deer, but indeed resembled +neither; for they had no horns, and had great legs like a cow, with a fine +head, and the neck like a deer. We killed also, at several times, a tiger, +two young lions, and a wolf; but, God be thanked, we were not so reduced as +to eat carrion. + +Upon this terrible prospect I renewed my motion of turning northward, and +making towards the river Niger or Rio Grande, then to turn west towards the +English settlements on the Gold Coast; to which every one most readily +consented, only our gunner, who was indeed our best guide, though he +happened to be mistaken at this time. He moved that, as our coast was now +northward, so we might slant away north-west, that so, by crossing the +country, we might perhaps meet with some other river that run into the Rio +Grande northward, or down to the Gold Coast southward, and so both direct +our way and shorten the labour; as also because, if any of the country was +inhabited and fruitful, we should probably find it upon the shore of the +rivers, where alone we could be furnished with provisions. + +This was good advice, and too rational not to be taken; but our present +business was, what to do to get out of this dreadful place we were in. +Behind us was a waste, which had already cost us five days' march, and we +had not provisions for five days left to go back again the same way. Before +us was nothing but horror, as above; so we resolved, seeing the ridge of +the hills we were upon had some appearance of fruitfulness, and that they +seemed to lead away to the northward a great way, to keep under the foot of +them on the east side, to go on as far as we could, and in the meantime to +look diligently out for food. + +Accordingly we moved on the next morning; for we had no time to lose, and, +to our great comfort, we came in our first morning's march to very good +springs of fresh water; and lest we should have a scarcity again, we filled +all our bladder bottles and carried it with us. I should also have observed +that our surgeon, who made the salt water fresh, took the opportunity of +those salt springs, and made us the quantity of three or four pecks of very +good salt. + +In our third march we found an unexpected supply of food, the hills being +full of hares. They were of a kind something different from ours in +England, larger and not as swift of foot, but very good meat. We shot +several of them, and the little tame leopard, which I told you we took at +the negro town that we plundered, hunted them like a dog, and killed us +several every day; but she would eat nothing of them unless we gave it her, +which, indeed, in our circumstance, was very obliging. We salted them a +little and dried them in the sun whole, and carried a strange parcel along +with us. I think it was almost three hundred, for we did not know when we +might find any more, either of these or any other food. We continued our +course under these hills very comfortably for eight or nine days, when we +found, to our great satisfaction, the country beyond us began to look with +something of a better countenance. As for the west side of the hills, we +never examined it till this day, when three of our company, the rest +halting for refreshment, mounted the hills again to satisfy their +curiosity, but found it all the same, nor could they see any end of it, no, +not to the north, the way we were going; so the tenth day, finding the +hills made a turn, and led as it were into the vast desert, we left them +and continued our course north, the country being very tolerably full of +woods, some waste, but not tediously long, till we came, by our gunner's +observation, into the latitude of eight degrees five minutes, which we were +nineteen days more in performing. + +All this way we found no inhabitants, but abundance of wild ravenous +creatures, with which we became so well acquainted now that really we did +not much mind them. We saw lions and tigers and leopards every night and +morning in abundance; but as they seldom came near us, we let them go about +their business: if they offered to come near us, we made false fire with +any gun that was uncharged, and they would walk off as soon as they saw the +flash. + +We made pretty good shift for food all this way; for sometimes we killed +hares, sometimes some fowls, but for my life I cannot give names to any of +them, except a kind of partridge, and another that was like our turtle. Now +and then we began to meet with elephants again in great numbers; those +creatures delighted chiefly in the woody part of the country. + +This long-continued march fatigued us very much, and two of our men fell +sick, indeed, so very sick that we thought they would have died; and one of +our negroes died suddenly. Our surgeon said it was an apoplexy, but he +wondered at it, he said, for he could never complain of his high feeding. +Another of them was very ill; but our surgeon with much ado persuading him, +indeed it was almost forcing him to be let blood, he recovered. + +We halted here twelve days for the sake of our sick men, and our surgeon +persuaded me and three or four more of us to be let blood during the time +of rest, which, with other things he gave us, contributed very much to our +continued health in so tedious a march and in so hot a climate. + +In this march we pitched our matted tents every night, and they were very +comfortable to us, though we had trees and woods to shelter us in most +places. We thought it very strange that in all this part of the country we +yet met with no inhabitants; but the principal reason, as we found +afterwards, was, that we, having kept a western course first, and then a +northern course, were gotten too much into the middle of the country and +among the deserts; whereas the inhabitants are principally found among the +rivers, lakes, and lowlands, as well to the south-west as to the north. + +What little rivulets we found here were so empty of water, that except some +pits, and little more than ordinary pools, there was scarcely any water to +be seen in them; and they rather showed that during the rainy months they +had a channel, than that they had really running water in them at that +time, by which it was easy for us to judge that we had a great way to go; +but this was no discouragement so long as we had but provisions, and some +seasonable shelter from the violent heat, which indeed I thought was much +greater now than when the sun was just over our heads. + +Our men being recovered, we set forward again, very well stored with +provisions, and water sufficient, and bending our course a little to the +westward of the north, travelled in hopes of some favourable stream which +might bear a canoe; but we found none till after twenty days' travel, +including eight days' rest; for our men being weak, we rested very often, +especially when we came to places which were proper for our purpose, where +we found cattle, fowl, or anything to kill for our food. In those twenty +days' march we advanced four degrees to the northward, besides some +meridian distance westward, and we met with abundance of elephants, and +with a good number of elephants' teeth scattered up and down, here and +there, in the woody grounds especially, some of which were very large. But +they were no booty to us; our business was provisions, and a good passage +out of the country; and it had been much more to our purpose to have found +a good fat deer, and to have killed it for our food, than a hundred ton of +elephants' teeth; and yet, as you shall presently hear, when we came to +begin our passage by water, we once thought to have built a large canoe, on +purpose to have loaded it with ivory; but this was when we knew nothing of +the rivers, nor knew anything how dangerous and how difficult a passage it +was we were likely to have in them, nor had considered the weight of +carriage to lug them to the rivers where we might embark. + +At the end of twenty days' travel, as above, in the latitude of three +degrees sixteen minutes, we discovered in a valley, at some distance from +us, a pretty tolerable stream, which we thought deserved the name of a +river, and which ran its course N.N.W., which was just what we wanted. As +we had fixed our thoughts upon our passage by water, we took this for the +place to make the experiment, and bent our march directly to the valley. + +There was a small thicket of trees just in our way, which we went by, +thinking no harm, when on a sudden one of our negroes was dangerously +wounded with an arrow shot into his back, slanting between his shoulders. +This put us to a full stop; and three of our men, with two negroes, +spreading the wood, for it was but a small one, found a negro with a bow, +but no arrow, who would have escaped, but our men that discovered him shot +him in revenge of the mischief he had done; so we lost the opportunity of +taking him prisoner, which, if we had done, and sent him home with good +usage, it might have brought others to us in a friendly manner. + +Going a little farther, we came to five negro huts or houses, built after a +different manner from any we had seen yet; and at the door of one of them +lay seven elephants' teeth, piled up against the wall or side of the hut, +as if they had been provided against a market. Here were no men, but seven +or eight women, and near twenty children. We offered them no incivility of +any kind, but gave them every one a bit of silver beaten out thin, as I +observed before, and cut diamond fashion, or in the shape of a bird, at +which the women were overjoyed, and brought out to us several sorts of +food, which we did not understand, being cakes of a meal made of roots, +which they bake in the sun, and which ate very well. We went a little way +farther and pitched our camp for that night, not doubting but our civility +to the women would produce some good effect when their husbands might come +home. + +Accordingly, the next morning the women, with eleven men, five young boys, +and two good big girls, came to our camp. Before they came quite to us, the +women called aloud, and made an odd screaming noise to bring us out; and +accordingly we came out, when two of the women, showing us what we had +given them, and pointing to the company behind, made such signs as we could +easily understand signified friendship. When the men advanced, having bows +and arrows, they laid them down on the ground, scraped and threw sand over +their heads, and turned round three times with their hands laid up upon the +tops of their heads. This, it seems, was a solemn vow of friendship. Upon +this we beckoned them with our hands to come nearer; then they sent the +boys and girls to us first, which, it seems, was to bring us more cakes of +bread and some green herbs to eat, which we received, and took the boys up +and kissed them, and the little girls too; then the men came up close to +us, and sat them down on the ground, making signs that we should sit down +by them, which we did. They said much to one another, but we could not +understand them, nor could we find any way to make them understand us, much +less whither we were going, or what we wanted, only that we easily made +them understand we wanted victuals; whereupon one of the men, casting his +eyes about him towards a rising ground that was about half a mile off, +started up as if he was frighted, flew to the place where they had laid +down their bows and arrows, snatched up a bow and two arrows, and ran like +a racehorse to the place. When he came there, he let fly both his arrows, +and comes back again to us with the same speed. We, seeing he came with the +bow, but without the arrows, were the more inquisitive; but the fellow, +saying nothing to us, beckons to one of our negroes to come to him, and we +bid him go; so he led him back to the place, where lay a kind of deer, shot +with two arrows, but not quite dead, and between them they brought it down +to us. This was for a gift to us, and was very welcome, I assure you, for +our stock was low. These people were all stark naked. + +The next day there came about a hundred men to us, and women making the +same awkward signals of friendship, and dancing, and showing themselves +very well pleased, and anything they had they gave us. How the man in the +wood came to be so butcherly and rude as to shoot at our men, without +making any breach first, we could not imagine; for the people were simple, +plain, and inoffensive in all our other conversation with them. + +From hence we went down the banks of the little river I mentioned, and +where, I found, we should see the whole nation of negroes, but whether +friendly to us or not, that we could make no judgment of yet. + +The river was no use to us, as to the design of making canoes, a great +while; and we traversed the country on the edge of it about five days more, +when our carpenters, finding the stream increased, proposed to pitch our +tents, and fall to work to make canoes; but after we had begun the work, +and cut down two or three trees, and spent five days in the labour, some of +our men, wandering further down the river, brought us word that the stream +rather decreased than increased, sinking away into the sands, or drying up +by the heat of the sun, so that the river appeared not able to carry the +least canoe that could be any way useful to us; so we were obliged to give +over our enterprise and move on. + +In our further prospect this way, we marched three days full west, the +country on the north side being extraordinary mountainous, and more parched +and dry than any we had seen yet; whereas, in the part which looks due +west, we found a pleasant valley running a great way between two great +ridges of mountains. The hills looked frightful, being entirely bare of +trees or grass, and even white with the dryness of the sand; but in the +valley we had trees, grass, and some creatures that were fit for food, and +some inhabitants. + +We passed by some of their huts or houses, and saw people about them, but +they ran up into the hills as soon as they saw us. At the end of this +valley we met with a peopled country, and at first it put us to some doubt +whether we should go among them, or keep up towards the hills northerly; +and as our aim was principally as before, to make our way to the river +Niger, we inclined to the latter, pursuing our course by the compass to the +N.W. We marched thus without interruption seven days more, when we met with +a surprising circumstance much more desolate and disconsolate than our own, +and which, in time to come, will scarce seem credible. + +We did not much seek the conversing, or acquainting ourselves with the +natives of the country, except where we found the want of them for our +provision, or their direction for our way; so that, whereas we found the +country here begin to be very populous, especially towards our left hand, +that is, to the south, we kept at the more distance northerly, still +stretching towards the west. + +In this tract we found something or other to kill and eat, which always +supplied our necessity, though not so well as we were provided in our first +setting out; being thus, as it were, pushing to avoid a peopled country, we +at last came to a very pleasant, agreeable stream of water, not big enough +to be called a river, but running to the N.N.W., which was the very course +we desired to go. + +On the farthest bank of this brook, we perceived some huts of negroes, not +many, and in a little low spot of ground, some maize, or Indian corn, +growing, which intimated presently to us, that there were some inhabitants +on that side less barbarous than what we had met with in other places where +we had been. + +As we went forward, our whole caravan being in a body, our negroes, who +were in the front, cried out, that they saw a white man! We were not much +surprised at first, it being, as we thought, a mistake of the fellows, and +asked them what they meant; when one of them stepped to me, and pointing to +a hut on the other side of the hill, I was astonished to see a white man +indeed, but stark naked, very busy near the door of his hut, and stooping +down to the ground with something in his hand, as if he had been at some +work; and his back being towards us, he did not see us. + +I gave notice to our negroes to make no noise, and waited till some more of +our men were come up, to show the sight to them, that they might be sure I +was not mistaken; and we were soon satisfied of the truth, for the man, +having heard some noise, started up, and looked full at us, as much +surprised, to be sure, as we were, but whether with fear or hope, we then +knew not. + +As he discovered us, so did the rest of the inhabitants belonging to the +huts about him, and all crowded together, looking at us at a distance, a +little bottom, in which the brook ran, lying between us; the white man, and +all the rest, as he told us afterwards, not knowing well whether they +should stay or run away. However, it presently came into my thoughts, that +if there were white men among them, it would be much easier to make them +understand what we meant as to peace or war, than we found it with others; +so tying a piece of white rag to the end of a stick, we sent two negroes +with it to the bank of the water, carrying the pole up as high as they +could; it was presently understood, and two of their men and the white man +came to the shore on the other side. + +However, as the white man spoke no Portuguese, they could understand +nothing of one another but by signs; but our men made the white man +understand that they had white men with them too, at which they said the +white man laughed. However, to be short, our men came back, and told us +they were all good friends, and in about an hour four of our men, two +negroes, and the black prince, went to the river-side, where the white man +came to them. + +They had not been half a quarter of an hour, but a negro came running to +me, and told me the white man was Inglese, as he called him; upon which I +ran back, eagerly enough, you may be sure, with him, and found, as he said, +that he was an Englishman; upon which he embraced me very passionately, the +tears running down his face. The first surprise of his seeing us was over +before we came, but any one may conceive it by the brief account he gave us +afterwards of his very unhappy circumstances, and of so unexpected a +deliverance, such as perhaps never happened to any man in the world, for it +was a million to one odds that ever he could have been relieved; nothing +but an adventure that never was heard or read of before could have suited +his case, unless Heaven, by some miracle that never was to be expected, had +acted for him. + +He appeared to be a gentleman, not an ordinary-bred fellow, seaman, or +labouring man; this showed itself in his behaviour in the first moment of +our conversing with him, and in spite of all the disadvantages of his +miserable circumstances. + +He was a middle-aged man, not above thirty-seven or thirty-eight, though +his beard was grown exceedingly long, and the hair of his head and face +strangely covered him to the middle of his back and breast; he was white, +and his skin very fine, though discoloured, and in some places blistered, +and covered with a brown blackish substance, scurfy, scaly, and hard, which +was the effect of the scorching heat of the sun; he was stark naked, and +had been so, as he told us, upwards of two years. + +He was so exceedingly transported at our meeting with him, that he could +scarce enter into any discourse at all with us that day; and when he could +get away from us for a little, we saw him walking alone, and showing all +the most extravagant tokens of an ungovernable joy; and even afterwards he +was never without tears in his eyes for several days, upon the least word +spoken by us of his circumstances, or by him of his deliverance. + +We found his behaviour the most courteous and endearing I ever saw in any +man whatever, and most evident tokens of a mannerly, well-bred person +appeared in all things he did or said, and our people were exceedingly +taken with him. He was a scholar and a mathematician; he could not speak +Portuguese indeed, but he spoke Latin to our surgeon, French to another of +our men, and Italian to a third. + +He had no leisure in his thoughts to ask us whence we came, whither we were +going, or who we were; but would have it always as an answer to himself, +that to be sure, wherever we were a-going, we came from Heaven, and were +sent on purpose to save him from the most wretched condition that ever man +was reduced to. + +Our men pitching their camp on the bank of a little river opposite to him, +he began to inquire what store of provisions we had, and how we proposed to +be supplied. When he found that our store was but small, he said he would +talk with the natives, and we should have provisions enough; for he said +they were the most courteous, good-natured part of the inhabitants in all +that part of the country, as we might suppose by his living so safe among +them. + +The first things this gentleman did for us were indeed of the greatest +consequence to us; for, first, he perfectly informed us where we were, and +which was the properest course for us to steer; secondly, he put us in the +way how to furnish ourselves effectually with provisions; and thirdly, he +was our complete interpreter and peacemaker with all the natives, who now +began to be very numerous about us, and who were a more fierce and politic +people than those we had met with before; not so easily terrified with our +arms as those, and not so ignorant as to give their provisions and corn for +our little toys, such as, I said before, our artificer made; but as they +had frequently traded and conversed with the Europeans on the coast, or +with other negro nations that had traded and been concerned with them, they +were the less ignorant and the less fearful, and consequently nothing was +to be had from them but by exchange for such things as they liked. + +This I say of the negro natives, which we soon came among; but as to these +poor people that he lived among, they were not much acquainted with things, +being at the distance of above 300 miles from the coast; only that they +found elephants' teeth upon the hills to the north, which they took and +carried about sixty or seventy miles south, where other trading negroes +usually met them, and gave them beads, glass, shells, and cowries, for +them, such as the English and Dutch and other traders furnish them with +from Europe. + +We now began to be more familiar with our new acquaintance; and first, +though we made but a sorry figure as to clothes ourselves, having neither +shoe, or stocking, or glove, or hat among us, and but very few shirts, yet +as well as we could we clothed him; and first, our surgeon having scissors +and razors, shaved him, and cut his hair; a hat, as I say, we had not in +all our stores, but he supplied himself by making himself a cap of a piece +of a leopard-skin, most artificially. As for shoes or stockings, he had +gone so long without them that he cared not even for the buskins and +foot-gloves we wore, which I described above. + +As he had been curious to hear the whole story of our travels, and was +exceedingly delighted with the relation, so we were no less to know, and +pleased with, the account of his circumstances, and the history of his +coming to that strange place alone, and in that condition which we found +him in, as above. This account of his would indeed be in itself the subject +of an agreeable history, and would be as long and diverting as our own, +having in it many strange and extraordinary incidents; but we cannot have +room here to launch out into so long a digression: the sum of his history +was this:-- + +He had been a factor for the English Guinea Company at Sierra Leone, or +some other of their settlements which had been taken by the French, where +he had been plundered of all his own effects, as well as of what was +entrusted to him by the company. Whether it was that the company did not do +him justice in restoring his circumstances, or in further employing him, he +quitted their service, and was employed by those called separate traders, +and being afterwards out of employ there also, traded on his own account; +when, passing unwarily into one of the company's settlements, he was either +betrayed into the hands of some of the natives, or, somehow or other, was +surprised by them. However, as they did not kill him, he found means to +escape from them at that time, and fled to another nation of the natives, +who, being enemies to the other, entertained him friendly, and with them he +lived some time; but not liking his quarters or his company, he fled again, +and several times changed his landlords: sometimes was carried by force, +sometimes hurried by fear, as circumstances altered with him (the variety +of which deserves a history by itself), till at last he had wandered beyond +all possibility of return, and had taken up his abode where we found him, +where he was well received by the petty king of the tribe he lived with; +and he, in return, instructed them how to value the product of their +labour, and on what terms to trade with those negroes who came up to them +for teeth. + +As he was naked, and had no clothes, so he was naked of arms for his +defence, having neither gun, sword, staff, or any instrument of war about +him, no, not to guard himself against the attacks of a wild beast, of which +the country was very full. We asked him how he came to be so entirely +abandoned of all concern for his safety? He answered, that to him, that had +so often wished for death, life was not worth defending; and that, as he +was entirely at the mercy of the negroes, they had much the more confidence +in him, seeing he had no weapons to hurt them. As for wild beasts, he was +not much concerned about that, for he scarce ever went from his hut; but if +he did, the negro king and his men went all with him, and they were all +armed with bows and arrows, and lances, with which they would kill any of +the ravenous creatures, lions as well as others; but that they seldom came +abroad in the day; and if the negroes wander anywhere in the night, they +always build a hut for themselves, and make a fire at the door of it, which +is guard enough. + +We inquired of him what we should next do towards getting to the seaside. +He told us we were about one hundred and twenty English leagues from the +coast, where almost all the European settlements and factories were, and +which is called the Gold Coast; but that there were so many different +nations of negroes in the way, that it was ten to one if we were not either +fought with continually, or starved for want of provisions; but that there +were two other ways to go, which, if he had had any company to go with him, +he had often contrived to make his escape by. The one was to travel full +west, which, though it was farther to go, yet was not so full of people, +and the people we should find would be so much the civiller to us, or be so +much the easier to fight with; or that the other way was, if possible, to +get to the Rio Grande, and go down the stream in canoes. We told him, that +was the way we had resolved on before we met with him; but then he told us +there was a prodigious desert to go over, and as prodigious woods to go +through, before we came to it, and that both together were at least twenty +days' march for us, travel as hard as we could. + +We asked him if there were no horses in the country, or asses, or even +bullocks or buffaloes, to make use of in such a journey, and we showed him +ours, of which we had but three left. He said no, all the country did not +afford anything of that kind. + +He told us that in this great wood there were immense numbers of elephants; +and upon the desert, great multitudes of lions, lynxes, tigers, leopards, +&c.; and that it was to that wood and that desert that the negroes went to +get elephants' teeth, where they never failed to find a great number. + +We inquired still more, and particularly the way to the Gold Coast, and if +there were no rivers to ease us in our carriage; and told him, as to the +negroes fighting with us, we were not much concerned at that; nor were we +afraid of starving, for if they had any victuals among them, we would have +our share of it; and, therefore, if he would venture to show us the way, we +would venture to go; and as for himself, we told him we would live and die +together--there should not a man of us stir from him. + +He told us, with all his heart, if we resolved it, and would venture, we +might be assured he would take his fate with us, and he would endeavour to +guide us in such a way as we should meet with some friendly savages who +would use us well, and perhaps stand by us against some others, who were +less tractable; so, in a word, we all resolved to go full south for the +Gold Coast. + +The next morning he came to us again, and being all met in council, as we +may call it, he began to talk very seriously with us, that since we were +now come, after a long journey, to a view of the end of our troubles, and +had been so obliging to him as to offer to carry him with us, he had been +all night revolving in his mind what he and we all might do to make +ourselves some amends for all our sorrows; and first, he said, he was to +let me know that we were just then in one of the richest parts of the +world, though it was really otherwise but a desolate, disconsolate +wilderness; "for," says he, "there is not a river but runs gold--not a +desert but without ploughing bears a crop of ivory. What mines of gold, +what immense stores of gold, those mountains may contain, from whence these +rivers come, or the shores which these waters run by, we know not, but may +imagine that they must be inconceivably rich, seeing so much is washed down +the stream by the water washing the sides of the land, that the quantity +suffices all the traders which the European world send thither." We asked +him how far they went for it, seeing the ships only trade upon the coast. +He told us that the negroes on the coast search the rivers up for the +length of 150 or 200 miles, and would be out a month, or two, or three at a +time, and always come home sufficiently rewarded; "but," says he, "they +never come thus far, and yet hereabouts is as much gold as there." Upon +this he told us that he believed he might have gotten a hundred pounds' +weight of gold since he came thither, if he had employed himself to look +and work for it; but as he knew not what to do with it, and had long since +despaired of being ever delivered from the misery he was in, he had +entirely omitted it. "For what advantage had it been to me," said he, "or +what richer had I been, if I had a ton of gold dust, and lay and wallowed +in it? The richness of it," said he, "would not give me one moment's +felicity, nor relieve me in the present exigency. Nay," says he, "as you +all see, it would not buy me clothes to cover me, or a drop of drink to +save me from perishing. It is of no value here," says he; "there are +several people among these huts that would weigh gold against a few glass +beads or a cockle-shell, and give you a handful of gold-dust for a handful +of cowries." N.B.--These are little shells which our children call +blackamoors' teeth. + +When he had said thus he pulled out a piece of an earthen pot baked hard in +the sun. "Here," says he, "is some of the dirt of this country, and if I +would I could have got a great deal more;" and, showing it to us, I believe +there was in it between two and three pounds weight of gold-dust, of the +same kind and colour with that we had gotten already, as before. After we +had looked at it a while, he told us, smiling, we were his deliverers, and +all he had, as well as his life, was ours; and therefore, as this would be +of value to us when we came to our own country, so he desired we would +accept of it among us; and that was the only time that he had repented that +he had picked up no more of it. + +I spoke for him, as his interpreter, to my comrades, and in their names +thanked him; but, speaking to them in Portuguese, I desired them to defer +the acceptance of his kindness to the next morning; and so I did, telling +him we would further talk of this part in the morning; so we parted for +that time. + +When he was gone I found they were all wonderfully affected with his +discourse, and with the generosity of his temper, as well as the +magnificence of his present, which in another place had been extraordinary. +Upon the whole, not to detain you with circumstances, we agreed that, +seeing he was now one of our number, and that as we were a relief to him in +carrying him out of the dismal condition he was in, so he was equally a +relief to us, in being our guide through the rest of the country, our +interpreter with the natives, and our director how to manage with the +savages, and how to enrich ourselves with the wealth of the country; that, +therefore, we would put his gold among our common stock, and every one +should give him as much as would make his up just as much as any single +share of our own, and for the future we would take our lot together, taking +his solemn engagement to us, as we had before one to another, that we would +not conceal the least grain of gold we found one from another. + +In the next conference we acquainted him with the adventures of the Golden +River, and how we had shared what we got there, so that every man had a +larger stock than he for his share; that, therefore, instead of taking any +from him, we had resolved every one to add a little to him. He appeared +very glad that we had met with such good success, but would not take a +grain from us, till at last, pressing him very hard, he told us, that then +he would take it thus:--that, when we came to get any more, he would have +so much out of the first as should make him even, and then we would go on +as equal adventurers; and thus we agreed. + +He then told us he thought it would not be an unprofitable adventure if, +before we set forward, and after we had got a stock of provisions, we +should make a journey north to the edge of the desert he had told us of, +from whence our negroes might bring every one a large elephant's tooth, and +that he would get some more to assist; and that, after a certain length of +carriage, they might be conveyed by canoes to the coast, where they would +yield a very great profit. + +I objected against this on account of our other design we had of getting +gold-dust; and that our negroes, who we knew would be faithful to us, would +get much more by searching the rivers for gold for us than by lugging a +great tooth of a hundred and fifty pounds weight a hundred miles or more, +which would be an insufferable labour to them after so hard a journey, and +would certainly kill them. + +He acquiesced in the justice of this answer, but fain would have had us +gone to see the woody part of the hill and the edge of the desert, that we +might see how the elephants' teeth lay scattered up and down there; but +when we told him the story of what we had seen before, as is said above, he +said no more. + +We stayed here twelve days, during which time the natives were very +obliging to us, and brought us fruits, pompions, and a root like carrots, +though of quite another taste, but not unpleasant neither, and some +guinea-fowls, whose names we did not know. In short, they brought us plenty +of what they had, and we lived very well, and we gave them all such little +things as our cutler had made, for he had now a whole bag full of them. + +On the thirteenth day we set forward, taking our new gentleman with us. At +parting, the negro king sent two savages with a present to him of some +dried flesh, but I do not remember what it was, and he gave him again three +silver birds which our cutler helped him to, which I assure you was a +present for a king. + +We travelled now south, a little west, and here we found the first river +for above 2000 miles' march, whose waters run south, all the rest running +north or west. We followed this river, which was no bigger than a good +large brook in England, till it began to increase its water. Every now and +then we found our Englishman went down as it were privately to the water, +which was to try the land; at length, after a day's march upon this river, +he came running up to us with his hands full of sand, and saying, "Look +here." Upon looking we found that a good deal of gold lay spangled among +the sand of the river. "Now," says he, "I think we may begin to work;" so +he divided our negroes into couples and set them to work, to search and +wash the sand and ooze in the bottom of the water where it was not deep. + +In the first day and a quarter our men all together had gathered a pound +and two ounces of gold or thereabouts, and as we found the quantity +increased the farther we went, we followed it about three days, till +another small rivulet joined the first, and then searching up the stream, +we found gold there too; so we pitched our camp in the angle where the +rivers joined, and we diverted ourselves, as I may call it, in washing the +gold out of the sand of the river, and in getting provisions. + +Here we stayed thirteen days more, in which time we had many pleasant +adventures with the savages, too long to mention here, and some of them too +homely to tell of, for some of our men had made something free with their +women, which, had not our new guide made peace for us with one of their men +at the price of seven fine bits of silver, which our artificer had cut out +into the shapes of lions, and fishes, and birds, and had punched holes to +hang them up by (an inestimable treasure), we must have gone to war with +them and all their people. + +All the while we were busy washing gold-dust out of the rivers, and our +negroes the like, our ingenious cutler was hammering and cutting, and he +was grown so dexterous by use that he formed all manner of images. He cut +out elephants, tigers, civet cats, ostriches, eagles, cranes, fowls, +fishes, and indeed whatever he pleased, in thin plates of hammered gold, +for his silver and iron were almost all gone. + +At one of the towns of these savage nations we were very friendly received +by their king, and as he was very much taken with our workman's toys, he +sold him an elephant cut out of a gold plate as thin as a sixpence at an +extravagant rate. He was so much taken with it that he would not be quiet +till he had given him almost a handful of gold-dust, as they call it; I +suppose it might weigh three-quarters of a pound; the piece of gold that +the elephant was made of might be about the weight of a pistole, rather +less than more. Our artist was so honest, though the labour and art were +all his own, that he brought all the gold and put it into our common stock; +but we had, indeed, no manner of reason in the least to be covetous, for, +as our new guide told us, we that were strong enough to defend ourselves, +and had time enough to stay (for we were none of us in haste), might in +time get together what quantity of gold we pleased, even to an hundred +pounds weight each man if we thought fit; and therefore he told us, though +he had as much reason to be sick of the country as any of us, yet if we +thought to turn our march a little to the south-east, and pitch upon a +place proper for our headquarters, we might find provisions plenty enough, +and extend ourselves over the country among the rivers for two or three +years to the right and left, and we should soon find the advantage of it. + +The proposal, however good as to the profitable part of it, suited none of +us, for we were all more desirous to get home than to be rich, being tired +of the excessive fatigue of above a year's continual wandering among +deserts and wild beasts. + +However, the tongue of our new acquaintance had a kind of charm in it, and +used such arguments, and had so much the power of persuasion, that there +was no resisting him. He told us it was preposterous not to take the fruit +of all our labours now we were come to the harvest; that we might see the +hazard the Europeans run with ships and men, and at great expense, to fetch +a little gold, and that we, that were in the centre of it, to go away +empty-handed was unaccountable; that we were strong enough to fight our way +through whole nations, and might make our journey afterward to what part of +the coast we pleased, and we should never forgive ourselves when we came to +our own country to see we had 500 pistoles in gold, and might as easily +have had 5000 or 10,000, or what we pleased; that he was no more covetous +than we, but seeing it was in all our powers to retrieve our misfortunes at +once, and to make ourselves easy for all our lives, he could not be +faithful to us, or grateful for the good we had done him, if he did not let +us see the advantage we had in our hands; and he assured us he would make +it clear to our own understanding, that we might in two years' time, by +good management and by the help of our negroes, gather every man a hundred +pounds weight of gold, and get together perhaps two hundred ton of teeth; +whereas, if once we pushed on to the coast and separated, we should never +be able to see that place again with our eyes, or do any more than sinners +did with heaven,--wish themselves there, but know they can never come at +it. + +Our surgeon was the first man that yielded to his reasoning, and after him +the gunner; and they too, indeed, had a great influence over us, but none +of the rest had any mind to stay, nor I neither, I must confess; for I had +no notion of a great deal of money, or what to do with myself, or what to +do with it if I had it. I thought I had enough already, and all the +thoughts I had about disposing of it, if I came to Europe, was only how to +spend it as fast as I could, buy me some clothes, and go to sea again to be +a drudge for more. + +However, he prevailed with us by his good words at last to stay but for six +months in the country, and then, if we did resolve to go, he would submit; +so at length we yielded to that, and he carried us about fifty English +miles south-east, where we found several rivulets of water, which seemed to +come all from a great ridge of mountains, which lay to the north-east, and +which, by our calculation, must be the beginning that way of the great +waste, which we had been forced northward to avoid. + +Here we found the country barren enough, but yet we had by his direction +plenty of food; for the savages round us, upon giving them some of our +toys, as I have so often mentioned, brought us in whatever they had; and +here we found some maize, or Indian wheat, which the negro women planted, +as we sow seeds in a garden, and immediately our new provider ordered some +of our negroes to plant it, and it grew up presently, and by watering it +often, we had a crop in less than three months' growth. + +As soon as we were settled, and our camp fixed, we fell to the old trade of +fishing for gold in the rivers mentioned above, and our English gentleman +so well knew how to direct our search, that we scarce ever lost our labour. + +One time, having set us to work, he asked if we would give him leave, with +four or five negroes, to go out for six or seven days to seek his fortune, +and see what he could discover in the country, assuring us whatever he got +should be for the public stock. We all gave him our consent, and lent him a +gun; and two of our men desiring to go with him, they took then six negroes +with them, and two of our buffaloes that came with us the whole journey; +they took about eight days' provision of bread with them, but no flesh, +except about as much dried flesh as would serve them two days. + +They travelled up to the top of the mountains I mentioned just now, where +they saw (as our men afterwards vouched it to be) the same desert which we +were so justly terrified at when we were on the farther side, and which, by +our calculation, could not be less than 300 miles broad and above 600 miles +in length, without knowing where it ended. + +The journal of their travels is too long to enter upon here. They stayed +out two-and-fifty days, when they brought us seventeen pound and something +more (for we had no exact weight) of gold-dust, some of it in much larger +pieces than any we had found before, besides about fifteen ton of +elephants' teeth, which he had, partly by good usage and partly by bad, +obliged the savages of the country to fetch, and bring down to him from the +mountains, and which he made others bring with him quite down to our camp. +Indeed, we wondered what was coming to us when we saw him attended with +above 200 negroes; but he soon undeceived us, when he made them all throw +down their burdens on a heap at the entrance of our camp. + +Besides this, they brought two lions' skins, and five leopards' skins, very +large and very fine. He asked our pardon for his long stay, and that he had +made no greater a booty, but told us he had one excursion more to make, +which he hoped should turn to a better account. + +So, having rested himself and rewarded the savages that brought the teeth +for him with some bits of silver and iron cut out diamond fashion, and with +two shaped like little dogs, he sent them away mightily pleased. + +The second journey he went, some more of our men desired to go with him, +and they made a troop of ten white men and ten savages, and the two +buffaloes to carry their provisions and ammunition. They took the same +course, only not exactly the same track, and they stayed thirty-two days +only, in which time they killed no less than fifteen leopards, three lions, +and several other creatures, and brought us home four-and-twenty pound some +ounces of gold-dust, and only six elephants' teeth, but they were very +great ones. + +Our friend the Englishman showed us that now our time was well bestowed, +for in five months which we had stayed here, we had gathered so much +gold-dust that, when we came to share it, we had five pound and a quarter +to a man, besides what we had before, and besides six or seven pound weight +which we had at several times given our artificer to make baubles with. And +now we talked of going forward to the coast to put an end to our journey; +but our guide laughed at us then. "Nay, you can't go now," says he, "for +the rainy season begins next month, and there will be no stirring then." +This we found, indeed, reasonable, so we resolved to furnish ourselves with +provisions, that we might not be obliged to go abroad too much in the rain, +and we spread ourselves some one way and some another, as far as we cared +to venture, to get provisions; and our negroes killed us some deer, which +we cured as well as we could in the sun, for we had now no salt. + +By this time the rainy months were set in, and we could scarce, for above +two months, look out of our huts. But that was not all, for the rivers were +so swelled with the land-floods, that we scarce knew the little brooks and +rivulets from the great navigable rivers. This had been a very good +opportunity to have conveyed by water, upon rafts, our elephants' teeth, of +which we had a very great pile; for, as we always gave the savages some +reward for their labour, the very women would bring us teeth upon every +opportunity, and sometimes a great tooth carried between two; so that our +quantity was increased to about two-and-twenty ton of teeth. + +As soon as the weather proved fair again, he told us he would not press us +to any further stay, since we did not care whether we got any more gold or +no; that we were indeed the first men he ever met with in his life that +said they had gold enough, and of whom it might be truly said, that, when +it lay under our feet, we would not stoop to take it up. But, since he had +made us a promise, he would not break it, nor press us to make any further +stay; only he thought he ought to tell us that now was the time, after the +land-flood, when the greatest quantity of gold was found; and that, if we +stayed but one month, we should see thousands of savages spread themselves +over the whole country to wash the gold out of the sand, for the European +ships which would come on the coast; that they do it then, because the rage +of the floods always works down a great deal of gold out of the hills; and, +if we took the advantage to be there before them, we did not know what +extraordinary things we might find. + +This was so forcible, and so well argued, that it appeared in all our faces +we were prevailed upon; so we told him we would all stay: for though it was +true we were all eager to be gone, yet the evident prospect of so much +advantage could not well be resisted; that he was greatly mistaken, when he +suggested that we did not desire to increase our store of gold, and in that +we were resolved to make the utmost use of the advantage that was in our +hands, and would stay as long as any gold was to be had, if it was another +year. + +He could hardly express the joy he was in on this occasion; and the fair +weather coming on, we began, just as he directed, to search about the +rivers for more gold. At first we had but little encouragement, and began +to be doubtful; but it was very plain that the reason was, the water was +not fully fallen, or the rivers reduced to their usual channel; but in a +few days we were fully requited, and found much more gold than at first, +and in bigger lumps; and one of our men washed out of the sand a piece of +gold as big as a small nut, which weighed, by our estimation--for we had no +small weights--almost an ounce and a half. + +This success made us extremely diligent; and in little more than a month we +had altogether gotten near sixty pound weight of gold; but after this, as +he told us, we found abundance of the savages, men, women, and children, +hunting every river and brook, and even the dry land of the hills for gold; +so that we could do nothing like then, compared to what we had done before. + +But our artificer found a way to make other people find us in gold without +our own labour; for, when these people began to appear, he had a +considerable quantity of his toys, birds, beasts, &c., such as before, +ready for them; and the English gentleman being the interpreter, he brought +the savages to admire them; so our cutler had trade enough, and, to be +sure, sold his goods at a monstrous rate; for he would get an ounce of +gold, sometimes two, for a bit of silver, perhaps of the value of a groat; +nay, if it were iron and if it was of gold, they would not give the more +for it; and it was incredible almost to think what a quantity of gold he +got that way. + +In a word, to bring this happy journey to a conclusion, we increased our +stock of gold here, in three months' stay more, to such a degree that, +bringing it all to a common stock, in order to share it, we divided almost +four pound weight again to every man; and then we set forward for the Gold +Coast, to see what method we could find out for our passage into Europe. + +There happened several remarkable incidents in this part of our journey, as +to how we were, or were not, received friendly by the several nations of +savages through which we passed; how we delivered one negro king from +captivity, who had been a benefactor to our new guide; and now our guide, +in gratitude, by our assistance, restored him to his kingdom, which, +perhaps, might contain about 300 subjects; how he entertained us; and how +he made his subjects go with our Englishmen, and fetch all our elephants' +teeth which we had been obliged to leave behind us, and to carry them for +us to the river, the name of which I forgot, where we made rafts, and in +eleven days more came down to one of the Dutch settlements on the Gold +Coast, where we arrived in perfect health, and to our great satisfaction. +As for our cargo of teeth, we sold it to the Dutch factory, and received +clothes and other necessaries for ourselves, and such of our negroes as we +thought fit to keep with us; and it is to be observed, that we had four +pound of gunpowder left when we ended our journey. The negro prince we made +perfectly free, clothed him out of our common stock, and gave him a pound +and a half of gold for himself, which he knew very well how to manage; and +here we all parted after the most friendly manner possible. Our Englishman +remained in the Dutch factory some time, and, as I heard afterwards, died +there of grief; for he having sent a thousand pounds sterling over to +England, by the way of Holland, for his refuge at his return to his +friends, the ship was taken by the French and the effects all lost. + +The rest of my comrades went away, in a small bark, to the two Portuguese +factories, near Gambia, in the latitude of fourteen; and I, with two +negroes which I kept with me, went away to Cape Coast Castle, where I got +passage for England, and arrived there in September; and thus ended my +first harvest of wild oats; the rest were not sowed to so much advantage. + +I had neither friend, relation, nor acquaintance in England, though it was +my native country; I had consequently no person to trust with what I had, +or to counsel me to secure or save it; but, falling into ill company, and +trusting the keeper of a public-house in Rotherhithe with a great part of +my money, and hastily squandering away the rest, all that great sum, which +I got with so much pains and hazard, was gone in little more than two +years' time; and, as I even rage in my own thoughts to reflect upon the +manner how it was wasted, so I need record no more; the rest merits to be +concealed with blushes, for that it was spent in all kinds of folly and +wickedness. So this scene of my life may be said to have begun in theft, +and ended in luxury; a sad setting-out, and a worse coming home. + +About the year ---- I began to see the bottom of my stock, and that it was +time to think of further adventures; for my spoilers, as I call them, began +to let me know, that as my money declined, their respect would ebb with it, +and that I had nothing to expect of them further than as I might command it +by the force of my money, which, in short, would not go an inch the further +for all that had been spent in their favour before. + +This shocked me very much, and I conceived a just abhorrence of their +ingratitude; but it wore off; nor had I met with any regret at the wasting +so glorious a sum of money as I brought to England with me. + +I next shipped myself, in an evil hour to be sure, on a voyage to Cadiz, in +a ship called the ----, and in the course of our voyage, being on the coast +of Spain, was obliged to put into the Groyn, by a strong southwest wind. + +Here I fell into company with some masters of mischief; and, among them, +one, forwarder than the rest, began an intimate confidence with me, so that +we called one another brothers, and communicated all our circumstances to +one another. His name was Harris. This fellow came to me one morning, +asking me if I would go on shore, and I agreed; so we got the captain's +leave for the boat, and went together. When we were together, he asked me +if I had a mind for an adventure that might make amends for all past +misfortunes. I told him, yes, with all my heart; for I did not care where I +went, having nothing to lose, and no one to leave behind me. + +He then asked me if I would swear to be secret, and that, if I did not +agree to what he proposed, I would nevertheless never betray him. I readily +bound myself to that, upon the most solemn imprecations and curses that the +devil and both of us could invent. + +He told me, then, there was a brave fellow in the other ship, pointing to +another English ship which rode in the harbour, who, in concert with some +of the men, had resolved to mutiny the next morning, and run away with the +ship; and that, if we could get strength enough among our ship's company, +we might do the same. I liked the proposal very well, and he got eight of +us to join with him, and he told us, that as soon as his friend had begun +the work, and was master of the ship, we should be ready to do the like. +This was his plot; and I, without the least hesitation, either at the +villainy of the fact or the difficulty of performing it, came immediately +into the wicked conspiracy, and so it went on among us; but we could not +bring our part to perfection. + +Accordingly, on the day appointed, his correspondent in the other ship, +whose name was Wilmot, began the work, and, having seized the captain's +mate and other officers, secured the ship, and gave the signal to us. We +were but eleven in our ship, who were in the conspiracy, nor could we get +any more that we could trust; so that, leaving the ship, we all took the +boat, and went off to join the other. + +Having thus left the ship I was in, we were entertained with a great deal +of joy by Captain Wilmot and his new gang; and, being well prepared for all +manner of roguery, bold, desperate (I mean myself), without the least +checks of conscience for what I was entered upon, or for anything I might +do, much less with any apprehension of what might be the consequence of it; +I say, having thus embarked with this crew, which at last brought me to +consort with the most famous pirates of the age, some of whom have ended +their journals at the gallows, I think the giving an account of some of my +other adventures may be an agreeable piece of story; and this I may venture +to say beforehand, upon the word of a pirate, that I shall not be able to +recollect the full, no, not by far, of the great variety which has formed +one of the most reprobate schemes that ever man was capable to present to +the world. + +I that was, as I have hinted before, an original thief, and a pirate, even +by inclination before, was now in my element, and never undertook anything +in my life with more particular satisfaction. + +Captain Wilmot (for so we are now to call him) being thus possessed of a +ship, and in the manner as you have heard, it may be easily concluded he +had nothing to do to stay in the port, or to wait either the attempts +that might be made from the shore, or any change that might happen among +his men. On the contrary, we weighed anchor the same tide, and stood out +to sea, steering away for the Canaries. Our ship had twenty-two guns, +but was able to carry thirty; and besides, as she was fitted out for a +merchant-ship only, she was not furnished either with ammunition or +small-arms sufficient for our design, or for the occasion we might have +in case of a fight. So we put into Cadiz, that is to say, we came to an +anchor in the bay; and the captain, and one whom we called young Captain +Kidd, who was the gunner, [landed,] and some of the men who could best +be trusted, among whom was my comrade Harris, who was made second mate, +and myself, who was made a lieutenant. Some bales of English goods were +proposed to be carried on shore with us for sale, but my comrade, who +was a complete fellow at his business, proposed a better way for it; and +having been in the town before, told us, in short, that he would buy +what powder and bullet, small-arms, or anything else we wanted, on his +own word, to be paid for when they came on board, in such English goods +as we had there. This was much the best way, and accordingly he and the +captain went on shore by themselves, and having made such a bargain as +they found for their turn, came away again in two hours' time, and +bringing only a butt of wine and five casks of brandy with them, we all +went on board again. + +The next morning two _barcos longos_ came off to us, deeply laden, with +five Spaniards on board them, for traffic. Our captain sold them good +pennyworths, and they delivered us sixteen barrels of powder, twelve small +rundlets of fine powder for our small-arms, sixty muskets, and twelve +fusees for the officers; seventeen ton of cannon-ball, fifteen barrels of +musket-bullets, with some swords and twenty good pair of pistols. Besides +this, they brought thirteen butts of wine (for we, that were now all become +gentlemen, scorned to drink the ship's beer), also sixteen puncheons of +brandy, with twelve barrels of raisins and twenty chests of lemons; all +which we paid for in English goods; and, over and above, the captain +received six hundred pieces of eight in money. They would have come again, +but we would stay no longer. + +From hence we sailed to the Canaries, and from thence onward to the West +Indies, where we committed some depredation upon the Spaniards for +provisions, and took some prizes, but none of any great value, while I +remained with them, which was not long at that time; for, having taken a +Spanish sloop on the coast of Carthagena, my friend made a motion to me, +that we should desire Captain Wilmot to put us into the sloop, with a +proportion of arms and ammunition, and let us try what we could do; she +being much fitter for our business than the great ship, and a better +sailer. This he consented to, and we appointed our rendezvous at Tobago, +making an agreement, that whatever was taken by either of our ships should +be shared among the ship's company of both; all which we very punctually +observed, and joined our ships again, about fifteen months after, at the +island of Tobago, as above. + +We cruised near two years in those seas, chiefly upon the Spaniards; not +that we made any difficulty of taking English ships, or Dutch, or French, +if they came in our way; and particularly, Captain Wilmot attacked a New +England ship bound from the Madeiras to Jamaica, and another bound from New +York to Barbados, with provisions; which last was a very happy supply to +us. But the reason why we meddled as little with English vessels as we +could, was, first, because, if they were ships of any force, we were sure +of more resistance from them; and, secondly, because we found the English +ships had less booty when taken, for the Spaniards generally had money on +board, and that was what we best knew what to do with. Captain Wilmot was, +indeed, more particularly cruel when he took any English vessel, that they +might not too soon have advice of him in England; and so the men-of-war +have orders to look out for him. But this part I bury in silence for the +present. + +We increased our stock in these two years considerably, having taken 60,000 +pieces of eight in one vessel, and 100,000 in another; and being thus first +grown rich, we resolved to be strong too, for we had taken a brigantine +built at Virginia, an excellent sea-boat, and a good sailer, and able to +carry twelve guns; and a large Spanish frigate-built ship, that sailed +incomparably well also, and which afterwards, by the help of good +carpenters, we fitted up to carry twenty-eight guns. And now we wanted more +hands, so we put away for the Bay of Campeachy, not doubting we should ship +as many men there as we pleased; and so we did. + +Here we sold the sloop that I was in; and Captain Wilmot keeping his own +ship, I took the command of the Spanish frigate as captain, and my comrade +Harris as eldest lieutenant, and a bold enterprising fellow he was, as any +the world afforded. One culverdine was put into the brigantine, so that we +were now three stout ships, well manned, and victualled for twelve months; +for we had taken two or three sloops from New England and New York, laden +with flour, peas, and barrelled beef and pork, going for Jamaica and +Barbados; and for more beef we went on shore on the island of Cuba, where +we killed as many black cattle as we pleased, though we had very little +salt to cure them. + +Out of all the prizes we took here we took their powder and bullet, their +small-arms and cutlasses; and as for their men, we always took the surgeon +and the carpenter, as persons who were of particular use to us upon many +occasions; nor were they always unwilling to go with us, though for their +own security, in case of accidents, they might easily pretend they were +carried away by force; of which I shall give a pleasant account in the +course of my other expeditions. + +We had one very merry fellow here, a Quaker, whose name was William +Walters, whom we took out of a sloop bound from Pennsylvania to Barbados. +He was a surgeon, and they called him doctor; but he was not employed in +the sloop as a surgeon, but was going to Barbados to get a berth, as the +sailors call it. However, he had all his surgeon's chests on board, and we +made him go with us, and take all his implements with him. He was a comic +fellow indeed, a man of very good solid sense, and an excellent surgeon; +but, what was worth all, very good-humoured and pleasant in his +conversation, and a bold, stout, brave fellow too, as any we had among us. + +I found William, as I thought, not very averse to go along with us, and yet +resolved to do it so that it might be apparent he was taken away by force, +and to this purpose he comes to me. "Friend," says he, "thou sayest I must +go with thee, and it is not in my power to resist thee if I would; but I +desire thou wilt oblige the master of the sloop which I am on board to +certify under his hand, that I was taken away by force and against my +will." And this he said with so much satisfaction in his face, that I could +not but understand him. "Ay, ay," says I, "whether it be against your will +or no, I'll make him and all the men give you a certificate of it, or I'll +take them all along with us, and keep them till they do." So I drew up a +certificate myself, wherein I wrote that he was taken away by main force, +as a prisoner, by a pirate ship; that they carried away his chest and +instruments first, and then bound his hands behind him and forced him into +their boat; and this was signed by the master and all his men. + +Accordingly I fell a-swearing at him, and called to my men to tie his hands +behind him, and so we put him into our boat and carried him away. When I +had him on board, I called him to me. "Now, friend," says I, "I have +brought you away by force, it is true, but I am not of the opinion I have +brought you away so much against your will as they imagine. Come," says I, +"you will be a useful man to us, and you shall have very good usage among +us." So I unbound his hands, and first ordered all things that belonged to +him to be restored to him, and our captain gave him a dram. + +"Thou hast dealt friendly by me," says he, "and I will be plain with thee, +whether I came willingly to thee or not. I shall make myself as useful to +thee as I can, but thou knowest it is not my business to meddle when thou +art to fight." "No, no," says the captain, "but you may meddle a little +when we share the money." "Those things are useful to furnish a surgeon's +chest," says William, and smiled, "but I shall be moderate." + +In short, William was a most agreeable companion; but he had the better of +us in this part, that if we were taken we were sure to be hanged, and he +was sure to escape; and he knew it well enough. But, in short, he was a +sprightly fellow, and fitter to be captain than any of us. I shall have +often an occasion to speak of him in the rest of the story. + +Our cruising so long in these seas began now to be so well known, that not +in England only, but in France and Spain, accounts had been made public of +our adventures, and many stories told how we murdered the people in cold +blood, tying them back to back, and throwing them into the sea; one half of +which, however, was not true, though more was done than is fit to speak of +here. + +The consequence of this, however, was, that several English men-of-war were +sent to the West Indies, and were particularly instructed to cruise in the +Bay of Mexico, and the Gulf of Florida, and among the Bahama islands, if +possible, to attack us. We were not so ignorant of things as not to expect +this, after so long a stay in that part of the world; but the first certain +account we had of them was at Honduras, when a vessel coming in from +Jamaica told us that two English men-of-war were coming directly from +Jamaica thither in quest of us. We were indeed as it were embayed, and +could not have made the least shift to have got off, if they had come +directly to us; but, as it happened, somebody had informed them that we +were in the Bay of Campeachy, and they went directly thither, by which we +were not only free of them, but were so much to the windward of them, that +they could not make any attempt upon us, though they had known we were +there. + +We took this advantage, and stood away for Carthagena, and from thence with +great difficulty beat it up at a distance from under the shore for St. +Martha, till we came to the Dutch island of Curacoa, and from thence to the +island of Tobago, which, as before, was our rendezvous; which, being a +deserted, uninhabited island, we at the same time made use of for a +retreat. Here the captain of the brigantine died, and Captain Harris, at +that time my lieutenant, took the command of the brigantine. + +Here we came to a resolution to go away to the coast of Brazil, and from +thence to the Cape of Good Hope, and so for the East Indies; but Captain +Harris, as I have said, being now captain of the brigantine, alleged that +his ship was too small for so long a voyage, but that, if Captain Wilmot +would consent, he would take the hazard of another cruise, and he would +follow us in the first ship he could take. So we appointed our rendezvous +to be at Madagascar, which was done by my recommendation of the place, and +the plenty of provisions to be had there. + +Accordingly, he went away from us in an evil hour; for, instead of taking a +ship to follow us, he was taken, as I heard afterwards, by an English +man-of-war, and being laid in irons, died of mere grief and anger before he +came to England. His lieutenant, I have heard, was afterwards executed in +England for a pirate; and this was the end of the man who first brought me +into this unhappy trade. + +We parted from Tobago three days after, bending our course for the coast of +Brazil, but had not been at sea above twenty-four hours, when we were +separated by a terrible storm, which held three days, with very little +abatement or intermission. In this juncture Captain Wilmot happened, +unluckily, to be on board my ship, to his great mortification; for we not +only lost sight of his ship, but never saw her more till we came to +Madagascar, where she was cast away. In short, after having in this tempest +lost our fore-topmast, we were forced to put back to the isle of Tobago for +shelter, and to repair our damage, which brought us all very near our +destruction. + +We were no sooner on shore here, and all very busy looking out for a piece +of timber for a topmast, but we perceived standing in for the shore an +English man-of-war of thirty-six guns. It was a great surprise to us +indeed, because we were disabled so much; but, to our great good fortune, +we lay pretty snug and close among the high rocks, and the man-of-war did +not see us, but stood off again upon his cruise. So we only observed which +way she went, and at night, leaving our work, resolved to stand off to sea, +steering the contrary way from that which we observed she went; and this, +we found, had the desired success, for we saw him no more. We had gotten an +old mizzen-topmast on board, which made us a jury fore-topmast for the +present; and so we stood away for the isle of Trinidad, where, though there +were Spaniards on shore, yet we landed some men with our boat, and cut a +very good piece of fir to make us a new topmast, which we got fitted up +effectually; and also we got some cattle here to eke out our provisions; +and calling a council of war among ourselves, we resolved to quit those +seas for the present, and steer away for the coast of Brazil. + +The first thing we attempted here was only getting fresh water, but we +learnt that there lay the Portuguese fleet at the bay of All Saints, bound +for Lisbon, ready to sail, and only waited for a fair wind. This made us +lie by, wishing to see them put to sea, and, accordingly as they were with +or without convoy, to attack or avoid them. + +It sprung up a fresh gale in the evening at S.W. by W., which, being fair +for the Portugal fleet, and the weather pleasant and agreeable, we heard +the signal given to unmoor, and running in under the island of Si---, we +hauled our mainsail and foresail up in the brails, lowered the topsails +upon the cap, and clewed them up, that we might lie as snug as we could, +expecting their coming out, and the next morning saw the whole fleet come +out accordingly, but not at all to our satisfaction, for they consisted of +twenty-six sail, and most of them ships of force, as well as burthen, both +merchantmen and men-of-war; so, seeing there was no meddling, we lay still +where we were also, till the fleet was out of sight, and then stood off and +on, in hopes of meeting with further purchase. + +It was not long before we saw a sail, and immediately gave her chase; but +she proved an excellent sailer, and, standing out to sea, we saw plainly +she trusted to her heels--that is to say, to her sails. However, as we were +a clean ship, we gained upon her, though slowly, and had we had a day +before us, we should certainly have come up with her; but it grew dark +apace, and in that case we knew we should lose sight of her. + +Our merry Quaker, perceiving us to crowd still after her in the dark, +wherein we could not see which way she went, came very dryly to me. "Friend +Singleton," says he, "dost thee know what we are a-doing?" Says I, "Yes; +why, we are chasing yon ship, are we not?" "And how dost thou know that?" +says he, very gravely still. "Nay, that's true," says I again; "we cannot +be sure." "Yes, friend," says he, "I think we may be sure that we are +running away from her, not chasing her. I am afraid," adds he, "thou art +turned Quaker, and hast resolved not to use the hand of power, or art a +coward, and art flying from thy enemy." + +"What do you mean?" says I (I think I swore at him). "What do you sneer at +now? You have always one dry rub or another to give us." + +"Nay," says he, "it is plain enough the ship stood off to sea due east, on +purpose to lose us, and thou mayest be sure her business does not lie that +way; for what should she do at the coast of Africa in this latitude, which +should be as far south as Congo or Angola? But as soon as it is dark, that +we would lose sight of her, she will tack and stand away west again for the +Brazil coast and for the bay, where thou knowest she was going before; and +are we not, then, running away from her? I am greatly in hopes, friend," +says the dry, gibing creature, "thou wilt turn Quaker, for I see thou art +not for fighting." + +"Very well, William," says I; "then I shall make an excellent pirate." +However, William was in the right, and I apprehended what he meant +immediately; and Captain Wilmot, who lay very sick in his cabin, +overhearing us, understood him as well as I, and called out to me that +William was right, and it was our best way to change our course, and stand +away for the bay, where it was ten to one but we should snap her in the +morning. + +Accordingly we went about-ship, got our larboard tacks on board, set the +top-gallant sails, and crowded for the bay of All Saints, where we came to +an anchor early in the morning, just out of gunshot of the forts; we furled +our sails with rope-yarns, that we might haul home the sheets without going +up to loose them, and, lowering our main and fore-yards, looked just as if +we had lain there a good while. + +In two hours afterwards we saw our game standing in for the bay with all +the sail she could make, and she came innocently into our very mouths, for +we lay still till we saw her almost within gunshot, when, our foremost +gears being stretched fore and aft, we first ran up our yards, and then +hauled home the topsail sheets, the rope-yarns that furled them giving way +of themselves; the sails were set in a few minutes; at the same time +slipping our cable, we came upon her before she could get under way upon +the other tack. They were so surprised that they made little or no +resistance, but struck after the first broadside. + +We were considering what to do with her, when William came to me. "Hark +thee, friend," says he, "thou hast made a fine piece of work of it now, +hast thou not, to borrow thy neighbour's ship here just at thy neighbour's +door, and never ask him leave? Now, dost thou not think there are some +men-of-war in the port? Thou hast given them the alarm sufficiently; thou +wilt have them upon thy back before night, depend upon it, to ask thee +wherefore thou didst so." + +"Truly, William," said I, "for aught I know, that may be true; what, then, +shall we do next?" Says he, "Thou hast but two things to do: either to go +in and take all the rest, or else get thee gone before they come out and +take thee; for I see they are hoisting a topmast to yon great ship, in +order to put to sea immediately, and they won't be long before they come to +talk with thee, and what wilt thou say to them when they ask thee why thou +borrowedst their ship without leave?" + +As William said, so it was. We could see by our glasses they were all in a +hurry, manning and fitting some sloops they had there, and a large +man-of-war, and it was plain they would soon be with us. But we were not at +a loss what to do; we found the ship we had taken was laden with nothing +considerable for our purpose, except some cocoa, some sugar, and twenty +barrels of flour; the rest of her cargo was hides; so we took out all we +thought fit for our turn, and, among the rest, all her ammunition, great +shot, and small-arms, and turned her off. We also took a cable and three +anchors she had, which were for our purpose, and some of her sails. She had +enough left just to carry her into port, and that was all. + +Having done this, we stood on upon the Brazil coast, southward, till we +came to the mouth of the river Janeiro. But as we had two days the wind +blowing hard at S.E. and S.S.E., we were obliged to come to an anchor under +a little island, and wait for a wind. In this time the Portuguese had, it +seems, given notice over land to the governor there, that a pirate was upon +the coast; so that, when we came in view of the port, we saw two men-of-war +riding just without the bar, whereof one, we found, was getting under sail +with all possible speed, having slipped her cable on purpose to speak with +us; the other was not so forward, but was preparing to follow. In less than +an hour they stood both fair after us, with all the sail they could make. + +Had not the night come on, William's words had been made good; they would +certainly have asked us the question what we did there, for we found the +foremost ship gained upon us, especially upon one tack, for we plied away +from them to windward; but in the dark losing sight of them, we resolved to +change our course and stand away directly for sea, not doubting that we +should lose them in the night. + +Whether the Portuguese commander guessed we would do so or no, I know not; +but in the morning, when the daylight appeared, instead of having lost him, +we found him in chase of us about a league astern; only, to our great good +fortune, we could see but one of the two. However, this one was a great +ship, carried six-and-forty guns, and an admirable sailer, as appeared by +her outsailing us; for our ship was an excellent sailer too, as I have said +before. + +When I found this, I easily saw there was no remedy, but we must engage; +and as we knew we could expect no quarter from those scoundrels the +Portuguese, a nation I had an original aversion to, I let Captain Wilmot +know how it was. The captain, sick as he was, jumped up in the cabin, and +would be led out upon the deck (for he was very weak) to see how it was. +"Well," says he, "we'll fight them!" + +Our men were all in good heart before, but to see the captain so brisk, who +had lain ill of a calenture ten or eleven days, gave them double courage, +and they went all hands to work to make a clear ship and be ready. William, +the Quaker, comes to me with a kind of a smile. "Friend," says he, "what +does yon ship follow us for?" "Why," says I, "to fight us, you may be +sure." "Well," says he, "and will he come up with us, dost thou think?" +"Yes," said I, "you see she will." "Why, then, friend," says the dry +wretch, "why dost thou run from her still, when thou seest she will +overtake thee? Will it be better for us to be overtaken farther off than +here?" "Much as one for that," says I; "why, what would you have us do?" +"Do!" says he; "let us not give the poor man more trouble than needs must; +let us stay for him and hear what he has to say to us." "He will talk to us +in powder and ball," said I. "Very well, then," says he, "if that be his +country language, we must talk to him in the same, must we not? or else how +shall he understand us?" "Very well, William," says I, "we understand you." +And the captain, as ill as he was, called to me, "William's right again," +says he; "as good here as a league farther." So he gives a word of command, +"Haul up the main-sail; we'll shorten sail for him." + +Accordingly we shortened sail, and as we expected her upon our lee-side, we +being then upon our starboard tack, brought eighteen of our guns to the +larboard side, resolving to give him a broadside that should warm him. It +was about half-an-hour before he came up with us, all which time we luffed +up, that we might keep the wind of him, by which he was obliged to run up +under our lee, as we designed him; when we got him upon our quarter, we +edged down, and received the fire of five or six of his guns. By this time +you may be sure all our hands were at their quarters, so we clapped our +helm hard a-weather, let go the lee-braces of the maintop sail, and laid it +a-back, and so our ship fell athwart the Portuguese ship's hawse; then we +immediately poured in our broadside, raking them fore and aft, and killed +them a great many men. + +The Portuguese, we could see, were in the utmost confusion; and not being +aware of our design, their ship having fresh way, ran their bowsprit into +the fore part of our main shrouds, as that they could not easily get clear +of us, and so we lay locked after that manner. The enemy could not bring +above five or six guns, besides their small-arms, to bear upon us, while we +played our whole broadside upon him. + +In the middle of the heat of this fight, as I was very busy upon the +quarter-deck, the captain calls to me, for he never stirred from us, "What +the devil is friend William a-doing yonder?" says the captain; "has he any +business upon, deck?" I stepped forward, and there was friend William, with +two or three stout fellows, lashing the ship's bowsprit fast to our +mainmast, for fear they should get away from us; and every now and then he +pulled a bottle out of his pocket, and gave the men a dram to encourage +them. The shot flew about his ears as thick as may be supposed in such an +action, where the Portuguese, to give them their due, fought very briskly, +believing at first they were sure of their game, and trusting to their +superiority; but there was William, as composed, and in as perfect +tranquillity as to danger, as if he had been over a bowl of punch, only +very busy securing the matter, that a ship of forty-six guns should not run +away from a ship of eight-and-twenty. + +This work was too hot to hold long; our men behaved bravely: our gunner, a +gallant man, shouted below, pouring in his shot at such a rate, that the +Portuguese began to slacken their fire; we had dismounted several of their +guns by firing in at their forecastle, and raking them, as I said, fore and +aft. Presently comes William up to me. "Friend," says he, very calmly, +"what dost thou mean? Why dost thou not visit thy neighbour in the ship, +the door being open for thee?" I understood him immediately, for our guns +had so torn their hull, that we had beat two port-holes into one, and the +bulk-head of their steerage was split to pieces, so that they could not +retire to their close quarters; so I gave the word immediately to board +them. Our second lieutenant, with about thirty men, entered in an instant +over the forecastle, followed by some more with the boatswain, and cutting +in pieces about twenty-five men that they found upon the deck, and then +throwing some grenadoes into the steerage, they entered there also; upon +which the Portuguese cried quarter presently, and we mastered the ship, +contrary indeed to our own expectation; for we would have compounded with +them if they would have sheered off: but laying them athwart the hawse at +first, and following our fire furiously, without giving them any time to +get clear of us and work their ship; by this means, though they had +six-and-forty guns, they were not able to fight above five or six, as I +said above, for we beat them immediately from their guns in the forecastle, +and killed them abundance of men between decks, so that when we entered +they had hardly found men enough to fight us hand to hand upon their deck. + +The surprise of joy to hear the Portuguese cry quarter, and see their +ancient struck, was so great to our captain, who, as I have said, was +reduced very weak with a high fever, that it gave him new life. Nature +conquered the distemper, and the fever abated that very night; so that in +two or three days he was sensibly better, his strength began to come, and +he was able to give his orders effectually in everything that was material, +and in about ten days was entirely well and about the ship. + +In the meantime I took possession of the Portuguese man-of-war; and Captain +Wilmot made me, or rather I made myself, captain of her for the present. +About thirty of their seamen took service with us, some of which were +French, some Genoese; and we set the rest on shore the next day on a little +island on the coast of Brazil, except some wounded men, who were not in a +condition to be removed, and whom we were bound to keep on board; but we +had an occasion afterwards to dispose of them at the Cape, where, at their +own request, we set them on shore. + +Captain Wilmot, as soon as the ship was taken, and the prisoners stowed, +was for standing in for the river Janeiro again, not doubting but we should +meet with the other man-of-war, who, not having been able to find us, and +having lost the company of her comrade, would certainly be returned, and +might be surprised by the ship we had taken, if we carried Portuguese +colours; and our men were all for it. + +But our friend William gave us better counsel, for he came to me, "Friend," +says he, "I understand the captain is for sailing back to the Rio Janeiro, +in hopes to meet with the other ship that was in chase of thee yesterday. +Is it true, dost thou intend it?" "Why, yes," says I, "William, pray why +not?" "Nay," says he, "thou mayest do so if thou wilt." "Well, I know that +too, William," said I, "but the captain is a man will be ruled by reason; +what have you to say to it?" "Why," says William gravely, "I only ask what +is thy business, and the business of all the people thou hast with thee? Is +it not to get money?" "Yes, William, it is so, in our honest way." "And +wouldest thou," says he, "rather have money without fighting, or fighting +without money? I mean which wouldest thou have by choice, suppose it to be +left to thee?" "O William," says I, "the first of the two, to be sure." +"Why, then," says he, "what great gain hast thou made of the prize thou +hast taken now, though it has cost the lives of thirteen of thy men, +besides some hurt? It is true thou hast got the ship and some prisoners; +but thou wouldest have had twice the booty in a merchant-ship, with not one +quarter of the fighting; and how dost thou know either what force or what +number of men may be in the other ship, and what loss thou mayest suffer, +and what gain it shall be to thee if thou take her? I think, indeed, thou +mayest much better let her alone." + +"Why, William, it is true," said I, "and I'll go tell the captain what your +opinion is, and bring you word what he says." Accordingly in I went to the +captain and told him William's reasons; and the captain was of his mind, +that our business was indeed fighting when we could not help it, but that +our main affair was money, and that with as few blows as we could. So that +adventure was laid aside, and we stood along shore again south for the +river De la Plata, expecting some purchase thereabouts; especially we had +our eyes upon some of the Spanish ships from Buenos Ayres, which are +generally very rich in silver, and one such prize would have done our +business. We plied about here, in the latitude of ---- south, for near a +month, and nothing offered; and here we began to consult what we should do +next, for we had come to no resolution yet. Indeed, my design was always +for the Cape de Bona Speranza, and so to the East Indies. I had heard some +flaming stories of Captain Avery, and the fine things he had done in the +Indies, which were doubled and doubled, even ten thousand fold; and from +taking a great prize in the Bay of Bengal, where he took a lady, said to be +the Great Mogul's daughter, with a great quantity of jewels about her, we +had a story told us, that he took a Mogul ship, so the foolish sailors +called it, laden with diamonds. + +I would fain have had friend William's advice whither we should go, but he +always put it off with some quaking quibble or other. In short, he did not +care for directing us neither; whether he made a piece of conscience of it, +or whether he did not care to venture having it come against him afterwards +or no, this I know not; but we concluded at last without him. + +We were, however, pretty long in resolving, and hankered about the Rio de +la Plata a long time. At last we spied a sail to windward, and it was such +a sail as I believe had not been seen in that part of the world a great +while. It wanted not that we should give it chase, for it stood directly +towards us, as well as they that steered could make it; and even that was +more accident of weather than anything else, for if the wind had chopped +about anywhere they must have gone with it. I leave any man that is a +sailor, or understands anything of a ship, to judge what a figure this ship +made when we first saw her, and what we could imagine was the matter with +her. Her maintop-mast was come by the board about six foot above the cap, +and fell forward, the head of the topgallant-mast hanging in the +fore-shrouds by the stay; at the same time the parrel of the +mizzen-topsail-yard by some accident giving way, the mizzen-topsail-braces +(the standing part of which being fast to the main-topsail shrouds) brought +the mizzen-topsail, yard and all, down with it, which spread over part of +the quarter-deck like an awning; the fore-topsail was hoisted up two-thirds +of the mast, but the sheets were flown; the fore-yard was lowered down upon +the forecastle, the sail loose, and part of it hanging overboard. In this +manner she came down upon us with the wind quartering. In a word, the +figure the whole ship made was the most confounding to men that understood +the sea that ever was seen. She had no boat, neither had she any colours +out. + +When we came near to her, we fired a gun to bring her to. She took no +notice of it, nor of us, but came on just as she did before. We fired +again, but it was all one. At length we came within pistol-shot of one +another, but nobody answered nor appeared; so we began to think that it was +a ship gone ashore somewhere in distress, and the men having forsaken her, +the high tide had floated her off to sea. Coming nearer to her, we ran up +alongside of her so close that we could hear a noise within her, and see +the motion of several people through her ports. + +Upon this we manned out two boats full of men, and very well armed, and +ordered them to board her at the same minute, as near as they could, and to +enter one at her fore-chains on the one side, and the other amidships on +the other side. As soon as they came to the ship's side, a surprising +multitude of black sailors, such as they were, appeared upon deck, and, in +short, terrified our men so much that the boat which was to enter her men +in the waist stood off again, and durst not board her; and the men that +entered out of the other boat, finding the first boat, as they thought, +beaten off, and seeing the ship full of men, jumped all back again into +their boat, and put off, not knowing what the matter was. Upon this we +prepared to pour in a broadside upon her; but our friend William set us to +rights again here; for it seems he guessed how it was sooner than we did, +and coming up to me (for it was our ship that came up with her), "Friend," +says he, "I am of opinion that thou art wrong in this matter, and thy men +have been wrong also in their conduct. I'll tell thee how thou shalt take +this ship, without making use of those things called guns." "How can that +be, William?" said I. "Why," said he, "thou mayest take her with thy helm; +thou seest they keep no steerage, and thou seest the condition they are in; +board her with thy ship upon her lee quarter, and so enter her from the +ship. I am persuaded thou wilt take her without fighting, for there is some +mischief has befallen the ship, which we know nothing of." + +In a word, it being a smooth sea, and little wind, I took his advice, and +laid her aboard. Immediately our men entered the ship, where we found a +large ship, with upwards of 600 negroes, men and women, boys and girls, and +not one Christian or white man on board. + +I was struck with horror at the sight; for immediately I concluded, as was +partly the case, that these black devils had got loose, had murdered all +the white men, and thrown them into the sea; and I had no sooner told my +mind to the men, but the thought so enraged them that I had much ado to +keep my men from cutting them all in pieces. But William, with many +persuasions, prevailed upon them, by telling them that it was nothing but +what, if they were in the negroes' condition, they would do if they could; +and that the negroes had really the highest injustice done them, to be sold +for slaves without their consent; and that the law of nature dictated it to +them; that they ought not to kill them, and that it would be wilful murder +to do it. + +This prevailed with them, and cooled their first heat; so they only knocked +down twenty or thirty of them, and the rest ran all down between decks to +their first places, believing, as we fancied, that we were their first +masters come again. + +It was a most unaccountable difficulty we had next; for we could not make +them understand one word we said, nor could we understand one word +ourselves that they said. We endeavoured by signs to ask them whence they +came; but they could make nothing of it. We pointed to the great cabin, to +the round-house, to the cook-room, then to our faces, to ask if they had no +white men on board, and where they were gone; but they could not understand +what we meant. On the other hand, they pointed to our boat and to their +ship, asking questions as well as they could, and said a thousand things, +and expressed themselves with great earnestness; but we could not +understand a word of it all, or know what they meant by any of their signs. + +We knew very well they must have been taken on board the ship as slaves, +and that it must be by some European people too. We could easily see that +the ship was a Dutch-built ship, but very much altered, having been built +upon, and, as we supposed, in France; for we found two or three French +books on board, and afterwards we found clothes, linen, lace, some old +shoes, and several other things. We found among the provisions some barrels +of Irish beef, some Newfoundland fish, and several other evidences that +there had been Christians on board, but saw no remains of them. We found +not a sword, gun, pistol, or weapon of any kind, except some cutlasses; and +the negroes had hid them below where they lay. We asked them what was +become of all the small-arms, pointing to our own and to the places where +those belonging to the ship had hung. One of the negroes understood me +presently, and beckoned to me to come upon the deck, where, taking my +fuzee, which I never let go out of my hand for some time after we had +mastered the ship--I say, offering to take hold of it, he made the proper +motion of throwing it into the sea; by which I understood, as I did +afterwards, that they had thrown all the small-arms, powder, shot, swords, +&c., into the sea, believing, as I supposed, those things would kill them, +though the men were gone. + +After we understood this we made no question but that the ship's crew, +having been surprised by these desperate rogues, had gone the same way, and +had been thrown overboard also. We looked all over the ship to see if we +could find any blood, and we thought we did perceive some in several +places; but the heat of the sun, melting the pitch and tar upon the decks, +made it impossible for us to discern it exactly, except in the round-house, +where we plainly saw that there had been much blood. We found the scuttle +open, by which we supposed that the captain and those that were with him +had made their retreat into the great cabin, or those in the cabin had made +their escape up into the round-house. + +But that which confirmed us most of all in what had happened was that, upon +further inquiry, we found that there were seven or eight of the negroes +very much wounded, two or three of them with shot, whereof one had his leg +broken and lay in a miserable condition, the flesh being mortified, and, as +our friend William said, in two days more he would have died. William was a +most dexterous surgeon, and he showed it in this cure; for though all the +surgeons we had on board both our ships (and we had no less than five that +called themselves bred surgeons, besides two or three who were pretenders +or assistants)--though all these gave their opinions that the negro's leg +must be cut off, and that his life could not be saved without it; that the +mortification had touched the marrow in the bone, that the tendons were +mortified, and that he could never have the use of his leg if it should be +cured, William said nothing in general, but that his opinion was otherwise, +and that he desired the wound might be searched, and that he would then +tell them further. Accordingly he went to work with the leg; and, as he +desired that he might have some of the surgeons to assist him, we appointed +him two of the ablest of them to help, and all of them to look on, if they +thought fit. + +William went to work his own way, and some of them pretended to find fault +at first. However, he proceeded and searched every part of the leg where he +suspected the mortification had touched it; in a word, he cut off a great +deal of mortified flesh, in all which the poor fellow felt no pain. William +proceeded till he brought the vessels which he had cut to bleed, and the +man to cry out; then he reduced the splinters of the bone, and, calling for +help, set it, as we call it, and bound it up, and laid the man to rest, who +found himself much easier than before. + +At the first opening the surgeons began to triumph; the mortification +seemed to spread, and a long red streak of blood appeared from the wound +upwards to the middle of the man's thigh, and the surgeons told me the man +would die in a few hours. I went to look at it, and found William himself +under some surprise; but when I asked him how long he thought the poor +fellow could live, he looked gravely at me, and said, "As long as thou +canst; I am not at all apprehensive of his life," said he, "but I would +cure him, if I could, without making a cripple of him." I found he was not +just then upon the operation as to his leg, but was mixing up something to +give the poor creature, to repel, as I thought, the spreading contagion, +and to abate or prevent any feverish temper that might happen in the blood; +after which he went to work again, and opened the leg in two places above +the wound, cutting out a great deal of mortified flesh, which it seemed was +occasioned by the bandage, which had pressed the parts too much; and +withal, the blood being at the time in a more than common disposition to +mortify, might assist to spread it. + +Well, our friend William conquered all this, cleared the spreading +mortification, and the red streak went off again, the flesh began to heal, +and matter to run; and in a few days the man's spirits began to recover, +his pulse beat regular, he had no fever, and gathered strength daily; and, +in a word, he was a perfect sound man in about ten weeks, and we kept him +amongst us, and made him an able seaman. But to return to the ship: we +never could come at a certain information about it, till some of the +negroes which we kept on board, and whom we taught to speak English, gave +the account of it afterwards, and this maimed man in particular. + +We inquired, by all the signs and motions we could imagine, what was become +of the people, and yet we could get nothing from them. Our lieutenant was +for torturing some of them to make them confess, but William opposed that +vehemently; and when he heard it was under consideration he came to me. +"Friend," says he, "I make a request to thee not to put any of these poor +wretches to torment." "Why, William," said I, "why not? You see they will +not give any account of what is become of the white men." "Nay," says +William, "do not say so; I suppose they have given thee a full account of +every particular of it." "How so?" says I; "pray what are we the wiser for +all their jabbering?" "Nay," says William, "that may be thy fault, for +aught I know; thou wilt not punish the poor men because they cannot speak +English; and perhaps they never heard a word of English before. Now, I may +very well suppose that they have given thee a large account of everything; +for thou seest with what earnestness, and how long, some of them have +talked to thee; and if thou canst not understand their language, nor they +thine, how can they help that? At the best, thou dost but suppose that they +have not told thee the whole truth of the story; and, on the contrary, I +suppose they have; and how wilt thou decide the question, whether thou art +right or whether I am right? Besides, what can they say to thee when thou +askest them a question upon the torture, and at the same time they do not +understand the question, and thou dost not know whether they say ay or no?" + +It is no compliment to my moderation to say I was convinced by these +reasons; and yet we had all much ado to keep our second lieutenant from +murdering some of them, to make them tell. What if they had told? He did +not understand one word of it; but he would not be persuaded but that the +negroes must needs understand him when he asked them whether the ship had +any boat or no, like ours, and what was become of it. + +But there was no remedy but to wait till we made these people understand +English, and to adjourn the story till that time. The case was thus: where +they were taken on board the ship, that we could never understand, because +they never knew the English names which we give to those coasts, or what +nation they were who belonged to the ship, because they knew not one tongue +from another; but thus far the negro I examined, who was the same whose leg +William had cured, told us, that they did not speak the same language as we +spoke, nor the same our Portuguese spoke; so that in all probability they +must be French or Dutch. + +Then he told us that the white men used them barbarously; that they beat +them unmercifully; that one of the negro men had a wife and two negro +children, one a daughter, about sixteen years old; that a white man abused +the negro man's wife, and afterwards his daughter, which, as he said, made +all the negro men mad; and that the woman's husband was in a great rage; at +which the white man was so provoked that he threatened to kill him; but, in +the night, the negro man, being loose, got a great club, by which he made +us understand he meant a handspike, and that when the same Frenchman (if it +was a Frenchman) came among them again, he began again to abuse the negro +man's wife, at which the negro, taking up the handspike, knocked his brains +out at one blow; and then taking the key from him with which he usually +unlocked the handcuffs which the negroes were fettered with, he set about a +hundred of them at liberty, who, getting up upon the deck by the same +scuttle that the white men came down, and taking the man's cutlass who was +killed, and laying hold of what came next them, they fell upon the men that +were upon the deck, and killed them all, and afterwards those they found +upon the forecastle; that the captain and his other men, who were in the +cabin and the round-house, defended themselves with great courage, and shot +out at the loopholes at them, by which he and several other men were +wounded, and some killed; but that they broke into the round-house after a +long dispute, where they killed two of the white men, but owned that the +two white men killed eleven of their men before they could break in; and +then the rest, having got down the scuttle into the great cabin, wounded +three more of them. + +That, after this, the gunner of the ship having secured himself in the +gun-room, one of his men hauled up the long-boat close under the stern, and +putting into her all the arms and ammunition they could come at, got all +into the boat, and afterwards took in the captain, and those that were with +him, out of the great cabin. When they were all thus embarked, they +resolved to lay the ship aboard again, and try to recover it. That they +boarded the ship in a desperate manner, and killed at first all that stood +in their way; but the negroes being by this time all loose, and having +gotten some arms, though they understood nothing of powder and bullet, or +guns, yet the men could never master them. However, they lay under the +ship's bow, and got out all the men they had left in the cook-room, who had +maintained themselves there, notwithstanding all the negroes could do, and +with their small-arms killed between thirty and forty of the negroes, but +were at last forced to leave them. + +They could give me no account whereabouts this was, whether near the coast +of Africa, or far off, or how long it was before the ship fell into our +hands; only, in general, it was a great while ago, as they called it; and, +by all we could learn, it was within two or three days after they had set +sail from the coast. They told us that they had killed about thirty of the +white men, having knocked them on the head with crows and handspikes, and +such things as they could get; and one strong negro killed three of them +with an iron crow, after he was shot twice through the body; and that he +was afterwards shot through the head by the captain himself at the door of +the round-house, which he had split open with the crow; and this we +supposed was the occasion of the great quantity of blood which we saw at +the round-house door. + +The same negro told us that they threw all the powder and shot they could +find into the sea, and they would have thrown the great guns into the sea +if they could have lifted them. Being asked how they came to have their +sails in such a condition, his answer was, "They no understand; they no +know what the sails do;" that was, they did not so much as know that it was +the sails that made the ship go, or understand what they meant, or what to +do with them. When we asked him whither they were going, he said they did +not know, but believed they should go home to their own country again. I +asked him, in particular, what he thought we were when we first came up +with them? He said they were terribly frighted, believing we were the same +white men that had gone away in their boats, and were come again in a great +ship, with the two boats with them, and expected they would kill them all. + +This was the account we got out of them, after we had taught them to speak +English, and to understand the names and use of the things belonging to the +ship which they had occasion to speak of; and we observed that the fellows +were too innocent to dissemble in their relation, and that they all agreed +in the particulars, and were always in the same story, which confirmed very +much the truth of what they said. + +Having taken this ship, our next difficulty was, what to do with the +negroes. The Portuguese in the Brazils would have bought them all of us, +and been glad of the purchase, if we had not showed ourselves enemies +there, and been known for pirates; but, as it was, we durst not go ashore +anywhere thereabouts, or treat with any of the planters, because we should +raise the whole country upon us; and, if there were any such things as +men-of-war in any of their ports, we should be as sure to be attacked by +them, and by all the force they had by land or sea. + +Nor could we think of any better success if we went northward to our own +plantations. One while we determined to carry them all away to Buenos +Ayres, and sell them there to the Spaniards; but they were really too many +for them to make use of; and to carry them round to the South Seas, which +was the only remedy that was left, was so far that we should be no way able +to subsist them for so long a voyage. + +At last, our old, never-failing friend, William, helped us out again, as he +had often done at a dead lift. His proposal was this, that he should go as +master of the ship, and about twenty men, such as we could best trust, and +attempt to trade privately, upon the coast of Brazil, with the planters, +not at the principal ports, because that would not be admitted. + +We all agreed to this, and appointed to go away ourselves towards the Rio +de la Plata, where we had thought of going before, and to wait for him, not +there, but at Port St Pedro, as the Spaniards call it, lying at the mouth +of the river which they call Rio Grande, and where the Spaniards had a +small fort and a few people, but we believe there was nobody in it. + +Here we took up our station, cruising off and on, to see if we could meet +any ships going to or coming from the Buenos Ayres or the Rio de la Plata; +but we met with nothing worth notice. However, we employed ourselves in +things necessary for our going off to sea; for we filled all our +water-casks, and got some fish for our present use, to spare as much as +possible our ship's stores. + +William, in the meantime, went away to the north, and made the land about +the Cape de St Thomas; and betwixt that and the isles De Tuberon he found +means to trade with the planters for all his negroes, as well the women as +the men, and at a very good price too; for William, who spoke Portuguese +pretty well, told them a fair story enough, that the ship was in scarcity +of provisions, that they were driven a great way out of their way, and +indeed, as we say, out of their knowledge, and that they must go up to the +northward as far as Jamaica, or sell there upon the coast. This was a very +plausible tale, and was easily believed; and, if you observe the manner of +the negroes' sailing, and what happened in their voyage, was every word of +it true. + +By this method, and being true to one another, William passed for what he +was--I mean, for a very honest fellow; and by the assistance of one +planter, who sent to some of his neighbour planters, and managed the trade +among themselves, he got a quick market; for in less than five weeks +William sold all his negroes, and at last sold the ship itself, and shipped +himself and his twenty men, with two negro boys whom he had left, in a +sloop, one of those which the planters used to send on board for the +negroes. With this sloop Captain William, as we then called him, came away, +and found us at Port St Pedro, in the latitude of 32 degrees 30 minutes +south. + +Nothing was more surprising to us than to see a sloop come along the coast, +carrying Portuguese colours, and come in directly to us, after we were +assured he had discovered both our ships. We fired a gun, upon her nearer +approach, to bring her to an anchor, but immediately she fired five guns by +way of salute, and spread her English ancient. Then we began to guess it +was friend William, but wondered what was the meaning of his being in a +sloop, whereas we sent him away in a ship of near 300 tons; but he soon let +us into the whole history of his management, with which we had a great deal +of reason to be very well satisfied. As soon as he had brought the sloop to +an anchor, he came aboard of my ship, and there he gave us an account how +he began to trade by the help of a Portuguese planter, who lived near the +seaside; how he went on shore and went up to the first house he could see, +and asked the man of the house to sell him some hogs, pretending at first +he only stood in upon the coast to take in fresh water and buy some +provisions; and the man not only sold him seven fat hogs, but invited him +in, and gave him, and five men he had with him, a very good dinner; and he +invited the planter on board his ship, and, in return for his kindness, +gave him a negro girl for his wife. + +This so obliged the planter that the next morning he sent him on board, in +a great luggage-boat, a cow and two sheep, with a chest of sweetmeats and +some sugar, and a great bag of tobacco, and invited Captain William on +shore again; that, after this, they grew from one kindness to another; that +they began to talk about trading for some negroes; and William, pretending +it was to do him service, consented to sell him thirty negroes for his +private use in his plantation, for which he gave William ready money in +gold, at the rate of five-and-thirty moidores per head; but the planter was +obliged to use great caution in the bringing them on shore; for which +purpose he made William weigh and stand out to sea, and put in again, about +fifty miles farther north, where at a little creek he took the negroes on +shore at another plantation, being a friend's of his, whom, it seems, he +could trust. + +This remove brought William into a further intimacy, not only with the +first planter, but also with his friends, who desired to have some of the +negroes also; so that, from one to another, they bought so many, till one +overgrown planter took 100 negroes, which was all William had left, and +sharing them with another planter, that other planter chaffered with +William for ship and all, giving him in exchange a very clean, large, +well-built sloop of near sixty tons, very well furnished, carrying six +guns; but we made her afterwards carry twelve guns. William had 300 +moidores of gold, besides the sloop, in payment for the ship; and with this +money he stored the sloop as full as she could hold with provisions, +especially bread, some pork, and about sixty hogs alive; among the rest, +William got eighty barrels of good gunpowder, which was very much for our +purpose; and all the provisions which were in the French ship he took out +also. + +This was a very agreeable account to us, especially when we saw that +William had received in gold coined, or by weight, and some Spanish silver, +60,000 pieces of eight, besides a new sloop, and a vast quantity of +provisions. + +We were very glad of the sloop in particular, and began to consult what we +should do, whether we had not best turn off our great Portuguese ship, and +stick to our first ship and the sloop, seeing we had scarce men enough for +all three, and that the biggest ship was thought too big for our business. +However, another dispute, which was now decided, brought the first to a +conclusion. The first dispute was, whither we should go. My comrade, as I +called him now, that is to say, he that was my captain before we took this +Portuguese man-of-war, was for going to the South Seas, and coasting up the +west side of America, where we could not fail of making several good prizes +upon the Spaniards; and that then, if occasion required it, we might come +home by the South Seas to the East Indies, and so go round the globe, as +others had done before us. + +But my head lay another way. I had been in the East Indies, and had +entertained a notion ever since that, if we went thither, we could not fail +of making good work of it, and that we might have a safe retreat, and good +beef to victual our ship, among my old friends the natives of Zanzibar, on +the coast of Mozambique, or the island of St Lawrence. I say, my thoughts +lay this way; and I read so many lectures to them all of the advantages +they would certainly make of their strength by the prizes they would take +in the Gulf of Mocha, or the Red Sea, and on the coast of Malabar, or the +Bay of Bengal, that I amazed them. + +With these arguments I prevailed on them, and we all resolved to steer away +S.E. for the Cape of Good Hope; and, in consequence of this resolution, we +concluded to keep the sloop, and sail with all three, not doubting, as I +assured them, but we should find men there to make up the number wanting, +and if not, we might cast any of them off when we pleased. + +We could do no less than make our friend William captain of the sloop +which, with such good management, he had brought us. He told us, though +with much good manners, he would not command her as a frigate; but, if we +would give her to him for his share of the Guinea ship, which we came very +honestly by, he would keep us company as a victualler, if we commanded him, +as long as he was under the same force that took him away. + +We understood him, so gave him the sloop, but upon condition that he should +not go from us, and should be entirely under our command. However, William +was not so easy as before; and, indeed, as we afterwards wanted the sloop +to cruise for purchase, and a right thorough-paced pirate in her, so I was +in such pain for William that I could not be without him, for he was my +privy counsellor and companion upon all occasions; so I put a Scotsman, a +bold, enterprising, gallant fellow, into her, named Gordon, and made her +carry twelve guns and four petereroes, though, indeed, we wanted men, for +we were none of us manned in proportion to our force. + +We sailed away for the Cape of Good Hope the beginning of October 1706, and +passed by, in sight of the Cape, the 12th of November following, having met +with a great deal of bad weather. We saw several merchant-ships in the +roads there, as well English as Dutch, whether outward bound or homeward we +could not tell; be it what it would, we did not think fit to come to an +anchor, not knowing what they might be, or what they might attempt against +us, when they knew what we were. However, as we wanted fresh water, we sent +the two boats belonging to the Portuguese man-of-war, with all Portuguese +seamen or negroes in them, to the watering-place, to take in water; and in +the meantime we hung out a Portuguese ancient at sea, and lay by all that +night. They knew not what we were, but it seems we passed for anything but +really what we was. + +Our boats returning the third time loaden, about five o'clock next morning, +we thought ourselves sufficiently watered, and stood away to the eastward; +but, before our men returned the last time, the wind blowing an easy gale +at west, we perceived a boat in the grey of the morning under sail, +crowding to come up with us, as if they were afraid we should be gone. We +soon found it was an English long-boat, and that it was pretty full of men. +We could not imagine what the meaning of it should be; but, as it was but a +boat, we thought there could be no great harm in it to let them come on +board; and if it appeared they came only to inquire who we were, we would +give them a full account of our business, by taking them along with us, +seeing we wanted men as much as anything. But they saved us the labour of +being in doubt how to dispose of them; for it seems our Portuguese seamen, +who went for water, had not been so silent at the watering-places as we +thought they would have been. But the case, in short, was this: Captain +---- (I forbear his name at present, for a particular reason), captain of +an East India merchant-ship, bound afterwards for China, had found some +reason to be very severe with his men, and had handled some of them very +roughly at St Helena; insomuch, that they threatened among themselves to +leave the ship the first opportunity, and had long wished for that +opportunity. Some of these men, it seems, had met with our boat at the +watering-place, and inquiring of one another who we were, and upon what +account, whether the Portuguese seamen, by faltering in their account, made +them suspect that we were out upon the cruise, or whether they told it in +plain English or no (for they all spoke English enough to be understood), +but so it was, that as soon as ever the men carried the news on board, that +the ships which lay by to the eastward were English, and that they were +going upon the _account_, which, by they way, was a sea term for a pirate; +I say, as soon as ever they heard it, they went to work, and getting all +things ready in the night, their chests and clothes, and whatever else they +could, they came away before it was day, and came up with us about seven +o'clock. + +When they came by the ship's side which I commanded we hailed them in the +usual manner, to know what and who they were, and what their business. They +answered they were Englishmen, and desired to come on board. We told them +they might lay the ship on board, but ordered they should let only one man +enter the ship till the captain knew their business, and that he should +come without any arms. They said, Ay, with all their hearts. + +We presently found their business, and that they desired to go with us; and +as for their arms, they desired we would send men on board the boat, and +that they would deliver them all to us, which was done. The fellow that +came up to me told me how they had been used by their captain, how he had +starved the men, and used them like dogs, and that, if the rest of the men +knew they should be admitted, he was satisfied two-thirds of them would +leave the ship. We found the fellows were very hearty in their resolution, +and jolly brisk sailors they were; so I told them I would do nothing +without our admiral, that was the captain of the other ship; so I sent my +pinnace on board Captain Wilmot, to desire him to come on board. But he was +indisposed, and being to leeward, excused his coming, but left it all to +me; but before my boat was returned, Captain Wilmot called to me by his +speaking-trumpet, which all the men might hear as well as I; thus, calling +me by my name, "I hear they are honest fellows; pray tell them they are all +welcome, and make them a bowl of punch." + +As the men heard it as well as I, there was no need to tell them what the +captain said; and, as soon as the trumpet had done, they set up a huzza, +that showed us they were very hearty in their coming to us; but we bound +them to us by a stronger obligation still after this, for when we came to +Madagascar, Captain Wilmot, with consent of all the ship's company, ordered +that these men should have as much money given them out of the stock as was +due to them for their pay in the ship they had left; and after that we +allowed them twenty pieces of eight a man bounty money; and thus we entered +them upon shares, as we were all, and brave stout fellows they were, being +eighteen in number, whereof two were midshipmen, and one a carpenter. + +It was the 28th of November, when, having had some bad weather, we came to +an anchor in the road off St Augustine Bay, at the south-west end of my old +acquaintance the isle of Madagascar. We lay here awhile and trafficked with +the natives for some good beef; though the weather was so hot that we could +not promise ourselves to salt any of it up to keep; but I showed them the +way which we practised before, to salt it first with saltpetre, then cure +it by drying it in the sun, which made it eat very agreeably, though not so +wholesome for our men, that not agreeing with our way of cooking, viz., +boiling with pudding, brewis, &c., and particularly this way, would be too +salt, and the fat of the meat be rusty, or dried away so as not to be +eaten. + +This, however, we could not help, and made ourselves amends by feeding +heartily on the fresh beef while we were there, which was excellent, good +and fat, every way as tender and as well relished as in England, and +thought to be much better to us who had not tasted any in England for so +long a time. + +Having now for some time remained here, we began to consider that this was +not a place for our business; and I, that had some views a particular way +of my own, told them that this was not a station for those who looked for +purchase; that there were two parts of the island which were particularly +proper for our purposes; first, the bay on the east side of the island, and +from thence to the island Mauritius, which was the usual way which ships +that came from the Malabar coast, or the coast of Coromandel, Fort St +George, &c., used to take, and where, if we waited for them, we ought to +take our station. + +But, on the other hand, as we did not resolve to fall upon the European +traders, who were generally ships of force and well manned, and where blows +must be looked for; so I had another prospect, which I promised myself +would yield equal profit, or perhaps greater, without any of the hazard and +difficulty of the former; and this was the Gulf of Mocha, or the Red Sea. + +I told them that the trade here was great, the ships rich, and the Strait +of Babelmandel narrow; so that there was no doubt but we might cruise so as +to let nothing slip our hands, having the seas open from the Red Sea, along +the coast of Arabia, to the Persian Gulf, and the Malabar side of the +Indies. + +I told them what I had observed when I sailed round the island in my former +progress; how that, on the northernmost point of the island, there were +several very good harbours and roads for our ships; that the natives were +even more civil and tractable, if possible, than those where we were, not +having been so often ill-treated by European sailors as those had in the +south and east sides; and that we might always be sure of a retreat, if we +were driven to put in by any necessity, either of enemies or weather. + +They were easily convinced of the reasonableness of my scheme; and Captain +Wilmot, whom I now called our admiral, though he was at first of the mind +to go and lie at the island Mauritius, and wait for some of the European +merchant-ships from the road of Coromandel, or the Bay of Bengal, was now +of my mind. It is true we were strong enough to have attacked an English +East India ship of the greatest force, though some of them were said to +carry fifty guns; but I represented to him that we were sure to have blows +and blood if we took them; and, after we had done, their loading was not of +equal value to us, because we had no room to dispose of their merchandise; +and, as our circumstances stood, we had rather have taken one outward-bound +East India ship, with her ready cash on board, perhaps to the value of +forty or fifty thousand pounds, than three homeward-bound, though their +loading would at London be worth three times the money, because we knew not +whither to go to dispose of the cargo; whereas the ships from London had +abundance of things we knew how to make use of besides their money, such as +their stores of provisions and liquors, and great quantities of the like +sent to the governors and factories at the English settlements for their +use; so that, if we resolved to look for our own country ships, it should +be those that were outward-bound, not the London ships homeward. + +All these things considered, brought the admiral to be of my mind entirely; +so, after taking in water and some fresh provisions where we lay, which was +near Cape St Mary, on the south-west corner of the island, we weighed and +stood away south, and afterwards S.S.E., to round the island, and in about +six days' sail got out of the wake of the island, and steered away north, +till we came off Port Dauphin, and then north by east, to the latitude of +13 degrees 40 minutes, which was, in short, just at the farthest part of +the island; and the admiral, keeping ahead, made the open sea fair to the +west, clear of the whole island; upon which he brought to, and we sent a +sloop to stand in round the farthest point north, and coast along the +shore, and see for a harbour to put into, which they did, and soon brought +us an account that there was a deep bay, with a very good road, and several +little islands, under which they found good riding, in ten to seventeen +fathom water, and accordingly there we put in. + +However, we afterwards found occasion to remove our station, as you shall +hear presently. We had now nothing to do but go on shore, and acquaint +ourselves a little with the natives, take in fresh water and some fresh +provisions, and then to sea again. We found the people very easy to deal +with, and some cattle they had; but it being at the extremity of the +island, they had not such quantities of cattle here. However, for the +present we resolved to appoint this for our place of rendezvous, and go and +look out. This was about the latter end of April. + +Accordingly we put to sea, and cruised away to the northward, for the +Arabian coast. It was a long run, but as the winds generally blow trade +from the S. and S.S.E. from May to September, we had good weather; and in +about twenty days we made the island of Socotra, lying south from the +Arabian coast, and E.S.E. from the mouth of the Gulf of Mocha, or the Red +Sea. + +Here we took in water, and stood off and on upon the Arabian shore. We had +not cruised here above three days, or thereabouts, but I spied a sail, and +gave her chase; but when we came up with her, never was such a poor prize +chased by pirates that looked for booty, for we found nothing in her but +poor, half-naked Turks, going a pilgrimage to Mecca, to the tomb of their +prophet Mahomet. The junk that carried them had no one thing worth taking +away but a little rice and some coffee, which was all the poor wretches had +for their subsistence; so we let them go, for indeed we knew not what to do +with them. + +The same evening we chased another junk with two masts, and in something +better plight to look at than the former. When we came on board we found +them upon the same errand, but only that they were people of some better +fashion than the other; and here we got some plunder, some Turkish stores, +a few diamonds in the ear-drops of five or six persons, some fine Persian +carpets, of which they made their saffras to lie upon, and some money; so +we let them go also. + +We continued here eleven days longer, and saw nothing but now and then a +fishing-boat; but the twelfth day of our cruise we spied a ship: indeed I +thought at first it had been an English ship, but it appeared to be an +European freighted for a voyage from Goa, on the coast of Malabar, to the +Red Sea, and was very rich. We chased her, and took her without any fight, +though they had some guns on board too, but not many. We found her manned +with Portuguese seamen, but under the direction of five merchant Turks, who +had hired her on the coast of Malabar of some Portugal merchants, and had +laden her with pepper, saltpetre, some spices, and the rest of the loading +was chiefly calicoes and wrought silks, some of them very rich. + +We took her and carried her to Socotra; but we really knew not what to do +with her, for the same reasons as before; for all their goods were of +little or no value to us. After some days we found means to let one of the +Turkish merchants know, that if he would ransom the ship we would take a +sum of money and let them go. He told me that if I would let one of them go +on shore for the money they would do it; so we adjusted the value of the +cargo at 30,000 ducats. Upon this agreement, we allowed the sloop to carry +him on shore, at Dofar, in Arabia, where a rich merchant laid down the +money for them, and came off with our sloop; and on payment of the money we +very fairly and honestly let them go. + +Some days after this we took an Arabian junk, going from the Gulf of Persia +to Mocha, with a good quantity of pearl on board. We gutted him of the +pearl, which it seems was belonging to some merchants at Mocha, and let him +go, for there was nothing else worth our taking. + +We continued cruising up and down here till we began to find our provisions +grow low, when Captain Wilmot, our admiral, told us it was time to think of +going back to the rendezvous; and the rest of the men said the same, being +a little weary of beating about for above three months together, and +meeting with little or nothing compared to our great expectations; but I +was very loth to part with the Red Sea at so cheap a rate, and pressed them +to tarry a little longer, which at my instance they did; but three days +afterwards, to our great misfortune, understood that, by landing the +Turkish merchants at Dofar, we had alarmed the coast as far as the Gulf of +Persia, so that no vessel would stir that way, and consequently nothing was +to be expected on that side. + +I was greatly mortified at this news, and could no longer withstand the +importunities of the men to return to Madagascar. However, as the wind +continued still to blow at S.S.E. by S., we were obliged to stand away +towards the coast of Africa and the Cape Guardafui, the winds being more +variable under the shore than in the open sea. + +Here we chopped upon a booty which we did not look for, and which made +amends for all our waiting; for the very same hour that we made land we +spied a large vessel sailing along the shore to the southward. The ship was +of Bengal, belonging to the Great Mogul's country, but had on board a Dutch +pilot, whose name, if I remember right, was Vandergest, and several +European seamen, whereof three were English. She was in no condition to +resist us. The rest of her seamen were Indians of the Mogul's subjects, +some Malabars and some others. There were five Indian merchants on board, +and some Armenians. It seems they had been at Mocha with spices, silks, +diamonds, pearls, calico, &c., such goods as the country afforded, and had +little on board now but money in pieces of eight, which, by the way, was +just what we wanted; and the three English seamen came along with us, and +the Dutch pilot would have done so too, but the two Armenian merchants +entreated us not to take him, for that he being their pilot, there was none +of the men knew how to guide the ship; so, at their request, we refused +him; but we made them promise he should not be used ill for being willing +to go with us. + +We got near 200,000 pieces of eight in this vessel; and, if they said true, +there was a Jew of Goa, who intended to have embarked with them, who had +200,000 pieces of eight with him, all his own; but his good fortune, +springing out of his ill fortune, hindered him, or he fell sick at Mocha, +and could not be ready to travel, which was the saving of his money. + +There was none with me at the taking this prize but the sloop, for Captain +Wilmot's ship proving leaky, he went away for the rendezvous before us, and +arrived there the middle of December; but not liking the port, he left a +great cross on shore, with directions written on a plate of lead fixed to +it, for us to come after him to the great bays at Mangahelly, where he +found a very good harbour; but we learned a piece of news here that kept us +from him a great while, which the admiral took offence at; but we stopped +his mouth with his share of 200,000 pieces of eight to him and his ship's +crew. But the story which interrupted our coming to him was this. Between +Mangahelly and another point, called Cape St Sebastian, there came on shore +in the night an European ship, and whether by stress of weather or want of +a pilot I know not, but the ship stranded and could not be got off. + +We lay in the cove or harbour, where, as I have said, our rendezvous was +appointed, and had not yet been on shore, so we had not seen the directions +our admiral had left for us. + +Our friend William, of whom I have said nothing a great while, had a great +mind one day to go on shore, and importuned me to let him have a little +troop to go with him, for safety, that they might see the country. I was +mightily against it for many reasons; but particularly I told him he knew +the natives were but savages, and they were very treacherous, and I desired +him that he would not go; and, had he gone on much farther, I believe I +should have downright refused him, and commanded him not to go. + +But, in order to persuade me to let him go, he told me he would give me an +account of the reason why he was so importunate. He told me, the last night +he had a dream, which was so forcible, and made such an impression upon his +mind, that he could not be quiet till he had made the proposal to me to go; +and if I refused him, then he thought his dream was significant; and if +not, then his dream was at an end. + +His dream was, he said, that he went on shore with thirty men, of which the +cockswain, he said, was one, upon the island; and that they found a mine of +gold, and enriched them all. But this was not the main thing, he said, but +that the same morning he had dreamed so, the cockswain came to him just +then, and told him that he dreamed he went on shore on the island of +Madagascar, and that some men came to him and told him they would show him +where he should get a prize which would make them all rich. + +These two things put together began to weigh with me a little, though I was +never inclined to give any heed to dreams; but William's importunity turned +me effectually, for I always put a great deal of stress upon his judgment; +so that, in short, I gave them leave to go, but I charged them not to go +far off from the sea-coast; that, if they were forced down to the seaside +upon any occasion, we might perhaps see them, and fetch them off with our +boats. + +They went away early in the morning, one-and-thirty men of them in number, +very well armed, and very stout fellows; they travelled all the day, and at +night made us a signal that all was well, from the top of a hill, which we +had agreed on, by making a great fire. + +Next day they marched down the hill on the other side, inclining towards +the seaside, as they had promised, and saw a very pleasant valley before +them, with a river in the middle of it, which, a little farther below them, +seemed to be big enough to bear small ships; they marched apace towards +this river, and were surprised with the noise of a piece going off, which, +by the sound, could not be far off. They listened long, but could hear no +more; so they went on to the river-side, which was a very fine fresh +stream, but widened apace, and they kept on by the banks of it, till, +almost at once, it opened or widened into a good large creek or harbour, +about five miles from the sea; and that which was still more surprising, as +they marched forward, they plainly saw in the mouth of the harbour, or +creek, the wreck of a ship. + +The tide was up, as we call it, so that it did net appear very much above +the water, but, as they made downwards, they found it grow bigger and +bigger; and the tide soon after ebbing out, they found it lay dry upon the +sands, and appeared to be the wreck of a considerable vessel, larger than +could be expected in that country. + +After some time, William, taking out his glass to look at it more nearly, +was surprised with hearing a musket-shot whistle by him, and immediately +after that he heard the gun, and saw the smoke from the other side; upon +which our men immediately fired three muskets, to discover, if possible, +what or who they were. Upon the noise of these guns, abundance of men came +running down to the shore from among the trees; and our men could easily +perceive that they were Europeans, though they knew not of what nation; +however, our men hallooed to them as loud as they could, and by-and-by they +got a long pole, and set it up, and hung a white shirt upon it for a flag +of truce. They on the other side saw it, by the help of their glasses, too, +and quickly after our men see a boat launch off from the shore, as they +thought, but it was from another creek, it seems; and immediately they came +rowing over the creek to our men, carrying also a white flag as a token of +truce. + +It is not easy to describe the surprise, or joy and satisfaction, that +appeared on both sides, to see not only white men, but Englishmen, in a +place so remote; but what then must it be when they came to know one +another, and to find that they were not only countrymen but comrades, and +that this was the very ship that Captain Wilmot, our admiral, commanded, +and whose company we had lost in the storm at Tobago, after making an +agreement to rendezvous at Madagascar! + +They had, it seems, got intelligence of us when they came to the south part +of the island, and had been a-roving as far as the Gulf of Bengal, when +they met Captain Avery, with whom they joined, took several rich prizes, +and, amongst the rest, one ship with the Great Mogul's daughter, and an +immense treasure in money and jewels; and from thence they came about the +coast of Coromandel, and afterwards that of Malabar, into the Gulf of +Persia, where they also took some prize, and then designed for the south +part of Madagascar; but the winds blowing hard at S.E. and S.E. by E., they +came to the northward of the isle, and being after that separated by a +furious tempest from the N.W., they were forced into the mouth of that +creek, where they lost their ship. And they told us, also, that they heard +that Captain Avery himself had lost his ship also not far off. + +When they had thus acquainted one another with their fortunes, the poor +overjoyed men were in haste to go back to communicate their joy to their +comrades; and, leaving some of their men with ours, the rest went back, and +William was so earnest to see them that he and two more went back with +them, and there he came to their little camp where they lived. There were +about a hundred and sixty men of them in all; they had got their guns on +shore, and some ammunition, but a good deal of their powder was spoiled; +however, they had raised a fair platform, and mounted twelve pieces of +cannon upon it, which was a sufficient defence to them on that side of the +sea; and just at the end of the platform they had made a launch and a +little yard, and were all hard at work, building another little ship, as I +may call it, to go to sea in; but they put a stop to this work upon the +news they had of our being come in. + +When our men went into their huts, it was surprising, indeed, to see the +vast stock of wealth they had got, in gold and silver and jewels, which, +however, they told us was a trifle to what Captain Avery had, wherever he +was gone. + +It was five days we had waited for our men, and no news of them; and indeed +I gave them over for lost, but was surprised, after five days' waiting, to +see a ship's boat come rowing towards us along shore. What to make of it I +could not tell, but was at least better satisfied when our men told me they +heard them halloo and saw them wave their caps to us. + +In a little time they came quite up to us; and I saw friend William stand +up in the boat and make signs to us; so they came on board; but when I saw +there were but fifteen of our one-and-thirty men, I asked him what had +become of their fellows. "Oh," says William, "they are all very well; and +my dream is fully made good, and the cockswain's too." + +This made me very impatient to know how the case stood; so he told us the +whole story, which indeed surprised us all. The next day we weighed, and +stood away southerly to join Captain Wilmot and ship at Mangahelly, where +we found him, as I said, a little chagrined at our stay; but we pacified +him afterwards with telling him the history of William's dream, and the +consequence of it. + +In the meantime the camp of our comrades was so near Mangahelly, that our +admiral and I, friend William, and some of the men, resolved to take the +sloop and go and see them, and fetch them all, and their goods, bag and +baggage, on board our ship, which accordingly we did, and found their camp, +their fortifications, the battery of guns they had erected, their treasure, +and all the men, just as William had related it; so, after some stay, we +took all the men into the sloop, and brought them away with us. + +It was some time before we knew what was become of Captain Avery; but after +about a month, by the direction of the men who had lost their ship, we sent +the sloop to cruise along the shore, to find out, if possible, where they +were; and in about a week's cruise our men found them, and particularly +that they had lost their ship, as well as our men had lost theirs, and that +they were every way in as bad a condition as ours. + +It was about ten days before the sloop returned, and Captain Avery with +them; and this was the whole force that, as I remember, Captain Avery ever +had with him; for now we joined all our companies together, and it stood +thus:--We had two ships and a sloop, in which we had 320 men, but much too +few to man them as they ought to be, the great Portuguese ship requiring of +herself near 400 men to man her completely. As for our lost, but now found +comrade, her complement of men was 180, or thereabouts; and Captain Avery +had about 300 men with him, whereof he had ten carpenters with him, most of +which were taken aboard the prize they had taken; so that, in a word, all +the force Avery had at Madagascar, in the year 1699, or thereabouts, +amounted to our three ships, for his own was lost, as you have heard; and +never had any more than about 1200 men in all. + +It was about a month after this that all our crews got together, and as +Avery was unshipped, we all agreed to bring our own company into the +Portuguese man-of-war and the sloop, and give Captain Avery the Spanish +frigate, with all the tackles and furniture, guns and ammunition, for his +crew by themselves; for which they, being full of wealth, agreed to give us +40,000 pieces of eight. + +It was next considered what course we should take. Captain Avery, to give +him his due, proposed our building a little city here, establishing +ourselves on shore, with a good fortification and works proper to defend +ourselves; and that, as we had wealth enough, and could increase it to what +degree we pleased, we should content ourselves to retire here, and bid +defiance to the world. But I soon convinced him that this place would be no +security to us, if we pretended to carry on our cruising trade; for that +then all the nations of Europe, and indeed of that part of the world, would +be engaged to root us out; but if we resolved to live there as in +retirement, and plant in the country as private men, and give over our +trade of pirating, then, indeed, we might plant and settle ourselves where +we pleased. But then, I told him, the best way would be to treat with the +natives, and buy a tract of land of them farther up the country, seated +upon some navigable river, where boats might go up and down for pleasure, +but not ships to endanger us; that thus planting the high ground with +cattle, such as cows and goats, of which the country also was full, to be +sure we might live here as well as any men in the world; and I owned to him +I thought it was a good retreat for those that were willing to leave off +and lay down, and yet did not care to venture home and be hanged; that is +to say, to run the risk of it. + +Captain Avery, however he made no positive discovery of his intentions, +seemed to me to decline my notion of going up into the country to plant; on +the contrary, it was apparent he was of Captain Wilmot's opinion, that they +might maintain themselves on shore, and yet carry on their cruising trade +too; and upon this they resolved. But, as I afterwards understood, about +fifty of their men went up the country, and settled themselves in an inland +place as a colony. Whether they are there still or not, I cannot tell, or +how many of them are left alive; but it is my opinion they are there still, +and that they are considerably increased, for, as I hear, they have got +some women among them, though not many; for it seems five Dutch women and +three or four little girls were taken by them in a Dutch ship, which they +afterwards took going to Mocha; and three of those women, marrying some of +these men, went with them to live in their new plantation. But of this I +speak only by hearsay. + +As we lay here some time, I found our people mightily divided in their +notions; some were for going this way, and some that, till at last I began +to foresee they would part company, and perhaps we should not have men +enough to keep together to man the great ship; so I took Captain Wilmot +aside, and began to talk to him about it, but soon perceived that he +inclined himself to stay at Madagascar, and having got a vast wealth for +his own share, had secret designs of getting home some way or other. + +I argued the impossibility of it, and the hazard he would run, either of +falling into the hands of thieves and murderers in the Red Sea, who would +never let such a treasure as his pass their hands, or of his falling into +the hands of the English, Dutch, or French, who would certainly hang him +for a pirate. I gave him an account of the voyage I had made from this very +place to the continent of Africa, and what a journey it was to travel on +foot. + +In short, nothing could persuade him, but he would go into the Red Sea with +the sloop, and where the children of Israel passed through the sea +dry-shod, and, landing there, would travel to Grand Cairo by land, which is +not above eighty miles, and from thence he said he could ship himself, by +the way of Alexandria, to any part of the world. + +I represented the hazard, and indeed the impossibility, of his passing by +Mocha and Jiddah without being attacked, if he offered it by force, or +plundered, if he went to get leave; and explained the reasons of it so much +and so effectually, that, though at last he would not hearken to it +himself, none of his men would go with him. They told him they would go +anywhere with him to serve him, but that this was running himself and them +into certain destruction, without any possibility of avoiding it, or +probability of answering his end. The captain took what I said to him quite +wrong, and pretended to resent it, and gave me some buccaneer words upon +it; but I gave him no return to it but this: that I advised him for his +advantage; that if he did not understand it so, it was his fault, not mine; +that I did not forbid him to go, nor had I offered to persuade any of the +men not to go with him, though it was to their apparent destruction. + +However, warm heads are not easily cooled. The captain was so eager that he +quitted our company, and, with most part of his crew, went over to Captain +Avery, and sorted with his people, taking all the treasure with him, which, +by the way, was not very fair in him, we having agreed to share all our +gains, whether more or less, whether absent or present. + +Our men muttered a little at it, but I pacified them as well as I could, +and told them it was easy for us to get as much, if we minded our hits; and +Captain Wilmot had set us a very good example; for, by the same rule, the +agreement of any further sharing of profits with them was at an end. I took +this occasion to put into their heads some part of my further designs, +which were, to range over the eastern sea, and see if we could not make +ourselves as rich as Mr Avery, who, it was true, had gotten a prodigious +deal of money, though not one-half of what was said of it in Europe. + +Our men were so pleased with my forward, enterprising temper, that they +assured me that they would go with me, one and all, over the whole globe, +wherever I would carry them; and as for Captain Wilmot, they would have +nothing more to do with him. This came to his ears, and put him into a +great rage, so that he threatened, if I came on shore, he would cut my +throat. + +I had information of it privately, but took no notice of it at all; only I +took care not to go unprovided for him, and seldom walked about but in very +good company. However, at last Captain Wilmot and I met, and talked over +the matter very seriously, and I offered him the sloop to go where he +pleased, or, if he was not satisfied with that, I offered to take the sloop +and leave him the great ship; but he declined both, and only desired that I +would leave him six carpenters, which I had in our ship more than I had +need of, to help his men to finish the sloop that was begun before we came +thither, by the men that lost their ship. This I consented readily to, and +lent him several other hands that were useful to them; and in a little time +they built a stout brigantine, able to carry fourteen guns and 200 men. + +What measures they took, and how Captain Avery managed afterwards, is too +long a story to meddle with here; nor is it any of my business, having my +own story still upon my hands. + +We lay here, about these several simple disputes, almost five months, when, +about the latter end of March, I set sail with the great ship, having in +her forty-four guns and 400 men, and the sloop, carrying eighty men. We did +not steer to the Malabar coast, and so to the Gulf of Persia, as was first +intended, the east monsoons blowing yet too strong, but we kept more under +the African coast, where we had the wind variable till we passed the line, +and made the Cape Bassa, in the latitude of four degrees ten minutes; from +thence, the monsoons beginning to change to the N.E. and N.N.E., we led it +away, with the wind large, to the Maldives, a famous ledge of islands, well +known by all the sailors who have gone into those parts of the world; and, +leaving these islands a little to the south, we made Cape Comorin, the +southernmost land of the coast of Malabar, and went round the isle of +Ceylon. Here we lay by a while to wait for purchase; and here we saw three +large English East India ships going from Bengal, or from Fort St George, +homeward for England, or rather for Bombay and Surat, till the trade set +in. + +We brought to, and hoisting an English ancient and pendant, lay by for +them, as if we intended to attack them. They could not tell what to make of +us a good while, though they saw our colours; and I believe at first they +thought us to be French; but as they came nearer to us, we let them soon +see what we were, for we hoisted a black flag, with two cross daggers in +it, on our main-top-mast head, which let them see what they were to expect. + +We soon found the effects of this; for at first they spread their ancients, +and made up to us in a line, as if they would fight us, having the wind off +shore, fair enough to have brought them on board us; but when they saw what +force we were of, and found we were cruisers of another kind, they stood +away from us again, with all the sail they could make. If they had come up, +we should have given them an unexpected welcome, but as it was, we had no +mind to follow them; so we let them go, for the same reasons which I +mentioned before. + +But though we let them pass, we did not design to let others go at so easy +a price. It was but the next morning that we saw a sail standing round Cape +Comorin, and steering, as we thought, the same course with us. We knew not +at first what to do with her, because she had the shore on her larboard +quarter, and if we offered to chase her, she might put into any port or +creek, and escape us; but, to prevent this, we sent the sloop to get in +between her and the land. As soon as she saw that, she hauled in to keep +the land aboard, and when the sloop stood towards her she made right +ashore, with all the canvas she could spread. + +The sloop, however, came up with her and engaged her, and found she was a +vessel of ten guns, Portuguese built, but in the Dutch traders' hands, and +manned by Dutchmen, who were bound from the Gulf of Persia to Batavia, to +fetch spices and other goods from thence. The sloop's men took her, and had +the rummaging of her before we came up. She had in her some European goods, +and a good round sum of money, and some pearl; so that, though we did not +go to the gulf for the pearl, the pearl came to us out of the gulf, and we +had our share of it. This was a rich ship, and the goods were of very +considerable value, besides the money and the pearl. + +We had a long consultation here what we should do with the men, for to give +them the ship, and let them pursue their voyage to Java, would be to alarm +the Dutch factory there, who are by far the strongest in the Indies, and to +make our passage that way impracticable; whereas we resolved to visit that +part of the world in our way, but were not willing to pass the great Bay of +Bengal, where we hoped for a great deal of purchase; and therefore it +behoved us not to be waylaid before we came there, because they knew we +must pass by the Straits of Malacca, or those of Sunda; and either way it +was very easy to prevent us. + +While we were consulting this in the great cabin, the men had had the same +debate before the mast; and it seems the majority there were for pickling +up the poor Dutchmen among the herrings; in a word, they were for throwing +them all into the sea. Poor William, the Quaker, was in great concern about +this, and comes directly to me to talk about it. "Hark thee," says William, +"what wilt thou do with these Dutchmen that thou hast on board? Thou wilt +not let them go, I suppose," says he. "Why," says I, "William, would you +advise me to let them go?" "No," says William, "I cannot say it is fit for +thee to let them go; that is to say, to go on with their voyage to Batavia, +because it is not for thy turn that the Dutch at Batavia should have any +knowledge of thy being in these seas." "Well, then," says I to him, "I know +no remedy but to throw them overboard. You know, William," says I, "a +Dutchman swims like a fish; and all our people here are of the same opinion +as well as I." At the same time I resolved it should not be done, but +wanted to hear what William would say. He gravely replied, "If all the men +in the ship were of that mind, I will never believe that thou wilt be of +that mind thyself, for I have heard thee protest against cruelty in all +other cases." "Well, William," says I, "that is true; but what then shall +we do with them?" "Why," says William, "is there no way but to murder them? +I am persuaded thou canst not be in earnest." "No, indeed, William," says +I, "I am not in earnest; but they shall not go to Java, no, nor to Ceylon, +that is certain." "But," says William, "the men have done thee no injury at +all; thou hast taken a great treasure from them; what canst thou pretend to +hurt them for?" "Nay, William," says I, "do not talk of that; I have +pretence enough, if that be all; my pretence is, to prevent doing me hurt, +and that is as necessary a piece of the law of self-preservation as any you +can name; but the main thing is, I know not what to do with them, to +prevent their prating." + +While William and I were talking, the poor Dutchmen were openly condemned +to die, as it may be called, by the whole ship's company; and so warm were +the men upon it, that they grew very clamorous; and when they heard that +William was against it, some of them swore they should die, and if William +opposed it, he should drown along with them. + +But, as I was resolved to put an end to their cruel project, so I found it +was time to take upon me a little, or the bloody humour might grow too +strong; so I called the Dutchmen up, and talked a little with them. First, +I asked them if they were willing to go with us. Two of them offered it +presently; but the rest, which were fourteen, declined it. "Well, then," +said I, "where would you go?" They desired they should go to Ceylon. No, I +told them I could not allow them to go to any Dutch factory, and told them +very plainly the reasons of it, which they could not deny to be just. I let +them know also the cruel, bloody measures of our men, but that I had +resolved to save them, if possible; and therefore I told them I would set +them on shore at some English factory in the Bay of Bengal, or put them on +board any English ship I met, after I was past the Straits of Sunda or of +Malacca, but not before; for, as to my coming back again, I told them I +would run the venture of their Dutch power from Batavia, but I would not +have the news come there before me, because it would make all their +merchant-ships lay up, and keep out of our way. + +It came next into our consideration what we should do with their ship; but +this was not long resolving; for there were but two ways, either to set her +on fire, or to run her on shore, and we chose the last. So we set her +foresail with the tack at the cat-head, and lashed her helm a little to +starboard, to answer her head-sail, and so set her agoing, with neither cat +or dog in her; and it was not above two hours before we saw her run right +ashore upon the coast, a little beyond the Cape Comorin; and away we went +round about Ceylon, for the coast of Coromandel. + +We sailed along there, not in sight of the shore only, but so near as to +see the ships in the road at Fort St David, Fort St George, and at the +other factories along that shore, as well as along the coast of Golconda, +carrying our English ancient when we came near the Dutch factories, and +Dutch colours when we passed by the English factories. We met with little +purchase upon this coast, except two small vessels of Golconda, bound +across the bay with bales of calicoes and muslins and wrought silks, and +fifteen bales of romals, from the bottom of the bay, which were going, on +whose account we knew not, to Acheen, and to other ports on the coast of +Malacca. We did not inquire to what place in particular; but we let the +vessels go, having none but Indians on board. + +In the bottom of the bay we met with a great junk belonging to the Mogul's +court, with a great many people, passengers as we supposed them to be: it +seems they were bound for the river Hooghly or Ganges, and came from +Sumatra. This was a prize worth taking indeed; and we got so much gold in +her, besides other goods which we did not meddle with--pepper in +particular--that it had like to have put an end to our cruise; for almost +all my men said we were rich enough, and desired to go back again to +Madagascar. But I had other things in my head still, and when I came to +talk with them, and set friend William to talk with them, we put such +further golden hopes into their heads that we soon prevailed with them to +let us go on. + +My next design was to leave all the dangerous straits of Malacca, +Singapore, and Sunda, where we could expect no great booty, but what we +might light on in European ships, which we must fight for; and though we +were able to fight, and wanted no courage, even to desperation, yet we were +rich too, and resolved to be richer, and took this for our maxim, that +while we were sure the wealth we sought was to be had without fighting, we +had no occasion to put ourselves to the necessity of fighting for that +which would come upon easy terms. + +We left, therefore, the Bay of Bengal, and coming to the coast of Sumatra, +we put in at a small port, where there was a town, inhabited only by +Malays; and here we took in fresh water, and a large quantity of good pork, +pickled up and well salted, notwithstanding the heat of the climate, being +in the very middle of the torrid zone, viz., in three degrees fifteen +minutes north latitude. We also took on board both our vessels forty hogs +alive, which served us for fresh provisions, having abundance of food for +them, such as the country produced, such as guams, potatoes, and a sort of +coarse rice, good for nothing else but to feed the swine. We killed one of +these hogs every day, and found them to be excellent meat. We took in also +a monstrous quantity of ducks, and cocks and hens, the same kind as we have +in England, which we kept for change of provisions; and if I remember +right, we had no less than two thousand of them; so that at first we were +pestered with them very much, but we soon lessened them by boiling, +roasting, stewing, &c., for we never wanted while we had them. + +My long-projected design now lay open to me, which was to fall in amongst +the Dutch Spice Islands, and see what mischief I could do there. +Accordingly, we put out to sea the 12th of August, and passing the line on +the 17th, we stood away due south, leaving the Straits of Sunda and the +isle of Java on the east, till we came to the latitude of eleven degrees +twenty minutes, when we steered east and E.N.E., having easy gales from the +W.S.W. till we came among the Moluccas, or Spice Islands. + +We passed those seas with less difficulty than in other places, the winds +to the south of Java being more variable, and the weather good, though +sometimes we met with squally weather and short storms; but when we came in +among the Spice Islands themselves we had a share of the monsoons, or +trade-winds, and made use of them accordingly. + +The infinite number of islands which lie in these seas embarrassed us +strangely, and it was with great difficulty that we worked our way through +them; then we steered for the north side of the Philippines, when we had a +double chance for purchase, viz., either to meet with the Spanish ships +from Acapulco, on the coast of New Spain, or we were certain not to fail of +finding some ships or junks of China, who, if they came from China, would +have a great quantity of goods of value on board, as well as money; or if +we took them going back, we should find them laden with nutmegs and cloves +from Banda and Ternate, or from some of the other islands. + +We were right in our guesses here to a tittle, and we steered directly +through a large outlet, which they call a strait, though it be fifteen +miles broad, and to an island they call Dammer, and from thence N.N.E. to +Banda. Between these islands we met with a Dutch junk, or vessel, going to +Amboyna: we took her without much trouble, and I had much ado to prevent +our men murdering all the men, as soon as they heard them say they belonged +to Amboyna: the reasons I suppose any one will guess. + +We took out of her about sixteen ton of nutmegs, some provisions, and their +small-arms, for they had no great guns, and let the ship go: from thence we +sailed directly to the Banda Island, or Islands, where we were sure to get +more nutmegs if we thought fit. For my part, I would willingly have got +more nutmegs, though I had paid for them, but our people abhorred paying +for anything; so we got about twelve ton more at several times, most of +them from shore, and only a few in a small boat of the natives, which was +going to Gilolo. We would have traded openly, but the Dutch, who have made +themselves masters of all those islands, forbade the people dealing with +us, or any strangers whatever, and kept them so in awe that they durst not +do it; so we could indeed have made nothing of it if we had stayed longer, +and therefore resolved to be gone for Ternate, and see if we could make up +our loading with cloves. + +Accordingly we stood away north, but found ourselves so entangled among +innumerable islands, and without any pilot that understood the channel and +races between them, that we were obliged to give it over, and resolved to +go back again to Banda, and see what we could get among the other islands +thereabouts. + +The first adventure we made here had like to have been fatal to us all, for +the sloop, being ahead, made the signal to us for seeing a sail, and +afterwards another, and a third, by which we understood she saw three sail; +whereupon we made more sail to come up with her, but on a sudden were +gotten among some rocks, falling foul upon them in such a manner as +frighted us all very heartily; for having, it seems, but just water enough, +as it were to an inch, our rudder struck upon the top of a rock, which gave +us a terrible shock, and split a great piece off the rudder, and indeed +disabled it so that our ship would not steer at all, at least not so as to +be depended upon; and we were glad to hand all our sails, except our +fore-sail and main-topsail, and with them we stood away to the east, to see +if we could find any creek or harbour where we might lay the ship on shore, +and repair our rudder; besides, we found the ship herself had received some +damage, for she had some little leak near her stern-post, but a great way +under water. + +By this mischance we lost the advantages, whatever they were, of the three +sail of ships, which we afterwards came to hear were small Dutch ships from +Batavia, going to Banda and Amboyna, to load spice, and, no doubt, had a +good quantity of money on board. + +Upon the disaster I have been speaking of you may very well suppose that we +came to an anchor as soon as we could, which was upon a small island not +far from Banda, where, though the Dutch keep no factory, yet they come at +the season to buy nutmegs and mace. We stayed there thirteen days; but +there being no place where we could lay the ship on shore, we sent the +sloop to cruise among the islands, to look out for a place fit for us. In +the meantime we got very good water here, some provisions, roots, and +fruits, and a good quantity of nutmegs and mace, which we found ways to +trade with the natives for, without the knowledge of their masters, the +Dutch. + +At length our sloop returned; having found another island where there was a +very good harbour, we ran in, and came to an anchor. We immediately unbent +all our sails, sent them ashore upon the island, and set up seven or eight +tents with them; then we unrigged our top-masts, and cut them down, hoisted +all our guns out, our provisions and loading, and put them ashore in the +tents. With the guns we made two small batteries, for fear of a surprise, +and kept a look-out upon the hill. When we were all ready, we laid the ship +aground upon a hard sand, the upper end of the harbour, and shored her up +on each side. At low water she lay almost dry, so we mended her bottom, and +stopped the leak, which was occasioned by straining some of the rudder +irons with the shock which the ship had against the rock. + +Having done this, we also took occasion to clean her bottom, which, having +been at sea so long, was very foul. The sloop washed and tallowed also, but +was ready before us, and cruised eight or ten days among the islands, but +met with no purchase; so that we began to be tired of the place, having +little to divert us but the most furious claps of thunder that ever were +heard or read of in the world. + +We were in hopes to have met with some purchase here among the Chinese, +who, we had been told, came to Ternate to trade for cloves, and to the +Banda Isles for nutmegs; and we would have been very glad to have loaded +our galleon, or great ship, with these two sorts of spice, and have thought +it a glorious voyage; but we found nothing stirring more than what I have +said, except Dutchmen, who, by what means we could not imagine, had either +a jealousy of us or intelligence of us, and kept themselves close in their +ports. + +I was once resolved to have made a descent at the island of Dumas, the +place most famous for the best nutmegs; but friend William, who was always +for doing our business without fighting, dissuaded me from it, and gave +such reasons for it that we could not resist; particularly the great heats +of the season, and of the place, for we were now in the latitude of just +half a degree south. But while we were disputing this point we were soon +determined by the following accident:--We had a strong gale of wind at S.W. +by W., and the ship had fresh way, but a great sea rolling in upon us from +the N.E., which we afterwards found was the pouring in of the great ocean +east of New Guinea. However, as I said, we stood away large, and made fresh +way, when, on the sudden, from a dark cloud which hovered over our heads, +came a flash, or rather blast, of lightning, which was so terrible, and +quivered so long among us, that not I only, but all our men, thought the +ship was on fire. The heat of the flash, or fire, was so sensibly felt in +our faces, that some of our men had blisters raised by it on their skins, +not immediately, perhaps, by the heat, but by the poisonous or noxious +particles which mixed themselves with the matter inflamed. But this was not +all; the shock of the air, which the fracture in the clouds made, was such +that our ship shook as when a broadside is fired; and her motion being +checked, as it were at once, by a repulse superior to the force that gave +her way before, the sails all flew back in a moment, and the ship lay, as +we might truly say, thunder-struck. As the blast from the cloud was so very +near us, it was but a few moments after the flash that the terriblest clap +of thunder followed that was ever heard by mortals. I firmly believe a +blast of a hundred thousand barrels of gunpowder could not have been +greater to our hearing; nay, indeed, to some of our men it took away their +hearing. + +It is not possible for me to describe, or any one to conceive, the terror +of that minute. Our men were in such a consternation, that not a man on +board the ship had presence of mind to apply to the proper duty of a +sailor, except friend William; and had he not run very nimbly, and with a +composure that I am sure I was not master of, to let go the fore-sheet, set +in the weather-brace of the fore-yard, and haul down the top-sails, we had +certainly brought all our masts by the board, and perhaps have been +overwhelmed in the sea. + +As for myself, I must confess my eyes were open to my danger, though not +the least to anything of application for remedy. I was all amazement and +confusion, and this was the first time that I can say I began to feel the +effects of that horror which I know since much more of, upon the just +reflection on my former life. I thought myself doomed by Heaven to sink +that moment into eternal destruction; and with this peculiar mark of +terror, viz., that the vengeance was not executed in the ordinary way of +human justice, but that God had taken me into His immediate disposing, and +had resolved to be the executer of His own vengeance. + +Let them alone describe the confusion I was in who know what was the case +of [John] Child, of Shadwell, or Francis Spira. It is impossible to +describe it. My soul was all amazement and surprise. I thought myself just +sinking into eternity, owning the divine justice of my punishment, but not +at all feeling any of the moving, softening tokens of a sincere penitent; +afflicted at the punishment, but not at the crime; alarmed at the +vengeance, but not terrified at the guilt; having the same gust to the +crime, though terrified to the last degree at the thought of the +punishment, which I concluded I was just now going to receive. + +But perhaps many that read this will be sensible of the thunder and +lightning, that may think nothing of the rest, or rather may make a jest of +it all; so I say no more of it at this time, but proceed to the story of +the voyage. When the amazement was over, and the men began to come to +themselves, they fell a-calling for one another, every one for his friend, +or for those he had most respect for; and it was a singular satisfaction to +find that nobody was hurt. The next thing was to inquire if the ship had +received no damage, when the boatswain, stepping forward, found that part +of the head was gone, but not so as to endanger the bowsprit; so we hoisted +our top-sails again, hauled aft the fore-sheet, braced the yards, and went +our course as before. Nor can I deny but that we were all somewhat like the +ship; our first astonishment being a little over, and that we found the +ship swim again, we were soon the same irreligious, hardened crew that we +were before, and I among the rest. + +As we now steered, our course lay N.N.E., and we passed thus, with a fair +wind, through the strait or channel between the island of Gilolo and the +land of Nova Guinea, when we were soon in the open sea or ocean, on the +south-east of the Philippines, being the great Pacific, or South Sea, where +it may be said to join itself with the vast Indian Ocean. + +As we passed into these seas, steering due north, so we soon crossed the +line to the north side, and so sailed on towards Mindanao and Manilla, the +chief of the Philippine Islands, without meeting with any purchase till we +came to the northward of Manilla, and then our trade began; for here we +took three Japanese vessels, though at some distance from Manilla. Two of +them had made their market, and were going home with nutmegs, cinnamon, +cloves, &c., besides all sorts of European goods, brought with the Spanish +ships from Acapulco. They had together eight-and-thirty ton of cloves, and +five or six ton of nutmegs, and as much cinnamon. We took the spice, but +meddled with very little of the European goods, they being, as we thought, +not worth our while; but we were very sorry for it soon after, and +therefore grew wiser upon the next occasion. + +The third Japanese was the best prize to us; for he came with money, and a +great deal of gold uncoined, to buy such goods as we mentioned above. We +eased him of his gold, and did him no other harm, and having no intention +to stay long here, we stood away for China. + +We were at sea above two months upon this voyage, beating it up against the +wind, which blew steadily from the N.E., and within a point or two one way +or other; and this indeed was the reason why we met with the more prizes in +our voyage. + +We were just gotten clear of the Philippines, and we purposed to go to the +isle of Formosa, but the wind blew so fresh at N.N.E. that there was no +making anything of it, and we were forced to put back to Laconia, the most +northerly of those islands. We rode here very secure, and shifted our +situation, not in view of any danger, for there was none, but for a better +supply of provisions, which we found the people very willing to supply us +with. + +There lay, while we remained here, three very great galleons, or Spanish +ships, from the south seas; whether newly come in or ready to sail we could +not understand at first; but as we found the China traders began to load +and set forward to the north, we concluded the Spanish ships had newly +unloaded their cargo, and these had been buying; so we doubted not but we +should meet with purchase in the rest of the voyage, neither, indeed, could +we well miss of it. + +We stayed here till the beginning of May, when we were told the Chinese +traders would set forward; for the northern monsoons end about the latter +end of March or beginning of April; so that they are sure of fair winds +home. Accordingly we hired some of the country boats, which are very swift +sailers, to go and bring us word how affairs stood at Manilla, and when the +China junks would sail; and by this intelligence we ordered our matters so +well, that three days after we set sail we fell in with no less than eleven +of them; out of which, however, having by misfortune of discovering +ourselves, taken but three, we contented ourselves and pursued our voyage +to Formosa. In these three vessels we took, in short, such a quantity of +cloves, nutmegs, cinnamon, and mace, besides silver, that our men began to +be of my opinion,--that we were rich enough; and, in short, we had nothing +to do now but to consider by what methods to secure the immense treasure we +had got. + +I was secretly glad to hear that they were of this opinion, for I had long +before resolved, if it were possible, to persuade them to think of +returning, having fully perfected my first projected design of rummaging +among the Spice Islands; and all those prizes, which were exceeding rich at +Manilla, was quite beyond my design. + +But now I had heard what the men said, and how they thought we were very +well, I let them know by friend William, that I intended only to sail to +the island of Formosa, where I should find opportunity to turn our spices +and Europe goods into ready money, and that then I would tack about for the +south, the northern monsoons being perhaps by that time also ready to set +in. They all approved of my design, and willingly went forward; because, +besides the winds, which would not permit until October to go to the south, +I say, besides this, we were now a very deep ship, having near two hundred +ton of goods on board, and particularly, some very valuable; the sloop also +had a proportion. + +With this resolution we went on cheerfully, when, within about twelve days' +sail more, we made the island Formosa, at a great distance, but were +ourselves shot beyond the southernmost part of the island, being to +leeward, and almost upon the coast of China. Here we were a little at a +loss, for the English factories were not far off, and we might be obliged +to fight some of their ships, if we met with them; which, though we were +able enough to do, yet we did not desire it on many accounts, and +particularly because we did not think it was our business to have it known +who we were, or that such a kind of people as we had been seen on the +coast. However, we were obliged to keep to the northward, keeping as good +an offing as we could with respect to the coast of China. + +We had not sailed long but we chased a small Chinese junk, and having taken +her, we found she was bound to the island of Formosa, having no goods on +board but some rice and a small quantity of tea; but she had three Chinese +merchants in her; and they told us that they were going to meet a large +vessel of their country, which came from Tonquin, and lay in a river in +Formosa, whose name I forgot; and they were going to the Philippine +Islands, with silks, muslins, calicoes, and such goods as are the product +of China, and some gold; that their business was to sell their cargo, and +buy spices and European goods. + +This suited very well with our purpose; so I resolved now that we would +leave off being pirates and turn merchants; so we told them what goods we +had on board, and that if they would bring their supercargoes or merchants +on board, we would trade with them. They were very willing to trade with +us, but terribly afraid to trust us; nor was it an unjust fear, for we had +plundered them already of what they had. On the other hand, we were as +diffident as they, and very uncertain what to do; but William the Quaker +put this matter into a way of barter. He came to me and told me he really +thought the merchants looked like fair men, that meant honestly. "And +besides," says William, "it is their interest to be honest now, for, as +they know upon what terms we got the goods we are to truck with them, so +they know we can afford good pennyworths; and in the next place, it saves +them going the whole voyage, so that the southerly monsoons yet holding, if +they traded with us, they could immediately return with their cargo to +China;" though, by the way, we afterwards found they intended for Japan; +but that was all one, for by this means they saved at least eight months' +voyage. Upon these foundations, William said he was satisfied we might +trust them; "for," says William, "I would as soon trust a man whose +interest binds him to be just to me as a man whose principle binds +himself." Upon the whole, William proposed that two of the merchants should +be left on board our ship as hostages, and that part of our goods should be +loaded in their vessel, and let the third go with it into the port where +their ship lay; and when he had delivered the spices, he should bring back +such things as it was agreed should be exchanged. This was concluded on, +and William the Quaker ventured to go along with them, which, upon my word, +I should not have cared to have done, nor was I willing that he should, but +he went still upon the notion that it was their interest to treat him +friendly. + +In the meantime, we came to an anchor under a little island in the latitude +of 23 degrees 28 minutes, being just under the northern tropic, and about +twenty leagues from the island. Here we lay thirteen days, and began to be +very uneasy for my friend William, for they had promised to be back again +in four days, which they might very easily have done. However, at the end +of thirteen days, we saw three sail coming directly to us, which a little +surprised us all at first, not knowing what might be the case; and we began +to put ourselves in a posture of defence; but as they came nearer us, we +were soon satisfied, for the first vessel was that which William went in, +who carried a flag of truce; and in a few hours they all came to an anchor, +and William came on board us with a little boat, with the Chinese merchant +in his company, and two other merchants, who seemed to be a kind of brokers +for the rest. + +Here he gave us an account how civilly he had been used; how they had +treated him with all imaginable frankness and openness; that they had not +only given him the full value of his spices and other goods which he +carried, in gold, by good weight, but had loaded the vessel again with such +goods as he knew we were willing to trade for; and that afterwards they had +resolved to bring the great ship out of the harbour, to lie where we were, +that so we might make what bargain we thought fit; only William said he had +promised, in our name, that we should use no violence with them, nor detain +any of the vessels after we had done trading with them. I told him we would +strive to outdo them in civility, and that we would make good every part of +his agreement; in token whereof, I caused a white flag likewise to be +spread at the poop of our great ship, which was the signal agreed on. + +As to the third vessel which came with them, it was a kind of bark of the +country, who, having intelligence of our design to traffic, came off to +deal with us, bringing a great deal of gold and some provisions, which at +that time we were very glad of. + +In short, we traded upon the high seas with these men, and indeed we made a +very good market, and yet sold thieves' pennyworths too. We sold here about +sixty ton of spice, chiefly cloves and nutmegs, and above two hundred bales +of European goods, such as linen and woollen manufactures. We considered we +should have occasion for some such things ourselves, and so we kept a good +quantity of English stuffs, cloth, baize, &c., for ourselves. I shall not +take up any of the little room I have left here with the further +particulars of our trade; it is enough to mention, that, except a parcel of +tea, and twelve bales of fine China wrought silks, we took nothing in +exchange for our goods but gold; so that the sum we took here in that +glittering commodity amounted to above fifty thousand ounces good weight. + +When we had finished our barter, we restored the hostages, and gave the +three merchants about the quantity of twelve hundredweight of nutmegs, and +as many of cloves, with a handsome present of European linen and stuff for +themselves, as a recompense for what we had taken from them; so we sent +them away exceedingly well satisfied. + +Here it was that William gave me an account, that while he was on board the +Japanese vessel, he met with a kind of religious, or Japan priest, who +spoke some words of English to him; and, being very inquisitive to know how +he came to learn any of those words, he told him that there was in his +country thirteen Englishmen; he called them Englishmen very articulately +and distinctly, for he had conversed with them very frequently and freely. +He said that they were all that were left of two-and-thirty men, who came +on shore on the north side of Japan, being driven upon a great rock in a +stormy night, where they lost their ship, and the rest of their men were +drowned; that he had persuaded the king of his country to send boats off to +the rock or island where the ship was lost, to save the rest of the men, +and to bring them on shore, which was done, and they were used very kindly, +and had houses built for them, and land given them to plant for provision; +and that they lived by themselves. + +He said he went frequently among them, to persuade them to worship their +god (an idol, I suppose, of their own making), which, he said, they +ungratefully refused; and that therefore the king had once or twice ordered +them all to be put to death; but that, as he said, he had prevailed upon +the king to spare them, and let them live their own way, as long as they +were quiet and peaceable, and did not go about to withdraw others from the +worship of the country. + +I asked William why he did not inquire from whence they came. "I did," said +William; "for how could I but think it strange," said he, "to hear him talk +of Englishmen on the north side of Japan?" "Well," said I, "what account +did he give of it?" "An account," said William, "that will surprise thee, +and all the world after thee, that shall hear of it, and which makes me +wish thou wouldst go up to Japan and find them out." "What do you mean?" +said I. "Whence could they come?" "Why," says William, "he pulled out a +little book, and in it a piece of paper, where it was written, in an +Englishman's hand, and in plain English words, thus; and," says William, "I +read it myself:--'We came from Greenland, and from the North Pole.'" This, +indeed, was amazing to us all, and more so to those seamen among us who +knew anything of the infinite attempts which had been made from Europe, as +well by the English as the Dutch, to discover a passage that way into those +parts of the world; and as William pressed as earnestly to go on to the +north to rescue those poor men, so the ship's company began to incline to +it; and, in a word, we all came to this, that we would stand in to the +shore of Formosa, to find this priest again, and have a further account of +it all from him. Accordingly, the sloop went over; but when they came +there, the vessels were very unhappily sailed, and this put an end to our +inquiry after them, and perhaps may have disappointed mankind of one of the +most noble discoveries that ever was made, or will again be made, in the +world, for the good of mankind in general; but so much for that. + +William was so uneasy at losing this opportunity, that he pressed us +earnestly to go up to Japan to find out these men. He told us that if it +was nothing but to recover thirteen honest poor men from a kind of +captivity, which they would otherwise never be redeemed from, and where, +perhaps, they might, some time or other, be murdered by the barbarous +people, in defence of their idolatry, it were very well worth our while, +and it would be, in some measure, making amends for the mischiefs we had +done in the world; but we, that had no concern upon us for the mischiefs we +had done, had much less about any satisfactions to be made for it, so he +found that kind of discourse would weigh very little with us. Then he +pressed us very earnestly to let him have the sloop to go by himself, and I +told him I would not oppose it; but when he came to the sloop none of the +men would go with him; for the case was plain, they had all a share in the +cargo of the great ship, as well as in thae of the sloop, and the richness +of the cargo was such that they would not leave it by any means; so poor +William, much to his mortification, was obliged to give it over. What +became of those thirteen men, or whether they are not there still, I can +give no account of. + +We are now at the end of our cruise; what we had taken was indeed so +considerable, that it was not only enough to satisfy the most covetous and +the most ambitious minds in the world, but it did indeed satisfy us, and +our men declared they did not desire any more. The next motion, therefore, +was about going back, and the way by which we should perform the voyage, so +as not to be attacked by the Dutch in the Straits of Sunda. + +We had pretty well stored ourselves here with provisions, and it being now +near the return of the monsoons, we resolved to stand away to the +southward; and not only to keep without the Philippine Islands, that is to +say, to the eastward of them, but to keep on to the southward, and see if +we could not leave not only the Moluccas, or Spice Islands, behind us, but +even Nova Guinea and Nova Hollandia also; and so getting into the variable +winds, to the south of the tropic of Capricorn, steer away to the west, +over the great Indian Ocean. + +This was indeed at first a monstrous voyage in its appearance, and the want +of provisions threatened us. William told us in so many words, that it was +impossible we could carry provisions enough to subsist us for such a +voyage, and especially fresh water; and that, as there would be no land for +us to touch at where we could get any supply, it was a madness to undertake +it. + +But I undertook to remedy this evil, and therefore desired them not to be +uneasy at that, for I knew that we might supply ourselves at Mindanao, the +most southerly island of the Philippines. + +Accordingly, we set sail, having taken all the provisions here that we +could get, the 28th of September, the wind veering a little at first from +the N.N.W. to the N.E. by E., but afterwards settled about the N.E. and the +E.N.E. We were nine weeks in this voyage, having met with several +interruptions by the weather, and put in under the lee of a small island in +the latitude of 16 degrees 12 minutes, of which we never knew the name, +none of our charts having given any account of it: I say, we put in here by +reason of a strange tornado or hurricane, which brought us into a great +deal of danger. Here we rode about sixteen days, the winds being very +tempestuous and the weather uncertain. However, we got some provisions on +shore, such as plants and roots, and a few hogs. We believed there were +inhabitants on the island, but we saw none of them. + +From hence, the weather settling again, we went on and came to the +southernmost part of Mindanao, where we took in fresh water and some cows, +but the climate was so hot that we did not attempt to salt up any more than +so as to keep a fortnight or three weeks; and away we stood southward, +crossing the line, and, leaving Gillolo on the starboard side, we coasted +the country they call New Guinea, where, in the latitude of eight degrees +south, we put in again for provisions and water, and where we found +inhabitants; but they fled from us, and were altogether inconversable. From +thence, sailing still southward, we left all behind us that any of our +charts and maps took any notice of, and went on till we came to the +latitude of seventeen degrees, the wind continuing still north-east. + +Here we made land to the westward, which, when we had kept in sight for +three days, coasting along the shore for the distance of about four +leagues, we began to fear we should find no outlet west, and so should be +obliged to go back again, and put in among the Moluccas at last; but at +length we found the land break off, and go trending away to the west sea, +seeming to be all open to the south and south-west, and a great sea came +rolling out of the south, which gave us to understand that there was no +land for a great way. + +In a word, we kept on our course to the south, a little westerly, till we +passed the south tropic, where we found the winds variable; and now we +stood away fair west, and held it out for about twenty days, when we +discovered land right ahead, and on our larboard bow; we made directly to +the shore, being willing to take all advantages now for supplying ourselves +with fresh provisions and water, knowing we were now entering on that vast +unknown Indian Ocean, perhaps the greatest sea on the globe, having, with +very little interruption of islands, a continued sea quite round the globe. + +We found a good road here, and some people on shore; but when we landed, +they fled up the country, nor would they hold any correspondence with us, +nor come near us, but shot at us several times with arrows as long as +lances. We set up white flags for a truce, but they either did not or would +not understand it; on the contrary, they shot our flag of truce through +several times with their arrows, so that, in a word, we never came near any +of them. + +We found good water here, though it was something difficult to get at it, +but for living creatures we could see none; for the people, if they had any +cattle, drove them all away, and showed us nothing but themselves, and that +sometimes in a threatening posture, and in number so great, that made us +suppose the island to be greater than we first imagined. It is true, they +would not come near enough for us to engage with them, at least not openly; +but they came near enough for us to see them, and, by the help of our +glasses, to see that they were clothed and armed, but their clothes were +only about their lower and middle parts; that they had long lances, half +pikes, in their hands, besides bows and arrows; that they had great high +things on their heads, made, as we believed, of feathers, and which looked +something like our grenadiers' caps in England. + +When we saw them so shy that they would not come near us, our men began to +range over the island, if it was such (for we never surrounded it), to +search for cattle, and for any of the Indian plantations, for fruits or +plants; but they soon found, to their cost, that they were to use more +caution than that came to, and that they were to discover perfectly every +bush and every tree before they ventured abroad in the country; for about +fourteen of our men going farther than the rest, into a part of the country +which seemed to be planted, as they thought, for it did but seem so, only I +think it was overgrown with canes, such as we make our cane chairs with--I +say, venturing too far, they were suddenly attacked with a shower of arrows +from almost every side of them, as they thought, out of the tops of the +trees. + +They had nothing to do but to fly for it, which, however, they could not +resolve on, till five of them were wounded; nor had they escaped so, if one +of them had not been so much wiser or thoughtfuller than the rest, as to +consider, that though they could not see the enemy, so as to shoot at them, +yet perhaps the noise of their shot might terrify them, and that they +should rather fire at a venture. Accordingly, ten of them faced about, and +fired at random anywhere among the canes. + +The noise and the fire not only terrified the enemy, but, as they believed, +their shot had luckily hit some of them; for they found not only that the +arrows, which came thick among them before, ceased, but they heard the +Indians halloo, after their way, to one another, and make a strange noise, +more uncouth and inimitably strange than any they had ever heard, more like +the howling and barking of wild creatures in the woods than like the voice +of men, only that sometimes they seemed to speak words. + +They observed also, that this noise of the Indians went farther and farther +off, so that they were satisfied the Indians fled away, except on one side, +where they heard a doleful groaning and howling, and where it continued a +good while, which they supposed was from some or other of them being +wounded, and howling by reason of their wounds; or killed, and others +howling over them: but our men had enough of making discoveries; so they +did not trouble themselves to look farther, but resolved to take this +opportunity to retreat. But the worst of their adventure was to come; for +as they came back, they passed by a prodigious great trunk of an old tree; +what tree it was, they said, they did not know, but it stood like an old +decayed oak in a park, where the keepers in England take a stand, as they +call it, to shoot a deer; and it stood just under the steep side of a great +rock, or hill, that our people could not see what was beyond it. + +As they came by this tree, they were of a sudden shot at, from the top of +the tree, with seven arrows and three lances, which, to our great grief, +killed two of our men, and wounded three more. This was the more +surprising, because, being without any defence, and so near the trees, they +expected more lances and arrows every moment; nor would flying do them any +service, the Indians being, as appeared, very good marksmen. In this +extremity, they had happily this presence of mind, viz., to run close to +the tree, and stand, as it were, under it; so that those above could not +come at, or see them, to throw their lances at them. This succeeded, and +gave them time to consider what to do; they knew their enemies and +murderers were above; they heard them talk, and those above knew those were +below; but they below were obliged to keep close for fear of their lances +from above. At length, one of our men, looking a little more strictly than +the rest, thought he saw the head of one of the Indians just over a dead +limb of the tree, which, it seems, the creature sat upon. One man +immediately fired, and levelled his piece so true that the shot went +through the fellow's head; and down he fell out of the tree immediately, +and came upon the ground with such force, with the height of his fall, that +if he had not been killed with the shot, he would certainly have been +killed with dashing his body against the ground. + +This so frightened them, that, besides the howling noise they made in the +tree, our men heard a strange clutter of them in the body of the tree, from +whence they concluded they had made the tree hollow, and were got to hide +themselves there. Now, had this been the case, they were secure enough from +our men, for it was impossible any of our men could get up the tree on the +outside, there being no branches to climb by; and, to shoot at the tree, +that they tried several times to no purpose, for the tree was so thick that +no shot would enter it. They made no doubt, however, but that they had +their enemies in a trap, and that a small siege would either bring them +down, tree and all, or starve them out; so they resolved to keep their +post, and send to us for help. Accordingly, two of them came away to us for +more hands, and particularly desired that some of our carpenters might come +with tools, to help to cut down the tree, or at least to cut down other +wood and set fire to it; and that, they concluded, would not fail to bring +them out. + +Accordingly, our men went like a little army, and with mighty preparations +for an enterprise, the like of which has scarce been ever heard, to form +the siege of a great tree. However, when they came there, they found the +task difficult enough, for the old trunk was indeed a very great one, and +very tall, being at least two-and-twenty feet high, with seven old limbs +standing out every way from the top, but decayed, and very few leaves, if +any, left on it. + +William the Quaker, whose curiosity led him to go among the rest, proposed +that they should make a ladder, and get upon the top, and then throw +wild-fire into the tree, and smoke them out. Others proposed going back, +and getting a great gun out of the ship, which would split the tree in +pieces with the iron bullets; others, that they should cut down a great +deal of wood, and pile it up round the tree, and set it on fire, and burn +the tree, and the Indians in it. + +These consultations took up our people no less than two or three days, in +all which time they heard nothing of the supposed garrison within this +wooden castle, nor any noise within. William's project was first gone +about, and a large strong ladder was made, to scale this wooden tower; and +in two or three hours' time it would have been ready to mount, when, on a +sudden, they heard the noise of the Indians in the body of the tree again, +and a little after, several of them appeared at the top of the tree, and +threw some lances down at our men; one of which struck one of our seamen +a-top of the shoulder, and gave him such a desperate wound, that the +surgeons not only had a great deal of difficulty to cure him, but the poor +man endured such horrible torture, that we all said they had better have +killed him outright. However, he was cured at last, though he never +recovered the perfect use of his arm, the lance having cut some of the +tendons on the top of the arm, near the shoulder, which, as I supposed, +performed the office of motion to the limb before; so that the poor man was +a cripple all the days of his life. But to return to the desperate rogues +in the tree; our men shot at them, but did not find they had hit them, or +any of them; but as soon as ever they shot at them, they could hear them +huddle down into the trunk of the tree again, and there, to be sure, they +were safe. + +Well, however, it was this which put by the project of William's ladder; +for when it was done, who would venture up among such a troop of bold +creatures as were there, and who, they supposed, were desperate by their +circumstances? And as but one man at a time could go up, they began to +think it would not do; and, indeed, I was of the opinion (for about this +time I was come to their assistance) that going up the ladder would not do, +unless it was thus, that a man should, as it were, run just up to the top, +and throw some fireworks into the tree, and come down again; and this we +did two or three times, but found no effect of it. At last, one of our +gunners made a stink-pot, as we called it, being a composition which only +smokes, but does not flame or burn; but withal the smoke of it is so thick, +and the smell of it so intolerably nauseous, that it is not to be suffered. +This he threw into the tree himself, and we waited for the effect of it, +but heard or saw nothing all that night or the next day; so we concluded +the men within were all smothered; when, on a sudden, the next night we +heard them upon the top of the tree again shouting and hallooing like +madmen. + +We concluded, as anybody would, that this was to call for help, and we +resolved to continue our siege; for we were all enraged to see ourselves so +baulked by a few wild people, whom we thought we had safe in our clutches; +and, indeed, never were there so many concurring circumstances to delude +men in any case we had met with. We resolved, however, to try another +stink-pot the next night, and our engineer and gunner had got it ready, +when, hearing a noise of the enemy on the top of the tree, and in the body +of the tree, I was not willing to let the gunner go up the ladder, which, I +said, would be but to be certain of being murdered. However, he found a +medium for it, and that was to go up a few steps, and, with a long pole in +his hand, to throw it in upon the top of the tree, the ladder being +standing all this while against the top of the tree; but when the gunner, +with his machine at the top of his pole, came to the tree, with three other +men to help him, behold the ladder was gone. + +This perfectly confounded us; and we now concluded the Indians in the tree +had, by this piece of negligence, taken the opportunity, and come all down +the ladder, made their escape, and had carried away the ladder with them. I +laughed most heartily at my friend William, who, as I said, had the +direction of the siege, and had set up a ladder for the garrison, as we +called them, to get down upon, and run away. But when daylight came, we +were all set to rights again; for there stood our ladder, hauled up on the +top of the tree, with about half of it in the hollow of the tree, and the +other half upright in the air. Then we began to laugh at the Indians for +fools, that they could not as well have found their way down by the ladder, +and have made their escape, as to have pulled it up by main strength into +the tree. + +We then resolved upon fire, and so to put an end to the work at once, and +burn the tree and its inhabitants together; and accordingly we went to work +to cut wood, and in a few hours' time we got enough, as we thought, +together; and, piling it up round the bottom of the tree, we set it on +fire, waiting at a distance to see when, the gentlemen's quarters being too +hot for them, they would come flying out at the top. But we were quite +confounded when, on a sudden, we found the fire all put out by a great +quantity of water thrown upon it. We then thought the devil must be in +them, to be sure. Says William, "This is certainly the cunningest piece of +Indian engineering that ever was heard of; and there can be but one thing +more to guess at, besides witchcraft and dealing with the devil, which I +believe not one word of," says he; "and that must be, that this is an +artificial tree, or a natural tree artificially made hollow down into the +earth, through root and all; and that these creatures have an artificial +cavity underneath it, quite into the hill, or a way to go through, and +under the hill, to some other place; and where that other place is, we know +not; but if it be not our own fault, I'll find the place, and follow them +into it, before I am two days older." He then called the carpenters, to +know of them if they had any large saws that would cut through the body; +and they told him they had no saws that were long enough, nor could men +work into such a monstrous old stump in a great while; but that they would +go to work with it with their axes, and undertake to cut it down in two +days, and stock up the root of it in two more. But William was for another +way, which proved much better than all this; for he was for silent work, +that, if possible, he might catch some of the fellows in it. So he sets +twelve men to it with large augers, to bore great holes into the side of +the tree, to go almost through, but not quite through; which holes were +bored without noise, and when they were done he filled them all with +gunpowder, stopping strong plugs, bolted crossways, into the holes, and +then boring a slanting hole, of a less size, down into the greater hole, +all of which were filled with powder, and at once blown up. When they took +fire, they made such a noise, and tore and split up the tree in so many +places, and in such a manner, that we could see plainly such another blast +would demolish it; and so it did. Thus at the second time we could, at two +or three places, put our hands in them, and discovered a cheat, namely, +that there was a cave or hole dug into the earth, from or through the +bottom of the hollow, and that it had communication with another cave +farther in, where we heard the voices of several of the wild folks, calling +and talking to one another. + +When we came thus far we had a great mind to get at them; and William +desired that three men might be given him with hand-grenadoes; and he +promised to go down first, and boldly he did so; for William, to give him +his due, had the heart of a lion. + +They had pistols in their hands, and swords by their sides; but, as they +had taught the Indians before by their stink-pots, the Indians returned +them in their own kind; for they made such a smoke come up out of the +entrance into the cave or hollow, that William and his three men were glad +to come running out of the cave, and out of the tree too, for mere want of +breath; and indeed they were almost stifled. + +Never was a fortification so well defended, or assailants so many ways +defeated. We were now for giving it over, and particularly I called +William, and told him I could not but laugh to see us spinning out our time +here for nothing; that I could not imagine what we were doing; that it was +certain that the rogues that were in it were cunning to the last degree, +and it would vex anybody to be so baulked by a few naked ignorant fellows; +but still it was not worth our while to push it any further, nor was there +anything that I knew of to be got by the conquest when it was made, so that +I thought it high time to give it over. + +William acknowledged what I said was just, and that there was nothing but +our curiosity to be gratified in this attempt; and though, as he said, he +was very desirous to have searched into the thing, yet he would not insist +upon it; so we resolved to quit it and come away, which we did. However, +William said before we went he would have this satisfaction of them, viz., +to burn down the tree and stop up the entrance into the cave. And while +doing this the gunner told him he would have one satisfaction of the +rogues; and this was, that he would make a mine of it, and see which way it +had vent. Upon this he fetched two barrels of powder out of the ships, and +placed them in the inside of the hollow of the cave, as far in as he durst +go to carry them, and then filling up the mouth of the cave where the tree +stood, and ramming it sufficiently hard, leaving only a pipe or touch-hole, +he gave fire to it, and stood at a distance to see which way it would +operate, when on a sudden he found the force of the powder burst its way +out among some bushes on the other side the little hill I mentioned, and +that it came roaring out there as out of the mouth of a cannon. Immediately +running thither, we saw the effects of the powder. + +First, we saw that there was the other mouth of the cave, which the powder +had so torn and opened, that the loose earth was so fallen in again that +nothing of shape could be discerned; but there we saw what was become of +the garrison of the Indians, too, who had given us all this trouble, for +some of them had no arms, some no legs, some no head; some lay half buried +in the rubbish of the mine--that is to say, in the loose earth that fell +in; and, in short, there was a miserable havoc made in them all; for we had +good reason to believe not one of them that were in the inside could +escape, but rather were shot out of the mouth of the cave, like a bullet +out of a gun. + +We had now our full satisfaction of the Indians; but, in short, this was a +losing voyage, for we had two men killed, one quite crippled, and five more +wounded; we spent two barrels of powder, and eleven days' time, and all to +get the understanding how to make an Indian mine, or how to keep garrison +in a hollow tree; and with this wit, bought at this dear price, we came +away, having taken in some fresh water, but got no fresh provisions. + +We then considered what we should do to get back again to Madagascar. We +were much about the latitude of the Cape of Good Hope, but had such a very +long run, and were neither sure of meeting with fair winds nor with any +land in the way, that we knew not what to think of it. William was our last +resort in this case again, and he was very plain with us. "Friend," says he +to Captain Wilmot, "what occasion hast thou to run the venture of starving, +merely for the pleasure of saying thou hast been where nobody has been +before? There are a great many places nearer home, of which thou mayest say +the same thing at less expense. I see no occasion thou hast of keeping thus +far south any longer than till you are sure you are to the west end of Java +and Sumatra; and then thou mayest stand away north towards Ceylon, and the +coast of Coromandel and Madras, where thou mayest get both fresh water and +fresh provisions; and to that part it is likely we may hold out well enough +with the stores we have already." + +This was wholesome advice, and such as was not to be slighted; so we stood +away to the west, keeping between the latitude of 31 and 35, and had very +good weather and fair winds for about ten days' sail; by which time, by our +reckoning, we were clear of the isles, and might run away to the north; and +if we did not fall in with Ceylon, we should at least go into the great +deep Bay of Bengal. + +But we were out in our reckoning a great deal; for, when we had stood due +north for about fifteen or sixteen degrees, we met with land again on our +starboard bow, about three leagues' distance; so we came to an anchor about +half a league from it, and manned out our boats to see what sort of a +country it was. We found it a very good one; fresh water easy to come at, +but no cattle that we could see, or inhabitants; and we were very shy of +searching too far after them, lest we should make such another journey as +we did last; so that we let rambling alone, and chose rather to take what +we could find, which was only a few wild mangoes, and some plants of +several kinds, which we knew not the names of. + +We made no stay here, but put to sea again, N.W. by N., but had little wind +for a fortnight more, when we made land again; and standing in with the +shore, we were surprised to find ourselves on the south shore of Java; and +just as we were coming to an anchor we saw a boat, carrying Dutch colours, +sailing along-shore. We were not solicitous to speak with them, or any +other of their nation, but left it indifferent to our people, when they +went on shore, to see the Dutchmen or not to see them; our business was to +get provisions, which, indeed, by this time were very short with us. + +We resolved to go on shore with our boats in the most convenient place we +could find, and to look out a proper harbour to bring the ship into, +leaving it to our fate whether we should meet with friends or enemies; +resolving, however, not to stay any considerable time, at least not long +enough to have expresses sent across the island to Batavia, and for ships +to come round from thence to attack us. + +We found, according to our desire, a very good harbour, where we rode in +seven fathom water, well defended from the weather, whatever might happen; +and here we got fresh provisions, such as good hogs and some cows; and that +we might lay in a little store, we killed sixteen cows, and pickled and +barrelled up the flesh as well as we could be supposed to do in the +latitude of eight degrees from the line. + +We did all this in about five days, and filled our casks with water; and +the last boat was coming off with herbs and roots, we being unmoored, and +our fore-topsail loose for sailing, when we spied a large ship to the +northward, bearing down directly upon us. We knew not what she might be, +but concluded the worst, and made all possible haste to get our anchor up, +and get under sail, that we might be in a readiness to see what she had to +say to us, for we were under no great concern for one ship, but our notion +was, that we should be attacked by three or four together. + +By the time we had got up our anchor and the boat was stowed, the ship was +within a league of us, and, as we thought, bore down to engage us; so we +spread our black flag, or ancient, on the poop, and the bloody flag at the +top-mast-head, and having made a clear ship, we stretched away to the +westward, to get the wind of him. + +They had, it seems, quite mistaken us before, expecting nothing of an enemy +or a pirate in those seas; and, not doubting but we had been one of their +own ships, they seemed to be in some confusion when they found their +mistake, so they immediately hauled upon a wind on the other tack, and +stood edging in for the shore, towards the easternmost part of the island. +Upon this we tacked, and stood after him with all the sail we could, and in +two hours came almost within gunshot. Though they crowded all the sail they +could lay on, there was no remedy but to engage us, and they soon saw their +inequality of force. We fired a gun for them to bring to; so they manned +out their boat, and sent to us with a flag of truce. We sent back the boat, +but with this answer to the captain, that he had nothing to do but to +strike and bring his ship to an anchor under our stern, and come on board +us himself, when he should know our demands; but that, however, since he +had not yet put us to the trouble of forcing him, which we saw we were able +to do, we assured them that the captain should return again in safety, and +all his men, and that, supplying us with such things as we should demand, +his ship should not be plundered. They went back with this message, and it +was some time after they were on board before they struck, which made us +begin to think they refused it; so we fired a shot, and in a few minutes +more we perceived their boat put off; and as soon as the boat put off the +ship struck and came to an anchor, as was directed. + +When the captain came on board, we demanded an account of their cargo, +which was chiefly bales of goods from Bengal for Bantam. We told them our +present want was provisions, which they had no need of, being just at the +end of their voyage; and that, if they would send their boat on shore with +ours, and procure us six-and-twenty head of black cattle, threescore hogs, +a quantity of brandy and arrack, and three hundred bushels of rice, we +would let them go free. + +As to the rice, they gave us six hundred bushels, which they had actually +on board, together with a parcel shipped upon freight. Also, they gave us +thirty middling casks of very good arrack, but beef and pork they had none. +However, they went on shore with our men, and bought eleven bullocks and +fifty hogs, which were pickled up for our occasion; and upon the supplies +of provision from shore, we dismissed them and their ship. + +We lay here several days before we could furnish ourselves with the +provisions agreed for, and some of the men fancied the Dutchmen were +contriving our destruction; but they were very honest, and did what they +could to furnish the black cattle, but found it impossible to supply so +many. So they came and told us ingenuously, that, unless we could stay a +while longer, they could get no more oxen or cows than those eleven, with +which we were obliged to be satisfied, taking the value of them in other +things, rather than stay longer there. On our side, we were punctual with +them in observing the conditions we had agreed on; nor would we let any of +our men so much as go on board them, or suffer any of their men to come on +board us; for, had any of our men gone on board, nobody could have answered +for their behaviour, any more than if they had been on shore in an enemy's +country. + +We were now victualled for our voyage; and, as we mattered not purchase, we +went merrily on for the coast of Ceylon, where we intended to touch, to get +fresh water again, and more provisions; and we had nothing material offered +in this part of the voyage, only that we met with contrary winds, and were +above a month in the passage. + +We put in upon the south coast of the island, desiring to have as little to +do with the Dutch as we could; and as the Dutch were lords of the country +as to commerce, so they are more so of the sea-coast, where they have +several forts, and, in particular, have all the cinnamon, which is the +trade of that island. + +We took in fresh water here, and some provisions, but did not much trouble +ourselves about laying in any stores, our beef and hogs, which we got at +Java, being not yet all gone by a good deal. We had a little skirmish on +shore here with some of the people of the island, some of our men having +been a little too familiar with the homely ladies of the country; for +homely, indeed, they were, to such a degree, that if our men had not had +good stomachs that way, they would scarce have touched any of them. + +I could never fully get it out of our men what they did, they were so true +to one another in their wickedness, but I understood in the main, that it +was some barbarous thing they had done, and that they had like to have paid +dear for it, for the men resented it to the last degree, and gathered in +such numbers about them, that, had not sixteen more of our men, in another +boat, come all in the nick of time, just to rescue our first men, who were +but eleven, and so fetch them off by main force, they had been all cut off, +the inhabitants being no less than two or three hundred, armed with darts +and lances, the usual weapons of the country, and which they are very +dexterous at the throwing, even so dexterous that it was scarce credible; +and had our men stood to fight them, as some of them were bold enough to +talk of, they had been all overwhelmed and killed. As it was, seventeen of +our men were wounded, and some of them very dangerously. But they were more +frighted than hurt too, for every one of them gave themselves over for dead +men, believing the lances were poisoned. But William was our comfort here +too; for, when two of our surgeons were of the same opinion, and told the +men foolishly enough that they would die, William cheerfully went to work +with them, and cured them all but one, who rather died by drinking some +arrack punch than of his wound; the excess of drinking throwing him into a +fever. + +We had enough of Ceylon, though some of our people were for going ashore +again, sixty or seventy men together, to be revenged; but William persuaded +them against it; and his reputation was so great among the men, as well as +with us that were commanders, that he could influence them more than any of +us. + +They were mighty warm upon their revenge, and they would go on shore, and +destroy five hundred of them. "Well," says William, "and suppose you do, +what are you the better?" "Why, then," says one of them, speaking for the +rest, "we shall have our satisfaction." "Well, and what will you be the +better for that?" says William. They could then say nothing to that. +"Then," says William, "if I mistake not, your business is money; now, I +desire to know, if you conquer and kill two or three thousand of these poor +creatures, they have no money, pray what will you get? They are poor naked +wretches; what shall you gain by them? But then," says William, "perhaps, +in doing this, you may chance to lose half-a-score of your own company, as +it is very probable you may. Pray, what gain is in it? and what account can +you give the captain for his lost men?" In short, William argued so +effectually, that he convinced them that it was mere murder to do so; and +that the men had a right to their own, and that they had no right to take +them away; that it was destroying innocent men, who had acted no otherwise +than as the laws of nature dictated; and that it would be as much murder to +do so, as to meet a man on the highway, and kill him, for the mere sake of +it, in cold blood, not regarding whether he had done any wrong to us or no. + +These reasons prevailed with them at last, and they were content to go +away, and leave them as they found them. In the first skirmish they killed +between sixty and seventy men, and wounded a great many more; but they had +nothing, and our people got nothing by it, but the loss of one man's life, +and the wounding sixteen more, as above. + +But another accident brought us to a necessity of further business with +these people, and indeed we had like to have put an end to our lives and +adventures all at once among them; for, about three days after our putting +out to sea from the place where we had that skirmish, we were attacked by a +violent storm of wind from the south, or rather a hurricane of wind from +all the points southward, for it blew in a most desperate and furious +manner from the S.E. to the S.W., one minute at one point, and then +instantly turning about again to another point, but with the same violence; +nor were we able to work the ship in that condition, so that the ship I was +in split three top-sails, and at last brought the main-top-mast by the +board; and, in a word, we were once or twice driven right ashore; and one +time, had not the wind shifted the very moment it did, we had been dashed +in a thousand pieces upon a great ledge of rocks which lay off about +half-a-league from the shore; but, as I have said, the wind shifting very +often, and at that time coming to the E.S.E., we stretched off, and got +above a league more sea-room in half-an-hour. After that, it blew with some +fury S.W. by S., then S.W. by W., and put us back again a great way to the +eastward of the ledge of rocks, where we found a great opening between the +rocks and the land, and endeavoured to come to an anchor there, but we +found there was no ground fit to anchor in, and that we should lose our +anchors, there being nothing but rocks. We stood through the opening, which +held about four leagues. The storm continued, and now we found a dreadful +foul shore, and knew not what course to take. We looked out very narrowly +for some river or creek or bay, where we might run in, and come to an +anchor, but found none a great while. At length we saw a great headland lie +out far south into the sea, and that to such a length, that, in short, we +saw plainly that, if the wind held where it was, we could not weather it, +so we ran in as much under the lee of the point as we could, and came to an +anchor in about twelve fathom water. + +But the wind veering again in the night, and blowing exceedingly hard, our +anchors came home, and the ship drove till the rudder struck against the +ground; and had the ship gone half her length farther she had been lost, +and every one of us with her. But our sheet-anchor held its own, and we +heaved in some of the cable, to get clear of the ground we had struck upon. +It was by this only cable that we rode it out all night; and towards +morning we thought the wind abated a little; and it was well for us that it +was so, for, in spite of what our sheet-anchor did for us, we found the +ship fast aground in the morning, to our very great surprise and amazement. + +When the tide was out, though the water here ebbed away, the ship lay +almost dry upon a bank of hard sand, which never, I suppose, had any ship +upon it before. The people of the country came down in great numbers to +look at us and gaze, not knowing what we were, but gaping at us as at a +great sight or wonder at which they were surprised, and knew not what to +do. + +I have reason to believe that upon the sight they immediately sent an +account of a ship being there, and of the condition we were in, for the +next day there appeared a great man; whether it was their king or no I know +not, but he had abundance of men with him, and some with long javelins in +their hands as long as half-pikes; and these came all down to the water's +edge, and drew up in a very good order, just in our view. They stood near +an hour without making any motion; and then there came near twenty of them, +with a man before them carrying a white flag. They came forward into the +water as high as their waists, the sea not going so high as before, for the +wind was abated, and blew off the shore. + +The man made a long oration to us, as we could see by his gestures; and we +sometimes heard his voice, but knew not one word he said. William, who was +always useful to us, I believe was here again the saving of all our lives. +The case was this: The fellow, or what I might call him, when his speech +was done, gave three great screams (for I know not what else to say they +were), then lowered his white flag three times, and then made three motions +to us with his arm to come to him. + +I acknowledge that I was for manning out the boat and going to them, but +William would by no means allow me. He told me we ought to trust nobody; +that, if they were barbarians, and under their own government, we might be +sure to be all murdered; and, if they were Christians, we should not fare +much better, if they knew who we were; that it was the custom of the +Malabars to betray all people that they could get into their hands, and +that these were some of the same people; and that, if we had any regard to +our own safety, we should not go to them by any means. I opposed him a +great while, and told him I thought he used to be always right, but that +now I thought he was not; that I was no more for running needless risks +than he or any one else; but I thought all nations in the world, even the +most savage people, when they held out a flag of peace, kept the offer of +peace made by that signal very sacredly; and I gave him several examples of +it in the history of my African travels, which I have here gone through in +the beginning of this work, and that I could not think these people worse +than some of them. And, besides, I told him our case seemed to be such that +we must fall into somebody's hands or other, and that we had better fall +into their hands by a friendly treaty than by a forced submission, nay, +though they had indeed a treacherous design; and therefore I was for a +parley with them. + +"Well, friend," says William very gravely, "if thou wilt go I cannot help +it; I shall only desire to take my last leave of thee at parting, for, +depend upon it, thou wilt never see us again. Whether we in the ship may +come off any better at last I cannot resolve thee; but this I will answer +for, that we will not give up our lives idly, and in cool blood, as thou +art going to do; we will at least preserve ourselves as long as we can, and +die at last like men, not like fools, trepanned by the wiles of a few +barbarians." + +William spoke this with so much warmth, and yet with so much assurance of +our fate, that I began to think a little of the risk I was going to run. I +had no more mind to be murdered than he; and yet I could not for my life be +so faint-hearted in the thing as he. Upon which I asked him if he had any +knowledge of the place, or had ever been there. He said, No. Then I asked +him if he had heard or read anything about the people of this island, and +of their way of treating any Christians that had fallen into their hands; +and he told me he had heard of one, and he would tell me the story +afterward. His name, he said, was Knox, commander of an East India ship, +who was driven on shore, just as we were, upon this island of Ceylon, +though he could not say it was at the same place, or whereabouts; that he +was beguiled by the barbarians, and enticed to come on shore, just as we +were invited to do at that time; and that, when they had him, they +surrounded him, and eighteen or twenty of his men, and never suffered them +to return, but kept them prisoners, or murdered them, he could not tell +which; but they were carried away up into the country, separated from one +another, and never heard of afterwards, except the captain's son, who +miraculously made his escape, after twenty years' slavery. + +I had no time then to ask him to give the full story of this Knox, much +less to hear him tell it me; but, as it is usual in such cases, when one +begins to be a little touched, I turned short with him. "Why then, friend +William," said I, "what would you have us do? You see what condition we are +in, and what is before us; something must be done, and that immediately." +"Why," says William, "I'll tell thee what thou shalt do; first, cause a +white flag to be hanged out, as they do to us, and man out the longboat and +pinnace with as many men as they can well stow, to handle their arms, and +let me go with them, and thou shalt see what we will do. If I miscarry, +thou mayest be safe; and I will also tell thee, that if I do miscarry, it +shall be my own fault, and thou shalt learn wit by my folly." + +I knew not what to reply to him at first; but, after some pause, I said, +"William, William, I am as both you should be lost as you are that I +should; and if there be any danger, I desire you may no more fall into it +than I. Therefore, if you will, let us all keep in the ship, fare alike, +and take our fate together." + +"No, no," says William, "there's no danger in the method I propose; thou +shalt go with me, if thou thinkest fit. If thou pleasest but to follow the +measures that I shall resolve on, depend upon it, though we will go off +from the ships, we will not a man of us go any nearer them than within call +to talk with them. Thou seest they have no boats to come off to us; but," +says he, "I rather desire thou wouldst take my advice, and manage the ships +as I shall give the signal from the boat, and let us concert that matter +together before we go off." + +Well, I found William had his measures in his head all laid beforehand, and +was not at a loss what to do at all; so I told him he should be captain for +this voyage, and we would be all of us under his orders, which I would see +observed to a tittle. + +Upon this conclusion of our debates, he ordered four-and-twenty men into +the long-boat, and twelve men into the pinnace, and the sea being now +pretty smooth, they went off, being all very well armed. Also he ordered +that all the guns of the great ship, on the side which lay next the shore, +should be loaded with musket-balls, old nails, stubs, and such-like pieces +of old iron, lead, and anything that came to hand; and that we should +prepare to fire as soon as ever we saw them lower the white flag and hoist +up a red one in the pinnace. + +With these measures fixed between us, they went off towards the shore, +William in the pinnace with twelve men, and the long-boat coming after him +with four-and-twenty more, all stout resolute fellows, and very well armed. +They rowed so near the shore as that they might speak to one another, +carrying a white flag, as the other did, and offering a parley. The brutes, +for such they were, showed themselves very courteous; but finding we could +not understand them, they fetched an old Dutchman, who had been their +prisoner many years, and set him to speak to us. The sum and substance of +his speech was, that the king of the country had sent his general down to +know who we were, and what our business was. William stood up in the stern +of the pinnace, and told him, that as to that, he, that was an European, by +his language and voice, might easily know what we were, and our condition; +the ship being aground upon the sand would also tell him that our business +there was that of a ship in distress; so William desired to know what they +came down for with such a multitude, and with arms and weapons, as if they +came to war with us. + +He answered, they might have good reason to come down to the shore, the +country being alarmed with the appearance of ships of strangers upon the +coast; and as our vessels were full of men, and as we had guns and weapons, +the king had sent part of his military men, that, in case of any invasion +upon the country, they might be ready to defend themselves, whatsoever +might be the occasion. + +"But," says he, "as you are men in distress, the king has ordered his +general, who is here also, to give you all the assistance he can, and to +invite you on shore, and receive you with all possible courtesy." Says +William, very quick upon him, "Before I give thee an answer to that, I +desire thee to tell me what thou art, for by thy speech thou art an +European." He answered presently, he was a Dutchman. "That I know well," +says William, "by thy speech; but art thou a native Dutchman of Holland, or +a native of this country, that has learned Dutch by conversing among the +Hollanders, who we know are settled upon this island?" + +"No," says the old man, "I am a native of Delft, in the province of +Holland, in Europe." + +"Well," says William, immediately, "but art thou a Christian or a heathen, +or what we call a renegado?" + +"I am," says he, "a Christian." And so they went on, in a short dialogue, +as follows:-- + +_William_. Thou art a Dutchman, and a Christian, thou sayest; pray, +art thou a freeman or a servant? + +_Dutchman_. I am a servant to the king here, and in his army. + +_W_. But art thou a volunteer, or a prisoner? + +_D_. Indeed I was a prisoner at first, but am at liberty now, and so +am a volunteer. + +_W_. That is to say, being first a prisoner, thou hast liberty to +serve them; but art thou so at liberty that thou mayest go away, if thou +pleasest, to thine own countrymen? + +_D_. No, I do not say so; my countrymen live a great way off, on the +north and east parts of the island, and there is no going to them without +the king's express license. + +_W_. Well, and why dost thou not get a license to go away? + +_D_. I have never asked for it. + +_W_. And, I suppose, if thou didst, thou knowest thou couldst not +obtain it. + +_D_. I cannot say much as to that; but why do you ask me all these +questions? + +_W_. Why, my reason is good; if thou art a Christian and a prisoner, +how canst thou consent to be made an instrument to these barbarians, to +betray us into their hands, who are thy countrymen and fellow-Christians? +Is it not a barbarous thing in thee to do so? + +_D_. How do I go about to betray you? Do I not give you an account how +the king invites you to come on shore, and has ordered you to be treated +courteously and assisted? + +_W_. As thou art a Christian, though I doubt it much, dost thou +believe the king or the general, as thou callest it, means one word of what +he says? + +_D_. He promises you by the mouth of his great general. + +_W_. I don't ask thee what he promises, or by whom; but I ask thee +this: Canst thou say that thou believest he intends to perform it? + +_D_. How can I answer that? How can I tell what he intends? + +_W_. Thou canst tell what thou believest. + +_D_. I cannot say but he will perform it; I believe he may. + +_W_. Thou art but a double-tongued Christian, I doubt. Come, I'll ask +thee another question: Wilt thou say that thou believest it, and that thou +wouldst advise me to believe it, and put our lives into their hands upon +these promises? + +_D_. I am not to be your adviser. + +_W_. Thou art perhaps afraid to speak thy mind, because thou art in +their power. Pray, do any of them understand what thou and I say? Can they +speak Dutch? + +_D_. No, not one of them; I have no apprehensions upon that account at +all. + +_W_. Why, then, answer me plainly, if thou art a Christian: Is it safe +for us to venture upon their words, to put ourselves into their hands, and +come on shore? + +_D_. You put it very home to me. Pray let me ask you another question: +Are you in any likelihood of getting your ship off, if you refuse it? + +_W_. Yes, yes, we shall get off the ship; now the storm is over we +don't fear it. + +_D_. Then I cannot say it is best for you to trust them. + +_W_. Well, it is honestly said. + +_D_. But what shall I say to them? + +_W_. Give them good words, as they give us. + +_D_. What good words? + +_W_. Why, let them tell the king that we are strangers, who were +driven on his coast by a great storm; that we thank him very kindly for his +offer of civility to us, which, if we are further distressed, we will +accept thankfully; but that at present we have no occasion to come on +shore; and besides, that we cannot safely leave the ship in the present +condition she is in; but that we are obliged to take care of her, in order +to get her off; and expect, in a tide or two more, to get her quite clear, +and at an anchor. + +_D_. But he will expect you to come on shore, then, to visit him, and +make him some present for his civility. + +_W_. When we have got our ship clear, and stopped the leaks, we will +pay our respects to him. + +_D_. Nay, you may as well come to him now as then. + +_W_. Nay, hold, friend; I did not say we would come to him then: you +talked of making him a present, that is to pay our respects to him, is it +not? + +_D_. Well, but I will tell him that you will come on shore to him when +your ship is got off. + +_W_. I have nothing to say to that; you may tell him what you think +fit. + +_D_. But he will be in a great rage if I do not. + +_W_. Who will he be in a great rage at? + +_D_. At you. + +_W_. What occasion have we to value that? + +_D_. Why, he will send all his army down against you. + +_W_. And what if they were all here just now? What dost thou suppose +they could do to us? + +_D_. He would expect they should burn your ships and bring you all to +him. + +_W_. Tell him, if he should try, he may catch a Tartar. + +_D_. He has a world of men. + +_W_. Has he any ships? + +_D_. No, he has no ships. + +_W_. Nor boats? + +_D_. No, nor boats. + +_W_. Why, what then do you think we care for his men? What canst thou +do now to us, if thou hadst a hundred thousand with thee? + +_D_. Oh! they might set you on fire. + +_W_. Set us a-firing, thou meanest; that they might indeed; but set us +on fire they shall not; they may try, at their peril, and we shall make mad +work with your hundred thousand men, if they come within reach of our guns, +I assure thee. + +_D_. But what if the king gives you hostages for your safety? + +_W_. Whom can he give but mere slaves and servants like thyself, whose +lives he no more values than we an English hound? + +_D_. Whom do you demand for hostages? + +_W_. Himself and your worship. + +_D_. What would you do with him? + +_W_. Do with him as he would do with us--cut his head off. + +_D_. And what would you do with me? + +_W_. Do with thee? We would carry thee home into thine own country; +and, though thou deservest the gallows, we would make a man and a Christian +of thee again, and not do by thee as thou wouldst have done by us--betray +thee to a parcel of merciless, savage pagans, that know no God, nor how to +show mercy to man. + +_D_. You put a thought in my head that I will speak to you about +to-morrow. + +Thus they went away, and William came on board, and gave us a full account +of his parley with the old Dutchman, which was very diverting, and to me +instructing; for I had abundance of reason to acknowledge William had made +a better judgment of things than I. + +It was our good fortune to get our ship off that very night, and to bring +her to an anchor at about a mile and a half farther out, and in deep water, +to our great satisfaction; so that we had no need to fear the Dutchman's +king, with his hundred thousand men; and indeed we had some sport with them +the next day, when they came down, a vast prodigious multitude of them, +very few less in number, in our imagination, than a hundred thousand, with +some elephants; though, if it had been an army of elephants, they could +have done us no harm; for we were fairly at our anchor now, and out of +their reach. And indeed we thought ourselves more out of their reach than +we really were; and it was ten thousand to one that we had not been fast +aground again, for the wind blowing off shore, though it made the water +smooth where we lay, yet it blew the ebb farther out than usual, and we +could easily perceive the sand, which we touched upon before, lay in the +shape of a half-moon, and surrounded us with two horns of it, so that we +lay in the middle or centre of it, as in a round bay, safe just as we were, +and in deep water, but present death, as it were, on the right hand and on +the left, for the two horns or points of the sand reached out beyond where +our ship lay near two miles. + +On that part of the sand which lay on our east side, this misguided +multitude extended themselves; and being, most of them, not above their +knees, or most of them not above ankle-deep in the water, they as it were +surrounded us on that side, and on the side of the mainland, and a little +way on the other side of the sand, standing in a half-circle, or rather +three-fifths of a circle, for about six miles in length. The other horn, or +point of the sand, which lay on our west side, being not quite so shallow, +they could not extend themselves upon it so far. + +They little thought what service they had done us, and how unwittingly, and +by the greatest ignorance, they had made themselves pilots to us, while we, +having not sounded the place, might have been lost before we were aware. It +is true we might have sounded our new harbour before we had ventured out, +but I cannot say for certain whether we should or not; for I, for my part, +had not the least suspicion of what our real case was; however, I say, +perhaps, before we had weighed, we should have looked about us a little. I +am sure we ought to have done it; for, besides these armies of human +furies, we had a very leaky ship, and all our pumps could hardly keep the +water from growing upon us, and our carpenters were overboard, working to +find out and stop the wounds we had received, heeling her first on the one +side, and then on the other; and it was very diverting to see how, when our +men heeled the ship over to the side next the wild army that stood on the +east horn of the sand, they were so amazed, between fright and joy, that it +put them into a kind of confusion, calling to one another, hallooing and +skreeking, in a manner that it is impossible to describe. + +While we were doing this, for we were in a great hurry you may be sure, and +all hands at work, as well at the stopping our leaks as repairing our +rigging and sails, which had received a great deal of damage, and also in +rigging a new main-top-mast and the like;--I say, while we were doing all +this, we perceived a body of men, of near a thousand, move from that part +of the army of the barbarians that lay at the bottom of the sandy bay, and +came all along the water's edge, round the sand, till they stood just on +our broadside east, and were within about half-a-mile of us. Then we saw +the Dutchman come forward nearer to us, and all alone, with his white flag +and all his motions, just as before, and there he stood. + +Our men had but just brought the ship to rights again as they came up to +our broadside, and we had very happily found out and stopped the worst and +most dangerous leak that we had, to our very great satisfaction; so I +ordered the boats to be hauled up and manned as they were the day before, +and William to go as plenipotentiary. I would have gone myself if I had +understood Dutch, but as I did not, it was to no purpose, for I should be +able to know nothing of what was said but from him at second-hand, which +might be done as well afterwards. All the instructions I pretended to give +William was, if possible, to get the old Dutchman away, and, if he could, +to make him come on board. + +Well, William went just as before, and when he came within about sixty or +seventy yards of the shore, he held up his white flag as the Dutchman did, +and turning the boat's broadside to the shore, and his men lying upon their +oars, the parley or dialogue began again thus:-- + +_William_. Well, friend, what dost thou say to us now? + +_Dutchman_. I come of the same mild errand as I did yesterday. + +_W_. What! dost thou pretend to come of a mild errand with all these +people at thy back, and all the foolish weapons of war they bring with +them? Prithee, what dost thou mean? + +_D_. The king hastens us to invite the captain and all his men to come +on shore, and has ordered all his men to show them all the civility they +can. + +_W_. Well, and are all those men come to invite us ashore? + +D. They will do you no hurt, if you will come on shore peaceably. + +W. Well, and what dost thou think they can do to us, if we will not? + +D. I would not have them do you any hurt then, neither. + +W. But prithee, friend, do not make thyself fool and knave too. Dost not +thou know that we are out of fear of all thy army, and out of danger of all +that they can do? What makes thee act so simply as well as so knavishly? + +D. Why, you may think yourselves safer than you are; you do not know what +they may do to you. I can assure you they are able to do you a great deal +of harm, and perhaps burn your ship. + +W. Suppose that were true, as I am sure it is false; you see we have more +ships to carry us off (pointing to the sloop). + +[N.B.--Just at this time we discovered the sloop standing towards us from +the east, along the shore, at about the distance of two leagues, which was +to our particular satisfaction, she having been missing thirteen days.] + +D. We do not value that; if you had ten ships, you dare not come on shore, +with all the men you have, in a hostile way; we are too many for you. + +W. Thou dost not, even in that, speak as thou meanest; and we may give thee +a trial of our hands when our friends come up to us, for thou hearest they +have discovered us. + +[Just then the sloop fired five guns, which was to get news of us, for they +did not see us.] + +D. Yes, I hear they fire; but I hope your ship will not fire again; for, if +they do, our general will take it for breaking the truce, and will make the +army let fly a shower of arrows at you in the boat. + +W. Thou mayest be sure the ship will fire that the other ship may hear +them, but not with ball. If thy general knows no better, he may begin when +he will; but thou mayest be sure we will return it to his cost. + +D. What must I do, then? + +W. Do! Why, go to him, and tell him of it beforehand, then; and let him +know that the ship firing is not at him nor his men; and then come again, +and tell us what he says. + +D. No; I will send to him, which will do as well. + +W. Do as thou wilt, but I believe thou hadst better go thyself; for if our +men fire first, I suppose he will be in a great wrath, and it may be at +thee; for, as to his wrath at us, we tell thee beforehand we value it not. + +D. You slight them too much; you know not what they may do. + +W. Thou makest as if these poor savage wretches could do mighty things: +prithee, let us see what you can all do, we value it not; thou mayest set +down thy flag of truce when thou pleasest, and begin. + +D. I had rather make a truce, and have you all part friends. + +W. Thou art a deceitful rogue thyself, for it is plain thou knowest these +people would only persuade us on shore to entrap and surprise us; and yet +thou that art a Christian, as thou callest thyself, would have us come on +shore and put our lives into their hands who know nothing that belongs to +compassion, good usage, or good manners. How canst thou be such a villain? + +D. How can you call me so? What have I done to you, and what would you have +me do? + +W. Not act like a traitor, but like one that was once a Christian, and +would have been so still, if you had not been a Dutchman. + +D. I know not what to do, not I. I wish I were from them; they are a bloody +people. + +W. Prithee, make no difficulty of what thou shouldst do. Canst thou swim? + +D. Yes, I can swim; but if I should attempt to swim off to you, I should +have a thousand arrows and javelins sticking in me before I should get to +your boat. + +W. I'll bring the boat close to thee, and take thee on board in spite of +them all. We will give them but one volley, and I'll engage they will all +run away from thee. + +D. You are mistaken in them, I assure you; they would immediately come all +running down to the shore, and shoot fire-arrows at you, and set your boat +and ship and all on fire about your ears. + +W. We will venture that if thou wilt come off. + +D. Will you use me honourably when I am among you? + +W. I'll give thee my word for it, if thou provest honest. + +D. Will you not make me a prisoner? + +W. I will be thy surety, body for body, that thou shalt be a free man, and +go whither thou wilt, though I own to thee thou dost not deserve it. + +Just at this time our ship fired three guns to answer the sloop and let her +know we saw her, who immediately, we perceived, understood it, and stood +directly for the place. But it is impossible to express the confusion and +filthy vile noise, the hurry and universal disorder, that was among that +vast multitude of people upon our firing off three guns. They immediately +all repaired to their arms, as I may call it; for to say they put +themselves into order would be saying nothing. + +Upon the word of command, then, they advanced all in a body to the seaside, +and resolving to give us one volley of their fire-arms (for such they +were), immediately they saluted us with a hundred thousand of their +fire-arrows, every one carrying a little bag of cloth dipped in brimstone, +or some such thing, which, flying through the air, had nothing to hinder it +taking fire as it flew, and it generally did so. + +I cannot say but this method of attacking us, by a way we had no notion of, +might give us at first some little surprise, for the number was so great at +first, that we were not altogether without apprehensions that they might +unluckily set our ship on fire, so that William resolved immediately to row +on board, and persuade us all to weigh and stand out to sea; but there was +no time for it, for they immediately let fly a volley at the boat, and at +the ship, from all parts of the vast crowd of people which stood near the +shore. Nor did they fire, as I may call it, all at once, and so leave off; +but their arrows being soon notched upon their bows, they kept continually +shooting, so that the air was full of flame. + +I could not say whether they set their cotton rag on fire before they shot +the arrow, for I did not perceive they had fire with them, which, however, +it seems they had. The arrow, besides the fire it carried with it, had a +head, or a peg, as we call it, of bone; and some of sharp flint stone; and +some few of a metal, too soft in itself for metal, but hard enough to cause +it to enter, if it were a plank, so as to stick where it fell. + +William and his men had notice sufficient to lie close behind their +waste-boards, which, for this very purpose, they had made so high that they +could easily sink themselves behind them, so as to defend themselves from +anything that came point-blank (as we call it) or upon a line; but for what +might fall perpendicularly out of the air they had no guard, but took the +hazard of that. At first they made as if they would row away, but before +they went they gave a volley of their fire-arms, firing at those which +stood with the Dutchman; but William ordered them to be sure to take their +aim at others, so as to miss him, and they did so. + +There was no calling to them now, for the noise was so great among them +that they could hear nobody, but our men boldly rowed in nearer to them, +for they were at first driven a little off, and when they came nearer, they +fired a second volley, which put the fellows into great confusion, and we +could see from the ship that several of them were killed or wounded. + +We thought this was a very unequal fight, and therefore we made a signal to +our men to row away, that we might have a little of the sport as well as +they; but the arrows flew so thick upon them, being so near the shore, that +they could not sit to their oars, so they spread a little of their sail, +thinking they might sail along the shore, and lie behind their waste-board; +but the sail had not been spread six minutes till it had five hundred +fire-arrows shot into it and through it, and at length set it fairly on +fire; nor were our men quite out of the danger of its setting the boat on +fire, and this made them paddle and shove the boat away as well as they +could, as they lay, to get farther off. + +By this time they had left us a fair mark at the whole savage army; and as +we had sheered the ship as near to them as we could, we fired among the +thickest of them six or seven times, five guns at a time, with shot, old +iron, musket-bullets, &c. + +We could easily see that we made havoc among them, and killed and wounded +abundance of them, and that they were in a great surprise at it; but yet +they never offered to stir, and all this while their fire-arrows flew as +thick as before. + +At last, on a sudden their arrows stopped, and the old Dutchman came +running down to the water-side all alone, with his white flag, as before, +waving it as high as he could, and making signals to our boat to come to +him again. + +William did not care at first to go near him, but the man continuing to +make signals to him to come, at last William went; and the Dutchman told +him that he had been with the general, who was much mollified by the +slaughter of his men, and that now he could have anything of him. + +"Anything!" says William; "what have we to do with him? Let him go about +his business, and carry his men out of gunshot, can't he?" + +"Why," says the Dutchman, "but he dares not stir, nor see the king's face; +unless some of your men come on shore, he will certainly put him to death." + +"Why, then," says William, "he is a dead man; for if it were to save his +life, and the lives of all the crowd that is with him, he shall never have +one of us in his power. But I'll tell thee," said William, "how thou shalt +cheat him, and gain thy own liberty too, if thou hast any mind to see thy +own country again, and art not turned savage, and grown fond of living all +thy days among heathens and savages." + +"I would be glad to do it with all my heart," says he; "but if I should +offer to swim off to you now, though they are so far from me, they shoot so +true that they would kill me before I got half-way." + +"But," says William, "I'll tell thee how thou shalt come with his consent. +Go to him, and tell him I have offered to carry you on board, to try if you +could persuade the captain to come on shore, and that I would not hinder +him if he was willing to venture." + +The Dutchman seemed in a rapture at the very first word. "I'll do it," says +he; "I am persuaded he will give me leave to come." + +Away he runs, as if he had a glad message to carry, and tells the general +that William had promised, if he would go on board the ship with him, he +would persuade the captain to return with him. The general was fool enough +to give him orders to go, and charged him not to come back without the +captain; which he readily promised, and very honestly might. + +So they took him in, and brought him on board, and he was as good as his +word to them, for he never went back to them any more; and the sloop being +come to the mouth of the inlet where we lay, we weighed and set sail; but, +as we went out, being pretty near the shore, we fired three guns, as it +were among them, but without any shot, for it was of no use to us to hurt +any more of them. After we had fired, we gave them a cheer, as the seamen +call it; that is to say, we hallooed, at them, by way of triumph, and so +carried off their ambassador. How it fared with their general, we know +nothing of that. + +This passage, when I related it to a friend of mine, after my return from +those rambles, agreed so well with his relation of what happened to one Mr +Knox, an English captain, who some time ago was decoyed on shore by these +people, that it could not but be very much to my satisfaction to think what +mischief we had all escaped; and I think it cannot but be very profitable +to record the other story (which is but short) with my own, to show whoever +reads this what it was I avoided, and prevent their falling into the like, +if they have to do with the perfidious people of Ceylon. The relation is as +follows:-- + +The island of Ceylon being inhabited for the greatest part by barbarians, +which will not allow any trade or commerce with any European nation, and +inaccessible by any travellers, it will be convenient to relate the +occasion how the author of this story happened to go into this island, and +what opportunities he had of being fully acquainted with the people, their +laws and customs, that so we may the better depend upon the account, and +value it as it deserves, for the rarity as well as the truth of it; and +both these the author gives us a brief relation of in this manner. His +words are as follows: + +In the year 1657, the _Anne_ frigate, of London, Captain Robert Knox, +commander, on the 21st day of January, set sail out of the Downs, in the +service of the honourable East India Company of England, bound for Fort St +George, upon the coast of Coromandel, to trade for one year from port to +port in India; which having performed, as he was lading his goods to return +for England, being in the road of Masulipatam, on the 19th of November +1659, there happened such a mighty storm, that in it several ships were +cast away, and he was forced to cut his mainmast by the board, which so +disabled the ship, that he could not proceed in his voyage; whereupon +Cottiar, in the island of Ceylon, being a very commodious bay, fit for her +present distress, Thomas Chambers, Esq., since Sir Thomas Chambers, the +agent at Fort St George, ordered that the ship should take in some cloth +and India merchants belonging to Porto Novo, who might trade there while +she lay to set her mast, and repair the other damages sustained by the +storm. At her first coming thither, after the Indian merchants were set +ashore, the captain and his men were very jealous of the people of that +place, by reason the English never had any commerce or dealing with them; +but after they had been there twenty days, going ashore and returning again +at pleasure, without any molestation, they began to lay aside all +suspicious thoughts of the people that dwelt thereabouts, who had kindly +entertained them for their money. + +By this time the king of the country had notice of their arrival, and, not +being acquainted with their intents, he sent down a dissauva, or general, +with an army, to them, who immediately sent a messenger to the captain on +board, to desire him to come ashore to him, pretending a letter from the +king. The captain saluted the message with firing of guns, and ordered his +son, Robert Knox, and Mr John Loveland, merchant of the ship, to go ashore, +and wait on him. When they were come before him, he demanded who they were, +and how long they should stay. They told him they were Englishmen, and not +to stay above twenty or thirty days, and desired permission to trade in his +Majesty's port. His answer was, that the king was glad to hear the English +were come into his country, and had commanded him to assist them as they +should desire, and had sent a letter to be delivered to none but the +captain himself. They were then twelve miles from the seaside, and +therefore replied, that the captain could not leave his ship to come so +far; but if he pleased to go down to the seaside, the captain would wait on +him to receive the letter; whereupon the dissauva desired them to stay that +day, and on the morrow he would go with them; which, rather than displease +him in so small a matter, they consented to. In the evening the dissauva +sent a present to the captain of cattle and fruits, &c., which, being +carried all night by the messengers, was delivered to him in the morning, +who told him withal that his men were coming down with the dissauva, and +desired his company on shore against his coming, having a letter from the +king to deliver into his own hand. The captain, mistrusting nothing, came +on shore with his boat, and, sitting under a tamarind tree, waited for the +dissauva. In the meantime the native soldiers privately surrounded him and +the seven men he had with him, and seizing them, carried them to meet the +dissauva, bearing the captain on a hammock on their shoulders. + +The next day the long-boat's crew, not knowing what had happened, came on +shore to cut down a tree to make cheeks for the mainmast, and were made +prisoners after the same manner, though with more violence, because they +were more rough with them, and made resistance; yet they were not brought +to the captain and his company, but quartered in another house in the same +town. + +The dissauva having thus gotten two boats and eighteen men, his next care +was to gain the ship; and to that end, telling the captain that he and his +men were only detained because the king intended to send letters and a +present to the English nation by him, desired he would send some men on +board his ship to order her to stay; and because the ship was in danger of +being fired by the Dutch if she stayed long in the bay, to bring her up the +river. The captain did not approve of the advice, but did not dare to own +his dislike; so he sent his son with the order, but with a solemn +conjuration to return again, which he accordingly did, bringing a letter +from the company in the ship, that they would not obey the captain, nor any +other, in this matter, but were resolved to stand on their own defence. +This letter satisfied the dissauva, who thereupon gave the captain leave to +write for what he would have brought from the ship, pretending that he had +not the king's order to release them, though it would suddenly come. + +The captain seeing he was held in suspense, and the season of the year +spending for the ship to proceed on her voyage to some place, sent order to +Mr John Burford, the chief mate, to take charge of the ship, and set sail +to Porto Novo, from whence they came, and there to follow the agent's +order. + +And now began that long and sad captivity they all along feared. The ship +being gone, the dissauva was called up to the king, and they were kept +under guards a while, till a special order came from the king to part them, +and put one in a town, for the conveniency of their maintenance, which the +king ordered to be at the charge of the country. On September 16, 1660, the +captain and his son were placed in a town called Bonder Coswat, in the +country of Hotcurly [? Hewarrisse Korle], distant from the city of Kandy +northward thirty miles, and from the rest of the English a full day's +journey. Here they had their provisions brought them twice a day, without +money, as much as they could eat, and as good as the country yielded. The +situation of the place was very pleasant and commodious; but that year that +part of the land was very sickly by agues and fevers, of which many died. +The captain and his son after some time were visited with the common +distemper, and the captain, being also loaded with grief for his deplorable +condition, languished more than three months, and then died, February 9, +1661. + +Robert Knox, his son, was now left desolate, sick, and in captivity, having +none to comfort him but God, who is the Father of the fatherless, and hears +the groans of such as are in captivity; being alone to enter upon a long +scene of misery and calamity; oppressed with weakness of body and grief of +soul for the loss of his father, and the remediless trouble that he was +like to endure; and the first instance of it was in the burial of his +father, for he sent his black boy to the people of the town, to desire +their assistance, because they understood not their language; but they sent +him only a rope, to drag him by the neck into the woods, and told him that +they would offer him no other help, unless he would pay for it. This +barbarous answer increased his trouble for his father's death, that now he +was like to lie unburied, and be made a prey to the wild beasts in the +woods; for the ground was very hard, and they had not tools to dig with, +and so it was impossible for them to bury him; and having a small matter of +money left him, viz., a pagoda and a gold ring, he hired a man, and so +buried him in as decent a manner as their condition would permit. + +His dead father being thus removed out of his sight, but his ague +continuing, he was reduced very low, partly by sorrow and partly by his +disease. All the comfort he had was to go into the wood and fields with a +book, either the "Practice of Piety" or Mr Rogers's "Seven Treatises," +which were the only two books he had, and meditate and read, and sometimes +pray; in which his anguish made him often invert Elijah's petition,--that +he might die, because his life was a burden to him. God, though He was +pleased to prolong his life, yet He found a way to lighten his grief, by +removing his ague, and granting him a desire which above all things was +acceptable to him. He had read his two books over so often that he had both +almost by heart; and though they were both pious and good writings, yet he +longed for the truth from the original fountain, and thought it his +greatest unhappiness that he had not a Bible, and did believe that he +should never see one again; but, contrary to his expectation, God brought +him one after this manner. As he was fishing one day with his black boy, to +catch some fish to relieve his hunger, an old man passed by them, and asked +his boy whether his master could read; and when the boy had answered yes, +he told him that he had gotten a book from the Portuguese, when they left +Colombo; and, if his master pleased, he would sell it him. The boy told his +master, who bade him go and see what book it was. The boy having served the +English some time, knew the book, and as soon as he got it into his hand, +came running to him, calling out before he came to him, "It is the Bible!" +The words startled him, and he flung down his angle to meet him, and, +finding it was true, was mightily rejoiced to see it; but he was afraid he +should not have enough to purchase it, though he was resolved to part with +all the money he had, which was but one pagoda, to buy it; but his black +boy persuading him to slight it, and leave it to him to buy it, he at +length obtained it for a knit cap. + +This accident he could not but look upon as a great miracle, that God +should bestow upon him such an extraordinary blessing, and bring him a +Bible in his own native language, in such a remote part of the world, where +His name was not known, and where it was never heard of that an Englishman +had ever been before. The enjoyment of this mercy was a great comfort to +him in captivity, and though he wanted no bodily convenience that the +country did afford; for the king, immediately after his father's death, had +sent an express order to the people of the towns, that they should be kind +to him, and give him good victuals; and after he had been some time in the +country, and understood the language, he got him good conveniences, as a +house and gardens; and falling to husbandry, God so prospered him, that he +had plenty, not only for himself, but to lend others; which being, +according to the custom of the country, at 50 per cent. a year, much +enriched him: he had also goats, which served him for mutton, and hogs and +hens. Notwithstanding this, I say, for he lived as fine as any of their +noblemen, he could not so far forget his native country as to be contented +to dwell in a strange land, where there was to him a famine of God's word +and sacraments, the want of which made all other things to be of little +value to him; therefore, as he made it his daily and fervent prayer to God, +in His good time, to restore him to both, so, at length, he, with one +Stephen Rutland, who had lived with him two years before, resolved to make +their escape, and, about the year 1673, meditated all secret ways to +compass it. They had before taken up a way of peddling about the country, +and buying tobacco, pepper, garlic, combs, and all sorts of iron ware, and +carried them into those parts of the country where they wanted them; and +now, to promote their design, as they went with their commodities from +place to place, they discoursed with the country people (for they could now +speak their language well) concerning the ways and inhabitants, where the +isle was thinnest and fullest inhabited, where and how the watches lay from +one country to another, and what commodities were proper for them to carry +into all parts; pretending that they would furnish themselves with such +wares as the respective places wanted. None doubted but what they did was +upon the account of trade, because Mr Knox was so well seated, and could +not be supposed to leave such an estate, by travelling northward, because +that part of the land was least inhabited; and so, furnishing themselves +with such wares as were vendible in those parts, they set forth, and +steered their course towards the north part of the islands, knowing very +little of the ways, which were generally intricate and perplexed, because +they have no public roads, but a multitude of little paths from one town to +another, and those often changing; and for white men to inquire about the +ways was very dangerous, because the people would presently suspect their +design. + +At this time they travelled from Conde Uda as far as the country of +Nuwarakalawiya, which is the furthermost part of the king's dominions, and +about three days' journey from their dwelling. They were very thankful to +Providence that they had passed all difficulties so far, but yet they durst +not go any farther, because they had no wares left to traffic with; and it +being the first time they had been absent so long from home, they feared +the townsmen would come after them to seek for them; and so they returned +home, and went eight or ten times into those parts with their wares, till +they became well acquainted both with the people and the paths. + +In these parts Mr Knox met his black boy, whom he had turned away divers +years before. He had now got a wife and children, and was very poor; but +being acquainted with these quarters, he not only took directions of him, +but agreed with him, for a good reward, to conduct him and his companions +to the Dutch. He gladly undertook it, and a time was appointed between +them; but Mr Knox being disabled by a grievous pain, which seized him on +his right side, and held him five days that he could not travel, this +appointment proved in vain; for though he went as soon as he was well, his +guide was gone into another country about his business, and they durst not +at that time venture to run away without him. + +These attempts took up eight or nine years, various accidents hindering +their designs, but most commonly the dry weather, because they feared in +the woods they should be starved with thirst, all the country being in such +a condition almost four or five years together for lack of rain. + +On September 22, 1679, they set forth again, furnished with knives and +small axes for their defence, because they could carry them privately and +send all sorts of wares to sell as formerly, and all necessary provisions, +the moon being twenty-seven days old, that they might have light to run +away by, to try what success God Almighty would now give them in seeking +their liberty. Their first stage was to Anuradhapoora, in the way to which +lay a wilderness, called Parraoth Mocolane, full of wild elephants, tigers, +and bears; and because it is the utmost confines of the king's dominions, +there is always a watch kept. + +In the middle of the way they heard that the governor's officers of these +parts were out to gather up the king's revenues and duties, to send them up +to the city; which put them into no small fear, lest, finding them, they +should send them back again; whereupon they withdrew to the western parts +of Ecpoulpot, and sat down to knitting till they heard the officers were +gone. As soon as they were departed, they went onwards of their journey, +having got a good parcel of cotton-yarn to knit caps with, and having kept +their wares, as they pretended, to exchange for dried flesh, which was sold +only in those lower parts. Their way lay necessarily through the governor's +yard at Kalluvilla, who dwells there on purpose to examine all that go and +come. This greatly distressed them, because he would easily suspect they +were out of their bounds, being captives; however, they went resolutely to +his house, and meeting him, presented him with a small parcel of tobacco +and betel; and, showing him their wares, told him they came to get dried +flesh to carry back with them. The governor did not suspect them, but told +them he was sorry they came in so dry a time, when no deer were to be +catched, but if some rain fell, he would soon supply them. This answer +pleased them, and they seemed contented to stay; and accordingly, abiding +with him two or three days, and no rain falling, they presented the +governor with five or six charges of gunpowder, which is a rarity among +them; and leaving a bundle at his house, they desired him to shoot them +some deer, while they made a step to Anuradhapoora. Here also they were put +in a great fright by the coming of certain soldiers from the king to the +governor, to give him orders to set a secure guard at the watches, that no +suspicious persons might pass, which, though it was only intended to +prevent the flight of the relations of certain nobles whom the king had +clapped up, yet they feared they might wonder to see white men here, and so +send them back again; but God so ordered it that they were very kind to +them and left them to their business, and so they got safe to +Anuradhapoora. Their pretence was dried flesh, though they knew there was +none to be had; but their real business was to search the way down to the +Dutch, which they stayed three days to do; but finding that in the way to +Jaffnapatam, which is one of the Dutch ports, there was a watch which could +hardly be passed, and other inconveniences not surmountable, they resolved +to go back, and take the river Malwatta Oya, which they had before judged +would be a probable guide to lead them to the sea; and, that they might not +be pursued, left Anuradhapoora just at night, when the people never travel +for fear of wild beasts, on Sunday, October 12, being stored with all +things needful for their journey, viz., ten days' provision, a basin to +boil their provision in, two calabashes to fetch water in, and two great +tallipat leaves for tents, with jaggery, sweetmeats, tobacco, betel, +tinder-boxes, and a deerskin for shoes, to keep their feet from thorns, +because to them they chiefly trusted. Being come to the river, they struck +into the woods, and kept by the side of it; yet not going on the sand (lest +their footsteps should be discerned), unless forced, and then going +backwards. + +Being gotten a good way into the wood, it began to rain; wherefore they +erected their tents, made a fire, and refreshed themselves against the +rising of the moon, which was then eighteen days old; and having tied +deerskins about their feet, and eased themselves of their wares, they +proceeded on their journey. When they had travelled three or four hours +with difficulty, because the moon gave but little light among the thick +trees, they found an elephant in their way before them, and because they +could not scare him away, they were forced to stay till morning; and so +they kindled a fire, and took a pipe of tobacco. By the light they could +not discern that ever anybody had been there, nothing being to be seen but +woods; and so they were in great hopes that they were past all danger, +being beyond all inhabitants; but they were mistaken, for the river winding +northward, brought them into the midst of a parcel of towns, called Tissea +Wava, where, being in danger of being seen, they were under a mighty +terror; for had the people found them, they would have beat them, and sent +them up to the king; and, to avoid it, they crept into a hollow tree, and +sat there in mud and wet till it began to grow dark, and then betaking +themselves to their legs, travelled till the darkness of night stopped +them. They heard voices behind them, and feared it was somebody in pursuit +of them; but at length, discerning it was only an hallooing to keep the +wild beasts out of the corn, they pitched their tents by the river, and +having boiled rice and roasted meat for their suppers, and satisfied their +hunger, they committed themselves to God's keeping, and laid them down to +sleep. + +The next morning, to prevent the worst, they got up early and hastened on +their journey; and though they were now got out of all danger of the tame +Chiangulays, they were in great danger of the wild ones, of whom those +woods were full; and though they saw their tents, yet they were all gone, +since the rains had fallen, from the river into the woods; and so God kept +them from that danger, for, had they met the wild men, they had been shot. + +Thus they travelled from morning till night several days, through bushes +and thorns, which made their arms and shoulders, which were naked, all of a +gore blood. They often met with bears, hogs, deer, and wild buffaloes; but +they all ran away as soon as they saw them. The river was exceedingly full +of alligators; in the evening they used to pitch their tents, and make +great fires both before and behind them, to affright the wild beasts; and +though they heard the voices of all sorts, they saw none. + +On Thursday, at noon, they crossed the river Coronda [? Kannadera Oya], +which parts the country of the Malabars from the king's, and on Friday, +about nine or ten in the morning, came among the inhabitants, of whom they +were as much afraid as of the Chiangulays before; for, though the +Wanniounay, or prince of this people, payeth tribute to the Dutch out of +fear, yet he is better affected to the King of Kandy, and, if he had took +them, would have sent them up to their old master; but not knowing any way +to escape, they kept on their journey by the river-side by day, because the +woods were not to be travelled by night for thorns and wild beasts, who +came down then to the river to drink. In all the Malabar country they met +with only two Brahmins, who treated them very civilly; and for their money, +one of them conducted them till they came into the territories of the +Dutch, and out of all danger of the King of Kandy, which did not a little +rejoice them; but yet they were in no small trouble how to find the way out +of the woods, till a Malabar, for the lucre of a knife, conducted them to a +Dutch town, where they found guides to conduct them from town to town, till +they came to the fort called Aripo, where they arrived Saturday, October +18, 1679, and there thankfully adored God's wonderful providence, in thus +completing their deliverance from a long captivity of nineteen years and +six months. + +I come now back to my own history, which grows near a conclusion, as to the +travels I took in this part of the world. We were now at sea, and we stood +away to the north for a while, to try if we could get a market for our +spice, for we were very rich in nutmegs, but we ill knew what to do with +them; we durst not go upon the English coast, or, to speak more properly, +among the English factories to trade; not that we were afraid to fight any +two ships they had, and, besides that, we knew that, as they had no letters +of marque, or of reprisals from the government, so it was none of their +business to act offensively, no, not though we were pirates. Indeed, if we +had made any attempt upon them, they might have justified themselves in +joining together to resist, and assisting one another to defend themselves; +but to go out of their business to attack a pirate ship of almost fifty +guns, as we were, it was plain that it was none of their business, and +consequently it was none of our concern, so we did not trouble ourselves +about it; but, on the other hand, it was none of our business to be seen +among them, and to have the news of us carried from one factory to another, +so that whatever design we might be upon at another time, we should be sure +to be prevented and discovered. Much less had we any occasion to be seen +among any of the Dutch factories upon the coast of Malabar; for, being +fully laden with the spices which we had, in the sense of their trade, +plundered them of, it would have told them what we were, and all that we +had been doing; and they would, no doubt, have concerned themselves all +manner of ways to have fallen upon us. + +The only way we had for it was to stand away for Goa, and trade, if we +could, for our spices, with the Portuguese factory there. Accordingly, we +sailed almost thither, for we had made land two days before, and being in +the latitude of Goa, were standing in fair for Margaon, on the head of +Salsat, at the going up to Goa, when I called to the men at the helm to +bring the ship to, and bid the pilot go away N.N.W., till we came out of +sight of the shore, when William and I called a council, as we used to do +upon emergencies, what course we should take to trade there and not be +discovered; and we concluded at length that we would not go thither at all, +but that William, with such trusty fellows only as could be depended upon, +should go in the sloop to Surat, which was still farther northward, and +trade there as merchants with such of the English factory as they could +find to be for their turn. + +To carry this with the more caution, and so as not to be suspected, we +agreed to take out all her guns, and put such men into her, and no other, +as would promise us not to desire or offer to go on shore, or to enter into +any talk or conversation with any that might come on board; and, to finish +the disguise to our mind, William documented two of our men, one a surgeon, +as he himself was, and the other, a ready-witted fellow, an old sailor, +that had been a pilot upon the coast of New England, and was an excellent +mimic; these two William dressed up like two Quakers, and made them talk +like such. The old pilot he made go captain of the sloop, and the surgeon +for doctor, as he was, and himself supercargo. In this figure, and the +sloop all plain, no curled work upon her (indeed she had not much before), +and no guns to be seen, away he went for Surat. + +I should, indeed, have observed, that we went, some days before we parted, +to a small sandy island close under the shore, where there was a good cove +of deep water, like a road, and out of sight of any of the factories, which +are here very thick upon the coast. Here we shifted the loading of the +sloop, and put into her such things only as we had a mind to dispose of +there, which was indeed little but nutmegs and cloves, but chiefly the +former; and from thence William and his two Quakers, with about eighteen +men in the sloop, went away to Surat, and came to an anchor at a distance +from the factory. + +William used such caution that he found means to go on shore himself, and +the doctor, as he called him, in a boat which came on board them to sell +fish, rowed with only Indians of the country, which boat he afterwards +hired to carry him on board again. It was not long that they were on shore, +but that they found means to get acquaintance with some Englishmen, who, +though they lived there, and perhaps were the company's servants at first, +yet appeared then to be traders for themselves, in whatever coast business +especially came in their way; and the doctor was made the first to pick +acquaintance; so he recommended his friend, the supercargo, till, by +degrees, the merchants were as fond of the bargain as our men were of the +merchants, only that the cargo was a little too much for them. + +However, this did not prove a difficulty long with them, for the next day +they brought two more merchants, English also, into their bargain, and, as +William could perceive by their discourse, they resolved, if they bought +them, to carry them to the Gulf of Persia upon their own accounts. William +took the hint, and, as he told me afterwards, concluded we might carry them +there as well as they. But this was not William's present business; he had +here no less than three-and-thirty ton of nuts and eighteen ton of cloves. +There was a good quantity of mace among the nutmegs, but we did not stand +to make much allowance. In short, they bargained, and the merchants, who +would gladly have bought sloop and all, gave William directions, and two +men for pilots, to go to a creek about six leagues from the factory, where +they brought boats, and unloaded the whole cargo, and paid William very +honestly for it; the whole parcel amounting, in money, to about thirty-five +thousand pieces of eight, besides some goods of value, which William was +content to take, and two large diamonds, worth about three hundred pounds +sterling. + +When they paid the money, William invited them on board the sloop, where +they came; and the merry old Quaker diverted them exceedingly with his +talk, and "thee'd" them and "thou'd" them till he made them so drunk that +they could not go on shore for that night. + +They would fain have known who our people were, and whence they came; but +not a man in the sloop would answer them to any question they asked, but in +such a manner as let them think themselves bantered and jested with. +However, in discourse, William said they were able men for any cargo we +could have brought them, and that they would have bought twice as much +spice if we had had it. He ordered the merry captain to tell them that they +had another sloop that lay at Margaon, and that had a great quantity of +spice on board also; and that, if it was not sold when he went back (for +that thither he was bound), he would bring her up. + +Their new chaps were so eager, that they would have bargained with the old +captain beforehand. "Nay, friend," said he, "I will not trade with thee +unsight and unseen; neither do I know whether the master of the sloop may +not have sold his loading already to some merchants of Salsat; but if he +has not when I come to him, I think to bring him up to thee." + +The doctor had his employment all this while, as well as William and the +old captain, for he went on shore several times a day in the Indian boat, +and brought fresh provisions for the sloop, which the men had need enough +of. He brought, in particular, seventeen large casks of arrack, as big as +butts, besides smaller quantities, a quantity of rice, and abundance of +fruits, mangoes, pompions, and such things, with fowls and fish. He never +came on board but he was deep laden; for, in short, he bought for the ship +as well as for themselves; and, particularly, they half-loaded the ship +with rice and arrack, with some hogs, and six or seven cows, alive; and +thus, being well victualled, and having directions for coming again, they +returned to us. + +William was always the lucky welcome messenger to us, but never more +welcome to us than now; for where we had thrust in the ship, we could get +nothing, except a few mangoes and roots, being not willing to make any +steps into the country, or make ourselves known till we had news of our +sloop; and indeed our men's patience was almost tired, for it was seventeen +days that William spent upon this enterprise, and well bestowed too. + +When he came back we had another conference upon the subject of trade, +namely, whether we should send the best of our spices, and other goods we +had in the ship, to Surat, or whether we should go up to the Gulf of Persia +ourselves, where it was probable we might sell them as well as the English +merchants of Surat. William was for going ourselves, which, by the way, was +from the good, frugal, merchant-like temper of the man, who was for the +best of everything; but here I overruled William, which I very seldom took +upon me to do; but I told him, that, considering our circumstances, it was +much better for us to sell all our cargoes here, though we made but +half-price of them, than to go with them to the Gulf of Persia, where we +should run a greater risk, and where people would be much more curious and +inquisitive into things than they were here, and where it would not be so +easy to manage them, seeing they traded freely and openly there, not by +stealth, as those men seemed to do; and, besides, if they suspected +anything, it would be much more difficult for us to retreat, except by mere +force, than here, where we were upon the high sea as it were, and could be +gone whenever we pleased, without any disguise, or, indeed, without the +least appearance of being pursued, none knowing where to look for us. + +My apprehensions prevailed with William, whether my reasons did or no, and +he submitted; and we resolved to try another ship's loading to the same +merchants. The main business was to consider how to get off that +circumstance that had exposed them to the English merchants, namely that it +was our other sloop; but this the old Quaker pilot undertook; for being, as +I said, an excellent mimic himself, it was the easier for him to dress up +the sloop in new clothes; and first, he put on all the carved work he had +taken off before; her stern, which was painted of a dumb white or dun +colour before, all flat, was now all lacquered and blue, and I know not how +many gay figures in it; as to her quarter, the carpenters made her a neat +little gallery on either side; she had twelve guns put into her, and some +petereroes upon her gunnel, none of which were there before; and to finish +her new habit or appearance, and make her change complete, he ordered her +sails to be altered; and as she sailed before with a half-sprit, like a +yacht, she sailed now with square-sail and mizzen-mast, like a ketch; so +that, in a word, she was a perfect cheat, disguised in everything that a +stranger could be supposed to take any notice of that had never had but one +view, for they had been but once on board. + +In this mean figure the sloop returned; she had a new man put into her for +captain, one we knew how to trust; and the old pilot appearing only as a +passenger, the doctor and William acting as the supercargoes, by a formal +procuration from one Captain Singleton, and all things ordered in form. + +We had a complete loading for the sloop; for, besides a very great quantity +of nutmegs and cloves, mace, and some cinnamon, she had on board some goods +which we took in as we lay about the Philippine Islands, while we waited as +looking for purchase. + +William made no difficulty of selling this cargo also, and in about twenty +days returned again, freighted with all necessary provisions for our +voyage, and for a long time; and, as I say, we had a great deal of other +goods: he brought us back about three-and-thirty thousand pieces of eight, +and some diamonds, which, though William did not pretend to much skill in, +yet he made shift to act so as not to be imposed upon, the merchants he had +to deal with, too, being very fair men. + +They had no difficulty at all with these merchants, for the prospect they +had of gain made them not at all inquisitive, nor did they make the least +discovery of the sloop; and as to the selling them spices which were +fetched so far from thence, it seems it was not so much a novelty there as +we believed, for the Portuguese had frequently vessels which came from +Macao in China, who brought spices, which they bought of the Chinese +traders, who again frequently dealt among the Dutch Spice Islands, and +received spices in exchange for such goods as they carried from China. + +This might be called, indeed, the only trading voyage we had made; and now +we were really very rich, and it came now naturally before us to consider +whither we should go next. Our proper delivery port, as we ought to have +called it, was at Madagascar, in the Bay of Mangahelly; but William took me +by myself into the cabin of the sloop one day, and told me he wanted to +talk seriously with me a little; so we shut ourselves in, and William began +with me. + +"Wilt thou give me leave," says William, "to talk plainly with thee upon +thy present circumstances, and thy future prospect of living? and wilt thou +promise, on thy word, to take nothing ill of me?" + +"With all my heart," said I. "William, I have always found your advice +good, and your designs have not only been well laid, but your counsel has +been very lucky to us; and, therefore, say what you will, I promise you I +will not take it ill." + +"But that is not all my demand," says William; "if thou dost not like what +I am going to propose to thee, thou shalt promise me not to make it public +among the men." + +"I will not, William," says I, "upon my word;" and swore to him, too, very +heartily. + +"Why, then," says William, "I have but one thing more to article with thee +about, and that is, that thou wilt consent that if thou dost not approve of +it for thyself, thou wilt yet consent that I shall put so much of it in +practice as relates to myself and my new comrade doctor, so that it be +nothing to thy detriment and loss." + +"In anything," says I, "William, but leaving me, I will; but I cannot part +with you upon any terms whatever." + +"Well," says William, "I am not designing to part from thee, unless it is +thy own doing. But assure me in all these points, and I will tell my mind +freely." + +So I promised him everything he desired of me in the solemnest manner +possible, and so seriously and frankly withal, that William made no scruple +to open his mind to me. + +"Why, then, in the first place," says William, "shall I ask thee if thou +dost not think thou and all thy men are rich enough, and have really gotten +as much wealth together (by whatsoever way it has been gotten, that is not +the question) as we all know what to do with?" + +"Why, truly, William," said I, "thou art pretty right; I think we have had +pretty good luck." + +"Well, then," says William, "I would ask whether, if thou hast gotten +enough, thou hast any thought of leaving off this trade; for most people +leave off trading when they are satisfied of getting, and are rich enough; +for nobody trades for the sake of trading; much less do men rob for the +sake of thieving." + +"Well, William," says I, "now I perceive what it is thou art driving at. I +warrant you," says I, "you begin to hanker after home." + +"Why, truly," says William, "thou hast said it, and so I hope thou dost +too. It is natural for most men that are abroad to desire to come home +again at last, especially when they are grown rich, and when they are (as +thou ownest thyself to be) rich enough, and so rich as they know not what +to do with more if they had it." + +"Well, William," said I, "but now you think you have laid your preliminary +at first so home that I should have nothing to say; that is, that when I +had got money enough, it would be natural to think of going home. But you +have not explained what you mean by home, and there you and I shall differ. +Why, man, I am at home; here is my habitation; I never had any other in my +lifetime; I was a kind of charity school boy; so that I can have no desire +of going anywhere for being rich or poor, for I have nowhere to go." + +"Why," says William, looking a little confused, "art not thou an +Englishman?" + +"Yes," says I, "I think so: you see I speak English; but I came out of +England a child, and never was in it but once since I was a man; and then I +was cheated and imposed upon, and used so ill that I care not if I never +see it more." + +"Why, hast thou no relations or friends there?" says he; "no acquaintance-- +none that thou hast any kindness or any remains of respect for?" + +"Not I, William," said I; "no more than I have in the court of the Geat +Mogul." + +"Nor any kindness for the country where thou wast born?" says William. + +"Not I, any more than for the island of Madagascar, nor so much neither; +for that has been a fortunate island to me more than once, as thou knowest, +William," said I. + +William was quite stunned at my discourse, and held his peace; and I said +to him, "Go on, William; what hast thou to say farther? for I hear you have +some project in your head," says I; "come, let's have it out." + +"Nay," says William, "thou hast put me to silence, and all I had to say is +overthrown; all my projects are come to nothing, and gone." + +"Well, but, William," said I, "let me hear what they were; for though it is +so that what I have to aim at does not look your way, and though I have no +relation, no friend, no acquaintance in England, yet I do not say I like +this roving, cruising life so well as never to give it over. Let me hear if +thou canst propose to me anything beyond it." + +"Certainly, friend," says William, very gravely, "there is something beyond +it;" and lifting up his hands, he seemed very much affected, and I thought +I saw tears stand in his eyes; but I, that was too hardened a wretch to be +moved with these things, laughed at him. "What!" says I, "you mean death, I +warrant you: don't you? That is beyond this trade. Why, when it comes, it +comes; then we are all provided for." + +"Ay," says William, "that is true; but it would be better that some things +were thought on before that came." + +"Thought on!" says I; "what signifies thinking of it? To think of death is +to die, and to be always thinking of it is to be all one's life long +a-dying. It is time enough to think of it when it comes." + +You will easily believe I was well qualified for a pirate that could talk +thus. But let me leave it upon record, for the remark of other hardened +rogues like myself,--my conscience gave me a pang that I never felt before +when I said, "What signifies thinking of it?" and told me I should one day +think of these words with a sad heart; but the time of my reflection was +not yet come; so I went on. + +Says William very seriously, "I must tell thee, friend, I am sorry to hear +thee talk so. They that never think of dying, often die without thinking of +it." + +I carried on the jesting way a while farther, and said, "Prithee, do not +talk of dying; how do we know we shall ever die?" and began to laugh. + +"I need not answer thee to that," says William; "it is not my place to +reprove thee, who art commander over me here; but I would rather thou +wouldst talk otherwise of death; it is a coarse thing." + +"Say anything to me, William," said I; "I will take it kindly." I began now +to be very much moved at his discourse. + +Says William (tears running down his face), "It is because men live as if +they were never to die, that so many die before they know how to live. But +it was not death that I meant when I said that there was something to be +thought of beyond this way of living." + +"Why, William," said I, "what was that?" + +"It was repentance," says he. + +"Why," says I, "did you ever know a pirate repent?" + +At this he startled a little, and returned, "At the gallows I have [known] +one before, and I hope thou wilt be the second." + +He spoke this very affectionately, with an appearance of concern for me. + +"Well, William," says I, "I thank you; and I am not so senseless of these +things, perhaps, as I make myself seem to be. But come, let me hear your +proposal." + +"My proposal," says William, "is for thy good as well as my own. We may put +an end to this kind of life, and repent; and I think the fairest occasion +offers for both, at this very time, that ever did, or ever will, or, +indeed, can happen again." + +"Look you, William," says I; "let me have your proposal for putting an end +to our present way of living first, for that is the case before us, and you +and I will talk of the other afterwards. I am not so insensible," said I, +"as you may think me to be. But let us get out of this hellish condition we +are in first." + +"Nay," says William, "thou art in the right there; we must never talk of +repenting while we continue pirates." + +"Well," says I, "William, that's what I meant; for if we must not reform, +as well as be sorry for what is done, I have no notion what repentance +means; indeed, at best I know little of the matter; but the nature of the +thing seems to tell me that the first step we have to take is to break off +this wretched course; and I'll begin there with you, with all my heart." + +I could see by his countenance that William was thoroughly pleased with the +offer; and if he had tears in-his eyes before, he had more now; but it was +from quite a different passion; for he was so swallowed up with joy he +could not speak. + +"Come, William," says I, "thou showest me plain enough thou hast an honest +meaning; dost thou think it practicable for us to put an end to our unhappy +way of living here, and get off?" + +"Yes," says he, "I think it very practicable for me; whether it is for thee +or no, that will depend upon thyself." + +"Well," says I, "I give you my word, that as I have commanded you all +along, from the time I first took you on board, so you shall command me +from this hour, and everything you direct me I'll do." + +"Wilt thou leave it all to me? Dost thou say this freely?" + +"Yes, William," said I, "freely; and I'll perform it faithfully." + +"Why, then," says William, "my scheme is this: We are now at the mouth of +the Gulf of Persia; we have sold so much of our cargo here at Surat, that +we have money enough; send me away for Bassorah with the sloop, laden with +the China goods we have on board, which will make another good cargo, and +I'll warrant thee I'll find means, among the English and Dutch merchants +there, to lodge a quantity of goods and money also as a merchant, so as we +will be able to have recourse to it again upon any occasion, and when I +come home we will contrive the rest; and, in the meantime, do you bring the +ship's crew to take a resolution to go to Madagascar as soon as I return." + +I told him I thought he need not go so far as Bassorah, but might run into +Gombroon, or to Ormuz, and pretend the same business. + +"No," says he, "I cannot act with the same freedom there, because the +Company's factories are there, and I may be laid hold of there on pretence +of interloping." + +"Well, but," said I, "you may go to Ormuz, then; for I am loth to part with +you so long as to go to the bottom of the Persian Gulf." He returned, that +I should leave it to him to do as he should see cause. + +We had taken a large sum of money at Surat, so that we had near a hundred +thousand pounds in money at our command, but on board the great ship we had +still a great deal more. + +I ordered him publicly to keep the money on board which he had, and to buy +up with it a quantity of ammunition, if he could get it, and so to furnish +us for new exploits; and, in the meantime, I resolved to get a quantity of +gold and some jewels, which I had on board the great ship, and place them +so that I might carry them off without notice as soon as he came back; and +so, according to William's directions, I left him to go the voyage, and I +went on board the great ship, in which we had indeed an immense treasure. + +We waited no less than two months for William's return, and indeed I began +to be very uneasy about William, sometimes thinking he had abandoned me, +and that he might have used the same artifice to have engaged the other men +to comply with him, and so they were gone away together; and it was but +three days before his return that I was just upon the point of resolving to +go away to Madagascar, and give him over; but the old surgeon, who mimicked +the Quaker and passed for the master of the sloop at Surat, persuaded me +against that, for which good advice and apparent faithfulness in what he +had been trusted with, I made him a party to my design, and he proved very +honest. + +At length William came back, to our inexpressible joy, and brought a great +many necessary things with him; as, particularly, he brought sixty barrels +of powder, some iron shot, and about thirty ton of lead; also he brought a +great deal of provisions; and, in a word, William gave me a public account +of his voyage, in the hearing of whoever happened to be upon the +quarter-deck, that no suspicions might be found about us. + +After all was done, William moved that he might go up again, and that I +would go with him; named several things which we had on board that he could +not sell there; and, particularly, told us he had been obliged to leave +several things there, the caravans being not come in; and that he had +engaged to come back again with goods. + +This was what I wanted. The men were eager for his going, and particularly +because he told them they might load the sloop back with rice and +provisions; but I seemed backward to going, when the old surgeon stood up +and persuaded me to go, and with many arguments pressed me to it; as, +particularly, if I did not go, there would be no order, and several of the +men might drop away, and perhaps betray all the rest; and that they should +not think it safe for the sloop to go again if I did not go; and to urge me +to it, he offered himself to go with me. + +Upon these considerations I seemed to be over-persuaded to go, and all the +company seemed to be better satisfied when I had consented; and, +accordingly, we took all the powder, lead, and iron out of the sloop into +the great ship, and all the other things that were for the ship's use, and +put in some bales of spices and casks or frails of cloves, in all about +seven ton, and some other goods, among the bales of which I had conveyed +all my private treasure, which, I assure you, was of no small value, and +away I went. + +At going off I called a council of all the officers in the ship to consider +in what place they should wait for me, and how long, and we appointed the +ship to stay eight-and-twenty days at a little island on the Arabian side +of the Gulf, and that, if the sloop did not come in that time, they should +sail to another island to the west of that place, and wait there fifteen +days more, and that then, if the sloop did not come, they should conclude +some accident must have happened, and the rendezvous should be at +Madagascar. + +Being thus resolved, we left the ship, which both William and I, and the +surgeon, never intended to see any more. We steered directly for the Gulf, +and through to Bassorah, or Balsara. This city of Balsara lies at some +distance from the place where our sloop lay, and the river not being very +safe, and we but ill acquainted with it, having but an ordinary pilot, we +went on shore at a village where some merchants live, and which is very +populous, for the sake of small vessels riding there. + +Here we stayed and traded three or four days, landing all our bales and +spices, and indeed the whole cargo that was of any considerable value, +which we chose to do rather than go up immediately to Balsara till the +project we had laid was put in execution. + +After we had bought several goods, and were preparing to buy several +others, the boat being on shore with twelve men, myself, William, the +surgeon, and one fourth man, whom we had singled out, we contrived to send +a Turk just at the dusk of the evening with a letter to the boatswain, and +giving the fellow a charge to run with all possible speed, we stood at a +small distance to observe the event. The contents of the letter were thus +written by the old doctor:-- + +"BOATSWAIN THOMAS,--We are all betrayed. For God's sake make off with the +boat, and get on board, or you are all lost. The captain, William the +Quaker, and George the reformade are seized and carried away: I am escaped +and hid, but cannot stir out; if I do I am a dead man. As soon as you are +on board cut or slip, and make sail for your lives. Adieu.--R.S." + +We stood undiscovered, as above, it being the dusk of the evening, and saw +the Turk deliver the letter, and in three minutes we saw all the men hurry +into the boat and put off, and no sooner were they on board than they took +the hint, as we supposed, for the next morning they were out of sight, and +we never heard tale or tidings of them since. + +We were now in a good place, and in very good circumstances, for we passed +for merchants of Persia. + +It is not material to record here what a mass of ill-gotten wealth we had +got together: it will be more to the purpose to tell you that I began to be +sensible of the crime of getting of it in such a manner as I had done; that +I had very little satisfaction in the possession of it; and, as I told +William, I had no expectation of keeping it, nor much desire; but, as I +said to him one day walking out into the fields near the town of Bassorah, +so I depended upon it that it would be the case, which you will hear +presently. + +We were perfectly secured at Bassorah, by having frighted away the rogues, +our comrades; and we had nothing to do but to consider how to convert our +treasure into things proper to make us look like merchants, as we were now +to be, and not like freebooters, as we really had been. + +We happened very opportunely here upon a Dutchman, who had travelled from +Bengal to Agra, the capital city of the Great Mogul, and from thence was +come to the coast of Malabar by land, and got shipping, somehow or other, +up the Gulf; and we found his design was to go up the great river to Bagdad +or Babylon, and so, by the caravan, to Aleppo and Scanderoon. As William +spoke Dutch, and was of an agreeable, insinuating behaviour, he soon got +acquainted with this Dutchman, and discovering our circumstances to one +another, we found he had considerable effects with him; and that he had +traded long in that country, and was making homeward to his own country; +and that he had servants with him; one an Armenian, whom he had taught to +speak Dutch, and who had something of his own, but had a mind to travel +into Europe; and the other a Dutch sailor, whom he had picked up by his +fancy, and reposed a great trust in him, and a very honest fellow he was. + +This Dutchman was very glad of an acquaintance, because he soon found that +we directed our thoughts to Europe also; and as he found we were encumbered +with goods only (for we let him know nothing of our money), he readily +offered us his assistance to dispose of as many of them as the place we +were in would put off, and his advice what to do with the rest. + +While this was doing, William and I consulted what to do with ourselves and +what we had; and first, we resolved we would never talk seriously of our +measures but in the open fields, where we were sure nobody could hear; so +every evening, when the sun began to decline and the air to be moderate we +walked out, sometimes this way, sometimes that, to consult of our affairs. + +I should have observed that we had new clothed ourselves here, after the +Persian manner, with long vests of silk, a gown or robe of English crimson +cloth, very fine and handsome, and had let our beards grow so after the +Persian manner that we passed for Persian merchants, in view only, though, +by the way, we could not understand or speak one word of the language of +Persia, or indeed of any other but English and Dutch; and of the latter I +understood very little. + +However, the Dutchman supplied all this for us; and as we had resolved to +keep ourselves as retired as we could, though there were several English +merchants upon the place, yet we never acquainted ourselves with one of +them, or exchanged a word with them; by which means we prevented their +inquiry of us now, or their giving any intelligence of us, if any news of +our landing here should happen to come, which, it was easy for us to know, +was possible enough, if any of our comrades fell into bad hands, or by many +accidents which we could not foresee. + +It was during my being here, for here we stayed near two months, that I +grew very thoughtful about my circumstances; not as to the danger, neither +indeed were we in any, but were entirely concealed and unsuspected; but I +really began to have other thoughts of myself, and of the world, than ever +I had before. + +William had struck so deep into my unthinking temper with hinting to me +that there was something beyond all this; that the present time was the +time of enjoyment, but that the time of account approached; that the work +that remained was gentler than the labour past, viz., repentance, and that +it was high time to think of it;--I say these, and such thoughts as these, +engrossed my hours, and, in a word, I grew very sad. + +As to the wealth I had, which was immensely great, it was all like dirt +under my feet; I had no value for it, no peace in the possession of it, no +great concern about me for the leaving of it. + +William had perceived my thoughts to be troubled and my mind heavy and +oppressed for some time; and one evening, in one of our cool walks, I began +with him about the leaving our effects. William was a wise and wary man, +and indeed all the prudentials of my conduct had for a long time been owing +to his advice, and so now all the methods for preserving our effects, and +even ourselves, lay upon him; and he had been telling me of some of the +measures he had been taking for our making homeward, and for the security +of our wealth, when I took him very short. "Why, William," says I, "dost +thou think we shall ever be able to reach Europe with all this cargo that +we have about us?" + +"Ay," says William, "without doubt, as well as other merchants with theirs, +as long as it is not publicly known what quantity or of what value our +cargo consists." + +"Why, William," says I, smiling, "do you think that if there is a God +above, as you have so long been telling me there is, and that we must give +an account to Him,--I say, do you think, if He be a righteous Judge, He +will let us escape thus with the plunder, as we may call it, of so many +innocent people, nay, I might say nations, and not call us to an account +for it before we can get to Europe, where we pretend to enjoy it?" + +William appeared struck and surprised at the question, and made no answer +for a great while; and I repeated the question, adding that it was not to +be expected. + +After a little pause, says William, "Thou hast started a very weighty +question, and I can make no positive answer to it; but I will state it +thus: first, it is true that, if we consider the justice of God, we have no +reason to expect any protection; but as the ordinary ways of Providence are +out of the common road of human affairs, so we may hope for mercy still +upon our repentance, and we know not how good He may be to us; so we are to +act as if we rather depended upon the last, I mean the merciful part, than +claimed the first, which must produce nothing but judgment and vengeance." + +"But hark ye, William," says I, "the nature of repentance, as you have +hinted once to me, included reformation; and we can never reform; how, +then, can we repent?" + +"Why can we never reform?" says William. + +"Because," said I, "we cannot restore what we have taken away by rapine and +spoil." + +"It is true," says William, "we never can do that, for we can never come to +the knowledge of the owners." + +"But what, then, must be done with our wealth," said I, "the effects of +plunder and rapine? If we keep it, we continue to be robbers and thieves; +and if we quit it we cannot do justice with it, for we cannot restore it to +the right owners." + +"Nay," says William, "the answer to it is short. To quit what we have, and +do it here, is to throw it away to those who have no claim to it, and to +divest ourselves of it, but to do no right with it; whereas we ought to +keep it carefully together, with a resolution to do what right with it we +are able; and who knows what opportunity Providence may put into our hands +to do justice, at least, to some of those we have injured? So we ought, at +least, to leave it to Him and go on. As it is, without doubt our present +business is to go to some place of safety, where we may wait His will." + +This resolution of William was very satisfying to me indeed, as, the truth +is, all he said, and at all times, was solid and good; and had not William +thus, as it were, quieted my mind, I think, verily, I was so alarmed at the +just reason I had to expect vengeance from Heaven upon me for my ill-gotten +wealth, that I should have run away from it as the devil's goods, that I +had nothing to do with, that did not belong to me, and that I had no right +to keep, and was in certain danger of being destroyed for. + +However, William settled my mind to more prudent steps than these, and I +concluded that I ought, however, to proceed to a place of safety, and leave +the event to God Almighty's mercy. But this I must leave upon record, that +I had from this time no joy of the wealth I had got. I looked upon it all +as stolen, and so indeed the greatest part of it was. I looked upon it as a +hoard of other men's goods, which I had robbed the innocent owners of, and +which I ought, in a word, to be hanged for here, and damned for hereafter. +And now, indeed, I began sincerely to hate myself for a dog; a wretch that +had been a thief and a murderer; a wretch that was in a condition which +nobody was ever in; for I had robbed, and though I had the wealth by me, +yet it was impossible I should ever make any restitution; and upon this +account it ran in my head that I could never repent, for that repentance +could not be sincere without restitution, and therefore must of necessity +be damned. There was no room for me to escape. I went about with my heart +full of these thoughts, little better than a distracted fellow; in short, +running headlong into the dreadfullest despair, and premeditating nothing +but how to rid myself out of the world; and, indeed, the devil, if such +things are of the devil's immediate doing, followed his work very close +with me, and nothing lay upon my mind for several days but to shoot myself +into the head with my pistol. + +I was all this while in a vagrant life, among infidels, Turks, pagans, and +such sort of people. I had no minister, no Christian to converse with but +poor William. He was my ghostly father or confessor, and he was all the +comfort I had. As for my knowledge of religion, you have heard my history. +You may suppose I had not much; and as for the Word of God, I do not +remember that I ever read a chapter in the Bible in my lifetime. I was +little Bob at Bussleton, and went to school to learn my Testament. + +However, it pleased God to make William the Quaker everything to me. Upon +this occasion, I took him out one evening, as usual, and hurried him away +into the fields with me, in more haste than ordinary; and there, in short, +I told him the perplexity of my mind, and under what terrible temptations +of the devil I had been; that I must shoot myself, for I could not support +the weight and terror that was upon me. + +"Shoot yourself!" says William; "why, what will that do for you?" + +"Why," says I, "it will put an end to a miserable life." + +"Well," says William, "are you satisfied the next will be better?" + +"No, no," says I; "much worse, to be sure." + +"Why, then," says he, "shooting yourself is the devil's motion, no doubt; +for it is the devil of a reason, that, because thou art in an ill case, +therefore thou must put thyself into a worse." + +This shocked my reason indeed. "Well, but," says I, "there is no bearing +the miserable condition I am in." + +"Very well," says William; "but it seems there is some bearing a worse +condition; and so you will shoot yourself, that you may be past remedy?" + +"I am past remedy already," says I. + +"How do you know that?" says he. + +"I am satisfied of it," said I. + +"Well," says he, "but you are not sure; so you will shoot yourself to make +it certain; for though on this side death you cannot be sure you will be +damned at all, yet the moment you step on the other side of time you are +sure of it; for when it is done, it is not to be said then that you will +be, but that you are damned." + +"Well, but," says William, as if he had been between jest and earnest, +"pray, what didst thou dream of last night?" + +"Why," said I, "I had frightful dreams all night; and, particularly, I +dreamed that the devil came for me, and asked me what my name was; and I +told him. Then he asked me what trade I was. 'Trade?' says I; 'I am a +thief, a rogue, by my calling: I am a pirate and a murderer, and ought to +be hanged.' 'Ay, ay,' says the devil, 'so you do; and you are the man I +looked for, and therefore come along with me.' At which I was most horribly +frighted, and cried out so that it waked me; and I have been in horrible +agony ever since." + +"Very well," says William; "come, give me the pistol thou talkedst of just +now." + +"Why," says I, "what will you do with it?" + +"Do with it!" says William. "Why, thou needest not shoot thyself; I shall +be obliged to do it for thee. Why, thou wilt destroy us all." + +"What do you mean, William?" said I. + +"Mean!" said he; "nay, what didst thou mean, to cry out aloud in thy sleep, +'I am a thief, a pirate, a murderer, and ought to be hanged'? Why, thou +wilt ruin us all. 'Twas well the Dutchman did not understand English. In +short, I must shoot thee, to save my own life. Come, come," says he, "give +me thy pistol." + +I confess this terrified me again another way, and I began to be sensible +that, if anybody had been near me to understand English, I had been undone. +The thought of shooting myself forsook me from that time; and I turned to +William, "You disorder me extremely, William," said I; "why, I am never +safe, nor is it safe to keep me company. What shall I do? I shall betray +you all." + +"Come, come, friend Bob," says he, "I'll put an end to it all, if you will +take my advice." + +"How's that?" said I. + +"Why, only," says he, "that the next time thou talkest with the devil, thou +wilt talk a little softlier, or we shall be all undone, and you too." + +This frighted me, I must confess, and allayed a great deal of the trouble +of mind I was in. But William, after he had done jesting with me, entered +upon a very long and serious discourse with me about the nature of my +circumstances, and about repentance; that it ought to be attended, indeed, +with a deep abhorrence of the crime that I had to charge myself with; but +that to despair of God's mercy was no part of repentance, but putting +myself into the condition of the devil; indeed, that I must apply myself +with a sincere, humble confession of my crime, to ask pardon of God, whom I +had offended, and cast myself upon His mercy, resolving to be willing to +make restitution, if ever it should please God to put it in my power, even +to the utmost of what I had in the world. And this, he told me, was the +method which he had resolved upon himself; and in this, he told me, he had +found comfort. + +I had a great deal of satisfaction in William's discourse, and it quieted +me very much; but William was very anxious ever after about my talking in +my sleep, and took care to lie with me always himself, and to keep me from +lodging in any house where so much as a word of English was understood. + +However, there was not the like occasion afterward; for I was much more +composed in my mind, and resolved for the future to live a quite different +life from what I had done. As to the wealth I had, I looked upon it as +nothing; I resolved to set it apart to any such opportunity of doing +justice as God should put into my hand; and the miraculous opportunity I +had afterwards of applying some parts of it to preserve a ruined family, +whom I had plundered, may be worth reading, if I have room for it in this +account. + +With these resolutions I began to be restored to some degree of quiet in my +mind; and having, after almost three months' stay at Bassorah, disposed of +some goods, but having a great quantity left, we hired boats according to +the Dutchman's direction, and went up to Bagdad, or Babylon, on the river +Tigris, or rather Euphrates. We had a very considerable cargo of goods with +us, and therefore made a great figure there, and were received with +respect. We had, in particular, two-and-forty bales of Indian stuffs of +sundry sorts, silks, muslins, and fine chintz; we had fifteen bales of very +fine China silks, and seventy packs or bales of spices, particularly cloves +and nutmegs, with other goods. We were bid money here for our cloves, but +the Dutchman advised us not to part with them, and told us we should get a +better price at Aleppo, or in the Levant; so we prepared for the caravan. + +We concealed our having any gold or pearls as much as we could, and +therefore sold three or four bales of China silks and Indian calicoes, to +raise money to buy camels and to pay the customs which are taken at several +places, and for our provisions over the deserts. + +I travelled this journey, careless to the last degree of my goods or +wealth, believing that, as I came by it all by rapine and violence, God +would direct that it should be taken from me again in the same manner; and, +indeed, I think I might say I was very willing it should be so. But, as I +had a merciful Protector above me, so I had a most faithful steward, +counsellor, partner, or whatever I might call him, who was my guide, my +pilot, my governor, my everything, and took care both of me and of all we +had; and though he had never been in any of these parts of the world, yet +he took the care of all upon him; and in about nine-and-fifty days we +arrived from Bassorah, at the mouth of the river Tigris or Euphrates, +through the desert, and through Aleppo to Alexandria, or, as we call it, +Scanderoon, in the Levant. + +Here William and I, and the other two, our faithful comrades, debated what +we should do; and here William and I resolved to separate from the other +two, they resolving to go with the Dutchman into Holland, by the means of +some Dutch ship which lay then in the road. William and I told them we +resolved to go and settle in the Morea, which then belonged to the +Venetians. + +It is true we acted wisely in it not to let them know whither we went, +seeing we had resolved to separate; but we took our old doctor's directions +how to write to him in Holland, and in England, that we might have +intelligence from him on occasion, and promised to give him an account how +to write to us, which we afterwards did, as may in time be made out. + +We stayed here some time after they were gone, till at length, not being +thoroughly resolved whither to go till then, a Venetian ship touched at +Cyprus, and put in at Scanderoon to look for freight home. We took the +hint, and bargaining for our passage, and the freight of our goods, we +embarked for Venice, where, in two-and-twenty days, we arrived safe, with +all our treasure, and with such a cargo, take our goods and our money and +our jewels together, as, I believed, was never brought into the city by two +single men, since the state of Venice had a being. + +We kept ourselves here _incognito_ for a great while, passing for two +Armenian merchants still, as we had done before; and by this time we had +gotten so much of the Persian and Armenian jargon, which they talked at +Bassorah and Bagdad, and everywhere that we came in the country, as was +sufficient to make us able to talk to one another, so as not to be +understood by anybody, though sometimes hardly by ourselves. + +Here we converted all our effects into money, settled our abode as for a +considerable time, and William and I, maintaining an inviolable friendship +and fidelity to one another, lived like two brothers; we neither had or +sought any separate interest; we conversed seriously and gravely, and upon +the subject of our repentance continually; we never changed, that is to +say, so as to leave off our Armenian garbs; and we were called, at Venice, +the two Grecians. + +I had been two or three times going to give a detail of our wealth, but it +will appear incredible, and we had the greatest difficulty in the world how +to conceal it, being justly apprehensive lest we might be assassinated in +that country for our treasure. At length William told me he began to think +now that he must never see England any more, and that indeed he did not +much concern himself about it; but seeing we had gained so great wealth, +and he had some poor relations in England, if I was willing, he would write +to know if they were living, and to know what condition they were in, and +if he found such of them were alive as he had some thoughts about, he +would, with my consent, send them something to better their condition. + +I consented most willingly; and accordingly William wrote to a sister and +an uncle, and in about five weeks' time received an answer from them both, +directed to himself, under cover of a hard Armenian name that he had given +himself, viz., Signore Constantine Alexion of Ispahan, at Venice. + +It was a very moving letter he received from his sister, who, after the +most passionate expressions of joy to hear he was alive, seeing she had +long ago had an account that he was murdered by the pirates in the West +Indies, entreats him to let her know what circumstances he was in; tells +him she was not in any capacity to do anything considerable for him, but +that he should be welcome to her with all her heart; that she was left a +widow, with four children, but kept a little shop in the Minories, by which +she made shift to maintain her family; and that she had sent him five +pounds, lest he should want money, in a strange country, to bring him home. + +I could see the letter brought tears out of his eyes as he read it; and, +indeed, when he showed it to me, and the little bill for five pounds, upon +an English merchant in Venice, it brought tears out of my eyes too. + +After we had been both affected sufficiently with the tenderness and +kindness of this letter, he turns to me; says he, "What shall I do for this +poor woman?" I mused a while; at last says I, "I will tell you what you +shall do for her. She has sent you five pounds, and she has four children, +and herself, that is five; such a sum, from a poor woman in her +circumstances, is as much as five thousand pounds is to us; you shall send +her a bill of exchange for five thousand pounds English money, and bid her +conceal her surprise at it till she hears from you again; but bid her leave +off her shop, and go and take a house somewhere in the country, not far off +from London, and stay there, in a moderate figure, till she hears from you +again." + +"Now," says William, "I perceive by it that you have some thoughts of +venturing into England." + +"Indeed, William," said I, "you mistake me; but it presently occurred to me +that you should venture, for what have you done that you may not be seen +there? Why should I desire to keep you from your relations, purely to keep +me company?" + +William looked very affectionately upon me. "Nay," says he, "we have +embarked together so long, and come together so far, I am resolved I will +never part with thee as long as I live, go where thou wilt, or stay where +thou wilt; and as for my sister," said William, "I cannot send her such a +sum of money, for whose is all this money we have? It is most of it thine." + +"No, William," said I, "there is not a penny of it mine but what is yours +too, and I won't have anything but an equal share with you, and therefore +you shall send it to her; if not, I will send it." + +"Why," says William, "it will make the poor woman distracted; she will be +so surprised she will go out of her wits." + +"Well," said I, "William, you may do it prudently; send her a bill backed +of a hundred pounds, and bid her expect more in a post or two, and that you +will send her enough to live on without keeping shop, and then send her +more." + +Accordingly William sent her a very kind letter, with a bill upon a +merchant in London for a hundred and sixty pounds, and bid her comfort +herself with the hope that he should be able in a little time to send her +more. About ten days after, he sent her another bill of five hundred and +forty pounds; and a post or two after, another for three hundred pounds, +making in all a thousand pounds; and told her he would send her sufficient +to leave off her shop, and directed her to take a house as above. + +He waited then till he received an answer to all the three letters, with an +account that she had received the money, and, which I did not expect, that +she had not let any other acquaintance know that she had received a +shilling from anybody, or so much as that he was alive, and would not till +she had heard again. + +When he showed me this letter, "Well, William," said I, "this woman is fit +to be trusted with life or anything; send her the rest of the five thousand +pounds, and I'll venture to England with you, to this woman's house, +whenever you will." + +In a word, we sent her five thousand pounds in good bills; and she received +them very punctually, and in a little time sent her brother word that she +had pretended to her uncle that she was sickly and could not carry on the +trade any longer, and that she had taken a large house about four miles +from London, under pretence of letting lodgings for her livelihood; and, in +short, intimated as if she understood that he intended to come over to be +_incognito_, assuring him he should be as retired as he pleased. + +This was opening the very door for us that we thought had been effectually +shut for this life; and, in a word, we resolved to venture, but to keep +ourselves entirely concealed, both as to name and every other circumstance; +and accordingly William sent his sister word how kindly he took her prudent +steps, and that she had guessed right that he desired to be retired, and +that he obliged her not to increase her figure, but live private, till she +might perhaps see him. + +He was going to send the letter away. "Come, William," said I, "you shan't +send her an empty letter; tell her you have a friend coming with you that +must be as retired as yourself, and I'll send her five thousand pounds +more." + +So, in short, we made this poor woman's family rich; and yet, when it came +to the point, my heart failed me, and I durst not venture; and for William, +he would not stir without me; and so we stayed about two years after this, +considering what we should do. + +You may think, perhaps, that I was very prodigal of my ill-gotten goods, +thus to load a stranger with my bounty, and give a gift like a prince to +one that had been able to merit nothing of me, or indeed know me; but my +condition ought to be considered in this case; though I had money to +profusion, yet I was perfectly destitute of a friend in the world, to have +the least obligation or assistance from, or knew not either where to +dispose or trust anything I had while I lived, or whom to give it to if I +died. + +When I had reflected upon the manner of my getting of it, I was sometimes +for giving it all to charitable uses, as a debt due to mankind, though I +was no Roman Catholic, and not at all of the opinion that it would purchase +me any repose to my soul; but I thought, as it was got by a general +plunder, and which I could make no satisfaction for, it was due to the +community, and I ought to distribute it for the general good. But still I +was at a loss how, and where, and by whom to settle this charity, not +daring to go home to my own country, lest some of my comrades, strolled +home, should see and detect me, and for the very spoil of my money, or the +purchase of his own pardon, betray and expose me to an untimely end. + +Being thus destitute, I say, of a friend, I pitched thus upon William's +sister; the kind step of hers to her brother, whom she thought to be in +distress, signifying a generous mind and a charitable disposition; and +having resolved to make her the object of my first bounty, I did not doubt +but I should purchase something of a refuge for myself, and a kind of a +centre, to which I should tend in my future actions; for really a man that +has a subsistence, and no residence, no place that has a magnetic influence +upon his affections, is in one of the most odd, uneasy conditions in the +world, nor is it in the power of all his money to make it up to him. + +It was, as I told you, two years and upwards that we remained at Venice and +thereabout, in the greatest hesitation imaginable, irresolute and unfixed +to the last degree. William's sister importuned us daily to come to +England, and wondered we should not dare to trust her, whom we had to such +a degree obliged to be faithful; and in a manner lamented her being +suspected by us. + +At last I began to incline; and I said to William, "Come, brother William," +said I (for ever since our discourse at Bassorah I called him brother), "if +you will agree to two or three things with me, I'll go home to England with +all my heart." + +Says William, "Let me know what they are." + +"Why, first," says I, "you shall not disclose yourself to any of your +relations in England but your sister--no, not one; secondly, we will not +shave off our mustachios or beards" (for we had all along worn our beards +after the Grecian manner), "nor leave off our long vests, that we may pass +for Grecians and foreigners; thirdly, that we shall never speak English in +public before anybody, your sister excepted; fourthly, that we will always +live together and pass for brothers." + +William said he would agree to them all with all his heart, but that the +not speaking English would be the hardest, but he would do his best for +that too; so, in a word, we agreed to go from Venice to Naples, where we +converted a large sum of money into bales of silk, left a large sum in a +merchant's hands at Venice, and another considerable sum at Naples, and +took bills of exchange for a great deal too; and yet we came with such a +cargo to London as few American merchants had done for some years, for we +loaded in two ships seventy-three bales of thrown silk, besides thirteen +bales of wrought silks, from the duchy of Milan, shipped at Genoa, with all +which I arrived safely; and some time after I married my faithful +protectress, William's sister, with whom I am much more happy than I +deserve. + +And now, having so plainly told you that I am come to England, after I have +so boldly owned what life I have led abroad, it is time to leave off, and +say no more for the present, lest some should be willing to inquire too +nicely after your old friend CAPTAIN BOB. + + + + +[Transcriber's Note: The words "thae" (Scottish dialect for "those") and +"Geat Mogul" ("Great" may be meant) do occur as such in the print copy.] + + + + + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Life, Adventures & Piracies of the +Famous Captain Singleton, by Daniel Defoe + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK CAPTAIN SINGLETON *** + +This file should be named cpsng10.txt or cpsng10.zip +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks get a new NUMBER, cpsng11.txt +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, cpsng10a.txt + +Produced by Tom Allen, Charles Franks +and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team. + +Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we usually do not +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance +of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing. +Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections, +even years after the official publication date. + +Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. + +Most people start at our Web sites at: +http://gutenberg.net or +http://promo.net/pg + +These Web sites include award-winning information about Project +Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new +eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!). + + +Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement +can get to them as follows, and just download by date. This is +also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the +indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an +announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter. + +http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext03 or +ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext03 + +Or /etext02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90 + +Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want, +as it appears in our Newsletters. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours +to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. Our +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If the value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text +files per month: 1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+ +We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002 +If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total +will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks! +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users. + +Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated): + +eBooks Year Month + + 1 1971 July + 10 1991 January + 100 1994 January + 1000 1997 August + 1500 1998 October + 2000 1999 December + 2500 2000 December + 3000 2001 November + 4000 2001 October/November + 6000 2002 December* + 9000 2003 November* +10000 2004 January* + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created +to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people +and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut, +Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois, +Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts, +Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New +Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio, +Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South +Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West +Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming. + +We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones +that have responded. + +As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list +will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states. +Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state. + +In answer to various questions we have received on this: + +We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally +request donations in all 50 states. If your state is not listed and +you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have, +just ask. + +While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are +not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting +donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to +donate. + +International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about +how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made +deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are +ways. + +Donations by check or money order may be sent to: + +Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +PMB 113 +1739 University Ave. +Oxford, MS 38655-4109 + +Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment +method other than by check or money order. + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by +the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN +[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154. Donations are +tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law. As fund-raising +requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be +made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +You can get up to date donation information online at: + +http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html + + +*** + +If you can't reach Project Gutenberg, +you can always email directly to: + +Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com> + +Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message. + +We would prefer to send you information by email. + + +**The Legal Small Print** + + +(Three Pages) + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks, +is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart +through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project"). +Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook +under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market +any commercial products without permission. + +To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may +receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims +all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation, +and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated +with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including +legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the +following that you do or cause: [1] distribution of this eBook, +[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook, +or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + eBook or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word + processing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the eBook (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the + gross profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation" + the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were + legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent + periodic) tax return. Please contact us beforehand to + let us know your plans and to work out the details. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of +public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed +in machine readable form. + +The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time, +public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses. +Money should be paid to the: +"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or +software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at: +hart@pobox.com + +[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only +when distributed free of all fees. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by +Michael S. Hart. Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be +used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be +they hardware or software or any other related product without +express permission.] + +*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END* + diff --git a/old/cpsng10.zip b/old/cpsng10.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..145e32a --- /dev/null +++ b/old/cpsng10.zip |